diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6')
385 files changed, 3121 insertions, 26951 deletions
diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/links.txt b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/links.txt index 18a6b291..50e791d3 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/links.txt +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/links.txt @@ -55,9 +55,6 @@ man1/joe.1.gz man1/jpico.1.gz man1/joe.1.gz man1/jstar.1.gz man1/joe.1.gz man1/rjoe.1.gz man5/modules.dep.5.gz man5/modules.dep.bin.5.gz -man3/uuid_generate_random.3.gz man3/uuid_generate_time.3.gz -man3/uuid_generate_random.3.gz man3/uuid_generate_time_safe.3.gz -uuid_generate.3.gz man3/uuid_generate_random.3.gz man1/lz4.1.gz man1/lz4c.1.gz man1/lz4.1.gz man1/lz4cat.1.gz man1/lz4.1.gz man1/unlz4.1.gz @@ -882,29 +879,11 @@ man8/in.ntalkd.8.gz man8/ntalkd.8.gz man8/in.talkd.8.gz man8/talkd.8.gz man1/texi2pdf.1.gz man1/pdftexi2dvi.1.gz man1/texi2dvi.1.gz man1/texi2pdf.1.gz -last.1.gz man1/lastb.1.gz -swapon.8.gz man8/swapoff.8.gz man2/ioctl_xfs_fsgetxattr.2.gz man2/ioctl_xfs_fsgetxattra.2.gz man2/ioctl_xfs_fsgetxattr.2.gz man2/ioctl_xfs_fssetxattr.2.gz man2/ioctl_xfs_getbmapx.2.gz man2/ioctl_xfs_getbmap.2.gz man2/ioctl_xfs_getbmapx.2.gz man2/ioctl_xfs_getbmapa.2.gz man2/ioctl_xfs_getresblks.2.gz man2/ioctl_xfs_setresblks.2.gz -man1/xz.1.gz man1/lzcat.1.gz -man1/xzdiff.1.gz man1/lzcmp.1.gz -man1/xzdiff.1.gz man1/lzdiff.1.gz -man1/xzgrep.1.gz man1/lzegrep.1.gz -man1/xzgrep.1.gz man1/lzfgrep.1.gz -man1/xzgrep.1.gz man1/lzgrep.1.gz -man1/xzless.1.gz man1/lzless.1.gz -man1/xz.1.gz man1/lzma.1.gz -man1/xzdec.1.gz man1/lzmadec.1.gz -man1/xzmore.1.gz man1/lzmore.1.gz -man1/xz.1.gz man1/unlzma.1.gz -man1/xz.1.gz man1/unxz.1.gz -man1/xz.1.gz man1/xzcat.1.gz -man1/xzdiff.1.gz man1/xzcmp.1.gz -man1/xzgrep.1.gz man1/xzegrep.1.gz -man1/xzgrep.1.gz man1/xzfgrep.1.gz man1/zstd.1.gz man1/unzstd.1.gz man1/zstd.1.gz man1/zstdcat.1.gz /usr/share/man/man1/bash.1.gz man1/bashbuiltins.1.gz diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/arch.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/arch.1 index 5de30721..dcdca9a2 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/arch.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/arch.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH ARCH "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH ARCH "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME arch \- print machine hardware name (same as uname -m) .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/b2sum.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/b2sum.1 index bff0f7ac..753a0032 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/b2sum.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/b2sum.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH B2SUM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH B2SUM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME b2sum \- compute and check BLAKE2 message digest .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/base32.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/base32.1 index 62e7d14a..7e824f7f 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/base32.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/base32.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH BASE32 "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH BASE32 "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME base32 \- base32 encode/decode data and print to standard output .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/base64.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/base64.1 index fabcfeac..7b371fec 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/base64.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/base64.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH BASE64 "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH BASE64 "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME base64 \- base64 encode/decode data and print to standard output .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/basename.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/basename.1 index 370896f1..dd44de40 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/basename.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/basename.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH BASENAME "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH BASENAME "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME basename \- strip directory and suffix from filenames .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/basenc.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/basenc.1 index 69c13c19..cf16d685 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/basenc.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/basenc.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH BASENC "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH BASENC "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME basenc \- Encode/decode data and print to standard output .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cal.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cal.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b00683c5..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cal.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: cal -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CAL" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -cal \- display a calendar -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBcal\fP [options] [[[\fIday\fP] \fImonth\fP] \fIyear\fP] -.sp -\fBcal\fP [options] [\fItimestamp\fP|\fImonthname\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBcal\fP displays a simple calendar. If no arguments are specified, the current month is displayed. -.sp -The \fImonth\fP may be specified as a number (1\-12), as a month name or as an abbreviated month name according to the current locales. -.sp -Two different calendar systems are used, Gregorian and Julian. These are nearly identical systems with Gregorian making a small adjustment to the frequency of leap years; this facilitates improved synchronization with solar events like the equinoxes. The Gregorian calendar reform was introduced in 1582, but its adoption continued up to 1923. By default \fBcal\fP uses the adoption date of 3 Sept 1752. From that date forward the Gregorian calendar is displayed; previous dates use the Julian calendar system. 11 days were removed at the time of adoption to bring the calendar in sync with solar events. So Sept 1752 has a mix of Julian and Gregorian dates by which the 2nd is followed by the 14th (the 3rd through the 13th are absent). -.sp -Optionally, either the proleptic Gregorian calendar or the Julian calendar may be used exclusively. See \fB\-\-reform\fP below. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-1\fP, \fB\-\-one\fP -.RS 4 -Display single month output. (This is the default.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-3\fP, \fB\-\-three\fP -.RS 4 -Display three months spanning the date. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n , \-\-months\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Display \fInumber\fP of months, starting from the month containing the date. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S, \-\-span\fP -.RS 4 -Display months spanning the date. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-sunday\fP -.RS 4 -Display Sunday as the first day of the week. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-monday\fP -.RS 4 -Display Monday as the first day of the week. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-vertical\fP -.RS 4 -Display using a vertical layout (aka \fBncal\fP(1) mode). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-iso\fP -.RS 4 -Display the proleptic Gregorian calendar exclusively. This option does not affect week numbers and the first day of the week. See \fB\-\-reform\fP below. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-j\fP, \fB\-\-julian\fP -.RS 4 -Use day\-of\-year numbering for all calendars. These are also called ordinal days. Ordinal days range from 1 to 366. This option does not switch from the Gregorian to the Julian calendar system, that is controlled by the \fB\-\-reform\fP option. -.sp -Sometimes Gregorian calendars using ordinal dates are referred to as Julian calendars. This can be confusing due to the many date related conventions that use Julian in their name: (ordinal) julian date, julian (calendar) date, (astronomical) julian date, (modified) julian date, and more. This option is named julian, because ordinal days are identified as julian by the POSIX standard. However, be aware that \fBcal\fP also uses the Julian calendar system. See \fBDESCRIPTION\fP above. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-reform\fP \fIval\fP -.RS 4 -This option sets the adoption date of the Gregorian calendar reform. Calendar dates previous to reform use the Julian calendar system. Calendar dates after reform use the Gregorian calendar system. The argument \fIval\fP can be: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -\fI1752\fP \- sets 3 September 1752 as the reform date (default). This is when the Gregorian calendar reform was adopted by the British Empire. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -\fIgregorian\fP \- display Gregorian calendars exclusively. This special placeholder sets the reform date below the smallest year that \fBcal\fP can use; meaning all calendar output uses the Gregorian calendar system. This is called the proleptic Gregorian calendar, because dates prior to the calendar system\(cqs creation use extrapolated values. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -\fIiso\fP \- alias of \fIgregorian\fP. The ISO 8601 standard for the representation of dates and times in information interchange requires using the proleptic Gregorian calendar. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -\fIjulian\fP \- display Julian calendars exclusively. This special placeholder sets the reform date above the largest year that \fBcal\fP can use; meaning all calendar output uses the Julian calendar system. -.RE -.RE -.sp -See \fBDESCRIPTION\fP above. -.sp -\fB\-y\fP, \fB\-\-year\fP -.RS 4 -Display a calendar for the whole year. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-Y, \-\-twelve\fP -.RS 4 -Display a calendar for the next twelve months. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-week\fP[=\fInumber\fP] -.RS 4 -Display week numbers in the calendar (US or ISO\-8601). See NOTES section for more details. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-color\fP[=\fIwhen\fP] -.RS 4 -Colorize the output. The optional argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. If the \fIwhen\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBauto\fP. The colors can be disabled; for the current built\-in default see the \fB\-\-help\fP output. See also the \fBCOLORS\fP section. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "PARAMETERS" -.sp -\fBSingle digits\-only parameter (e.g., \(aqcal 2020\(aq)\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the \fIyear\fP to be displayed; note the year must be fully specified: \fBcal 89\fP will not display a calendar for 1989. -.RE -.sp -\fBSingle string parameter (e.g., \(aqcal tomorrow\(aq or \(aqcal August\(aq)\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies \fItimestamp\fP or a \fImonth name\fP (or abbreviated name) according to the current locales. -.sp -The special placeholders are accepted when parsing timestamp, "now" may be used to refer to the current time, "today", "yesterday", "tomorrow" refer to of the current day, the day before or the next day, respectively. -.sp -The relative date specifications are also accepted, in this case "+" is evaluated to the current time plus the specified time span. Correspondingly, a time span that is prefixed with "\-" is evaluated to the current time minus the specified time span, for example \(aq+2days\(aq. Instead of prefixing the time span with "+" or "\-", it may also be suffixed with a space and the word "left" or "ago" (for example \(aq1 week ago\(aq). -.RE -.sp -\fBTwo parameters (e.g., \(aqcal 11 2020\(aq)\fP -.RS 4 -Denote the \fImonth\fP (1 \- 12) and \fIyear\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBThree parameters (e.g., \(aqcal 25 11 2020\(aq)\fP -.RS 4 -Denote the \fIday\fP (1\-31), \fImonth and year\fP, and the day will be highlighted if the calendar is displayed on a terminal. If no parameters are specified, the current month\(cqs calendar is displayed. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -A year starts on January 1. The first day of the week is determined by the locale or the \fB\-\-sunday\fP and \fB\-\-monday\fP options. -.sp -The week numbering depends on the choice of the first day of the week. If it is Sunday then the customary North American numbering is used, where 1 January is in week number 1. If it is Monday (\fB\-m\fP) then the ISO 8601 standard week numbering is used, where the first Thursday is in week number 1. -.SH "COLORS" -.sp -Implicit coloring can be disabled as follows: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBtouch /etc/terminal\-colors.d/cal.disable\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -See \fBterminal\-colors.d\fP(5) for more details about colorization configuration. -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -A \fBcal\fP command appeared in Version 6 AT&T UNIX. -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -The default \fBcal\fP output uses 3 September 1752 as the Gregorian calendar reform date. The historical reform dates for the other locales, including its introduction in October 1582, are not implemented. -.sp -Alternative calendars, such as the Umm al\-Qura, the Solar Hijri, the Ge\(cqez, or the lunisolar Hindu, are not supported. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBcal\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cat.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cat.1 index 962e3c4c..d4195d02 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cat.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cat.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH CAT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH CAT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME cat \- concatenate files and print on the standard output .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chcon.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chcon.1 index f4d64a56..b088788b 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chcon.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chcon.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH CHCON "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH CHCON "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME chcon \- change file security context .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chgrp.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chgrp.1 index 944e7eee..ae6f0e6c 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chgrp.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chgrp.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH CHGRP "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH CHGRP "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME chgrp \- change group ownership .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chmod.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chmod.1 index 4bd4a2c3..3711c757 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chmod.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chmod.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH CHMOD "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH CHMOD "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME chmod \- change file mode bits .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/choom.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/choom.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f4533850..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/choom.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: choom -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CHOOM" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -choom \- display and adjust OOM\-killer score. -.sp -\fBchoom\fP \fB\-p\fP \fIPID\fP -.sp -\fBchoom\fP \fB\-p\fP \fIPID\fP \fB\-n\fP \fInumber\fP -.sp -\fBchoom\fP \fB\-n\fP \fInumber\fP [\-\-] \fIcommand\fP [\fIargument\fP ...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBchoom\fP command displays and adjusts Out\-Of\-Memory killer score setting. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP \fIpid\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies process ID. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-adjust\fP \fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the adjust score value. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Linux kernel uses the badness heuristic to select which process gets killed in out of memory conditions. -.sp -The badness heuristic assigns a value to each candidate task ranging from 0 (never kill) to 1000 (always kill) to determine which process is targeted. The units are roughly a proportion along that range of allowed memory the process may allocate from based on an estimation of its current memory and swap use. For example, if a task is using all allowed memory, its badness score will be 1000. If it is using half of its allowed memory, its score will be 500. -.sp -There is an additional factor included in the badness score: the current memory and swap usage is discounted by 3% for root processes. -.sp -The amount of "allowed" memory depends on the context in which the oom killer was called. If it is due to the memory assigned to the allocating task\(cqs cpuset being exhausted, the allowed memory represents the set of mems assigned to that cpuset. If it is due to a mempolicy\(cqs node(s) being exhausted, the allowed memory represents the set of mempolicy nodes. If it is due to a memory limit (or swap limit) being reached, the allowed memory is that configured limit. Finally, if it is due to the entire system being out of memory, the allowed memory represents all allocatable resources. -.sp -The adjust score value is added to the badness score before it is used to determine which task to kill. Acceptable values range from \-1000 to +1000. This allows userspace to polarize the preference for oom killing either by always preferring a certain task or completely disabling it. The lowest possible value, \-1000, is equivalent to disabling oom killing entirely for that task since it will always report a badness score of 0. -.sp -Setting an adjust score value of +500, for example, is roughly equivalent to allowing the remainder of tasks sharing the same system, cpuset, mempolicy, or memory controller resources to use at least 50% more memory. A value of \-500, on the other hand, would be roughly equivalent to discounting 50% of the task\(cqs allowed memory from being considered as scoring against the task. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBproc\fP(5) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBchoom\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chown.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chown.1 index 31200c7d..af5fae2b 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chown.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chown.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH CHOWN "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH CHOWN "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME chown \- change file owner and group .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chroot.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chroot.1 index 1b86446a..f644516d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chroot.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chroot.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH CHROOT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH CHROOT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME chroot \- run command or interactive shell with special root directory .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chrt.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chrt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f2262137..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/chrt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,192 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: chrt -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CHRT" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -chrt \- manipulate the real\-time attributes of a process -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBchrt\fP [options] \fIpriority command argument\fP ... -.sp -\fBchrt\fP [options] \fB\-p\fP [\fIpriority\fP] \fIPID\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBchrt\fP sets or retrieves the real\-time scheduling attributes of an existing \fIPID\fP, or runs \fIcommand\fP with the given attributes. -.SH "POLICIES" -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-other\fP -.RS 4 -Set scheduling policy to \fBSCHED_OTHER\fP (time\-sharing scheduling). This is the default Linux scheduling policy. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-fifo\fP -.RS 4 -Set scheduling policy to \fBSCHED_FIFO\fP (first in\-first out). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-rr\fP -.RS 4 -Set scheduling policy to \fBSCHED_RR\fP (round\-robin scheduling). When no policy is defined, the \fBSCHED_RR\fP is used as the default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-batch\fP -.RS 4 -Set scheduling policy to \fBSCHED_BATCH\fP (scheduling batch processes). Linux\-specific, supported since 2.6.16. The priority argument has to be set to zero. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-idle\fP -.RS 4 -Set scheduling policy to \fBSCHED_IDLE\fP (scheduling very low priority jobs). Linux\-specific, supported since 2.6.23. The priority argument has to be set to zero. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-deadline\fP -.RS 4 -Set scheduling policy to \fBSCHED_DEADLINE\fP (sporadic task model deadline scheduling). Linux\-specific, supported since 3.14. The priority argument has to be set to zero. See also \fB\-\-sched\-runtime\fP, \fB\-\-sched\-deadline\fP and \fB\-\-sched\-period\fP. The relation between the options required by the kernel is runtime \(lA deadline \(lA period. \fBchrt\fP copies \fIperiod\fP to \fIdeadline\fP if \fB\-\-sched\-deadline\fP is not specified and \fIdeadline\fP to \fIruntime\fP if \fB\-\-sched\-runtime\fP is not specified. It means that at least \fB\-\-sched\-period\fP has to be specified. See \fBsched\fP(7) for more details. -.RE -.SH "SCHEDULING OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-sched\-runtime\fP \fInanoseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies runtime parameter for \fBSCHED_DEADLINE\fP policy (Linux\-specific). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-sched\-period\fP \fInanoseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies period parameter for \fBSCHED_DEADLINE\fP policy (Linux\-specific). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-sched\-deadline\fP \fInanoseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies deadline parameter for \fBSCHED_DEADLINE\fP policy (Linux\-specific). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-reset\-on\-fork\fP -.RS 4 -Use \fBSCHED_RESET_ON_FORK\fP or \fBSCHED_FLAG_RESET_ON_FORK\fP flag. Linux\-specific, supported since 2.6.31. -.RE -.sp -Each thread has a \fIreset\-on\-fork\fP scheduling flag. When this flag is set, children created by \fBfork\fP(2) do not inherit privileged scheduling policies. After the \fIreset\-on\-fork\fP flag has been enabled, it can be reset only if the thread has the \fBCAP_SYS_NICE\fP capability. This flag is disabled in child processes created by \fBfork\fP(2). -.sp -More precisely, if the \fIreset\-on\-fork\fP flag is set, the following rules apply for subsequently created children: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -If the calling thread has a scheduling policy of \fBSCHED_FIFO\fP or \fBSCHED_RR\fP, the policy is reset to \fBSCHED_OTHER\fP in child processes. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -If the calling process has a negative nice value, the nice value is reset to zero in child processes. -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\-tasks\fP -.RS 4 -Set or retrieve the scheduling attributes of all the tasks (threads) for a given PID. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-max\fP -.RS 4 -Show minimum and maximum valid priorities, then exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP -.RS 4 -Operate on an existing PID and do not launch a new task. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Show status information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "USAGE" -.sp -The default behavior is to run a new command: -.RS 4 -\fBchrt\fP \fIpriority\fP \fIcommand\fP [\fIarguments\fP] -.RE -.sp -You can also retrieve the real\-time attributes of an existing task: -.RS 4 -\fBchrt \-p\fP \fIPID\fP -.RE -.sp -Or set them: -.RS 4 -\fBchrt \-r \-p\fP \fIpriority PID\fP -.RE -.SH "PERMISSIONS" -.sp -A user must possess \fBCAP_SYS_NICE\fP to change the scheduling attributes of a process. Any user can retrieve the scheduling information. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Only \fBSCHED_FIFO\fP, \fBSCHED_OTHER\fP and \fBSCHED_RR\fP are part of POSIX 1003.1b Process Scheduling. The other scheduling attributes may be ignored on some systems. -.sp -Linux\(aq default scheduling policy is \fBSCHED_OTHER\fP. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "rml\(attech9.net" "Robert Love" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBnice\fP(1), -\fBrenice\fP(1), -\fBtaskset\fP(1), -\fBsched\fP(7) -.sp -See \fBsched_setscheduler\fP(2) for a description of the Linux scheduling scheme. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBchrt\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cksum.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cksum.1 index 04e1826b..b80ad2d1 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cksum.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cksum.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH CKSUM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH CKSUM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME cksum \- checksum and count the bytes in a file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/col.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/col.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 59924576..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/col.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,163 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: col -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "COL" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -col \- filter reverse line feeds from input -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBcol\fP \fIoptions\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBcol\fP filters out reverse (and half\-reverse) line feeds so the output is in the correct order, with only forward and half\-forward line feeds. It also replaces any whitespace characters with tabs where possible. This can be useful in processing the output of \fBnroff\fP(1) and \fBtbl\fP(1). -.sp -\fBcol\fP reads from standard input and writes to standard output. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-no\-backspaces\fP -.RS 4 -Do not output any backspaces, printing only the last character written to each column position. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-fine\fP -.RS 4 -Permit half\-forward line feeds. Normally characters destined for a half\-line boundary are printed on the following line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-tabs\fP -.RS 4 -Output tabs instead of multiple spaces. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-lines\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Buffer at least \fInumber\fP lines in memory. By default, 128 lines are buffered. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pass\fP -.RS 4 -Force unknown control sequences to be passed through unchanged. Normally \fBcol\fP will filter out any control sequences other than those recognized and interpreted by itself, which are listed below. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-spaces\fP -.RS 4 -Output multiple spaces instead of tabs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-H\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "CONFORMING TO" -.sp -The \fBcol\fP utility conforms to the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2. The \fB\-l\fP option is an extension to the standard. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The control sequences for carriage motion that \fBcol\fP understands and their decimal values are listed in the following table: -.sp -\fBESC\-7\fP -.RS 4 -reverse line feed (escape then 7) -.RE -.sp -\fBESC\-8\fP -.RS 4 -half reverse line feed (escape then 8) -.RE -.sp -\fBESC\-9\fP -.RS 4 -half forward line feed (escape then 9) -.RE -.sp -\fBbackspace\fP -.RS 4 -moves back one column (8); ignored in the first column -.RE -.sp -\fBnewline\fP -.RS 4 -forward line feed (10); also does carriage return -.RE -.sp -\fBcarriage return\fP -.RS 4 -(13) -.RE -.sp -\fBshift in\fP -.RS 4 -shift to normal character set (15) -.RE -.sp -\fBshift out\fP -.RS 4 -shift to alternate character set (14) -.RE -.sp -\fBspace\fP -.RS 4 -moves forward one column (32) -.RE -.sp -\fBtab\fP -.RS 4 -moves forward to next tab stop (9) -.RE -.sp -\fBvertical tab\fP -.RS 4 -reverse line feed (11) -.RE -.sp -All unrecognized control characters and escape sequences are discarded. -.sp -\fBcol\fP keeps track of the character set as characters are read and makes sure the character set is correct when they are output. -.sp -If the input attempts to back up to the last flushed line, \fBcol\fP will display a warning message. -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -A \fBcol\fP command appeared in Version 6 AT&T UNIX. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBexpand\fP(1), -\fBnroff\fP(1), -\fBtbl\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBcol\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/colcrt.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/colcrt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6f2fa488..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/colcrt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: colcrt -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "COLCRT" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -colcrt \- filter nroff output for CRT previewing -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBcolcrt\fP [options] [\fIfile\fP ...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBcolcrt\fP provides virtual half\-line and reverse line feed sequences for terminals without such capability, and on which overstriking is destructive. Half\-line characters and underlining (changed to dashing `\-\(aq) are placed on new lines in between the normal output lines. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-\fP, \fB\-\-no\-underlining\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress all underlining. This option is especially useful for previewing \fIallboxed\fP tables from \fBtbl\fP(1). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-2\fP, \fB\-\-half\-lines\fP -.RS 4 -Causes all half\-lines to be printed, effectively double spacing the output. Normally, a minimal space output format is used which will suppress empty lines. The program never suppresses two consecutive empty lines, however. The \fB\-2\fP option is useful for sending output to the line printer when the output contains superscripts and subscripts which would otherwise be invisible. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBcolcrt\fP command appeared in 3.0BSD. -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -Should fold underlines onto blanks even with the \fB\(aq\-\(aq\fP option so that a true underline character would show. -.sp -Can\(cqt back up more than 102 lines. -.sp -General overstriking is lost; as a special case \(aq|\(aq overstruck with \(aq\-\(aq or underline becomes \(aq+\(aq. -.sp -Lines are trimmed to 132 characters. -.sp -Some provision should be made for processing superscripts and subscripts in documents which are already double\-spaced. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -A typical use of \fBcolcrt\fP would be: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBtbl exum2.n | nroff \-ms | colcrt \- | more\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBcol\fP(1), -\fBmore\fP(1), -\fBnroff\fP(1), -\fBtroff\fP(1), -\fBul\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBcolcrt\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/colrm.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/colrm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3542d41a..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/colrm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: colrm -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "COLRM" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -colrm \- remove columns from a file -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBcolrm\fP \fI[first [last]]\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBcolrm\fP removes selected columns from a file. Input is taken from standard input. Output is sent to standard output. -.sp -If called with one parameter the columns of each line will be removed starting with the specified \fIfirst\fP column. If called with two parameters the columns from the \fIfirst\fP column to the \fIlast\fP column will be removed. -.sp -Column numbering starts with column 1. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBcolrm\fP command appeared in 3.0BSD. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBawk\fP(1p), -\fBcolumn\fP(1), -\fBexpand\fP(1), -\fBpaste\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBcolrm\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/column.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/column.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0ba5e5d9..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/column.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,265 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: column -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "COLUMN" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -column \- columnate lists -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBcolumn\fP [options] [\fIfile\fP ...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBcolumn\fP utility formats its input into multiple columns. The util support three modes: -.sp -\fBcolumns are filled before rows\fP -.RS 4 -This is the default mode (required by backward compatibility). -.RE -.sp -\fBrows are filled before columns\fP -.RS 4 -This mode is enabled by option \fB\-x, \-\-fillrows\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBtable\fP -.RS 4 -Determine the number of columns the input contains and create a table. This mode is enabled by option \fB\-t, \-\-table\fP and columns formatting is possible to modify by \fB\-\-table\-\fP* options. Use this mode if not sure. -.RE -.sp -Input is taken from \fIfile\fP, or otherwise from standard input. Empty lines are ignored and all invalid multibyte sequences are encoded by x<hex> convention. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The argument \fIcolumns\fP for \fB\-\-table\-\fP* options is a comma separated list of the column names as defined by \fB\-\-table\-columns\fP or it\(cqs column number in order as specified by input. It\(cqs possible to mix names and numbers. The special placeholder \(aq0\(aq (e.g. \-R0) may be used to specify all columns. -.sp -\fB\-J, \-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format to print the table, the option \fB\-\-table\-columns\fP is required and the option \fB\-\-table\-name\fP is recommended. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c, \-\-output\-width\fP \fIwidth\fP -.RS 4 -Output is formatted to a width specified as number of characters. The original name of this option is \fB\-\-columns\fP; this name is deprecated since v2.30. Note that input longer than \fIwidth\fP is not truncated by default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d, \-\-table\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print header. This option allows the use of logical column names on the command line, but keeps the header hidden when printing the table. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o, \-\-output\-separator\fP \fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the columns delimiter for table output (default is two spaces). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s, \-\-separator\fP \fIseparators\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the possible input item delimiters (default is whitespace). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t, \-\-table\fP -.RS 4 -Determine the number of columns the input contains and create a table. Columns are delimited with whitespace, by default, or with the characters supplied using the \fB\-\-output\-separator\fP option. Table output is useful for pretty\-printing. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N, \-\-table\-columns\fP \fInames\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the columns names by comma separated list of names. The names are used for the table header or to address column in option arguments. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l, \-\-table\-columns\-limit\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify maximal number of the input columns. The last column will contain all remaining line data if the limit is smaller than the number of the columns in the input data. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R, \-\-table\-right\fP \fIcolumns\fP -.RS 4 -Right align text in the specified columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T, \-\-table\-truncate\fP \fIcolumns\fP -.RS 4 -Specify columns where text can be truncated when necessary, otherwise very long table entries may be printed on multiple lines. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-E, \-\-table\-noextreme\fP \fIcolumns\fP -.RS 4 -Specify columns where is possible to ignore unusually long (longer than average) cells when calculate column width. The option has impact to the width calculation and table formatting, but the printed text is not affected. -.sp -The option is used for the last visible column by default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e, \-\-table\-header\-repeat\fP -.RS 4 -Print header line for each page. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-W, \-\-table\-wrap\fP \fIcolumns\fP -.RS 4 -Specify columns where is possible to use multi\-line cell for long text when necessary. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-H, \-\-table\-hide\fP \fIcolumns\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt print specified columns. The special placeholder \(aq\-\(aq may be used to hide all unnamed columns (see \fB\-\-table\-columns\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O, \-\-table\-order\fP \fIcolumns\fP -.RS 4 -Specify columns order on output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n, \-\-table\-name\fP \fIname\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the table name used for JSON output. The default is "table". -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L, \-\-keep\-empty\-lines\fP -.RS 4 -Preserve whitespace\-only lines in the input. The default is ignore empty lines at all. This option\(cqs original name was \fB\-\-table\-empty\-lines\fP but is now deprecated because it gives the false impression that the option only applies to table mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r, \-\-tree\fP \fIcolumn\fP -.RS 4 -Specify column to use tree\-like output. Note that the circular dependencies and other anomalies in child and parent relation are silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i, \-\-tree\-id\fP \fIcolumn\fP -.RS 4 -Specify column with line ID to create child\-parent relation. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p, \-\-tree\-parent\fP \fIcolumn\fP -.RS 4 -Specify column with parent ID to create child\-parent relation. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x, \-\-fillrows\fP -.RS 4 -Fill rows before filling columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h, \-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -The environment variable \fBCOLUMNS\fP is used to determine the size of the screen if no other information is available. -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The column command appeared in 4.3BSD\-Reno. -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -Version 2.23 changed the \fB\-s\fP option to be non\-greedy, for example: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -printf "a:b:c\(rsn1::3\(rsn" | column \-t \-s \(aq:\(aq -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Old output: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -a b c -1 3 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -New output (since util\-linux 2.23): -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -a b c -1 3 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Historical versions of this tool indicated that "rows are filled before columns" by default, and that the \fB\-x\fP option reverses this. This wording did not reflect the actual behavior, and it has since been corrected (see above). Other implementations of \fBcolumn\fP may continue to use the older documentation, but the behavior should be identical in any case. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -Print fstab with header line and align number to the right: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -sed \(aqs/#.*//\(aq /etc/fstab | column \-\-table \-\-table\-columns SOURCE,TARGET,TYPE,OPTIONS,PASS,FREQ \-\-table\-right PASS,FREQ -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Print fstab and hide unnamed columns: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -sed \(aqs/#.*//\(aq /etc/fstab | column \-\-table \-\-table\-columns SOURCE,TARGET,TYPE \-\-table\-hide \- -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Print a tree: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -echo \-e \(aq1 0 A\(rsn2 1 AA\(rsn3 1 AB\(rsn4 2 AAA\(rsn5 2 AAB\(aq | column \-\-tree\-id 1 \-\-tree\-parent 2 \-\-tree 3 -1 0 A -2 1 |\-AA -4 2 | |\-AAA -5 2 | `\-AAB -3 1 `\-AB -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBcolrm\fP(1), -\fBls\fP(1), -\fBpaste\fP(1), -\fBsort\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBcolumn\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/comm.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/comm.1 index b29026dc..9a0c9fad 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/comm.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/comm.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH COMM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH COMM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME comm \- compare two sorted files line by line .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cp.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cp.1 index a1c4e886..23118343 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cp.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cp.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH CP "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH CP "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME cp \- copy files and directories .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/csplit.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/csplit.1 index d802cfb2..1a016d45 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/csplit.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/csplit.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH CSPLIT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH CSPLIT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME csplit \- split a file into sections determined by context lines .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cut.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cut.1 index 4fda6619..c30ec6d4 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cut.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/cut.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH CUT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH CUT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME cut \- remove sections from each line of files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/date.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/date.1 index 62f99d87..5824deac 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/date.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/date.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH DATE "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH DATE "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME date \- print or set the system date and time .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dd.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dd.1 index 14f786c8..93934507 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dd.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dd.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH DD "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH DD "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME dd \- convert and copy a file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/df.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/df.1 index 80e0c0cd..9ea939ba 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/df.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/df.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH DF "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH DF "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME df \- report file system disk space usage .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dir.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dir.1 index 0ef5cf71..a7fe098a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dir.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dir.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH DIR "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH DIR "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME dir \- list directory contents .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dircolors.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dircolors.1 index cfc0be19..54c18022 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dircolors.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dircolors.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH DIRCOLORS "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH DIRCOLORS "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME dircolors \- color setup for ls .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dirname.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dirname.1 index 556be4e4..7888fbb0 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dirname.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dirname.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH DIRNAME "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH DIRNAME "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME dirname \- strip last component from file name .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dmesg.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dmesg.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8bb08600..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/dmesg.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,284 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: dmesg -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "DMESG" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -dmesg \- print or control the kernel ring buffer -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBdmesg\fP [options] -.sp -\fBdmesg\fP \fB\-\-clear\fP -.sp -\fBdmesg\fP \fB\-\-read\-clear\fP [options] -.sp -\fBdmesg\fP \fB\-\-console\-level\fP \fIlevel\fP -.sp -\fBdmesg\fP \fB\-\-console\-on\fP -.sp -\fBdmesg\fP \fB\-\-console\-off\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBdmesg\fP is used to examine or control the kernel ring buffer. -.sp -The default action is to display all messages from the kernel ring buffer. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fB\-\-clear\fP, \fB\-\-read\-clear\fP, \fB\-\-console\-on\fP, \fB\-\-console\-off\fP, and \fB\-\-console\-level\fP options are mutually exclusive. -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-clear\fP -.RS 4 -Clear the ring buffer. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-read\-clear\fP -.RS 4 -Clear the ring buffer after first printing its contents. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-console\-off\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the printing of messages to the console. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-show\-delta\fP -.RS 4 -Display the timestamp and the time delta spent between messages. If used together with \fB\-\-notime\fP then only the time delta without the timestamp is printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-E\fP, \fB\-\-console\-on\fP -.RS 4 -Enable printing messages to the console. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-reltime\fP -.RS 4 -Display the local time and the delta in human\-readable format. Be aware that conversion to the local time could be inaccurate (see \fB\-T\fP for more details). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-file\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Read the syslog messages from the given \fIfile\fP. Note that \fB\-F\fP does not support messages in kmsg format. The old syslog format is supported only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-facility\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Restrict output to the given (comma\-separated) \fIlist\fP of facilities. For example: -.sp -\fBdmesg \-\-facility=daemon\fP -.sp -will print messages from system daemons only. For all supported facilities see the \fB\-\-help\fP output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-H\fP, \fB\-\-human\fP -.RS 4 -Enable human\-readable output. See also \fB\-\-color\fP, \fB\-\-reltime\fP and \fB\-\-nopager\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-k\fP, \fB\-\-kernel\fP -.RS 4 -Print kernel messages. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-color\fP[=\fIwhen\fP] -.RS 4 -Colorize the output. The optional argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. If the \fIwhen\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBauto\fP. The colors can be disabled; for the current built\-in default see the \fB\-\-help\fP output. See also the \fBCOLORS\fP section below. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-level\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Restrict output to the given (comma\-separated) \fIlist\fP of levels. For example: -.sp -\fBdmesg \-\-level=err,warn\fP -.sp -will print error and warning messages only. For all supported levels see the \fB\-\-help\fP output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-console\-level\fP \fIlevel\fP -.RS 4 -Set the \fIlevel\fP at which printing of messages is done to the console. The \fIlevel\fP is a level number or abbreviation of the level name. For all supported levels see the \fB\-\-help\fP output. -.sp -For example, \fB\-n 1\fP or \fB\-n emerg\fP prevents all messages, except emergency (panic) messages, from appearing on the console. All levels of messages are still written to \fI/proc/kmsg\fP, so \fBsyslogd\fP(8) can still be used to control exactly where kernel messages appear. When the \fB\-n\fP option is used, \fBdmesg\fP will \fInot\fP print or clear the kernel ring buffer. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-noescape\fP -.RS 4 -The unprintable and potentially unsafe characters (e.g., broken multi\-byte sequences, terminal controlling chars, etc.) are escaped in format \(rsx<hex> for security reason by default. This option disables this feature at all. It\(cqs usable for example for debugging purpose together with \fB\-\-raw\fP. Be careful and don\(cqt use it by default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-nopager\fP -.RS 4 -Do not pipe output into a pager. A pager is enabled by default for \fB\-\-human\fP output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-force\-prefix\fP -.RS 4 -Add facility, level or timestamp information to each line of a multi\-line message. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Print the raw message buffer, i.e., do not strip the log\-level prefixes, but all unprintable characters are still escaped (see also \fB\-\-noescape\fP). -.sp -Note that the real raw format depends on the method how \fBdmesg\fP reads kernel messages. The \fI/dev/kmsg\fP device uses a different format than \fBsyslog\fP(2). For backward compatibility, \fBdmesg\fP returns data always in the \fBsyslog\fP(2) format. It is possible to read the real raw data from \fI/dev/kmsg\fP by, for example, the command \(aqdd if=/dev/kmsg iflag=nonblock\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-syslog\fP -.RS 4 -Force \fBdmesg\fP to use the \fBsyslog\fP(2) kernel interface to read kernel messages. The default is to use \fI/dev/kmsg\fP rather than \fBsyslog\fP(2) since kernel 3.5.0. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-buffer\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Use a buffer of \fIsize\fP to query the kernel ring buffer. This is 16392 by default. (The default kernel syslog buffer size was 4096 at first, 8192 since 1.3.54, 16384 since 2.1.113.) If you have set the kernel buffer to be larger than the default, then this option can be used to view the entire buffer. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-ctime\fP -.RS 4 -Print human\-readable timestamps. -.sp -\fBBe aware that the timestamp could be inaccurate!\fP The \fBtime\fP source used for the logs is \fBnot updated after\fP system \fBSUSPEND\fP/\fBRESUME\fP. Timestamps are adjusted according to current delta between boottime and monotonic clocks, this works only for messages printed after last resume. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-since\fP \fItime\fP -.RS 4 -Display record since the specified time. The time is possible to specify in absolute way as well as by relative notation (e.g. \(aq1 hour ago\(aq). Be aware that the timestamp could be inaccurate and see \fB\-\-ctime\fP for more details. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-until\fP \fItime\fP -.RS 4 -Display record until the specified time. The time is possible to specify in absolute way as well as by relative notation (e.g. \(aq1 hour ago\(aq). Be aware that the timestamp could be inaccurate and see \fB\-\-ctime\fP for more details. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-notime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print kernel\(cqs timestamps. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-time\-format\fP \fIformat\fP -.RS 4 -Print timestamps using the given \fIformat\fP, which can be \fBctime\fP, \fBreltime\fP, \fBdelta\fP or \fBiso\fP. The first three formats are aliases of the time\-format\-specific options. The \fBiso\fP format is a \fBdmesg\fP implementation of the ISO\-8601 timestamp format. The purpose of this format is to make the comparing of timestamps between two systems, and any other parsing, easy. The definition of the \fBiso\fP timestamp is: YYYY\-MM\-DD<T>HH:MM:SS,<microseconds>\(<-+><timezone offset from UTC>. -.sp -The \fBiso\fP format has the same issue as \fBctime\fP: the time may be inaccurate when a system is suspended and resumed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-userspace\fP -.RS 4 -Print userspace messages. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-follow\fP -.RS 4 -Wait for new messages. This feature is supported only on systems with a readable \fI/dev/kmsg\fP (since kernel 3.5.0). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-W\fP, \fB\-\-follow\-new\fP -.RS 4 -Wait and print only new messages. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-decode\fP -.RS 4 -Decode facility and level (priority) numbers to human\-readable prefixes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "COLORS" -.sp -Implicit coloring can be disabled by an empty file \fI/etc/terminal\-colors.d/dmesg.disable\fP. See \fBterminal\-colors.d\fP(5) for more details about colorization configuration. -.sp -The logical color names supported by \fBdmesg\fP are: -.sp -\fBsubsys\fP -.RS 4 -The message sub\-system prefix (e.g., "ACPI:"). -.RE -.sp -\fBtime\fP -.RS 4 -The message timestamp. -.RE -.sp -\fBtimebreak\fP -.RS 4 -The message timestamp in short ctime format in \fB\-\-reltime\fP or \fB\-\-human\fP output. -.RE -.sp -\fBalert\fP -.RS 4 -The text of the message with the alert log priority. -.RE -.sp -\fBcrit\fP -.RS 4 -The text of the message with the critical log priority. -.RE -.sp -\fBerr\fP -.RS 4 -The text of the message with the error log priority. -.RE -.sp -\fBwarn\fP -.RS 4 -The text of the message with the warning log priority. -.RE -.sp -\fBsegfault\fP -.RS 4 -The text of the message that inform about segmentation fault. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBdmesg\fP can fail reporting permission denied error. This is usually caused by \fBdmesg_restrict\fP kernel setting, please see \fBsyslog\fP(2) for more details. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.sp -\fBdmesg\fP was originally written by \c -.MTO "tytso\(atathena.mit.edu" "Theodore Ts\(cqo" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBterminal\-colors.d\fP(5), -\fBsyslogd\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBdmesg\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/du.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/du.1 index adaa6104..77d5db42 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/du.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/du.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH DU "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH DU "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME du \- estimate file space usage .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/echo.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/echo.1 index e11cf112..70e3f91f 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/echo.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/echo.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH ECHO "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH ECHO "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME echo \- display a line of text .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/eject.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/eject.1 deleted file mode 100644 index be3e74af..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/eject.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,185 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: eject -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "EJECT" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -eject \- eject removable media -.sp -\fBeject\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP|\fImountpoint\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBeject\fP allows removable media (typically a CD\-ROM, floppy disk, tape, JAZ, ZIP or USB disk) to be ejected under software control. The command can also control some multi\-disc CD\-ROM changers, the auto\-eject feature supported by some devices, and close the disc tray of some CD\-ROM drives. -.sp -The device corresponding to \fIdevice\fP or \fImountpoint\fP is ejected. If no name is specified, the default name \fB/dev/cdrom\fP is used. The device may be addressed by device name (e.g., \(aqsda\(aq), device path (e.g., \(aq/dev/sda\(aq), UUID=\fIuuid\fP or LABEL=\fIlabel\fP tags. -.sp -There are four different methods of ejecting, depending on whether the device is a CD\-ROM, SCSI device, removable floppy, or tape. By default \fBeject\fP tries all four methods in order until it succeeds. -.sp -If a device partition is specified, the whole\-disk device is used. -.sp -If the device or a device partition is currently mounted, it is unmounted before ejecting. The eject is processed on exclusive open block device file descriptor if \fB\-\-no\-unmount\fP or \fB\-\-force\fP are not specified. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-auto on\fP|\fBoff\fP -.RS 4 -This option controls the auto\-eject mode, supported by some devices. When enabled, the drive automatically ejects when the device is closed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-changerslot\fP \fIslot\fP -.RS 4 -With this option a CD slot can be selected from an ATAPI/IDE CD\-ROM changer. The CD\-ROM drive cannot be in use (mounted data CD or playing a music CD) for a change request to work. Please also note that the first slot of the changer is referred to as 0, not 1. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-default\fP -.RS 4 -List the default device name. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Force eject, don\(cqt check device type, don\(cqt open device with exclusive lock. The successful result may be false positive on non hot\-pluggable devices. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-floppy\fP -.RS 4 -This option specifies that the drive should be ejected using a removable floppy disk eject command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-manualeject on\fP|\fBoff\fP -.RS 4 -This option controls locking of the hardware eject button. When enabled, the drive will not be ejected when the button is pressed. This is useful when you are carrying a laptop in a bag or case and don\(cqt want it to eject if the button is inadvertently pressed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-no\-partitions\-unmount\fP -.RS 4 -The option tells eject to not try to unmount other partitions on partitioned devices. If another partition is still mounted, the program will not attempt to eject the media. It will attempt to unmount only the device or mountpoint given on the command line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-no\-unmount\fP -.RS 4 -The option tells eject to not try to unmount at all. If this option is not specified than \fBeject\fP opens the device with \fBO_EXCL\fP flag to be sure that the device is not used (since v2.35). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noop\fP -.RS 4 -With this option the selected device is displayed but no action is performed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-proc\fP -.RS 4 -This option allows you to use \fI/proc/mounts\fP instead \fI/etc/mtab\fP. It also passes the \fB\-n\fP option to \fBumount\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-tape\fP -.RS 4 -This option specifies that the drive should be ejected using a tape drive offline command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-cdrom\fP -.RS 4 -This option specifies that the drive should be ejected using a CDROM eject command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-scsi\fP -.RS 4 -This option specifies that the drive should be ejected using SCSI commands. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-traytoggle\fP -.RS 4 -With this option the drive is given a CD\-ROM tray close command if it\(cqs opened, and a CD\-ROM tray eject command if it\(cqs closed. Not all devices support this command, because it uses the above CD\-ROM tray close command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-trayclose\fP -.RS 4 -With this option the drive is given a CD\-ROM tray close command. Not all devices support this command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Run in verbose mode; more information is displayed about what the command is doing. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-X\fP, \fB\-\-listspeed\fP -.RS 4 -With this option the CD\-ROM drive will be probed to detect the available speeds. The output is a list of speeds which can be used as an argument of the \fB\-x\fP option. This only works with Linux 2.6.13 or higher, on previous versions solely the maximum speed will be reported. Also note that some drives may not correctly report the speed and therefore this option does not work with them. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-cdspeed\fP \fIspeed\fP -.RS 4 -With this option the drive is given a CD\-ROM select speed command. The \fIspeed\fP argument is a number indicating the desired speed (e.g., 8 for 8X speed), or 0 for maximum data rate. Not all devices support this command and you can only specify speeds that the drive is capable of. Every time the media is changed this option is cleared. This option can be used alone, or with the \fB\-t\fP and \fB\-c\fP options. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -Returns 0 if operation was successful, 1 if operation failed or command syntax was not valid. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -\fBeject\fP only works with devices that support one or more of the four methods of ejecting. This includes most CD\-ROM drives (IDE, SCSI, and proprietary), some SCSI tape drives, JAZ drives, ZIP drives (parallel port, SCSI, and IDE versions), and LS120 removable floppies. Users have also reported success with floppy drives on Sun SPARC and Apple Macintosh systems. If \fBeject\fP does not work, it is most likely a limitation of the kernel driver for the device and not the \fBeject\fP program itself. -.sp -The \fB\-r\fP, \fB\-s\fP, \fB\-f\fP, and \fB\-q\fP options allow controlling which methods are used to eject. More than one method can be specified. If none of these options are specified, it tries all four (this works fine in most cases). -.sp -\fBeject\fP may not always be able to determine if the device is mounted (e.g., if it has several names). If the device name is a symbolic link, \fBeject\fP will follow the link and use the device that it points to. -.sp -If \fBeject\fP determines that the device can have multiple partitions, it will attempt to unmount all mounted partitions of the device before ejecting (see also \fB\-\-no\-partitions\-unmount\fP). If an unmount fails, the program will not attempt to eject the media. -.sp -You can eject an audio CD. Some CD\-ROM drives will refuse to open the tray if the drive is empty. Some devices do not support the tray close command. -.sp -If the auto\-eject feature is enabled, then the drive will always be ejected after running this command. Not all Linux kernel CD\-ROM drivers support the auto\-eject mode. There is no way to find out the state of the auto\-eject mode. -.sp -You need appropriate privileges to access the device files. Running as root is required to eject some devices (e.g., SCSI devices). -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "tranter\(atpobox.com" "Jeff Tranter" "" -\- original author, -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -and -.MTO "mluscon\(atredhat.com" "Michal Luscon" "" -\- util\-linux version. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfindmnt\fP(8), -\fBlsblk\fP(8), -\fBmount\fP(8), -\fBumount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBeject\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/env.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/env.1 index 036d0b27..997370f0 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/env.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/env.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH ENV "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH ENV "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME env \- run a program in a modified environment .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/expand.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/expand.1 index ffcf065b..3720f721 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/expand.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/expand.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH EXPAND "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH EXPAND "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME expand \- convert tabs to spaces .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/expr.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/expr.1 index 6a41de47..cff50b50 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/expr.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/expr.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH EXPR "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH EXPR "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME expr \- evaluate expressions .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/factor.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/factor.1 index 98524452..91b27a59 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/factor.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/factor.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH FACTOR "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH FACTOR "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME factor \- factor numbers .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fallocate.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fallocate.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b0a106f6..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fallocate.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,141 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fallocate -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FALLOCATE" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fallocate \- preallocate or deallocate space to a file -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfallocate\fP [\fB\-c\fP|\fB\-p\fP|\fB\-z\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] \fB\-l\fP \fIlength\fP [\fB\-n\fP] \fIfilename\fP -.sp -\fBfallocate\fP \fB\-d\fP [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] [\fB\-l\fP \fIlength\fP] \fIfilename\fP -.sp -\fBfallocate\fP \fB\-x\fP [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] \fB\-l\fP \fIlength filename\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfallocate\fP is used to manipulate the allocated disk space for a file, either to deallocate or preallocate it. For filesystems which support the fallocate system call, preallocation is done quickly by allocating blocks and marking them as uninitialized, requiring no IO to the data blocks. This is much faster than creating a file by filling it with zeroes. -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBfallocate\fP is 0 on success and 1 on failure. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIlength\fP and \fIoffset\fP arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB, and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB, and YB. -.sp -The options \fB\-\-collapse\-range\fP, \fB\-\-dig\-holes\fP, \fB\-\-punch\-hole\fP, and \fB\-\-zero\-range\fP are mutually exclusive. -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-collapse\-range\fP -.RS 4 -Removes a byte range from a file, without leaving a hole. The byte range to be collapsed starts at \fIoffset\fP and continues for \fIlength\fP bytes. At the completion of the operation, the contents of the file starting at the location \fIoffset\fP+\fIlength\fP will be appended at the location \fIoffset\fP, and the file will be \fIlength\fP bytes smaller. The option \fB\-\-keep\-size\fP may not be specified for the collapse\-range operation. -.sp -Available since Linux 3.15 for ext4 (only for extent\-based files) and XFS. -.sp -A filesystem may place limitations on the granularity of the operation, in order to ensure efficient implementation. Typically, offset and len must be a multiple of the filesystem logical block size, which varies according to the filesystem type and configuration. If a filesystem has such a requirement, the operation will fail with the error EINVAL if this requirement is violated. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-dig\-holes\fP -.RS 4 -Detect and dig holes. This makes the file sparse in\-place, without using extra disk space. The minimum size of the hole depends on filesystem I/O block size (usually 4096 bytes). Also, when using this option, \fB\-\-keep\-size\fP is implied. If no range is specified by \fB\-\-offset\fP and \fB\-\-length\fP, then the entire file is analyzed for holes. -.sp -You can think of this option as doing a "\fBcp \-\-sparse\fP" and then renaming the destination file to the original, without the need for extra disk space. -.sp -See \fB\-\-punch\-hole\fP for a list of supported filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-insert\-range\fP -.RS 4 -Insert a hole of \fIlength\fP bytes from \fIoffset\fP, shifting existing data. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-length\fP \fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the length of the range, in bytes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-keep\-size\fP -.RS 4 -Do not modify the apparent length of the file. This may effectively allocate blocks past EOF, which can be removed with a truncate. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the beginning offset of the range, in bytes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-punch\-hole\fP -.RS 4 -Deallocates space (i.e., creates a hole) in the byte range starting at \fIoffset\fP and continuing for \fIlength\fP bytes. Within the specified range, partial filesystem blocks are zeroed, and whole filesystem blocks are removed from the file. After a successful call, subsequent reads from this range will return zeroes. This option may not be specified at the same time as the \fB\-\-zero\-range\fP option. Also, when using this option, \fB\-\-keep\-size\fP is implied. -.sp -Supported for XFS (since Linux 2.6.38), ext4 (since Linux 3.0), Btrfs (since Linux 3.7), tmpfs (since Linux 3.5) and gfs2 (since Linux 4.16). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Enable verbose mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-posix\fP -.RS 4 -Enable POSIX operation mode. In that mode allocation operation always completes, but it may take longer time when fast allocation is not supported by the underlying filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-zero\-range\fP -.RS 4 -Zeroes space in the byte range starting at \fIoffset\fP and continuing for \fIlength\fP bytes. Within the specified range, blocks are preallocated for the regions that span the holes in the file. After a successful call, subsequent reads from this range will return zeroes. -.sp -Zeroing is done within the filesystem preferably by converting the range into unwritten extents. This approach means that the specified range will not be physically zeroed out on the device (except for partial blocks at the either end of the range), and I/O is (otherwise) required only to update metadata. -.sp -Option \fB\-\-keep\-size\fP can be specified to prevent file length modification. -.sp -Available since Linux 3.14 for ext4 (only for extent\-based files) and XFS. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "sandeen\(atredhat.com" "Eric Sandeen" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBtruncate\fP(1), -\fBfallocate\fP(2), -\fBposix_fallocate\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfallocate\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/false.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/false.1 index 5acc8e10..dd916cb7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/false.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/false.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH FALSE "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH FALSE "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME false \- do nothing, unsuccessfully .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fincore.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fincore.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 05150f61..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fincore.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fincore -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FINCORE" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fincore \- count pages of file contents in core -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfincore\fP [options] \fIfile\fP... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfincore\fP counts pages of file contents being resident in memory (in core), and reports the numbers. If an error occurs during counting, then an error message is printed to the stderr and \fBfincore\fP continues processing the rest of files listed in a command line. -.sp -The default output is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using \fB\-\-output\fP \fIcolumns\-list\fP in environments where a stable output is required. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line in status output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the SIZE column in bytes rather than in a human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Define output columns. See the \fB\-\-help\fP output to get a list of the currently supported columns. The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in raw format. All potentially unsafe characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "yamato\(atredhat.com" "Masatake YAMATO" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmincore\fP(2), -\fBgetpagesize\fP(2), -\fBgetconf\fP(1p) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfincore\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/flock.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/flock.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a436bbe7..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/flock.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,166 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: flock -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FLOCK" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -flock \- manage locks from shell scripts -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBflock\fP [options] \fIfile\fP|\fIdirectory\fP \fIcommand\fP [\fIarguments\fP] -.sp -\fBflock\fP [options] \fIfile\fP|\fIdirectory\fP \fB\-c\fP \fIcommand\fP -.sp -\fBflock\fP [options] \fInumber\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -This utility manages \fBflock\fP(2) locks from within shell scripts or from the command line. -.sp -The first and second of the above forms wrap the lock around the execution of a \fIcommand\fP, in a manner similar to \fBsu\fP(1) or \fBnewgrp\fP(1). They lock a specified \fIfile\fP or \fIdirectory\fP, which is created (assuming appropriate permissions) if it does not already exist. By default, if the lock cannot be immediately acquired, \fBflock\fP waits until the lock is available. -.sp -The third form uses an open file by its file descriptor \fInumber\fP. See the examples below for how that can be used. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-command\fP \fIcommand\fP -.RS 4 -Pass a single \fIcommand\fP, without arguments, to the shell with \fB\-c\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-E\fP, \fB\-\-conflict\-exit\-code\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -The exit status used when the \fB\-n\fP option is in use, and the conflicting lock exists, or the \fB\-w\fP option is in use, and the timeout is reached. The default value is \fB1\fP. The \fInumber\fP has to be in the range of 0 to 255. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-no\-fork\fP -.RS 4 -Do not fork before executing \fIcommand\fP. Upon execution the flock process is replaced by \fIcommand\fP which continues to hold the lock. This option is incompatible with \fB\-\-close\fP as there would otherwise be nothing left to hold the lock. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-exclusive\fP -.RS 4 -Obtain an exclusive lock, sometimes called a write lock. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-nb\fP, \fB\-\-nonblock\fP -.RS 4 -Fail rather than wait if the lock cannot be immediately acquired. See the \fB\-E\fP option for the exit status used. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-close\fP -.RS 4 -Close the file descriptor on which the lock is held before executing \fIcommand\fP. This is useful if \fIcommand\fP spawns a child process which should not be holding the lock. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-shared\fP -.RS 4 -Obtain a shared lock, sometimes called a read lock. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-unlock\fP -.RS 4 -Drop a lock. This is usually not required, since a lock is automatically dropped when the file is closed. However, it may be required in special cases, for example if the enclosed command group may have forked a background process which should not be holding the lock. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wait\fP, \fB\-\-timeout\fP \fIseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Fail if the lock cannot be acquired within \fIseconds\fP. Decimal fractional values are allowed. See the \fB\-E\fP option for the exit status used. The zero number of \fIseconds\fP is interpreted as \fB\-\-nonblock\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Report how long it took to acquire the lock, or why the lock could not be obtained. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -The command uses <sysexits.h> exit status values for everything, except when using either of the options \fB\-n\fP or \fB\-w\fP which report a failure to acquire the lock with an exit status given by the \fB\-E\fP option, or 1 by default. The exit status given by \fB\-E\fP has to be in the range of 0 to 255. -.sp -When using the \fIcommand\fP variant, and executing the child worked, then the exit status is that of the child command. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -\fBflock\fP does not detect deadlock. See \fBflock\fP(2) for details. -.sp -Some file systems (e. g. NFS and CIFS) have a limited implementation of \fBflock\fP(2) and flock may always fail. For details see \fBflock\fP(2), \fBnfs\fP(5) and \fBmount.cifs\fP(8). Depending on mount options, flock can always fail there. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -Note that "shell> " in examples is a command line prompt. -.sp -shell1> flock /tmp \-c cat; shell2> flock \-w .007 /tmp \-c echo; /bin/echo $? -.RS 4 -Set exclusive lock to directory /tmp and the second command will fail. -.RE -.sp -shell1> flock \-s /tmp \-c cat; shell2> flock \-s \-w .007 /tmp \-c echo; /bin/echo $? -.RS 4 -Set shared lock to directory /tmp and the second command will not fail. Notice that attempting to get exclusive lock with second command would fail. -.RE -.sp -shell> flock \-x local\-lock\-file echo \(aqa b c\(aq -.RS 4 -Grab the exclusive lock "local\-lock\-file" before running echo with \(aqa b c\(aq. -.RE -.sp -(; flock \-n 9 || exit 1; # ... commands executed under lock ...; ) 9>/var/lock/mylockfile -.RS 4 -The form is convenient inside shell scripts. The mode used to open the file doesn\(cqt matter to \fBflock\fP; using \fI>\fP or \fI>>\fP allows the lockfile to be created if it does not already exist, however, write permission is required. Using \fI<\fP requires that the file already exists but only read permission is required. -.sp -[ ${FLOCKER} != $0 ] && exec env FLOCKER="$0 flock \-en $0 $0 $@ || -.RS 4 -This is useful boilerplate code for shell scripts. Put it at the top of the shell script you want to lock and it\(cqll automatically lock itself on the first run. If the env var \fB$FLOCKER\fP is not set to the shell script that is being run, then execute \fBflock\fP and grab an exclusive non\-blocking lock (using the script itself as the lock file) before re\-execing itself with the right arguments. It also sets the FLOCKER env var to the right value so it doesn\(cqt run again. -.RE -.RE -.sp -shell> exec 4<>/var/lock/mylockfile; shell> flock \-n 4 -.RS 4 -This form is convenient for locking a file without spawning a subprocess. The shell opens the lock file for reading and writing as file descriptor 4, then flock is used to lock the descriptor. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "hpa\(atzytor.com" "H. Peter Anvin" "" -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.sp -Copyright © 2003\-2006 H. Peter Anvin. This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBflock\fP(2) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBflock\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fmt.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fmt.1 index f6c8e8b1..c19f9dfc 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fmt.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fmt.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH FMT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH FMT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME fmt \- simple optimal text formatter .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fold.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fold.1 index 310a8cb6..a212046a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fold.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/fold.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH FOLD "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH FOLD "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME fold \- wrap each input line to fit in specified width .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/getopt.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/getopt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 430e6ba8..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/getopt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,188 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: getopt -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "GETOPT" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -getopt \- parse command options (enhanced) -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBgetopt\fP \fIoptstring\fP \fIparameters\fP -\fBgetopt\fP [options] [\fB\-\-\fP] \fIoptstring\fP \fIparameters\fP -\fBgetopt\fP [options] \fB\-o\fP|\fB\-\-options\fP \fIoptstring\fP [options] [\fB\-\-\fP] \fIparameters\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBgetopt\fP is used to break up (\fIparse\fP) options in command lines for easy parsing by shell procedures, and to check for valid options. It uses the GNU \fBgetopt\fP(3) routines to do this. -.sp -The parameters \fBgetopt\fP is called with can be divided into two parts: options which modify the way \fBgetopt\fP will do the parsing (the \fIoptions\fP and the \fIoptstring\fP in the \fBSYNOPSIS\fP), and the parameters which are to be parsed (\fIparameters\fP in the \fBSYNOPSIS\fP). The second part will start at the first non\-option parameter that is not an option argument, or after the first occurrence of \(aq\fB\-\-\fP\(aq. If no \(aq\fB\-o\fP\(aq or \(aq\fB\-\-options\fP\(aq option is found in the first part, the first parameter of the second part is used as the short options string. -.sp -If the environment variable \fBGETOPT_COMPATIBLE\fP is set, or if the first \fIparameter\fP is not an option (does not start with a \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq, the first format in the \fBSYNOPSIS\fP), \fBgetopt\fP will generate output that is compatible with that of other versions of \fBgetopt\fP(1). It will still do parameter shuffling and recognize optional arguments (see section \fBCOMPATIBILITY\fP for more information). -.sp -Traditional implementations of \fBgetopt\fP(1) are unable to cope with whitespace and other (shell\-specific) special characters in arguments and non\-option parameters. To solve this problem, this implementation can generate quoted output which must once again be interpreted by the shell (usually by using the \fBeval\fP command). This has the effect of preserving those characters, but you must call \fBgetopt\fP in a way that is no longer compatible with other versions (the second or third format in the \fBSYNOPSIS\fP). To determine whether this enhanced version of \fBgetopt\fP(1) is installed, a special test option (\fB\-T\fP) can be used. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-alternative\fP -.RS 4 -Allow long options to start with a single \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. No other output is generated. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-longoptions\fP \fIlongopts\fP -.RS 4 -The long (multi\-character) options to be recognized. More than one option name may be specified at once, by separating the names with commas. This option may be given more than once, the \fIlongopts\fP are cumulative. Each long option name in \fIlongopts\fP may be followed by one colon to indicate it has a required argument, and by two colons to indicate it has an optional argument. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-name\fP \fIprogname\fP -.RS 4 -The name that will be used by the \fBgetopt\fP(3) routines when it reports errors. Note that errors of \fBgetopt\fP(1) are still reported as coming from getopt. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-options\fP \fIshortopts\fP -.RS 4 -The short (one\-character) options to be recognized. If this option is not found, the first parameter of \fBgetopt\fP that does not start with a \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq (and is not an option argument) is used as the short options string. Each short option character in \fIshortopts\fP may be followed by one colon to indicate it has a required argument, and by two colons to indicate it has an optional argument. The first character of shortopts may be \(aq\fB+\fP\(aq or \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq to influence the way options are parsed and output is generated (see section \fBSCANNING MODES\fP for details). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP -.RS 4 -Disable error reporting by \fBgetopt\fP(3). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-Q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\-output\fP -.RS 4 -Do not generate normal output. Errors are still reported by \fBgetopt\fP(3), unless you also use \fB\-q\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-shell\fP \fIshell\fP -.RS 4 -Set quoting conventions to those of \fIshell\fP. If the \fB\-s\fP option is not given, the BASH conventions are used. Valid arguments are currently \(aq\fBsh\fP\(aq \(aq\fBbash\fP\(aq, \(aq\fBcsh\fP\(aq, and \(aq\fBtcsh\fP\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-test\fP -.RS 4 -Test if your \fBgetopt\fP(1) is this enhanced version or an old version. This generates no output, and sets the error status to 4. Other implementations of \fBgetopt\fP(1), and this version if the environment variable \fBGETOPT_COMPATIBLE\fP is set, will return \(aq\fB\-\-\fP\(aq and error status 0. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-unquoted\fP -.RS 4 -Do not quote the output. Note that whitespace and special (shell\-dependent) characters can cause havoc in this mode (like they do with other \fBgetopt\fP(1) implementations). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. No other output is generated. -.RE -.SH "PARSING" -.sp -This section specifies the format of the second part of the parameters of \fBgetopt\fP (the \fIparameters\fP in the \fBSYNOPSIS\fP). The next section (\fBOUTPUT\fP) describes the output that is generated. These parameters were typically the parameters a shell function was called with. Care must be taken that each parameter the shell function was called with corresponds to exactly one parameter in the parameter list of \fBgetopt\fP (see the \fBEXAMPLES\fP). All parsing is done by the GNU \fBgetopt\fP(3) routines. -.sp -The parameters are parsed from left to right. Each parameter is classified as a short option, a long option, an argument to an option, or a non\-option parameter. -.sp -A simple short option is a \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq followed by a short option character. If the option has a required argument, it may be written directly after the option character or as the next parameter (i.e., separated by whitespace on the command line). If the option has an optional argument, it must be written directly after the option character if present. -.sp -It is possible to specify several short options after one \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq, as long as all (except possibly the last) do not have required or optional arguments. -.sp -A long option normally begins with \(aq\fB\-\-\fP\(aq followed by the long option name. If the option has a required argument, it may be written directly after the long option name, separated by \(aq\fB=\fP\(aq, or as the next argument (i.e., separated by whitespace on the command line). If the option has an optional argument, it must be written directly after the long option name, separated by \(aq\fB=\fP\(aq, if present (if you add the \(aq\fB=\fP\(aq but nothing behind it, it is interpreted as if no argument was present; this is a slight bug, see the \fBBUGS\fP). Long options may be abbreviated, as long as the abbreviation is not ambiguous. -.sp -Each parameter not starting with a \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq, and not a required argument of a previous option, is a non\-option parameter. Each parameter after a \(aq\fB\-\-\fP\(aq parameter is always interpreted as a non\-option parameter. If the environment variable \fBPOSIXLY_CORRECT\fP is set, or if the short option string started with a \(aq\fB+\fP\(aq, all remaining parameters are interpreted as non\-option parameters as soon as the first non\-option parameter is found. -.SH "OUTPUT" -.sp -Output is generated for each element described in the previous section. Output is done in the same order as the elements are specified in the input, except for non\-option parameters. Output can be done in \fIcompatible\fP (\fIunquoted\fP) mode, or in such way that whitespace and other special characters within arguments and non\-option parameters are preserved (see \fBQUOTING\fP). When the output is processed in the shell script, it will seem to be composed of distinct elements that can be processed one by one (by using the shift command in most shell languages). This is imperfect in unquoted mode, as elements can be split at unexpected places if they contain whitespace or special characters. -.sp -If there are problems parsing the parameters, for example because a required argument is not found or an option is not recognized, an error will be reported on stderr, there will be no output for the offending element, and a non\-zero error status is returned. -.sp -For a short option, a single \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq and the option character are generated as one parameter. If the option has an argument, the next parameter will be the argument. If the option takes an optional argument, but none was found, the next parameter will be generated but be empty in quoting mode, but no second parameter will be generated in unquoted (compatible) mode. Note that many other \fBgetopt\fP(1) implementations do not support optional arguments. -.sp -If several short options were specified after a single \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq, each will be present in the output as a separate parameter. -.sp -For a long option, \(aq\fB\-\-\fP\(aq and the full option name are generated as one parameter. This is done regardless whether the option was abbreviated or specified with a single \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq in the input. Arguments are handled as with short options. -.sp -Normally, no non\-option parameters output is generated until all options and their arguments have been generated. Then \(aq\fB\-\-\fP\(aq is generated as a single parameter, and after it the non\-option parameters in the order they were found, each as a separate parameter. Only if the first character of the short options string was a \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq, non\-option parameter output is generated at the place they are found in the input (this is not supported if the first format of the \fBSYNOPSIS\fP is used; in that case all preceding occurrences of \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq and \(aq\fB+\fP\(aq are ignored). -.SH "QUOTING" -.sp -In compatibility mode, whitespace or \(aqspecial\(aq characters in arguments or non\-option parameters are not handled correctly. As the output is fed to the shell script, the script does not know how it is supposed to break the output into separate parameters. To circumvent this problem, this implementation offers quoting. The idea is that output is generated with quotes around each parameter. When this output is once again fed to the shell (usually by a shell \fBeval\fP command), it is split correctly into separate parameters. -.sp -Quoting is not enabled if the environment variable \fBGETOPT_COMPATIBLE\fP is set, if the first form of the \fBSYNOPSIS\fP is used, or if the option \(aq\fB\-u\fP\(aq is found. -.sp -Different shells use different quoting conventions. You can use the \(aq\fB\-s\fP\(aq option to select the shell you are using. The following shells are currently supported: \(aq\fBsh\fP\(aq, \(aq\fBbash\fP\(aq, \(aq\fBcsh\fP\(aq and \(aq\fBtcsh\fP\(aq. Actually, only two \(aqflavors\(aq are distinguished: sh\-like quoting conventions and csh\-like quoting conventions. Chances are that if you use another shell script language, one of these flavors can still be used. -.SH "SCANNING MODES" -.sp -The first character of the short options string may be a \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq or a \(aq\fB+\fP\(aq to indicate a special scanning mode. If the first calling form in the \fBSYNOPSIS\fP is used they are ignored; the environment variable \fBPOSIXLY_CORRECT\fP is still examined, though. -.sp -If the first character is \(aq\fB+\fP\(aq, or if the environment variable \fBPOSIXLY_CORRECT\fP is set, parsing stops as soon as the first non\-option parameter (i.e., a parameter that does not start with a \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq) is found that is not an option argument. The remaining parameters are all interpreted as non\-option parameters. -.sp -If the first character is a \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq, non\-option parameters are outputted at the place where they are found; in normal operation, they are all collected at the end of output after a \(aq\fB\-\-\fP\(aq parameter has been generated. Note that this \(aq\fB\-\-\fP\(aq parameter is still generated, but it will always be the last parameter in this mode. -.SH "COMPATIBILITY" -.sp -This version of \fBgetopt\fP(1) is written to be as compatible as possible to other versions. Usually you can just replace them with this version without any modifications, and with some advantages. -.sp -If the first character of the first parameter of getopt is not a \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq, \fBgetopt\fP goes into compatibility mode. It will interpret its first parameter as the string of short options, and all other arguments will be parsed. It will still do parameter shuffling (i.e., all non\-option parameters are output at the end), unless the environment variable \fBPOSIXLY_CORRECT\fP is set, in which case, \fBgetopt\fP will prepend a \(aq\fB+\fP\(aq before short options automatically. -.sp -The environment variable \fBGETOPT_COMPATIBLE\fP forces \fBgetopt\fP into compatibility mode. Setting both this environment variable and \fBPOSIXLY_CORRECT\fP offers 100% compatibility for \(aqdifficult\(aq programs. Usually, though, neither is needed. -.sp -In compatibility mode, leading \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq and \(aq\fB+\fP\(aq characters in the short options string are ignored. -.SH "RETURN CODES" -.sp -\fBgetopt\fP returns error code \fB0\fP for successful parsing, \fB1\fP if \fBgetopt\fP(3) returns errors, \fB2\fP if it does not understand its own parameters, \fB3\fP if an internal error occurs like out\-of\-memory, and \fB4\fP if it is called with \fB\-T\fP. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -Example scripts for (ba)sh and (t)csh are provided with the \fBgetopt\fP(1) distribution, and are installed in \fI/usr/share/doc/util\-linux\fP directory. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -\fBPOSIXLY_CORRECT\fP -.RS 4 -This environment variable is examined by the \fBgetopt\fP(3) routines. If it is set, parsing stops as soon as a parameter is found that is not an option or an option argument. All remaining parameters are also interpreted as non\-option parameters, regardless whether they start with a \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fBGETOPT_COMPATIBLE\fP -.RS 4 -Forces \fBgetopt\fP to use the first calling format as specified in the \fBSYNOPSIS\fP. -.RE -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -\fBgetopt\fP(3) can parse long options with optional arguments that are given an empty optional argument (but cannot do this for short options). This \fBgetopt\fP(1) treats optional arguments that are empty as if they were not present. -.sp -The syntax if you do not want any short option variables at all is not very intuitive (you have to set them explicitly to the empty string). -.SH "AUTHOR" -.sp -.MTO "frodo\(atfrodo.looijaard.name" "Frodo Looijaard" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBbash\fP(1), -\fBtcsh\fP(1), -\fBgetopt\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBgetopt\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/groups.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/groups.1 index 57f52c60..20a62d7d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/groups.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/groups.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH GROUPS "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH GROUPS "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME groups \- print the groups a user is in .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-editenv.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-editenv.1 index 6afe3949..f6d6f263 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-editenv.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-editenv.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-EDITENV "1" "January 2024" "grub-editenv (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-EDITENV "1" "March 2024" "grub-editenv (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-editenv \- edit GRUB environment block .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-emu.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-emu.1 index 695b755a..afd674ba 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-emu.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-emu.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-EMU "1" "January 2024" "grub-emu (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-EMU "1" "March 2024" "grub-emu (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-emu \- GRUB emulator .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-file.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-file.1 index 5bf96df8..8af789ea 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-file.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-file.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-FILE "1" "January 2024" "grub-file (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-FILE "1" "March 2024" "grub-file (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-file \- check file type .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-fstest.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-fstest.1 index 2a5ca203..d5318c76 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-fstest.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-fstest.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-FSTEST "1" "January 2024" "grub-fstest (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-FSTEST "1" "March 2024" "grub-fstest (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-fstest \- debug tool for GRUB filesystem drivers .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-glue-efi.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-glue-efi.1 index 3929e534..aa547fcb 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-glue-efi.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-glue-efi.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-GLUE-EFI "1" "January 2024" "grub-glue-efi (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-GLUE-EFI "1" "March 2024" "grub-glue-efi (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-glue-efi \- generate a fat binary for EFI .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-kbdcomp.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-kbdcomp.1 index d26f6b59..cd4df683 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-kbdcomp.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-kbdcomp.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-KBDCOMP "1" "January 2024" "grub-kbdcomp ()" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-KBDCOMP "1" "March 2024" "grub-kbdcomp ()" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-kbdcomp \- generate a GRUB keyboard layout file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-menulst2cfg.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-menulst2cfg.1 index ccd9adbe..77dd36c8 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-menulst2cfg.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-menulst2cfg.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MENULST2CFG "1" "January 2024" "grub-menulst2cfg grub-menulst2cfg [INFILE [OUTFILE]]" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-MENULST2CFG "1" "March 2024" "grub-menulst2cfg grub-menulst2cfg [INFILE [OUTFILE]]" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-menulst2cfg \- transform legacy menu.lst into grub.cfg .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkfont.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkfont.1 index de077b30..975a59a9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkfont.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkfont.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MKFONT "1" "January 2024" "grub-mkfont (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-MKFONT "1" "March 2024" "grub-mkfont (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-mkfont \- make GRUB font files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkimage.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkimage.1 index ea5d1032..5eb95f86 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkimage.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkimage.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MKIMAGE "1" "January 2024" "grub-mkimage (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-MKIMAGE "1" "March 2024" "grub-mkimage (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-mkimage \- make a bootable image of GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mklayout.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mklayout.1 index a3883721..1d4ca096 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mklayout.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mklayout.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MKLAYOUT "1" "January 2024" "grub-mklayout (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-MKLAYOUT "1" "March 2024" "grub-mklayout (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-mklayout \- generate a GRUB keyboard layout file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mknetdir.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mknetdir.1 index c99aec60..4a74d1b9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mknetdir.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mknetdir.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MKNETDIR "1" "January 2024" "grub-mknetdir (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-MKNETDIR "1" "March 2024" "grub-mknetdir (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-mknetdir \- prepare a GRUB netboot directory. .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkpasswd-pbkdf2.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkpasswd-pbkdf2.1 index afc830b3..f1d82053 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkpasswd-pbkdf2.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkpasswd-pbkdf2.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MKPASSWD-PBKDF2 "1" "January 2024" "grub-mkpasswd-pbkdf2 (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-MKPASSWD-PBKDF2 "1" "March 2024" "grub-mkpasswd-pbkdf2 (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-mkpasswd-pbkdf2 \- generate hashed password for GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkrelpath.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkrelpath.1 index bba276ad..036be971 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkrelpath.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkrelpath.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MKRELPATH "1" "January 2024" "grub-mkrelpath (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-MKRELPATH "1" "March 2024" "grub-mkrelpath (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-mkrelpath \- make a system path relative to its root .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkrescue.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkrescue.1 index a13d52cb..aa4ae4d6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkrescue.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkrescue.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MKRESCUE "1" "January 2024" "grub-mkrescue (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-MKRESCUE "1" "March 2024" "grub-mkrescue (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-mkrescue \- make a GRUB rescue image .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkstandalone.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkstandalone.1 index 37b90c58..eb6d152f 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkstandalone.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mkstandalone.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MKSTANDALONE "1" "January 2024" "grub-mkstandalone (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-MKSTANDALONE "1" "March 2024" "grub-mkstandalone (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-mkstandalone \- make a memdisk-based GRUB image .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mount.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mount.1 index 4d363ff9..73920513 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mount.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-mount.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MOUNT "1" "January 2024" "grub-mount (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-MOUNT "1" "March 2024" "grub-mount (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-mount \- export GRUB filesystem with FUSE .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-render-label.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-render-label.1 index 7bc66d9e..4952dbd0 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-render-label.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-render-label.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-RENDER-LABEL "1" "January 2024" "grub-render-label (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-RENDER-LABEL "1" "March 2024" "grub-render-label (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-render-label \- generate a .disk_label for Apple Macs. .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-script-check.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-script-check.1 index 920932a2..46b63b64 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-script-check.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-script-check.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-SCRIPT-CHECK "1" "January 2024" "grub-script-check (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-SCRIPT-CHECK "1" "March 2024" "grub-script-check (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-script-check \- check grub.cfg for syntax errors .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-syslinux2cfg.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-syslinux2cfg.1 index 9298ea42..a4aba30b 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-syslinux2cfg.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/grub2-syslinux2cfg.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-SYSLINUX2CFG "1" "January 2024" "grub-syslinux2cfg (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" +.TH GRUB-SYSLINUX2CFG "1" "March 2024" "grub-syslinux2cfg (GRUB2) 2.12" "User Commands" .SH NAME grub-syslinux2cfg \- transform syslinux config into grub.cfg .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/hardlink.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/hardlink.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bdbb18c7..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/hardlink.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,132 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: hardlink -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "HARDLINK" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -hardlink \- link multiple copies of a file -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBhardlink\fP [options] [\fIdirectory\fP|\fIfile\fP]... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBhardlink\fP is a tool which replaces copies of a file with hardlinks, therefore saving space. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -print quick usage details to the screen. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -More verbose output. If specified once, every hardlinked file is displayed, if specified twice, it also shows every comparison. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP -.RS 4 -Quiet mode, don\(cqt print anything. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-dry\-run\fP -.RS 4 -Do not act, just print what would happen. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-respect\-name\fP -.RS 4 -Only try to link files with the same (basename). It\(cqs strongly recommended to use long options rather than \fB\-f\fP which is interpreted in a different way by others \fBhardlink\fP implementations. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-ignore\-mode\fP -.RS 4 -Link/compare files even if their mode is different. This may be a bit unpredictable. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-ignore\-owner\fP -.RS 4 -Link/compare files even if their owner (user and group) is different. It is not predictable. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-ignore\-time\fP -.RS 4 -Link/compare files even if their time of modification is different. You almost always want this. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-X\fP, \fB\-\-respect\-xattrs\fP -.RS 4 -Only try to link files with the same extended attributes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-maximize\fP -.RS 4 -Among equal files, keep the file with the highest link count. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-minimize\fP -.RS 4 -Among equal files, keep the file with the lowest link count. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-keep\-oldest\fP -.RS 4 -Among equal files, keep the oldest file (least recent modification time). By default, the newest file is kept. If \fB\-\-maximize\fP or \fB\-\-minimize\fP is specified, the link count has a higher precedence than the time of modification. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-exclude\fP \fIregex\fP -.RS 4 -A regular expression which excludes files from being compared and linked. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-include\fP \fIregex\fP -.RS 4 -A regular expression to include files. If the option \fB\-\-exclude\fP has been given, this option re\-includes files which would otherwise be excluded. If the option is used without \fB\-\-exclude\fP, only files matched by the pattern are included. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-minimum\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -The minimum size to consider. By default this is 1, so empty files will not be linked. The \fIsize\fP argument may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB"). -.RE -.SH "ARGUMENTS" -.sp -\fBhardlink\fP takes one or more directories which will be searched for files to be linked. -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -The original \fBhardlink\fP implementation uses the option \fB\-f\fP to force hardlinks creation between filesystem. This very rarely usable feature is no more supported by the current hardlink. -.sp -\fBhardlink\fP assumes that the trees it operates on do not change during operation. If a tree does change, the result is undefined and potentially dangerous. For example, if a regular file is replaced by a device, hardlink may start reading from the device. If a component of a path is replaced by a symbolic link or file permissions change, security may be compromised. Do not run hardlink on a changing tree or on a tree controlled by another user. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.sp -There are multiple \fBhardlink\fP implementations. The very first implementation is from Jakub Jelinek for Fedora distribution, this implementation has been used in util\-linux between versions v2.34 to v2.36. The current implementations is based on Debian version from Julian Andres Klode. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBhardlink\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/head.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/head.1 index ae312b01..0e27de8a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/head.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/head.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH HEAD "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH HEAD "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME head \- output the first part of files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/hexdump.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/hexdump.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0340c4b9..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/hexdump.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,477 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: hexdump -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "HEXDUMP" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -hexdump \- display file contents in hexadecimal, decimal, octal, or ascii -.sp -\fBhexdump\fP \fIoptions file\fP ... -.sp -\fBhd\fP \fIoptions file\fP ... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBhexdump\fP utility is a filter which displays the specified files, or standard input if no files are specified, in a user\-specified format. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -Below, the \fIlength\fP and \fIoffset\fP arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB"), or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-one\-byte\-octal\fP -.RS 4 -\fIOne\-byte octal display\fP. Display the input offset in hexadecimal, followed by sixteen space\-separated, three\-column, zero\-filled bytes of input data, in octal, per line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-one\-byte\-char\fP -.RS 4 -\fIOne\-byte character display\fP. Display the input offset in hexadecimal, followed by sixteen space\-separated, three\-column, space\-filled characters of input data per line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-canonical\fP -.RS 4 -\fICanonical hex+ASCII display\fP. Display the input offset in hexadecimal, followed by sixteen space\-separated, two\-column, hexadecimal bytes, followed by the same sixteen bytes in \fB%_p\fP format enclosed in \(aq\fB|\fP\(aq characters. Invoking the program as \fBhd\fP implies this option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-two\-bytes\-decimal\fP -.RS 4 -\fITwo\-byte decimal display\fP. Display the input offset in hexadecimal, followed by eight space\-separated, five\-column, zero\-filled, two\-byte units of input data, in unsigned decimal, per line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-format\fP \fIformat_string\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a format string to be used for displaying data. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-format\-file\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a file that contains one or more newline\-separated format strings. Empty lines and lines whose first non\-blank character is a hash mark (#) are ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-color\fP[=\fIwhen\fP] -.RS 4 -Accept color units for the output. The optional argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. If the \fIwhen\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBauto\fP. The colors can be disabled; for the current built\-in default see the \fB\-\-help\fP output. See also the \fBColors\fP subsection and the \fBCOLORS\fP section below. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-length\fP \fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -Interpret only \fIlength\fP bytes of input. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-two\-bytes\-octal\fP -.RS 4 -\fITwo\-byte octal display\fP. Display the input offset in hexadecimal, followed by eight space\-separated, six\-column, zero\-filled, two\-byte quantities of input data, in octal, per line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-skip\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Skip \fIoffset\fP bytes from the beginning of the input. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-no\-squeezing\fP -.RS 4 -The \fB\-v\fP option causes \fBhexdump\fP to display all input data. Without the \fB\-v\fP option, any number of groups of output lines which would be identical to the immediately preceding group of output lines (except for the input offsets), are replaced with a line comprised of a single asterisk. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-two\-bytes\-hex\fP -.RS 4 -\fITwo\-byte hexadecimal display\fP. Display the input offset in hexadecimal, followed by eight space\-separated, four\-column, zero\-filled, two\-byte quantities of input data, in hexadecimal, per line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -For each input file, \fBhexdump\fP sequentially copies the input to standard output, transforming the data according to the format strings specified by the \fB\-e\fP and \fB\-f\fP options, in the order that they were specified. -.SH "FORMATS" -.sp -A format string contains any number of format units, separated by whitespace. A format unit contains up to three items: an iteration count, a byte count, and a format. -.sp -The iteration count is an optional positive integer, which defaults to one. Each format is applied iteration count times. -.sp -The byte count is an optional positive integer. If specified it defines the number of bytes to be interpreted by each iteration of the format. -.sp -If an iteration count and/or a byte count is specified, a single slash must be placed after the iteration count and/or before the byte count to disambiguate them. Any whitespace before or after the slash is ignored. -.sp -The format is required and must be surrounded by double quote (" ") marks. It is interpreted as a fprintf\-style format string (see \fBfprintf\fP(3), with the following exceptions: -.sp -1. -.RS 4 -An asterisk (*) may not be used as a field width or precision. -.RE -.sp -2. -.RS 4 -A byte count or field precision \fIis\fP required for each \fBs\fP conversion character (unlike the fprintf3 default which prints the entire string if the precision is unspecified). -.RE -.sp -3. -.RS 4 -The conversion characters \fBh\fP, \fBl\fP, \fBn\fP, \fBp\fP, and \fBq\fP are not supported. -.RE -.sp -4. -.RS 4 -The single character escape sequences described in the C standard are supported: -.RE -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -NULL -T}:T{ -.sp -\(rs0 -T} -T{ -.sp -<alert character> -T}:T{ -.sp -\(rsa -T} -T{ -.sp -<backspace> -T}:T{ -.sp -\(rsb -T} -T{ -.sp -<form\-feed> -T}:T{ -.sp -\(rsf -T} -T{ -.sp -<newline> -T}:T{ -.sp -\(rsn -T} -T{ -.sp -<carriage return> -T}:T{ -.sp -\(rsr -T} -T{ -.sp -<tab> -T}:T{ -.sp -\(rst -T} -T{ -.sp -<vertical tab> -T}:T{ -.sp -\(rsv -T} -.TE -.sp -.br -.RE -.ll -.SS "Conversion strings" -.sp -The \fBhexdump\fP utility also supports the following additional conversion strings. -.sp -\fB_a[dox]\fP -.RS 4 -Display the input offset, cumulative across input files, of the next byte to be displayed. The appended characters \fBd\fP, \fBo\fP, and \fBx\fP specify the display base as decimal, octal or hexadecimal respectively. -.RE -.sp -\fB_A[dox]\fP -.RS 4 -Identical to the \fB_a\fP conversion string except that it is only performed once, when all of the input data has been processed. -.RE -.sp -\fB_c\fP -.RS 4 -Output characters in the default character set. Non\-printing characters are displayed in three\-character, zero\-padded octal, except for those representable by standard escape notation (see above), which are displayed as two\-character strings. -.RE -.sp -\fB_p\fP -.RS 4 -Output characters in the default character set. Non\-printing characters are displayed as a single \(aq\fB.\fP\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fB_u\fP -.RS 4 -Output US ASCII characters, with the exception that control characters are displayed using the following, lower\-case, names. Characters greater than 0xff, hexadecimal, are displayed as hexadecimal strings. -.RE -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt lt lt lt lt. -T{ -.sp -000 nul -T}:T{ -.sp -001 soh -T}:T{ -.sp -002 stx -T}:T{ -.sp -003 etx -T}:T{ -.sp -004 eot -T}:T{ -.sp -005 enq -T} -T{ -.sp -006 ack -T}:T{ -.sp -007 bel -T}:T{ -.sp -008 bs -T}:T{ -.sp -009 ht -T}:T{ -.sp -00A lf -T}:T{ -.sp -00B vt -T} -T{ -.sp -00C ff -T}:T{ -.sp -00D cr -T}:T{ -.sp -00E so -T}:T{ -.sp -00F si -T}:T{ -.sp -010 dle -T}:T{ -.sp -011 dc1 -T} -T{ -.sp -012 dc2 -T}:T{ -.sp -013 dc3 -T}:T{ -.sp -014 dc4 -T}:T{ -.sp -015 nak -T}:T{ -.sp -016 syn -T}:T{ -.sp -017 etb -T} -T{ -.sp -018 can -T}:T{ -.sp -019 em -T}:T{ -.sp -01A sub -T}:T{ -.sp -01B esc -T}:T{ -.sp -01C fs -T}:T{ -.sp -01D gs -T} -T{ -.sp -01E rs -T}:T{ -.sp -01F us -T}:T{ -.sp -0FF del -T}:T{ -.sp - -T}:T{ -.sp - -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -.TE -.sp -.br -.RE -.ll -.SS "Colors" -.sp -When put at the end of a format specifier, hexdump highlights the respective string with the color specified. Conditions, if present, are evaluated prior to highlighting. -.sp -\fB_L[color_unit_1,color_unit_2,...,color_unit_n]\fP -.sp -The full syntax of a color unit is as follows: -.sp -\fB[!]COLOR[:VALUE][@OFFSET_START[\-END]]\fP -.sp -\fB!\fP -.RS 4 -Negate the condition. Please note that it only makes sense to negate a unit if both a value/string and an offset are specified. In that case the respective output string will be highlighted if and only if the value/string does not match the one at the offset. -.RE -.sp -\fBCOLOR\fP -.RS 4 -One of the 8 basic shell colors. -.RE -.sp -\fBVALUE\fP -.RS 4 -A value to be matched specified in hexadecimal, or octal base, or as a string. Please note that the usual C escape sequences are not interpreted by hexdump inside the color_units. -.RE -.sp -\fBOFFSET\fP -.RS 4 -An offset or an offset range at which to check for a match. Please note that lone OFFSET_START uses the same value as END offset. -.RE -.SS "Counters" -.sp -The default and supported byte counts for the conversion characters are as follows: -.sp -\fB%_c\fP, \fB%_p\fP, \fB%_u\fP, \fB%c\fP -.RS 4 -One byte counts only. -.RE -.sp -\fB%d\fP, \fB%i\fP, \fB%o\fP, \fB%u\fP, \fB%X\fP, \fB%x\fP -.RS 4 -Four byte default, one, two and four byte counts supported. -.RE -.sp -\fB%E\fP, \fB%e\fP, \fB%f\fP, \fB%G\fP, \fB%g\fP -.RS 4 -Eight byte default, four byte counts supported. -.RE -.sp -The amount of data interpreted by each format string is the sum of the data required by each format unit, which is the iteration count times the byte count, or the iteration count times the number of bytes required by the format if the byte count is not specified. -.sp -The input is manipulated in \fIblocks\fP, where a block is defined as the largest amount of data specified by any format string. Format strings interpreting less than an input block\(cqs worth of data, whose last format unit both interprets some number of bytes and does not have a specified iteration count, have the iteration count incremented until the entire input block has been processed or there is not enough data remaining in the block to satisfy the format string. -.sp -If, either as a result of user specification or \fBhexdump\fP modifying the iteration count as described above, an iteration count is greater than one, no trailing whitespace characters are output during the last iteration. -.sp -It is an error to specify a byte count as well as multiple conversion characters or strings unless all but one of the conversion characters or strings is \fB_a\fP or \fB_A\fP. -.sp -If, as a result of the specification of the \fB\-n\fP option or end\-of\-file being reached, input data only partially satisfies a format string, the input block is zero\-padded sufficiently to display all available data (i.e., any format units overlapping the end of data will display some number of the zero bytes). -.sp -Further output by such format strings is replaced by an equivalent number of spaces. An equivalent number of spaces is defined as the number of spaces output by an \fBs\fP conversion character with the same field width and precision as the original conversion character or conversion string but with any \(aq\fB+\fP\(aq, \(aq \(aq, \(aq\fB#\fP\(aq conversion flag characters removed, and referencing a NULL string. -.sp -If no format strings are specified, the default display is very similar to the \fB\-x\fP output format (the \fB\-x\fP option causes more space to be used between format units than in the default output). -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBhexdump\fP exits 0 on success and > 0 if an error occurred. -.SH "CONFORMING TO" -.sp -The \fBhexdump\fP utility is expected to be IEEE Std 1003.2 ("POSIX.2") compatible. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -Display the input in perusal format: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - "%06.6_ao " 12/1 "%3_u " - "\(rst" "%_p " - "\(rsn" -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Implement the \fB\-x\fP option: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - "%07.7_Ax\(rsn" - "%07.7_ax " 8/2 "%04x " "\(rsn" -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -MBR Boot Signature example: Highlight the addresses cyan and the bytes at offsets 510 and 511 green if their value is 0xAA55, red otherwise. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - "%07.7_Ax_L[cyan]\(rsn" - "%07.7_ax_L[cyan] " 8/2 " %04x_L[green:0xAA55@510\-511,!red:0xAA55@510\-511] " "\(rsn" -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "COLORS" -.sp -Implicit coloring can be disabled by an empty file \fI/etc/terminal\-colors.d/hexdump.disable\fP. -.sp -See \fBterminal\-colors.d\fP(5) for more details about colorization configuration. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBhexdump\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/hostid.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/hostid.1 index ede8de4c..9939e780 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/hostid.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/hostid.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH HOSTID "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH HOSTID "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME hostid \- print the numeric identifier for the current host .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/id.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/id.1 index f20b0572..dbd4a316 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/id.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/id.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH ID "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH ID "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME id \- print real and effective user and group IDs .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/install.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/install.1 index 467feed8..6f85ad83 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/install.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/install.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH INSTALL "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH INSTALL "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME install \- copy files and set attributes .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ionice.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ionice.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ecdff585..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ionice.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,165 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: ionice -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "IONICE" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -ionice \- set or get process I/O scheduling class and priority -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBionice\fP [\fB\-c\fP \fIclass\fP] [\fB\-n\fP \fIlevel\fP] [\fB\-t\fP] \fB\-p\fP \fIPID\fP -.sp -\fBionice\fP [\fB\-c\fP \fIclass\fP] [\fB\-n\fP \fIlevel\fP] [\fB\-t\fP] \fB\-P\fP \fIPGID\fP -.sp -\fBionice\fP [\fB\-c\fP \fIclass\fP] [\fB\-n\fP \fIlevel\fP] [\fB\-t\fP] \fB\-u\fP \fIUID\fP -.sp -\fBionice\fP [\fB\-c\fP \fIclass\fP] [\fB\-n\fP \fIlevel\fP] [\fB\-t\fP] \fIcommand\fP [argument] ... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -This program sets or gets the I/O scheduling class and priority for a program. If no arguments or just \fB\-p\fP is given, \fBionice\fP will query the current I/O scheduling class and priority for that process. -.sp -When \fIcommand\fP is given, \fBionice\fP will run this command with the given arguments. If no \fIclass\fP is specified, then \fIcommand\fP will be executed with the "best\-effort" scheduling class. The default priority level is 4. -.sp -As of this writing, a process can be in one of three scheduling classes: -.sp -\fBIdle\fP -.RS 4 -A program running with idle I/O priority will only get disk time when no other program has asked for disk I/O for a defined grace period. The impact of an idle I/O process on normal system activity should be zero. This scheduling class does not take a priority argument. Presently, this scheduling class is permitted for an ordinary user (since kernel 2.6.25). -.RE -.sp -\fBBest\-effort\fP -.RS 4 -This is the effective scheduling class for any process that has not asked for a specific I/O priority. This class takes a priority argument from \fI0\-7\fP, with a lower number being higher priority. Programs running at the same best\-effort priority are served in a round\-robin fashion. -.sp -Note that before kernel 2.6.26 a process that has not asked for an I/O priority formally uses "\fBnone\fP" as scheduling class, but the I/O scheduler will treat such processes as if it were in the best\-effort class. The priority within the best\-effort class will be dynamically derived from the CPU nice level of the process: io_priority = (cpu_nice + 20) / 5. -.sp -For kernels after 2.6.26 with the CFQ I/O scheduler, a process that has not asked for an I/O priority inherits its CPU scheduling class. The I/O priority is derived from the CPU nice level of the process (same as before kernel 2.6.26). -.RE -.sp -\fBRealtime\fP -.RS 4 -The RT scheduling class is given first access to the disk, regardless of what else is going on in the system. Thus the RT class needs to be used with some care, as it can starve other processes. As with the best\-effort class, 8 priority levels are defined denoting how big a time slice a given process will receive on each scheduling window. This scheduling class is not permitted for an ordinary (i.e., non\-root) user. -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-class\fP \fIclass\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the name or number of the scheduling class to use; \f(CR0\fP for none, \f(CR1\fP for realtime, \f(CR2\fP for best\-effort, \f(CR3\fP for idle. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-classdata\fP \fIlevel\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the scheduling class data. This only has an effect if the class accepts an argument. For realtime and best\-effort, \fI0\-7\fP are valid data (priority levels), and \f(CR0\fP represents the highest priority level. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP \fIPID\fP... -.RS 4 -Specify the process IDs of running processes for which to get or set the scheduling parameters. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pgid\fP \fIPGID\fP... -.RS 4 -Specify the process group IDs of running processes for which to get or set the scheduling parameters. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-ignore\fP -.RS 4 -Ignore failure to set the requested priority. If \fIcommand\fP was specified, run it even in case it was not possible to set the desired scheduling priority, which can happen due to insufficient privileges or an old kernel version. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-uid\fP \fIUID\fP... -.RS 4 -Specify the user IDs of running processes for which to get or set the scheduling parameters. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Linux supports I/O scheduling priorities and classes since 2.6.13 with the CFQ I/O scheduler. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -# \fBionice\fP \-c 3 \-p 89 -.RE -.sp -Sets process with PID 89 as an idle I/O process. -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -# \fBionice\fP \-c 2 \-n 0 bash -.RE -.sp -Runs \(aqbash\(aq as a best\-effort program with highest priority. -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -# \fBionice\fP \-p 89 91 -.RE -.sp -Prints the class and priority of the processes with PID 89 and 91. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "jens\(ataxboe.dk" "Jens Axboe" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBioprio_set\fP(2) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBionice\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ipcmk.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ipcmk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index aac88361..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ipcmk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: ipcmk -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "IPCMK" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -ipcmk \- make various IPC resources -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBipcmk\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBipcmk\fP allows you to create System V inter\-process communication (IPC) objects: shared memory segments, message queues, and semaphore arrays. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -Resources can be specified with these options: -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-shmem\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Create a shared memory segment of \fIsize\fP bytes. The \fIsize\fP argument may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, etc. (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, etc. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-Q\fP, \fB\-\-queue\fP -.RS 4 -Create a message queue. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-semaphore\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Create a semaphore array with \fInumber\fP of elements. -.RE -.sp -Other options are: -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-mode\fP \fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Access permissions for the resource. Default is 0644. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "hayden.james\(atgmail.com" "Hayden A. James" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBipcrm\fP(1), -\fBipcs\fP(1), -\fBsysvipc\fP(7) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBipcmk\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ipcrm.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ipcrm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9f1e17d9..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ipcrm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: ipcrm -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "IPCRM" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -ipcrm \- remove certain IPC resources -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBipcrm\fP [options] -.sp -\fBipcrm\fP [\fBshm\fP|\fBmsg\fP|\fBsem\fP] \fIID\fP ... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBipcrm\fP removes System V inter\-process communication (IPC) objects and associated data structures from the system. In order to delete such objects, you must be superuser, or the creator or owner of the object. -.sp -System V IPC objects are of three types: shared memory, message queues, and semaphores. Deletion of a message queue or semaphore object is immediate (regardless of whether any process still holds an IPC identifier for the object). A shared memory object is only removed after all currently attached processes have detached (\fBshmdt\fP(2)) the object from their virtual address space. -.sp -Two syntax styles are supported. The old Linux historical syntax specifies a three\-letter keyword indicating which class of object is to be deleted, followed by one or more IPC identifiers for objects of this type. -.sp -The SUS\-compliant syntax allows the specification of zero or more objects of all three types in a single command line, with objects specified either by key or by identifier (see below). Both keys and identifiers may be specified in decimal, hexadecimal (specified with an initial \(aq0x\(aq or \(aq0X\(aq), or octal (specified with an initial \(aq0\(aq). -.sp -The details of the removes are described in \fBshmctl\fP(2), \fBmsgctl\fP(2), and \fBsemctl\fP(2). The identifiers and keys can be found by using \fBipcs\fP(1). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP [\fBshm\fP] [\fBmsg\fP] [\fBsem\fP] -.RS 4 -Remove all resources. When an option argument is provided, the removal is performed only for the specified resource types. -.sp -\fIWarning!\fP Do not use \fB\-a\fP if you are unsure how the software using the resources might react to missing objects. Some programs create these resources at startup and may not have any code to deal with an unexpected disappearance. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-shmem\-key\fP \fIshmkey\fP -.RS 4 -Remove the shared memory segment created with \fIshmkey\fP after the last detach is performed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-shmem\-id\fP \fIshmid\fP -.RS 4 -Remove the shared memory segment identified by \fIshmid\fP after the last detach is performed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-Q\fP, \fB\-\-queue\-key\fP \fImsgkey\fP -.RS 4 -Remove the message queue created with \fImsgkey\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-queue\-id\fP \fImsgid\fP -.RS 4 -Remove the message queue identified by \fImsgid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-semaphore\-key\fP \fIsemkey\fP -.RS 4 -Remove the semaphore created with \fIsemkey\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-semaphore\-id\fP \fIsemid\fP -.RS 4 -Remove the semaphore identified by \fIsemid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -In its first Linux implementation, \fBipcrm\fP used the deprecated syntax shown in the second line of the \fBSYNOPSIS\fP. Functionality present in other *nix implementations of \fBipcrm\fP has since been added, namely the ability to delete resources by key (not just identifier), and to respect the same command\-line syntax. For backward compatibility the previous syntax is still supported. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBipcmk\fP(1), -\fBipcs\fP(1), -\fBmsgctl\fP(2), -\fBmsgget\fP(2), -\fBsemctl\fP(2), -\fBsemget\fP(2), -\fBshmctl\fP(2), -\fBshmdt\fP(2), -\fBshmget\fP(2), -\fBftok\fP(3), -\fBsysvipc\fP(7) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBipcrm\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ipcs.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ipcs.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f506d903..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ipcs.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,144 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: ipcs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "IPCS" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -ipcs \- show information on IPC facilities -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBipcs\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBipcs\fP shows information on System V inter\-process communication facilities. By default it shows information about all three resources: shared memory segments, message queues, and semaphore arrays. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-id\fP \fIid\fP -.RS 4 -Show full details on just the one resource element identified by \fIid\fP. This option needs to be combined with one of the three resource options: \fB\-m\fP, \fB\-q\fP or \fB\-s\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SS "Resource options" -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-shmems\fP -.RS 4 -Write information about active shared memory segments. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-queues\fP -.RS 4 -Write information about active message queues. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-semaphores\fP -.RS 4 -Write information about active semaphore sets. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Write information about all three resources (default). -.RE -.SS "Output formats" -.sp -Of these options only one takes effect: the last one specified. -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-creator\fP -.RS 4 -Show creator and owner. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-limits\fP -.RS 4 -Show resource limits. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP -.RS 4 -Show PIDs of creator and last operator. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP -.RS 4 -Write time information. The time of the last control operation that changed the access permissions for all facilities, the time of the last \fBmsgsnd\fP(2) and \fBmsgrcv\fP(2) operations on message queues, the time of the last \fBshmat\fP(2) and \fBshmdt\fP(2) operations on shared memory, and the time of the last \fBsemop\fP(2) operation on semaphores. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-summary\fP -.RS 4 -Show status summary. -.RE -.SS "Representation" -.sp -These affect only the \fB\-l\fP (\fB\-\-limits\fP) option. -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print sizes in bytes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-human\fP -.RS 4 -Print sizes in human\-readable format. -.RE -.SH "CONFORMING TO" -.sp -The Linux \fBipcs\fP utility is not fully compatible to the POSIX \fBipcs\fP utility. The Linux version does not support the POSIX \fB\-a\fP, \fB\-b\fP and \fB\-o\fP options, but does support the \fB\-l\fP and \fB\-u\fP options not defined by POSIX. A portable application shall not use the \fB\-a\fP, \fB\-b\fP, \fB\-o\fP, \fB\-l\fP, and \fB\-u\fP options. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The current implementation of \fBipcs\fP obtains information about available IPC resources by parsing the files in \fI/proc/sysvipc\fP. Before util\-linux version v2.23, an alternate mechanism was used: the \fBIPC_STAT\fP command of \fBmsgctl\fP(2), \fBsemctl\fP(2), and \fBshmctl\fP(2). This mechanism is also used in later util\-linux versions in the case where \fI/proc\fP is unavailable. A limitation of the \fBIPC_STAT\fP mechanism is that it can only be used to retrieve information about IPC resources for which the user has read permission. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "balasub\(atcis.ohio\-state.edu" "Krishna Balasubramanian" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBipcmk\fP(1), -\fBipcrm\fP(1), -\fBmsgrcv\fP(2), -\fBmsgsnd\fP(2), -\fBsemget\fP(2), -\fBsemop\fP(2), -\fBshmat\fP(2), -\fBshmdt\fP(2), -\fBshmget\fP(2), -\fBsysvipc\fP(7) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBipcs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/irqtop.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/irqtop.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 909b8d73..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/irqtop.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: irqtop -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "IRQTOP" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -irqtop \- utility to display kernel interrupt information -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBirqtop\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Display kernel interrupt counter information in \fBtop\fP(1) style view. -.sp -The default output is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using \fB\-\-output\fP. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. The default list of columns may be extended if list is specified in the format \fI+list\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-delay\fP \fIseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Update interrupt output every \fIseconds\fP intervals. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-sort\fP \fIcolumn\fP -.RS 4 -Specify sort criteria by column name. See \fB\-\-help\fP output to get column names. The sort criteria may be changes in interactive mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-softirq\fP -.RS 4 -Show softirqs information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "INTERACTIVE MODE KEY COMMANDS" -.sp -\fBi\fP -.RS 4 -sort by short irq name or number field -.RE -.sp -\fBt\fP -.RS 4 -sort by total count of interrupts (the default) -.RE -.sp -\fBd\fP -.RS 4 -sort by delta count of interrupts -.RE -.sp -\fBn\fP -.RS 4 -sort by long descriptive name field -.RE -.sp -\fBq Q\fP -.RS 4 -stop updates and exit program -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "pizhenwei\(atbytedance.com" "Zhenwei Pi" "," -.MTO "kerolasa\(atiki.fi" "Sami Kerola" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBirqtop\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/join.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/join.1 index fe30bceb..b9762863 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/join.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/join.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH JOIN "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH JOIN "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME join \- join lines of two files on a common field .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/kill.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/kill.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5a73a3e8..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/kill.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,179 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: kill -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "KILL" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -kill \- terminate a process -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBkill\fP [\-signal|\fB\-s\fP \fIsignal\fP|\fB\-p\fP] [\fB\-q\fP \fIvalue\fP] [\fB\-a\fP] [\fB\-\-timeout\fP \fImilliseconds\fP \fIsignal\fP] [\fB\-\-\fP] \fIpid\fP|\fIname\fP... -.sp -\fBkill\fP \fB\-l\fP [\fInumber\fP] | \fB\-L\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The command \fBkill\fP sends the specified \fIsignal\fP to the specified processes or process groups. -.sp -If no signal is specified, the TERM signal is sent. The default action for this signal is to terminate the process. This signal should be used in preference to the KILL signal (number 9), since a process may install a handler for the TERM signal in order to perform clean\-up steps before terminating in an orderly fashion. If a process does not terminate after a TERM signal has been sent, then the KILL signal may be used; be aware that the latter signal cannot be caught, and so does not give the target process the opportunity to perform any clean\-up before terminating. -.sp -Most modern shells have a builtin \fBkill\fP command, with a usage rather similar to that of the command described here. The \fB\-\-all\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP, and \fB\-\-queue\fP options, and the possibility to specify processes by command name, are local extensions. -.sp -If \fIsignal\fP is 0, then no actual signal is sent, but error checking is still performed. -.SH "ARGUMENTS" -.sp -The list of processes to be signaled can be a mixture of names and PIDs. -.sp -\fIpid\fP -.RS 4 -Each \fIpid\fP can be expressed in one of the following ways: -.sp -\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -where \fIn\fP is larger than 0. The process with PID \fIn\fP is signaled. -.RE -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -All processes in the current process group are signaled. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-1\fP -.RS 4 -All processes with a PID larger than 1 are signaled. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -where \fIn\fP is larger than 1. All processes in process group \fIn\fP are signaled. When an argument of the form \(aq\-n\(aq is given, and it is meant to denote a process group, either a signal must be specified first, or the argument must be preceded by a \(aq\-\-\(aq option, otherwise it will be taken as the signal to send. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fIname\fP -.RS 4 -All processes invoked using this \fIname\fP will be signaled. -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-signal\fP \fIsignal\fP -.RS 4 -The signal to send. It may be given as a name or a number. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP [\fInumber\fP] -.RS 4 -Print a list of signal names, or convert the given signal number to a name. The signals can be found in \fI/usr/include/linux/signal.h\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-table\fP -.RS 4 -Similar to \fB\-l\fP, but it will print signal names and their corresponding numbers. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Do not restrict the command\-name\-to\-PID conversion to processes with the same UID as the present process. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP -.RS 4 -Only print the process ID (PID) of the named processes, do not send any signals. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Print PID(s) that will be signaled with \fBkill\fP along with the signal. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-queue\fP \fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Send the signal using \fBsigqueue\fP(3) rather than \fBkill\fP(2). The \fIvalue\fP argument is an integer that is sent along with the signal. If the receiving process has installed a handler for this signal using the \fBSA_SIGINFO\fP flag to \fBsigaction\fP(2), then it can obtain this data via the \fIsi_sigval\fP field of the \fIsiginfo_t\fP structure. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-timeout\fP \fImilliseconds signal\fP -.RS 4 -Send a signal defined in the usual way to a process, followed by an additional signal after a specified delay. The \fB\-\-timeout\fP option causes \fBkill\fP to wait for a period defined in \fImilliseconds\fP before sending a follow\-up \fIsignal\fP to the process. This feature is implemented using the Linux kernel PID file descriptor feature in order to guarantee that the follow\-up signal is sent to the same process or not sent if the process no longer exists. -.sp -Note that the operating system may re\-use PIDs and implementing an equivalent feature in a shell using \fBkill\fP and \fBsleep\fP would be subject to races whereby the follow\-up signal might be sent to a different process that used a recycled PID. -.sp -The \fB\-\-timeout\fP option can be specified multiple times: the signals are sent sequentially with the specified timeouts. The \fB\-\-timeout\fP option can be combined with the \fB\-\-queue\fP option. -.sp -As an example, the following command sends the signals QUIT, TERM and KILL in sequence and waits for 1000 milliseconds between sending the signals: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -kill \-\-verbose \-\-timeout 1000 TERM \-\-timeout 1000 KILL \(rs - \-\-signal QUIT 12345 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBkill\fP has the following exit status values: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -failure -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -partial success (when more than one process specified) -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Although it is possible to specify the TID (thread ID, see \fBgettid\fP(2)) of one of the threads in a multithreaded process as the argument of \fBkill\fP, the signal is nevertheless directed to the process (i.e., the entire thread group). In other words, it is not possible to send a signal to an explicitly selected thread in a multithreaded process. The signal will be delivered to an arbitrarily selected thread in the target process that is not blocking the signal. For more details, see \fBsignal\fP(7) and the description of \fBCLONE_THREAD\fP in \fBclone\fP(2). -.sp -Various shells provide a builtin \fBkill\fP command that is preferred in relation to the \fBkill\fP(1) executable described by this manual. The easiest way to ensure one is executing the command described in this page is to use the full path when calling the command, for example: \fB/bin/kill \-\-version\fP -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "svalente\(atmit.edu" "Salvatore Valente" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.sp -The original version was taken from BSD 4.4. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBbash\fP(1), -\fBtcsh\fP(1), -\fBsigaction\fP(2), -\fBkill\fP(2), -\fBsigqueue\fP(3), -\fBsignal\fP(7) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBkill\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/last.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/last.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3e56e09f..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/last.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,227 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: last -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LAST" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -last, lastb \- show a listing of last logged in users -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlast\fP [options] [\fIusername\fP...] [\fItty\fP...] -.sp -\fBlastb\fP [options] [\fIusername\fP...] [\fItty\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlast\fP searches back through the \fI/var/log/wtmp\fP file (or the file designated by the \fB\-f\fP option) and displays a list of all users logged in (and out) since that file was created. One or more \fIusernames\fP and/or \fIttys\fP can be given, in which case \fBlast\fP will show only the entries matching those arguments. Names of \fIttys\fP can be abbreviated, thus \fBlast 0\fP is the same as \fBlast tty0\fP. -.sp -When catching a \fBSIGINT\fP signal (generated by the interrupt key, usually control\-C) or a SIGQUIT signal, \fBlast\fP will show how far it has searched through the file; in the case of the \fBSIGINT\fP signal \fBlast\fP will then terminate. -.sp -The pseudo user \fBreboot\fP logs in each time the system is rebooted. Thus \fBlast reboot\fP will show a log of all the reboots since the log file was created. -.sp -\fBlastb\fP is the same as \fBlast\fP, except that by default it shows a log of the \fI/var/log/btmp\fP file, which contains all the bad login attempts. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-hostlast\fP -.RS 4 -Display the hostname in the last column. Useful in combination with the \fB\-\-dns\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-dns\fP -.RS 4 -For non\-local logins, Linux stores not only the host name of the remote host, but its IP number as well. This option translates the IP number back into a hostname. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-file\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Tell \fBlast\fP to use a specific \fIfile\fP instead of \fI/var/log/wtmp\fP. The \fB\-\-file\fP option can be given multiple times, and all of the specified files will be processed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-fulltimes\fP -.RS 4 -Print full login and logout times and dates. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-ip\fP -.RS 4 -Like \fB\-\-dns ,\fP but displays the host\(cqs IP number instead of the name. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\fP\fInumber\fP; \fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-limit\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Tell \fBlast\fP how many lines to show. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-present\fP \fItime\fP -.RS 4 -Display the users who were present at the specified time. This is like using the options \fB\-\-since\fP and \fB\-\-until\fP together with the same \fItime\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-nohostname\fP -.RS 4 -Suppresses the display of the hostname field. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-since\fP \fItime\fP -.RS 4 -Display the state of logins since the specified \fItime\fP. This is useful, e.g., to easily determine who was logged in at a particular time. The option is often combined with \fB\-\-until\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-until\fP \fItime\fP -.RS 4 -Display the state of logins until the specified \fItime\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-time\-format\fP \fIformat\fP -.RS 4 -Define the output timestamp \fIformat\fP to be one of \fInotime\fP, \fIshort\fP, \fIfull\fP, or \fIiso\fP. The \fInotime\fP variant will not print any timestamps at all, \fIshort\fP is the default, and \fIfull\fP is the same as the \fB\-\-fulltimes\fP option. The \fIiso\fP variant will display the timestamp in ISO\-8601 format. The ISO format contains timezone information, making it preferable when printouts are investigated outside of the system. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-fullnames\fP -.RS 4 -Display full user names and domain names in the output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-system\fP -.RS 4 -Display the system shutdown entries and run level changes. -.RE -.SH "TIME FORMATS" -.sp -The options that take the \fItime\fP argument understand the following formats: -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -YYYYMMDDhhmmss -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -T{ -.sp -YYYY\-MM\-DD hh:mm:ss -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -T{ -.sp -YYYY\-MM\-DD hh:mm -T}:T{ -.sp -(seconds will be set to 00) -T} -T{ -.sp -YYYY\-MM\-DD -T}:T{ -.sp -(time will be set to 00:00:00) -T} -T{ -.sp -hh:mm:ss -T}:T{ -.sp -(date will be set to today) -T} -T{ -.sp -hh:mm -T}:T{ -.sp -(date will be set to today, seconds to 00) -T} -T{ -.sp -now -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -T{ -.sp -yesterday -T}:T{ -.sp -(time is set to 00:00:00) -T} -T{ -.sp -today -T}:T{ -.sp -(time is set to 00:00:00) -T} -T{ -.sp -tomorrow -T}:T{ -.sp -(time is set to 00:00:00) -T} -T{ -.sp -+5min -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -T{ -.sp -\-5days -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -.TE -.sp -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/var/log/wtmp\fP, -\fI/var/log/btmp\fP -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The files \fIwtmp\fP and \fIbtmp\fP might not be found. The system only logs information in these files if they are present. This is a local configuration issue. If you want the files to be used, they can be created with a simple \fBtouch\fP(1) command (for example, \fBtouch /var/log/wtmp\fP). -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "miquels\(atcistron.nl" "Miquel van Smoorenburg" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlogin\fP(1), -\fBwtmp\fP(5), -\fBinit\fP(8), -\fBshutdown\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlast\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/line.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/line.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1985ac18..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/line.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: line -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LINE" "1" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -line \- read one line -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBline\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The utility \fBline\fP copies one line (up to a newline) from standard input to standard output. It always prints at least a newline and returns an exit status of 1 on EOF or read error. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBread\fP(1p) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBline\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/link.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/link.1 index a16daea9..0162ae7b 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/link.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/link.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH LINK "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH LINK "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME link \- call the link function to create a link to a file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ln.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ln.1 index 400be189..7537d648 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ln.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ln.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH LN "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH LN "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME ln \- make links between files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/logger.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/logger.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5424bd40..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/logger.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,345 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: logger -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LOGGER" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -logger \- enter messages into the system log -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlogger\fP [options] \fImessage\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlogger\fP makes entries in the system log. -.sp -When the optional \fImessage\fP argument is present, it is written to the log. If it is not present, and the \fB\-f\fP option is not given either, then standard input is logged. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-udp\fP -.RS 4 -Use datagrams (UDP) only. By default the connection is tried to the syslog port defined in \fI/etc/services\fP, which is often 514. -.sp -See also \fB\-\-server\fP and \fB\-\-socket\fP to specify where to connect. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-skip\-empty\fP -.RS 4 -Ignore empty lines when processing files. An empty line is defined to be a line without any characters. Thus a line consisting only of whitespace is NOT considered empty. Note that when the \fB\-\-prio\-prefix\fP option is specified, the priority is not part of the line. Thus an empty line in this mode is a line that does not have any characters after the priority prefix (e.g., \fB<13>\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-file\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Log the contents of the specified \fIfile\fP. This option cannot be combined with a command\-line message. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP -.RS 4 -Log the PID of the \fBlogger\fP process with each line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-id\fP[\fB=\fP\fIid\fP] -.RS 4 -Log the PID of the \fBlogger\fP process with each line. When the optional argument \fIid\fP is specified, then it is used instead of the \fBlogger\fP command\(cqs PID. The use of \fB\-\-id=$$\fP (PPID) is recommended in scripts that send several messages. -.sp -Note that the system logging infrastructure (for example \fBsystemd\fP when listening on \fI/dev/log\fP) may follow local socket credentials to overwrite the PID specified in the message. \fBlogger\fP(1) is able to set those socket credentials to the given \fIid\fP, but only if you have root permissions and a process with the specified PID exists, otherwise the socket credentials are not modified and the problem is silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-journald\fP[\fB=\fP\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Write a systemd journal entry. The entry is read from the given \fIfile\fP, when specified, otherwise from standard input. Each line must begin with a field that is accepted by journald; see \fBsystemd.journal\-fields\fP(7) for details. The use of a MESSAGE_ID field is generally a good idea, as it makes finding entries easy. Examples: -.RE -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -logger \-\-journald <<end -MESSAGE_ID=67feb6ffbaf24c5cbec13c008dd72309 -MESSAGE=The dogs bark, but the caravan goes on. -DOGS=bark -CARAVAN=goes on -end -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -logger \-\-journald=entry.txt -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Notice that \fB\-\-journald\fP will ignore values of other options, such as priority. If priority is needed it must be within input, and use PRIORITY field. The simple execution of \fBjournalctl\fP(1) will display MESSAGE field. Use \fBjournalctl \-\-output json\-pretty\fP to see rest of the fields. -.sp -+ -To include newlines in MESSAGE, specify MESSAGE several times. This is handled as a special case, other fields will be stored as an array in the journal if they appear multiple times. -.sp -\fB\-\-msgid\fP \fImsgid\fP -.RS 4 -Sets the \c -.URL "https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5424" "RFC 5424" "" -MSGID field. Note that the space character is not permitted inside of \fImsgid\fP. This option is only used if \fB\-\-rfc5424\fP is specified as well; otherwise, it is silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-server\fP \fIserver\fP -.RS 4 -Write to the specified remote syslog \fIserver\fP instead of to the system log socket. Unless \fB\-\-udp\fP or \fB\-\-tcp\fP is specified, \fBlogger\fP will first try to use UDP, but if this fails a TCP connection is attempted. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-no\-act\fP -.RS 4 -Causes everything to be done except for writing the log message to the system log, and removing the connection or the journal. This option can be used together with \fB\-\-stderr\fP for testing purposes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-octet\-count\fP -.RS 4 -Use the \c -.URL "https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6587" "RFC 6587" "" -octet counting framing method for sending messages. When this option is not used, the default is no framing on UDP, and RFC6587 non\-transparent framing (also known as octet stuffing) on TCP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-port\fP \fIport\fP -.RS 4 -Use the specified \fIport\fP. When this option is not specified, the port defaults to syslog for udp and to syslog\-conn for tcp connections. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-priority\fP \fIpriority\fP -.RS 4 -Enter the message into the log with the specified \fIpriority\fP. The priority may be specified numerically or as a \fIfacility\fP.\fIlevel\fP pair. For example, \fB\-p local3.info\fP logs the message as informational in the local3 facility. The default is \fBuser.notice\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-prio\-prefix\fP -.RS 4 -Look for a syslog prefix on every line read from standard input. This prefix is a decimal number within angle brackets that encodes both the facility and the level. The number is constructed by multiplying the facility by 8 and then adding the level. For example, \fBlocal0.info\fP, meaning facility=16 and level=6, becomes \fB<134>\fP. -.sp -If the prefix contains no facility, the facility defaults to what is specified by the \fB\-p\fP option. Similarly, if no prefix is provided, the line is logged using the \fIpriority\fP given with \fB\-p\fP. -.sp -This option doesn\(cqt affect a command\-line message. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-rfc3164\fP -.RS 4 -Use the \c -.URL "https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3164" "RFC 3164" "" -BSD syslog protocol to submit messages to a remote server. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-rfc5424\fP[\fB=\fP\fIwithout\fP] -.RS 4 -Use the \c -.URL "https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5424" "RFC 5424" "" -syslog protocol to submit messages to a remote server. The optional \fIwithout\fP argument can be a comma\-separated list of the following values: \fBnotq\fP, \fBnotime\fP, \fBnohost\fP. -.sp -The \fBnotq\fP value suppresses the time\-quality structured data from the submitted message. The time\-quality information shows whether the local clock was synchronized plus the maximum number of microseconds the timestamp might be off. The time quality is also automatically suppressed when \fB\-\-sd\-id timeQuality\fP is specified. -.sp -The \fBnotime\fP value (which implies \fBnotq\fP) suppresses the complete sender timestamp that is in ISO\-8601 format, including microseconds and timezone. -.sp -The \fBnohost\fP value suppresses \fBgethostname\fP(2) information from the message header. -.sp -The RFC 5424 protocol has been the default for \fBlogger\fP since version 2.26. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-stderr\fP -.RS 4 -Output the message to standard error as well as to the system log. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-sd\-id\fP \fIname\fP[\fB@\fP\fIdigits\fP] -.RS 4 -Specifies a structured data element ID for an RFC 5424 message header. The option has to be used before \fB\-\-sd\-param\fP to introduce a new element. The number of structured data elements is unlimited. The ID (\fIname\fP plus possibly \fB@\fP\fIdigits\fP) is case\-sensitive and uniquely identifies the type and purpose of the element. The same ID must not exist more than once in a message. The \fB@\fP\fIdigits\fP part is required for user\-defined non\-standardized IDs. -.sp -\fBlogger\fP currently generates the \fBtimeQuality\fP standardized element only. RFC 5424 also describes the elements \fBorigin\fP (with parameters ip, enterpriseId, software and swVersion) and \fBmeta\fP (with parameters sequenceId, sysUpTime and language). These element IDs may be specified without the \fB@\fP\fIdigits\fP suffix. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-sd\-param\fP \fIname\fP=\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies a structured data element parameter, a name and value pair. The option has to be used after \fB\-\-sd\-id\fP and may be specified more than once for the same element. Note that the quotation marks around \fIvalue\fP are required and must be escaped on the command line. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - logger \-\-rfc5424 \-\-sd\-id zoo@123 \(rs - \-\-sd\-param tiger="hungry" \(rs - \-\-sd\-param zebra="running" \(rs - \-\-sd\-id manager@123 \(rs - \-\-sd\-param onMeeting="yes" \(rs - "this is message" -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -produces: -.sp -\fB<13>1 2015\-10\-01T14:07:59.168662+02:00 ws kzak \- \- [timeQuality tzKnown="1" isSynced="1" syncAccuracy="218616"][zoo@123 tiger="hungry" zebra="running"][manager@123 onMeeting="yes"] this is message\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Sets the maximum permitted message size to \fIsize\fP. The default is 1KiB characters, which is the limit traditionally used and specified in RFC 3164. With RFC 5424, this limit has become flexible. A good assumption is that RFC 5424 receivers can at least process 4KiB messages. -.sp -Most receivers accept messages larger than 1KiB over any type of syslog protocol. As such, the \fB\-\-size\fP option affects \fBlogger\fP in all cases (not only when \fB\-\-rfc5424\fP was used). -.sp -Note: the message\-size limit limits the overall message size, including the syslog header. Header sizes vary depending on the selected options and the hostname length. As a rule of thumb, headers are usually not longer than 50 to 80 characters. When selecting a maximum message size, it is important to ensure that the receiver supports the max size as well, otherwise messages may become truncated. Again, as a rule of thumb two to four KiB message size should generally be OK, whereas anything larger should be verified to work. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-socket\-errors\fP[\fB=\fP\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Print errors about Unix socket connections. The \fImode\fP can be a value of \fBoff\fP, \fBon\fP, or \fBauto\fP. When the mode is \fBauto\fP, then \fBlogger\fP will detect if the init process is \fBsystemd\fP(1), and if so assumption is made \fI/dev/log\fP can be used early at boot. Other init systems lack of \fI/dev/log\fP will not cause errors that is identical with messaging using \fBopenlog\fP(3) system call. The \fBlogger\fP(1) before version 2.26 used openlog, and hence was unable to detected loss of messages sent to Unix sockets. -.sp -The default mode is \fBauto\fP. When errors are not enabled lost messages are not communicated and will result to successful exit status of \fBlogger\fP(1) invocation. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-tcp\fP -.RS 4 -Use stream (TCP) only. By default the connection is tried to the \fIsyslog\-conn\fP port defined in \fI/etc/services\fP, which is often \fI601\fP. -.sp -See also \fB\-\-server\fP and \fB\-\-socket\fP to specify where to connect. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-tag\fP \fItag\fP -.RS 4 -Mark every line to be logged with the specified \fItag\fP. The default tag is the name of the user logged in on the terminal (or a user name based on effective user ID). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-socket\fP \fIsocket\fP -.RS 4 -Write to the specified \fIsocket\fP instead of to the system log socket. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-\fP -.RS 4 -End the argument list. This allows the \fImessage\fP to start with a hyphen (\-). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -The \fBlogger\fP utility exits 0 on success, and >0 if an error occurs. -.SH "FACILITIES AND LEVELS" -.sp -Valid facility names are: -.sp -\fBauth\fP -.br -\fBauthpriv\fP for security information of a sensitive nature -.br -\fBcron\fP -.br -.sp -\fBdaemon\fP -.br -\fBftp\fP -.br -\fBkern\fP cannot be generated from userspace process, automatically converted to \fBuser\fP -.br -.sp -\fBlpr\fP -.br -\fBmail\fP -.br -\fBnews\fP -.br -\fBsyslog\fP -.br -\fBuser\fP -.br -\fBuucp\fP -.br -\fBlocal0\fP -.br -to -.br -\fBlocal7\fP -.br -\fBsecurity\fP deprecated synonym for \fBauth\fP -.sp -Valid level names are: -.sp -\fBemerg\fP -.br -\fBalert\fP -.br -\fBcrit\fP -.br -\fBerr\fP -.br -\fBwarning\fP -.br -\fBnotice\fP -.br -\fBinfo\fP -.br -\fBdebug\fP -.br -\fBpanic\fP deprecated synonym for \fBemerg\fP -.br -\fBerror\fP deprecated synonym for \fBerr\fP -.br -\fBwarn\fP deprecated synonym for \fBwarning\fP -.br -.sp -For the priority order and intended purposes of these facilities and levels, see \fBsyslog\fP(3). -.SH "CONFORMING TO" -.sp -The \fBlogger\fP command is expected to be IEEE Std 1003.2 ("POSIX.2") compatible. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -\fBlogger System rebooted\fP \fBlogger \-p local0.notice \-t HOSTIDM \-f /dev/idmc\fP \fBlogger \-n loghost.example.com System rebooted\fP -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -The \fBlogger\fP command was originally written by University of California in 1983\-1993 and later rewritten by \c -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "," -.MTO "rgerhards\(atadiscon.com" "Rainer Gerhards" "," -and -.MTO "kerolasa\(atiki.fi" "Sami Kerola" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBjournalctl\fP(1), -\fBsyslog\fP(3), -\fBsystemd.journal\-fields\fP(7) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlogger\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/login.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/login.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 58006f91..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/login.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,221 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: login -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LOGIN" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -login \- begin session on the system -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlogin\fP [\fB\-p\fP] [\fB\-h\fP \fIhost\fP] [\fB\-H\fP] [\fB\-f\fP \fIusername\fP|\fIusername\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlogin\fP is used when signing onto a system. If no argument is given, \fBlogin\fP prompts for the username. -.sp -The user is then prompted for a password, where appropriate. Echoing is disabled to prevent revealing the password. Only a number of password failures are permitted before \fBlogin\fP exits and the communications link is severed. See \fBLOGIN_RETRIES\fP in CONFIG FILE ITEMS section. -.sp -If password aging has been enabled for the account, the user may be prompted for a new password before proceeding. In such case old password must be provided and the new password entered before continuing. Please refer to \fBpasswd\fP(1) for more information. -.sp -The user and group ID will be set according to their values in the \fI/etc/passwd\fP file. There is one exception if the user ID is zero. In this case, only the primary group ID of the account is set. This should allow the system administrator to login even in case of network problems. The environment variable values for \fB$HOME\fP, \fB$USER\fP, \fB$SHELL\fP, \fB$PATH\fP, \fB$LOGNAME\fP, and \fB$MAIL\fP are set according to the appropriate fields in the password entry. \fB$PATH\fP defaults to \fI/usr/local/bin:/bin:/usr/bin\fP for normal users, and to \fI/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin\fP for root, if not otherwise configured. -.sp -The environment variable \fB$TERM\fP will be preserved, if it exists, else it will be initialized to the terminal type on your tty. Other environment variables are preserved if the \fB\-p\fP option is given. -.sp -Then the user\(cqs shell is started. If no shell is specified for the user in \fI/etc/passwd\fP, then \fI/bin/sh\fP is used. If there is no home directory specified in \fI/etc/passwd\fP, then \fI/\fP is used, followed by \fI.hushlogin\fP check as described below. -.sp -If the file \fI.hushlogin\fP exists, then a "quiet" login is performed. This disables the checking of mail and the printing of the last login time and message of the day. Otherwise, if \fI/var/log/lastlog\fP exists, the last login time is printed, and the current login is recorded. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-p\fP -.RS 4 -Used by \fBgetty\fP(8) to tell \fBlogin\fP to preserve the environment. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP -.RS 4 -Used to skip a login authentication. This option is usually used by the \fBgetty\fP(8) autologin feature. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP -.RS 4 -Used by other servers (such as \fBtelnetd\fP(8) to pass the name of the remote host to \fBlogin\fP so that it can be placed in utmp and wtmp. Only the superuser is allowed use this option. -.sp -Note that the \fB\-h\fP option has an impact on the \fBPAM service\fP \fBname\fP. The standard service name is \fIlogin\fP, but with the \fB\-h\fP option, the name is \fIremote\fP. It is necessary to create proper PAM config files (for example, \fI/etc/pam.d/login\fP and \fI/etc/pam.d/remote\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-H\fP -.RS 4 -Used by other servers (for example, \fBtelnetd\fP(8)) to tell \fBlogin\fP that printing the hostname should be suppressed in the login: prompt. See also \fBLOGIN_PLAIN_PROMPT\fP below. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "CONFIG FILE ITEMS" -.sp -\fBlogin\fP reads the \fI/etc/login.defs\fP configuration file (see login.defs(5)). Note that the configuration file could be distributed with another package (usually shadow\-utils). The following configuration items are relevant for \fBlogin\fP: -.sp -\fBMOTD_FILE\fP (string) -.RS 4 -Specifies a ":" delimited list of "message of the day" files and directories to be displayed upon login. If the specified path is a directory then displays all files with .motd file extension in version\-sort order from the directory. -.sp -The default value is \fI/usr/share/misc/motd:/run/motd:/etc/motd\fP. If the \fBMOTD_FILE\fP item is empty or a quiet login is enabled, then the message of the day is not displayed. Note that the same functionality is also provided by the \fBpam_motd\fP(8) PAM module. -.sp -The directories in the \fBMOTD_FILE\fP are supported since version 2.36. -.sp -Note that \fBlogin\fP does not implement any filenames overriding behavior like pam_motd (see also \fBMOTD_FIRSTONLY\fP), but all content from all files is displayed. It is recommended to keep extra logic in content generators and use \fI/run/motd.d\fP rather than rely on overriding behavior hardcoded in system tools. -.RE -.sp -\fBMOTD_FIRSTONLY\fP (boolean) -.RS 4 -Forces \fBlogin\fP to stop display content specified by \fBMOTD_FILE\fP after the first accessible item in the list. Note that a directory is one item in this case. This option allows \fBlogin\fP semantics to be configured to be more compatible with pam_motd. The default value is \fIno\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBLOGIN_PLAIN_PROMPT\fP (boolean) -.RS 4 -Tell \fBlogin\fP that printing the hostname should be suppressed in the login: prompt. This is an alternative to the \fB\-H\fP command line option. The default value is \fIno\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBLOGIN_TIMEOUT\fP (number) -.RS 4 -Maximum time in seconds for login. The default value is \fI60\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBLOGIN_RETRIES\fP (number) -.RS 4 -Maximum number of login retries in case of a bad password. The default value is \fI3\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBLOGIN_KEEP_USERNAME\fP (boolean) -.RS 4 -Tell \fBlogin\fP to only re\-prompt for the password if authentication failed, but the username is valid. The default value is \fIno\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBFAIL_DELAY\fP (number) -.RS 4 -Delay in seconds before being allowed another three tries after a login failure. The default value is \fI5\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBTTYPERM\fP (string) -.RS 4 -The terminal permissions. The default value is \fI0600\fP or \fI0620\fP if tty group is used. -.RE -.sp -\fBTTYGROUP\fP (string) -.RS 4 -The login tty will be owned by the \fBTTYGROUP\fP. The default value is \fItty\fP. If the \fBTTYGROUP\fP does not exist, then the ownership of the terminal is set to the user\(cqs primary group. -.sp -The \fBTTYGROUP\fP can be either the name of a group or a numeric group identifier. -.RE -.sp -\fBHUSHLOGIN_FILE\fP (string) -.RS 4 -If defined, this file can inhibit all the usual chatter during the login sequence. If a full pathname (for example, \fI/etc/hushlogins\fP) is specified, then hushed mode will be enabled if the user\(cqs name or shell are found in the file. If this global hush login file is empty then the hushed mode will be enabled for all users. -.sp -If a full pathname is not specified, then hushed mode will be enabled if the file exists in the user\(cqs home directory. -.sp -The default is to check \fI/etc/hushlogins\fP and if it does not exist then \fI~/.hushlogin\fP. -.sp -If the \fBHUSHLOGIN_FILE\fP item is empty, then all the checks are disabled. -.RE -.sp -\fBDEFAULT_HOME\fP (boolean) -.RS 4 -Indicate if login is allowed if we cannot change directory to the home directory. If set to \fIyes\fP, the user will login in the root (/) directory if it is not possible to change directory to their home. The default value is \fIyes\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBLASTLOG_UID_MAX\fP (unsigned number) -.RS 4 -Highest user ID number for which the \fIlastlog\fP entries should be updated. As higher user IDs are usually tracked by remote user identity and authentication services there is no need to create a huge sparse \fIlastlog\fP file for them. No LASTLOG_UID_MAX option present in the configuration means that there is no user ID limit for writing \fIlastlog\fP entries. The default value is \fIULONG_MAX\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBLOG_UNKFAIL_ENAB\fP (boolean) -.RS 4 -Enable display of unknown usernames when login failures are recorded. The default value is \fIno\fP. -.sp -Note that logging unknown usernames may be a security issue if a user enters their password instead of their login name. -.RE -.sp -\fBENV_PATH\fP (string) -.RS 4 -If set, it will be used to define the \fBPATH\fP environment variable when a regular user logs in. The default value is \fI/usr/local/bin:/bin:/usr/bin\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBENV_ROOTPATH\fP (string), \fBENV_SUPATH\fP (string) -.RS 4 -If set, it will be used to define the PATH environment variable when the superuser logs in. \fBENV_ROOTPATH\fP takes precedence. The default value is \fI/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin\fP. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/var/run/utmp\fP, -\fI/var/log/wtmp\fP, -\fI/var/log/lastlog\fP, -\fI/var/spool/mail/*\fP, -\fI/etc/motd\fP, -\fI/etc/passwd\fP, -\fI/etc/nologin\fP, -\fI/etc/pam.d/login\fP, -\fI/etc/pam.d/remote\fP, -\fI/etc/hushlogins\fP, -\fI$HOME/.hushlogin\fP -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -The undocumented BSD \fB\-r\fP option is not supported. This may be required by some \fBrlogind\fP(8) programs. -.sp -A recursive login, as used to be possible in the good old days, no longer works; for most purposes \fBsu\fP(1) is a satisfactory substitute. Indeed, for security reasons, \fBlogin\fP does a \fBvhangup\fP(2) system call to remove any possible listening processes on the tty. This is to avoid password sniffing. If one uses the command \fBlogin\fP, then the surrounding shell gets killed by \fBvhangup\fP(2) because it\(cqs no longer the true owner of the tty. This can be avoided by using \fBexec login\fP in a top\-level shell or xterm. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Derived from BSD login 5.40 (5/9/89) by \c -.MTO "glad\(atdaimi.dk" "Michael Glad" "" -for HP\-UX. Ported to Linux 0.12: -.MTO "poe\(atdaimi.aau.dk" "Peter Orbaek" "." -Rewritten to a PAM\-only version by -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmail\fP(1), -\fBpasswd\fP(1), -\fBpasswd\fP(5), -\fButmp\fP(5), -\fBenviron\fP(7), -\fBgetty\fP(8), -\fBinit\fP(8), -\fBlastlog\fP(8), -\fBshutdown\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlogin\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/logname.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/logname.1 index 9e5b6210..539cb2da 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/logname.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/logname.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH LOGNAME "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH LOGNAME "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME logname \- print user\'s login name .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/look.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/look.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c1f3ea92..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/look.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: look -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LOOK" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -look \- display lines beginning with a given string -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlook\fP [options] \fIstring\fP [\fIfile\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBlook\fP utility displays any lines in \fIfile\fP which contain \fIstring\fP. As \fBlook\fP performs a binary search, the lines in \fIfile\fP must be sorted (where \fBsort\fP(1) was given the same options \fB\-d\fP and/or \fB\-f\fP that \fBlook\fP is invoked with). -.sp -If \fIfile\fP is not specified, the file \fI/usr/share/dict/words\fP is used, only alphanumeric characters are compared and the case of alphabetic characters is ignored. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-alternative\fP -.RS 4 -Use the alternative dictionary file. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-alphanum\fP -.RS 4 -Use normal dictionary character set and order, i.e., only blanks and alphanumeric characters are compared. This is on by default if no file is specified. -.sp -Note that blanks have been added to dictionary character set for compatibility with \fBsort \-d\fP command since version 2.28. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-ignore\-case\fP -.RS 4 -Ignore the case of alphabetic characters. This is on by default if no file is specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-terminate\fP \fIcharacter\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a string termination character, i.e., only the characters in \fIstring\fP up to and including the first occurrence of \fIcharacter\fP are compared. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -The \fBlook\fP utility exits 0 if one or more lines were found and displayed, 1 if no lines were found, and >1 if an error occurred. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -\fBWORDLIST\fP -.RS 4 -Path to a dictionary file. The environment variable has greater priority than the dictionary path defined in FILES segment. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/usr/share/dict/words\fP -.RS 4 -the dictionary -.RE -.sp -\fI/usr/share/dict/web2\fP -.RS 4 -the alternative dictionary -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBlook\fP utility appeared in Version 7 AT&T Unix. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -sort \-d /etc/passwd \-o /tmp/look.dict -look \-t: root:foobar /tmp/look.dict -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBgrep\fP(1), -\fBsort\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlook\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ls.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ls.1 index 8aa6e2a4..ca8154e5 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ls.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ls.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH LS "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH LS "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME ls \- list directory contents .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lscpu.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lscpu.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f5835b5b..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lscpu.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,161 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lscpu -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSCPU" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lscpu \- display information about the CPU architecture -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlscpu\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlscpu\fP gathers CPU architecture information from \fIsysfs\fP, \fI/proc/cpuinfo\fP and any applicable architecture\-specific libraries (e.g. \fBlibrtas\fP on Powerpc). The command output can be optimized for parsing or for easy readability by humans. The information includes, for example, the number of CPUs, threads, cores, sockets, and Non\-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) nodes. There is also information about the CPU caches and cache sharing, family, model, bogoMIPS, byte order, and stepping. -.sp -The default output formatting on terminal is subject to change and maybe optimized for better readability. The output for non\-terminals (e.g., pipes) is never affected by this optimization and it is always in "Field: data\(rsn" format. Use for example "\fBlscpu | less\fP" to see the default output without optimizations. -.sp -In virtualized environments, the CPU architecture information displayed reflects the configuration of the guest operating system which is typically different from the physical (host) system. On architectures that support retrieving physical topology information, \fBlscpu\fP also displays the number of physical sockets, chips, cores in the host system. -.sp -Options that result in an output table have a \fIlist\fP argument. Use this argument to customize the command output. Specify a comma\-separated list of column labels to limit the output table to only the specified columns, arranged in the specified order. See \fBCOLUMNS\fP for a list of valid column labels. The column labels are not case sensitive. -.sp -Not all columns are supported on all architectures. If an unsupported column is specified, \fBlscpu\fP prints the column but does not provide any data for it. -.sp -The cache sizes are reported as summary from all CPUs. The versions before v2.34 reported per\-core sizes, but this output was confusing due to complicated CPUs topology and the way how caches are shared between CPUs. For more details about caches see \fB\-\-cache\fP. Since version v2.37 \fBlscpu\fP follows cache IDs as provided by Linux kernel and it does not always start from zero. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Include lines for online and offline CPUs in the output (default for \fB\-e\fP). This option may only be specified together with option \fB\-e\fP or \fB\-p\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the sizes in bytes rather than in a human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-online\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the output to online CPUs (default for \fB\-p\fP). This option may only be specified together with option \fB\-e\fP or \fB\-p\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-caches\fP[=\fIlist\fP] -.RS 4 -Display details about CPU caches. For details about available information see \fB\-\-help\fP output. -.sp -If the \fIlist\fP argument is omitted, all columns for which data is available are included in the command output. -.sp -When specifying the \fIlist\fP argument, the string of option, equal sign (=), and \fIlist\fP must not contain any blanks or other whitespace. Examples: \(aq\fB\-C=NAME,ONE\-SIZE\fP\(aq or \(aq\fB\-\-caches=NAME,ONE\-SIZE\fP\(aq. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if list is specified in the format +list (e.g., lscpu \-C=+ALLOC\-POLICY). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-offline\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the output to offline CPUs. This option may only be specified together with option \fB\-e\fP or \fB\-p\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-extended\fP[=\fIlist\fP] -.RS 4 -Display the CPU information in human\-readable format. -.sp -If the \fIlist\fP argument is omitted, the default columns are included in the command output. The default output is subject to change. -.sp -When specifying the \fIlist\fP argument, the string of option, equal sign (=), and \fIlist\fP must not contain any blanks or other whitespace. Examples: \(aq\fB\-e=cpu,node\fP\(aq or \(aq\fB\-\-extended=cpu,node\fP\(aq. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if list is specified in the format +list (e.g., lscpu \-e=+MHZ). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format for the default summary or extended output (see \fB\-\-extended\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-parse\fP[=\fIlist\fP] -.RS 4 -Optimize the command output for easy parsing. -.sp -If the \fIlist\fP argument is omitted, the command output is compatible with earlier versions of \fBlscpu\fP. In this compatible format, two commas are used to separate CPU cache columns. If no CPU caches are identified the cache column is omitted. If the \fIlist\fP argument is used, cache columns are separated with a colon (:). -.sp -When specifying the \fIlist\fP argument, the string of option, equal sign (=), and \fIlist\fP must not contain any blanks or other whitespace. Examples: \(aq\fB\-p=cpu,node\fP\(aq or \(aq\fB\-\-parse=cpu,node\fP\(aq. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if list is specified in the format +list (e.g., lscpu \-p=+MHZ). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-sysroot\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Gather CPU data for a Linux instance other than the instance from which the \fBlscpu\fP command is issued. The specified \fIdirectory\fP is the system root of the Linux instance to be inspected. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-hex\fP -.RS 4 -Use hexadecimal masks for CPU sets (for example "ff"). The default is to print the sets in list format (for example 0,1). Note that before version 2.30 the mask has been printed with 0x prefix. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-y\fP, \fB\-\-physical\fP -.RS 4 -Display physical IDs for all columns with topology elements (core, socket, etc.). Other than logical IDs, which are assigned by \fBlscpu\fP, physical IDs are platform\-specific values that are provided by the kernel. Physical IDs are not necessarily unique and they might not be arranged sequentially. If the kernel could not retrieve a physical ID for an element \fBlscpu\fP prints the dash (\-) character. -.sp -The CPU logical numbers are not affected by this option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. This option must be combined with either \fB\-\-extended\fP, \fB\-\-parse\fP or \fB\-\-caches\fP. -.RE -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -The basic overview of CPU family, model, etc. is always based on the first CPU only. -.sp -Sometimes in Xen Dom0 the kernel reports wrong data. -.sp -On virtual hardware the number of cores per socket, etc. can be wrong. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "qcai\(atredhat.com" "Cai Qian" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "," -.MTO "heiko.carstens\(atde.ibm.com" "Heiko Carstens" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlscpu\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lsipc.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lsipc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9847b8c6..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lsipc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,183 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lsipc -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSIPC" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lsipc \- show information on IPC facilities currently employed in the system -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlsipc\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlsipc\fP shows information on the System V inter\-process communication facilities for which the calling process has read access. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-id\fP \fIid\fP -.RS 4 -Show full details on just the one resource element identified by \fIid\fP. This option needs to be combined with one of the three resource options: \fB\-m\fP, \fB\-q\fP or \fB\-s\fP. It is possible to override the default output format for this option with the \fB\-\-list\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP or \fB\-\-export\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-global\fP -.RS 4 -Show system\-wide usage and limits of IPC resources. This option may be combined with one of the three resource options: \fB\-m\fP, \fB\-q\fP or \fB\-s\fP. The default is to show information about all resources. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SS "Resource options" -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-shmems\fP -.RS 4 -Write information about active shared memory segments. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-queues\fP -.RS 4 -Write information about active message queues. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-semaphores\fP -.RS 4 -Write information about active semaphore sets. -.RE -.SS "Output formatting" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-creator\fP -.RS 4 -Show creator and owner. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-export\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in the form of key="value" pairs. All potentially unsafe value characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). The key (variable name) will be modified to contain only characters allowed for a shell variable identifiers, for example, USE_PCT instead of USE%. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use the JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Use the list output format. This is the default, except when \fB\-\-id\fP is used. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-newline\fP -.RS 4 -Display each piece of information on a separate line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-notruncate\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt truncate output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print size in bytes rather than in human readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Raw output (no columnation). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP -.RS 4 -Write time information. The time of the last control operation that changed the access permissions for all facilities, the time of the last \fBmsgsnd\fP(2) and \fBmsgrcv\fP(2) operations on message queues, the time of the last \fBshmat\fP(2) and \fBshmdt\fP(2) operations on shared memory, and the time of the last \fBsemop\fP(2) operation on semaphores. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-time\-format\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Display dates in short, full or iso format. The default is short, this time format is designed to be space efficient and human readable. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-numeric\-perms\fP -.RS 4 -Print numeric permissions in PERMS column. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -0 -.RS 4 -if OK, -.RE -.sp -1 -.RS 4 -if incorrect arguments specified, -.RE -.sp -2 -.RS 4 -if a serious error occurs. -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBlsipc\fP utility is inspired by the \fBipcs\fP(1) utility. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "ooprala\(atredhat.com" "Ondrej Oprala" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBipcmk\fP(1), -\fBipcrm\fP(1), -\fBmsgrcv\fP(2), -\fBmsgsnd\fP(2), -\fBsemget\fP(2), -\fBsemop\fP(2), -\fBshmat\fP(2), -\fBshmdt\fP(2), -\fBshmget\fP(2), -\fBsysvipc\fP(7) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlsipc\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lsirq.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lsirq.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 841a8bd7..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lsirq.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,93 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lsirq -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSIRQ" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lsirq \- utility to display kernel interrupt information -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlsirq\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Display kernel interrupt counter information. -.sp -The default output is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using \fB\-\-output\fP. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt print headings. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. The default list of columns may be extended if list is specified in the format \fI+list\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-sort\fP \fIcolumn\fP -.RS 4 -Specify sort criteria by column name. See \fB\-\-help\fP output to get column names. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in the form of key="value" pairs. All potentially unsafe characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-softirq\fP -.RS 4 -Show softirqs information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "pizhenwei\(atbytedance.com" "Zhenwei Pi" "," -.MTO "kerolasa\(atiki.fi" "Sami Kerola" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlsirq\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lslogins.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lslogins.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ef1eea62..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lslogins.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,211 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lslogins -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSLOGINS" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lslogins \- display information about known users in the system -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlslogins\fP [options] [\fB\-s\fP|\fB\-u\fP[=\fIUID\fP]] [\fB\-g\fP \fIgroups\fP] [\fB\-l\fP \fIlogins\fP] [\fIusername\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Examine the wtmp and btmp logs, \fI/etc/shadow\fP (if necessary) and \fI/passwd\fP and output the desired data. -.sp -The optional argument \fIusername\fP forces \fBlslogins\fP to print all available details about the specified user only. In this case the output format is different than in case of \fB\-l\fP or \fB\-g\fP and unknown is \fIusername\fP reported as an error. -.sp -The default action is to list info about all the users in the system. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too. -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-acc\-expiration\fP -.RS 4 -Display data about the date of last password change and the account expiration date (see \fBshadow\fP(5) for more info). (Requires root privileges.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-btmp\-file\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Alternate path for btmp. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-colon\-separate\fP -.RS 4 -Separate info about each user with a colon instead of a newline. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-export\fP -.RS 4 -Output data in the format of NAME=VALUE. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-failed\fP -.RS 4 -Display data about the users\(aq last failed login attempts. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-G\fP, \fB\-\-supp\-groups\fP -.RS 4 -Show information about supplementary groups. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-groups\fP=\fIgroups\fP -.RS 4 -Only show data of users belonging to \fIgroups\fP. More than one group may be specified; the list has to be comma\-separated. Unknown group names are ignored. -.sp -Note that relation between user and group may be invisible for primary group if the user is not explicitly specify as group member (e.g., in \fI/etc/group\fP). If the command \fBlslogins\fP scans for groups than it uses groups database only, and user database with primary GID is not used at all. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-last\fP -.RS 4 -Display data containing information about the users\(aq last login sessions. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-logins\fP=\fIlogins\fP -.RS 4 -Only show data of users with a login specified in \fIlogins\fP (user names or user IDS). More than one login may be specified; the list has to be comma\-separated. Unknown login names are ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-newline\fP -.RS 4 -Display each piece of information on a separate line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-notruncate\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt truncate output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pwd\fP -.RS 4 -Display information related to login by password (see also \fB\-afL).\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Raw output (no columnation). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-system\-accs\fP -.RS 4 -Show system accounts. These are by default all accounts with a UID between 101 and 999 (inclusive), with the exception of either nobody or nfsnobody (UID 65534). This hardcoded default may be overwritten by parameters SYS_UID_MIN and SYS_UID_MAX in the file \fI/etc/login.defs\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-time\-format\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Display dates in short, full or iso format. The default is short, this time format is designed to be space efficient and human readable. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-user\-accs\fP -.RS 4 -Show user accounts. These are by default all accounts with UID above 1000 (inclusive), with the exception of either nobody or nfsnobody (UID 65534). This hardcoded default maybe overwritten by parameters UID_MIN and UID_MAX in the file \fI/etc/login.defs\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-wtmp\-file\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Alternate path for wtmp. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lastlog\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Alternate path for \fBlastlog\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-Z\fP, \fB\-\-context\fP -.RS 4 -Display the users\(aq security context. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-print0\fP -.RS 4 -Delimit user entries with a nul character, instead of a newline. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -0 -.RS 4 -if OK, -.RE -.sp -1 -.RS 4 -if incorrect arguments specified, -.RE -.sp -2 -.RS 4 -if a serious error occurs (e.g., a corrupt log). -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The default UID thresholds are read from \fI/etc/login.defs\fP. -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBlslogins\fP utility is inspired by the \fBlogins\fP utility, which first appeared in FreeBSD 4.10. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "ooprala\(atredhat.com" "Ondrej Oprala" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBgroup\fP(5), -\fBpasswd\fP(5), -\fBshadow\fP(5), -\fButmp\fP(5) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlslogins\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lsmem.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lsmem.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e1e2a402..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lsmem.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,127 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lsmem -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSMEM" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lsmem \- list the ranges of available memory with their online status -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlsmem\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBlsmem\fP command lists the ranges of available memory with their online status. The listed memory blocks correspond to the memory block representation in sysfs. The command also shows the memory block size and the amount of memory in online and offline state. -.sp -The default output compatible with original implementation from s390\-tools, but it\(cqs strongly recommended to avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using the \fB\-\-output\fP option together with a columns list in environments where a stable output is required. -.sp -The \fBlsmem\fP command lists a new memory range always when the current memory block distinguish from the previous block by some output column. This default behavior is possible to override by the \fB\-\-split\fP option (e.g., \fBlsmem \-\-split=ZONES\fP). The special word "none" may be used to ignore all differences between memory blocks and to create as large as possible continuous ranges. The opposite semantic is \fB\-\-all\fP to list individual memory blocks. -.sp -Note that some output columns may provide inaccurate information if a split policy forces \fBlsmem\fP to ignore differences in some attributes. For example if you merge removable and non\-removable memory blocks to the one range than all the range will be marked as non\-removable on \fBlsmem\fP output. -.sp -Not all columns are supported on all systems. If an unsupported column is specified, \fBlsmem\fP prints the column but does not provide any data for it. -.sp -Use the \fB\-\-help\fP option to see the columns description. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -List each individual memory block, instead of combining memory blocks with similar attributes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the SIZE column in bytes rather than in a human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fB+\fP\fIlist\fP (e.g., \fBlsmem \-o +NODE\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in the form of key="value" pairs. All potentially unsafe value characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in raw format. All potentially unsafe characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-split\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which columns (attributes) use to split memory blocks to ranges. The supported columns are STATE, REMOVABLE, NODE and ZONES, or "none". The other columns are silently ignored. For more details see DESCRIPTION above. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-sysroot\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Gather memory data for a Linux instance other than the instance from which the \fBlsmem\fP command is issued. The specified \fIdirectory\fP is the system root of the Linux instance to be inspected. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-summary\fP[=\fIwhen\fP] -.RS 4 -This option controls summary lines output. The optional argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBnever\fP, \fBalways\fP or \fBonly\fP. If the \fIwhen\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"only"\fP. The summary output is suppressed for \fB\-\-raw\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP and \fB\-\-json\fP. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBlsmem\fP was originally written by Gerald Schaefer for s390\-tools in Perl. The C version for util\-linux was written by Clemens von Mann, Heiko Carstens and Karel Zak. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBchmem\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlsmem\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lzmainfo.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lzmainfo.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ce38eee5..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/lzmainfo.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ -.\" -.\" Author: Lasse Collin -.\" -.\" This file has been put into the public domain. -.\" You can do whatever you want with this file. -.\" -.TH LZMAINFO 1 "2013-06-30" "Tukaani" "XZ Utils" -.SH NAME -lzmainfo \- show information stored in the .lzma file header -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lzmainfo -.RB [ \-\-help ] -.RB [ \-\-version ] -.RI [ file... ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B lzmainfo -shows information stored in the -.B .lzma -file header. -It reads the first 13 bytes from the specified -.IR file , -decodes the header, and prints it to standard output in human -readable format. -If no -.I files -are given or -.I file -is -.BR \- , -standard input is read. -.PP -Usually the most interesting information is -the uncompressed size and the dictionary size. -Uncompressed size can be shown only if -the file is in the non-streamed -.B .lzma -format variant. -The amount of memory required to decompress the file is -a few dozen kilobytes plus the dictionary size. -.PP -.B lzmainfo -is included in XZ Utils primarily for -backward compatibility with LZMA Utils. -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.TP -.B 0 -All is good. -.TP -.B 1 -An error occurred. -.SH BUGS -.B lzmainfo -uses -.B MB -while the correct suffix would be -.B MiB -(2^20 bytes). -This is to keep the output compatible with LZMA Utils. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR xz (1) diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/machinectl.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/machinectl.1 index 4147de79..f4ba529b 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/machinectl.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/machinectl.1 @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Edit the settings file of the specified machines\&. For the format of the settin \fBsystemd.nspawn\fR(5)\&. If an existing settings file of the given machine can\*(Aqt be found, \fBedit\fR automatically create a new settings file from scratch under -/etc/ +/etc/systemd/nspawn/ .RE .PP \fBcat\fR \fINAME|FILE\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mcookie.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mcookie.1 deleted file mode 100644 index cc26c82f..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mcookie.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mcookie -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MCOOKIE" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mcookie \- generate magic cookies for xauth -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmcookie\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBmcookie\fP generates a 128\-bit random hexadecimal number for use with the X authority system. Typical usage: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBxauth add :0 . \f(CRmcookie\fP\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The "random" number generated is actually the MD5 message digest of random information coming from one of the sources \fBgetrandom\fP(2) system call, \fI/dev/urandom\fP, \fI/dev/random\fP, or the \fIlibc pseudo\-random functions\fP, in this preference order. See also the option \fB\-\-file\fP. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-file\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Use this \fIfile\fP as an additional source of randomness (for example \fI/dev/urandom\fP). When \fIfile\fP is \(aq\-\(aq, characters are read from standard input. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-max\-size\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Read from \fIfile\fP only this \fInumber\fP of bytes. This option is meant to be used when reading additional randomness from a file or device. -.sp -The \fInumber\fP argument may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB=1024, MiB=1024*1024, and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB=1000, MB=1000*1000, and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Inform where randomness originated, with amount of entropy read from each source. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/dev/urandom\fP -.sp -\fI/dev/random\fP -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -It is assumed that none of the randomness sources will block. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmd5sum\fP(1), -\fBX\fP(7), -\fBxauth\fP(1), -\fBrand\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmcookie\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/md5sum.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/md5sum.1 index e3be843a..58d28c99 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/md5sum.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/md5sum.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH MD5SUM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH MD5SUM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME md5sum \- compute and check MD5 message digest .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mesg.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mesg.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fd470d33..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mesg.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mesg -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MESG" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mesg \- display (or do not display) messages from other users -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmesg\fP [\fIoption\fP] [\fBn\fP|\fBy\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBmesg\fP utility is invoked by a user to control write access others have to the terminal device associated with standard error output. If write access is allowed, then programs such as \fBtalk\fP(1) and \fBwrite\fP(1) may display messages on the terminal. -.sp -Traditionally, write access is allowed by default. However, as users become more conscious of various security risks, there is a trend to remove write access by default, at least for the primary login shell. To make sure your ttys are set the way you want them to be set, \fBmesg\fP should be executed in your login scripts. -.sp -The \fBmesg\fP utility silently exits with error status 2 if not executed on terminal. In this case execute \fBmesg\fP is pointless. The command line option \fB\-\-verbose\fP forces mesg to print a warning in this situation. This behaviour has been introduced in version 2.33. -.SH "ARGUMENTS" -.sp -\fBn\fP -.RS 4 -Disallow messages. -.RE -.sp -\fBy\fP -.RS 4 -Allow messages to be displayed. -.RE -.sp -If no arguments are given, \fBmesg\fP shows the current message status on standard error output. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Explain what is being done. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -The \fBmesg\fP utility exits with one of the following values: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -Messages are allowed. -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -Messages are not allowed. -.RE -.sp -\fB>1\fP -.RS 4 -An error has occurred. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/dev/[pt]ty[pq]?\fP -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -A \fBmesg\fP command appeared in Version 6 AT&T UNIX. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlogin\fP(1), -\fBtalk\fP(1), -\fBwrite\fP(1), -\fBwall\fP(1), -\fBxterm\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmesg\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mkdir.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mkdir.1 index 4d994fa1..2e68d3ac 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mkdir.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mkdir.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH MKDIR "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH MKDIR "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME mkdir \- make directories .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mkfifo.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mkfifo.1 index 45d6d235..9d169d7a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mkfifo.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mkfifo.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH MKFIFO "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH MKFIFO "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME mkfifo \- make FIFOs (named pipes) .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mknod.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mknod.1 index 5445754e..d1507330 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mknod.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mknod.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH MKNOD "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH MKNOD "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME mknod \- make block or character special files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mktemp.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mktemp.1 index 236076c1..59d3e452 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mktemp.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mktemp.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH MKTEMP "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH MKTEMP "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME mktemp \- create a temporary file or directory .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/more.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/more.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 82e746b9..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/more.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,258 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: more -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MORE" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -more \- file perusal filter for crt viewing -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmore\fP [options] \fIfile\fP ... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBmore\fP is a filter for paging through text one screenful at a time. This version is especially primitive. Users should realize that \fBless\fP(1) provides \fBmore\fP(1) emulation plus extensive enhancements. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -Options are also taken from the environment variable \fBMORE\fP (make sure to precede them with a dash (\fB\-\fP)) but command\-line options will override those. -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-silent\fP -.RS 4 -Prompt with "[Press space to continue, \(aqq\(aq to quit.]", and display "[Press \(aqh\(aq for instructions.]" instead of ringing the bell when an illegal key is pressed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-logical\fP -.RS 4 -Do not pause after any line containing a \fB^L\fP (form feed). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-no\-pause\fP -.RS 4 -Count logical lines, rather than screen lines (i.e., long lines are not folded). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-print\-over\fP -.RS 4 -Do not scroll. Instead, clear the whole screen and then display the text. Notice that this option is switched on automatically if the executable is named \fBpage\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-clean\-print\fP -.RS 4 -Do not scroll. Instead, paint each screen from the top, clearing the remainder of each line as it is displayed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-squeeze\fP -.RS 4 -Squeeze multiple blank lines into one. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-plain\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress underlining. This option is silently ignored as backwards compatibility. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-lines\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the \fInumber\fP of lines per screenful. The \fInumber\fP argument is a positive decimal integer. The \fB\-\-lines\fP option shall override any values obtained from any other source, such as number of lines reported by terminal. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\fP\fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -A numeric option means the same as \fB\-\-lines\fP option argument. -.RE -.sp -\fB+\fP\fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Start displaying each file at line \fInumber\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB+\fP/\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -The \fIstring\fP to be searched in each file before starting to display it. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "COMMANDS" -.sp -Interactive commands for \fBmore\fP are based on \fBvi\fP(1). Some commands may be preceded by a decimal number, called k in the descriptions below. In the following descriptions, \fB^X\fP means \fBcontrol\-X\fP. -.sp -\fBh\fP or \fB?\fP -.RS 4 -Help; display a summary of these commands. If you forget all other commands, remember this one. -.RE -.sp -\fBSPACE\fP -.RS 4 -Display next k lines of text. Defaults to current screen size. -.RE -.sp -\fBz\fP -.RS 4 -Display next k lines of text. Defaults to current screen size. Argument becomes new default. -.RE -.sp -\fBRETURN\fP -.RS 4 -Display next k lines of text. Defaults to 1. Argument becomes new default. -.RE -.sp -\fBd\fP or \fB^D\fP -.RS 4 -Scroll k lines. Default is current scroll size, initially 11. Argument becomes new default. -.RE -.sp -\fBq\fP or \fBQ\fP or \fBINTERRUPT\fP -.RS 4 -Exit. -.RE -.sp -\fBs\fP -.RS 4 -Skip forward k lines of text. Defaults to 1. -.RE -.sp -\fBf\fP -.RS 4 -Skip forward k screenfuls of text. Defaults to 1. -.RE -.sp -\fBb\fP or \fB^B\fP -.RS 4 -Skip backwards k screenfuls of text. Defaults to 1. Only works with files, not pipes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -Go to the place where the last search started. -.RE -.sp -\fB=\fP -.RS 4 -Display current line number. -.RE -.sp -\fB/pattern\fP -.RS 4 -Search for kth occurrence of regular expression. Defaults to 1. -.RE -.sp -\fBn\fP -.RS 4 -Search for kth occurrence of last regular expression. Defaults to 1. -.RE -.sp -\fB!command\fP or \fB:!command\fP -.RS 4 -Execute \fIcommand\fP in a subshell. -.RE -.sp -\fBv\fP -.RS 4 -Start up an editor at current line. The editor is taken from the environment variable \fBVISUAL\fP if defined, or \fBEDITOR\fP if \fBVISUAL\fP is not defined, or defaults to \fBvi\fP(1) if neither \fBVISUAL\fP nor \fBEDITOR\fP is defined. -.RE -.sp -\fB^L\fP -.RS 4 -Redraw screen. -.RE -.sp -\fB:n\fP -.RS 4 -Go to kth next file. Defaults to 1. -.RE -.sp -\fB:p\fP -.RS 4 -Go to kth previous file. Defaults to 1. -.RE -.sp -\fB:f\fP -.RS 4 -Display current file name and line number. -.RE -.sp -\fB.\fP -.RS 4 -Repeat previous command. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -The \fBmore\fP command respects the following environment variables, if they exist: -.sp -\fBMORE\fP -.RS 4 -This variable may be set with favored options to \fBmore\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBSHELL\fP -.RS 4 -Current shell in use (normally set by the shell at login time). -.RE -.sp -\fBTERM\fP -.RS 4 -The terminal type used by \fBmore\fP to get the terminal characteristics necessary to manipulate the screen. -.RE -.sp -\fBVISUAL\fP -.RS 4 -The editor the user prefers. Invoked when command key \fIv\fP is pressed. -.RE -.sp -\fBEDITOR\fP -.RS 4 -The editor of choice when \fBVISUAL\fP is not specified. -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBmore\fP command appeared in 3.0BSD. This man page documents \fBmore\fP version 5.19 (Berkeley 6/29/88), which is currently in use in the Linux community. Documentation was produced using several other versions of the man page, and extensive inspection of the source code. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Eric Shienbrood, UC Berkeley. -.sp -Modified by Geoff Peck, UCB to add underlining, single spacing. -.sp -Modified by John Foderaro, UCB to add \-c and MORE environment variable. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBless\fP(1), -\fBvi\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmore\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mountpoint.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mountpoint.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4923c05a..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mountpoint.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mountpoint -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MOUNTPOINT" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mountpoint \- see if a directory or file is a mountpoint -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmountpoint\fP [\fB\-d\fP|\fB\-q\fP] \fIdirectory\fP|\fIfile\fP -.sp -\fBmountpoint\fP \fB\-x\fP \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBmountpoint\fP checks whether the given \fIdirectory\fP or \fIfile\fP is mentioned in the \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP file. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-fs\-devno\fP -.RS 4 -Show the major/minor numbers of the device that is mounted on the given directory. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP -.RS 4 -Be quiet \- don\(cqt print anything. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-nofollow\fP -.RS 4 -Do not follow symbolic link if it the last element of the \fIdirectory\fP path. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-devno\fP -.RS 4 -Show the major/minor numbers of the given blockdevice on standard output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBmountpoint\fP has the following exit status values: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success; the directory is a mountpoint, or device is block device on \fB\-\-devno\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -failure; incorrect invocation, permissions or system error -.RE -.sp -\fB32\fP -.RS 4 -failure; the directory is not a mountpoint, or device is not a block device on \fB\-\-devno\fP -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libmount debug output. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The util\-linux \fBmountpoint\fP implementation was written from scratch for libmount. The original version for sysvinit suite was written by Miquel van Smoorenburg. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmountpoint\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mv.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mv.1 index 202706e6..9063fa22 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mv.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/mv.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH MV "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH MV "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME mv \- move (rename) files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/namei.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/namei.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 60de9306..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/namei.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: namei -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "NAMEI" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -namei \- follow a pathname until a terminal point is found -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBnamei\fP [options] \fIpathname\fP... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBnamei\fP interprets its arguments as pathnames to any type of Unix file (symlinks, files, directories, and so forth). \fBnamei\fP then follows each pathname until an endpoint is found (a file, a directory, a device node, etc). If it finds a symbolic link, it shows the link, and starts following it, indenting the output to show the context. -.sp -This program is useful for finding "too many levels of symbolic links" problems. -.sp -For each line of output, \fBnamei\fP uses the following characters to identify the file type found: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - f: = the pathname currently being resolved - d = directory - l = symbolic link (both the link and its contents are output) - s = socket - b = block device - c = character device - p = FIFO (named pipe) - \- = regular file - ? = an error of some kind -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -\fBnamei\fP prints an informative message when the maximum number of symbolic links this system can have has been exceeded. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-long\fP -.RS 4 -Use the long listing format (same as \fB\-m \-o \-v\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-modes\fP -.RS 4 -Show the mode bits of each file type in the style of \fBls\fP(1), for example \(aqrwxr\-xr\-x\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-nosymlinks\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt follow symlinks. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-owners\fP -.RS 4 -Show owner and group name of each file. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-vertical\fP -.RS 4 -Vertically align the modes and owners. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-mountpoints\fP -.RS 4 -Show mountpoint directories with a \(aqD\(aq rather than a \(aqd\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -To be discovered. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -The original \fBnamei\fP program was written by \c -.MTO "rogers\(atamadeus.wr.tek.com" "Roger Southwick" "." -.sp -The program was rewritten by Karel Zak \c -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBls\fP(1), -\fBstat\fP(1), -\fBsymlink\fP(7) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBnamei\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nice.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nice.1 index 62a11522..401c687e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nice.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nice.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH NICE "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH NICE "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME nice \- run a program with modified scheduling priority .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nl.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nl.1 index 713cdec1..584129c2 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nl.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nl.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH NL "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH NL "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME nl \- number lines of files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nohup.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nohup.1 index a32c8ab8..9450dac2 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nohup.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nohup.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH NOHUP "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH NOHUP "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME nohup \- run a command immune to hangups, with output to a non-tty .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nproc.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nproc.1 index 067824d2..4b04149e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nproc.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nproc.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH NPROC "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH NPROC "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME nproc \- print the number of processing units available .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nsenter.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nsenter.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c2fca693..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/nsenter.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,246 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: nsenter -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "NSENTER" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -nsenter \- run program in different namespaces -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBnsenter\fP [options] [\fIprogram\fP [\fIarguments\fP]] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBnsenter\fP command executes \fIprogram\fP in the namespace(s) that are specified in the command\-line options (described below). If \fIprogram\fP is not given, then "${SHELL}" is run (default: \fI/bin/sh\fP). -.sp -Enterable namespaces are: -.sp -\fBmount namespace\fP -.RS 4 -Mounting and unmounting filesystems will not affect the rest of the system, except for filesystems which are explicitly marked as shared (with \fBmount \-\-make\-shared\fP; see \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP for the \fBshared\fP flag). For further details, see \fBmount_namespaces\fP(7) and the discussion of the \fBCLONE_NEWNS\fP flag in \fBclone\fP(2). -.RE -.sp -\fBUTS namespace\fP -.RS 4 -Setting hostname or domainname will not affect the rest of the system. For further details, see \fButs_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBIPC namespace\fP -.RS 4 -The process will have an independent namespace for POSIX message queues as well as System V message queues, semaphore sets and shared memory segments. For further details, see \fBipc_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBnetwork namespace\fP -.RS 4 -The process will have independent IPv4 and IPv6 stacks, IP routing tables, firewall rules, the \fI/proc/net\fP and \fI/sys/class/net\fP directory trees, sockets, etc. For further details, see \fBnetwork_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBPID namespace\fP -.RS 4 -Children will have a set of PID to process mappings separate from the \fBnsenter\fP process. \fBnsenter\fP will fork by default if changing the PID namespace, so that the new program and its children share the same PID namespace and are visible to each other. If \fB\-\-no\-fork\fP is used, the new program will be exec\(cqed without forking. For further details, see \fBpid_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBuser namespace\fP -.RS 4 -The process will have a distinct set of UIDs, GIDs and capabilities. For further details, see \fBuser_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBcgroup namespace\fP -.RS 4 -The process will have a virtualized view of \fI/proc/self/cgroup\fP, and new cgroup mounts will be rooted at the namespace cgroup root. For further details, see \fBcgroup_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBtime namespace\fP -.RS 4 -The process can have a distinct view of \fBCLOCK_MONOTONIC\fP and/or \fBCLOCK_BOOTTIME\fP which can be changed using \fI/proc/self/timens_offsets\fP. For further details, see \fBtime_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -Various of the options below that relate to namespaces take an optional \fIfile\fP argument. This should be one of the \fI/proc/[pid]/ns/*\fP files described in \fBnamespaces\fP(7), or the pathname of a bind mount that was created on one of those files. -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Enter all namespaces of the target process by the default \fI/proc/[pid]/ns/*\fP namespace paths. The default paths to the target process namespaces may be overwritten by namespace specific options (e.g., \fB\-\-all \-\-mount\fP=[\fIpath\fP]). -.sp -The user namespace will be ignored if the same as the caller\(cqs current user namespace. It prevents a caller that has dropped capabilities from regaining those capabilities via a call to setns(). See \fBsetns\fP(2) for more details. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-target\fP \fIPID\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a target process to get contexts from. The paths to the contexts specified by \fIpid\fP are: -.sp -\fI/proc/pid/ns/mnt\fP -.RS 4 -the mount namespace -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/pid/ns/uts\fP -.RS 4 -the UTS namespace -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/pid/ns/ipc\fP -.RS 4 -the IPC namespace -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/pid/ns/net\fP -.RS 4 -the network namespace -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/pid/ns/pid\fP -.RS 4 -the PID namespace -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/pid/ns/user\fP -.RS 4 -the user namespace -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/pid/ns/cgroup\fP -.RS 4 -the cgroup namespace -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/pid/ns/time\fP -.RS 4 -the time namespace -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/pid/root\fP -.RS 4 -the root directory -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/pid/cwd\fP -.RS 4 -the working directory respectively -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-mount\fP[=\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Enter the mount namespace. If no file is specified, enter the mount namespace of the target process. If \fIfile\fP is specified, enter the mount namespace specified by \fIfile\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-uts\fP[=\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Enter the UTS namespace. If no file is specified, enter the UTS namespace of the target process. If \fIfile\fP is specified, enter the UTS namespace specified by \fIfile\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-ipc\fP[=\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Enter the IPC namespace. If no file is specified, enter the IPC namespace of the target process. If \fIfile\fP is specified, enter the IPC namespace specified by \fIfile\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-net\fP[=\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Enter the network namespace. If no file is specified, enter the network namespace of the target process. If \fIfile\fP is specified, enter the network namespace specified by \fIfile\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP[=\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Enter the PID namespace. If no file is specified, enter the PID namespace of the target process. If \fIfile\fP is specified, enter the PID namespace specified by \fIfile\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-user\fP[=\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Enter the user namespace. If no file is specified, enter the user namespace of the target process. If \fIfile\fP is specified, enter the user namespace specified by \fIfile\fP. See also the \fB\-\-setuid\fP and \fB\-\-setgid\fP options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-cgroup\fP[=\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Enter the cgroup namespace. If no file is specified, enter the cgroup namespace of the target process. If \fIfile\fP is specified, enter the cgroup namespace specified by \fIfile\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP[=\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Enter the time namespace. If no file is specified, enter the time namespace of the target process. If \fIfile\fP is specified, enter the time namespace specified by \fIfile\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-G\fP, \fB\-\-setgid\fP \fIgid\fP -.RS 4 -Set the group ID which will be used in the entered namespace and drop supplementary groups. \fBnsenter\fP always sets GID for user namespaces, the default is 0. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-setuid\fP \fIuid\fP -.RS 4 -Set the user ID which will be used in the entered namespace. \fBnsenter\fP always sets UID for user namespaces, the default is 0. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-preserve\-credentials\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt modify UID and GID when enter user namespace. The default is to drops supplementary groups and sets GID and UID to 0. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-root\fP[=\fIdirectory\fP] -.RS 4 -Set the root directory. If no directory is specified, set the root directory to the root directory of the target process. If directory is specified, set the root directory to the specified directory. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wd\fP[=\fIdirectory\fP] -.RS 4 -Set the working directory. If no directory is specified, set the working directory to the working directory of the target process. If directory is specified, set the working directory to the specified directory. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-no\-fork\fP -.RS 4 -Do not fork before exec\(cqing the specified program. By default, when entering a PID namespace, \fBnsenter\fP calls \fBfork\fP before calling \fBexec\fP so that any children will also be in the newly entered PID namespace. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-Z\fP, \fB\-\-follow\-context\fP -.RS 4 -Set the SELinux security context used for executing a new process according to already running process specified by \fB\-\-target\fP PID. (The util\-linux has to be compiled with SELinux support otherwise the option is unavailable.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "biederm\(atxmission.com" "Eric Biederman" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBclone\fP(2), -\fBsetns\fP(2), -\fBnamespaces\fP(7) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBnsenter\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/numfmt.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/numfmt.1 index b88d1ecf..15a24533 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/numfmt.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/numfmt.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH NUMFMT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH NUMFMT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME numfmt \- Convert numbers from/to human-readable strings .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/od.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/od.1 index c9184fff..9ba219a2 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/od.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/od.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH OD "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH OD "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME od \- dump files in octal and other formats .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/paste.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/paste.1 index e2fb5435..910d42c8 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/paste.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/paste.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH PASTE "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH PASTE "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME paste \- merge lines of files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pathchk.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pathchk.1 index b1898cf5..7a5d83ab 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pathchk.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pathchk.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH PATHCHK "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH PATHCHK "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME pathchk \- check whether file names are valid or portable .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pinky.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pinky.1 index 62038e42..b6bfedf9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pinky.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pinky.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH PINKY "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH PINKY "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME pinky \- lightweight finger .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pr.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pr.1 index 21915808..c8bcd7b3 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pr.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pr.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH PR "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH PR "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME pr \- convert text files for printing .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/printenv.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/printenv.1 index bdff82f3..a190c829 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/printenv.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/printenv.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH PRINTENV "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH PRINTENV "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME printenv \- print all or part of environment .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/printf.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/printf.1 index 983d9b36..a83903bb 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/printf.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/printf.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH PRINTF "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH PRINTF "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME printf \- format and print data .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/prlimit.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/prlimit.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b9ef740e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/prlimit.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,251 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: prlimit -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "PRLIMIT" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -prlimit \- get and set process resource limits -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBprlimit\fP [options] [\fB\-\-resource\fP[=\fIlimits\fP]] [\fB\-\-pid\fP \fIPID\fP] -.sp -\fBprlimit\fP [options] [\fB\-\-resource\fP[=\fIlimits\fP]] \fIcommand\fP [\fIargument\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Given a process ID and one or more resources, \fBprlimit\fP tries to retrieve and/or modify the limits. -.sp -When \fIcommand\fP is given, \fBprlimit\fP will run this command with the given arguments. -.sp -The \fIlimits\fP parameter is composed of a soft and a hard value, separated by a colon (:), in order to modify the existing values. If no \fIlimits\fP are given, \fBprlimit\fP will display the current values. If one of the values is not given, then the existing one will be used. To specify the unlimited or infinity limit (\fBRLIM_INFINITY\fP), the \-1 or \(aqunlimited\(aq string can be passed. -.sp -Because of the nature of limits, the soft limit must be lower or equal to the high limit (also called the ceiling). To see all available resource limits, refer to the RESOURCE OPTIONS section. -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -\fIsoft\fP:_hard_ Specify both limits. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -\fIsoft\fP: Specify only the soft limit. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -:\fIhard\fP Specify only the hard limit. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -\fIvalue\fP Specify both limits to the same value. -.RE -.SH "GENERAL OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-h, \-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o, \-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Define the output columns to use. If no output arrangement is specified, then a default set is used. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p, \-\-pid\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the process id; if none is given, the running process will be used. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V, \-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "RESOURCE OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c, \-\-core\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum size of a core file. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d, \-\-data\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum data size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e, \-\-nice\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum nice priority allowed to raise. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f, \-\-fsize\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum file size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i, \-\-sigpending\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum number of pending signals. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l, \-\-memlock\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum locked\-in\-memory address space. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m, \-\-rss\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum Resident Set Size (RSS). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n, \-\-nofile\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum number of open files. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q, \-\-msgqueue\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum number of bytes in POSIX message queues. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r, \-\-rtprio\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum real\-time priority. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s, \-\-stack\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum size of the stack. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t, \-\-cpu\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -CPU time, in seconds. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u, \-\-nproc\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum number of processes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v, \-\-as\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Address space limit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x, \-\-locks\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Maximum number of file locks held. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-y, \-\-rttime\fP[=\fIlimits\fP] -.RS 4 -Timeout for real\-time tasks. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The \fBprlimit\fP system call is supported since Linux 2.6.36, older kernels will break this program. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -\fBprlimit \-\-pid 13134\fP -.RS 4 -Display limit values for all current resources. -.RE -.sp -\fBprlimit \-\-pid 13134 \-\-rss \-\-nofile=1024:4095\fP -.RS 4 -Display the limits of the RSS, and set the soft and hard limits for the number of open files to 1024 and 4095, respectively. -.RE -.sp -\fBprlimit \-\-pid 13134 \-\-nproc=512:\fP -.RS 4 -Modify only the soft limit for the number of processes. -.RE -.sp -\fBprlimit \-\-pid $$ \-\-nproc=unlimited\fP -.RS 4 -Set for the current process both the soft and ceiling values for the number of processes to unlimited. -.RE -.sp -\fBprlimit \-\-cpu=10 sort \-u hugefile\fP -.RS 4 -Set both the soft and hard CPU time limit to ten seconds and run \(aqsort\(aq. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "dave\(atgnu.org" "Davidlohr Bueso" "" -\- In memory of Dennis M. Ritchie. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBulimit\fP(1p), -\fBprlimit\fP(2) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBprlimit\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ptx.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ptx.1 index 2d3ddcf8..7b2e81b1 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ptx.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ptx.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH PTX "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH PTX "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME ptx \- produce a permuted index of file contents .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pwd.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pwd.1 index dcfee233..717927a5 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pwd.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/pwd.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH PWD "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH PWD "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME pwd \- print name of current/working directory .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/readlink.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/readlink.1 index 23d99179..ad29b97f 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/readlink.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/readlink.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH READLINK "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH READLINK "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME readlink \- print resolved symbolic links or canonical file names .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/realpath.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/realpath.1 index 1ed3193d..b8f2a62f 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/realpath.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/realpath.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH REALPATH "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH REALPATH "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME realpath \- print the resolved path .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rename.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rename.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e36e9279..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rename.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,158 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: rename -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "RENAME" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -rename \- rename files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBrename\fP [options] \fIexpression replacement file\fP... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBrename\fP will rename the specified files by replacing the first occurrence of \fIexpression\fP in their name by \fIreplacement\fP. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-symlink\fP -.RS 4 -Do not rename a symlink but its target. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Show which files were renamed, if any. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-act\fP -.RS 4 -Do not make any changes; add \fB\-\-verbose\fP to see what would be made. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-no\-overwrite\fP -.RS 4 -Do not overwrite existing files. When \fB\-\-symlink\fP is active, do not overwrite symlinks pointing to existing targets. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-interactive\fP -.RS 4 -Ask before overwriting existing files. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "WARNING" -.sp -The renaming has no safeguards by default or without any one of the options \fB\-\-no\-overwrite\fP, \fB\-\-interactive\fP or \fB\-\-no\-act\fP. If the user has permission to rewrite file names, the command will perform the action without any questions. For example, the result can be quite drastic when the command is run as root in the \fI/lib\fP directory. Always make a backup before running the command, unless you truly know what you are doing. -.SH "INTERACTIVE MODE" -.sp -As most standard utilities rename can be used with a terminal device (tty in short) in canonical mode, where the line is buffered by the tty and you press ENTER to validate the user input. If you put your tty in cbreak mode however, rename requires only a single key press to answer the prompt. To set cbreak mode, run for example: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -sh \-c \(aqstty \-icanon min 1; "$0" "$@"; stty icanon\(aq rename \-i from to files -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -all requested rename operations were successful -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -all rename operations failed -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -some rename operations failed -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -nothing was renamed -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -unanticipated error occurred -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -Given the files \fIfoo1\fP, ..., \fIfoo9\fP, \fIfoo10\fP, ..., \fIfoo278\fP, the commands -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -rename foo foo00 foo? -rename foo foo0 foo?? -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -will turn them into \fIfoo001\fP, ..., \fIfoo009\fP, \fIfoo010\fP, ..., \fIfoo278\fP. And -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -rename .htm .html *.htm -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -will fix the extension of your html files. Provide an empty string for shortening: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -rename \(aq_with_long_name\(aq \(aq\(aq file_with_long_name.* -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -will remove the substring in the filenames. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmv\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBrename\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/renice.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/renice.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7c217cbf..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/renice.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: renice -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "RENICE" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -renice \- alter priority of running processes -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBrenice\fP [\fB\-n\fP] \fIpriority\fP [\fB\-g\fP|\fB\-p\fP|\fB\-u\fP] \fIidentifier\fP... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBrenice\fP alters the scheduling priority of one or more running processes. The first argument is the \fIpriority\fP value to be used. The other arguments are interpreted as process IDs (by default), process group IDs, user IDs, or user names. \fBrenice\fP\(aqing a process group causes all processes in the process group to have their scheduling priority altered. \fBrenice\fP\(aqing a user causes all processes owned by the user to have their scheduling priority altered. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-priority\fP \fIpriority\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the scheduling \fIpriority\fP to be used for the process, process group, or user. Use of the option \fB\-n\fP or \fB\-\-priority\fP is optional, but when used it must be the first argument. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-pgrp\fP -.RS 4 -Interpret the succeeding arguments as process group IDs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP -.RS 4 -Interpret the succeeding arguments as process IDs (the default). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-user\fP -.RS 4 -Interpret the succeeding arguments as usernames or UIDs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/passwd\fP -.RS 4 -to map user names to user IDs -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Users other than the superuser may only alter the priority of processes they own. Furthermore, an unprivileged user can only \fIincrease\fP the "nice value" (i.e., choose a lower priority) and such changes are irreversible unless (since Linux 2.6.12) the user has a suitable "nice" resource limit (see \fBulimit\fP(1p) and \fBgetrlimit\fP(2)). -.sp -The superuser may alter the priority of any process and set the priority to any value in the range \-20 to 19. Useful priorities are: 19 (the affected processes will run only when nothing else in the system wants to), 0 (the "base" scheduling priority), anything negative (to make things go very fast). -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBrenice\fP command appeared in 4.0BSD. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -The following command would change the priority of the processes with PIDs 987 and 32, plus all processes owned by the users daemon and root: -.sp -\fBrenice +1 987 \-u daemon root \-p 32\fP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBnice\fP(1), -\fBchrt\fP(1), -\fBgetpriority\fP(2), -\fBsetpriority\fP(2), -\fBcredentials\fP(7), -\fBsched\fP(7) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBrenice\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rev.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rev.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 147be22c..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rev.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: rev -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "REV" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -rev \- reverse lines characterwise -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBrev\fP [option] [\fIfile\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBrev\fP utility copies the specified files to standard output, reversing the order of characters in every line. If no files are specified, standard input is read. -.sp -This utility is a line\-oriented tool and it uses in\-memory allocated buffer for a whole wide\-char line. If the input file is huge and without line breaks than allocate the memory for the file may be unsuccessful. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBtac\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBrev\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rm.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rm.1 index 688edb18..bf613df5 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rm.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rm.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH RM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH RM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME rm \- remove files or directories .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rmdir.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rmdir.1 index 40442417..6952fb70 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rmdir.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/rmdir.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH RMDIR "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH RMDIR "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME rmdir \- remove empty directories .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/runcon.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/runcon.1 index 4ec1a1d4..a2aff155 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/runcon.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/runcon.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH RUNCON "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH RUNCON "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME runcon \- run command with specified security context .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/runuser.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/runuser.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9e89b1dc..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/runuser.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,279 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: runuser -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "RUNUSER" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -runuser \- run a command with substitute user and group ID -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBrunuser\fP [options] \fB\-u\fP \fIuser\fP [[\-\-] \fIcommand\fP [\fIargument\fP...]] -.sp -\fBrunuser\fP [options] [\fB\-\fP] [\fIuser\fP [\fIargument\fP...]] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBrunuser\fP can be used to run commands with a substitute user and group ID. If the option \fB\-u\fP is not given, \fBrunuser\fP falls back to \fBsu\fP\-compatible semantics and a shell is executed. The difference between the commands \fBrunuser\fP and \fBsu\fP is that \fBrunuser\fP does not ask for a password (because it may be executed by the root user only) and it uses a different PAM configuration. The command \fBrunuser\fP does not have to be installed with set\-user\-ID permissions. -.sp -If the PAM session is not required, then the recommended solution is to use the \fBsetpriv\fP(1) command. -.sp -When called without arguments, \fBrunuser\fP defaults to running an interactive shell as \fIroot\fP. -.sp -For backward compatibility, \fBrunuser\fP defaults to not changing the current directory and to setting only the environment variables \fBHOME\fP and \fBSHELL\fP (plus \fBUSER\fP and \fBLOGNAME\fP if the target \fIuser\fP is not root). This version of \fBrunuser\fP uses PAM for session management. -.sp -Note that \fBrunuser\fP in all cases use PAM (pam_getenvlist()) to do the final environment modification. Command\-line options such as \fB\-\-login\fP and \fB\-\-preserve\-environment\fP affect the environment before it is modified by PAM. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-command\fP=\fIcommand\fP -.RS 4 -Pass \fIcommand\fP to the shell with the \fB\-c\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-fast\fP -.RS 4 -Pass \fB\-f\fP to the shell, which may or may not be useful, depending on the shell. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-group\fP=\fIgroup\fP -.RS 4 -The primary group to be used. This option is allowed for the root user only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-G\fP, \fB\-\-supp\-group\fP=\fIgroup\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a supplementary group. This option is available to the root user only. The first specified supplementary group is also used as a primary group if the option \fB\-\-group\fP is not specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\fP, \fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-login\fP -.RS 4 -Start the shell as a login shell with an environment similar to a real login: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -clears all the environment variables except for \fBTERM\fP and variables specified by \fB\-\-whitelist\-environment\fP -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -initializes the environment variables \fBHOME\fP, \fBSHELL\fP, \fBUSER\fP, \fBLOGNAME\fP, and \fBPATH\fP -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -changes to the target user\(cqs home directory -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -sets argv[0] of the shell to \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq in order to make the shell a login shell -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pty\fP -.RS 4 -Create a pseudo\-terminal for the session. The independent terminal provides better security as the user does not share a terminal with the original session. This can be used to avoid TIOCSTI ioctl terminal injection and other security attacks against terminal file descriptors. The entire session can also be moved to the background (e.g., \fBrunuser \-\-pty \-u username \(em command &\fP). If the pseudo\-terminal is enabled, then \fBrunuser\fP works as a proxy between the sessions (copy stdin and stdout). -.sp -This feature is mostly designed for interactive sessions. If the standard input is not a terminal, but for example a pipe (e.g., \fBecho "date" | runuser \-\-pty \-u user\fP), then the ECHO flag for the pseudo\-terminal is disabled to avoid messy output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-preserve\-environment\fP -.RS 4 -Preserve the entire environment, i.e., do not set \fBHOME\fP, \fBSHELL\fP, \fBUSER\fP or \fBLOGNAME\fP. The option is ignored if the option \fB\-\-login\fP is specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-shell\fP=\fIshell\fP -.RS 4 -Run the specified \fIshell\fP instead of the default. The shell to run is selected according to the following rules, in order: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -the shell specified with \fB\-\-shell\fP -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -the shell specified in the environment variable \fBSHELL\fP if the \fB\-\-preserve\-environment\fP option is used -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -the shell listed in the passwd entry of the target user -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -/bin/sh -.sp -If the target user has a restricted shell (i.e., not listed in \fI/etc/shells\fP), then the \fB\-\-shell\fP option and the \fBSHELL\fP environment variables are ignored unless the calling user is root. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-session\-command=\fP\fIcommand\fP -.RS 4 -Same as \fB\-c\fP, but do not create a new session. (Discouraged.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-whitelist\-environment\fP=\fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt reset the environment variables specified in the comma\-separated \fIlist\fP when clearing the environment for \fB\-\-login\fP. The whitelist is ignored for the environment variables \fBHOME\fP, \fBSHELL\fP, \fBUSER\fP, \fBLOGNAME\fP, and \fBPATH\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "CONFIG FILES" -.sp -\fBrunuser\fP reads the \fI/etc/default/runuser\fP and \fI/etc/login.defs\fP configuration files. The following configuration items are relevant for \fBrunuser\fP: -.sp -\fBENV_PATH\fP (string) -.RS 4 -Defines the PATH environment variable for a regular user. The default value is \fI/usr/local/bin:/bin:/usr/bin\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBENV_ROOTPATH\fP (string), \fBENV_SUPATH\fP (string) -.RS 4 -Defines the \fBPATH\fP environment variable for root. \fBENV_SUPATH\fP takes precedence. The default value is \fI/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBALWAYS_SET_PATH\fP (boolean) -.RS 4 -If set to \fIyes\fP and \-\-login and \-\-preserve\-environment were not specified \fBrunuser\fP initializes \fBPATH\fP. -.RE -.sp -The environment variable \fBPATH\fP may be different on systems where \fI/bin\fP and \fI/sbin\fP are merged into \fI/usr\fP; this variable is also affected by the \fB\-\-login\fP command\-line option and the PAM system setting (e.g., \fBpam_env\fP(8)). -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBrunuser\fP normally returns the exit status of the command it executed. If the command was killed by a signal, \fBrunuser\fP returns the number of the signal plus 128. -.sp -Exit status generated by \fBrunuser\fP itself: -.sp -1 -.RS 4 -Generic error before executing the requested command -.RE -.sp -126 -.RS 4 -The requested command could not be executed -.RE -.sp -127 -.RS 4 -The requested command was not found -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/pam.d/runuser\fP -.RS 4 -default PAM configuration file -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/pam.d/runuser\-l\fP -.RS 4 -PAM configuration file if \fB\-\-login\fP is specified -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/default/runuser\fP -.RS 4 -runuser specific logindef config file -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/login.defs\fP -.RS 4 -global logindef config file -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -This \fBrunuser\fP command was derived from coreutils\(aq \fBsu\fP, which was based on an implementation by David MacKenzie, and the Fedora \fBrunuser\fP command by Dan Walsh. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBsetpriv\fP(1), -\fBsu\fP(1), -\fBlogin.defs\fP(5), -\fBshells\fP(5), -\fBpam\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBrunuser\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/script.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/script.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 98585067..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/script.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,194 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: script -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SCRIPT" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -script \- make typescript of terminal session -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBscript\fP [options] [\fIfile\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBscript\fP makes a typescript of everything on your terminal session. The terminal data are stored in raw form to the log file and information about timing to another (optional) structured log file. The timing log file is necessary to replay the session later by \fBscriptreplay\fP(1) and to store additional information about the session. -.sp -Since version 2.35, \fBscript\fP supports multiple streams and allows the logging of input and output to separate files or all the one file. This version also supports new timing file which records additional information. The command \fBscriptreplay \-\-summary\fP then provides all the information. -.sp -If the argument \fIfile\fP or option \fB\-\-log\-out\fP \fIfile\fP is given, \fBscript\fP saves the dialogue in this \fIfile\fP. If no filename is given, the dialogue is saved in the file \fItypescript\fP. -.sp -Note that logging input using \fB\-\-log\-in\fP or \fB\-\-log\-io\fP may record security\-sensitive information as the log file contains all terminal session input (e.g., passwords) independently of the terminal echo flag setting. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -Below, the \fIsize\fP argument may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB"), or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-append\fP -.RS 4 -Append the output to \fIfile\fP or to \fItypescript\fP, retaining the prior contents. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-command\fP \fIcommand\fP -.RS 4 -Run the \fIcommand\fP rather than an interactive shell. This makes it easy for a script to capture the output of a program that behaves differently when its stdout is not a tty. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-E\fP, \fB\-\-echo\fP \fIwhen\fP -.RS 4 -This option controls the \fBECHO\fP flag for the slave end of the session\(cqs pseudoterminal. The supported modes are \fIalways\fP, \fInever\fP, or \fIauto\fP. -.sp -The default is \fIauto\fP \(em in this case, \fBECHO\fP enabled for the pseudoterminal slave; if the current standard input is a terminal, \fBECHO\fP is disabled for it to prevent double echo; if the current standard input is not a terminal (for example pipe: \fBecho date | script\fP) then keeping \fBECHO\fP enabled for the pseudoterminal slave enables the standard input data to be viewed on screen while being recorded to session log simultaneously. -.sp -Note that \(aqnever\(aq mode affects content of the session output log, because users input is not repeated on output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-return\fP -.RS 4 -Return the exit status of the child process. Uses the same format as bash termination on signal termination (i.e., exit status is 128 + the signal number). The exit status of the child process is always stored in the type script file too. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-flush\fP -.RS 4 -Flush output after each write. This is nice for telecooperation: one person does \fBmkfifo foo; script \-f foo\fP, and another can supervise in real\-time what is being done using \fBcat foo\fP. Note that flush has an impact on performance; it\(cqs possible to use \fBSIGUSR1\fP to flush logs on demand. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Allow the default output file \fItypescript\fP to be a hard or symbolic link. The command will follow a symbolic link. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP, \fB\-\-log\-io\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Log input and output to the same \fIfile\fP. Note, this option makes sense only if \fB\-\-log\-timing\fP is also specified, otherwise it\(cqs impossible to separate output and input streams from the log \fIfile\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-log\-in\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Log input to the \fIfile\fP. The log output is disabled if only \fB\-\-log\-in\fP specified. -.sp -Use this logging functionality carefully as it logs all input, including input when terminal has disabled echo flag (for example, password inputs). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-log\-out\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Log output to the \fIfile\fP. The default is to log output to the file with name \fItypescript\fP if the option \fB\-\-log\-out\fP or \fB\-\-log\-in\fP is not given. The log output is disabled if only \fB\-\-log\-in\fP specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-log\-timing\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Log timing information to the \fIfile\fP. Two timing file formats are supported now. The classic format is used when only one stream (input or output) logging is enabled. The multi\-stream format is used on \fB\-\-log\-io\fP or when \fB\-\-log\-in\fP and \fB\-\-log\-out\fP are used together. See also \fB\-\-logging\-format\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-logging\-format\fP \fIformat\fP -.RS 4 -Force use of \fIadvanced\fP or \fIclassic\fP format. The default is the classic format to log only output and the advanced format when input as well as output logging is requested. -.sp -\fBClassic format\fP -.RS 4 -The log contains two fields, separated by a space. The first field indicates how much time elapsed since the previous output. The second field indicates how many characters were output this time. -.RE -.sp -\fBAdvanced (multi\-stream) format\fP -.RS 4 -The first field is an entry type identifier (\(aqI\(cqnput, \(aqO\(cqutput, \(aqH\(cqeader, \(aqS\(cqignal). The socond field is how much time elapsed since the previous entry, and the rest of the entry is type\-specific data. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\-limit\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the size of the typescript and timing files to \fIsize\fP and stop the child process after this size is exceeded. The calculated file size does not include the start and done messages that the \fBscript\fP command prepends and appends to the child process output. Due to buffering, the resulting output file might be larger than the specified value. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP -.RS 4 -Be quiet (do not write start and done messages to standard output). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP[\fIfile\fP], \fB\-\-timing\fP[=\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Output timing data to standard error, or to \fIfile\fP when given. This option is deprecated in favour of \fB\-\-log\-timing\fP where the \fIfile\fP argument is not optional. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "SIGNALS" -.sp -Upon receiving \fBSIGUSR1\fP, \fBscript\fP immediately flushes the output files. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -The following environment variable is utilized by \fBscript\fP: -.sp -\fBSHELL\fP -.RS 4 -If the variable \fBSHELL\fP exists, the shell forked by \fBscript\fP will be that shell. If \fBSHELL\fP is not set, the Bourne shell is assumed. (Most shells set this variable automatically). -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The script ends when the forked shell exits (a \fIcontrol\-D\fP for the Bourne shell (\fBsh\fP(1p)), and \fIexit\fP, \fIlogout\fP or \fIcontrol\-d\fP (if \fIignoreeof\fP is not set) for the C\-shell, \fBcsh\fP(1)). -.sp -Certain interactive commands, such as \fBvi\fP(1), create garbage in the typescript file. \fBscript\fP works best with commands that do not manipulate the screen, the results are meant to emulate a hardcopy terminal. -.sp -It is not recommended to run \fBscript\fP in non\-interactive shells. The inner shell of \fBscript\fP is always interactive, and this could lead to unexpected results. If you use \fBscript\fP in the shell initialization file, you have to avoid entering an infinite loop. You can use for example the \fB.profile\fP file, which is read by login shells only: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -if test \-t 0 ; then - script - exit -fi -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -You should also avoid use of \fBscript\fP in command pipes, as \fBscript\fP can read more input than you would expect. -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBscript\fP command appeared in 3.0BSD. -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -\fBscript\fP places \fIeverything\fP in the log file, including linefeeds and backspaces. This is not what the naive user expects. -.sp -\fBscript\fP is primarily designed for interactive terminal sessions. When stdin is not a terminal (for example: \fBecho foo | script\fP), then the session can hang, because the interactive shell within the script session misses EOF and \fBscript\fP has no clue when to close the session. See the \fBNOTES\fP section for more information. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBcsh\fP(1) (for the \fIhistory\fP mechanism), -\fBscriptreplay\fP(1), -\fBscriptlive\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBscript\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/scriptlive.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/scriptlive.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7e5a2cfb..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/scriptlive.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,121 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: scriptlive -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SCRIPTLIVE" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -scriptlive \- re\-run session typescripts, using timing information -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBscriptlive\fP [options] [\fB\-t\fP] \fItimingfile\fP [\fB\-I\fP|\fB\-B\fP] \fItypescript\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -This program re\-runs a typescript, using stdin typescript and timing information to ensure that input happens in the same rhythm as it originally appeared when the script was recorded. -.sp -The \fBsession is executed\fP in a newly created pseudoterminal with the user\(cqs $SHELL (or defaults to \fI/bin/bash\fP). -.sp -\fBBe careful!\fP Do not forget that the typescript may contains arbitrary commands. It is recommended to use \fB"scriptreplay \-\-stream in \-\-log\-in typescript"\fP (or with \fB\-\-log\-io\fP instead of \fB\-\-log\-in\fP) to verify the typescript before it is executed by \fBscriptlive\fP. -.sp -The timing information is what script1 outputs to file specified by \fB\-\-log\-timing\fP. The typescript has to contain stdin information and it is what script1 outputs to file specified by \fB\-\-log\-in\fP or \fB\-\-log\-io\fP. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-log\-in\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -File containing \fBscript\fP\(aqs terminal input. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP, \fB\-\-log\-io\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -File containing \fBscript\fP\(aqs terminal output and input. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-timing\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -File containing \fBscript\fP\(aqs timing output. This option overrides old\-style arguments. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-log\-timing\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Aliased to \fB\-t\fP, maintained for compatibility with \fBscript\fP(1) command\-line options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-divisor\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Speed up the replay displaying this \fInumber\fP of times. The argument is a floating\-point number. It\(cqs called divisor because it divides the timings by this factor. This option overrides old\-style arguments. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-maxdelay\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Set the maximum delay between updates to \fInumber\fP of seconds. The argument is a floating\-point number. This can be used to avoid long pauses in the typescript replay. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -% script \-\-log\-timing file.tm \-\-log\-in script.in -Script started, file is script.out -% date -<etc, etc> -% exit -Script done, file is script.out -% scriptlive \-\-log\-timing file.tm \-\-log\-in script.in -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.sp -Copyright © 2019 Karel Zak -.sp -This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -.sp -Released under the GNU General Public License version 2 or later. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBscript\fP(1), -\fBscriptreplay\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBscriptlive\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/scriptreplay.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/scriptreplay.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9345c62f..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/scriptreplay.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: scriptreplay -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SCRIPTREPLAY" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -scriptreplay \- play back typescripts, using timing information -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBscriptreplay\fP [options] [\fB\-t\fP] \fItimingfile\fP [\fItypescript\fP [\fIdivisor\fP]] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -This program replays a typescript, using timing information to ensure that output happens in the same rhythm as it originally appeared when the script was recorded. -.sp -The replay simply displays the information again; the programs that were run when the typescript was being recorded are \fBnot run again\fP. Since the same information is simply being displayed, \fBscriptreplay\fP is only guaranteed to work properly if run on the same type of terminal the typescript was recorded on. Otherwise, any escape characters in the typescript may be interpreted differently by the terminal to which \fBscriptreplay\fP is sending its output. -.sp -The timing information is what \fBscript\fP(1) outputs to file specified by \fB\-\-log\-timing\fP. -.sp -By default, the typescript to display is assumed to be named \fItypescript\fP, but other filenames may be specified, as the second parameter or with option \fB\-\-log\-out\fP. -.sp -If the third parameter or \fB\-\-divisor\fP is specified, it is used as a speed\-up multiplier. For example, a speed\-up of 2 makes \fBscriptreplay\fP go twice as fast, and a speed\-up of 0.1 makes it go ten times slower than the original session. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-log\-in\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -File containing \fBscript\fP\(aqs terminal input. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-log\-out\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -File containing \fBscript\fP\(aqs terminal output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP, \fB\-\-log\-io\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -File containing \fBscript\fP\(aqs terminal output and input. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-timing\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -File containing \fBscript\fP\(aqs timing output. This option overrides old\-style arguments. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-log\-timing\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -This is an alias for \fB\-t\fP, maintained for compatibility with \fBscript\fP(1) command\-line options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-typescript\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -File containing \fBscript\fP\(aqs terminal output. Deprecated alias to \fB\-\-log\-out\fP. This option overrides old\-style arguments. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-cr\-mode\fP \fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies how to use the CR (0x0D, carriage return) character from log files. The default mode is \fIauto\fP, in this case CR is replaced with line break for stdin log, because otherwise \fBscriptreplay\fP would overwrite the same line. The other modes are \fInever\fP and \fIalways\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-divisor\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Speed up the replay displaying this \fInumber\fP of times. The argument is a floating\-point number. It\(cqs called divisor because it divides the timings by this factor. This option overrides old\-style arguments. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-maxdelay\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Set the maximum delay between updates to \fInumber\fP of seconds. The argument is a floating\-point number. This can be used to avoid long pauses in the typescript replay. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-summary\fP -.RS 4 -Display details about the session recorded in the specified timing file and exit. The session has to be recorded using \fIadvanced\fP format (see \fBscript\fP(1)) option \fB\-\-logging\-format\fP for more details). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-stream\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Forces \fBscriptreplay\fP to print only the specified stream. The supported stream types are \fIin\fP, \fIout\fP, \fIsignal\fP, or \fIinfo\fP. This option is recommended for multi\-stream logs (e.g., \fB\-\-log\-io\fP) in order to print only specified data. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -% script \-\-log\-timing file.tm \-\-log\-out script.out -Script started, file is script.out -% ls -<etc, etc> -% exit -Script done, file is script.out -% scriptreplay \-\-log\-timing file.tm \-\-log\-out script.out -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -The original \fBscriptreplay\fP program was written by \c -.MTO "joey\(atkitenet.net" "Joey Hess" "." -The program was re\-written in C by -.MTO "jay\(atgnu.org" "James Youngman" "" -and -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.sp -Copyright © 2008 James Youngman -.sp -Copyright © 2008\-2019 Karel Zak -.sp -This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -.sp -Released under the GNU General Public License version 2 or later. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBscript\fP(1), -\fBscriptlive\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBscriptreplay\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/seq.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/seq.1 index 6b4da6f6..134fc6f4 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/seq.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/seq.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SEQ "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SEQ "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME seq \- print a sequence of numbers .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/setpriv.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/setpriv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index be661030..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/setpriv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,205 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: setpriv -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SETPRIV" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -setpriv \- run a program with different Linux privilege settings -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBsetpriv\fP [options] \fIprogram\fP [\fIarguments\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Sets or queries various Linux privilege settings that are inherited across \fBexecve\fP(2). -.sp -In comparison to \fBsu\fP(1) and \fBrunuser\fP(1), \fBsetpriv\fP neither uses PAM, nor does it prompt for a password. It is a simple, non\-set\-user\-ID wrapper around \fBexecve\fP(2), and can be used to drop privileges in the same way as \fBsetuidgid\fP(8) from \fBdaemontools\fP, \fBchpst\fP(8) from \fBrunit\fP, or similar tools shipped by other service managers. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-\-clear\-groups\fP -.RS 4 -Clear supplementary groups. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-dump\fP -.RS 4 -Dump the current privilege state. This option can be specified more than once to show extra, mostly useless, information. Incompatible with all other options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-groups\fP \fIgroup\fP... -.RS 4 -Set supplementary groups. The argument is a comma\-separated list of GIDs or names. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-inh\-caps\fP (\fB+\fP|\fB\-\fP)\fIcap\fP..., \fB\-\-ambient\-caps\fP (\fB+\fP|\fB\-\fP)\fIcap\fP..., \fB\-\-bounding\-set\fP (\fB+\fP|\fB\-\fP)\fIcap\fP... -.RS 4 -Set the inheritable capabilities, ambient capabilities or the capability bounding set. See \fBcapabilities\fP(7). The argument is a comma\-separated list of \fB+\fP\fIcap\fP and \fB\-\fP\fIcap\fP entries, which add or remove an entry respectively. \fIcap\fP can either be a human\-readable name as seen in \fBcapabilities\fP(7) without the \fIcap_\fP prefix or of the format \fBcap_N\fP, where \fIN\fP is the internal capability index used by Linux. \fB+all\fP and \fB\-all\fP can be used to add or remove all caps. -.sp -The set of capabilities starts out as the current inheritable set for \fB\-\-inh\-caps\fP, the current ambient set for \fB\-\-ambient\-caps\fP and the current bounding set for \fB\-\-bounding\-set\fP. -.sp -Note the following restrictions (detailed in \fBcapabilities\fP(7)) regarding modifications to these capability sets: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -A capability can be added to the inheritable set only if it is currently present in the bounding set. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -A capability can be added to the ambient set only if it is currently present in both the permitted and inheritable sets. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Notwithstanding the syntax offered by \fBsetpriv\fP, the kernel does not permit capabilities to be added to the bounding set. -.RE -.RE -.sp -If you drop a capability from the bounding set without also dropping it from the inheritable set, you are likely to become confused. Do not do that. -.sp -\fB\-\-keep\-groups\fP -.RS 4 -Preserve supplementary groups. Only useful in conjunction with \fB\-\-rgid\fP, \fB\-\-egid\fP, or \fB\-\-regid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-init\-groups\fP -.RS 4 -Initialize supplementary groups using initgroups3. Only useful in conjunction with \fB\-\-ruid\fP or \fB\-\-reuid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-list\-caps\fP -.RS 4 -List all known capabilities. This option must be specified alone. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-no\-new\-privs\fP -.RS 4 -Set the \fIno_new_privs\fP bit. With this bit set, \fBexecve\fP(2) will not grant new privileges. For example, the set\-user\-ID and set\-group\-ID bits as well as file capabilities will be disabled. (Executing binaries with these bits set will still work, but they will not gain privileges. Certain LSMs, especially AppArmor, may result in failures to execute certain programs.) This bit is inherited by child processes and cannot be unset. See \fBprctl\fP(2) and \fIDocumentation/prctl/no_new_privs.txt\fP in the Linux kernel source. -.sp -The \fIno_new_privs\fP bit is supported since Linux 3.5. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-rgid\fP \fIgid\fP, \fB\-\-egid\fP \fIgid\fP, \fB\-\-regid\fP \fIgid\fP -.RS 4 -Set the real, effective, or both GIDs. The \fIgid\fP argument can be given as a textual group name. -.sp -For safety, you must specify one of \fB\-\-clear\-groups\fP, \fB\-\-groups\fP, \fB\-\-keep\-groups\fP, or \fB\-\-init\-groups\fP if you set any primary \fIgid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-ruid\fP \fIuid\fP, \fB\-\-euid\fP \fIuid\fP, \fB\-\-reuid\fP \fIuid\fP -.RS 4 -Set the real, effective, or both UIDs. The \fIuid\fP argument can be given as a textual login name. -.sp -Setting a \fIuid\fP or \fIgid\fP does not change capabilities, although the exec call at the end might change capabilities. This means that, if you are root, you probably want to do something like: -.sp -\fBsetpriv \-\-reuid=1000 \-\-regid=1000 \-\-inh\-caps=\-all\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-securebits\fP (\fB+\fP|\fB\-\fP)\fIsecurebit\fP... -.RS 4 -Set or clear securebits. The argument is a comma\-separated list. The valid securebits are \fInoroot\fP, \fInoroot_locked\fP, \fIno_setuid_fixup\fP, \fIno_setuid_fixup_locked\fP, and \fIkeep_caps_locked\fP. \fIkeep_caps\fP is cleared by \fBexecve\fP(2) and is therefore not allowed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-pdeathsig keep\fP|\fBclear\fP|\fB<signal>\fP -.RS 4 -Keep, clear or set the parent death signal. Some LSMs, most notably SELinux and AppArmor, clear the signal when the process\(aq credentials change. Using \fB\-\-pdeathsig keep\fP will restore the parent death signal after changing credentials to remedy that situation. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-selinux\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Request a particular SELinux transition (using a transition on exec, not dyntrans). This will fail and cause \fBsetpriv\fP to abort if SELinux is not in use, and the transition may be ignored or cause \fBexecve\fP(2) to fail at SELinux\(cqs whim. (In particular, this is unlikely to work in conjunction with \fIno_new_privs\fP.) This is similar to \fBruncon\fP(1). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-apparmor\-profile\fP \fIprofile\fP -.RS 4 -Request a particular AppArmor profile (using a transition on exec). This will fail and cause \fBsetpriv\fP to abort if AppArmor is not in use, and the transition may be ignored or cause \fBexecve\fP(2) to fail at AppArmor\(cqs whim. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-reset\-env\fP -.RS 4 -Clears all the environment variables except \fBTERM\fP; initializes the environment variables \fBHOME\fP, \fBSHELL\fP, \fBUSER\fP, \fBLOGNAME\fP according to the user\(cqs passwd entry; sets \fBPATH\fP to \fI/usr/local/bin:/bin:/usr/bin\fP for a regular user and to \fI/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin\fP for root. -.sp -The environment variable \fBPATH\fP may be different on systems where \fI/bin\fP and \fI/sbin\fP are merged into \fI/usr\fP. The environment variable \fBSHELL\fP defaults to \fB/bin/sh\fP if none is given in the user\(cqs passwd entry. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -If applying any specified option fails, \fIprogram\fP will not be run and \fBsetpriv\fP will return with exit status 127. -.sp -Be careful with this tool \(em it may have unexpected security consequences. For example, setting \fIno_new_privs\fP and then execing a program that is SELinux\-confined (as this tool would do) may prevent the SELinux restrictions from taking effect. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -If you\(cqre looking for behavior similar to \fBsu\fP(1)/\fBrunuser\fP(1), or \fBsudo\fP(8) (without the \fB\-g\fP option), try something like: -.sp -\fBsetpriv \-\-reuid=1000 \-\-regid=1000 \-\-init\-groups\fP -.sp -If you want to mimic daemontools\(aq \fBsetuid\fP(8), try: -.sp -\fBsetpriv \-\-reuid=1000 \-\-regid=1000 \-\-clear\-groups\fP -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "luto\(atamacapital.net" "Andy Lutomirski" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBrunuser\fP(1), -\fBsu\fP(1), -\fBprctl\fP(2), -\fBcapabilities\fP(7) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBsetpriv\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/setsid.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/setsid.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 23651abf..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/setsid.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,77 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: setsid -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SETSID" "1" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -setsid \- run a program in a new session -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBsetsid\fP [options] \fIprogram\fP [\fIarguments\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBsetsid\fP runs a program in a new session. The command calls \fBfork\fP(2) if already a process group leader. Otherwise, it executes a program in the current process. This default behavior is possible to override by the \fB\-\-fork\fP option. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-ctty\fP -.RS 4 -Set the controlling terminal to the current one. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-fork\fP -.RS 4 -Always create a new process. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wait\fP -.RS 4 -Wait for the execution of the program to end, and return the exit status of this program as the exit status of \fBsetsid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "jrs\(atworld.std.com" "Rick Sladkey" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBsetsid\fP(2) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBsetsid\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/setterm.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/setterm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2dd1fbfd..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/setterm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,274 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: setterm -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SETTERM" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -setterm \- set terminal attributes -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBsetterm\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBsetterm\fP writes to standard output a character string that will invoke the specified terminal capabilities. Where possible \fIterminfo\fP is consulted to find the string to use. Some options however (marked "virtual consoles only" below) do not correspond to a \fBterminfo\fP(5) capability. In this case, if the terminal type is "con" or "linux" the string that invokes the specified capabilities on the PC Minix virtual console driver is output. Options that are not implemented by the terminal are ignored. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -For boolean options (\fBon\fP or \fBoff\fP), the default is \fBon\fP. -.sp -Below, an \fI8\-color\fP can be \fBblack\fP, \fBred\fP, \fBgreen\fP, \fByellow\fP, \fBblue\fP, \fBmagenta\fP, \fBcyan\fP, or \fBwhite\fP. -.sp -A \fI16\-color\fP can be an \fI8\-color\fP, or \fBgrey\fP, or \fBbright\fP followed by \fBred\fP, \fBgreen\fP, \fByellow\fP, \fBblue\fP, \fBmagenta\fP, \fBcyan\fP, or \fBwhite\fP. -.sp -The various color options may be set independently, at least on virtual consoles, though the results of setting multiple modes (for example, \fB\-\-underline\fP and \fB\-\-half\-bright\fP) are hardware\-dependent. -.sp -The optional arguments require \(aq=\(aq (equals sign) and not space between the option and the argument. For example \-\-option=argument. -.sp -\fB\-\-appcursorkeys\fP on|off -.RS 4 -Sets Cursor Key Application Mode on or off. When on, ESC O A, ESC O B, etc. will be sent for the cursor keys instead of ESC [ A, ESC [ B, etc. See the \fIvi and Cursor\-Keys\fP section of the \fIText\-Terminal\-HOWTO\fP for how this can cause problems for \fBvi\fP users. Virtual consoles only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-append\fP \fIconsole_number\fP -.RS 4 -Like \fB\-\-dump\fP, but appends to the snapshot file instead of overwriting it. Only works if no \fB\-\-dump\fP options are given. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-background\fP \fI8\-color\fP|default -.RS 4 -Sets the background text color. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-blank\fP[=0\-60|force|poke] -.RS 4 -Sets the interval of inactivity, in minutes, after which the screen will be automatically blanked (using APM if available). Without an argument, it gets the blank status (returns which vt was blanked, or zero for an unblanked vt). Virtual consoles only. -.sp -The \fBforce\fP argument keeps the screen blank even if a key is pressed. -.sp -The \fBpoke\fP argument unblanks the screen. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-bfreq\fP[=\fInumber\fP] -.RS 4 -Sets the bell frequency in Hertz. Without an argument, it defaults to \fB0\fP. Virtual consoles only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-blength\fP[=0\-2000] -.RS 4 -Sets the bell duration in milliseconds. Without an argument, it defaults to \fB0\fP. Virtual consoles only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-blink\fP on|off -.RS 4 -Turns blink mode on or off. Except on a virtual console, \fB\-\-blink off\fP turns off all attributes (bold, half\-brightness, blink, reverse). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-bold\fP on|off -.RS 4 -urns bold (extra bright) mode on or off. Except on a virtual console, \fB\-\-bold off\fP turns off all attributes (bold, half\-brightness, blink, reverse). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-clear\fP[=all|rest] -.RS 4 -Without an argument or with the argument \fBall\fP, the entire screen is cleared and the cursor is set to the home position, just like \fBclear\fP(1) does. With the argument \fBrest\fP, the screen is cleared from the current cursor position to the end. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-clrtabs\fP[=\fItab1 tab2 tab3\fP ...] -.RS 4 -Clears tab stops from the given horizontal cursor positions, in the range \fB1\-160\fP. Without arguments, it clears all tab stops. Virtual consoles only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-cursor\fP on|off -.RS 4 -Turns the terminal\(cqs cursor on or off. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-default\fP -.RS 4 -Sets the terminal\(cqs rendering options to the default values. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-dump\fP[=\fIconsole_number\fP] -.RS 4 -Writes a snapshot of the virtual console with the given number to the file specified with the \fB\-\-file\fP option, overwriting its contents; the default is \fIscreen.dump\fP. Without an argument, it dumps the current virtual console. This overrides \fB\-\-append\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-file\fP \fIfilename\fP -.RS 4 -Sets the snapshot file name for any \fB\-\-dump\fP or \fB\-\-append\fP options on the same command line. If this option is not present, the default is \fIscreen.dump\fP in the current directory. A path name that exceeds the system maximum will be truncated, see \fBPATH_MAX\fP from \fIlinux/limits.h\fP for the value. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-foreground\fP \fI8\-color\fP|default -.RS 4 -Sets the foreground text color. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-half\-bright\fP on|off -.RS 4 -Turns dim (half\-brightness) mode on or off. Except on a virtual console, \fB\-\-half\-bright off\fP turns off all attributes (bold, half\-brightness, blink, reverse). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-hbcolor\fP [bright] \fI16\-color\fP -.RS 4 -Sets the color for half\-bright characters. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-initialize\fP -.RS 4 -Displays the terminal initialization string, which typically sets the terminal\(cqs rendering options, and other attributes to the default values. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-inversescreen\fP on|off -.RS 4 -Swaps foreground and background colors for the whole screen. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-linewrap\fP on|off -.RS 4 -Makes the terminal continue on a new line when a line is full. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-msg\fP on|off -.RS 4 -Enables or disables the sending of kernel \fBprintk\fP() messages to the console. Virtual consoles only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-msglevel\fP 0\-8 -.RS 4 -Sets the console logging level for kernel \fBprintk()\fP messages. All messages strictly more important than this will be printed, so a logging level of \fB0\fP has the same effect as \fB\-\-msg on\fP and a logging level of \fB8\fP will print all kernel messages. \fBklogd\fP(8) may be a more convenient interface to the logging of kernel messages. -.sp -Virtual consoles only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-powerdown\fP[=0\-60] -.RS 4 -Sets the VESA powerdown interval in minutes. Without an argument, it defaults to \fB0\fP (disable powerdown). If the console is blanked or the monitor is in suspend mode, then the monitor will go into vsync suspend mode or powerdown mode respectively after this period of time has elapsed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-powersave\fP \fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Valid values for \fImode\fP are: -.sp -\fBvsync|on\fP -.RS 4 -Puts the monitor into VESA vsync suspend mode. -.RE -.sp -\fBhsync\fP -.RS 4 -Puts the monitor into VESA hsync suspend mode. -.RE -.sp -\fBpowerdown\fP -.RS 4 -Puts the monitor into VESA powerdown mode. -.RE -.sp -\fBoff\fP -.RS 4 -Turns monitor VESA powersaving features. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-regtabs\fP[=1\-160] -.RS 4 -Clears all tab stops, then sets a regular tab stop pattern, with one tab every specified number of positions. Without an argument, it defaults to \fB8\fP. Virtual consoles only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-repeat\fP on|off -.RS 4 -Turns keyboard repeat on or off. Virtual consoles only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-reset\fP -.RS 4 -Displays the terminal reset string, which typically resets the terminal to its power\-on state. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-resize\fP -.RS 4 -Reset terminal size by assessing maximum row and column. This is useful when actual geometry and kernel terminal driver are not in sync. Most notable use case is with serial consoles, that do not use \fBioctl\fP(3p) but just byte streams and breaks. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-reverse\fP on|off -.RS 4 -Turns reverse video mode on or off. Except on a virtual console, \fB\-\-reverse off\fP turns off all attributes (bold, half\-brightness, blink, reverse). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-store\fP -.RS 4 -Stores the terminal\(cqs current rendering options (foreground and background colors) as the values to be used at reset\-to\-default. Virtual consoles only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-tabs\fP[=\fItab1 tab2 tab3\fP ...] -.RS 4 -Sets tab stops at the given horizontal cursor positions, in the range \fB1\-160\fP. Without arguments, it shows the current tab stop settings. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-term\fP \fIterminal_name\fP -.RS 4 -Overrides the \fBTERM\fP environment variable. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-ulcolor\fP [bright] \fI16\-color\fP -.RS 4 -Sets the color for underlined characters. Virtual consoles only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-underline\fP on|off -.RS 4 -Turns underline mode on or off. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Displays version information and exits. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Displays a help text and exits. -.RE -.SH "COMPATIBILITY" -.sp -Since version 2.25 \fBsetterm\fP has support for long options with two hyphens, for example \fB\-\-help\fP, beside the historical long options with a single hyphen, for example \fB\-help\fP. In scripts it is better to use the backward\-compatible single hyphen rather than the double hyphen. Currently there are no plans nor good reasons to discontinue single\-hyphen compatibility. -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -Differences between the Minix and Linux versions are not documented. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBstty\fP(1), -\fBtput\fP(1), -\fBtty\fP(4), -\fBterminfo\fP(5) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBsetterm\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha1sum.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha1sum.1 index a3e1e4a6..a596cb21 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha1sum.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha1sum.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SHA1SUM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SHA1SUM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME sha1sum \- compute and check SHA1 message digest .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha224sum.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha224sum.1 index 43446d86..63ebd6eb 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha224sum.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha224sum.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SHA224SUM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SHA224SUM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME sha224sum \- compute and check SHA224 message digest .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha256sum.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha256sum.1 index b3cb3894..2be56c86 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha256sum.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha256sum.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SHA256SUM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SHA256SUM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME sha256sum \- compute and check SHA256 message digest .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha384sum.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha384sum.1 index 1d91b4a8..a9e99b19 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha384sum.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha384sum.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SHA384SUM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SHA384SUM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME sha384sum \- compute and check SHA384 message digest .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha512sum.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha512sum.1 index 76a54ecc..c0e37db4 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha512sum.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sha512sum.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SHA512SUM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SHA512SUM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME sha512sum \- compute and check SHA512 message digest .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/shred.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/shred.1 index 720a796a..07fe8aa4 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/shred.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/shred.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SHRED "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SHRED "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME shred \- overwrite a file to hide its contents, and optionally delete it .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/shuf.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/shuf.1 index 0d8e2060..fb1e6aef 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/shuf.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/shuf.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SHUF "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SHUF "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME shuf \- generate random permutations .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sleep.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sleep.1 index 32be6022..da438b4d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sleep.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sleep.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SLEEP "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SLEEP "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME sleep \- delay for a specified amount of time .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/smbstatus.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/smbstatus.1 index d3799e1b..5ad4b681 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/smbstatus.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/smbstatus.1 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: smbstatus .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SMBSTATUS" "1" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "User Commands" +.TH "SMBSTATUS" "1" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "User Commands" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ Prints the program version number\&. .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP \fBsmbd\fR(8) diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sort.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sort.1 index f51357dd..50597c8d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sort.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sort.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SORT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SORT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME sort \- sort lines of text files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/split.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/split.1 index 12dc9847..6033aeae 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/split.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/split.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SPLIT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SPLIT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME split \- split a file into pieces .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ssh-keygen.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ssh-keygen.1 index e8f2aaca..0b87958d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ssh-keygen.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ssh-keygen.1 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: ssh-keygen.1,v 1.209 2020/09/09 03:08:01 djm Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: ssh-keygen.1,v 1.230 2023/09/04 10:29:58 job Exp $ .\" .\" Author: Tatu Ylonen <ylo@cs.hut.fi> .\" Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo@cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ .\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF .\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. .\" -.Dd $Mdocdate: September 9 2020 $ +.Dd $Mdocdate: September 4 2023 $ .Dt SSH-KEYGEN 1 .Os .Sh NAME @@ -53,6 +53,7 @@ .Op Fl O Ar option .Op Fl t Cm dsa | ecdsa | ecdsa-sk | ed25519 | ed25519-sk | rsa .Op Fl w Ar provider +.Op Fl Z Ar cipher .Nm ssh-keygen .Fl p .Op Fl a Ar rounds @@ -60,6 +61,7 @@ .Op Fl m Ar format .Op Fl N Ar new_passphrase .Op Fl P Ar old_passphrase +.Op Fl Z Ar cipher .Nm ssh-keygen .Fl i .Op Fl f Ar input_keyfile @@ -145,19 +147,27 @@ .Ar .Nm ssh-keygen .Fl Y Cm find-principals +.Op Fl O Ar option .Fl s Ar signature_file .Fl f Ar allowed_signers_file .Nm ssh-keygen +.Fl Y Cm match-principals +.Fl I Ar signer_identity +.Fl f Ar allowed_signers_file +.Nm ssh-keygen .Fl Y Cm check-novalidate +.Op Fl O Ar option .Fl n Ar namespace .Fl s Ar signature_file .Nm ssh-keygen .Fl Y Cm sign +.Op Fl O Ar option .Fl f Ar key_file .Fl n Ar namespace .Ar .Nm ssh-keygen .Fl Y Cm verify +.Op Fl O Ar option .Fl f Ar allowed_signers_file .Fl I Ar signer_identity .Fl n Ar namespace @@ -175,7 +185,7 @@ The type of key to be generated is specified with the option. If invoked without any arguments, .Nm -will generate an RSA key. +will generate an Ed25519 key. .Pp .Nm is also used to generate groups for use in Diffie-Hellman group @@ -261,9 +271,9 @@ should be placed to be activated. The options are as follows: .Bl -tag -width Ds .It Fl A -For each of the key types (rsa, dsa, ecdsa and ed25519) -for which host keys -do not exist, generate the host keys with the default key file path, +Generate host keys of all default key types (rsa, ecdsa, and +ed25519) if they do not already exist. +The host keys are generated with the default key file path, an empty passphrase, default bits for the key type, and default comment. If .Fl f @@ -274,7 +284,9 @@ This is used by to generate new host keys. .It Fl a Ar rounds When saving a private key, this option specifies the number of KDF -(key derivation function) rounds used. +(key derivation function, currently +.Xr bcrypt_pbkdf 3 ) +rounds used. Higher numbers result in slower passphrase verification and increased resistance to brute-force password cracking (should the keys be stolen). The default is 16 rounds. @@ -360,12 +372,12 @@ to use on files that mix hashed and non-hashed names. .It Fl h When signing a key, create a host certificate instead of a user certificate. -Please see the +See the .Sx CERTIFICATES section for details. .It Fl I Ar certificate_identity Specify the key identity when signing a public key. -Please see the +See the .Sx CERTIFICATES section for details. .It Fl i @@ -384,6 +396,9 @@ Public and private key files will be written to the current directory for each downloaded key. If multiple FIDO authenticators are attached, keys will be downloaded from the first touched authenticator. +See the +.Sx FIDO AUTHENTICATOR +section for more information. .It Fl k Generate a KRL file. In this mode, @@ -457,7 +472,7 @@ Provides the new passphrase. Specify one or more principals (user or host names) to be included in a certificate when signing a key. Multiple principals may be specified, separated by commas. -Please see the +See the .Sx CERTIFICATES section for details. .It Fl O Ar option @@ -475,55 +490,47 @@ listed in the .Sx MODULI GENERATION section may be specified. .Pp -When generating a key that will be hosted on a FIDO authenticator, -this flag may be used to specify key-specific options. -Those supported at present are: +When generating FIDO authenticator-backed keys, the options listed in the +.Sx FIDO AUTHENTICATOR +section may be specified. +.Pp +When performing signature-related options using the +.Fl Y +flag, the following options are accepted: .Bl -tag -width Ds -.It Cm application -Override the default FIDO application/origin string of -.Dq ssh: . -This may be useful when generating host or domain-specific resident keys. -The specified application string must begin with -.Dq ssh: . -.It Cm challenge Ns = Ns Ar path -Specifies a path to a challenge string that will be passed to the -FIDO token during key generation. -The challenge string may be used as part of an out-of-band -protocol for key enrollment -(a random challenge is used by default). -.It Cm device -Explicitly specify a -.Xr fido 4 -device to use, rather than letting the token middleware select one. -.It Cm no-touch-required -Indicate that the generated private key should not require touch -events (user presence) when making signatures. -Note that -.Xr sshd 8 -will refuse such signatures by default, unless overridden via -an authorized_keys option. -.It Cm resident -Indicate that the key should be stored on the FIDO authenticator itself. -Resident keys may be supported on FIDO2 tokens and typically require that -a PIN be set on the token prior to generation. -Resident keys may be loaded off the token using -.Xr ssh-add 1 . -.It Cm user -A username to be associated with a resident key, -overriding the empty default username. -Specifying a username may be useful when generating multiple resident keys -for the same application name. -.It Cm verify-required -Indicate that this private key should require user verification for -each signature. -Not all FIDO tokens support this option. -Currently PIN authentication is the only supported verification method, -but other methods may be supported in the future. -.It Cm write-attestation Ns = Ns Ar path -May be used at key generation time to record the attestation data -returned from FIDO tokens during key generation. -Please note that this information is potentially sensitive. -By default, this information is discarded. +.It Cm hashalg Ns = Ns Ar algorithm +Selects the hash algorithm to use for hashing the message to be signed. +Valid algorithms are +.Dq sha256 +and +.Dq sha512. +The default is +.Dq sha512. +.It Cm print-pubkey +Print the full public key to standard output after signature verification. +.It Cm verify-time Ns = Ns Ar timestamp +Specifies a time to use when validating signatures instead of the current +time. +The time may be specified as a date or time in the YYYYMMDD[Z] or +in YYYYMMDDHHMM[SS][Z] formats. +Dates and times will be interpreted in the current system time zone unless +suffixed with a Z character, which causes them to be interpreted in the +UTC time zone. +.El +.Pp +When generating SSHFP DNS records from public keys using the +.Fl r +flag, the following options are accepted: +.Bl -tag -width Ds +.It Cm hashalg Ns = Ns Ar algorithm +Selects a hash algorithm to use when printing SSHFP records using the +.Fl D +flag. +Valid algorithms are +.Dq sha1 +and +.Dq sha256 . +The default is to print both. .El .Pp The @@ -561,7 +568,7 @@ Print the SSHFP fingerprint resource record named for the specified public key file. .It Fl s Ar ca_key Certify (sign) a public key using the specified CA key. -Please see the +See the .Sx CERTIFICATES section for details. .Pp @@ -594,7 +601,9 @@ and (the default). .It Fl U When used in combination with -.Fl s , +.Fl s +or +.Fl Y Cm sign , this option indicates that a CA key resides in a .Xr ssh-agent 1 . See the @@ -612,31 +621,67 @@ A validity interval may consist of a single time, indicating that the certificate is valid beginning now and expiring at that time, or may consist of two times separated by a colon to indicate an explicit time interval. .Pp -The start time may be specified as the string +The start time may be specified as: +.Bl -bullet -compact +.It +The string .Dq always -to indicate the certificate has no specified start time, -a date in YYYYMMDD format, a time in YYYYMMDDHHMM[SS] format, -a relative time (to the current time) consisting of a minus sign followed by -an interval in the format described in the +to indicate the certificate has no specified start time. +.It +A date or time in the system time zone formatted as YYYYMMDD or +YYYYMMDDHHMM[SS]. +.It +A date or time in the UTC time zone as YYYYMMDDZ or YYYYMMDDHHMM[SS]Z. +.It +A relative time before the current system time consisting of a minus sign +followed by an interval in the format described in the TIME FORMATS section of .Xr sshd_config 5 . +.It +A raw seconds since epoch (Jan 1 1970 00:00:00 UTC) as a hexadecimal +number beginning with +.Dq 0x . +.El .Pp -The end time may be specified as a YYYYMMDD date, a YYYYMMDDHHMM[SS] time, -a relative time starting with a plus character or the string +The end time may be specified similarly to the start time: +.Bl -bullet -compact +.It +The string .Dq forever -to indicate that the certificate has no expiry date. +to indicate the certificate has no specified end time. +.It +A date or time in the system time zone formatted as YYYYMMDD or +YYYYMMDDHHMM[SS]. +.It +A date or time in the UTC time zone as YYYYMMDDZ or YYYYMMDDHHMM[SS]Z. +.It +A relative time after the current system time consisting of a plus sign +followed by an interval in the format described in the +TIME FORMATS section of +.Xr sshd_config 5 . +.It +A raw seconds since epoch (Jan 1 1970 00:00:00 UTC) as a hexadecimal +number beginning with +.Dq 0x . +.El .Pp For example: -.Dq +52w1d -(valid from now to 52 weeks and one day from now), -.Dq -4w:+4w -(valid from four weeks ago to four weeks from now), -.Dq 20100101123000:20110101123000 -(valid from 12:30 PM, January 1st, 2010 to 12:30 PM, January 1st, 2011), -.Dq -1d:20110101 -(valid from yesterday to midnight, January 1st, 2011). -.Dq -1m:forever -(valid from one minute ago and never expiring). +.Bl -tag -width Ds +.It +52w1d +Valid from now to 52 weeks and one day from now. +.It -4w:+4w +Valid from four weeks ago to four weeks from now. +.It 20100101123000:20110101123000 +Valid from 12:30 PM, January 1st, 2010 to 12:30 PM, January 1st, 2011. +.It 20100101123000Z:20110101123000Z +Similar, but interpreted in the UTC time zone rather than the system time zone. +.It -1d:20110101 +Valid from yesterday to midnight, January 1st, 2011. +.It 0x1:0x2000000000 +Valid from roughly early 1970 to May 2033. +.It -1m:forever +Valid from one minute ago and never expiring. +.El .It Fl v Verbose mode. Causes @@ -663,6 +708,14 @@ The format of the allowed signers file is documented in the section below. If one or more matching principals are found, they are returned on standard output. +.It Fl Y Cm match-principals +Find principal matching the principal name provided using the +.Fl I +flag in the authorized signers file specified using the +.Fl f +flag. +If one or more matching principals are found, they are returned on +standard output. .It Fl Y Cm check-novalidate Checks that a signature generated using .Nm @@ -680,7 +733,7 @@ Successful testing of the signature is signalled by .Nm returning a zero exit status. .It Fl Y Cm sign -Cryptographically sign a file or some data using a SSH key. +Cryptographically sign a file or some data using an SSH key. When signing, .Nm accepts zero or more files to sign on the command-line - if no files @@ -738,6 +791,13 @@ returning a zero exit status. .It Fl y This option will read a private OpenSSH format file and print an OpenSSH public key to stdout. +.It Fl Z Ar cipher +Specifies the cipher to use for encryption when writing an OpenSSH-format +private key file. +The list of available ciphers may be obtained using +.Qq ssh -Q cipher . +The default is +.Dq aes256-ctr . .It Fl z Ar serial_number Specifies a serial number to be embedded in the certificate to distinguish this certificate from others from the same CA. @@ -805,8 +865,7 @@ Valid generator values are 2, 3, and 5. .Pp Screened DH groups may be installed in .Pa /etc/ssh/moduli . -It is important that this file contains moduli of a range of bit lengths and -that both ends of a connection share common moduli. +It is important that this file contains moduli of a range of bit lengths. .Pp A number of options are available for moduli generation and screening via the .Fl O @@ -1003,7 +1062,7 @@ The option allows specification of certificate start and end times. A certificate that is presented at a time outside this range will not be considered valid. -By default, certificates are valid from +By default, certificates are valid from the .Ux Epoch to the distant future. .Pp @@ -1012,7 +1071,77 @@ public key must be trusted by .Xr sshd 8 or .Xr ssh 1 . -Please refer to those manual pages for details. +Refer to those manual pages for details. +.Sh FIDO AUTHENTICATOR +.Nm +is able to generate FIDO authenticator-backed keys, after which +they may be used much like any other key type supported by OpenSSH, so +long as the hardware authenticator is attached when the keys are used. +FIDO authenticators generally require the user to explicitly authorise +operations by touching or tapping them. +FIDO keys consist of two parts: a key handle part stored in the +private key file on disk, and a per-device private key that is unique +to each FIDO authenticator and that cannot be exported from the +authenticator hardware. +These are combined by the hardware at authentication time to derive +the real key that is used to sign authentication challenges. +Supported key types are +.Cm ecdsa-sk +and +.Cm ed25519-sk . +.Pp +The options that are valid for FIDO keys are: +.Bl -tag -width Ds +.It Cm application +Override the default FIDO application/origin string of +.Dq ssh: . +This may be useful when generating host or domain-specific resident keys. +The specified application string must begin with +.Dq ssh: . +.It Cm challenge Ns = Ns Ar path +Specifies a path to a challenge string that will be passed to the +FIDO authenticator during key generation. +The challenge string may be used as part of an out-of-band +protocol for key enrollment +(a random challenge is used by default). +.It Cm device +Explicitly specify a +.Xr fido 4 +device to use, rather than letting the authenticator middleware select one. +.It Cm no-touch-required +Indicate that the generated private key should not require touch +events (user presence) when making signatures. +Note that +.Xr sshd 8 +will refuse such signatures by default, unless overridden via +an authorized_keys option. +.It Cm resident +Indicate that the key handle should be stored on the FIDO +authenticator itself. +This makes it easier to use the authenticator on multiple computers. +Resident keys may be supported on FIDO2 authenticators and typically +require that a PIN be set on the authenticator prior to generation. +Resident keys may be loaded off the authenticator using +.Xr ssh-add 1 . +Storing both parts of a key on a FIDO authenticator increases the likelihood +of an attacker being able to use a stolen authenticator device. +.It Cm user +A username to be associated with a resident key, +overriding the empty default username. +Specifying a username may be useful when generating multiple resident keys +for the same application name. +.It Cm verify-required +Indicate that this private key should require user verification for +each signature. +Not all FIDO authenticators support this option. +Currently PIN authentication is the only supported verification method, +but other methods may be supported in the future. +.It Cm write-attestation Ns = Ns Ar path +May be used at key generation time to record the attestation data +returned from FIDO authenticators during key generation. +This information is potentially sensitive. +By default, this information is discarded. +.El .Sh KEY REVOCATION LISTS .Nm is able to manage OpenSSH format Key Revocation Lists (KRLs). @@ -1107,7 +1236,7 @@ Empty lines and lines starting with a .Ql # are ignored as comments. .Pp -The principals field is a pattern-list (See PATTERNS in +The principals field is a pattern-list (see PATTERNS in .Xr ssh_config 5 ) consisting of one or more comma-separated USER@DOMAIN identity patterns that are accepted for signing. @@ -1124,11 +1253,19 @@ are case-insensitive): .It Cm cert-authority Indicates that this key is accepted as a certificate authority (CA) and that certificates signed by this CA may be accepted for verification. -.It Cm namespaces="namespace-list" +.It Cm namespaces Ns = Ns "namespace-list" Specifies a pattern-list of namespaces that are accepted for this key. If this option is present, the signature namespace embedded in the signature object and presented on the verification command-line must match the specified list before the key will be considered acceptable. +.It Cm valid-after Ns = Ns "timestamp" +Indicates that the key is valid for use at or after the specified timestamp, +which may be a date or time in the YYYYMMDD[Z] or YYYYMMDDHHMM[SS][Z] formats. +Dates and times will be interpreted in the current system time zone unless +suffixed with a Z character, which causes them to be interpreted in the UTC +time zone. +.It Cm valid-before Ns = Ns "timestamp" +Indicates that the key is valid for use at or before the specified timestamp. .El .Pp When verifying signatures made by certificates, the expected principal diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stat.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stat.1 index 67be7ce9..9c85962b 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stat.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stat.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH STAT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH STAT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME stat \- display file or file system status .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stdbuf.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stdbuf.1 index 9be1a039..320b3188 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stdbuf.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stdbuf.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH STDBUF "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH STDBUF "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME stdbuf \- Run COMMAND, with modified buffering operations for its standard streams. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stty.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stty.1 index f2b8469c..d6c14a2a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stty.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/stty.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH STTY "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH STTY "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME stty \- change and print terminal line settings .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/su.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/su.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 21d42f85..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/su.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,297 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: su -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SU" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -su \- run a command with substitute user and group ID -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBsu\fP [options] [\fB\-\fP] [\fIuser\fP [\fIargument\fP...]] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBsu\fP allows commands to be run with a substitute user and group ID. -.sp -When called with no \fIuser\fP specified, \fBsu\fP defaults to running an interactive shell as \fIroot\fP. When \fIuser\fP is specified, additional \fIargument\fPs can be supplied, in which case they are passed to the shell. -.sp -For backward compatibility, \fBsu\fP defaults to not change the current directory and to only set the environment variables \fBHOME\fP and \fBSHELL\fP (plus \fBUSER\fP and \fBLOGNAME\fP if the target \fIuser\fP is not root). It is recommended to always use the \fB\-\-login\fP option (instead of its shortcut \fB\-\fP) to avoid side effects caused by mixing environments. -.sp -This version of \fBsu\fP uses PAM for authentication, account and session management. Some configuration options found in other \fBsu\fP implementations, such as support for a wheel group, have to be configured via PAM. -.sp -\fBsu\fP is mostly designed for unprivileged users, the recommended solution for privileged users (e.g., scripts executed by root) is to use non\-set\-user\-ID command \fBrunuser\fP(1) that does not require authentication and provides separate PAM configuration. If the PAM session is not required at all then the recommended solution is to use command \fBsetpriv\fP(1). -.sp -Note that \fBsu\fP in all cases uses PAM (\fBpam_getenvlist\fP(3)) to do the final environment modification. Command\-line options such as \fB\-\-login\fP and \fB\-\-preserve\-environment\fP affect the environment before it is modified by PAM. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-command\fP=\fIcommand\fP -.RS 4 -Pass \fIcommand\fP to the shell with the \fB\-c\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-fast\fP -.RS 4 -Pass \fB\-f\fP to the shell, which may or may not be useful, depending on the shell. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-group\fP=\fIgroup\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the primary group. This option is available to the root user only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-G\fP, \fB\-\-supp\-group\fP=\fIgroup\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a supplementary group. This option is available to the root user only. The first specified supplementary group is also used as a primary group if the option \fB\-\-group\fP is not specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\fP, \fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-login\fP -.RS 4 -Start the shell as a login shell with an environment similar to a real login: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -clears all the environment variables except \fBTERM\fP and variables specified by \fB\-\-whitelist\-environment\fP -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -initializes the environment variables \fBHOME\fP, \fBSHELL\fP, \fBUSER\fP, \fBLOGNAME\fP, and \fBPATH\fP -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -changes to the target user\(cqs home directory -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -sets argv[0] of the shell to \(aq\fB\-\fP\(aq in order to make the shell a login shell -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-preserve\-environment\fP -.RS 4 -Preserve the entire environment, i.e., do not set \fBHOME\fP, \fBSHELL\fP, \fBUSER\fP or \fBLOGNAME\fP. This option is ignored if the option \fB\-\-login\fP is specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pty\fP -.RS 4 -Create a pseudo\-terminal for the session. The independent terminal provides better security as the user does not share a terminal with the original session. This can be used to avoid TIOCSTI ioctl terminal injection and other security attacks against terminal file descriptors. The entire session can also be moved to the background (e.g., "su \-\-pty \- username \-c application &"). If the pseudo\-terminal is enabled, then \fBsu\fP works as a proxy between the sessions (copy stdin and stdout). -.sp -This feature is mostly designed for interactive sessions. If the standard input is not a terminal, but for example a pipe (e.g., echo "date" | su \-\-pty), then the ECHO flag for the pseudo\-terminal is disabled to avoid messy output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-shell\fP=\fIshell\fP -.RS 4 -Run the specified \fIshell\fP instead of the default. The shell to run is selected according to the following rules, in order: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -the shell specified with \fB\-\-shell\fP -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -the shell specified in the environment variable \fBSHELL\fP, if the \fB\-\-preserve\-environment\fP option is used -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -the shell listed in the passwd entry of the target user -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -/bin/sh -.RE -.RE -.sp -If the target user has a restricted shell (i.e., not listed in /etc/shells), the \fB\-\-shell\fP option and the \fBSHELL\fP environment variables are ignored unless the calling user is root. -.sp -\fB\-\-session\-command=\fP\fIcommand\fP -.RS 4 -Same as \fB\-c\fP, but do not create a new session. (Discouraged.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-whitelist\-environment\fP=\fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt reset the environment variables specified in the comma\-separated \fIlist\fP when clearing the environment for \fB\-\-login\fP. The whitelist is ignored for the environment variables \fBHOME\fP, \fBSHELL\fP, \fBUSER\fP, \fBLOGNAME\fP, and \fBPATH\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "SIGNALS" -.sp -Upon receiving either \fBSIGINT\fP, \fBSIGQUIT\fP or \fBSIGTERM\fP, \fBsu\fP terminates its child and afterwards terminates itself with the received signal. The child is terminated by \fBSIGTERM\fP, after unsuccessful attempt and 2 seconds of delay the child is killed by \fBSIGKILL\fP. -.SH "CONFIG FILES" -.sp -\fBsu\fP reads the \fI/etc/default/su\fP and \fI/etc/login.defs\fP configuration files. The following configuration items are relevant for \fBsu:\fP -.sp -\fBFAIL_DELAY\fP (number) -.RS 4 -Delay in seconds in case of an authentication failure. The number must be a non\-negative integer. -.RE -.sp -\fBENV_PATH\fP (string) -.RS 4 -Defines the \fBPATH\fP environment variable for a regular user. The default value is \fI/usr/local/bin:/bin:/usr/bin\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBENV_ROOTPATH\fP (string), \fBENV_SUPATH\fP (string) -.RS 4 -Defines the \fBPATH\fP environment variable for root. \fBENV_SUPATH\fP takes precedence. The default value is \fI/usr/local/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBALWAYS_SET_PATH\fP (boolean) -.RS 4 -If set to \fIyes\fP and \fB\-\-login\fP and \fB\-\-preserve\-environment\fP were not specified \fBsu\fP initializes \fBPATH\fP. -.sp -The environment variable \fBPATH\fP may be different on systems where \fI/bin\fP and \fI/sbin\fP are merged into \fI/usr\fP; this variable is also affected by the \fB\-\-login\fP command\-line option and the PAM system setting (e.g., \fBpam_env\fP(8)). -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBsu\fP normally returns the exit status of the command it executed. If the command was killed by a signal, \fBsu\fP returns the number of the signal plus 128. -.sp -Exit status generated by \fBsu\fP itself: -.sp -1 -.RS 4 -Generic error before executing the requested command -.RE -.sp -126 -.RS 4 -The requested command could not be executed -.RE -.sp -127 -.RS 4 -The requested command was not found -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/pam.d/su\fP -.RS 4 -default PAM configuration file -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/pam.d/su\-l\fP -.RS 4 -PAM configuration file if \fB\-\-login\fP is specified -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/default/su\fP -.RS 4 -command specific logindef config file -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/login.defs\fP -.RS 4 -global logindef config file -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -For security reasons, \fBsu\fP always logs failed log\-in attempts to the btmp file, but it does not write to the \fIlastlog\fP file at all. This solution can be used to control \fBsu\fP behavior by PAM configuration. If you want to use the \fBpam_lastlog\fP(8) module to print warning message about failed log\-in attempts then \fBpam_lastlog\fP(8) has to be configured to update the \fIlastlog\fP file as well. For example by: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -session required pam_lastlog.so nowtmp -.br -.RE -.ll -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -This \fBsu\fP command was derived from coreutils\(aq \fBsu\fP, which was based on an implementation by David MacKenzie. The util\-linux version has been refactored by Karel Zak. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBsetpriv\fP(1), -\fBlogin.defs\fP(5), -\fBshells\fP(5), -\fBpam\fP(8), -\fBrunuser\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBsu\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sum.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sum.1 index ba83e11f..f39d1ef6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sum.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sum.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SUM "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SUM "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME sum \- checksum and count the blocks in a file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sync.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sync.1 index ec503720..64515321 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sync.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/sync.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH SYNC "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH SYNC "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME sync \- Synchronize cached writes to persistent storage .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemctl.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemctl.1 index de909515..e885512c 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemctl.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemctl.1 @@ -450,6 +450,10 @@ in \fBsystemd.unit\fR(5))\&. It will \fInot\fR fail if any of the commands configured to stop the unit (\fIExecStop=\fR, etc\&.) fail, because the manager will still forcibly terminate the unit\&. +.sp +If a unit that gets stopped can still be triggered by other units, a warning containing the names of the triggering units is shown\&. +\fB\-\-no\-warn\fR +can be used to suppress the warning\&. .RE .PP \fBreload \fR\fB\fIPATTERN\fR\fR\fB\&...\fR @@ -844,6 +848,10 @@ command with appropriate arguments later\&. This command will print information about the file system operations (symlink removals) executed\&. This output may be suppressed by passing \fB\-\-quiet\fR\&. .sp +If a unit gets disabled but its triggering units are still active, a warning containing the names of the triggering units is shown\&. +\fB\-\-no\-warn\fR +can be used to suppress the warning\&. +.sp When this command is used with \fB\-\-user\fR, the units being operated on might still be enabled in global scope, and thus get started automatically even after a successful disablement in user scope\&. In this case, a warning about it is shown, which can be suppressed using \fB\-\-no\-warn\fR\&. @@ -1046,6 +1054,10 @@ is specified)\&. If a matching unit file already exists under these directories and not the aforementioned two directories), but typically doesn\*(Aqt work for units created locally (as those are typically placed precisely in the two aforementioned directories)\&. Similar restrictions apply for \fB\-\-user\fR mode, in which case the directories are below the user\*(Aqs home directory however\&. +.sp +If a unit gets masked but its triggering units are still active, a warning containing the names of the triggering units is shown\&. +\fB\-\-no\-warn\fR +can be used to suppress the warning\&. .RE .PP \fBunmask \fR\fB\fIUNIT\fR\fR\fB\&...\fR @@ -2054,7 +2066,21 @@ when using \fBdisable\fR combined with \fB\-\-user\fR -on units that are enabled in global scope\&. +on units that are enabled in global scope, +.RE +.sp +.RS 4 +.ie n \{\ +\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c +.\} +.el \{\ +.sp -1 +.IP \(bu 2.3 +.\} +when a +\fBstop\fR\-ped, +\fBdisable\fR\-d, or +\fBmask\fR\-ed unit still has active triggering units\&. .RE .sp .RE @@ -2324,21 +2350,27 @@ When used with \fB\-\-firmware\-setup\fR .RS 4 When used with the -\fBreboot\fR -command, indicate to the system\*(Aqs firmware to reboot into the firmware setup interface\&. Note that this functionality is not available on all systems\&. +\fBreboot\fR, +\fBpoweroff\fR, or +\fBhalt\fR +command, indicate to the system\*(Aqs firmware to reboot into the firmware setup interface for the next boot\&. Note that this functionality is not available on all systems\&. .RE .PP \fB\-\-boot\-loader\-menu=\fR\fB\fItimeout\fR\fR .RS 4 When used with the -\fBreboot\fR +\fBreboot\fR, +\fBpoweroff\fR, or +\fBhalt\fR command, indicate to the system\*(Aqs boot loader to show the boot loader menu on the following boot\&. Takes a time value as parameter \(em indicating the menu timeout\&. Pass zero in order to disable the menu timeout\&. Note that not all boot loaders support this functionality\&. .RE .PP \fB\-\-boot\-loader\-entry=\fR\fB\fIID\fR\fR .RS 4 When used with the -\fBreboot\fR +\fBreboot\fR, +\fBpoweroff\fR, or +\fBhalt\fR command, indicate to the system\*(Aqs boot loader to boot into a specific boot loader entry on the following boot\&. Takes a boot loader entry identifier as argument, or "help" in order to list available entries\&. Note that not all boot loaders support this functionality\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-analyze.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-analyze.1 index 8ebe36a1..3437ada0 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-analyze.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-analyze.1 @@ -59,15 +59,15 @@ systemd-analyze \- Analyze and debug system manager .HP \w'\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR\ 'u \fBsystemd\-analyze\fR [OPTIONS...] compare\-versions \fIVERSION1\fR [\fIOP\fR] \fIVERSION2\fR .HP \w'\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR\ 'u -\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR [OPTIONS...] verify [\fIFILE\fR...] +\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR [OPTIONS...] verify \fIFILE\fR... .HP \w'\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR\ 'u -\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR [OPTIONS...] security \fIUNIT\fR... +\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR [OPTIONS...] security [\fIUNIT\fR...] .HP \w'\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR\ 'u \fBsystemd\-analyze\fR [OPTIONS...] inspect\-elf \fIFILE\fR... .HP \w'\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR\ 'u \fBsystemd\-analyze\fR [OPTIONS...] malloc [\fID\-BUS\ SERVICE\fR...] .HP \w'\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR\ 'u -\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR [OPTIONS...] fdstore [\fIUNIT\fR...] +\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR [OPTIONS...] fdstore \fIUNIT\fR... .HP \w'\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR\ 'u \fBsystemd\-analyze\fR [OPTIONS...] image\-policy \fIPOLICY\fR... .HP \w'\fBsystemd\-analyze\fR\ 'u @@ -795,7 +795,7 @@ $ systemd\-analyze inspect\-elf \-\-json=pretty \e .if n \{\ .RE .\} -.SS "systemd\-analyze fdstore [\fIUNIT\fR\&.\&.\&.]" +.SS "systemd\-analyze fdstore \fIUNIT\fR\&.\&.\&." .PP Lists the current contents of the specified service unit\*(Aqs file descriptor store\&. This shows names, inode types, device numbers, inode numbers, paths and open modes of the open file descriptors\&. The specified units must have \fIFileDescriptorStoreMax=\fR @@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ fields in (see \fBstat\fR(2) for details)\&. The listed inode numbers in the "INODE" column are on the file system indicated by "DEVNO"\&. -.SS "systemd\-analyze image\-policy [\fIPOLICY\fR\&...]" +.SS "systemd\-analyze image\-policy \fIPOLICY\fR\&..." .PP This command analyzes the specified image policy string, as per \fBsystemd.image-policy\fR(7)\&. The policy is normalized and simplified\&. For each currently defined partition identifier (as per the @@ -1150,6 +1150,7 @@ l l l l +l l. T{ UserOrDynamicUser @@ -1281,6 +1282,9 @@ T{ CapabilityBoundingSet_CAP_SYS_TTY_CONFIG T} T{ +CapabilityBoundingSet_CAP_BPF +T} +T{ UMask T} T{ @@ -1502,7 +1506,7 @@ syntax is used either the left hand side or the right hand side may be omitted ( are implied\&. .RE .PP -\fB\-\-quiet\fR +\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR .RS 4 Suppress hints and other non\-essential output\&. .RE diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-cgtop.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-cgtop.1 index 5e56c306..3cd04ecf 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-cgtop.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-cgtop.1 @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ key\&. .PP \fB\-P\fR .RS 4 -Count only userspace processes instead of all tasks\&. By default, all tasks are counted: each kernel thread and each userspace thread individually\&. With this setting, kernel threads are excluded from the counting and each userspace process only counts as one, regardless how many threads it consists of\&. This setting may also be toggled at runtime by pressing the +Count only userspace processes instead of all tasks\&. By default, all tasks are counted: each kernel thread and each userspace thread individually\&. With this setting, kernel threads are excluded from the count and each userspace process only counts as one task, regardless of how many threads it consists of\&. This setting may also be toggled at runtime by pressing the P key\&. This option may not be combined with \fB\-k\fR\&. @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ key\&. This option may not be combined with .PP \fB\-k\fR .RS 4 -Count only userspace processes and kernel threads instead of all tasks\&. By default, all tasks are counted: each kernel thread and each userspace thread individually\&. With this setting, kernel threads are included in the counting and each userspace process only counts as on one, regardless how many threads it consists of\&. This setting may also be toggled at runtime by pressing the +Count only userspace processes and kernel threads instead of all tasks\&. By default, all tasks are counted: each kernel thread and each userspace thread individually\&. With this setting, kernel threads are included in the count and each userspace process only counts as one task, regardless of how many threads it consists of\&. This setting may also be toggled at runtime by pressing the k key\&. This option may not be combined with \fB\-P\fR\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-creds.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-creds.1 index daad2d1e..3a0e4b25 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-creds.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-creds.1 @@ -30,11 +30,10 @@ systemd-creds \- Lists, shows, encrypts and decrypts service credentials is a tool for listing, showing, encrypting and decrypting unit credentials\&. Credentials are limited\-size binary or textual objects that may be passed to unit processes\&. They are primarily used for passing cryptographic keys (both public and private) or certificates, user account information or identity information from the host to services\&. .PP Credentials are configured in unit files via the -\fIImportCredential>\fR, +\fIImportCredential=\fR, \fILoadCredential=\fR, \fISetCredential=\fR, -\fILoadCredentialEncrypted=\fR -and +\fILoadCredentialEncrypted=\fR, and \fISetCredentialEncrypted=\fR settings, see \fBsystemd.exec\fR(5) @@ -497,7 +496,7 @@ xyz\&.service: .\} .nf # mkdir \-p /etc/systemd/system/xyz\&.service\&.d -# systemd\-ask\-password \-n | systemd\-creds encrypt \-\-name=mysql\-password \-p \- \- >/etc/systemd/system/xyz\&.service\&.d/50\-password\&.conf +# systemd\-ask\-password \-n | ( echo "[Service]" && systemd\-creds encrypt \-\-name=mysql\-password \-p \- \- ) >/etc/systemd/system/xyz\&.service\&.d/50\-password\&.conf # systemctl daemon\-reload # systemctl restart xyz\&.service .fi diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-detect-virt.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-detect-virt.1 index 6b2e005c..0c4280ab 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-detect-virt.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-detect-virt.1 @@ -72,6 +72,7 @@ lt l l ^ l l ^ l l ^ l l +l l l lt l l ^ l l ^ l l @@ -162,7 +163,7 @@ T} :T{ \fIapple\fR T}:T{ -\m[blue]\fBApple Virtualization\&.framework\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[2]\d\s+2 +\m[blue]\fBApple virtualization framework\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[2]\d\s+2 T} :T{ \fIsre\fR @@ -170,6 +171,13 @@ T}:T{ \m[blue]\fBLMHS SRE hypervisor\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[3]\d\s+2 T} T{ +\fIgoogle\fR +T}:T{ +\m[blue]\fBGoogle Compute Engine\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[4]\d\s+2 +T}:T{ +\ \& +T} +T{ Container T}:T{ \fIopenvz\fR @@ -199,7 +207,7 @@ T} :T{ \fIpodman\fR T}:T{ -\m[blue]\fBPodman\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[4]\d\s+2 container manager +\m[blue]\fBPodman\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[5]\d\s+2 container manager T} :T{ \fIrkt\fR @@ -209,17 +217,17 @@ T} :T{ \fIwsl\fR T}:T{ -\m[blue]\fBWindows Subsystem for Linux\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[5]\d\s+2 +\m[blue]\fBWindows Subsystem for Linux\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[6]\d\s+2 T} :T{ \fIproot\fR T}:T{ -\m[blue]\fBproot\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[6]\d\s+2 userspace chroot/bind mount emulation +\m[blue]\fBproot\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[7]\d\s+2 userspace chroot/bind mount emulation T} :T{ \fIpouch\fR T}:T{ -\m[blue]\fBPouch\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[7]\d\s+2 Container Engine +\m[blue]\fBPouch\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[8]\d\s+2 Container Engine T} .TE .sp 1 @@ -304,7 +312,7 @@ ACRN hypervisor \%https://projectacrn.org .RE .IP " 2." 4 -Apple Virtualization.framework +Apple virtualization framework .RS 4 \%https://developer.apple.com/documentation/virtualization .RE @@ -314,21 +322,26 @@ LMHS SRE hypervisor \%https://www.lockheedmartin.com/en-us/products/Hardened-Security-for-Intel-Processors.html .RE .IP " 4." 4 +Google Compute Engine +.RS 4 +\%https://cloud.google.com/compute +.RE +.IP " 5." 4 Podman .RS 4 \%https://podman.io .RE -.IP " 5." 4 +.IP " 6." 4 Windows Subsystem for Linux .RS 4 \%https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/about .RE -.IP " 6." 4 +.IP " 7." 4 proot .RS 4 \%https://proot-me.github.io/ .RE -.IP " 7." 4 +.IP " 8." 4 Pouch .RS 4 \%https://github.com/alibaba/pouch diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-firstboot.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-firstboot.1 index c72307f1..fd64c003 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-firstboot.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-firstboot.1 @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Print a short version string and exit\&. supports the service credentials logic as implemented by \fIImportCredential=\fR/\fILoadCredential=\fR/\fISetCredential=\fR (see -\fBsystemd.exec\fR(1) +\fBsystemd.exec\fR(5) for details)\&. The following credentials are used when passed in: .PP \fIpasswd\&.hashed\-password\&.root\fR, \fIpasswd\&.plaintext\-password\&.root\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-inhibit.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-inhibit.1 index 9a498902..6c975015 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-inhibit.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-inhibit.1 @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Takes a colon\-separated list of one or more operations to inhibit: "handle\-power\-key", "handle\-suspend\-key", "handle\-hibernate\-key", -"handle\-lid\-switch", for inhibiting reboot/power\-off/halt/kexec, suspending/hibernating, the automatic idle detection, or the low\-level handling of the power/sleep key and the lid switch, respectively\&. If omitted, defaults to +"handle\-lid\-switch", for inhibiting reboot/power\-off/halt/kexec/soft\-reboot, suspending/hibernating, the automatic idle detection, or the low\-level handling of the power/sleep key and the lid switch, respectively\&. If omitted, defaults to "idle:sleep:shutdown"\&. .RE .PP diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-nspawn.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-nspawn.1 index 2b67e183..af49b8df 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-nspawn.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd-nspawn.1 @@ -1355,7 +1355,9 @@ Control whether the container\*(Aqs journal shall be made visible to the host sy "try\-host" and "try\-guest" -do the same but do not fail if the host does not have persistent journaling enabled\&. If +do the same but do not fail if the host does not have persistent journaling enabled, or if the container is in the +\fB\-\-ephemeral\fR +mode\&. If "auto" (the default), and the right subdirectory of /var/log/journal diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd.1 index f187d58f..3f8a2ac3 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/systemd.1 @@ -1024,6 +1024,11 @@ Takes a string argument in the form VARIABLE=VALUE\&. May be used to set default Takes a 32 character hex value to be used for setting the machine\-id\&. Intended mostly for network booting where the same machine\-id is desired for every boot\&. .RE .PP +\fIsystemd\&.unified_cgroup_hierarchy\fR +.RS 4 +When specified with a false argument, fall back to hybrid cgroup hierarchy\&. The hybrid mode is deprecated\&. +.RE +.PP \fIsystemd\&.set_credential=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.set_credential_binary=\fR .RS 4 Sets a system credential, which can then be propagated to system services using the @@ -1412,16 +1417,6 @@ Limited compatibility support for the SysV client interface, as implemented by t systemd\-initctl\&.service unit\&. This is a named pipe in the file system\&. This interface is obsolete and should not be used in new applications\&. .RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.PP -systemd 252 -.RS 4 -Kernel command\-line arguments -\fIsystemd\&.unified_cgroup_hierarchy\fR -and -\fIsystemd\&.legacy_systemd_cgroup_controller\fR -were deprecated\&. Please switch to the unified cgroup hierarchy\&. -.RE .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP The diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tac.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tac.1 index 52d12441..6646276e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tac.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tac.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TAC "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TAC "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME tac \- concatenate and print files in reverse .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tail.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tail.1 index 0fbf0a98..eded51bd 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tail.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tail.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TAIL "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TAIL "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME tail \- output the last part of files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/taskset.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/taskset.1 deleted file mode 100644 index cb230c2c..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/taskset.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,141 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: taskset -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "TASKSET" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -taskset \- set or retrieve a process\(aqs CPU affinity -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBtaskset\fP [options] \fImask command\fP [\fIargument\fP...] -.sp -\fBtaskset\fP [options] \fB\-p\fP [\fImask\fP] \fIpid\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBtaskset\fP command is used to set or retrieve the CPU affinity of a running process given its \fIpid\fP, or to launch a new \fIcommand\fP with a given CPU affinity. CPU affinity is a scheduler property that "bonds" a process to a given set of CPUs on the system. The Linux scheduler will honor the given CPU affinity and the process will not run on any other CPUs. Note that the Linux scheduler also supports natural CPU affinity: the scheduler attempts to keep processes on the same CPU as long as practical for performance reasons. Therefore, forcing a specific CPU affinity is useful only in certain applications. -.sp -The CPU affinity is represented as a bitmask, with the lowest order bit corresponding to the first logical CPU and the highest order bit corresponding to the last logical CPU. Not all CPUs may exist on a given system but a mask may specify more CPUs than are present. A retrieved mask will reflect only the bits that correspond to CPUs physically on the system. If an invalid mask is given (i.e., one that corresponds to no valid CPUs on the current system) an error is returned. The masks may be specified in hexadecimal (with or without a leading "0x"), or as a CPU list with the \fB\-\-cpu\-list\fP option. For example, -.sp -\fB0x00000001\fP -.RS 4 -is processor #0, -.RE -.sp -\fB0x00000003\fP -.RS 4 -is processors #0 and #1, -.RE -.sp -\fB0xFFFFFFFF\fP -.RS 4 -is processors #0 through #31, -.RE -.sp -\fB32\fP -.RS 4 -is processors #1, #4, and #5, -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-cpu\-list 0\-2,6\fP -.RS 4 -is processors #0, #1, #2, and #6. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-cpu\-list 0\-10:2\fP -.RS 4 -is processors #0, #2, #4, #6, #8 and #10. The suffix ":N" specifies stride in the range, for example 0\-10:3 is interpreted as 0,3,6,9 list. -.RE -.sp -When \fBtaskset\fP returns, it is guaranteed that the given program has been scheduled to a legal CPU. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\-tasks\fP -.RS 4 -Set or retrieve the CPU affinity of all the tasks (threads) for a given PID. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-cpu\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Interpret \fImask\fP as numerical list of processors instead of a bitmask. Numbers are separated by commas and may include ranges. For example: \fB0,5,8\-11\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP -.RS 4 -Operate on an existing PID and do not launch a new task. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "USAGE" -.sp -The default behavior is to run a new command with a given affinity mask: -.RS 4 -\fBtaskset\fP \fImask\fP \fIcommand\fP [\fIarguments\fP] -.RE -.sp -You can also retrieve the CPU affinity of an existing task: -.RS 4 -\fBtaskset \-p\fP \fIpid\fP -.RE -.sp -Or set it: -.RS 4 -\fBtaskset \-p\fP \fImask pid\fP -.RE -.SH "PERMISSIONS" -.sp -A user can change the CPU affinity of a process belonging to the same user. A user must possess \fBCAP_SYS_NICE\fP to change the CPU affinity of a process belonging to another user. A user can retrieve the affinity mask of any process. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Written by Robert M. Love. -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.sp -Copyright © 2004 Robert M. Love. This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBchrt\fP(1), -\fBnice\fP(1), -\fBrenice\fP(1), -\fBsched_getaffinity\fP(2), -\fBsched_setaffinity\fP(2) -.sp -See \fBsched\fP(7) for a description of the Linux scheduling scheme. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBtaskset\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tee.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tee.1 index 238926bc..f6f68b7e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tee.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tee.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TEE "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TEE "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME tee \- read from standard input and write to standard output and files .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/test.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/test.1 index b5aa0cb8..36dffd81 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/test.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/test.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TEST "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TEST "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME test \- check file types and compare values .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/timeout.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/timeout.1 index 8f10e84a..ee49018c 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/timeout.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/timeout.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TIMEOUT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TIMEOUT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME timeout \- run a command with a time limit .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/touch.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/touch.1 index 4f877bd3..c147e49f 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/touch.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/touch.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TOUCH "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TOUCH "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME touch \- change file timestamps .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tr.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tr.1 index e0eacc43..a4fc6a48 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tr.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tr.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TR "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TR "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME tr \- translate or delete characters .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/true.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/true.1 index a9197d09..252125a6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/true.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/true.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TRUE "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TRUE "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME true \- do nothing, successfully .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/truncate.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/truncate.1 index 622fee74..a56bb2d5 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/truncate.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/truncate.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TRUNCATE "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TRUNCATE "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME truncate \- shrink or extend the size of a file to the specified size .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tsort.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tsort.1 index 665f9188..07287424 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tsort.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tsort.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TSORT "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TSORT "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME tsort \- perform topological sort .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tty.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tty.1 index 0e1c3fe2..d1dbdeac 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tty.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/tty.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH TTY "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH TTY "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME tty \- print the file name of the terminal connected to standard input .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uclampset.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uclampset.1 deleted file mode 100644 index df324a7b..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uclampset.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,154 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uclampset -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UCLAMPSET" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uclampset \- manipulate the utilization clamping attributes of the system or a process -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBuclampset\fP [options] [\fB\-m\fP \fIuclamp_min\fP] [\fB\-M\fP \fIuclamp_max] _command argument\fP -.sp -\fBuclampset\fP [options] [\fB\-m\fP \fIuclamp_min\fP] [\fB\-M\fP \fIuclamp_max\fP] \fB\-p\fP \fIPID\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBuclampset\fP sets or retrieves the utilization clamping attributes of an existing \fIPID\fP, or runs \fIcommand\fP with the given attributes. -.sp -Utilization clamping is a new feature added in v5.3. It gives a hint to the scheduler about the allowed range of utilization the task should be operating at. -.sp -The utilization of the task affects frequency selection and task placement. Only schedutil cpufreq governor understands handling util clamp hints at the time of writing. Consult your kernel docs for further info about other cpufreq governors support. -.sp -If you\(cqre running on asymmetric heterogeneous system like Arm\(cqs big.LITTLE. Utilization clamping can help bias task placement. If the task is boosted such that \fIutil_min\fP value is higher than the little cores\(aq capacity, then the scheduler will do its best to place it on a big core. -.sp -Similarly, if \fIutil_max\fP is smaller than or equal the capacity of the little cores, then the scheduler can still choose to place it there even if the actual utilization of the task is at max. -.sp -Setting a task\(cqs \fIuclamp_min\fP to a none zero value will effectively boost the task as when it runs it\(cqll always start from this utilization value. -.sp -By setting a task\(cqs \fIuclamp_max\fP below 1024, this will effectively cap the task as when it runs it\(cqll never be able to go above this utilization value. -.sp -The full utilization range is: [0:1024]. The special value \-1 is used to reset to system\(cqs default. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-m\fP -.RS 4 -Set \fIutil_min\fP value. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP -.RS 4 -Set \fIutil_max\fP value. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\-tasks\fP -.RS 4 -Set or retrieve the utilization clamping attributes of all the tasks (threads) for a given PID. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP -.RS 4 -Operate on an existing PID and do not launch a new task. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-system\fP -.RS 4 -Set or retrieve the system\-wide utilization clamping attributes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-reset\-on\-fork\fP -.RS 4 -Set \fBSCHED_FLAG_RESET_ON_FORK\fP flag. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Show status information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "USAGE" -.sp -The default behavior is to run a new command: -.RS 4 -\fBuclampset\fP \fI[\-m uclamp_min]\fP \fI[\-M uclamp_max]\fP \fIcommand\fP [\fIarguments\fP] -.RE -.sp -You can also retrieve the utilization clamping attributes of an existing task: -.RS 4 -\fBuclampset \-p\fP \fIPID\fP -.RE -.sp -Or set them: -.RS 4 -\fBuclampset \-p\fP \fIPID\fP \fI[\-m uclamp_min]\fP \fI[\-M uclamp_max]\fP -.RE -.sp -Or control the system\-wide attributes: -.RS 4 -\fBuclampset \-s\fP \fI[\-m uclamp_min]\fP \fI[\-M uclamp_max]\fP -.RE -.SH "PERMISSIONS" -.sp -A user must possess \fBCAP_SYS_NICE\fP to change the scheduling attributes of a process. Any user can retrieve the scheduling information. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The system wide utilization clamp attributes are there to control the \fIallowed\fP range the tasks can use. By default both \fIuclamp_min\fP and \fIuclamp_max\fP are set to 1024. This means users can set the utilization clamp values for their task across the full range [0:1024]. -.sp -For example: -.RS 4 -\fBuclampset \-s\fP \f(CR\-m 512\fP \f(CR\-M 700\fP -.RE -.sp -will prevent any task from being boosted higher than 512. And all tasks in the systems are capped to a utilization of 700. Effectively rendering the maximum performance of the system to 700. -.sp -Consult your kernel docs for the exact expected behavior on that kernel. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "qais.yousef\(atarm.com" "Qais Yousef" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBnice\fP(1), -\fBrenice\fP(1), -\fBtaskset\fP(1), -\fBsched\fP(7) -.sp -See \fBsched_setscheduler\fP(2) and \fBsched_setattr\fP(2) for a description of the Linux scheduling scheme. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBuclampset\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ul.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ul.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6e25e8e2..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/ul.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: ul -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UL" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -ul \- do underlining -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBul\fP [options] [\fIfile\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBul\fP reads the named files (or standard input if none are given) and translates occurrences of underscores to the sequence which indicates underlining for the terminal in use, as specified by the environment variable \fBTERM\fP. The \fIterminfo\fP database is read to determine the appropriate sequences for underlining. If the terminal is incapable of underlining but is capable of a standout mode, then that is used instead. If the terminal can overstrike, or handles underlining automatically, \fBul\fP degenerates to \fBcat\fP(1). If the terminal cannot underline, underlining is ignored. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-indicated\fP -.RS 4 -Underlining is indicated by a separate line containing appropriate dashes `\-\(aq; this is useful when you want to look at the underlining which is present in an \fBnroff\fP output stream on a crt\-terminal. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-terminal\fP \fIterminal\fP -.RS 4 -Override the environment variable \fBTERM\fP with the specified \fIterminal\fP type. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -The following environment variable is used: -.sp -\fBTERM\fP -.RS 4 -The \fBTERM\fP variable is used to relate a tty device with its device capability description (see \fBterminfo\fP(5)). \fBTERM\fP is set at login time, either by the default terminal type specified in \fI/etc/ttys\fP or as set during the login process by the user in their \fIlogin\fP file (see \fBsetenv\fP(3)). -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBul\fP command appeared in 3.0BSD. -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -\fBnroff\fP usually outputs a series of backspaces and underlines intermixed with the text to indicate underlining. No attempt is made to optimize the backward motion. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBcolcrt\fP(1), -\fBlogin\fP(1), -\fBman\fP(1), -\fBnroff\fP(1), -\fBsetenv\fP(3), -\fBterminfo\fP(5) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBul\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uname.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uname.1 index 88505a52..f6ef590a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uname.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uname.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH UNAME "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH UNAME "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME uname \- print system information .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unexpand.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unexpand.1 index 3be4f6bc..4c627a99 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unexpand.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unexpand.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH UNEXPAND "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH UNEXPAND "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME unexpand \- convert spaces to tabs .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uniq.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uniq.1 index 278ade09..6d798b24 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uniq.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uniq.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH UNIQ "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH UNIQ "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME uniq \- report or omit repeated lines .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unlink.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unlink.1 index 06bea02d..b2b107ef 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unlink.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unlink.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH UNLINK "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH UNLINK "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME unlink \- call the unlink function to remove the specified file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unshare.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unshare.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c5514da6..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/unshare.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,358 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: unshare -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UNSHARE" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -unshare \- run program in new namespaces -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBunshare\fP [options] [\fIprogram\fP [\fIarguments\fP]] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBunshare\fP command creates new namespaces (as specified by the command\-line options described below) and then executes the specified \fIprogram\fP. If \fIprogram\fP is not given, then "${SHELL}" is run (default: \fI/bin/sh\fP). -.sp -By default, a new namespace persists only as long as it has member processes. A new namespace can be made persistent even when it has no member processes by bind mounting /proc/\fIpid\fP/ns/\fItype\fP files to a filesystem path. A namespace that has been made persistent in this way can subsequently be entered with \fBnsenter\fP(1) even after the \fIprogram\fP terminates (except PID namespaces where a permanently running init process is required). Once a persistent namespace is no longer needed, it can be unpersisted by using \fBumount\fP(8) to remove the bind mount. See the EXAMPLES section for more details. -.sp -\fBunshare\fP since util\-linux version 2.36 uses \fI/proc/[pid]/ns/pid_for_children\fP and \fI/proc/[pid]/ns/time_for_children\fP files for persistent PID and TIME namespaces. This change requires Linux kernel 4.17 or newer. -.sp -The following types of namespaces can be created with \fBunshare\fP: -.sp -\fBmount namespace\fP -.RS 4 -Mounting and unmounting filesystems will not affect the rest of the system, except for filesystems which are explicitly marked as shared (with \fBmount \-\-make\-shared\fP; see \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP or \fBfindmnt \-o+PROPAGATION\fP for the \fBshared\fP flags). For further details, see \fBmount_namespaces\fP(7). -.sp -\fBunshare\fP since util\-linux version 2.27 automatically sets propagation to \fBprivate\fP in a new mount namespace to make sure that the new namespace is really unshared. It\(cqs possible to disable this feature with option \fB\-\-propagation unchanged\fP. Note that \fBprivate\fP is the kernel default. -.RE -.sp -\fBUTS namespace\fP -.RS 4 -Setting hostname or domainname will not affect the rest of the system. For further details, see \fButs_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBIPC namespace\fP -.RS 4 -The process will have an independent namespace for POSIX message queues as well as System V message queues, semaphore sets and shared memory segments. For further details, see \fBipc_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBnetwork namespace\fP -.RS 4 -The process will have independent IPv4 and IPv6 stacks, IP routing tables, firewall rules, the \fI/proc/net\fP and \fI/sys/class/net\fP directory trees, sockets, etc. For further details, see \fBnetwork_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBPID namespace\fP -.RS 4 -Children will have a distinct set of PID\-to\-process mappings from their parent. For further details, see \fBpid_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBcgroup namespace\fP -.RS 4 -The process will have a virtualized view of \fI/proc/self/cgroup\fP, and new cgroup mounts will be rooted at the namespace cgroup root. For further details, see \fBcgroup_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBuser namespace\fP -.RS 4 -The process will have a distinct set of UIDs, GIDs and capabilities. For further details, see \fBuser_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fBtime namespace\fP -.RS 4 -The process can have a distinct view of \fBCLOCK_MONOTONIC\fP and/or \fBCLOCK_BOOTTIME\fP which can be changed using \fI/proc/self/timens_offsets\fP. For further details, see \fBtime_namespaces\fP(7). -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-ipc\fP[\fB=\fP\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Unshare the IPC namespace. If \fIfile\fP is specified, then a persistent namespace is created by a bind mount. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-mount\fP[\fB=\fP\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Unshare the mount namespace. If \fIfile\fP is specified, then a persistent namespace is created by a bind mount. Note that \fIfile\fP must be located on a mount whose propagation type is not \fBshared\fP (or an error results). Use the command \fBfindmnt \-o+PROPAGATION\fP when not sure about the current setting. See also the examples below. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-net\fP[\fB=\fP\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Unshare the network namespace. If \fIfile\fP is specified, then a persistent namespace is created by a bind mount. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP[\fB=\fP\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Unshare the PID namespace. If \fIfile\fP is specified, then a persistent namespace is created by a bind mount. (Creation of a persistent PID namespace will fail if the \fB\-\-fork\fP option is not also specified.) -.sp -See also the \fB\-\-fork\fP and \fB\-\-mount\-proc\fP options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-uts\fP[\fB=\fP\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Unshare the UTS namespace. If \fIfile\fP is specified, then a persistent namespace is created by a bind mount. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-user\fP[\fB=\fP\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Unshare the user namespace. If \fIfile\fP is specified, then a persistent namespace is created by a bind mount. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-cgroup\fP[\fB=\fP\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Unshare the cgroup namespace. If \fIfile\fP is specified, then persistent namespace is created by bind mount. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP[\fB=\fP\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Unshare the time namespace. If \fIfile\fP is specified, then a persistent namespace is created by a bind mount. The \fB\-\-monotonic\fP and \fB\-\-boottime\fP options can be used to specify the corresponding offset in the time namespace. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-fork\fP -.RS 4 -Fork the specified \fIprogram\fP as a child process of \fBunshare\fP rather than running it directly. This is useful when creating a new PID namespace. Note that when \fBunshare\fP is waiting for the child process, then it ignores \fBSIGINT\fP and \fBSIGTERM\fP and does not forward any signals to the child. It is necessary to send signals to the child process. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-keep\-caps\fP -.RS 4 -When the \fB\-\-user\fP option is given, ensure that capabilities granted in the user namespace are preserved in the child process. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-kill\-child\fP[\fB=\fP\fIsigname\fP] -.RS 4 -When \fBunshare\fP terminates, have \fIsigname\fP be sent to the forked child process. Combined with \fB\-\-pid\fP this allows for an easy and reliable killing of the entire process tree below \fBunshare\fP. If not given, \fIsigname\fP defaults to \fBSIGKILL\fP. This option implies \fB\-\-fork\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-mount\-proc\fP[\fB=\fP\fImountpoint\fP] -.RS 4 -Just before running the program, mount the proc filesystem at \fImountpoint\fP (default is \fI/proc\fP). This is useful when creating a new PID namespace. It also implies creating a new mount namespace since the \fI/proc\fP mount would otherwise mess up existing programs on the system. The new proc filesystem is explicitly mounted as private (with \fBMS_PRIVATE\fP|\fBMS_REC\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-map\-user=\fP\fIuid|name\fP -.RS 4 -Run the program only after the current effective user ID has been mapped to \fIuid\fP. If this option is specified multiple times, the last occurrence takes precedence. This option implies \fB\-\-user\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-map\-group=\fP\fIgid|name\fP -.RS 4 -Run the program only after the current effective group ID has been mapped to \fIgid\fP. If this option is specified multiple times, the last occurrence takes precedence. This option implies \fB\-\-setgroups=deny\fP and \fB\-\-user\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-map\-root\-user\fP -.RS 4 -Run the program only after the current effective user and group IDs have been mapped to the superuser UID and GID in the newly created user namespace. This makes it possible to conveniently gain capabilities needed to manage various aspects of the newly created namespaces (such as configuring interfaces in the network namespace or mounting filesystems in the mount namespace) even when run unprivileged. As a mere convenience feature, it does not support more sophisticated use cases, such as mapping multiple ranges of UIDs and GIDs. This option implies \fB\-\-setgroups=deny\fP and \fB\-\-user\fP. This option is equivalent to \fB\-\-map\-user=0 \-\-map\-group=0\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-map\-current\-user\fP -.RS 4 -Run the program only after the current effective user and group IDs have been mapped to the same UID and GID in the newly created user namespace. This option implies \fB\-\-setgroups=deny\fP and \fB\-\-user\fP. This option is equivalent to \fB\-\-map\-user=$(id \-ru) \-\-map\-group=$(id \-rg)\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-propagation private\fP|\fBshared\fP|\fBslave\fP|\fBunchanged\fP -.RS 4 -Recursively set the mount propagation flag in the new mount namespace. The default is to set the propagation to \fIprivate\fP. It is possible to disable this feature with the argument \fBunchanged\fP. The option is silently ignored when the mount namespace (\fB\-\-mount\fP) is not requested. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setgroups allow\fP|\fBdeny\fP -.RS 4 -Allow or deny the \fBsetgroups\fP(2) system call in a user namespace. -.sp -To be able to call \fBsetgroups\fP(2), the calling process must at least have \fBCAP_SETGID\fP. But since Linux 3.19 a further restriction applies: the kernel gives permission to call \fBsetgroups\fP(2) only after the GID map (\fB/proc/\fP\fIpid\fP*/gid_map*) has been set. The GID map is writable by root when \fBsetgroups\fP(2) is enabled (i.e., \fBallow\fP, the default), and the GID map becomes writable by unprivileged processes when \fBsetgroups\fP(2) is permanently disabled (with \fBdeny\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-root=\fP\fIdir\fP -.RS 4 -run the command with root directory set to \fIdir\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wd=\fP\fIdir\fP -.RS 4 -change working directory to \fIdir\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-setuid\fP \fIuid\fP -.RS 4 -Set the user ID which will be used in the entered namespace. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-G\fP, \fB\-\-setgid\fP \fIgid\fP -.RS 4 -Set the group ID which will be used in the entered namespace and drop supplementary groups. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-monotonic\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Set the offset of \fBCLOCK_MONOTONIC\fP which will be used in the entered time namespace. This option requires unsharing a time namespace with \fB\-\-time\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-boottime\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Set the offset of \fBCLOCK_BOOTTIME\fP which will be used in the entered time namespace. This option requires unsharing a time namespace with \fB\-\-time\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The proc and sysfs filesystems mounting as root in a user namespace have to be restricted so that a less privileged user can not get more access to sensitive files that a more privileged user made unavailable. In short the rule for proc and sysfs is as close to a bind mount as possible. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -The following command creates a PID namespace, using \fB\-\-fork\fP to ensure that the executed command is performed in a child process that (being the first process in the namespace) has PID 1. The \fB\-\-mount\-proc\fP option ensures that a new mount namespace is also simultaneously created and that a new \fBproc\fP(5) filesystem is mounted that contains information corresponding to the new PID namespace. When the \fBreadlink\fP command terminates, the new namespaces are automatically torn down. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -# unshare \-\-fork \-\-pid \-\-mount\-proc readlink /proc/self -1 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -As an unprivileged user, create a new user namespace where the user\(cqs credentials are mapped to the root IDs inside the namespace: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -$ id \-u; id \-g -1000 -1000 -$ unshare \-\-user \-\-map\-root\-user \(rs - sh \-c \(aq\(aqwhoami; cat /proc/self/uid_map /proc/self/gid_map\(aq\(aq -root - 0 1000 1 - 0 1000 1 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The first of the following commands creates a new persistent UTS namespace and modifies the hostname as seen in that namespace. The namespace is then entered with \fBnsenter\fP(1) in order to display the modified hostname; this step demonstrates that the UTS namespace continues to exist even though the namespace had no member processes after the \fBunshare\fP command terminated. The namespace is then destroyed by removing the bind mount. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -# touch /root/uts\-ns -# unshare \-\-uts=/root/uts\-ns hostname FOO -# nsenter \-\-uts=/root/uts\-ns hostname -FOO -# umount /root/uts\-ns -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The following commands establish a persistent mount namespace referenced by the bind mount \fI/root/namespaces/mnt\fP. In order to ensure that the creation of that bind mount succeeds, the parent directory (\fI/root/namespaces\fP) is made a bind mount whose propagation type is not \fBshared\fP. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -# mount \-\-bind /root/namespaces /root/namespaces -# mount \-\-make\-private /root/namespaces -# touch /root/namespaces/mnt -# unshare \-\-mount=/root/namespaces/mnt -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The following commands demonstrate the use of the \fB\-\-kill\-child\fP option when creating a PID namespace, in order to ensure that when \fBunshare\fP is killed, all of the processes within the PID namespace are killed. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -# set +m # Don\(aqt print job status messages - - -# unshare \-\-pid \-\-fork \-\-mount\-proc \-\-kill\-child \-\- \(rs - - - bash \-\-norc \-c \(aq\(aq(sleep 555 &) && (ps a &) && sleep 999\(aq\(aq & -[1] 53456 -# PID TTY STAT TIME COMMAND - 1 pts/3 S+ 0:00 sleep 999 - 3 pts/3 S+ 0:00 sleep 555 - 5 pts/3 R+ 0:00 ps a - -# ps h \-o \(aqcomm\(aq $! # Show that background job is unshare(1) -unshare -# kill $! # Kill unshare(1) -# pidof sleep -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The \fBpidof\fP(1) command prints no output, because the \fBsleep\fP processes have been killed. More precisely, when the \fBsleep\fP process that has PID 1 in the namespace (i.e., the namespace\(cqs init process) was killed, this caused all other processes in the namespace to be killed. By contrast, a similar series of commands where the \fB\-\-kill\-child\fP option is not used shows that when \fBunshare\fP terminates, the processes in the PID namespace are not killed: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -# unshare \-\-pid \-\-fork \-\-mount\-proc \-\- \(rs - - - bash \-\-norc \-c \(aq\(aq(sleep 555 &) && (ps a &) && sleep 999\(aq\(aq & -[1] 53479 -# PID TTY STAT TIME COMMAND - 1 pts/3 S+ 0:00 sleep 999 - 3 pts/3 S+ 0:00 sleep 555 - 5 pts/3 R+ 0:00 ps a - -# kill $! -# pidof sleep -53482 53480 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The following example demonstrates the creation of a time namespace where the boottime clock is set to a point several years in the past: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -# uptime \-p # Show uptime in initial time namespace -up 21 hours, 30 minutes -# unshare \-\-time \-\-fork \-\-boottime 300000000 uptime \-p -up 9 years, 28 weeks, 1 day, 2 hours, 50 minutes -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "dottedmag\(atdottedmag.net" "Mikhail Gusarov" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBclone\fP(2), -\fBunshare\fP(2), -\fBnamespaces\fP(7), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBunshare\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uptime.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uptime.1 index a7b3a52f..d0c957fc 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uptime.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uptime.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH UPTIME "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH UPTIME "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME uptime \- tell how long the system has been running .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/users.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/users.1 index 8d6f0550..402c417a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/users.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/users.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH USERS "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH USERS "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME users \- print the user names of users currently logged in to the current host .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/utmpdump.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/utmpdump.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3ad42a7b..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/utmpdump.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: utmpdump -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UTMPDUMP" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -utmpdump \- dump UTMP and WTMP files in raw format -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fButmpdump\fP [options] \fIfilename\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fButmpdump\fP is a simple program to dump UTMP and WTMP files in raw format, so they can be examined. \fButmpdump\fP reads from stdin unless a \fIfilename\fP is passed. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-follow\fP -.RS 4 -Output appended data as the file grows. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Write command output to \fIfile\fP instead of standard output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-reverse\fP -.RS 4 -Undump, write back edited login information into the utmp or wtmp files. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -\fButmpdump\fP can be useful in cases of corrupted utmp or wtmp entries. It can dump out utmp/wtmp to an ASCII file, which can then be edited to remove bogus entries, and reintegrated using: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fButmpdump \-r < ascii_file > wtmp\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -But be warned, \fButmpdump\fP was written for debugging purposes only. -.SS "File formats" -.sp -Only the binary version of the \fButmp\fP(5) is standardised. Textual dumps may become incompatible in future. -.sp -The version 2.28 was the last one that printed text output using \fBctime\fP(3) timestamp format. Newer dumps use millisecond precision ISO\-8601 timestamp format in UTC\-0 timezone. Conversion from former timestamp format can be made to binary, although attempt to do so can lead the timestamps to drift amount of timezone offset. -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -You may \fBnot\fP use the \fB\-r\fP option, as the format for the utmp/wtmp files strongly depends on the input format. This tool was \fBnot\fP written for normal use, but for debugging only. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Michael Krapp -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlast\fP(1), -\fBw\fP(1), -\fBwho\fP(1), -\fButmp\fP(5) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fButmpdump\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uuidgen.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uuidgen.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 683197fb..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uuidgen.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuidgen -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUIDGEN" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuidgen \- create a new UUID value -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBuuidgen\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBuuidgen\fP program creates (and prints) a new universally unique identifier (UUID) using the \fBlibuuid\fP(3) library. The new UUID can reasonably be considered unique among all UUIDs created on the local system, and among UUIDs created on other systems in the past and in the future. -.sp -There are three types of UUIDs which \fBuuidgen\fP can generate: time\-based UUIDs, random\-based UUIDs, and hash\-based UUIDs. By default \fBuuidgen\fP will generate a random\-based UUID if a high\-quality random number generator is present. Otherwise, it will choose a time\-based UUID. It is possible to force the generation of one of these first two UUID types by using the \fB\-\-random\fP or \fB\-\-time\fP options. -.sp -The third type of UUID is generated with the \fB\-\-md5\fP or \fB\-\-sha1\fP options, followed by \fB\-\-namespace\fP \fInamespace\fP and \fB\-\-name\fP \fIname\fP. The \fInamespace\fP may either be a well\-known UUID, or else an alias to one of the well\-known UUIDs defined in RFC 4122, that is \fB@dns\fP, \fB@url\fP, \fB@oid\fP, or \fB@x500\fP. The \fIname\fP is an arbitrary string value. The generated UUID is the digest of the concatenation of the namespace UUID and the name value, hashed with the MD5 or SHA1 algorithms. It is, therefore, a predictable value which may be useful when UUIDs are being used as handles or nonces for more complex values or values which shouldn\(cqt be disclosed directly. See the RFC for more information. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-random\fP -.RS 4 -Generate a random\-based UUID. This method creates a UUID consisting mostly of random bits. It requires that the operating system has a high quality random number generator, such as \fI/dev/random\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP -.RS 4 -Generate a time\-based UUID. This method creates a UUID based on the system clock plus the system\(cqs ethernet hardware address, if present. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-md5\fP -.RS 4 -Use MD5 as the hash algorithm. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-sha1\fP -.RS 4 -Use SHA1 as the hash algorithm. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-namespace\fP \fInamespace\fP -.RS 4 -Generate the hash with the \fInamespace\fP prefix. The \fInamespace\fP is UUID, or \(aq@ns\(aq where "ns" is well\-known predefined UUID addressed by namespace name (see above). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-name\fP \fIname\fP -.RS 4 -Generate the hash of the \fIname\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-hex\fP -.RS 4 -Interpret name \fIname\fP as a hexadecimal string. -.RE -.SH "CONFORMING TO" -.sp -OSF DCE 1.1 -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -uuidgen \-\-sha1 \-\-namespace @dns \-\-name "www.example.com" -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBuuidgen\fP was written by Andreas Dilger for \fBlibuuid\fP(3). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlibuuid\fP(3), -.URL "https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4122" "RFC 4122" "" -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBuuidgen\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uuidparse.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uuidparse.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0e829815..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/uuidparse.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,174 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuidparse -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUIDPARSE" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuidparse \- a utility to parse unique identifiers -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBuuidparse\fP [options] \fIuuid\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -This command will parse unique identifier inputs from either command line arguments or standard input. The inputs are white\-space separated. -.SH "OUTPUT" -.SS "Variants" -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -NCS -T}:T{ -.sp -Network Computing System identifier. These were the original UUIDs. -T} -T{ -.sp -DCE -T}:T{ -.sp -The Open Software Foundation\(cqs (OSF) Distributed Computing Environment UUIDs. -T} -T{ -.sp -Microsoft -T}:T{ -.sp -Microsoft Windows platform globally unique identifier (GUID). -T} -T{ -.sp -other -T}:T{ -.sp -Unknown variant. Usually invalid input data. -T} -.TE -.sp -.SS "Types" -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -nil -T}:T{ -.sp -Special type for zero in type file. -T} -T{ -.sp -time\-based -T}:T{ -.sp -The DCE time based. -T} -T{ -.sp -DCE -T}:T{ -.sp -The DCE time and MAC Address. -T} -T{ -.sp -name\-based -T}:T{ -.sp -RFC 4122 md5sum hash. -T} -T{ -.sp -random -T}:T{ -.sp -RFC 4122 random. -T} -T{ -.sp -sha1\-based -T}:T{ -.sp -RFC 4122 sha\-1 hash. -T} -T{ -.sp -unknown -T}:T{ -.sp -Unknown type. Usually invalid input data. -T} -.TE -.sp -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kerolasa\(atiki.fi" "Sami Kerola" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuidgen\fP(1), -\fBlibuuid\fP(3), -.URL "https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4122" "RFC 4122" "" -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBuuidparse\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/vdir.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/vdir.1 index ad09f97b..487db54a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/vdir.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/vdir.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH VDIR "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH VDIR "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME vdir \- list directory contents .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wall.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wall.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a7121838..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wall.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: wall -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "WALL" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -wall \- write a message to all users -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBwall\fP [\fB\-n\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItimeout\fP] [\fB\-g\fP \fIgroup\fP] [\fImessage\fP | \fIfile\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBwall\fP displays a \fImessage\fP, or the contents of a \fIfile\fP, or otherwise its standard input, on the terminals of all currently logged in users. The command will wrap lines that are longer than 79 characters. Short lines are whitespace padded to have 79 characters. The command will always put a carriage return and new line at the end of each line. -.sp -Only the superuser can write on the terminals of users who have chosen to deny messages or are using a program which automatically denies messages. -.sp -Reading from a \fIfile\fP is refused when the invoker is not superuser and the program is set\-user\-ID or set\-group\-ID. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-nobanner\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress the banner. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-timeout\fP \fItimeout\fP -.RS 4 -Abandon the write attempt to the terminals after \fItimeout\fP seconds. This \fItimeout\fP must be a positive integer. The default value is 300 seconds, which is a legacy from the time when people ran terminals over modem lines. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-group\fP \fIgroup\fP -.RS 4 -Limit printing message to members of group defined as a \fIgroup\fP argument. The argument can be group name or GID. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Some sessions, such as \fBwdm\fP(1x), that have in the beginning of \fButmp\fP(5) ut_type data a \(aq:\(aq character will not get the message from \fBwall\fP. This is done to avoid write errors. -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -A \fBwall\fP command appeared in Version 7 AT&T UNIX. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmesg\fP(1), -\fBtalk\fP(1), -\fBwrite\fP(1), -\fBshutdown\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBwall\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wc.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wc.1 index 51528294..96ef68f1 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wc.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wc.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH WC "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH WC "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME wc \- print newline, word, and byte counts for each file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wget.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wget.1 index 15ca79b6..419c03dc 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wget.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/wget.1 @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ .\" ======================================================================== .\" .IX Title "WGET 1" -.TH WGET 1 "2022-11-08" "GNU Wget 1.20.3" "GNU Wget" +.TH WGET 1 "2024-03-04" "GNU Wget 1.20.3" "GNU Wget" .\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes .\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. .if n .ad l diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/whereis.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/whereis.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1bbe3590..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/whereis.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,137 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: whereis -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "WHEREIS" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -whereis \- locate the binary, source, and manual page files for a command -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBwhereis\fP [options] [\fB\-BMS\fP \fIdirectory\fP... \fB\-f\fP] \fIname\fP... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBwhereis\fP locates the binary, source and manual files for the specified command names. The supplied names are first stripped of leading pathname components. Prefixes of \fBs.\fP resulting from use of source code control are also dealt with. \fBwhereis\fP then attempts to locate the desired program in the standard Linux places, and in the places specified by \fB$PATH\fP and \fB$MANPATH\fP. -.sp -The search restrictions (options \fB\-b\fP, \fB\-m\fP and \fB\-s\fP) are cumulative and apply to the subsequent \fIname\fP patterns on the command line. Any new search restriction resets the search mask. For example, -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBwhereis \-bm ls tr \-m gcc\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -searches for "ls" and "tr" binaries and man pages, and for "gcc" man pages only. -.sp -The options \fB\-B\fP, \fB\-M\fP and \fB\-S\fP reset search paths for the subsequent \fIname\fP patterns. For example, -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBwhereis \-m ls \-M /usr/share/man/man1 \-f cal\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -searches for "\fBls\fP" man pages in all default paths, but for "cal" in the \fI/usr/share/man/man1\fP directory only. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-b\fP -.RS 4 -Search for binaries. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP -.RS 4 -Search for manuals. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP -.RS 4 -Search for sources. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP -.RS 4 -Only show the command names that have unusual entries. A command is said to be unusual if it does not have just one entry of each explicitly requested type. Thus \(aq\fBwhereis \-m \-u *\fP\(aq asks for those files in the current directory which have no documentation file, or more than one. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the places where \fBwhereis\fP searches for binaries, by a whitespace\-separated list of directories. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the places where \fBwhereis\fP searches for manuals and documentation in Info format, by a whitespace\-separated list of directories. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the places where \fBwhereis\fP searches for sources, by a whitespace\-separated list of directories. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP -.RS 4 -Terminates the directory list and signals the start of filenames. It \fImust\fP be used when any of the \fB\-B\fP, \fB\-M\fP, or \fB\-S\fP options is used. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP -.RS 4 -Output the list of effective lookup paths that \fBwhereis\fP is using. When none of \fB\-B\fP, \fB\-M\fP, or \fB\-S\fP is specified, the option will output the hard\-coded paths that the command was able to find on the system. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILE SEARCH PATHS" -.sp -By default \fBwhereis\fP tries to find files from hard\-coded paths, which are defined with glob patterns. The command attempts to use the contents of \fB$PATH\fP and \fB$MANPATH\fP environment variables as default search path. The easiest way to know what paths are in use is to add the \fB\-l\fP listing option. Effects of the \fB\-B\fP, \fB\-M\fP, and \fB\-S\fP are displayed with \fB\-l\fP. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -WHEREIS_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables debug output. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -To find all files in \fI/usr/bin\fP which are not documented in \fI/usr/man/man1\fP or have no source in \fI/usr/src\fP: -.sp -\fBcd /usr/bin\fP \fBwhereis \-u \-ms \-M /usr/man/man1 \-S /usr/src \-f *\fP -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBwhereis\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/who.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/who.1 index 494fe2de..ea48acf6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/who.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/who.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH WHO "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH WHO "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME who \- show who is logged on .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/whoami.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/whoami.1 index 11ee4f8c..a837e834 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/whoami.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/whoami.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH WHOAMI "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH WHOAMI "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME whoami \- print effective userid .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/write.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/write.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ced3398f..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/write.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: write -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: User Commands -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "WRITE" "1" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "User Commands" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -write \- send a message to another user -.sp -\fBwrite\fP \fIuser\fP [\fIttyname\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBwrite\fP allows you to communicate with other users, by copying lines from your terminal to theirs. -.sp -When you run the \fBwrite\fP command, the user you are writing to gets a message of the form: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -Message from yourname@yourhost on yourtty at hh:mm ... -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Any further lines you enter will be copied to the specified user\(cqs terminal. If the other user wants to reply, they must run \fBwrite\fP as well. -.sp -When you are done, type an end\-of\-file or interrupt character. The other user will see the message \fBEOF\fP indicating that the conversation is over. -.sp -You can prevent people (other than the superuser) from writing to you with the \fBmesg\fP(1) command. Some commands, for example \fBnroff\fP(1) and \fBpr\fP(1), may automatically disallow writing, so that the output they produce isn\(cqt overwritten. -.sp -If the user you want to write to is logged in on more than one terminal, you can specify which terminal to write to by giving the terminal name as the second operand to the \fBwrite\fP command. Alternatively, you can let \fBwrite\fP select one of the terminals \- it will pick the one with the shortest idle time. This is so that if the user is logged in at work and also dialed up from home, the message will go to the right place. -.sp -The traditional protocol for writing to someone is that the string \fI\-o\fP, either at the end of a line or on a line by itself, means that it\(cqs the other person\(cqs turn to talk. The string \fIoo\fP means that the person believes the conversation to be over. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -A \fBwrite\fP command appeared in Version 6 AT&T UNIX. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmesg\fP(1), -\fBtalk\fP(1), -\fBwho\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBwrite\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xz.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xz.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bc5514d5..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xz.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2786 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" -.\" Author: Lasse Collin -.\" -.\" This file has been put into the public domain. -.\" You can do whatever you want with this file. -.\" -.TH XZ 1 "2015-05-11" "Tukaani" "XZ Utils" -. -.SH NAME -xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat \- Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files -. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B xz -.RI [ option... ] -.RI [ file... ] -. -.SH COMMAND ALIASES -.B unxz -is equivalent to -.BR "xz \-\-decompress" . -.br -.B xzcat -is equivalent to -.BR "xz \-\-decompress \-\-stdout" . -.br -.B lzma -is equivalent to -.BR "xz \-\-format=lzma" . -.br -.B unlzma -is equivalent to -.BR "xz \-\-format=lzma \-\-decompress" . -.br -.B lzcat -is equivalent to -.BR "xz \-\-format=lzma \-\-decompress \-\-stdout" . -.PP -When writing scripts that need to decompress files, -it is recommended to always use the name -.B xz -with appropriate arguments -.RB ( "xz \-d" -or -.BR "xz \-dc" ) -instead of the names -.B unxz -and -.BR xzcat . -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B xz -is a general-purpose data compression tool with -command line syntax similar to -.BR gzip (1) -and -.BR bzip2 (1). -The native file format is the -.B .xz -format, but the legacy -.B .lzma -format used by LZMA Utils and -raw compressed streams with no container format headers -are also supported. -.PP -.B xz -compresses or decompresses each -.I file -according to the selected operation mode. -If no -.I files -are given or -.I file -is -.BR \- , -.B xz -reads from standard input and writes the processed data -to standard output. -.B xz -will refuse (display an error and skip the -.IR file ) -to write compressed data to standard output if it is a terminal. -Similarly, -.B xz -will refuse to read compressed data -from standard input if it is a terminal. -.PP -Unless -.B \-\-stdout -is specified, -.I files -other than -.B \- -are written to a new file whose name is derived from the source -.I file -name: -.IP \(bu 3 -When compressing, the suffix of the target file format -.RB ( .xz -or -.BR .lzma ) -is appended to the source filename to get the target filename. -.IP \(bu 3 -When decompressing, the -.B .xz -or -.B .lzma -suffix is removed from the filename to get the target filename. -.B xz -also recognizes the suffixes -.B .txz -and -.BR .tlz , -and replaces them with the -.B .tar -suffix. -.PP -If the target file already exists, an error is displayed and the -.I file -is skipped. -.PP -Unless writing to standard output, -.B xz -will display a warning and skip the -.I file -if any of the following applies: -.IP \(bu 3 -.I File -is not a regular file. -Symbolic links are not followed, -and thus they are not considered to be regular files. -.IP \(bu 3 -.I File -has more than one hard link. -.IP \(bu 3 -.I File -has setuid, setgid, or sticky bit set. -.IP \(bu 3 -The operation mode is set to compress and the -.I file -already has a suffix of the target file format -.RB ( .xz -or -.B .txz -when compressing to the -.B .xz -format, and -.B .lzma -or -.B .tlz -when compressing to the -.B .lzma -format). -.IP \(bu 3 -The operation mode is set to decompress and the -.I file -doesn't have a suffix of any of the supported file formats -.RB ( .xz , -.BR .txz , -.BR .lzma , -or -.BR .tlz ). -.PP -After successfully compressing or decompressing the -.IR file , -.B xz -copies the owner, group, permissions, access time, -and modification time from the source -.I file -to the target file. -If copying the group fails, the permissions are modified -so that the target file doesn't become accessible to users -who didn't have permission to access the source -.IR file . -.B xz -doesn't support copying other metadata like access control lists -or extended attributes yet. -.PP -Once the target file has been successfully closed, the source -.I file -is removed unless -.B \-\-keep -was specified. -The source -.I file -is never removed if the output is written to standard output. -.PP -Sending -.B SIGINFO -or -.B SIGUSR1 -to the -.B xz -process makes it print progress information to standard error. -This has only limited use since when standard error -is a terminal, using -.B \-\-verbose -will display an automatically updating progress indicator. -. -.SS "Memory usage" -The memory usage of -.B xz -varies from a few hundred kilobytes to several gigabytes -depending on the compression settings. -The settings used when compressing a file determine -the memory requirements of the decompressor. -Typically the decompressor needs 5\ % to 20\ % of -the amount of memory that the compressor needed when -creating the file. -For example, decompressing a file created with -.B xz \-9 -currently requires 65\ MiB of memory. -Still, it is possible to have -.B .xz -files that require several gigabytes of memory to decompress. -.PP -Especially users of older systems may find -the possibility of very large memory usage annoying. -To prevent uncomfortable surprises, -.B xz -has a built-in memory usage limiter, which is disabled by default. -While some operating systems provide ways to limit -the memory usage of processes, relying on it -wasn't deemed to be flexible enough (e.g. using -.BR ulimit (1) -to limit virtual memory tends to cripple -.BR mmap (2)). -.PP -The memory usage limiter can be enabled with -the command line option \fB\-\-memlimit=\fIlimit\fR. -Often it is more convenient to enable the limiter -by default by setting the environment variable -.BR XZ_DEFAULTS , -e.g.\& -.BR XZ_DEFAULTS=\-\-memlimit=150MiB . -It is possible to set the limits separately -for compression and decompression -by using \fB\-\-memlimit\-compress=\fIlimit\fR and -\fB\-\-memlimit\-decompress=\fIlimit\fR. -Using these two options outside -.B XZ_DEFAULTS -is rarely useful because a single run of -.B xz -cannot do both compression and decompression and -.BI \-\-memlimit= limit -(or \fB\-M\fR \fIlimit\fR) -is shorter to type on the command line. -.PP -If the specified memory usage limit is exceeded when decompressing, -.B xz -will display an error and decompressing the file will fail. -If the limit is exceeded when compressing, -.B xz -will try to scale the settings down so that the limit -is no longer exceeded (except when using \fB\-\-format=raw\fR -or \fB\-\-no\-adjust\fR). -This way the operation won't fail unless the limit is very small. -The scaling of the settings is done in steps that don't -match the compression level presets, e.g. if the limit is -only slightly less than the amount required for -.BR "xz \-9" , -the settings will be scaled down only a little, -not all the way down to -.BR "xz \-8" . -. -.SS "Concatenation and padding with .xz files" -It is possible to concatenate -.B .xz -files as is. -.B xz -will decompress such files as if they were a single -.B .xz -file. -.PP -It is possible to insert padding between the concatenated parts -or after the last part. -The padding must consist of null bytes and the size -of the padding must be a multiple of four bytes. -This can be useful e.g. if the -.B .xz -file is stored on a medium that measures file sizes -in 512-byte blocks. -.PP -Concatenation and padding are not allowed with -.B .lzma -files or raw streams. -. -.SH OPTIONS -. -.SS "Integer suffixes and special values" -In most places where an integer argument is expected, -an optional suffix is supported to easily indicate large integers. -There must be no space between the integer and the suffix. -.TP -.B KiB -Multiply the integer by 1,024 (2^10). -.BR Ki , -.BR k , -.BR kB , -.BR K , -and -.B KB -are accepted as synonyms for -.BR KiB . -.TP -.B MiB -Multiply the integer by 1,048,576 (2^20). -.BR Mi , -.BR m , -.BR M , -and -.B MB -are accepted as synonyms for -.BR MiB . -.TP -.B GiB -Multiply the integer by 1,073,741,824 (2^30). -.BR Gi , -.BR g , -.BR G , -and -.B GB -are accepted as synonyms for -.BR GiB . -.PP -The special value -.B max -can be used to indicate the maximum integer value -supported by the option. -. -.SS "Operation mode" -If multiple operation mode options are given, -the last one takes effect. -.TP -.BR \-z ", " \-\-compress -Compress. -This is the default operation mode when no operation mode option -is specified and no other operation mode is implied from -the command name (for example, -.B unxz -implies -.BR \-\-decompress ). -.TP -.BR \-d ", " \-\-decompress ", " \-\-uncompress -Decompress. -.TP -.BR \-t ", " \-\-test -Test the integrity of compressed -.IR files . -This option is equivalent to -.B "\-\-decompress \-\-stdout" -except that the decompressed data is discarded instead of being -written to standard output. -No files are created or removed. -.TP -.BR \-l ", " \-\-list -Print information about compressed -.IR files . -No uncompressed output is produced, -and no files are created or removed. -In list mode, the program cannot read -the compressed data from standard -input or from other unseekable sources. -.IP "" -The default listing shows basic information about -.IR files , -one file per line. -To get more detailed information, use also the -.B \-\-verbose -option. -For even more information, use -.B \-\-verbose -twice, but note that this may be slow, because getting all the extra -information requires many seeks. -The width of verbose output exceeds -80 characters, so piping the output to e.g.\& -.B "less\ \-S" -may be convenient if the terminal isn't wide enough. -.IP "" -The exact output may vary between -.B xz -versions and different locales. -For machine-readable output, -.B \-\-robot \-\-list -should be used. -. -.SS "Operation modifiers" -.TP -.BR \-k ", " \-\-keep -Don't delete the input files. -.TP -.BR \-f ", " \-\-force -This option has several effects: -.RS -.IP \(bu 3 -If the target file already exists, -delete it before compressing or decompressing. -.IP \(bu 3 -Compress or decompress even if the input is -a symbolic link to a regular file, -has more than one hard link, -or has the setuid, setgid, or sticky bit set. -The setuid, setgid, and sticky bits are not copied -to the target file. -.IP \(bu 3 -When used with -.B \-\-decompress -.BR \-\-stdout -and -.B xz -cannot recognize the type of the source file, -copy the source file as is to standard output. -This allows -.B xzcat -.B \-\-force -to be used like -.BR cat (1) -for files that have not been compressed with -.BR xz . -Note that in future, -.B xz -might support new compressed file formats, which may make -.B xz -decompress more types of files instead of copying them as is to -standard output. -.BI \-\-format= format -can be used to restrict -.B xz -to decompress only a single file format. -.RE -.TP -.BR \-c ", " \-\-stdout ", " \-\-to\-stdout -Write the compressed or decompressed data to -standard output instead of a file. -This implies -.BR \-\-keep . -.TP -.B \-\-single\-stream -Decompress only the first -.B .xz -stream, and -silently ignore possible remaining input data following the stream. -Normally such trailing garbage makes -.B xz -display an error. -.IP "" -.B xz -never decompresses more than one stream from -.B .lzma -files or raw streams, but this option still makes -.B xz -ignore the possible trailing data after the -.B .lzma -file or raw stream. -.IP "" -This option has no effect if the operation mode is not -.B \-\-decompress -or -.BR \-\-test . -.TP -.B \-\-no\-sparse -Disable creation of sparse files. -By default, if decompressing into a regular file, -.B xz -tries to make the file sparse if the decompressed data contains -long sequences of binary zeros. -It also works when writing to standard output -as long as standard output is connected to a regular file -and certain additional conditions are met to make it safe. -Creating sparse files may save disk space and speed up -the decompression by reducing the amount of disk I/O. -.TP -\fB\-S\fR \fI.suf\fR, \fB\-\-suffix=\fI.suf -When compressing, use -.I .suf -as the suffix for the target file instead of -.B .xz -or -.BR .lzma . -If not writing to standard output and -the source file already has the suffix -.IR .suf , -a warning is displayed and the file is skipped. -.IP "" -When decompressing, recognize files with the suffix -.I .suf -in addition to files with the -.BR .xz , -.BR .txz , -.BR .lzma , -or -.B .tlz -suffix. -If the source file has the suffix -.IR .suf , -the suffix is removed to get the target filename. -.IP "" -When compressing or decompressing raw streams -.RB ( \-\-format=raw ), -the suffix must always be specified unless -writing to standard output, -because there is no default suffix for raw streams. -.TP -\fB\-\-files\fR[\fB=\fIfile\fR] -Read the filenames to process from -.IR file ; -if -.I file -is omitted, filenames are read from standard input. -Filenames must be terminated with the newline character. -A dash -.RB ( \- ) -is taken as a regular filename; it doesn't mean standard input. -If filenames are given also as command line arguments, they are -processed before the filenames read from -.IR file . -.TP -\fB\-\-files0\fR[\fB=\fIfile\fR] -This is identical to \fB\-\-files\fR[\fB=\fIfile\fR] except -that each filename must be terminated with the null character. -. -.SS "Basic file format and compression options" -.TP -\fB\-F\fR \fIformat\fR, \fB\-\-format=\fIformat -Specify the file -.I format -to compress or decompress: -.RS -.TP -.B auto -This is the default. -When compressing, -.B auto -is equivalent to -.BR xz . -When decompressing, -the format of the input file is automatically detected. -Note that raw streams (created with -.BR \-\-format=raw ) -cannot be auto-detected. -.TP -.B xz -Compress to the -.B .xz -file format, or accept only -.B .xz -files when decompressing. -.TP -.BR lzma ", " alone -Compress to the legacy -.B .lzma -file format, or accept only -.B .lzma -files when decompressing. -The alternative name -.B alone -is provided for backwards compatibility with LZMA Utils. -.TP -.B raw -Compress or uncompress a raw stream (no headers). -This is meant for advanced users only. -To decode raw streams, you need use -.B \-\-format=raw -and explicitly specify the filter chain, -which normally would have been stored in the container headers. -.RE -.TP -\fB\-C\fR \fIcheck\fR, \fB\-\-check=\fIcheck -Specify the type of the integrity check. -The check is calculated from the uncompressed data and -stored in the -.B .xz -file. -This option has an effect only when compressing into the -.B .xz -format; the -.B .lzma -format doesn't support integrity checks. -The integrity check (if any) is verified when the -.B .xz -file is decompressed. -.IP "" -Supported -.I check -types: -.RS -.TP -.B none -Don't calculate an integrity check at all. -This is usually a bad idea. -This can be useful when integrity of the data is verified -by other means anyway. -.TP -.B crc32 -Calculate CRC32 using the polynomial from IEEE-802.3 (Ethernet). -.TP -.B crc64 -Calculate CRC64 using the polynomial from ECMA-182. -This is the default, since it is slightly better than CRC32 -at detecting damaged files and the speed difference is negligible. -.TP -.B sha256 -Calculate SHA-256. -This is somewhat slower than CRC32 and CRC64. -.RE -.IP "" -Integrity of the -.B .xz -headers is always verified with CRC32. -It is not possible to change or disable it. -.TP -.B \-\-ignore\-check -Don't verify the integrity check of the compressed data when decompressing. -The CRC32 values in the -.B .xz -headers will still be verified normally. -.IP "" -.B "Do not use this option unless you know what you are doing." -Possible reasons to use this option: -.RS -.IP \(bu 3 -Trying to recover data from a corrupt .xz file. -.IP \(bu 3 -Speeding up decompression. -This matters mostly with SHA-256 or -with files that have compressed extremely well. -It's recommended to not use this option for this purpose -unless the file integrity is verified externally in some other way. -.RE -.TP -.BR \-0 " ... " \-9 -Select a compression preset level. -The default is -.BR \-6 . -If multiple preset levels are specified, -the last one takes effect. -If a custom filter chain was already specified, setting -a compression preset level clears the custom filter chain. -.IP "" -The differences between the presets are more significant than with -.BR gzip (1) -and -.BR bzip2 (1). -The selected compression settings determine -the memory requirements of the decompressor, -thus using a too high preset level might make it painful -to decompress the file on an old system with little RAM. -Specifically, -.B "it's not a good idea to blindly use \-9 for everything" -like it often is with -.BR gzip (1) -and -.BR bzip2 (1). -.RS -.TP -.BR "\-0" " ... " "\-3" -These are somewhat fast presets. -.B \-0 -is sometimes faster than -.B "gzip \-9" -while compressing much better. -The higher ones often have speed comparable to -.BR bzip2 (1) -with comparable or better compression ratio, -although the results -depend a lot on the type of data being compressed. -.TP -.BR "\-4" " ... " "\-6" -Good to very good compression while keeping -decompressor memory usage reasonable even for old systems. -.B \-6 -is the default, which is usually a good choice -e.g. for distributing files that need to be decompressible -even on systems with only 16\ MiB RAM. -.RB ( \-5e -or -.B \-6e -may be worth considering too. -See -.BR \-\-extreme .) -.TP -.B "\-7 ... \-9" -These are like -.B \-6 -but with higher compressor and decompressor memory requirements. -These are useful only when compressing files bigger than -8\ MiB, 16\ MiB, and 32\ MiB, respectively. -.RE -.IP "" -On the same hardware, the decompression speed is approximately -a constant number of bytes of compressed data per second. -In other words, the better the compression, -the faster the decompression will usually be. -This also means that the amount of uncompressed output -produced per second can vary a lot. -.IP "" -The following table summarises the features of the presets: -.RS -.RS -.PP -.TS -tab(;); -c c c c c -n n n n n. -Preset;DictSize;CompCPU;CompMem;DecMem -\-0;256 KiB;0;3 MiB;1 MiB -\-1;1 MiB;1;9 MiB;2 MiB -\-2;2 MiB;2;17 MiB;3 MiB -\-3;4 MiB;3;32 MiB;5 MiB -\-4;4 MiB;4;48 MiB;5 MiB -\-5;8 MiB;5;94 MiB;9 MiB -\-6;8 MiB;6;94 MiB;9 MiB -\-7;16 MiB;6;186 MiB;17 MiB -\-8;32 MiB;6;370 MiB;33 MiB -\-9;64 MiB;6;674 MiB;65 MiB -.TE -.RE -.RE -.IP "" -Column descriptions: -.RS -.IP \(bu 3 -DictSize is the LZMA2 dictionary size. -It is waste of memory to use a dictionary bigger than -the size of the uncompressed file. -This is why it is good to avoid using the presets -.BR \-7 " ... " \-9 -when there's no real need for them. -At -.B \-6 -and lower, the amount of memory wasted is -usually low enough to not matter. -.IP \(bu 3 -CompCPU is a simplified representation of the LZMA2 settings -that affect compression speed. -The dictionary size affects speed too, -so while CompCPU is the same for levels -.BR \-6 " ... " \-9 , -higher levels still tend to be a little slower. -To get even slower and thus possibly better compression, see -.BR \-\-extreme . -.IP \(bu 3 -CompMem contains the compressor memory requirements -in the single-threaded mode. -It may vary slightly between -.B xz -versions. -Memory requirements of some of the future multithreaded modes may -be dramatically higher than that of the single-threaded mode. -.IP \(bu 3 -DecMem contains the decompressor memory requirements. -That is, the compression settings determine -the memory requirements of the decompressor. -The exact decompressor memory usage is slightly more than -the LZMA2 dictionary size, but the values in the table -have been rounded up to the next full MiB. -.RE -.TP -.BR \-e ", " \-\-extreme -Use a slower variant of the selected compression preset level -.RB ( \-0 " ... " \-9 ) -to hopefully get a little bit better compression ratio, -but with bad luck this can also make it worse. -Decompressor memory usage is not affected, -but compressor memory usage increases a little at preset levels -.BR \-0 " ... " \-3 . -.IP "" -Since there are two presets with dictionary sizes -4\ MiB and 8\ MiB, the presets -.B \-3e -and -.B \-5e -use slightly faster settings (lower CompCPU) than -.B \-4e -and -.BR \-6e , -respectively. -That way no two presets are identical. -.RS -.RS -.PP -.TS -tab(;); -c c c c c -n n n n n. -Preset;DictSize;CompCPU;CompMem;DecMem -\-0e;256 KiB;8;4 MiB;1 MiB -\-1e;1 MiB;8;13 MiB;2 MiB -\-2e;2 MiB;8;25 MiB;3 MiB -\-3e;4 MiB;7;48 MiB;5 MiB -\-4e;4 MiB;8;48 MiB;5 MiB -\-5e;8 MiB;7;94 MiB;9 MiB -\-6e;8 MiB;8;94 MiB;9 MiB -\-7e;16 MiB;8;186 MiB;17 MiB -\-8e;32 MiB;8;370 MiB;33 MiB -\-9e;64 MiB;8;674 MiB;65 MiB -.TE -.RE -.RE -.IP "" -For example, there are a total of four presets that use -8\ MiB dictionary, whose order from the fastest to the slowest is -.BR \-5 , -.BR \-6 , -.BR \-5e , -and -.BR \-6e . -.TP -.B \-\-fast -.PD 0 -.TP -.B \-\-best -.PD -These are somewhat misleading aliases for -.B \-0 -and -.BR \-9 , -respectively. -These are provided only for backwards compatibility -with LZMA Utils. -Avoid using these options. -.TP -.BI \-\-block\-size= size -When compressing to the -.B .xz -format, split the input data into blocks of -.I size -bytes. -The blocks are compressed independently from each other, -which helps with multi-threading and -makes limited random-access decompression possible. -This option is typically used to override the default -block size in multi-threaded mode, -but this option can be used in single-threaded mode too. -.IP "" -In multi-threaded mode about three times -.I size -bytes will be allocated in each thread for buffering input and output. -The default -.I size -is three times the LZMA2 dictionary size or 1 MiB, -whichever is more. -Typically a good value is 2\-4 times -the size of the LZMA2 dictionary or at least 1 MiB. -Using -.I size -less than the LZMA2 dictionary size is waste of RAM -because then the LZMA2 dictionary buffer will never get fully used. -The sizes of the blocks are stored in the block headers, -which a future version of -.B xz -will use for multi-threaded decompression. -.IP "" -In single-threaded mode no block splitting is done by default. -Setting this option doesn't affect memory usage. -No size information is stored in block headers, -thus files created in single-threaded mode -won't be identical to files created in multi-threaded mode. -The lack of size information also means that a future version of -.B xz -won't be able decompress the files in multi-threaded mode. -.TP -.BI \-\-block\-list= sizes -When compressing to the -.B .xz -format, start a new block after -the given intervals of uncompressed data. -.IP "" -The uncompressed -.I sizes -of the blocks are specified as a comma-separated list. -Omitting a size (two or more consecutive commas) is a shorthand -to use the size of the previous block. -.IP "" -If the input file is bigger than the sum of -.IR sizes , -the last value in -.I sizes -is repeated until the end of the file. -A special value of -.B 0 -may be used as the last value to indicate that -the rest of the file should be encoded as a single block. -.IP "" -If one specifies -.I sizes -that exceed the encoder's block size -(either the default value in threaded mode or -the value specified with \fB\-\-block\-size=\fIsize\fR), -the encoder will create additional blocks while -keeping the boundaries specified in -.IR sizes . -For example, if one specifies -.B \-\-block\-size=10MiB -.B \-\-block\-list=5MiB,10MiB,8MiB,12MiB,24MiB -and the input file is 80 MiB, -one will get 11 blocks: -5, 10, 8, 10, 2, 10, 10, 4, 10, 10, and 1 MiB. -.IP "" -In multi-threaded mode the sizes of the blocks -are stored in the block headers. -This isn't done in single-threaded mode, -so the encoded output won't be -identical to that of the multi-threaded mode. -.TP -.BI \-\-flush\-timeout= timeout -When compressing, if more than -.I timeout -milliseconds (a positive integer) has passed since the previous flush and -reading more input would block, -all the pending input data is flushed from the encoder and -made available in the output stream. -This can be useful if -.B xz -is used to compress data that is streamed over a network. -Small -.I timeout -values make the data available at the receiving end -with a small delay, but large -.I timeout -values give better compression ratio. -.IP "" -This feature is disabled by default. -If this option is specified more than once, the last one takes effect. -The special -.I timeout -value of -.B 0 -can be used to explicitly disable this feature. -.IP "" -This feature is not available on non-POSIX systems. -.IP "" -.\" FIXME -.B "This feature is still experimental." -Currently -.B xz -is unsuitable for decompressing the stream in real time due to how -.B xz -does buffering. -.TP -.BI \-\-memlimit\-compress= limit -Set a memory usage limit for compression. -If this option is specified multiple times, -the last one takes effect. -.IP "" -If the compression settings exceed the -.IR limit , -.B xz -will adjust the settings downwards so that -the limit is no longer exceeded and display a notice that -automatic adjustment was done. -Such adjustments are not made when compressing with -.B \-\-format=raw -or if -.B \-\-no\-adjust -has been specified. -In those cases, an error is displayed and -.B xz -will exit with exit status 1. -.IP "" -The -.I limit -can be specified in multiple ways: -.RS -.IP \(bu 3 -The -.I limit -can be an absolute value in bytes. -Using an integer suffix like -.B MiB -can be useful. -Example: -.B "\-\-memlimit\-compress=80MiB" -.IP \(bu 3 -The -.I limit -can be specified as a percentage of total physical memory (RAM). -This can be useful especially when setting the -.B XZ_DEFAULTS -environment variable in a shell initialization script -that is shared between different computers. -That way the limit is automatically bigger -on systems with more memory. -Example: -.B "\-\-memlimit\-compress=70%" -.IP \(bu 3 -The -.I limit -can be reset back to its default value by setting it to -.BR 0 . -This is currently equivalent to setting the -.I limit -to -.B max -(no memory usage limit). -Once multithreading support has been implemented, -there may be a difference between -.B 0 -and -.B max -for the multithreaded case, so it is recommended to use -.B 0 -instead of -.B max -until the details have been decided. -.RE -.IP "" -See also the section -.BR "Memory usage" . -.TP -.BI \-\-memlimit\-decompress= limit -Set a memory usage limit for decompression. -This also affects the -.B \-\-list -mode. -If the operation is not possible without exceeding the -.IR limit , -.B xz -will display an error and decompressing the file will fail. -See -.BI \-\-memlimit\-compress= limit -for possible ways to specify the -.IR limit . -.TP -\fB\-M\fR \fIlimit\fR, \fB\-\-memlimit=\fIlimit\fR, \fB\-\-memory=\fIlimit -This is equivalent to specifying \fB\-\-memlimit\-compress=\fIlimit -\fB\-\-memlimit\-decompress=\fIlimit\fR. -.TP -.B \-\-no\-adjust -Display an error and exit if the compression settings exceed -the memory usage limit. -The default is to adjust the settings downwards so -that the memory usage limit is not exceeded. -Automatic adjusting is always disabled when creating raw streams -.RB ( \-\-format=raw ). -.TP -\fB\-T\fR \fIthreads\fR, \fB\-\-threads=\fIthreads -Specify the number of worker threads to use. -Setting -.I threads -to a special value -.B 0 -makes -.B xz -use as many threads as there are CPU cores on the system. -The actual number of threads can be less than -.I threads -if the input file is not big enough -for threading with the given settings or -if using more threads would exceed the memory usage limit. -.IP "" -Currently the only threading method is to split the input into -blocks and compress them independently from each other. -The default block size depends on the compression level and -can be overriden with the -.BI \-\-block\-size= size -option. -.IP "" -Threaded decompression hasn't been implemented yet. -It will only work on files that contain multiple blocks -with size information in block headers. -All files compressed in multi-threaded mode meet this condition, -but files compressed in single-threaded mode don't even if -.BI \-\-block\-size= size -is used. -. -.SS "Custom compressor filter chains" -A custom filter chain allows specifying -the compression settings in detail instead of relying on -the settings associated to the presets. -When a custom filter chain is specified, -preset options (\fB\-0\fR ... \fB\-9\fR and \fB\-\-extreme\fR) -earlier on the command line are forgotten. -If a preset option is specified -after one or more custom filter chain options, -the new preset takes effect and -the custom filter chain options specified earlier are forgotten. -.PP -A filter chain is comparable to piping on the command line. -When compressing, the uncompressed input goes to the first filter, -whose output goes to the next filter (if any). -The output of the last filter gets written to the compressed file. -The maximum number of filters in the chain is four, -but typically a filter chain has only one or two filters. -.PP -Many filters have limitations on where they can be -in the filter chain: -some filters can work only as the last filter in the chain, -some only as a non-last filter, and some work in any position -in the chain. -Depending on the filter, this limitation is either inherent to -the filter design or exists to prevent security issues. -.PP -A custom filter chain is specified by using one or more -filter options in the order they are wanted in the filter chain. -That is, the order of filter options is significant! -When decoding raw streams -.RB ( \-\-format=raw ), -the filter chain is specified in the same order as -it was specified when compressing. -.PP -Filters take filter-specific -.I options -as a comma-separated list. -Extra commas in -.I options -are ignored. -Every option has a default value, so you need to -specify only those you want to change. -.PP -To see the whole filter chain and -.IR options , -use -.B "xz \-vv" -(that is, use -.B \-\-verbose -twice). -This works also for viewing the filter chain options used by presets. -.TP -\fB\-\-lzma1\fR[\fB=\fIoptions\fR] -.PD 0 -.TP -\fB\-\-lzma2\fR[\fB=\fIoptions\fR] -.PD -Add LZMA1 or LZMA2 filter to the filter chain. -These filters can be used only as the last filter in the chain. -.IP "" -LZMA1 is a legacy filter, -which is supported almost solely due to the legacy -.B .lzma -file format, which supports only LZMA1. -LZMA2 is an updated -version of LZMA1 to fix some practical issues of LZMA1. -The -.B .xz -format uses LZMA2 and doesn't support LZMA1 at all. -Compression speed and ratios of LZMA1 and LZMA2 -are practically the same. -.IP "" -LZMA1 and LZMA2 share the same set of -.IR options : -.RS -.TP -.BI preset= preset -Reset all LZMA1 or LZMA2 -.I options -to -.IR preset . -.I Preset -consist of an integer, which may be followed by single-letter -preset modifiers. -The integer can be from -.B 0 -to -.BR 9 , -matching the command line options \fB\-0\fR ... \fB\-9\fR. -The only supported modifier is currently -.BR e , -which matches -.BR \-\-extreme . -If no -.B preset -is specified, the default values of LZMA1 or LZMA2 -.I options -are taken from the preset -.BR 6 . -.TP -.BI dict= size -Dictionary (history buffer) -.I size -indicates how many bytes of the recently processed -uncompressed data is kept in memory. -The algorithm tries to find repeating byte sequences (matches) in -the uncompressed data, and replace them with references -to the data currently in the dictionary. -The bigger the dictionary, the higher is the chance -to find a match. -Thus, increasing dictionary -.I size -usually improves compression ratio, but -a dictionary bigger than the uncompressed file is waste of memory. -.IP "" -Typical dictionary -.I size -is from 64\ KiB to 64\ MiB. -The minimum is 4\ KiB. -The maximum for compression is currently 1.5\ GiB (1536\ MiB). -The decompressor already supports dictionaries up to -one byte less than 4\ GiB, which is the maximum for -the LZMA1 and LZMA2 stream formats. -.IP "" -Dictionary -.I size -and match finder -.RI ( mf ) -together determine the memory usage of the LZMA1 or LZMA2 encoder. -The same (or bigger) dictionary -.I size -is required for decompressing that was used when compressing, -thus the memory usage of the decoder is determined -by the dictionary size used when compressing. -The -.B .xz -headers store the dictionary -.I size -either as -.RI "2^" n -or -.RI "2^" n " + 2^(" n "\-1)," -so these -.I sizes -are somewhat preferred for compression. -Other -.I sizes -will get rounded up when stored in the -.B .xz -headers. -.TP -.BI lc= lc -Specify the number of literal context bits. -The minimum is 0 and the maximum is 4; the default is 3. -In addition, the sum of -.I lc -and -.I lp -must not exceed 4. -.IP "" -All bytes that cannot be encoded as matches -are encoded as literals. -That is, literals are simply 8-bit bytes -that are encoded one at a time. -.IP "" -The literal coding makes an assumption that the highest -.I lc -bits of the previous uncompressed byte correlate -with the next byte. -E.g. in typical English text, an upper-case letter is -often followed by a lower-case letter, and a lower-case -letter is usually followed by another lower-case letter. -In the US-ASCII character set, the highest three bits are 010 -for upper-case letters and 011 for lower-case letters. -When -.I lc -is at least 3, the literal coding can take advantage of -this property in the uncompressed data. -.IP "" -The default value (3) is usually good. -If you want maximum compression, test -.BR lc=4 . -Sometimes it helps a little, and -sometimes it makes compression worse. -If it makes it worse, test e.g.\& -.B lc=2 -too. -.TP -.BI lp= lp -Specify the number of literal position bits. -The minimum is 0 and the maximum is 4; the default is 0. -.IP "" -.I Lp -affects what kind of alignment in the uncompressed data is -assumed when encoding literals. -See -.I pb -below for more information about alignment. -.TP -.BI pb= pb -Specify the number of position bits. -The minimum is 0 and the maximum is 4; the default is 2. -.IP "" -.I Pb -affects what kind of alignment in the uncompressed data is -assumed in general. -The default means four-byte alignment -.RI (2^ pb =2^2=4), -which is often a good choice when there's no better guess. -.IP "" -When the aligment is known, setting -.I pb -accordingly may reduce the file size a little. -E.g. with text files having one-byte -alignment (US-ASCII, ISO-8859-*, UTF-8), setting -.B pb=0 -can improve compression slightly. -For UTF-16 text, -.B pb=1 -is a good choice. -If the alignment is an odd number like 3 bytes, -.B pb=0 -might be the best choice. -.IP "" -Even though the assumed alignment can be adjusted with -.I pb -and -.IR lp , -LZMA1 and LZMA2 still slightly favor 16-byte alignment. -It might be worth taking into account when designing file formats -that are likely to be often compressed with LZMA1 or LZMA2. -.TP -.BI mf= mf -Match finder has a major effect on encoder speed, -memory usage, and compression ratio. -Usually Hash Chain match finders are faster than Binary Tree -match finders. -The default depends on the -.IR preset : -0 uses -.BR hc3 , -1\-3 -use -.BR hc4 , -and the rest use -.BR bt4 . -.IP "" -The following match finders are supported. -The memory usage formulas below are rough approximations, -which are closest to the reality when -.I dict -is a power of two. -.RS -.TP -.B hc3 -Hash Chain with 2- and 3-byte hashing -.br -Minimum value for -.IR nice : -3 -.br -Memory usage: -.br -.I dict -* 7.5 (if -.I dict -<= 16 MiB); -.br -.I dict -* 5.5 + 64 MiB (if -.I dict -> 16 MiB) -.TP -.B hc4 -Hash Chain with 2-, 3-, and 4-byte hashing -.br -Minimum value for -.IR nice : -4 -.br -Memory usage: -.br -.I dict -* 7.5 (if -.I dict -<= 32 MiB); -.br -.I dict -* 6.5 (if -.I dict -> 32 MiB) -.TP -.B bt2 -Binary Tree with 2-byte hashing -.br -Minimum value for -.IR nice : -2 -.br -Memory usage: -.I dict -* 9.5 -.TP -.B bt3 -Binary Tree with 2- and 3-byte hashing -.br -Minimum value for -.IR nice : -3 -.br -Memory usage: -.br -.I dict -* 11.5 (if -.I dict -<= 16 MiB); -.br -.I dict -* 9.5 + 64 MiB (if -.I dict -> 16 MiB) -.TP -.B bt4 -Binary Tree with 2-, 3-, and 4-byte hashing -.br -Minimum value for -.IR nice : -4 -.br -Memory usage: -.br -.I dict -* 11.5 (if -.I dict -<= 32 MiB); -.br -.I dict -* 10.5 (if -.I dict -> 32 MiB) -.RE -.TP -.BI mode= mode -Compression -.I mode -specifies the method to analyze -the data produced by the match finder. -Supported -.I modes -are -.B fast -and -.BR normal . -The default is -.B fast -for -.I presets -0\-3 and -.B normal -for -.I presets -4\-9. -.IP "" -Usually -.B fast -is used with Hash Chain match finders and -.B normal -with Binary Tree match finders. -This is also what the -.I presets -do. -.TP -.BI nice= nice -Specify what is considered to be a nice length for a match. -Once a match of at least -.I nice -bytes is found, the algorithm stops -looking for possibly better matches. -.IP "" -.I Nice -can be 2\-273 bytes. -Higher values tend to give better compression ratio -at the expense of speed. -The default depends on the -.IR preset . -.TP -.BI depth= depth -Specify the maximum search depth in the match finder. -The default is the special value of 0, -which makes the compressor determine a reasonable -.I depth -from -.I mf -and -.IR nice . -.IP "" -Reasonable -.I depth -for Hash Chains is 4\-100 and 16\-1000 for Binary Trees. -Using very high values for -.I depth -can make the encoder extremely slow with some files. -Avoid setting the -.I depth -over 1000 unless you are prepared to interrupt -the compression in case it is taking far too long. -.RE -.IP "" -When decoding raw streams -.RB ( \-\-format=raw ), -LZMA2 needs only the dictionary -.IR size . -LZMA1 needs also -.IR lc , -.IR lp , -and -.IR pb . -.TP -\fB\-\-x86\fR[\fB=\fIoptions\fR] -.PD 0 -.TP -\fB\-\-powerpc\fR[\fB=\fIoptions\fR] -.TP -\fB\-\-ia64\fR[\fB=\fIoptions\fR] -.TP -\fB\-\-arm\fR[\fB=\fIoptions\fR] -.TP -\fB\-\-armthumb\fR[\fB=\fIoptions\fR] -.TP -\fB\-\-sparc\fR[\fB=\fIoptions\fR] -.PD -Add a branch/call/jump (BCJ) filter to the filter chain. -These filters can be used only as a non-last filter -in the filter chain. -.IP "" -A BCJ filter converts relative addresses in -the machine code to their absolute counterparts. -This doesn't change the size of the data, -but it increases redundancy, -which can help LZMA2 to produce 0\-15\ % smaller -.B .xz -file. -The BCJ filters are always reversible, -so using a BCJ filter for wrong type of data -doesn't cause any data loss, although it may make -the compression ratio slightly worse. -.IP "" -It is fine to apply a BCJ filter on a whole executable; -there's no need to apply it only on the executable section. -Applying a BCJ filter on an archive that contains both executable -and non-executable files may or may not give good results, -so it generally isn't good to blindly apply a BCJ filter when -compressing binary packages for distribution. -.IP "" -These BCJ filters are very fast and -use insignificant amount of memory. -If a BCJ filter improves compression ratio of a file, -it can improve decompression speed at the same time. -This is because, on the same hardware, -the decompression speed of LZMA2 is roughly -a fixed number of bytes of compressed data per second. -.IP "" -These BCJ filters have known problems related to -the compression ratio: -.RS -.IP \(bu 3 -Some types of files containing executable code -(e.g. object files, static libraries, and Linux kernel modules) -have the addresses in the instructions filled with filler values. -These BCJ filters will still do the address conversion, -which will make the compression worse with these files. -.IP \(bu 3 -Applying a BCJ filter on an archive containing multiple similar -executables can make the compression ratio worse than not using -a BCJ filter. -This is because the BCJ filter doesn't detect the boundaries -of the executable files, and doesn't reset -the address conversion counter for each executable. -.RE -.IP "" -Both of the above problems will be fixed -in the future in a new filter. -The old BCJ filters will still be useful in embedded systems, -because the decoder of the new filter will be bigger -and use more memory. -.IP "" -Different instruction sets have have different alignment: -.RS -.RS -.PP -.TS -tab(;); -l n l -l n l. -Filter;Alignment;Notes -x86;1;32-bit or 64-bit x86 -PowerPC;4;Big endian only -ARM;4;Little endian only -ARM-Thumb;2;Little endian only -IA-64;16;Big or little endian -SPARC;4;Big or little endian -.TE -.RE -.RE -.IP "" -Since the BCJ-filtered data is usually compressed with LZMA2, -the compression ratio may be improved slightly if -the LZMA2 options are set to match the -alignment of the selected BCJ filter. -For example, with the IA-64 filter, it's good to set -.B pb=4 -with LZMA2 (2^4=16). -The x86 filter is an exception; -it's usually good to stick to LZMA2's default -four-byte alignment when compressing x86 executables. -.IP "" -All BCJ filters support the same -.IR options : -.RS -.TP -.BI start= offset -Specify the start -.I offset -that is used when converting between relative -and absolute addresses. -The -.I offset -must be a multiple of the alignment of the filter -(see the table above). -The default is zero. -In practice, the default is good; specifying a custom -.I offset -is almost never useful. -.RE -.TP -\fB\-\-delta\fR[\fB=\fIoptions\fR] -Add the Delta filter to the filter chain. -The Delta filter can be only used as a non-last filter -in the filter chain. -.IP "" -Currently only simple byte-wise delta calculation is supported. -It can be useful when compressing e.g. uncompressed bitmap images -or uncompressed PCM audio. -However, special purpose algorithms may give significantly better -results than Delta + LZMA2. -This is true especially with audio, -which compresses faster and better e.g. with -.BR flac (1). -.IP "" -Supported -.IR options : -.RS -.TP -.BI dist= distance -Specify the -.I distance -of the delta calculation in bytes. -.I distance -must be 1\-256. -The default is 1. -.IP "" -For example, with -.B dist=2 -and eight-byte input A1 B1 A2 B3 A3 B5 A4 B7, the output will be -A1 B1 01 02 01 02 01 02. -.RE -. -.SS "Other options" -.TP -.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet -Suppress warnings and notices. -Specify this twice to suppress errors too. -This option has no effect on the exit status. -That is, even if a warning was suppressed, -the exit status to indicate a warning is still used. -.TP -.BR \-v ", " \-\-verbose -Be verbose. -If standard error is connected to a terminal, -.B xz -will display a progress indicator. -Specifying -.B \-\-verbose -twice will give even more verbose output. -.IP "" -The progress indicator shows the following information: -.RS -.IP \(bu 3 -Completion percentage is shown -if the size of the input file is known. -That is, the percentage cannot be shown in pipes. -.IP \(bu 3 -Amount of compressed data produced (compressing) -or consumed (decompressing). -.IP \(bu 3 -Amount of uncompressed data consumed (compressing) -or produced (decompressing). -.IP \(bu 3 -Compression ratio, which is calculated by dividing -the amount of compressed data processed so far by -the amount of uncompressed data processed so far. -.IP \(bu 3 -Compression or decompression speed. -This is measured as the amount of uncompressed data consumed -(compression) or produced (decompression) per second. -It is shown after a few seconds have passed since -.B xz -started processing the file. -.IP \(bu 3 -Elapsed time in the format M:SS or H:MM:SS. -.IP \(bu 3 -Estimated remaining time is shown -only when the size of the input file is -known and a couple of seconds have already passed since -.B xz -started processing the file. -The time is shown in a less precise format which -never has any colons, e.g. 2 min 30 s. -.RE -.IP "" -When standard error is not a terminal, -.B \-\-verbose -will make -.B xz -print the filename, compressed size, uncompressed size, -compression ratio, and possibly also the speed and elapsed time -on a single line to standard error after compressing or -decompressing the file. -The speed and elapsed time are included only when -the operation took at least a few seconds. -If the operation didn't finish, e.g. due to user interruption, -also the completion percentage is printed -if the size of the input file is known. -.TP -.BR \-Q ", " \-\-no\-warn -Don't set the exit status to 2 -even if a condition worth a warning was detected. -This option doesn't affect the verbosity level, thus both -.B \-\-quiet -and -.B \-\-no\-warn -have to be used to not display warnings and -to not alter the exit status. -.TP -.B \-\-robot -Print messages in a machine-parsable format. -This is intended to ease writing frontends that want to use -.B xz -instead of liblzma, which may be the case with various scripts. -The output with this option enabled is meant to be stable across -.B xz -releases. -See the section -.B "ROBOT MODE" -for details. -.TP -.BR \-\-info\-memory -Display, in human-readable format, how much physical memory (RAM) -.B xz -thinks the system has and the memory usage limits for compression -and decompression, and exit successfully. -.TP -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Display a help message describing the most commonly used options, -and exit successfully. -.TP -.BR \-H ", " \-\-long\-help -Display a help message describing all features of -.BR xz , -and exit successfully -.TP -.BR \-V ", " \-\-version -Display the version number of -.B xz -and liblzma in human readable format. -To get machine-parsable output, specify -.B \-\-robot -before -.BR \-\-version . -. -.SH "ROBOT MODE" -The robot mode is activated with the -.B \-\-robot -option. -It makes the output of -.B xz -easier to parse by other programs. -Currently -.B \-\-robot -is supported only together with -.BR \-\-version , -.BR \-\-info\-memory , -and -.BR \-\-list . -It will be supported for compression and -decompression in the future. -. -.SS Version -.B "xz \-\-robot \-\-version" -will print the version number of -.B xz -and liblzma in the following format: -.PP -.BI XZ_VERSION= XYYYZZZS -.br -.BI LIBLZMA_VERSION= XYYYZZZS -.TP -.I X -Major version. -.TP -.I YYY -Minor version. -Even numbers are stable. -Odd numbers are alpha or beta versions. -.TP -.I ZZZ -Patch level for stable releases or -just a counter for development releases. -.TP -.I S -Stability. -0 is alpha, 1 is beta, and 2 is stable. -.I S -should be always 2 when -.I YYY -is even. -.PP -.I XYYYZZZS -are the same on both lines if -.B xz -and liblzma are from the same XZ Utils release. -.PP -Examples: 4.999.9beta is -.B 49990091 -and -5.0.0 is -.BR 50000002 . -. -.SS "Memory limit information" -.B "xz \-\-robot \-\-info\-memory" -prints a single line with three tab-separated columns: -.IP 1. 4 -Total amount of physical memory (RAM) in bytes -.IP 2. 4 -Memory usage limit for compression in bytes. -A special value of zero indicates the default setting, -which for single-threaded mode is the same as no limit. -.IP 3. 4 -Memory usage limit for decompression in bytes. -A special value of zero indicates the default setting, -which for single-threaded mode is the same as no limit. -.PP -In the future, the output of -.B "xz \-\-robot \-\-info\-memory" -may have more columns, but never more than a single line. -. -.SS "List mode" -.B "xz \-\-robot \-\-list" -uses tab-separated output. -The first column of every line has a string -that indicates the type of the information found on that line: -.TP -.B name -This is always the first line when starting to list a file. -The second column on the line is the filename. -.TP -.B file -This line contains overall information about the -.B .xz -file. -This line is always printed after the -.B name -line. -.TP -.B stream -This line type is used only when -.B \-\-verbose -was specified. -There are as many -.B stream -lines as there are streams in the -.B .xz -file. -.TP -.B block -This line type is used only when -.B \-\-verbose -was specified. -There are as many -.B block -lines as there are blocks in the -.B .xz -file. -The -.B block -lines are shown after all the -.B stream -lines; different line types are not interleaved. -.TP -.B summary -This line type is used only when -.B \-\-verbose -was specified twice. -This line is printed after all -.B block -lines. -Like the -.B file -line, the -.B summary -line contains overall information about the -.B .xz -file. -.TP -.B totals -This line is always the very last line of the list output. -It shows the total counts and sizes. -.PP -The columns of the -.B file -lines: -.PD 0 -.RS -.IP 2. 4 -Number of streams in the file -.IP 3. 4 -Total number of blocks in the stream(s) -.IP 4. 4 -Compressed size of the file -.IP 5. 4 -Uncompressed size of the file -.IP 6. 4 -Compression ratio, for example -.BR 0.123. -If ratio is over 9.999, three dashes -.RB ( \-\-\- ) -are displayed instead of the ratio. -.IP 7. 4 -Comma-separated list of integrity check names. -The following strings are used for the known check types: -.BR None , -.BR CRC32 , -.BR CRC64 , -and -.BR SHA\-256 . -For unknown check types, -.BI Unknown\- N -is used, where -.I N -is the Check ID as a decimal number (one or two digits). -.IP 8. 4 -Total size of stream padding in the file -.RE -.PD -.PP -The columns of the -.B stream -lines: -.PD 0 -.RS -.IP 2. 4 -Stream number (the first stream is 1) -.IP 3. 4 -Number of blocks in the stream -.IP 4. 4 -Compressed start offset -.IP 5. 4 -Uncompressed start offset -.IP 6. 4 -Compressed size (does not include stream padding) -.IP 7. 4 -Uncompressed size -.IP 8. 4 -Compression ratio -.IP 9. 4 -Name of the integrity check -.IP 10. 4 -Size of stream padding -.RE -.PD -.PP -The columns of the -.B block -lines: -.PD 0 -.RS -.IP 2. 4 -Number of the stream containing this block -.IP 3. 4 -Block number relative to the beginning of the stream -(the first block is 1) -.IP 4. 4 -Block number relative to the beginning of the file -.IP 5. 4 -Compressed start offset relative to the beginning of the file -.IP 6. 4 -Uncompressed start offset relative to the beginning of the file -.IP 7. 4 -Total compressed size of the block (includes headers) -.IP 8. 4 -Uncompressed size -.IP 9. 4 -Compression ratio -.IP 10. 4 -Name of the integrity check -.RE -.PD -.PP -If -.B \-\-verbose -was specified twice, additional columns are included on the -.B block -lines. -These are not displayed with a single -.BR \-\-verbose , -because getting this information requires many seeks -and can thus be slow: -.PD 0 -.RS -.IP 11. 4 -Value of the integrity check in hexadecimal -.IP 12. 4 -Block header size -.IP 13. 4 -Block flags: -.B c -indicates that compressed size is present, and -.B u -indicates that uncompressed size is present. -If the flag is not set, a dash -.RB ( \- ) -is shown instead to keep the string length fixed. -New flags may be added to the end of the string in the future. -.IP 14. 4 -Size of the actual compressed data in the block (this excludes -the block header, block padding, and check fields) -.IP 15. 4 -Amount of memory (in bytes) required to decompress -this block with this -.B xz -version -.IP 16. 4 -Filter chain. -Note that most of the options used at compression time -cannot be known, because only the options -that are needed for decompression are stored in the -.B .xz -headers. -.RE -.PD -.PP -The columns of the -.B summary -lines: -.PD 0 -.RS -.IP 2. 4 -Amount of memory (in bytes) required to decompress -this file with this -.B xz -version -.IP 3. 4 -.B yes -or -.B no -indicating if all block headers have both compressed size and -uncompressed size stored in them -.PP -.I Since -.B xz -.I 5.1.2alpha: -.IP 4. 4 -Minimum -.B xz -version required to decompress the file -.RE -.PD -.PP -The columns of the -.B totals -line: -.PD 0 -.RS -.IP 2. 4 -Number of streams -.IP 3. 4 -Number of blocks -.IP 4. 4 -Compressed size -.IP 5. 4 -Uncompressed size -.IP 6. 4 -Average compression ratio -.IP 7. 4 -Comma-separated list of integrity check names -that were present in the files -.IP 8. 4 -Stream padding size -.IP 9. 4 -Number of files. -This is here to -keep the order of the earlier columns the same as on -.B file -lines. -.PD -.RE -.PP -If -.B \-\-verbose -was specified twice, additional columns are included on the -.B totals -line: -.PD 0 -.RS -.IP 10. 4 -Maximum amount of memory (in bytes) required to decompress -the files with this -.B xz -version -.IP 11. 4 -.B yes -or -.B no -indicating if all block headers have both compressed size and -uncompressed size stored in them -.PP -.I Since -.B xz -.I 5.1.2alpha: -.IP 12. 4 -Minimum -.B xz -version required to decompress the file -.RE -.PD -.PP -Future versions may add new line types and -new columns can be added to the existing line types, -but the existing columns won't be changed. -. -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.TP -.B 0 -All is good. -.TP -.B 1 -An error occurred. -.TP -.B 2 -Something worth a warning occurred, -but no actual errors occurred. -.PP -Notices (not warnings or errors) printed on standard error -don't affect the exit status. -. -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.B xz -parses space-separated lists of options -from the environment variables -.B XZ_DEFAULTS -and -.BR XZ_OPT , -in this order, before parsing the options from the command line. -Note that only options are parsed from the environment variables; -all non-options are silently ignored. -Parsing is done with -.BR getopt_long (3) -which is used also for the command line arguments. -.TP -.B XZ_DEFAULTS -User-specific or system-wide default options. -Typically this is set in a shell initialization script to enable -.BR xz 's -memory usage limiter by default. -Excluding shell initialization scripts -and similar special cases, scripts must never set or unset -.BR XZ_DEFAULTS . -.TP -.B XZ_OPT -This is for passing options to -.B xz -when it is not possible to set the options directly on the -.B xz -command line. -This is the case e.g. when -.B xz -is run by a script or tool, e.g. GNU -.BR tar (1): -.RS -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -XZ_OPT=\-2v tar caf foo.tar.xz foo -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.RE -.IP "" -Scripts may use -.B XZ_OPT -e.g. to set script-specific default compression options. -It is still recommended to allow users to override -.B XZ_OPT -if that is reasonable, e.g. in -.BR sh (1) -scripts one may use something like this: -.RS -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -XZ_OPT=${XZ_OPT\-"\-7e"} -export XZ_OPT -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.RE -. -.SH "LZMA UTILS COMPATIBILITY" -The command line syntax of -.B xz -is practically a superset of -.BR lzma , -.BR unlzma , -and -.BR lzcat -as found from LZMA Utils 4.32.x. -In most cases, it is possible to replace -LZMA Utils with XZ Utils without breaking existing scripts. -There are some incompatibilities though, -which may sometimes cause problems. -. -.SS "Compression preset levels" -The numbering of the compression level presets is not identical in -.B xz -and LZMA Utils. -The most important difference is how dictionary sizes -are mapped to different presets. -Dictionary size is roughly equal to the decompressor memory usage. -.RS -.PP -.TS -tab(;); -c c c -c n n. -Level;xz;LZMA Utils -\-0;256 KiB;N/A -\-1;1 MiB;64 KiB -\-2;2 MiB;1 MiB -\-3;4 MiB;512 KiB -\-4;4 MiB;1 MiB -\-5;8 MiB;2 MiB -\-6;8 MiB;4 MiB -\-7;16 MiB;8 MiB -\-8;32 MiB;16 MiB -\-9;64 MiB;32 MiB -.TE -.RE -.PP -The dictionary size differences affect -the compressor memory usage too, -but there are some other differences between -LZMA Utils and XZ Utils, which -make the difference even bigger: -.RS -.PP -.TS -tab(;); -c c c -c n n. -Level;xz;LZMA Utils 4.32.x -\-0;3 MiB;N/A -\-1;9 MiB;2 MiB -\-2;17 MiB;12 MiB -\-3;32 MiB;12 MiB -\-4;48 MiB;16 MiB -\-5;94 MiB;26 MiB -\-6;94 MiB;45 MiB -\-7;186 MiB;83 MiB -\-8;370 MiB;159 MiB -\-9;674 MiB;311 MiB -.TE -.RE -.PP -The default preset level in LZMA Utils is -.B \-7 -while in XZ Utils it is -.BR \-6 , -so both use an 8 MiB dictionary by default. -. -.SS "Streamed vs. non-streamed .lzma files" -The uncompressed size of the file can be stored in the -.B .lzma -header. -LZMA Utils does that when compressing regular files. -The alternative is to mark that uncompressed size is unknown -and use end-of-payload marker to indicate -where the decompressor should stop. -LZMA Utils uses this method when uncompressed size isn't known, -which is the case for example in pipes. -.PP -.B xz -supports decompressing -.B .lzma -files with or without end-of-payload marker, but all -.B .lzma -files created by -.B xz -will use end-of-payload marker and have uncompressed size -marked as unknown in the -.B .lzma -header. -This may be a problem in some uncommon situations. -For example, a -.B .lzma -decompressor in an embedded device might work -only with files that have known uncompressed size. -If you hit this problem, you need to use LZMA Utils -or LZMA SDK to create -.B .lzma -files with known uncompressed size. -. -.SS "Unsupported .lzma files" -The -.B .lzma -format allows -.I lc -values up to 8, and -.I lp -values up to 4. -LZMA Utils can decompress files with any -.I lc -and -.IR lp , -but always creates files with -.B lc=3 -and -.BR lp=0 . -Creating files with other -.I lc -and -.I lp -is possible with -.B xz -and with LZMA SDK. -.PP -The implementation of the LZMA1 filter in liblzma -requires that the sum of -.I lc -and -.I lp -must not exceed 4. -Thus, -.B .lzma -files, which exceed this limitation, cannot be decompressed with -.BR xz . -.PP -LZMA Utils creates only -.B .lzma -files which have a dictionary size of -.RI "2^" n -(a power of 2) but accepts files with any dictionary size. -liblzma accepts only -.B .lzma -files which have a dictionary size of -.RI "2^" n -or -.RI "2^" n " + 2^(" n "\-1)." -This is to decrease false positives when detecting -.B .lzma -files. -.PP -These limitations shouldn't be a problem in practice, -since practically all -.B .lzma -files have been compressed with settings that liblzma will accept. -. -.SS "Trailing garbage" -When decompressing, -LZMA Utils silently ignore everything after the first -.B .lzma -stream. -In most situations, this is a bug. -This also means that LZMA Utils -don't support decompressing concatenated -.B .lzma -files. -.PP -If there is data left after the first -.B .lzma -stream, -.B xz -considers the file to be corrupt unless -.B \-\-single\-stream -was used. -This may break obscure scripts which have -assumed that trailing garbage is ignored. -. -.SH NOTES -. -.SS "Compressed output may vary" -The exact compressed output produced from -the same uncompressed input file -may vary between XZ Utils versions even if -compression options are identical. -This is because the encoder can be improved -(faster or better compression) -without affecting the file format. -The output can vary even between different -builds of the same XZ Utils version, -if different build options are used. -.PP -The above means that once -.B \-\-rsyncable -has been implemented, -the resulting files won't necessarily be rsyncable -unless both old and new files have been compressed -with the same xz version. -This problem can be fixed if a part of the encoder -implementation is frozen to keep rsyncable output -stable across xz versions. -. -.SS "Embedded .xz decompressors" -Embedded -.B .xz -decompressor implementations like XZ Embedded don't necessarily -support files created with integrity -.I check -types other than -.B none -and -.BR crc32 . -Since the default is -.BR \-\-check=crc64 , -you must use -.B \-\-check=none -or -.B \-\-check=crc32 -when creating files for embedded systems. -.PP -Outside embedded systems, all -.B .xz -format decompressors support all the -.I check -types, or at least are able to decompress -the file without verifying the -integrity check if the particular -.I check -is not supported. -.PP -XZ Embedded supports BCJ filters, -but only with the default start offset. -. -.SH EXAMPLES -. -.SS Basics -Compress the file -.I foo -into -.I foo.xz -using the default compression level -.RB ( \-6 ), -and remove -.I foo -if compression is successful: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -xz foo -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -Decompress -.I bar.xz -into -.I bar -and don't remove -.I bar.xz -even if decompression is successful: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -xz \-dk bar.xz -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -Create -.I baz.tar.xz -with the preset -.B \-4e -.RB ( "\-4 \-\-extreme" ), -which is slower than e.g. the default -.BR \-6 , -but needs less memory for compression and decompression (48\ MiB -and 5\ MiB, respectively): -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -tar cf \- baz | xz \-4e > baz.tar.xz -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -A mix of compressed and uncompressed files can be decompressed -to standard output with a single command: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -xz \-dcf a.txt b.txt.xz c.txt d.txt.lzma > abcd.txt -.ft R -.fi -.RE -. -.SS "Parallel compression of many files" -On GNU and *BSD, -.BR find (1) -and -.BR xargs (1) -can be used to parallelize compression of many files: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -find . \-type f \e! \-name '*.xz' \-print0 \e - | xargs \-0r \-P4 \-n16 xz \-T1 -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -The -.B \-P -option to -.BR xargs (1) -sets the number of parallel -.B xz -processes. -The best value for the -.B \-n -option depends on how many files there are to be compressed. -If there are only a couple of files, -the value should probably be 1; -with tens of thousands of files, -100 or even more may be appropriate to reduce the number of -.B xz -processes that -.BR xargs (1) -will eventually create. -.PP -The option -.B \-T1 -for -.B xz -is there to force it to single-threaded mode, because -.BR xargs (1) -is used to control the amount of parallelization. -. -.SS "Robot mode" -Calculate how many bytes have been saved in total -after compressing multiple files: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -xz \-\-robot \-\-list *.xz | awk '/^totals/{print $5\-$4}' -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -A script may want to know that it is using new enough -.BR xz . -The following -.BR sh (1) -script checks that the version number of the -.B xz -tool is at least 5.0.0. -This method is compatible with old beta versions, -which didn't support the -.B \-\-robot -option: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -if ! eval "$(xz \-\-robot \-\-version 2> /dev/null)" || - [ "$XZ_VERSION" \-lt 50000002 ]; then - echo "Your xz is too old." -fi -unset XZ_VERSION LIBLZMA_VERSION -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -Set a memory usage limit for decompression using -.BR XZ_OPT , -but if a limit has already been set, don't increase it: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -NEWLIM=$((123 << 20)) # 123 MiB -OLDLIM=$(xz \-\-robot \-\-info\-memory | cut \-f3) -if [ $OLDLIM \-eq 0 \-o $OLDLIM \-gt $NEWLIM ]; then - XZ_OPT="$XZ_OPT \-\-memlimit\-decompress=$NEWLIM" - export XZ_OPT -fi -.ft R -.fi -.RE -. -.SS "Custom compressor filter chains" -The simplest use for custom filter chains is -customizing a LZMA2 preset. -This can be useful, -because the presets cover only a subset of the -potentially useful combinations of compression settings. -.PP -The CompCPU columns of the tables -from the descriptions of the options -.BR "\-0" " ... " "\-9" -and -.B \-\-extreme -are useful when customizing LZMA2 presets. -Here are the relevant parts collected from those two tables: -.RS -.PP -.TS -tab(;); -c c -n n. -Preset;CompCPU -\-0;0 -\-1;1 -\-2;2 -\-3;3 -\-4;4 -\-5;5 -\-6;6 -\-5e;7 -\-6e;8 -.TE -.RE -.PP -If you know that a file requires -somewhat big dictionary (e.g. 32 MiB) to compress well, -but you want to compress it quicker than -.B "xz \-8" -would do, a preset with a low CompCPU value (e.g. 1) -can be modified to use a bigger dictionary: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -xz \-\-lzma2=preset=1,dict=32MiB foo.tar -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -With certain files, the above command may be faster than -.B "xz \-6" -while compressing significantly better. -However, it must be emphasized that only some files benefit from -a big dictionary while keeping the CompCPU value low. -The most obvious situation, -where a big dictionary can help a lot, -is an archive containing very similar files -of at least a few megabytes each. -The dictionary size has to be significantly bigger -than any individual file to allow LZMA2 to take -full advantage of the similarities between consecutive files. -.PP -If very high compressor and decompressor memory usage is fine, -and the file being compressed is -at least several hundred megabytes, it may be useful -to use an even bigger dictionary than the 64 MiB that -.B "xz \-9" -would use: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -xz \-vv \-\-lzma2=dict=192MiB big_foo.tar -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -Using -.B \-vv -.RB ( "\-\-verbose \-\-verbose" ) -like in the above example can be useful -to see the memory requirements -of the compressor and decompressor. -Remember that using a dictionary bigger than -the size of the uncompressed file is waste of memory, -so the above command isn't useful for small files. -.PP -Sometimes the compression time doesn't matter, -but the decompressor memory usage has to be kept low -e.g. to make it possible to decompress the file on -an embedded system. -The following command uses -.B \-6e -.RB ( "\-6 \-\-extreme" ) -as a base and sets the dictionary to only 64\ KiB. -The resulting file can be decompressed with XZ Embedded -(that's why there is -.BR \-\-check=crc32 ) -using about 100\ KiB of memory. -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -xz \-\-check=crc32 \-\-lzma2=preset=6e,dict=64KiB foo -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -If you want to squeeze out as many bytes as possible, -adjusting the number of literal context bits -.RI ( lc ) -and number of position bits -.RI ( pb ) -can sometimes help. -Adjusting the number of literal position bits -.RI ( lp ) -might help too, but usually -.I lc -and -.I pb -are more important. -E.g. a source code archive contains mostly US-ASCII text, -so something like the following might give -slightly (like 0.1\ %) smaller file than -.B "xz \-6e" -(try also without -.BR lc=4 ): -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -xz \-\-lzma2=preset=6e,pb=0,lc=4 source_code.tar -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -Using another filter together with LZMA2 can improve -compression with certain file types. -E.g. to compress a x86-32 or x86-64 shared library -using the x86 BCJ filter: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -xz \-\-x86 \-\-lzma2 libfoo.so -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -Note that the order of the filter options is significant. -If -.B \-\-x86 -is specified after -.BR \-\-lzma2 , -.B xz -will give an error, -because there cannot be any filter after LZMA2, -and also because the x86 BCJ filter cannot be used -as the last filter in the chain. -.PP -The Delta filter together with LZMA2 -can give good results with bitmap images. -It should usually beat PNG, -which has a few more advanced filters than simple -delta but uses Deflate for the actual compression. -.PP -The image has to be saved in uncompressed format, -e.g. as uncompressed TIFF. -The distance parameter of the Delta filter is set -to match the number of bytes per pixel in the image. -E.g. 24-bit RGB bitmap needs -.BR dist=3 , -and it is also good to pass -.B pb=0 -to LZMA2 to accommodate the three-byte alignment: -.RS -.PP -.nf -.ft CW -xz \-\-delta=dist=3 \-\-lzma2=pb=0 foo.tiff -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.PP -If multiple images have been put into a single archive (e.g.\& -.BR .tar ), -the Delta filter will work on that too as long as all images -have the same number of bytes per pixel. -. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR xzdec (1), -.BR xzdiff (1), -.BR xzgrep (1), -.BR xzless (1), -.BR xzmore (1), -.BR gzip (1), -.BR bzip2 (1), -.BR 7z (1) -.PP -XZ Utils: <http://tukaani.org/xz/> -.br -XZ Embedded: <http://tukaani.org/xz/embedded.html> -.br -LZMA SDK: <http://7-zip.org/sdk.html> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzdec.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzdec.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1e5ced94..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzdec.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,146 +0,0 @@ -.\" -.\" Author: Lasse Collin -.\" -.\" This file has been put into the public domain. -.\" You can do whatever you want with this file. -.\" -.TH XZDEC 1 "2013-06-30" "Tukaani" "XZ Utils" -.SH NAME -xzdec, lzmadec \- Small .xz and .lzma decompressors -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B xzdec -.RI [ option... ] -.RI [ file... ] -.br -.B lzmadec -.RI [ option... ] -.RI [ file... ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B xzdec -is a liblzma-based decompression-only tool for -.B .xz -(and only -.BR .xz ) -files. -.B xzdec -is intended to work as a drop-in replacement for -.BR xz (1) -in the most common situations where a script -has been written to use -.B "xz \-\-decompress \-\-stdout" -(and possibly a few other commonly used options) to decompress -.B .xz -files. -.B lzmadec -is identical to -.B xzdec -except that -.B lzmadec -supports -.B .lzma -files instead of -.B .xz -files. -.PP -To reduce the size of the executable, -.B xzdec -doesn't support multithreading or localization, -and doesn't read options from -.B XZ_DEFAULTS -and -.B XZ_OPT -environment variables. -.B xzdec -doesn't support displaying intermediate progress information: sending -.B SIGINFO -to -.B xzdec -does nothing, but sending -.B SIGUSR1 -terminates the process instead of displaying progress information. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.BR \-d ", " \-\-decompress ", " \-\-uncompress -Ignored for -.BR xz (1) -compatibility. -.B xzdec -supports only decompression. -.TP -.BR \-k ", " \-\-keep -Ignored for -.BR xz (1) -compatibility. -.B xzdec -never creates or removes any files. -.TP -.BR \-c ", " \-\-stdout ", " \-\-to-stdout -Ignored for -.BR xz (1) -compatibility. -.B xzdec -always writes the decompressed data to standard output. -.TP -.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet -Specifying this once does nothing since -.B xzdec -never displays any warnings or notices. -Specify this twice to suppress errors. -.TP -.BR \-Q ", " \-\-no-warn -Ignored for -.BR xz (1) -compatibility. -.B xzdec -never uses the exit status 2. -.TP -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Display a help message and exit successfully. -.TP -.BR \-V ", " \-\-version -Display the version number of -.B xzdec -and liblzma. -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.TP -.B 0 -All was good. -.TP -.B 1 -An error occurred. -.PP -.B xzdec -doesn't have any warning messages like -.BR xz (1) -has, thus the exit status 2 is not used by -.BR xzdec . -.SH NOTES -Use -.BR xz (1) -instead of -.B xzdec -or -.B lzmadec -for normal everyday use. -.B xzdec -or -.B lzmadec -are meant only for situations where it is important to have -a smaller decompressor than the full-featured -.BR xz (1). -.PP -.B xzdec -and -.B lzmadec -are not really that small. -The size can be reduced further by dropping -features from liblzma at compile time, -but that shouldn't usually be done for executables distributed -in typical non-embedded operating system distributions. -If you need a truly small -.B .xz -decompressor, consider using XZ Embedded. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR xz (1) -.PP -XZ Embedded: <http://tukaani.org/xz/embedded.html> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzdiff.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzdiff.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b33670ca..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzdiff.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,77 +0,0 @@ -.\" -.\" Original zdiff.1 for gzip: Jean-loup Gailly -.\" -.\" Modifications for XZ Utils: Lasse Collin -.\" Andrew Dudman -.\" -.\" License: GNU GPLv2+ -.\" -.TH XZDIFF 1 "2011-03-19" "Tukaani" "XZ Utils" -.SH NAME -xzcmp, xzdiff, lzcmp, lzdiff \- compare compressed files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B xzcmp -.RI [ cmp_options "] " file1 " [" file2 ] -.br -.B xzdiff -.RI [ diff_options "] " file1 " [" file2 ] -.br -.B lzcmp -.RI [ cmp_options "] " file1 " [" file2 ] -.br -.B lzdiff -.RI [ diff_options "] " file1 " [" file2 ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B xzcmp -and -.B xzdiff -invoke -.BR cmp (1) -or -.BR diff (1) -on files compressed with -.BR xz (1), -.BR lzma (1), -.BR gzip (1), -.BR bzip2 (1), -or -.BR lzop (1). -All options specified are passed directly to -.BR cmp (1) -or -.BR diff (1). -If only one file is specified, then the files compared are -.I file1 -(which must have a suffix of a supported compression format) and -.I file1 -from which the compression format suffix has been stripped. -If two files are specified, -then they are uncompressed if necessary and fed to -.BR cmp (1) -or -.BR diff (1). -The exit status from -.BR cmp (1) -or -.BR diff (1) -is preserved. -.PP -The names -.B lzcmp -and -.B lzdiff -are provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR cmp (1), -.BR diff (1), -.BR xz (1), -.BR gzip (1), -.BR bzip2 (1), -.BR lzop (1), -.BR zdiff (1) -.SH BUGS -Messages from the -.BR cmp (1) -or -.BR diff (1) -programs refer to temporary filenames instead of those specified. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzgrep.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzgrep.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4bddbe2d..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzgrep.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,98 +0,0 @@ -.\" -.\" Original zgrep.1 for gzip: Jean-loup Gailly -.\" Charles Levert <charles@comm.polymtl.ca> -.\" -.\" Modifications for XZ Utils: Lasse Collin -.\" -.\" License: GNU GPLv2+ -.\" -.TH XZGREP 1 "2011-03-19" "Tukaani" "XZ Utils" -.SH NAME -xzgrep \- search compressed files for a regular expression -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B xzgrep -.RI [ grep_options ] -.RB [ \-e ] -.I pattern -.IR file "..." -.br -.B xzegrep -.RB ... -.br -.B xzfgrep -.RB ... -.br -.B lzgrep -.RB ... -.br -.B lzegrep -.RB ... -.br -.B lzfgrep -.RB ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B xzgrep -invokes -.BR grep (1) -on -.I files -which may be either uncompressed or compressed with -.BR xz (1), -.BR lzma (1), -.BR gzip (1), -.BR bzip2 (1), -or -.BR lzop (1). -All options specified are passed directly to -.BR grep (1). -.PP -If no -.I file -is specified, then standard input is decompressed if necessary -and fed to -.BR grep (1). -When reading from standard input, -.BR gzip (1), -.BR bzip2 (1), -and -.BR lzop (1) -compressed files are not supported. -.PP -If -.B xzgrep -is invoked as -.B xzegrep -or -.B xzfgrep -then -.BR egrep (1) -or -.BR fgrep (1) -is used instead of -.BR grep (1). -The same applies to names -.BR lzgrep , -.BR lzegrep , -and -.BR lzfgrep , -which are provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils. -.PP -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.TP -.B GREP -If the -.B GREP -environment variable is set, -.B xzgrep -uses it instead of -.BR grep (1), -.BR egrep (1), -or -.BR fgrep (1). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR grep (1), -.BR xz (1), -.BR gzip (1), -.BR bzip2 (1), -.BR lzop (1), -.BR zgrep (1) diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzless.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzless.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2d05459d..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzless.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ -.\" -.\" Authors: Andrew Dudman -.\" Lasse Collin -.\" -.\" This file has been put into the public domain. -.\" You can do whatever you want with this file. -.\" -.\" (Note that this file is not based on gzip's zless.1.) -.\" -.TH XZLESS 1 "2010-09-27" "Tukaani" "XZ Utils" -.SH NAME -xzless, lzless \- view xz or lzma compressed (text) files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B xzless -.RI [ file ...] -.br -.B lzless -.RI [ file ...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B xzless -is a filter that displays text from compressed files to a terminal. -It works on files compressed with -.BR xz (1) -or -.BR lzma (1). -If no -.I files -are given, -.B xzless -reads from standard input. -.PP -.B xzless -uses -.BR less (1) -to present its output. -Unlike -.BR xzmore , -its choice of pager cannot be altered by -setting an environment variable. -Commands are based on both -.BR more (1) -and -.BR vi (1) -and allow back and forth movement and searching. -See the -.BR less (1) -manual for more information. -.PP -The command named -.B lzless -is provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils. -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.TP -.B LESSMETACHARS -A list of characters special to the shell. -Set by -.B xzless -unless it is already set in the environment. -.TP -.B LESSOPEN -Set to a command line to invoke the -.BR xz (1) -decompressor for preprocessing the input files to -.BR less (1). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR less (1), -.BR xz (1), -.BR xzmore (1), -.BR zless (1) diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzmore.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzmore.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9613974e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xzmore.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ -.\" -.\" Original zdiff.1 for gzip: Jean-loup Gailly -.\" Modifications for XZ Utils: Lasse Collin -.\" -.\" License: GNU GPLv2+ -.\" -.TH XZMORE 1 "2013-06-30" "Tukaani" "XZ Utils" -.SH NAME -xzmore, lzmore \- view xz or lzma compressed (text) files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B xzmore -.RI [ file... ] -.br -.B lzmore -.RI [ file... ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B xzmore -is a filter which allows examination of -.BR xz (1) -or -.BR lzma (1) -compressed text files one screenful at a time -on a soft-copy terminal. -.PP -To use a pager other than the default -.B more, -set environment variable -.B PAGER -to the name of the desired program. -The name -.B lzmore -is provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils. -.TP -.BR e " or " q -When the prompt \-\-More\-\-(Next file: -.IR file ) -is printed, this command causes -.B xzmore -to exit. -.TP -.B s -When the prompt \-\-More\-\-(Next file: -.IR file ) -is printed, this command causes -.B xzmore -to skip the next file and continue. -.PP -For list of keyboard commands supported while actually viewing the -content of a file, refer to manual of the pager you use, usually -.BR more (1). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR more (1), -.BR xz (1), -.BR xzless (1), -.BR zmore (1) diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xznew.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xznew.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a341f55b..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/xznew.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -.TH XZNEW 1 -.SH NAME -xznew \- recompress .gz or .tgz files to .xz files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B xznew -[ -ftv9PK] [ name.gz ... ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I xznew -recompresses files from .gz (gzip) format to .xz (xz) format. -If you want to recompress a file already in xz format, rename the file -to force a .xz extension then apply xznew. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.B \-f -Force recompression from .gz to .xz format even if a .xz file already exists. -.TP -.B \-t -Tests the new files before deleting originals. -.TP -.B \-v -Verbose. Display the name and percentage reduction for each file compressed. -.TP -.B \-9 -Use the slowest compression method (optimal compression). -.TP -.B \-P -Use pipes for the conversion to reduce disk space usage. -.TP -.B \-K -Keep a .gz file when it is smaller than the .xz file -.SH "SEE ALSO" -xz(1), gzip(1) -.SH BUGS -.I xznew -does not maintain the time stamp with the -P option if -.I cpmod(1) -is not available and -.I touch(1) -does not support the -r option. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/yes.1 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/yes.1 index 63c93f4b..38be878f 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/yes.1 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man1/yes.1 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.3. -.TH YES "1" "October 2021" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" +.TH YES "1" "January 2024" "GNU coreutils 8.32" "User Commands" .SH NAME yes \- output a string repeatedly until killed .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/libblkid.3 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/libblkid.3 deleted file mode 100644 index 9d81fed5..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/libblkid.3 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: libblkid -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: Programmer's Manual -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LIBBLKID" "3" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "Programmer\(aqs Manual" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -libblkid \- block device identification library -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fB#include <blkid.h>\fP -.sp -\fBcc\fP \fIfile.c\fP \fB\-lblkid\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBlibblkid\fP library is used to identify block devices (disks) as to their content (e.g., filesystem type) as well as extracting additional information such as filesystem labels/volume names, unique identifiers/serial numbers. A common use is to allow use of \fBLABEL=\fP and \fBUUID=\fP tags instead of hard\-coding specific block device names into configuration files. -.sp -The low\-level part of the library also allows the extraction of information about partitions and block device topology. -.sp -The high\-level part of the library keeps information about block devices in a cache file and is verified to still be valid before being returned to the user (if the user has read permission on the raw block device, otherwise not). The cache file also allows unprivileged users (normally anyone other than root, or those not in the "disk" group) to locate devices by label/id. The standard location of the cache file can be overridden by the environment variable \fBBLKID_FILE\fP. -.sp -In situations where one is getting information about a single known device, it does not impact performance whether the cache is used or not (unless you are not able to read the block device directly). -.sp -The high\-level part of the library supports two methods to evaluate \fBLABEL/UUID\fP. It reads information directly from a block device or read information from /dev/disk/by\-* udev symlinks. The udev is preferred method by default. -.sp -If you are dealing with multiple devices, use of the cache is highly recommended (even if empty) as devices will be scanned at most one time and the on\-disk cache will be updated if possible. -.sp -In some cases (modular kernels), block devices are not even visible until after they are accessed the first time, so it is critical that there is some way to locate these devices without enumerating only visible devices, so the use of the cache file is \fBrequired\fP in this situation. -.SH "CONFIGURATION FILE" -.sp -The standard location of the \fI/etc/blkid.conf\fP config file can be overridden by the environment variable \fBBLKID_CONF\fP. For more details about the config file see \fBblkid\fP(8) man page. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBlibblkid\fP was written by Andreas Dilger for the ext2 filesystem utilities, with input from Ted Ts\(cqo. The library was subsequently heavily modified by Ted Ts\(cqo. -.sp -The low\-level probing code was rewritten by Karel Zak. -.SH "COPYING" -.sp -\fBlibblkid\fP is available under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License (LGPL), version 2 (or at your discretion any later version). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBblkid\fP(8), -\fBfindfs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlibblkid\fP library is part of the util\-linux package since version 2.15. It can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid.3 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid.3 deleted file mode 100644 index 31221bb8..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid.3 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuid -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: Programmer's Manual -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUID" "3" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "Programmer\(aqs Manual" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuid \- DCE compatible Universally Unique Identifier library -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fB#include <uuid.h>\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The UUID library is used to generate unique identifiers for objects that may be accessible beyond the local system. This library generates UUIDs compatible with those created by the Open Software Foundation (OSF) Distributed Computing Environment (DCE) utility \fBuuidgen\fP(1). -.sp -The UUIDs generated by this library can be reasonably expected to be unique within a system, and unique across all systems. They could be used, for instance, to generate unique HTTP cookies across multiple web servers without communication between the servers, and without fear of a name clash. -.SH "CONFORMING TO" -.sp -This library generates UUIDs compatible with OSF DCE 1.1, and hash based UUIDs V3 and V5 compatible with \c -.URL "https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4122" "RFC\-4122" "." -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Theodore Y. Ts\(cqo -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuid_clear\fP(3), -\fBuuid_compare\fP(3), -\fBuuid_copy\fP(3), -\fBuuid_generate\fP(3), -\fBuuid_is_null\fP(3), -\fBuuid_parse\fP(3), -\fBuuid_time\fP(3), -\fBuuid_unparse\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlibuuid\fP library is part of the util\-linux package since version 2.15.1. It can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_clear.3 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_clear.3 deleted file mode 100644 index 10bc2aa7..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_clear.3 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuid_clear -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: Programmer's Manual -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUID_CLEAR" "3" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "Programmer\(aqs Manual" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuid_clear \- reset value of UUID variable to the NULL value -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fB#include <uuid.h>\fP -.sp -\fBvoid uuid_clear(uuid_t \fIuu\fP);\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBuuid_clear\fP() function sets the value of the supplied uuid variable \fIuu\fP to the NULL value. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Theodore Y. Ts\(cqo -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuid\fP(3), -\fBuuid_compare\fP(3), -\fBuuid_copy\fP(3), -\fBuuid_generate\fP(3), -\fBuuid_is_null\fP(3), -\fBuuid_parse\fP(3), -\fBuuid_unparse\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlibuuid\fP library is part of the util\-linux package since version 2.15.1. It can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_compare.3 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_compare.3 deleted file mode 100644 index f251661d..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_compare.3 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuid_compare -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: Programmer's Manual -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUID_COMPARE" "3" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "Programmer\(aqs Manual" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuid_compare \- compare whether two UUIDs are the same -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fB#include <uuid.h>\fP -.sp -\fBint uuid_compare(uuid_t \fIuu1\fP, uuid_t \fIuu2\fP)\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBuuid_compare\fP() function compares the two supplied uuid variables \fIuu1\fP and \fIuu2\fP to each other. -.SH "RETURN VALUE" -.sp -Returns an integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if \fIuu1\fP is found, respectively, to be lexicographically less than, equal, or greater than \fIuu2\fP. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Theodore Y. Ts\(cqo -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuid\fP(3), -\fBuuid_clear\fP(3), -\fBuuid_copy\fP(3), -\fBuuid_generate\fP(3), -\fBuuid_is_null\fP(3), -\fBuuid_parse\fP(3), -\fBuuid_unparse\fP(3) -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlibuuid\fP library is part of the util\-linux package since version 2.15.1. It can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_copy.3 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_copy.3 deleted file mode 100644 index 650bd5ae..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_copy.3 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuid_copy -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: Programmer's Manual -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUID_COPY" "3" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "Programmer\(aqs Manual" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuid_copy \- copy a UUID value -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fB#include <uuid.h>\fP -.sp -\fBvoid uuid_copy(uuid_t \fIdst\fP, uuid_t \fIsrc\fP;\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBuuid_copy\fP() function copies the UUID variable \fIsrc\fP to \fIdst\fP. -.SH "RETURN VALUE" -.sp -The copied UUID is returned in the location pointed to by \fIdst\fP. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Theodore Y. Ts\(cqo -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuid\fP(3), -\fBuuid_clear\fP(3), -\fBuuid_compare\fP(3), -\fBuuid_generate\fP(3), -\fBuuid_is_null\fP(3), -\fBuuid_parse\fP(3), -\fBuuid_unparse\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlibuuid\fP library is part of the util\-linux package since version 2.15.1. It can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_generate.3 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_generate.3 deleted file mode 100644 index 0552da4a..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_generate.3 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,90 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuid_generate -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: Programmer's Manual -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUID_GENERATE" "3" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "Programmer\(aqs Manual" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuid_generate, uuid_generate_random, uuid_generate_time, uuid_generate_time_safe \- create a new unique UUID value -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fB#include <uuid.h>\fP -.sp -\fBvoid uuid_generate(uuid_t \fIout\fP);\fP -.br -\fBvoid uuid_generate_random(uuid_t \fIout\fP);\fP -.br -\fBvoid uuid_generate_time(uuid_t \fIout\fP);\fP -.br -\fBint uuid_generate_time_safe(uuid_t \fIout\fP);\fP -.br -\fBvoid uuid_generate_md5(uuid_t \fIout\fP, const uuid_t \fIns\fP, const char \fI*name\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP);\fP -.br -\fBvoid uuid_generate_sha1(uuid_t \fIout\fP, const uuid_t \fIns\fP, const char \fI*name\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP);\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBuuid_generate\fP() function creates a new universally unique identifier (UUID). The uuid will be generated based on high\-quality randomness from \fBgetrandom\fP(2), \fI/dev/urandom\fP, or \fI/dev/random\fP if available. If it is not available, then \fBuuid_generate\fP() will use an alternative algorithm which uses the current time, the local ethernet MAC address (if available), and random data generated using a pseudo\-random generator. -.sp -The \fBuuid_generate_random\fP() function forces the use of the all\-random UUID format, even if a high\-quality random number generator is not available, in which case a pseudo\-random generator will be substituted. Note that the use of a pseudo\-random generator may compromise the uniqueness of UUIDs generated in this fashion. -.sp -The \fBuuid_generate_time\fP() function forces the use of the alternative algorithm which uses the current time and the local ethernet MAC address (if available). This algorithm used to be the default one used to generate UUIDs, but because of the use of the ethernet MAC address, it can leak information about when and where the UUID was generated. This can cause privacy problems in some applications, so the \fBuuid_generate\fP() function only uses this algorithm if a high\-quality source of randomness is not available. To guarantee uniqueness of UUIDs generated by concurrently running processes, the uuid library uses a global clock state counter (if the process has permissions to gain exclusive access to this file) and/or the \fBuuidd\fP daemon, if it is running already or can be spawned by the process (if installed and the process has enough permissions to run it). If neither of these two synchronization mechanisms can be used, it is theoretically possible that two concurrently running processes obtain the same UUID(s). To tell whether the UUID has been generated in a safe manner, use \fBuuid_generate_time_safe\fP. -.sp -The \fBuuid_generate_time_safe\fP() function is similar to \fBuuid_generate_time\fP(), except that it returns a value which denotes whether any of the synchronization mechanisms (see above) has been used. -.sp -The UUID is 16 bytes (128 bits) long, which gives approximately 3.4x10^38 unique values (there are approximately 10^80 elementary particles in the universe according to Carl Sagan\(cqs \fICosmos\fP). The new UUID can reasonably be considered unique among all UUIDs created on the local system, and among UUIDs created on other systems in the past and in the future. -.sp -The \fBuuid_generate_md5\fP() and \fBuuid_generate_sha1\fP() functions generate an MD5 and SHA1 hashed (predictable) UUID based on a well\-known UUID providing the namespace and an arbitrary binary string. The UUIDs conform to V3 and V5 UUIDs per \c -.URL "https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4122" "RFC\-4122" "." -.SH "RETURN VALUE" -.sp -The newly created UUID is returned in the memory location pointed to by \fIout\fP. \fBuuid_generate_time_safe\fP() returns zero if the UUID has been generated in a safe manner, \-1 otherwise. -.SH "CONFORMING TO" -.sp -This library generates UUIDs compatible with OSF DCE 1.1, and hash based UUIDs V3 and V5 compatible with \c -.URL "https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4122" "RFC\-4122" "." -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Theodore Y. Ts\(cqo -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuidgen\fP(1), -\fBuuid\fP(3), -\fBuuid_clear\fP(3), -\fBuuid_compare\fP(3), -\fBuuid_copy\fP(3), -\fBuuid_is_null\fP(3), -\fBuuid_parse\fP(3), -\fBuuid_time\fP(3), -\fBuuid_unparse\fP(3), -\fBuuidd\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlibuuid\fP library is part of the util\-linux package since version 2.15.1. It can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_is_null.3 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_is_null.3 deleted file mode 100644 index 68606166..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_is_null.3 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,60 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuid_is_null -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: Programmer's Manual -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUID_IS_NULL" "3" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "Programmer\(aqs Manual" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuid_is_null \- compare the value of the UUID to the NULL value -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fB#include <uuid.h>\fP -.sp -\fBint uuid_is_null(uuid_t \fIuu\fP);\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBuuid_is_null\fP() function compares the value of the supplied UUID variable \fIuu\fP to the NULL value. If the value is equal to the NULL UUID, 1 is returned, otherwise 0 is returned. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Theodore Y. Ts\(cqo -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuid\fP(3), -\fBuuid_clear\fP(3), -\fBuuid_compare\fP(3), -\fBuuid_copy\fP(3), -\fBuuid_generate\fP(3), -\fBuuid_time\fP(3), -\fBuuid_parse\fP(3), -\fBuuid_unparse\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlibuuid\fP library is part of the util\-linux package since version 2.15.1. It can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_parse.3 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_parse.3 deleted file mode 100644 index 5d0a8581..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_parse.3 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuid_parse -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: Programmer's Manual -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUID_PARSE" "3" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "Programmer\(aqs Manual" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuid_parse \- convert an input UUID string into binary representation -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fB#include <uuid.h>\fP -.sp -\fBint uuid_parse(char *\fIin\fP, uuid_t \fIuu\fP);\fP -.br -\fBint uuid_parse_range(char *\fIin_start\fP, char *\fIin_end\fP, uuid_t \fIuu\fP);\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBuuid_parse\fP() function converts the UUID string given by \fIin\fP into the binary representation. The input UUID is a string of the form 1b4e28ba\-2fa1\-11d2\-883f\-b9a761bde3fb (in \fBprintf\fP(3) format "%08x\-%04x\-%04x\-%04x\-%012x", 36 bytes plus the trailing \(aq\(rs0\(aq). -.sp -The \fBuuid_parse_range\fP() function works like \fBuuid_parse\fP() but parses only range in string specified by \fIin_start\fP and \fIin_end\fP pointers. -.SH "RETURN VALUE" -.sp -Upon successfully parsing the input string, 0 is returned, and the UUID is stored in the location pointed to by \fIuu\fP, otherwise \-1 is returned. -.SH "CONFORMING TO" -.sp -This library parses UUIDs compatible with OSF DCE 1.1, and hash based UUIDs V3 and V5 compatible with \c -.URL "https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4122" "RFC\-4122" "." -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Theodore Y. Ts\(cqo -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuid\fP(3), -\fBuuid_clear\fP(3), -\fBuuid_compare\fP(3), -\fBuuid_copy\fP(3), -\fBuuid_generate\fP(3), -\fBuuid_is_null\fP(3), -\fBuuid_time\fP(3), -\fBuuid_unparse\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlibuuid\fP library is part of the util\-linux package since version 2.15.1. It can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_time.3 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_time.3 deleted file mode 100644 index 07d823e5..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_time.3 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuid_time -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: Programmer's Manual -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUID_TIME" "3" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "Programmer\(aqs Manual" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuid_time \- extract the time at which the UUID was created -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fB#include <uuid.h>\fP -.sp -\fBtime_t uuid_time(uuid_t \fIuu\fP, struct timeval *\fIret_tv\fP)\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBuuid_time\fP() function extracts the time at which the supplied time\-based UUID \fIuu\fP was created. Note that the UUID creation time is only encoded within certain types of UUIDs. This function can only reasonably expect to extract the creation time for UUIDs created with the \fBuuid_generate_time\fP(3) and \fBuuid_generate_time_safe\fP(3) functions. It may or may not work with UUIDs created by other mechanisms. -.SH "RETURN VALUE" -.sp -The time at which the UUID was created, in seconds since January 1, 1970 GMT (the epoch), is returned (see \fBtime\fP(2)). The time at which the UUID was created, in seconds and microseconds since the epoch, is also stored in the location pointed to by \fIret_tv\fP (see \fBgettimeofday\fP(2)). -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Theodore Y. Ts\(cqo -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuid\fP(3), -\fBuuid_clear\fP(3), -\fBuuid_compare\fP(3), -\fBuuid_copy\fP(3), -\fBuuid_generate\fP(3), -\fBuuid_is_null\fP(3), -\fBuuid_parse\fP(3), -\fBuuid_unparse\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlibuuid\fP library is part of the util\-linux package since version 2.15.1. It can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_unparse.3 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_unparse.3 deleted file mode 100644 index 7332e05e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man3/uuid_unparse.3 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: uuid_unparse -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: Programmer's Manual -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UUID_UNPARSE" "3" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "Programmer\(aqs Manual" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -uuid_unparse \- convert a UUID from binary representation to a string -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fB#include <uuid.h>\fP -.sp -\fBvoid uuid_unparse(uuid_t \fIuu\fP, char *\fIout\fP);\fP -.br -\fBvoid uuid_unparse_upper(uuid_t \fIuu\fP, char *\fIout\fP);\fP -.br -\fBvoid uuid_unparse_lower(uuid_t \fIuu\fP, char *\fIout\fP);\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBuuid_unparse\fP() function converts the supplied UUID \fIuu\fP from the binary representation into a 36\-byte string (plus trailing \(aq\(rs0\(aq) of the form 1b4e28ba\-2fa1\-11d2\-883f\-0016d3cca427 and stores this value in the character string pointed to by \fIout\fP. The case of the hex digits returned by \fBuuid_unparse\fP() may be upper or lower case, and is dependent on the system\-dependent local default. -.sp -If the case of the hex digits is important then the functions \fBuuid_unparse_upper\fP() and \fBuuid_unparse_lower\fP() may be used. -.SH "CONFORMING TO" -.sp -This library unparses UUIDs compatible with OSF DCE 1.1. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Theodore Y. Ts\(cqo -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuid\fP(3), -\fBuuid_clear\fP(3), -\fBuuid_compare\fP(3), -\fBuuid_copy\fP(3), -\fBuuid_generate\fP(3), -\fBuuid_time\fP(3), -\fBuuid_is_null\fP(3), -\fBuuid_parse\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlibuuid\fP library is part of the util\-linux package since version 2.15.1. It can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/adjtime_config.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/adjtime_config.5 deleted file mode 100644 index e1c1d966..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/adjtime_config.5 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: adjtime_config -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: File formats -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "ADJTIME_CONFIG" "5" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "File formats" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -adjtime_config \- information about hardware clock setting and drift factor -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fI/etc/adjtime\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The file \fI/etc/adjtime\fP contains descriptive information about the hardware mode clock setting and clock drift factor. The file is read and write by \fBhwclock\fP(8); and read by programs like rtcwake to get RTC time mode. -.sp -The file is usually located in \fI/etc\fP, but tools like \fBhwclock\fP(8) or \fBrtcwake\fP(8) can use alternative location by command line options if write access to \fI/etc\fP is unwanted. The default clock mode is "UTC" if the file is missing. -.sp -The Hardware Clock is usually not very accurate. However, much of its inaccuracy is completely predictable \- it gains or loses the same amount of time every day. This is called systematic drift. The util \fBhwclock\fP(8) keeps the file \fI/etc/adjtime\fP, that keeps some historical information. For more details see "\fBThe Adjust Function\fP" and "\fBThe Adjtime File\fP" sections from \fBhwclock\fP(8) man page. -.sp -The format of the adjtime file is, in ASCII. -.SS "First line" -.sp -Three numbers, separated by blanks: -.sp -\fBdrift factor\fP -.RS 4 -the systematic drift rate in seconds per day (floating point decimal) -.RE -.sp -\fBlast adjust time\fP -.RS 4 -the resulting number of seconds since 1969 UTC of most recent adjustment or calibration (decimal integer) -.RE -.sp -\fBadjustment status\fP -.RS 4 -zero (for compatibility with \fBclock\fP(8)) as a floating point decimal -.RE -.SS "Second line" -.sp -\fBlast calibration time\fP -.RS 4 -The resulting number of seconds since 1969 UTC of most recent calibration. Zero if there has been no calibration yet or it is known that any previous calibration is moot (for example, because the Hardware Clock has been found, since that calibration, not to contain a valid time). This is a decimal integer. -.RE -.SS "Third line" -.sp -\fBclock mode\fP -.RS 4 -Supported values are \fBUTC\fP or \fBLOCAL\fP. Tells whether the Hardware Clock is set to Coordinated Universal Time or local time. You can always override this value with options on the \fBhwclock\fP(8) command line. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/adjtime\fP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP(8), -\fBrtcwake\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -\fBadjtime_config\fP is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/binfmt.d.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/binfmt.d.5 index 8157ff76..27e746ec 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/binfmt.d.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/binfmt.d.5 @@ -70,7 +70,12 @@ Packages should install their configuration files in /usr/local/lib/ (local installs)\&. Files in /etc/ -are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. +are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. It is recommended to use the range 10\-40 for configuration files in +/usr/ +and the range 60\-90 for configuration files in +/etc/ +and +/run/, to make sure that local and transient configuration files will always take priority over configuration files shipped by the OS vendor\&. .PP If the administrator wants to disable a configuration file supplied by the vendor, the recommended way is to place a symlink to /dev/null diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/coredump.conf.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/coredump.conf.5 index 2adef112..0b07e69e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/coredump.conf.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/coredump.conf.5 @@ -64,7 +64,12 @@ configuration subdirectories are sorted by their filename in lexicographic order When packages need to customize the configuration, they can install drop\-ins under /usr/\&. Files in /etc/ -are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defined a concept of drop\-in priority to allow distributions to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. +are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defines a concept of drop\-in priorities to allow OS vendors to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. It is recommended to use the range 10\-40 for drop\-ins in +/usr/ +and the range 60\-90 for drop\-ins in +/etc/ +and +/run/, to make sure that local and transient drop\-ins take priority over drop\-ins shipped by the OS vendor\&. .PP To disable a configuration file supplied by the vendor, the recommended way is to place a symlink to /dev/null diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/environment.d.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/environment.d.5 index 264faad5..92c2ecc7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/environment.d.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/environment.d.5 @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ environment.d \- Definition of user service environment .PP Configuration files in the environment\&.d/ -directories contain lists of environment variable assignments for services started by the systemd user instance\&. +directories contain lists of environment variable assignments passed to services started by the systemd user instance\&. \fBsystemd-environment-d-generator\fR(8) parses them and updates the environment exported by the systemd user instance\&. See below for an discussion of which processes inherit those variables\&. .PP @@ -71,7 +71,12 @@ Packages should install their configuration files in /usr/local/lib/ (local installs)\&. Files in /etc/ -are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. +are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. It is recommended to use the range 10\-40 for configuration files in +/usr/ +and the range 60\-90 for configuration files in +/etc/ +and +/run/, to make sure that local and transient configuration files will always take priority over configuration files shipped by the OS vendor\&. .PP If the administrator wants to disable a configuration file supplied by the vendor, the recommended way is to place a symlink to /dev/null @@ -124,17 +129,19 @@ are ignored\&. .\} .SH "APPLICABILITY" .PP -Environment variables exported by the user manager (\fBsystemd \-\-user\fR +Environment variables exported by the user service manager (\fBsystemd \-\-user\fR instance started in the user@\fIuid\fR\&.service -system service) apply to any services started by that manager\&. In particular, this may include services which run user shells\&. For example in the GNOME environment, the graphical terminal emulator runs as the +system service) are passed to any services started by that service manager\&. In particular, this may include services which run user shells\&. For example in the GNOME environment, the graphical terminal emulator runs as the gnome\-terminal\-server\&.service -user unit, which in turn runs the user shell, so that shell will inherit environment variables exported by the user manager\&. For other instances of the shell, not launched by the user manager, the environment they inherit is defined by the program that starts them\&. Hint: in general, +user unit, which in turn runs the user shell, so that shell will inherit environment variables exported by the user manager\&. For other instances of the shell, not launched by the user service manager, the environment they inherit is defined by the program that starts them\&. Hint: in general, \fBsystemd.service\fR(5) units contain programs launched by systemd, and \fBsystemd.scope\fR(5) units contain programs launched by something else\&. .PP +Note that these files do not affect the environment block of the service manager itself, but exclusively the environment blocks passed to the services it manages\&. Environment variables set that way thus cannot be used to influence behaviour of the service manager\&. In order to make changes to the service manager\*(Aqs environment block the environment must be modified before the user\*(Aqs service manager is invoked, for example from the system service manager or via a PAM module\&. +.PP Specifically, for ssh logins, the \fBsshd\fR(8) service builds an environment that is a combination of variables forwarded from the remote system and defined by diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/exports.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/exports.5 index d8de6bec..b7582776 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/exports.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/exports.5 @@ -125,16 +125,66 @@ In that case you may include multiple sec= options, and following options will be enforced only for access using flavors listed in the immediately preceding sec= option. The only options that are permitted to vary in this way are ro, rw, no_root_squash, root_squash, and all_squash. +.SS Transport layer security +The Linux NFS server allows the use of RPC-with-TLS (RFC 9289) to +protect RPC traffic between itself and its clients. +Alternately, administrators can secure NFS traffic using a VPN, +or an ssh tunnel or similar mechanism, in a way that is transparent +to the server. .PP +To enable the use of RPC-with-TLS, the server's administrator must +install and configure +.BR tlshd +to handle transport layer security handshake requests from the local +kernel. +Clients can then choose to use RPC-with-TLS or they may continue +operating without it. +.PP +Administrators may require the use of RPC-with-TLS to protect access +to individual exports. +This is particularly useful when using non-cryptographic security +flavors such as +.IR sec=sys . +The +.I xprtsec= +option, followed by an unordered colon-delimited list of security policies, +can restrict access to the export to only clients that have negotiated +transport-layer security. +Currently supported transport layer security policies include: +.TP +.IR none +The server permits clients to access the export +without the use of transport layer security. +.TP +.IR tls +The server permits clients that have negotiated an RPC-with-TLS session +without peer authentication (confidentiality only) to access the export. +Clients are not required to offer an x.509 certificate +when establishing a transport layer security session. +.TP +.IR mtls +The server permits clients that have negotiated an RPC-with-TLS session +with peer authentication to access the export. +The server requires clients to offer an x.509 certificate +when establishing a transport layer security session. +.PP +If RPC-with-TLS is configured and enabled and the +.I xprtsec= +option is not specified, the default setting for an export is +.IR xprtsec=none:tls:mtls . +With this setting, the server permits clients to use any transport +layer security mechanism or none at all to access the export. .SS General Options .BR exportfs understands the following export options: .TP .IR secure -This option requires that requests originate on an Internet port less -than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option is on by default. To turn it -off, specify +This option requires that requests not using gss originate on an +Internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option is on by default. +To turn it off, specify .IR insecure . +(NOTE: older kernels (before upstream kernel version 4.17) enforced this +requirement on gss requests as well.) .TP .IR rw Allow both read and write requests on this NFS volume. The @@ -167,13 +217,6 @@ default. In all releases after 1.0.0, is the default, and .I async must be explicitly requested if needed. -To help make system administrators aware of this change, -.B exportfs -will issue a warning if neither -.I sync -nor -.I async -is specified. .TP .IR no_wdelay This option has no effect if @@ -410,7 +453,7 @@ of the filesystem must be handled elsewhere.) .TP .IR pnfs -This option allows enables the use of pNFS extension if protocol level +This option enables the use of the pNFS extension if the protocol level is NFSv4.1 or higher, and the filesystem supports pNFS exports. With pNFS clients can bypass the server and perform I/O directly to storage devices. The default can be explicitly requested with the @@ -425,6 +468,37 @@ will only work if all clients use a consistent security policy. Note that early kernels did not support this export option, and instead enabled security labels by default. +.TP +.IR reexport= auto-fsidnum|predefined-fsidnum +This option helps when a NFS share is re-exported. Since the NFS server +needs a unique identifier for each exported filesystem and a NFS share +cannot provide such, usually a manual fsid is needed. +As soon +.IR crossmnt +is used manually assigning fsid won't work anymore. This is where this +option becomes handy. It will automatically assign a numerical fsid +to exported NFS shares. The fsid and path relations are stored in a SQLite +database. If +.IR auto-fsidnum +is selected, the fsid is also autmatically allocated. +.IR predefined-fsidnum +assumes pre-allocated fsid numbers and will just look them up. +This option depends also on the kernel, you will need at least kernel version +5.19. +Since +.IR reexport= +can automatically allocate and assign numerical fsids, it is no longer possible +to have numerical fsids in other exports as soon this option is used in at least +one export entry. + +The association between fsid numbers and paths is stored in a SQLite database. +Don't edit or remove the database unless you know exactly what you're doing. +.IR predefined-fsidnum +is useful when you have used +.IR auto-fsidnum +before and don't want further entries stored. + + .SS User ID Mapping .PP .B nfsd @@ -492,6 +566,33 @@ export entry for .B /home/joe in the example section below, which maps all requests to uid 150 (which is supposedly that of user joe). + +.SS Subdirectory Exports + +Normally you should only export only the root of a filesystem. The NFS +server will also allow you to export a subdirectory of a filesystem, +however, this has drawbacks: + +First, it may be possible for a malicious user to access files on the +filesystem outside of the exported subdirectory, by guessing filehandles +for those other files. The only way to prevent this is by using the +.IR no_subtree_check +option, which can cause other problems. + +Second, export options may not be enforced in the way that you would +expect. For example, the +.IR security_label +option will not work on subdirectory exports, and if nested subdirectory +exports change the +.IR security_label +or +.IR sec= +options, NFSv4 clients will normally see only the options on the parent +export. Also, where security options differ, a malicious client may use +filehandle-guessing attacks to access the files from one subdirectory +using the options from another. + + .SS Extra Export Tables After reading .I /etc/exports @@ -559,7 +660,8 @@ a character class wildcard match. .BR netgroup (5), .BR mountd (8), .BR nfsd (8), -.BR showmount (8). +.BR showmount (8), +.BR tlshd (8). .\".SH DIAGNOSTICS .\"An error parsing the file is reported using syslogd(8) as level NOTICE from .\"a DAEMON whenever diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/fstab.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/fstab.5 deleted file mode 100644 index 10ade2d5..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/fstab.5 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,144 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fstab -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: File formats -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSTAB" "5" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "File formats" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fstab \- static information about the filesystems -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fI/etc/fstab\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The file \fBfstab\fP contains descriptive information about the filesystems the system can mount. \fBfstab\fP is only read by programs, and not written; it is the duty of the system administrator to properly create and maintain this file. The order of records in \fBfstab\fP is important because \fBfsck\fP(8), \fBmount\fP(8), and \fBumount\fP(8) sequentially iterate through \fBfstab\fP doing their thing. -.sp -Each filesystem is described on a separate line. Fields on each line are separated by tabs or spaces. Lines starting with \(aq#\(aq are comments. Blank lines are ignored. -.sp -The following is a typical example of an \fBfstab\fP entry: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -LABEL=t\-home2 /home ext4 defaults,auto_da_alloc 0 2 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SS "The first field (\fIfs_spec\fP)." -.sp -This field describes the block special device, remote filesystem or filesystem image for loop device to be mounted or swap file or swap partition to be enabled. -.sp -For ordinary mounts, it will hold (a link to) a block special device node (as created by \fBmknod\fP(2)) for the device to be mounted, like \fI/dev/cdrom\fP or \fI/dev/sdb7\fP. For NFS mounts, this field is \fI<host>:<dir>\fP, e.g., \fIknuth.aeb.nl:/\fP. For filesystems with no storage, any string can be used, and will show up in \fBdf\fP(1) output, for example. Typical usage is \fIproc\fP for \fBprocfs\fP; \fImem\fP, \fInone\fP, or \fItmpfs\fP for \fBtmpfs\fP. Other special filesystems, like \fBudev\fP and \fBsysfs\fP, are typically not listed in \fBfstab\fP. -.sp -LABEL=<label> or UUID=<uuid> may be given instead of a device name. This is the recommended method, as device names are often a coincidence of hardware detection order, and can change when other disks are added or removed. For example, \(aqLABEL=Boot\(aq or \(aqUUID=3e6be9de\-8139\-11d1\-9106\-a43f08d823a6\(aq. (Use a filesystem\-specific tool like \fBe2label\fP(8), \fBxfs_admin\fP(8), or \fBfatlabel\fP(8) to set LABELs on filesystems). -.sp -It\(cqs also possible to use \fBPARTUUID=\fP and \fBPARTLABEL=\fP. These partitions identifiers are supported for example for GUID Partition Table (GPT). -.sp -See \fBmount\fP(8), \fBblkid\fP(8) or \fBlsblk\fP(8) for more details about device identifiers. -.sp -Note that \fBmount\fP(8) uses UUIDs as strings. The string representation of the UUID should be based on lower case characters. But when specifying the volume ID of FAT or NTFS file systems upper case characters are used (e.g UUID="A40D\-85E7" or UUID="61DB7756DB7779B3"). -.SS "The second field (\fIfs_file\fP)." -.sp -This field describes the mount point (target) for the filesystem. For swap partitions, this field should be specified as `none\(aq. If the name of the mount point contains spaces or tabs these can be escaped as `\(rs040\(aq and \(aq\(rs011\(aq respectively. -.SS "The third field (\fIfs_vfstype\fP)." -.sp -This field describes the type of the filesystem. Linux supports many filesystem types: ext4, xfs, btrfs, f2fs, vfat, ntfs, hfsplus, tmpfs, sysfs, proc, iso9660, udf, squashfs, nfs, cifs, and many more. For more details, see \fBmount\fP(8). -.sp -An entry \fIswap\fP denotes a file or partition to be used for swapping, cf. \fBswapon\fP(8). An entry \fInone\fP is useful for bind or move mounts. -.sp -More than one type may be specified in a comma\-separated list. -.sp -\fBmount\fP(8) and \fBumount\fP(8) support filesystem \fIsubtypes\fP. The subtype is defined by \(aq.subtype\(aq suffix. For example \(aqfuse.sshfs\(aq. It\(cqs recommended to use subtype notation rather than add any prefix to the first fstab field (for example \(aqsshfs#example.com\(aq is deprecated). -.SS "The fourth field (\fIfs_mntops\fP)." -.sp -This field describes the mount options associated with the filesystem. -.sp -It is formatted as a comma\-separated list of options. It contains at least the type of mount (\fBro\fP or \fBrw\fP), plus any additional options appropriate to the filesystem type (including performance\-tuning options). For details, see \fBmount\fP(8) or \fBswapon\fP(8). -.sp -Basic filesystem\-independent options are: -.sp -\fBdefaults\fP -.RS 4 -use default options: rw, suid, dev, exec, auto, nouser, and async. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoauto\fP -.RS 4 -do not mount when \fBmount \-a\fP is given (e.g., at boot time) -.RE -.sp -\fBuser\fP -.RS 4 -allow a user to mount -.RE -.sp -\fBowner\fP -.RS 4 -allow device owner to mount -.RE -.sp -\fBcomment\fP -.RS 4 -or \fBx\-<name>\fP for use by fstab\-maintaining programs -.RE -.sp -\fBnofail\fP -.RS 4 -do not report errors for this device if it does not exist. -.RE -.SS "The fifth field (\fIfs_freq\fP)." -.sp -This field is used by \fBdump\fP(8) to determine which filesystems need to be dumped. Defaults to zero (don\(cqt dump) if not present. -.SS "The sixth field (\fIfs_passno\fP)." -.sp -This field is used by \fBfsck\fP(8) to determine the order in which filesystem checks are done at boot time. The root filesystem should be specified with a \fIfs_passno\fP of 1. Other filesystems should have a \fIfs_passno\fP of 2. Filesystems within a drive will be checked sequentially, but filesystems on different drives will be checked at the same time to utilize parallelism available in the hardware. Defaults to zero (don\(cqt check the filesystem) if not present. -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/fstab\fP, -\fI<fstab.h>\fP -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The proper way to read records from \fBfstab\fP is to use the routines \fBgetmntent\fP(3) or \fBlibmount\fP. -.sp -The keyword \fBignore\fP as a filesystem type (3rd field) is no longer supported by the pure libmount based mount utility (since util\-linux v2.22). -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The ancestor of this \fBfstab\fP file format appeared in 4.0BSD. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBgetmntent\fP(3), -\fBfs\fP(5), -\fBfindmnt\fP(8), -\fBmount\fP(8), -\fBswapon\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -\fBfstab\fP is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/idmapd.conf.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/idmapd.conf.5 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58c2d977 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/idmapd.conf.5 @@ -0,0 +1,424 @@ +.\" +.\" idmapd.conf(5) +.\" +.\" COPYRIGHT (c) 2008 +.\" The Regents of the University of Michigan +.\" ALL RIGHTS RESERVED +.\" +.\" Permission is granted to use, copy, create derivative works +.\" and redistribute this software and such derivative works +.\" for any purpose, so long as the name of The University of +.\" Michigan is not used in any advertising or publicity +.\" pertaining to the use of distribution of this software +.\" without specific, written prior authorization. If the +.\" above copyright notice or any other identification of the +.\" University of Michigan is included in any copy of any +.\" portion of this software, then the disclaimer below must +.\" also be included. +.\" +.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS, WITHOUT REPRESENTATION +.\" FROM THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN AS TO ITS FITNESS FOR ANY +.\" PURPOSE, AND WITHOUT WARRANTY BY THE UNIVERSITY OF +.\" MICHIGAN OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING +.\" WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE +.\" REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN SHALL NOT BE LIABLE +.\" FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR +.\" CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIM ARISING +.\" OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE, EVEN +.\" IF IT HAS BEEN OR IS HEREAFTER ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF +.\" SUCH DAMAGES. +.\" +.TH idmapd.conf 5 "19 Nov 2008" +.SH NAME +idmapd.conf \- configuration file for libnfsidmap +.SH SYNOPSIS +Configuration file for libnfsidmap. Used by idmapd and svcgssd to map NFSv4 name to and from ids. +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.B idmapd.conf +configuration files consists of several sections, initiated by strings of the +form [General] and [Mapping]. Each section may contain lines of the form +.nf + variable = value +.fi +The recognized sections and their recognized variables are as follows: +.\" +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" The [General] section +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" +.SS "[General] section variables" +.nf + + +.fi +.TP +.B Verbosity +Verbosity level of debugging +(Default: 0) +.TP +.B Domain +The local NFSv4 domain name. An NFSv4 domain is a namespace with +a unique username<->UID and groupname<->GID mapping. +(Default: Host's fully-qualified DNS domain name) +.TP +.B No-Strip +In multi-domain environments, some NFS servers will append the identity +management domain to the owner and owner_group in lieu of a true NFSv4 +domain. This option can facilitate lookups in such environments. If +set to a value other than "none", the nsswitch plugin will first pass +the name to the password/group lookup function without stripping the +domain off. If that mapping fails then the plugin will try again using +the old method (comparing the domain in the string to the Domain value, +stripping it if it matches, and passing the resulting short name to the +lookup function). Valid values are "user", "group", "both", and +"none". +(Default: "none") +.TP +.B Reformat-Group +Winbind has a quirk whereby doing a group lookup in UPN format +(e.g. staff@americas.example.com) will cause the group to be +displayed prefixed with the full domain in uppercase +(e.g. AMERICAS.EXAMPLE.COM\\staff) instead of in the familiar netbios +name format (e.g. AMERICAS\\staff). Setting this option to true +causes the name to be reformatted before passing it to the group +lookup function in order to work around this. This setting is +ignored unless No-Strip is set to either "both" or "group". +(Default: "false") +.TP +.B Local-Realms +A comma-separated list of Kerberos realm names that may be considered equivalent to the +local realm name. For example, users juser@ORDER.EDU and juser@MAIL.ORDER.EDU +may be considered to be the same user in the specified +.B Domain. +(Default: the host's default realm name) +.br +.B Note: +If a value is specified here, the default local realm must be included as well. +.\" +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" The [Mapping] section +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" +.SS "[Mapping] section variables" +.nf + +.fi +.TP +.B Nobody-User +Local user name to be used when a mapping cannot be completed. +.TP +.B Nobody-Group +Local group name to be used when a mapping cannot be completed. +.\" +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" The [Translation] section +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" +.SS "[Translation] section variables" +.nf + +.fi +.TP +.B Method +A comma-separated, ordered list of mapping methods (plug-ins) +to use when mapping between NFSv4 names and local IDs. Each +specified method is tried in order until a mapping is found, +or there are no more methods to try. The methods included in +the default distribution include "nsswitch", "umich_ldap", and +"static". +(Default: nsswitch) +.TP +.B GSS-Methods +An optional comma-separated, ordered list of mapping methods (plug-ins) +to use when mapping between GSS Authenticated names and local IDs. +(Default: the same list as specified for +.B Method) +.\" +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" The [Static] section +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" +.SS "[Static] section variables" +.nf + +.fi +The "static" translation method uses a static list of GSS-Authenticated +names to local user names. Entries in the list are of the form: +.nf + principal@REALM = localusername +.fi +.\" +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" The [REGEX] section +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" +.SS "[REGEX] section variables" +.nf + +.fi +If the "regex" translation method is specified, the following +variables within the [REGEX] section are used to map between NFS4 names and local IDs. +.TP +.B User-Regex +Case-insensitive regular expression that extracts the local user name from an NFSv4 name. Multiple expressions may be concatenated with '|'. The first match will be used. +There is no default. A basic regular expression for domain DOMAIN.ORG and realm MY.DOMAIN.ORG would be: +.nf +^DOMAIN\\([^@]+)@MY.DOMAIN.ORG$ +.fi +.TP +.B Group-Regex +Case-insensitive regular expression that extracts the local group name from an NFSv4 name. Multiple expressions may be concatenated with '|'. The first match will be used. +There is no default. A basic regular expression for domain DOMAIN.ORG and realm MY.DOMAIN.ORG would be: +.nf +^([^@]+)@DOMAIN.ORG@MY.DOMAIN.ORG$|^DOMAIN\\([^@]+)@MY.DOMAIN.ORG$ +.fi +.TP +.B Prepend-Before-User +Constant string to put before a local user name when building an NFSv4 name. Usually this is the short domain name followed by '\'. +(Default: none) +.TP +.B Append-After-User +Constant string to put after a local user name when building an NFSv4 name. Usually this is '@' followed by the default realm. +(Default: none) +.TP +.B Prepend-Before-Group +Constant string to put before a local group name when building an NFSv4 name. Usually not used. +(Default: none) +.TP +.B Append-After-Group +Constant string to put before a local group name when building an NFSv4 name. Usually this is '@' followed by the domain name followed by another '@' and the default realm. +(Default: none) +.TP +.B Group-Name-Prefix +Constant string that is prepended to a local group name when converting it to an NFSv4 name. If an NFSv4 group name has this prefix it is removed when converting it to a local group name. +With this group names of a central directory can be shortened for an isolated organizational unit if all groups have a common prefix. +(Default: none) +.TP +.B Group-Name-No-Prefix-Regex +Case-insensitive regular expression to exclude groups from adding and removing the prefix set by +.BR Group-Name-Prefix . +The regular expression must match both the remote and local group names. Multiple expressions may be concatenated with '|'. +(Default: none) +.\" +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" The [UMICH_SCHEMA] section +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" +.SS "[UMICH_SCHEMA] section variables" +.nf + +.fi +If the "umich_ldap" translation method is specified, the following +variables within the [UMICH_SCHEMA] section are used. +.TP +.B LDAP_server +LDAP server name or address +(Required if using UMICH_LDAP) +.TP +.B LDAP_base +Absolute LDAP search base. +(Required if using UMICH_LDAP) +.TP +.B LDAP_people_base +Absolute LDAP search base for people accounts. +(Default: The +.B LDAP_base +value) +.TP +.B LDAP_group_base +Absolute LDAP search base for group accounts. +(Default: The +.B LDAP_base +value) +.TP +.B LDAP_canonicalize_name +Whether or not to perform name canonicalization on the +name given as +.B LDAP_server +(Default: "true") +.TP +.B LDAP_follow_referrals +Whether or not to follow ldap referrals. (Default: "true") +.TP +.B LDAP_use_ssl +Set to "true" to enable SSL communication with the LDAP server. +(Default: "false") +.TP +.B LDAP_ca_cert +Location of a trusted CA certificate used when SSL is enabled +(Required if +.B LDAP_use_ssl +is true and +.B LDAP_tls_reqcert +is not set to never) +.TP +.B LDAP_tls_reqcert +Controls the LDAP server certificate validation behavior. +It can take the same values as ldap.conf(5)'s +.B TLS_REQCERT +tunable. +(Default: "hard") +.TP +.B LDAP_timeout_seconds +Number of seconds before timing out an LDAP request +(Default: 4) +.TP +.B LDAP_sasl_mech +SASL mechanism to be used for sasl authentication. Required +if SASL auth is to be used (Default: None) +.TP +.B LDAP_realm +SASL realm to be used for sasl authentication. (Default: None) +.TP +.B LDAP_sasl_authcid +Authentication identity to be used for sasl authentication. (Default: None) +.TP +.B LDAP_sasl_authzid +Authorization identity to be used for sasl authentication. (Default: None) +.TP +.B LDAP_sasl_secprops +Cyrus SASL security properties. It can the same values as ldap.conf(5)'s +sasl_secprops. +.TP +.B LDAP_sasl_canonicalize +Specifies whether the LDAP server hostname should be canonicalised. +If set to yes LDAP lib with do a reverse hostname lookup. +If this is not set the LDAP library's default will be used. (Default: +None) +.TP +.B LDAP_sasl_krb5_ccname +Path to kerberos credential cache. If it is not set then the value +of environment variable KRB5CCNAME will be used. If the environment +variable is not set then the default mechanism of kerberos library +will be used. +.TP +.B NFSv4_person_objectclass +The object class name for people accounts in your local LDAP schema +(Default: NFSv4RemotePerson) +.TP +.B NFSv4_name_attr +Your local schema's attribute name to be used for NFSv4 user names +(Default: NFSv4Name) +.TP +.B NFSv4_uid_attr +Your local schema's attribute name to be used for uidNumber +(Default: uidNumber) +.TP +.B GSS_principal_attr +Your local schema's attribute name for GSSAPI Principal names +(Default: GSSAuthName) +.TP +.B NFSv4_acctname_attr +Your local schema's attribute name to be used for account names +(Default: uid) +.TP +.B NFSv4_group_objectclass +The object class name for group accounts in your local LDAP schema +(Default: NFSv4RemoteGroup) +.TP +.B NFSv4_gid_attr +Your local schema's attribute name to be used for gidNumber +(Default: gidNumber) +.TP +.B NFSv4_group_attr +Your local schema's attribute name to be used for NFSv4 group names +(Default: NFSv4Name) +.TP +.B LDAP_use_memberof_for_groups +Some LDAP servers do a better job with indexing where searching +through all the groups searching for the user in the memberuid +list. Others like SunOne directory that search can takes minutes +if there are thousands of groups. So setting +.B LDAP_use_memberof_for_groups +to true in the configuration file will use the memberof lists of +the account and search through only those groups to obtain gids. +(Default: false) +.TP +.B NFSv4_member_attr +If +.B LDAP_use_memberof_for_groups +is true, this is the attribute to be searched for. +(Default: memberUid) +.TP +.B NFSv4_grouplist_filter +An optional search filter for determining group membership. +(No Default) +.\" +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" An Example +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" +.SH EXAMPLES +An example +.I /etc/idmapd.conf +file: +.nf + + +[General] + +Verbosity = 0 +Domain = domain.org +Local-Realms = DOMAIN.ORG,MY.DOMAIN.ORG,YOUR.DOMAIN.ORG + +[Mapping] + +Nobody-User = nfsnobody +Nobody-Group = nfsnobody + +[Translation] + +Method = umich_ldap,regex,nsswitch +GSS-Methods = umich_ldap,regex,static + +[Static] + +johndoe@OTHER.DOMAIN.ORG = johnny + +[Regex] + +User-Regex = ^DOMAIN\\([^@]+)@DOMAIN.ORG$ +Group-Regex = ^([^@]+)@DOMAIN.ORG@DOMAIN.ORG$|^DOMAIN\\([^@]+)@DOMAIN.ORG$ +Prepend-Before-User = DOMAIN\ +Append-After-User = @DOMAIN.ORG +Append-After-Group = @domain.org@domain.org +Group-Name-Prefix = sales- +Group-Name-No-Prefix-Regex = -personal-group$ + +[UMICH_SCHEMA] + +LDAP_server = ldap.domain.org +LDAP_base = dc=org,dc=domain + +.fi +.\" +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" Additional sections +.\" ------------------------------------------------------------------- +.\" +.SH FILES +.I /usr/etc/idmapd.conf +.br +.I /usr/etc/idmapd.conf.d/*.conf +.br +.I /etc/idmapd.conf +.br +.I /etc/idmapd.conf.d/*.conf +.br +.IP +Files are read in the order listed. Later settings override earlier +settings. + +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR idmapd (8) +.BR svcgssd (8) +.\".SH COMPATIBILITY +.\".SH STANDARDS +.\".SH ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS +.\".SH AUTHORS +.\".SH HISTORY +.SH BUGS +Report bugs to <nfsv4@linux-nfs.org> +.\".SH CAVEATS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journal-remote.conf.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journal-remote.conf.5 index 5b8aee5b..5708a49c 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journal-remote.conf.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journal-remote.conf.5 @@ -57,7 +57,12 @@ configuration subdirectories are sorted by their filename in lexicographic order When packages need to customize the configuration, they can install drop\-ins under /usr/\&. Files in /etc/ -are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defined a concept of drop\-in priority to allow distributions to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. +are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defines a concept of drop\-in priorities to allow OS vendors to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. It is recommended to use the range 10\-40 for drop\-ins in +/usr/ +and the range 60\-90 for drop\-ins in +/etc/ +and +/run/, to make sure that local and transient drop\-ins take priority over drop\-ins shipped by the OS vendor\&. .PP To disable a configuration file supplied by the vendor, the recommended way is to place a symlink to /dev/null diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journal-upload.conf.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journal-upload.conf.5 index 535e3a40..46d33e65 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journal-upload.conf.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journal-upload.conf.5 @@ -57,7 +57,12 @@ configuration subdirectories are sorted by their filename in lexicographic order When packages need to customize the configuration, they can install drop\-ins under /usr/\&. Files in /etc/ -are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defined a concept of drop\-in priority to allow distributions to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. +are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defines a concept of drop\-in priorities to allow OS vendors to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. It is recommended to use the range 10\-40 for drop\-ins in +/usr/ +and the range 60\-90 for drop\-ins in +/etc/ +and +/run/, to make sure that local and transient drop\-ins take priority over drop\-ins shipped by the OS vendor\&. .PP To disable a configuration file supplied by the vendor, the recommended way is to place a symlink to /dev/null diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journald.conf.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journald.conf.5 index 372e99bd..dc754063 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journald.conf.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/journald.conf.5 @@ -75,7 +75,12 @@ configuration subdirectories are sorted by their filename in lexicographic order When packages need to customize the configuration, they can install drop\-ins under /usr/\&. Files in /etc/ -are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defined a concept of drop\-in priority to allow distributions to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. +are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defines a concept of drop\-in priorities to allow OS vendors to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. It is recommended to use the range 10\-40 for drop\-ins in +/usr/ +and the range 60\-90 for drop\-ins in +/etc/ +and +/run/, to make sure that local and transient drop\-ins take priority over drop\-ins shipped by the OS vendor\&. .PP To disable a configuration file supplied by the vendor, the recommended way is to place a symlink to /dev/null @@ -306,7 +311,8 @@ and control how large individual journal files may grow at most\&. This influences the granularity in which disk space is made available through rotation, i\&.e\&. deletion of historic data\&. Defaults to one eighth of the values configured with \fISystemMaxUse=\fR and -\fIRuntimeMaxUse=\fR, so that usually seven rotated journal files are kept as history\&. If the journal compact mode is enabled (enabled by default), the maximum file size is capped to 4G\&. +\fIRuntimeMaxUse=\fR +capped to 128M, so that usually seven rotated journal files are kept as history\&. If the journal compact mode is enabled (enabled by default), the maximum file size is capped to 4G\&. .sp Specify values in bytes or use K, M, G, T, P, E as units for the specified sizes (equal to 1024, 1024\(S2, \&... bytes)\&. Note that size limits are enforced synchronously when journal files are extended, and no explicit rotation step triggered by time is needed\&. .sp @@ -370,6 +376,10 @@ to the kernel command line\&. \fBsystemd\fR will automatically disable kernel\*(Aqs rate\-limiting applied to userspace processes (equivalent to setting "printk\&.devkmsg=on")\&. +.PP +Note: Forwarding is performed synchronously within journald, and may significantly affect its performance\&. This is particularly relevant when using ForwardToConsole=yes in cloud environments, where the console is often a slow, virtual serial port\&. Since journald is implemented as a conventional single\-process daemon, forwarding to a completely hung console will block journald\&. This can have a cascading effect resulting in any services synchronously logging to the blocked journal also becoming blocked\&. Unless actively debugging/developing something, it\*(Aqs generally preferable to setup a +\fBjournalctl \-\-follow\fR +style service redirected to the console, instead of ForwardToConsole=yes, for production use\&. .RE .PP \fIMaxLevelStore=\fR, \fIMaxLevelSyslog=\fR, \fIMaxLevelKMsg=\fR, \fIMaxLevelConsole=\fR, \fIMaxLevelWall=\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/logind.conf.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/logind.conf.5 index 3734aa79..97eef777 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/logind.conf.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/logind.conf.5 @@ -57,7 +57,12 @@ configuration subdirectories are sorted by their filename in lexicographic order When packages need to customize the configuration, they can install drop\-ins under /usr/\&. Files in /etc/ -are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defined a concept of drop\-in priority to allow distributions to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. +are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defines a concept of drop\-in priorities to allow OS vendors to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. It is recommended to use the range 10\-40 for drop\-ins in +/usr/ +and the range 60\-90 for drop\-ins in +/etc/ +and +/run/, to make sure that local and transient drop\-ins take priority over drop\-ins shipped by the OS vendor\&. .PP To disable a configuration file supplied by the vendor, the recommended way is to place a symlink to /dev/null diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/machine-id.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/machine-id.5 index 5e55cdfe..7d0cb9ee 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/machine-id.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/machine-id.5 @@ -89,7 +89,8 @@ will attempt to use the D\-Bus machine ID from product_uuid or the devicetree vm,uuid -(on KVM systems), and finally a randomly generated UUID\&. +(on KVM systems), the Xen hypervisor +uuid, and finally a randomly generated UUID\&. .PP After the machine ID is established, \fBsystemd\fR(1) diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/moduli.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/moduli.5 index 149846c8..6dffdc7e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/moduli.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/moduli.5 @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -.\" $OpenBSD: moduli.5,v 1.17 2012/09/26 17:34:38 jmc Exp $ +.\" $OpenBSD: moduli.5,v 1.19 2022/04/16 04:30:10 dtucker Exp $ .\" .\" Copyright (c) 2008 Damien Miller <djm@mindrot.org> .\" @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ .\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN .\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF .\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. -.Dd $Mdocdate: September 26 2012 $ +.Dd $Mdocdate: April 16 2022 $ .Dt MODULI 5 .Os .Sh NAME @@ -32,12 +32,12 @@ using a two-step process. An initial .Em candidate generation pass, using -.Ic ssh-keygen -G , +.Ic ssh-keygen -M generate , calculates numbers that are likely to be useful. A second .Em primality testing pass, using -.Ic ssh-keygen -T , +.Ic ssh-keygen -M screen , provides a high degree of assurance that the numbers are prime and are safe for use in Diffie-Hellman operations by .Xr sshd 8 . @@ -123,5 +123,4 @@ that best meets the size requirement. .%D March 2006 .%R RFC 4419 .%T Diffie-Hellman Group Exchange for the Secure Shell (SSH) Transport Layer Protocol -.%D 2006 .Re diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfs.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfs.5 index a006501c..c0ba4d08 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfs.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfs.5 @@ -11,11 +11,8 @@ NFS is an Internet Standard protocol created by Sun Microsystems in 1984. NFS was developed to allow file sharing between systems residing on a local area network. -The Linux NFS client supports three versions -of the NFS protocol: -NFS version 2 [RFC1094], -NFS version 3 [RFC1813], -and NFS version 4 [RFC3530]. +Depending on kernel configuration, the Linux NFS client may +support NFS versions 3, 4.0, 4.1, or 4.2. .P The .BR mount (8) @@ -88,9 +85,8 @@ These options are valid to use with any NFS version. The NFS protocol version number used to contact the server's NFS service. If the server does not support the requested version, the mount request fails. -If this option is not specified, the client negotiates a suitable version -with -the server, trying version 4 first, version 3 second, and version 2 last. +If this option is not specified, the client tries version 4.2 first, +then negotiates down until it finds a version supported by the server. .TP 1.5i .BI vers= n This option is an alternative to the @@ -98,33 +94,70 @@ This option is an alternative to the option. It is included for compatibility with other operating systems .TP 1.5i -.BR soft " / " hard +.BR soft " / " softerr " / " hard Determines the recovery behavior of the NFS client after an NFS request times out. -If neither option is specified (or if the +If no option is specified (or if the .B hard option is specified), NFS requests are retried indefinitely. -If the -.B soft +If either the +.BR soft " or " softerr option is specified, then the NFS client fails an NFS request after .B retrans retransmissions have been sent, -causing the NFS client to return an error -to the calling application. +causing the NFS client to return either the error +.B EIO +(for the +.B soft +option) or +.B ETIMEDOUT +(for the +.B softerr +option) to the calling application. .IP .I NB: A so-called "soft" timeout can cause silent data corruption in certain cases. As such, use the -.B soft +.BR soft " or " softerr option only when client responsiveness is more important than data integrity. Using NFS over TCP or increasing the value of the .B retrans option may mitigate some of the risks of using the -.B soft +.BR soft " or " softerr option. .TP 1.5i +.BR softreval " / " nosoftreval +In cases where the NFS server is down, it may be useful to +allow the NFS client to continue to serve up paths and +attributes from cache after +.B retrans +attempts to revalidate that cache have timed out. +This may, for instance, be helpful when trying to unmount a +filesystem tree from a server that is permanently down. +.IP +It is possible to combine +.BR softreval +with the +.B soft +mount option, in which case operations that cannot be served up +from cache will time out and return an error after +.B retrans +attempts. The combination with the default +.B hard +mount option implies those uncached operations will continue to +retry until a response is received from the server. +.IP +Note: the default mount option is +.BR nosoftreval +which disallows fallback to cache when revalidation fails, and +instead follows the behavior dictated by the +.B hard +or +.B soft +mount option. +.TP 1.5i .BR intr " / " nointr This option is provided for backward compatibility. It is ignored after kernel 2.6.25. @@ -526,7 +559,7 @@ detailed discussion of these trade-offs. .BR fsc " / " nofsc Enable/Disables the cache of (read-only) data pages to the local disk using the FS-Cache facility. See cachefilesd(8) -and <kernel_soruce>/Documentation/filesystems/caching +and <kernel_source>/Documentation/filesystems/caching for detail on how to configure the FS-Cache facility. Default value is nofsc. .TP 1.5i @@ -535,7 +568,46 @@ The .B sloppy option is an alternative to specifying .BR mount.nfs " -s " option. - +.TP 1.5i +.BI xprtsec= policy +Specifies the use of transport layer security to protect NFS network +traffic on behalf of this mount point. +.I policy +can be one of +.BR none , +.BR tls , +or +.BR mtls . +.IP +If +.B none +is specified, +transport layer security is forced off, even if the NFS server supports +transport layer security. +.IP +If +.B tls +is specified, the client uses RPC-with-TLS to provide in-transit +confidentiality. +.IP +If +.B mtls +is specified, the client uses RPC-with-TLS to authenticate itself and +to provide in-transit confidentiality. +.IP +If either +.B tls +or +.B mtls +is specified and the server does not support RPC-with-TLS or peer +authentication fails, the mount attempt fails. +.IP +If the +.B xprtsec= +option is not specified, +the default behavior depends on the kernel version, +but is usually equivalent to +.BR "xprtsec=none" . .SS "Options for NFS versions 2 and 3 only" Use these options, along with the options in the above subsection, for NFS versions 2 and 3 only. @@ -545,7 +617,7 @@ The .I netid determines the transport that is used to communicate with the NFS server. Available options are -.BR udp ", " udp6 ", "tcp ", " tcp6 ", and " rdma . +.BR udp ", " udp6 ", "tcp ", " tcp6 ", " rdma ", and " rdma6 . Those which end in .B 6 use IPv6 addresses and are only available if support for TI-RPC is @@ -786,14 +858,14 @@ NOTE: When used together, the 'local_lock' mount option will be overridden by 'nolock'/'lock' mount option. .SS "Options for NFS version 4 only" Use these options, along with the options in the first subsection above, -for NFS version 4 and newer. +for NFS version 4.0 and newer. .TP 1.5i .BI proto= netid The .I netid determines the transport that is used to communicate with the NFS server. Supported options are -.BR tcp ", " tcp6 ", and " rdma . +.BR tcp ", " tcp6 ", " rdma ", and " rdma6 . .B tcp6 use IPv6 addresses and is only available if support for TI-RPC is built in. Both others use IPv4 addresses. @@ -803,6 +875,23 @@ so if this mount option is not specified, the NFS version 4 client uses the TCP protocol. Refer to the TRANSPORT METHODS section for more details. .TP 1.5i +.BI minorversion= n +Specifies the protocol minor version number. +NFSv4 introduces "minor versioning," where NFS protocol enhancements can +be introduced without bumping the NFS protocol version number. +Before kernel 2.6.38, the minor version is always zero, and this +option is not recognized. +After this kernel, specifying "minorversion=1" enables a number of +advanced features, such as NFSv4 sessions. +.IP +Recent kernels allow the minor version to be specified using the +.B vers= +option. +For example, specifying +.B vers=4.1 +is the same as specifying +.BR vers=4,minorversion=1 . +.TP 1.5i .BI port= n The numeric value of the server's NFS service port. If the server's NFS service is not available on the specified port, @@ -842,10 +931,13 @@ the behavior of this option in more detail. Specifies a single IPv4 address (in dotted-quad form), or a non-link-local IPv6 address, that the NFS client advertises to allow servers -to perform NFS version 4 callback requests against +to perform NFS version 4.0 callback requests against files on this mount point. If the server is unable to establish callback connections to clients, performance may degrade, or accesses to files may temporarily hang. +Can specify a value of IPv4_ANY (0.0.0.0) or equivalent +IPv6 any address which will signal to the NFS server that +this NFS client does not want delegations. .IP If this option is not specified, the .BR mount (8) @@ -855,6 +947,11 @@ In the presence of multiple client network interfaces, special routing policies, or atypical network topologies, the exact address to use for callbacks may be nontrivial to determine. +.IP +NFS protocol versions 4.1 and 4.2 use the client-established +TCP connection for callback requests, so do not require the server to +connect to the client. This option is therefore only affect NFS version +4.0 mounts. .TP 1.5i .BR migration " / " nomigration Selects whether the client uses an identification string that is compatible @@ -875,6 +972,32 @@ when it identifies itself via a traditional identification string. .IP This mount option has no effect with NFSv4 minor versions newer than zero, which always use TSM-compatible client identification strings. +.TP 1.5i +.BR max_connect= n +While +.BR nconnect +option sets a limit on the number of connections that can be established +to a given server IP, +.BR max_connect +option allows the user to specify maximum number of connections to different +server IPs that belong to the same NFSv4.1+ server (session trunkable +connections) up to a limit of 16. When client discovers that it established +a client ID to an already existing server, instead of dropping the newly +created network transport, the client will add this new connection to the +list of available transports for that RPC client. +.TP 1.5i +.BR trunkdiscovery " / " notrunkdiscovery +When the client discovers a new filesystem on a NFSv4.1+ server, the +.BR trunkdiscovery +mount option will cause it to send a GETATTR for the fs_locations attribute. +If is receives a non-zero length reply, it will iterate through the response, +and for each server location it will establish a connection, send an +EXCHANGE_ID, and test for session trunking. If the trunking test succeeds, +the connection will be added to the existing set of transports for the server, +subject to the limit specified by the +.BR max_connect +option. The default is +.BR notrunkdiscovery . .SH nfs4 FILE SYSTEM TYPE The .BR nfs4 @@ -890,12 +1013,6 @@ file. See .BR nfsmount.conf(5) for details. .SH EXAMPLES -To mount an export using NFS version 2, -use the -.B nfs -file system type and specify the -.B nfsvers=2 -mount option. To mount using NFS version 3, use the .B nfs @@ -921,13 +1038,6 @@ reasonable defaults for NFS behavior. server:/export /mnt nfs defaults 0 0 .fi .P -Here is an example from an /etc/fstab file for an NFS version 2 mount over UDP. -.P -.nf -.ta 8n +16n +6n +6n +30n - server:/export /mnt nfs nfsvers=2,proto=udp 0 0 -.fi -.P This example shows how to mount using NFS version 4 over TCP with Kerberos 5 mutual authentication. .P @@ -1020,7 +1130,7 @@ and can safely be allowed to default to the largest values supported by both client and server, independent of the network's MTU size. .SS "Using the mountproto mount option" -This section applies only to NFS version 2 and version 3 mounts +This section applies only to NFS version 3 mounts since NFS version 4 does not use a separate protocol for mount requests. .P @@ -1255,7 +1365,7 @@ If absolute cache coherence among clients is required, applications should use file locking. Alternatively, applications can also open their files with the O_DIRECT flag to disable data caching entirely. -.SS "File timestamp maintainence" +.SS "File timestamp maintenance" NFS servers are responsible for managing file and directory timestamps .RB ( atime , .BR ctime ", and" @@ -1423,7 +1533,7 @@ the use of the mount option. .SS "Using file locks with NFS" The Network Lock Manager protocol is a separate sideband protocol -used to manage file locks in NFS version 2 and version 3. +used to manage file locks in NFS version 3. To support lock recovery after a client or server reboot, a second sideband protocol -- known as the Network Status Manager protocol -- @@ -1595,52 +1705,55 @@ from a server's pseudo-fs into one of the server's exported physical filesystems, which often have more restrictive security settings than the pseudo-fs. .SS "NFS version 4 Leases" -In NFS version 4, a lease is a period of time during which a server -irrevocably grants a file lock to a client. -If the lease expires, the server is allowed to revoke that lock. +In NFS version 4, a lease is a period during which a server +irrevocably grants a client file locks. +Once the lease expires, the server may revoke those locks. Clients periodically renew their leases to prevent lock revocation. .P After an NFS version 4 server reboots, each client tells the -server about all file open and lock state under its lease +server about existing file open and lock state under its lease before operation can continue. -If the client reboots, the server frees all open and lock state +If a client reboots, the server frees all open and lock state associated with that client's lease. .P -As part of establishing a lease, therefore, +When establishing a lease, therefore, a client must identify itself to a server. -A fixed string is used to distinguish that client from -others, and a changeable verifier is used to indicate -when the client has rebooted. -.P -A client uses a particular security flavor and principal -when performing the operations to establish a lease. -If two clients happen to present the same identity string, -a server can use their principals to detect that they are -different clients, and prevent one client from interfering -with the other's lease. -.P -The Linux NFS client establishes one lease for each server. +Each client presents an arbitrary string +to distinguish itself from other clients. +The client administrator can +supplement the default identity string using the +.I nfs4.nfs4_unique_id +module parameter to avoid collisions +with other client identity strings. +.P +A client also uses a unique security flavor and principal +when it establishes its lease. +If two clients present the same identity string, +a server can use client principals to distinguish between them, +thus securely preventing one client from interfering with the other's lease. +.P +The Linux NFS client establishes one lease on each NFS version 4 server. Lease management operations, such as lease renewal, are not done on behalf of a particular file, lock, user, or mount -point, but on behalf of the whole client that owns that lease. -These operations must use the same security flavor and -principal that was used when the lease was established, -even across client reboots. +point, but on behalf of the client that owns that lease. +A client uses a consistent identity string, security flavor, +and principal across client reboots to ensure that the server +can promptly reap expired lease state. .P When Kerberos is configured on a Linux NFS client (i.e., there is a .I /etc/krb5.keytab on that client), the client attempts to use a Kerberos security flavor for its lease management operations. -This provides strong authentication of the client to -each server it contacts. +Kerberos provides secure authentication of each client. By default, the client uses the .I host/ or .I nfs/ service principal in its .I /etc/krb5.keytab -for this purpose. +for this purpose, as described in +.BR rpc.gssd (8). .P If the client has Kerberos configured, but the server does not, or if the client does not have a keytab or @@ -1796,7 +1909,7 @@ file system table .TP 1.5i .I /etc/nfsmount.conf Configuration file for NFS mounts -.SH BUGS +.SH NOTES Before 2.4.7, the Linux NFS client did not support NFS over TCP. .P Before 2.4.20, the Linux NFS client used a heuristic @@ -1815,9 +1928,9 @@ when the .BR rsize " and " wsize settings were smaller than the system's page size. .P -The Linux NFS client does not yet support -certain optional features of the NFS version 4 protocol, -such as security negotiation, server referrals, and named attributes. +The Linux client's support for protocol versions depend on whether the +kernel was built with options CONFIG_NFS_V2, CONFIG_NFS_V3, +CONFIG_NFS_V4, CONFIG_NFS_V4_1, and CONFIG_NFS_V4_2. .SH "SEE ALSO" .BR fstab (5), .BR mount (8), @@ -1840,8 +1953,6 @@ RFC 768 for the UDP specification. .br RFC 793 for the TCP specification. .br -RFC 1094 for the NFS version 2 specification. -.br RFC 1813 for the NFS version 3 specification. .br RFC 1832 for the XDR specification. @@ -1850,4 +1961,8 @@ RFC 1833 for the RPC bind specification. .br RFC 2203 for the RPCSEC GSS API protocol specification. .br -RFC 3530 for the NFS version 4 specification. +RFC 7530 for the NFS version 4.0 specification. +.br +RFC 5661 for the NFS version 4.1 specification. +.br +RFC 7862 for the NFS version 4.2 specification. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfs.conf.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfs.conf.5 index 5a64ad93..d03fc887 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfs.conf.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfs.conf.5 @@ -2,10 +2,13 @@ .SH NAME nfs.conf \- general configuration for NFS daemons and tools .SH SYNOPSIS +.I /usr/etc/nfs.conf +.I /usr/etc/nfs.conf.d/ .I /etc/nfs.conf +.I /etc/nfs.conf.d/ .SH DESCRIPTION .PP -This file contains site-specific configuration for various NFS daemons +These files contain site-specific configuration for various NFS daemons and other processes. Most configuration can also be passed to processes via command line arguments, but it can be more convenient to have a central file. In particular, this encourages consistent @@ -65,6 +68,9 @@ section headers, then new sections will be created just as if the included file appeared in place of the .B include line. +If the file name starts with a hyphen then that is stripped off +before the file is opened, and if file doesn't exist no warning is +given. Normally a non-existent include file generates a warning. .PP Lookup of section and value names is case-insensitive. @@ -95,11 +101,59 @@ value, which can be one or more from the list .BR parse , .BR all . When a list is given, the members should be comma-separated. +The values +.BR 0 +and +.BR 1 +are also accepted, with '0' making no changes to the debug level, and '1' equivalent to specifying 'all'. + +.TP +.B general +Recognized values: +.BR pipefs-directory . + +See +.BR blkmapd (8), +.BR rpc.idmapd (8), +and +.BR rpc.gssd (8) +for details. + .TP -Note that setting +.B exports +Recognized values: +.BR rootdir . + +Setting +.B rootdir +to a valid path causes the nfs server to act as if the +supplied path is being prefixed to all the exported entries. For +instance, if +.BR rootdir=/my/root , +and there is an entry in /etc/exports for +.BR /filesystem , +then the client will be able to mount the path as +.BR /filesystem , +but on the server, this will resolve to the path +.BR /my/root/filesystem . + +.TP +.B exportd +Recognized values: +.BR manage-gids , +.BR threads , +.BR cache-use-ipaddr , +.BR ttl , +.BR state-directory-path + +See +.BR exportd (8) +for details. + +Note that setting .B "\[dq]debug = auth\[dq]" for -.B mountd +.B exportd is equivalent to providing the .B \-\-log\-auth option. @@ -128,13 +182,12 @@ Recognized values: .BR lease-time , .BR udp , .BR tcp , -.BR vers2 , .BR vers3 , .BR vers4 , .BR vers4.0 , .BR vers4.1 , .BR vers4.2 , -.BR rdma . +.BR rdma , Version and protocol values are Boolean values as described above, and are also used by @@ -155,7 +208,7 @@ Recognized values: .BR port , .BR threads , .BR reverse-lookup , -.BR cache-use-upaddr , +.BR cache-use-ipaddr , .BR ttl , .BR state-directory-path , .BR ha-callout . @@ -166,6 +219,21 @@ section, are used to configure mountd. See .BR rpc.mountd (8) for details. +Note that setting +.B "\[dq]debug = auth\[dq]" +for +.B mountd +is equivalent to providing the +.B \-\-log\-auth +option. + +The +.B state-directory-path +value in the +.B [mountd] +section is also used by +.BR exportfs (8). + .TP .B statd Recognized values: @@ -204,16 +272,19 @@ for details. .TP .B gssd Recognized values: +.BR verbosity , +.BR rpc-verbosity , .BR use-memcache , .BR use-machine-creds , +.BR use-gss-proxy , .BR avoid-dns , .BR limit-to-legacy-enctypes , .BR context-timeout , .BR rpc-timeout , -.BR pipefs-directory , .BR keytab-file , .BR cred-cache-directory , -.BR preferred-realm . +.BR preferred-realm , +.BR set-home . See .BR rpc.gssd (8) @@ -234,8 +305,29 @@ Only .B debug= is recognized. +.TP +.B nfsrahead +Recognized values: +.BR nfs , +.BR nfsv4 , +.BR default . + +See +.BR nfsrahead (5) +for deatils. + .SH FILES +.I /usr/etc/nfs.conf +.br +.I /usr/etc/nfs.conf.d/*.conf +.br .I /etc/nfs.conf +.br +.I /etc/nfs.conf.d/*.conf +.br +.IP +Various configuration files read in order. Later settings override +earlier settings. .SH SEE ALSO .BR nfsdcltrack (8), .BR rpc.nfsd (8), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfsmount.conf.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfsmount.conf.5 index 3aa34564..10287cdf 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfsmount.conf.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfsmount.conf.5 @@ -1,53 +1,84 @@ -.\"@(#)nfsmount.conf.5" -.TH NFSMOUNT.CONF 5 "9 October 2012" +.\" @(#)nfsmount.conf.5" +.TH NFSMOUNT.CONF 5 "16 December 2020" .SH NAME nfsmount.conf - Configuration file for NFS mounts .SH SYNOPSIS Configuration file for NFS mounts that allows options to be set globally, per server or per mount point. .SH DESCRIPTION -The configuration file is made up of multiple sections -followed by variables associated with that section. -A section is defined by a string enclosed by +The configuration file is made up of multiple section headers +followed by variable assignments associated with that section. +A section header is defined by a string enclosed by .BR [ -and +and .BR ] -branches. -Variables are assignment statements that assign values -to particular variables using the -.BR = -operator, as in +brackets. +Variable assignments are assignment statements that assign values +to particular variables using the +.BR = +operator, as in .BR Proto=Tcp . -The variables that can be assigned are exactly the set of NFS specific +The variables that can be assigned are the set of NFS specific mount options listed in -.BR nfs (5). +.BR nfs (5) +together with the filesystem-independant mount options listed in +.BR mount (8) +and three additions: +.B Sloppy=True +has the same effect as the +.B -s +option to +.IR mount , +and +.B Foreground=True +and +.B Background=True +have the same effect as +.B bg +and +.BR fg . +.PP +Options in the config file may be given in upper, lower, or mixed case +and will be shifted to lower case before being passed to the filesystem. +.PP +Boolean mount options which do not need an equals sign must be given as +.RI \[dq] option =True". +Instead of preceeding such an option with +.RB \[dq] no \[dq] +its negation must be given as +.RI \[dq] option =False". .PP Sections are broken up into three basic categories: Global options, Server options and Mount Point options. .HP .B [ NFSMount_Global_Options ] - This statically named section -defines all of the global mount options that can be +defines all of the global mount options that can be applied to every NFS mount. .HP -.B [ Server \(lqServer_Name\(rq ] -- This section defines all the mount options that should -be used on mounts to a particular NFS server. The -.I \(lqServer_Name\(rq -strings needs to be surrounded by '\(lq' and -be an exact match of the server name used in the +.B [ Server \[dq]Server_Name\[dq] ] +- This section defines all the mount options that should +be used on mounts to a particular NFS server. The +.I \[dq]Server_Name\[dq] +strings needs to be surrounded by '\[dq]' and be an exact match +(ignoring case) of the server name used in the .B mount -command. +command. .HP -.B [ MountPoint \(lqMount_Point\(rq ] -- This section defines all the mount options that +.B [ MountPoint \[dq]Mount_Point\[dq] ] +- This section defines all the mount options that should be used on a particular mount point. -The -.I \(lqMount_Point\(rq -string needs to be surrounded by '\(lq' and be an -exact match of the mount point used in the -.BR mount -command. +The +.I \[dq]Mount_Point\[dq] +string needs to be surrounded by '\[dq]' and be an +exact match of the mount point used in the +.BR mount +command. Though path names are usually case-sensitive, the Mount_Point +name is matched insensitive to case. +.PP +The sections are processed in the reverse of the order listed above, and +any options already seen, either in a previous section or on the +command line, will be ignored when seen again. .SH EXAMPLES .PP These are some example lines of how sections and variables @@ -57,37 +88,44 @@ are defined in the configuration file. .br Proto=Tcp .RS -.HP +.PP The TCP/IPv4 protocol will be used on every NFS mount. -.HP .RE -[ Server \(lqnfsserver.foo.com\(rq ] +.PP +[ Server \[dq]nfsserver.foo.com\[dq] ] .br rsize=32k .br wsize=32k .br proto=udp6 -.HP .RS +.PP A 32k (32768 bytes) block size will be used as the read and write size on all mounts to the 'nfsserver.foo.com' server. UDP/IPv6 is the protocol to be used. -.HP .RE -.BR -[ MountPoint \(lq/export/home\(rq ] +.PP +[ MountPoint \[dq]/export/home\[dq] ] .br Background=True .RS -.HP +.PP All mounts to the '/export/home' export will be performed in the background (i.e. done asynchronously). -.HP +.RE .SH FILES -.TP 10n +.I /usr/etc/nfsmount.conf +.br +.I /usr/etc/nfsmount.conf.d/*.conf +.br .I /etc/nfsmount.conf -Default NFS mount configuration file +.br +.I /etc/nfsmount.conf.d/*.conf +.br +.IP +Default NFS mount configuration files, variables set in the later file +over-ride those in the earlier file. .PD .SH SEE ALSO .BR nfs (5), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfsrahead.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfsrahead.5 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5488f633 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/nfsrahead.5 @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +.\" Manpage for nfsrahead. +.nh +.ad l +.TH man 5 "08 Mar 2022" "1.0" "nfsrahead man page" +.SH NAME + +nfsrahead \- Configure the readahead for NFS mounts + +.SH SYNOPSIS + +nfsrahead [-F] [-d] <device> + +.SH DESCRIPTION + +\fInfsrahead\fR is a tool intended to be used with udev to set the \fIread_ahead_kb\fR parameter of NFS mounts, according to the configuration file (see \fICONFIGURATION\fR). \fIdevice\fR is the device number for the NFS backing device as provided by the kernel. + +.SH OPTIONS +.TP +.B -F +Send messages to +.I stderr +instead of +.I syslog + +.TP +.B -d +Increase the debugging level. + +.SH CONFIGURATION +.I nfsrahead +is configured in +.IR /etc/nfs.conf , +in the section titled +.IR nfsrahead . +It accepts the following configurations. + +.TP +.B nfs=<value> +The readahead value applied to NFSv3 mounts. + +.TP +.B nfs4=<value> +The readahead value applied to NFSv4 mounts. + +.TP +.B default=<value> +The default configuration when none of the configurations above is set. + +.SH EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION +[nfsrahead] +.br +nfs=15000 # readahead of 15000 for NFSv3 mounts +.br +nfs4=16000 # readahead of 16000 for NFSv4 mounts +.br +default=128 # default is 128 + +.SH SEE ALSO + +.BR mount.nfs (8), +.BR nfs (5), +.BR nfs.conf (5), +.BR udev (7), +.BR bcc-readahead (8) + +.SH BUGS + +No known bugs. + +.SH AUTHOR + +Thiago Rafael Becker <trbecker@gmail.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.login1.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.login1.5 index 57ac17a3..7ab6ee14 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.login1.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.login1.5 @@ -1115,9 +1115,7 @@ node /org/freedesktop/login1/session/1 { readonly u VTNr = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("const") readonly (so) Seat = \&.\&.\&.; - @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("const") readonly s TTY = \*(Aq\&.\&.\&.\*(Aq; - @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("const") readonly s Display = \*(Aq\&.\&.\&.\*(Aq; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("const") readonly b Remote = \&.\&.\&.; diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.portable1.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.portable1.5 index a7d9566a..8cb990ac 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.portable1.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.portable1.5 @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ write mkdir .RE .sp -Note that an image cannot be attached if a unit that it contains is already present on the system\&. +Note that an image cannot be attached if a unit that it contains is already present on the system\&. Note that this method returns only after all the listed operations are completed, and due to the I/O involved it might take some time\&. .PP \fBAttachImageWithExtensions()\fR attaches a portable image to the system\&. This method is a superset of @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ detaches a portable image from the system\&. This method takes an image path or unlink .RE .sp -Note that an image cannot be detached if a unit that it contains is running\&. +Note that an image cannot be detached if a unit that it contains is running\&. Note that this method returns only after all the listed operations are completed, and due to the I/O involved it might take some time\&. .PP \fBDetachImageWithExtensions()\fR detaches a portable image from the system\&. This method is a superset of diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.systemd1.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.systemd1.5 index 0cfb5246..b6c9575a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.systemd1.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/org.freedesktop.systemd1.5 @@ -807,7 +807,13 @@ enqueues a start job and possibly depending jobs\&. It takes the unit to activat "fail", the method will start the unit and its dependencies, but will fail if this would change an already queued job\&. If "isolate", the method will start the unit in question and terminate all units that aren\*(Aqt dependencies of it\&. If "ignore\-dependencies", it will start a unit but ignore all its dependencies\&. If -"ignore\-requirements", it will start a unit but only ignore the requirement dependencies\&. It is not recommended to make use of the latter two options\&. On completion, this method returns the newly created job object\&. +"ignore\-requirements", it will start a unit but only ignore the requirement dependencies\&. It is not recommended to make use of the latter two options\&. On reply, if successful, this method returns the newly created job object which has been enqueued for asynchronous activation\&. Callers that want to track the outcome of the actual start operation need to monitor the result of this job\&. This can be achieved in a race\-free manner by first subscribing to the +\fBJobRemoved()\fR +signal, then calling +\fBStartUnit()\fR +and using the returned job object to filter out unrelated +\fBJobRemoved()\fR +signals, until the desired one is received, which will then carry the result of the start operation\&. .PP \fBStartUnitReplace()\fR is similar to @@ -904,7 +910,7 @@ resets the "failed" state of a specific unit\&. resets the "failed" state of all units\&. .PP \fBListUnits()\fR -returns an array of all currently loaded units\&. Note that units may be known by multiple names at the same name, and hence there might be more unit names loaded than actual units behind them\&. The array consists of structures with the following elements: +returns an array of all currently loaded units\&. Note that units may be known by multiple names at the same time, and hence there might be more unit names loaded than actual units behind them\&. The array consists of structures with the following elements: .sp .RS 4 .ie n \{\ @@ -2146,7 +2152,7 @@ or unit, and it is only provided in a best effort fashion: it is not guaranteed to be set, and it is not guaranteed to be the only trigger\&. It is only guaranteed to be a valid trigger that caused the activation job to be enqueued and complete successfully\&. The key value pairs correspond (in lowercase) to the environment variables described in the "Environment Variables Set or Propagated by the Service Manager" section in -\fBsystemd.exec\fR(1)\&. Note that new key value pair may be added at any time in future versions\&. Existing entries will not be removed\&. +\fBsystemd.exec\fR(5)\&. Note that new key value pair may be added at any time in future versions\&. Existing entries will not be removed\&. .SS "Security" .PP Similarly to methods on the @@ -2310,6 +2316,10 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/avahi_2ddaemon_2eservice { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t MemoryAvailable = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryHigh = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t CPUUsageNSec = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly ay EffectiveCPUs = [\&.\&.\&.]; @@ -2318,6 +2328,8 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/avahi_2ddaemon_2eservice { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t TasksCurrent = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveTasksMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressBytes = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressPackets = \&.\&.\&.; @@ -3167,6 +3179,9 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/avahi_2ddaemon_2eservice { + + + .SS "Methods" .PP \fBBindMount()\fR @@ -3454,6 +3469,10 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/avahi_2ddaemon_2esocket { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t MemoryAvailable = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryHigh = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t CPUUsageNSec = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly ay EffectiveCPUs = [\&.\&.\&.]; @@ -3462,6 +3481,8 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/avahi_2ddaemon_2esocket { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t TasksCurrent = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveTasksMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressBytes = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressPackets = \&.\&.\&.; @@ -4300,6 +4321,9 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/avahi_2ddaemon_2esocket { + + + .SS "Properties" .PP Most of the properties map directly to the corresponding settings in socket unit files\&. As socket units can include @@ -4458,6 +4482,10 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/home_2emount { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t MemoryAvailable = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryHigh = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t CPUUsageNSec = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly ay EffectiveCPUs = [\&.\&.\&.]; @@ -4466,6 +4494,8 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/home_2emount { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t TasksCurrent = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveTasksMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressBytes = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressPackets = \&.\&.\&.; @@ -5263,6 +5293,9 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/home_2emount { + + + .SS "Properties" .PP Most of the properties map directly to the corresponding settings in mount unit files\&. As mount units invoke the @@ -5495,6 +5528,10 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/dev_2dsda3_2eswap { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t MemoryAvailable = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryHigh = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t CPUUsageNSec = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly ay EffectiveCPUs = [\&.\&.\&.]; @@ -5503,6 +5540,8 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/dev_2dsda3_2eswap { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t TasksCurrent = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveTasksMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressBytes = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressPackets = \&.\&.\&.; @@ -6293,6 +6332,9 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/dev_2dsda3_2eswap { + + + .SS "Properties" .PP Most of the properties map directly to the corresponding settings in swap unit files\&. As mount units invoke the @@ -6411,6 +6453,10 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/system_2eslice { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t MemoryAvailable = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryHigh = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t CPUUsageNSec = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly ay EffectiveCPUs = [\&.\&.\&.]; @@ -6419,6 +6465,8 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/system_2eslice { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t TasksCurrent = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveTasksMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressBytes = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressPackets = \&.\&.\&.; @@ -6662,6 +6710,9 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/system_2eslice { + + + .SS "Properties" .PP Most properties correspond directly with the matching settings in slice unit files\&. @@ -6708,6 +6759,10 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/session_2d1_2escope { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t MemoryAvailable = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveMemoryHigh = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t CPUUsageNSec = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly ay EffectiveCPUs = [\&.\&.\&.]; @@ -6716,6 +6771,8 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/session_2d1_2escope { @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t TasksCurrent = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") + readonly t EffectiveTasksMax = \&.\&.\&.; + @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressBytes = \&.\&.\&.; @org\&.freedesktop\&.DBus\&.Property\&.EmitsChangedSignal("false") readonly t IPIngressPackets = \&.\&.\&.; @@ -6988,6 +7045,9 @@ node /org/freedesktop/systemd1/unit/session_2d1_2escope { + + + .SS "Methods" .PP \fBAbandon()\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/smbpasswd.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/smbpasswd.5 index 169d3ec4..0619b573 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/smbpasswd.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/smbpasswd.5 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: smbpasswd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: File Formats and Conventions -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SMBPASSWD" "5" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "File Formats and Conventions" +.TH "SMBPASSWD" "5" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "File Formats and Conventions" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ This field consists of the time the account was last modified\&. It consists of All other colon separated fields are ignored at this time\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/sysctl.d.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/sysctl.d.5 index 91f0a6ab..f29cc182 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/sysctl.d.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/sysctl.d.5 @@ -122,7 +122,12 @@ Packages should install their configuration files in /usr/local/lib/ (local installs)\&. Files in /etc/ -are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. +are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. It is recommended to use the range 10\-40 for configuration files in +/usr/ +and the range 60\-90 for configuration files in +/etc/ +and +/run/, to make sure that local and transient configuration files will always take priority over configuration files shipped by the OS vendor\&. .PP If the administrator wants to disable a configuration file supplied by the vendor, the recommended way is to place a symlink to /dev/null diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd-system.conf.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd-system.conf.5 index f9d25712..93cb0876 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd-system.conf.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd-system.conf.5 @@ -72,7 +72,12 @@ configuration subdirectories are sorted by their filename in lexicographic order When packages need to customize the configuration, they can install drop\-ins under /usr/\&. Files in /etc/ -are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defined a concept of drop\-in priority to allow distributions to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. +are reserved for the local administrator, who may use this logic to override the configuration files installed by vendor packages\&. Drop\-ins have to be used to override package drop\-ins, since the main configuration file has lower precedence\&. It is recommended to prefix all filenames in those subdirectories with a two\-digit number and a dash, to simplify the ordering of the files\&. This also defines a concept of drop\-in priorities to allow OS vendors to ship drop\-ins within a specific range lower than the range used by users\&. This should lower the risk of package drop\-ins overriding accidentally drop\-ins defined by users\&. It is recommended to use the range 10\-40 for drop\-ins in +/usr/ +and the range 60\-90 for drop\-ins in +/etc/ +and +/run/, to make sure that local and transient drop\-ins take priority over drop\-ins shipped by the OS vendor\&. .PP To disable a configuration file supplied by the vendor, the recommended way is to place a symlink to /dev/null diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.exec.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.exec.5 index d3ee2537..433926f4 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.exec.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.exec.5 @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ file system of the host is bind mounted if this option is used without \fIPrivateDevices=\fR\&. .sp In order to allow propagating mounts at runtime in a safe manner, -/run/systemd/propagate +/run/systemd/propagate/ on the host will be used to set up new mounts, and /run/host/incoming/ in the private namespace will be used as an intermediate step to store them before being moved to the final mount point\&. @@ -1354,11 +1354,11 @@ personalities but no others\&. The personality feature is useful when running 32 .PP \fIIgnoreSIGPIPE=\fR .RS 4 -Takes a boolean argument\&. If true, causes +Takes a boolean argument\&. If true, \fBSIGPIPE\fR -to be ignored in the executed process\&. Defaults to true because +is ignored in the executed process\&. Defaults to true since \fBSIGPIPE\fR -generally is useful only in shell pipelines\&. +is generally only useful in shell pipelines\&. .RE .SH "SCHEDULING" .PP @@ -1835,7 +1835,13 @@ in order to provide writable subdirectories within read\-only directories\&. Use \fIReadWritePaths=\fR in order to allow\-list specific paths for write access if \fIProtectSystem=strict\fR -is used\&. +is used\&. Note that +\fIReadWritePaths=\fR +cannot be used to gain write access to a file system whose superblock is mounted read\-only\&. On Linux, for each mount point write access is granted only if the mount point itself +\fIand\fR +the file system superblock backing it are not marked read\-only\&. +\fIReadWritePaths=\fR +only controls the former, not the latter, hence a read\-only file system superblock remains protected\&. .sp Paths listed in \fIInaccessiblePaths=\fR @@ -1889,6 +1895,11 @@ Note that the effect of these settings may be undone by privileged processes\&. or \fISystemCallFilter=~@mount\fR\&. .sp +Please be extra careful when applying these options to API file systems (a list of them could be found in +\fIMountAPIVPS=\fR), since they may be required for basic system functionalities\&. Moreover, +/run/ +needs to be writable for setting up mount namespace and propagation\&. +.sp Simple allow\-list example using these directives: .sp .if n \{\ @@ -3343,7 +3354,10 @@ for details) to have \fIAccept=yes\fR set, or to specify a single socket only\&. If this option is set, standard input will be connected to the socket the service was activated from, which is primarily useful for compatibility with daemons designed for use with the traditional \fBinetd\fR(8) -socket activation daemon\&. +socket activation daemon (\fI$LISTEN_FDS\fR +(and related) environment variables are not passed when +\fBsocket\fR +value is configured)\&. .sp The \fBfd:\fR\fB\fIname\fR\fR @@ -3908,7 +3922,11 @@ command line use \fIEnvironment=\fR line use "%d/mycred", e\&.g\&. -"Environment=MYCREDPATH=%d/mycred"\&. +"Environment=MYCREDPATH=%d/mycred"\&. For system services the path may also be referenced as +"/run/credentials/\fIUNITNAME\fR" +in cases where no interpolation is possible, e\&.g\&. configuration files of software that does not yet support credentials natively\&. +\fI$CREDENTIALS_DIRECTORY\fR +is considered the primary interface to look for credentials, though, since it also works for user services\&. .sp Currently, an accumulated credential size limit of 1 MB per unit is enforced\&. .sp diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.link.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.link.5 index 6821d3d0..0d460256 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.link.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.link.5 @@ -537,7 +537,7 @@ option, then the password is read from the credential "wol\&.password"\&. See \fIImportCredential=\fR/\fILoadCredential=\fR/\fISetCredential=\fR in -\fBsystemd.exec\fR(1) +\fBsystemd.exec\fR(5) for details\&. The password in the credential, must be 6 bytes in hex format with each byte separated by a colon (":") like an Ethernet MAC address, e\&.g\&., "aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff"\&. .RE diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.resource-control.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.resource-control.5 index 313c2b00..68ae3aaa 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.resource-control.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.resource-control.5 @@ -408,7 +408,10 @@ Takes a memory size in bytes\&. If the value is suffixed with K, M, G or T, the "infinity", no memory throttling is applied\&. This controls the "memory\&.high" control group attribute\&. For details about this control group attribute, see -\m[blue]\fBMemory Interface Files\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[5]\d\s+2\&. +\m[blue]\fBMemory Interface Files\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[5]\d\s+2\&. The effective configuration is reported as +\fIEffectiveMemoryHigh=\fR +(see also +\fIEffectiveMemoryMax=\fR)\&. .sp While \fIStartupMemoryHigh=\fR @@ -435,7 +438,9 @@ Takes a memory size in bytes\&. If the value is suffixed with K, M, G or T, the "infinity", no memory limit is applied\&. This controls the "memory\&.max" control group attribute\&. For details about this control group attribute, see -\m[blue]\fBMemory Interface Files\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[5]\d\s+2\&. +\m[blue]\fBMemory Interface Files\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[5]\d\s+2\&. The effective configuration is reported as +\fIEffectiveMemoryMax=\fR +(the value is the most stringent limit of the unit and parent slices and it is capped by physical memory)\&. .sp While \fIStartupMemoryMax=\fR @@ -543,7 +548,8 @@ Specify the maximum number of tasks that may be created in the unit\&. This ensu "infinity", no tasks limit is applied\&. This controls the "pids\&.max" control group attribute\&. For details about this control group attribute, the -\m[blue]\fBpids controller\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[7]\d\s+2\&. +\m[blue]\fBpids controller\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[7]\d\s+2\&. The effective configuration is reported as +\fIEffectiveTasksMax=\fR\&. .sp The system default for this setting may be controlled with \fIDefaultTasksMax=\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.service.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.service.5 index 8d127bfb..6708a4c5 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.service.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.service.5 @@ -1059,7 +1059,13 @@ If set to \fBon\-abnormal\fR, the service will be restarted when the process is terminated by a signal (including on core dump, excluding the aforementioned four signals), when an operation times out, or when the watchdog timeout is triggered\&. If set to \fBon\-abort\fR, the service will be restarted only if the service process exits due to an uncaught signal not specified as a clean exit status\&. If set to \fBon\-watchdog\fR, the service will be restarted only if the watchdog timeout for the service expires\&. If set to -\fBalways\fR, the service will be restarted regardless of whether it exited cleanly or not, got terminated abnormally by a signal, or hit a timeout\&. +\fBalways\fR, the service will be restarted regardless of whether it exited cleanly or not, got terminated abnormally by a signal, or hit a timeout\&. Note that +\fIType=oneshot\fR +services will never be restarted on a clean exit status, i\&.e\&. +\fBalways\fR +and +\fBon\-success\fR +are rejected for them\&. .sp .it 1 an-trap .nr an-no-space-flag 1 @@ -1355,6 +1361,18 @@ for details), will have the flag set and hence are in non\-blocking mode\&. This option is only useful in conjunction with a socket unit, as described in \fBsystemd.socket\fR(5) and has no effect on file descriptors which were previously saved in the file\-descriptor store for example\&. Defaults to false\&. +.sp +Note that if the same socket unit is configured to be passed to multiple service units (via the +\fISockets=\fR +setting, see below), and these services have different +\fINonBlocking=\fR +configurations, the precise state of +\fBO_NONBLOCK\fR +depends on the order in which these services are invoked, and will possibly change after service code already took possession of the socket file descriptor, simply because the +\fBO_NONBLOCK\fR +state of a socket is shared by all file descriptors referencing it\&. Hence it is essential that all services sharing the same socket use the same +\fINonBlocking=\fR +configuration, and do not change the flag in service code either\&. .RE .PP \fINotifyAccess=\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.unit.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.unit.5 index 4c177ef4..7d7946c8 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.unit.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/systemd.unit.5 @@ -1951,9 +1951,11 @@ l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l -l l l s l l l l l l l s +l l l s +l l ^ ^ +l l l s l l ^ ^ l l l l. T{ @@ -2023,13 +2025,6 @@ T}:T{ an automatic property T} T{ -\fITriggers=\fR -T}:T{ -\fITriggeredBy=\fR -T}:T{ -Automatic properties, see notes below -T} -T{ \fIConflicts=\fR T}:T{ \fIConflictedBy=\fR @@ -2039,6 +2034,13 @@ T}:T{ an automatic property T} T{ +\fITriggers=\fR +T}:T{ +\fITriggeredBy=\fR +T}:T{ +Automatic properties, see notes below +T} +T{ \fIPropagatesReloadTo=\fR T}:T{ \fIReloadPropagatedFrom=\fR @@ -2051,6 +2053,18 @@ T}:T{ \fIPropagatesReloadTo=\fR T}:: T{ +\fIPropagatesStopTo=\fR +T}:T{ +\fIStopPropagatedFrom=\fR +T}:T{ +[Unit] section +T} +T{ +\fIStopPropagatedFrom=\fR +T}:T{ +\fIPropagatesStopTo=\fR +T}:: +T{ \fIFollowing=\fR T}:T{ n/a diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/terminal-colors.d.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/terminal-colors.d.5 deleted file mode 100644 index 2284175f..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/terminal-colors.d.5 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,404 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: terminal-colors.d -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: File formats -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "TERMINAL\-COLORS.D" "5" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "File formats" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -terminal-colors.d \- configure output colorization for various utilities -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -/etc/terminal\-colors.d/\fI[[name][@term].][type]\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Files in this directory determine the default behavior for utilities when coloring output. -.sp -The \fIname\fP is a utility name. The name is optional and when none is specified then the file is used for all unspecified utilities. -.sp -The \fIterm\fP is a terminal identifier (the TERM environment variable). The terminal identifier is optional and when none is specified then the file is used for all unspecified terminals. -.sp -The \fItype\fP is a file type. Supported file types are: -.sp -\fBdisable\fP -.RS 4 -Turns off output colorization for all compatible utilities. -.RE -.sp -\fBenable\fP -.RS 4 -Turns on output colorization; any matching \fBdisable\fP files are ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBscheme\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies colors used for output. The file format may be specific to the utility, the default format is described below. -.RE -.sp -If there are more files that match for a utility, then the file with the more specific filename wins. For example, the filename "@xterm.scheme" has less priority than "dmesg@xterm.scheme". The lowest priority are those files without a utility name and terminal identifier (e.g., "disable"). -.sp -The user\-specific \fI$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/terminal\-colors.d\fP or \fI$HOME/.config/terminal\-colors.d\fP overrides the global setting. -.SH "DEFAULT SCHEME FILES FORMAT" -.sp -The following statement is recognized: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBname color\-sequence\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The \fBname\fP is a logical name of color sequence (for example "error"). The names are specific to the utilities. For more details always see the COLORS section in the man page for the utility. -.sp -The \fBcolor\-sequence\fP is a color name, ASCII color sequences or escape sequences. -.SS "Color names" -.sp -black, blink, blue, bold, brown, cyan, darkgray, gray, green, halfbright, lightblue, lightcyan, lightgray, lightgreen, lightmagenta, lightred, magenta, red, reset, reverse, and yellow. -.SS "ANSI color sequences" -.sp -The color sequences are composed of sequences of numbers separated by semicolons. The most common codes are: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -0 -T}:T{ -.sp -to restore default color -T} -T{ -.sp -1 -T}:T{ -.sp -for brighter colors -T} -T{ -.sp -4 -T}:T{ -.sp -for underlined text -T} -T{ -.sp -5 -T}:T{ -.sp -for flashing text -T} -T{ -.sp -30 -T}:T{ -.sp -for black foreground -T} -T{ -.sp -31 -T}:T{ -.sp -for red foreground -T} -T{ -.sp -32 -T}:T{ -.sp -for green foreground -T} -T{ -.sp -33 -T}:T{ -.sp -for yellow (or brown) foreground -T} -T{ -.sp -34 -T}:T{ -.sp -for blue foreground -T} -T{ -.sp -35 -T}:T{ -.sp -for purple foreground -T} -T{ -.sp -36 -T}:T{ -.sp -for cyan foreground -T} -T{ -.sp -37 -T}:T{ -.sp -for white (or gray) foreground -T} -T{ -.sp -40 -T}:T{ -.sp -for black background -T} -T{ -.sp -41 -T}:T{ -.sp -for red background -T} -T{ -.sp -42 -T}:T{ -.sp -for green background -T} -T{ -.sp -43 -T}:T{ -.sp -for yellow (or brown) background -T} -T{ -.sp -44 -T}:T{ -.sp -for blue background -T} -T{ -.sp -45 -T}:T{ -.sp -for purple background -T} -T{ -.sp -46 -T}:T{ -.sp -for cyan background -T} -T{ -.sp -47 -T}:T{ -.sp -for white (or gray) background -T} -.TE -.sp -.br -.RE -.ll -.SS "Escape sequences" -.sp -To specify control or blank characters in the color sequences, C\-style \(rs\-escaped notation can be used: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rsa\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Bell (ASCII 7) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rsb\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Backspace (ASCII 8) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rse\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Escape (ASCII 27) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rsf\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Form feed (ASCII 12) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rsn\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Newline (ASCII 10) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rsr\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Carriage Return (ASCII 13) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rst\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Tab (ASCII 9) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rsv\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Vertical Tab (ASCII 11) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rs?\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Delete (ASCII 127) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rs_\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Space -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rs\(rs\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Backslash (\(rs) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rs^\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Caret (^) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB\(rs#\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -Hash mark (#) -T} -.TE -.sp -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Please note that escapes are necessary to enter a space, backslash, caret, or any control character anywhere in the string, as well as a hash mark as the first character. -.sp -For example, to use a red background for alert messages in the output of \fBdmesg\fP(1), use: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBecho \(aqalert 37;41\(aq >> /etc/terminal\-colors.d/dmesg.scheme\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.SS "Comments" -.sp -Lines where the first non\-blank character is a # (hash) are ignored. Any other use of the hash character is not interpreted as introducing a comment. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -TERMINAL_COLORS_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables debug output. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/terminal\-colors.d\fP -.sp -\fI$HOME/.config/terminal\-colors.d\fP -.sp -\fI/etc/terminal\-colors.d\fP -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -Disable colors for all compatible utilities: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBtouch /etc/terminal\-colors.d/disable\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Disable colors for all compatible utils on a vt100 terminal: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBtouch /etc/terminal\-colors.d/@vt100.disable\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Disable colors for all compatible utils except \fBdmesg\fP(1): -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBtouch /etc/terminal\-colors.d/disable\fP -.sp -\fBtouch /etc/terminal\-colors.d/dmesg.enable\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.SH "COMPATIBILITY" -.sp -The terminal\-colors.d functionality is currently supported by all util\-linux utilities which provides colorized output. For more details always see the COLORS section in the man page for the utility. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -\fBterminal\-colors.d\fP is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/tmpfiles.d.5 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/tmpfiles.d.5 index b5451825..89b488b0 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/tmpfiles.d.5 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man5/tmpfiles.d.5 @@ -523,8 +523,8 @@ Optionally, if prefixed with "~", the access mode is masked based on the already set access bits for existing file or directories: if the existing file has all executable bits unset, all executable bits are removed from the new access mode, too\&. Similarly, if all read bits are removed from the old access mode, they will be removed from the new access mode too, and if all write bits are removed, they will be removed from the new access mode too\&. In addition, the sticky/SUID/SGID bit is removed unless applied to a directory\&. This functionality is particularly useful in conjunction with \fIZ\fR\&. .PP -Optionally, if prefixed with -":", the configured access mode is only used when creating new inodes\&. If the inode the line refers to already exists, its access mode is left in place unmodified\&. +By default the access mode of listed inodes is set to the specified mode regardless if it is created anew, or already existed\&. Optionally, if prefixed with +":", the configured access mode is only applied when creating new inodes, and if the inode the line refers to already exists, its access mode is left in place unmodified\&. .SS "User, Group" .PP The user and group to use for this file or directory\&. This may either be a numeric ID or a user/group name\&. If omitted or when set to @@ -548,8 +548,8 @@ This field should generally only reference system users/groups, i\&.e\&. users/g \m[blue]\fBNotes on Resolvability of User and Group Names\fR\m[]\&\s-2\u[3]\d\s+2 for more information on requirements on system user/group definitions\&. .PP -Optionally, if prefixed with -":", the configured user/group information is only used when creating new inodes\&. If the inode the line refers to already exists, its user/group is left in place unmodified\&. +By default the ownership of listed inodes is set to the specified user/group regardless if it is created anew, or already existed\&. Optionally, if prefixed with +":", the configured user/group information is only applied when creating new inodes, and if the inode the line refers to already exists, its user/group is left in place unmodified\&. .SS "Age" .PP The date field, when set, is used to decide what files to delete when cleaning\&. If a file or directory is older than the current time minus the age field, it is deleted\&. The field format is a series of integers each followed by one of the following suffixes for the respective time units: @@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ d /tmp/foo/bar \- \- \- bmA:1h \- .\} .PP Note that while the aging algorithm is run an exclusive BSD file lock (see -\fBflock\fR(2)) is taken on each directory/file the algorithm decides to remove\&. If the aging algorithm finds a lock ( shared or exclusive) is already taken on some directory/file, it (and everything below it) is skipped\&. Applications may use this to temporarily exclude certain directory subtrees from the aging algorithm: the applications can take a BSD file lock themselves, and as long as they keep it aging of the directory/file and everything below it is disabled\&. +\fBflock\fR(2)) is taken on each directory/file the algorithm decides to remove\&. If the aging algorithm finds a lock (shared or exclusive) is already taken on some directory/file, it (and everything below it) is skipped\&. Applications may use this to temporarily exclude certain directory subtrees from the aging algorithm: the applications can take a BSD file lock themselves, and as long as they keep it aging of the directory/file and everything below it is disabled\&. .PP This behavior can be used to ensure guaranteed cleanup of files or directories whose lifetime should be aligned with the process that created them by having that process create them in a location monitored by \fBsystemd\-tmpfiles\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/kernel-command-line.7 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/kernel-command-line.7 index a1a4c578..154bb401 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/kernel-command-line.7 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/kernel-command-line.7 @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ For command line parameters understood by the initrd, see \fBdracut.cmdline\fR(7), or the documentation of the specific initrd implementation of your installation\&. .SH "CORE OS COMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS" .PP -\fIsystemd\&.unit=\fR, \fIrd\&.systemd\&.unit=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.dump_core\fR, \fIsystemd\&.crash_chvt\fR, \fIsystemd\&.crash_shell\fR, \fIsystemd\&.crash_reboot\fR, \fIsystemd\&.confirm_spawn\fR, \fIsystemd\&.service_watchdogs\fR, \fIsystemd\&.show_status\fR, \fIsystemd\&.status_unit_format=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.log_target=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.log_level=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.log_location=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.log_color\fR, \fIsystemd\&.log_ratelimit_kmsg\fR, \fIsystemd\&.default_standard_output=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.default_standard_error=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.setenv=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.machine_id=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.set_credential=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.set_credential_binary=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.import_credentials=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.reload_limit_interval_sec=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.reload_limit_burst=\fR +\fIsystemd\&.unit=\fR, \fIrd\&.systemd\&.unit=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.dump_core\fR, \fIsystemd\&.crash_chvt\fR, \fIsystemd\&.crash_shell\fR, \fIsystemd\&.crash_reboot\fR, \fIsystemd\&.confirm_spawn\fR, \fIsystemd\&.service_watchdogs\fR, \fIsystemd\&.show_status\fR, \fIsystemd\&.status_unit_format=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.log_target=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.log_level=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.log_location=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.log_color\fR, \fIsystemd\&.log_ratelimit_kmsg\fR, \fIsystemd\&.default_standard_output=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.default_standard_error=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.setenv=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.machine_id=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.unified_cgroup_hierarchy\fR, \fIsystemd\&.set_credential=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.set_credential_binary=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.import_credentials=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.reload_limit_interval_sec=\fR, \fIsystemd\&.reload_limit_burst=\fR .RS 4 Parameters understood by the system and service manager to control system behavior\&. For details, see \fBsystemd\fR(1)\&. @@ -397,16 +397,6 @@ on the kernel command line\&. The tty name should be specified without the prefix (e\&.g\&. "systemd\&.tty\&.rows\&.ttyS0=80")\&. .RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.PP -systemd 252 -.RS 4 -Kernel command\-line arguments -\fIsystemd\&.unified_cgroup_hierarchy\fR -and -\fIsystemd\&.legacy_systemd_cgroup_controller\fR -were deprecated\&. Please switch to the unified cgroup hierarchy\&. -.RE .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP \fBsystemd\fR(1), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/nfs.systemd.7 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/nfs.systemd.7 index 01801ebb..df89ddd1 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/nfs.systemd.7 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/nfs.systemd.7 @@ -27,7 +27,9 @@ any command line arguments to daemons so as to configure their behavior. In many case such configuration can be performed by making changes to .I /etc/nfs.conf -or other configuration files. When that is not convenient, a +or other configuration files (see +.BR nfs.conf (5)). +When that is not convenient, a distribution might provide systemd "drop-in" files which replace the .B ExecStart= setting to start the program with different arguments. For example a @@ -79,7 +81,7 @@ unit should be enabled. Several other units which might be considered to be optional, such as .I rpc-gssd.service are careful to only start if the required configuration file exists. -.I rpc-gsdd.service +.I rpc-gssd.service will not start if the .I krb5.keytab file does not exist (typically in @@ -120,10 +122,11 @@ be needed to reduce system load to an absolute minimum, or to reduce attack surface by not running daemons that are not absolutely required. .PP -Two particular services which this can apply to are -.I rpcbind +Three particular services which this can apply to are +.IR rpcbind , +.IR idmapd , and -.IR idmapd . +.IR rpc-gssd . .I rpcbind is not part of the .I nfs-utils @@ -155,12 +158,27 @@ is not needed and not wanted, it can be masked with .RS .B systemctl mask idmapd .RE +.I rpc-gssd +is assumed to be needed if the +.I krb5.keytab +file is present. If a site needs this file present but does not want +.I rpc-gssd +running, it can be masked with +.RS +.B systemctl mask rpc-gssd +.RE .SH FILES /etc/nfs.conf .br /etc/nfsmount.conf .br /etc/idmapd.conf +.P +Also similar files in +.B /usr/etc +and in related +.I conf.d +drop-in directories. .SH SEE ALSO .BR systemd.unit (5), .BR nfs.conf (5), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/nfsd.7 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/nfsd.7 index 0c516fa1..514153f0 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/nfsd.7 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/nfsd.7 @@ -13,14 +13,8 @@ nfsd \- special filesystem for controlling Linux NFS server The .B nfsd filesystem is a special filesystem which provides access to the Linux -NFS server. The filesystem consists of a single directory which -contains a number of files. These files are actually gateways into -the NFS server. Writing to them can affect the server. Reading from -them can provide information about the server. -.P -This file system is only available in Linux 2.6 and later series -kernels (and in the later parts of the 2.5 development series leading -up to 2.6). This man page does not apply to 2.4 and earlier. +NFS server. Writing to files in this filesystem can affect the server. +Reading from them can provide information about the server. .P As well as this filesystem, there are a collection of files in the .B procfs @@ -38,13 +32,10 @@ filesystem mounted at .B /proc/fs/nfsd or .BR /proc/fs/nfs . -If it is not mounted, they will fall-back on 2.4 style functionality. -This involves accessing the NFS server via a systemcall. This -systemcall is scheduled to be removed after the 2.6 kernel series. .SH DETAILS -The three files in the +Files in the .B nfsd -filesystem are: +filesystem include: .TP .B exports This file contains a list of filesystems that are currently exported @@ -90,6 +81,16 @@ for that path as exported to the given client. The filehandle's length will be at most the number of bytes given. The filehandle will be represented in hex with a leading '\ex'. + +.TP +.B clients/ +This directory contains a subdirectory for each NFSv4 client. Each file +under that subdirectory gives some details about the client in YAML +format. In addition, writing "expire\\n" to the +.B ctl +file will force the server to immediately revoke all state held by that +client. + .PP The directory .B /proc/net/rpc @@ -105,11 +106,6 @@ clients have for different filesystems. The caches are: .TP -.B auth.domain -This cache maps the name of a client (or domain) to an internal data -structure. The only access that is possible is to flush the cache. - -.TP .B auth.unix.ip This cache contains a mapping from IP address to the name of the authentication domain that the ipaddress should be treated as part of. @@ -133,7 +129,8 @@ are: .B flush When a number of seconds since epoch (1 Jan 1970) is written to this file, all entries in the cache that were last updated before that file -become invalidated and will be flushed out. Writing 1 will flush +become invalidated and will be flushed out. Writing a time in the +future (in seconds since epoch) will flush everything. This is the only file that will always be present. .TP @@ -195,6 +192,16 @@ number represents a bit-pattern where bits that are set cause certain classes of tracing to be enabled. Consult the kernel header files to find out what number correspond to what tracing. +.SH NOTES +This file system is only available in Linux 2.6 and later series +kernels (and in the later parts of the 2.5 development series leading +up to 2.6). This man page does not apply to 2.4 and earlier. +.P +Previously the nfsctl systemcall was used for communication between nfsd +and user utilities. That systemcall was removed in kernel version 3.1. +Older nfs-utils versions were able to fall back to nfsctl if necessary; +that was removed from nfs-utils 1.3.5. + .SH SEE ALSO .BR nfsd (8), .BR rpc.nfsd (8), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/systemd.directives.7 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/systemd.directives.7 index dcd900ce..e33895c6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/systemd.directives.7 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/systemd.directives.7 @@ -3108,6 +3108,12 @@ Kernel boot options for configuring the behaviour of the systemd process\&. \fBkernel-command-line\fR(7) .RE .PP +\fIsystemd\&.unified_cgroup_hierarchy\fR +.RS 4 +\fBkernel-command-line\fR(7), +\fBsystemd\fR(1) +.RE +.PP \fIsystemd\&.unit=\fR .RS 4 \fBkernel-command-line\fR(7), @@ -7704,6 +7710,11 @@ Fields in the journal events with a well known meaning\&. \fBsystemd-coredump\fR(8) .RE .PP +\fICOREDUMP_CMDLINE=\fR +.RS 4 +\fBsystemd-coredump\fR(8) +.RE +.PP \fICOREDUMP_COMM=\fR .RS 4 \fBsystemd-coredump\fR(8) @@ -7774,6 +7785,16 @@ Fields in the journal events with a well known meaning\&. \fBsystemd-coredump\fR(8) .RE .PP +\fICOREDUMP_PROC_AUXV=\fR +.RS 4 +\fBsystemd-coredump\fR(8) +.RE +.PP +\fICOREDUMP_PROC_CGROUP=\fR +.RS 4 +\fBsystemd-coredump\fR(8) +.RE +.PP \fICOREDUMP_PROC_LIMITS=\fR .RS 4 \fBsystemd-coredump\fR(8) @@ -7804,6 +7825,11 @@ Fields in the journal events with a well known meaning\&. \fBsystemd-coredump\fR(8) .RE .PP +\fICOREDUMP_SESSION=\fR +.RS 4 +\fBsystemd-coredump\fR(8) +.RE +.PP \fICOREDUMP_SIGNAL=\fR .RS 4 \fBsystemd-coredump\fR(8) @@ -13703,6 +13729,7 @@ Command\-line options accepted by programs in the systemd suite\&. \fBmachinectl\fR(1), \fBportablectl\fR(1), \fBsystemctl\fR(1), +\fBsystemd-analyze\fR(1), \fBsystemd-creds\fR(1), \fBsystemd-detect-virt\fR(1), \fBsystemd-mount\fR(1), @@ -17484,6 +17511,16 @@ Various constants used and/or defined by systemd\&. \fBsystemd-gpt-auto-generator\fR(8) .RE .PP +\fBSD_GPT_ROOT_MIPS\fR +.RS 4 +\fBsystemd-gpt-auto-generator\fR(8) +.RE +.PP +\fBSD_GPT_ROOT_MIPS64\fR +.RS 4 +\fBsystemd-gpt-auto-generator\fR(8) +.RE +.PP \fBSD_GPT_ROOT_MIPS64_LE\fR .RS 4 \fBsystemd-gpt-auto-generator\fR(8) @@ -22320,6 +22357,7 @@ $XDG_RUNTIME_DIR/user\-tmpfiles\&.d/*\&.conf .PP /etc/systemd/nspawn/ .RS 4 +\fBmachinectl\fR(1), \fBsystemd-nspawn\fR(1), \fBsystemd.nspawn\fR(5) .RE @@ -22899,11 +22937,22 @@ $XDG_RUNTIME_DIR/user\-tmpfiles\&.d/*\&.conf /run/ .RS 4 \fBbinfmt.d\fR(5), +\fBcoredump.conf\fR(5), \fBcrypttab\fR(5), \fBenvironment.d\fR(5), \fBfile-hierarchy\fR(7), +\fBhomed.conf\fR(5), +\fBiocost.conf\fR(5), +\fBjournal-remote.conf\fR(5), +\fBjournal-upload.conf\fR(5), +\fBjournald.conf\fR(5), +\fBlogind.conf\fR(5), \fBmodules-load.d\fR(5), +\fBnetworkd.conf\fR(5), +\fBoomd.conf\fR(5), \fBorg.freedesktop.systemd1\fR(5), +\fBpstore.conf\fR(5), +\fBresolved.conf\fR(5), \fBsd-login\fR(3), \fBsd_notify\fR(3), \fBsysctl.d\fR(5), @@ -22913,7 +22962,9 @@ $XDG_RUNTIME_DIR/user\-tmpfiles\&.d/*\&.conf \fBsystemd-modules-load.service\fR(8), \fBsystemd-nspawn\fR(1), \fBsystemd-poweroff.service\fR(8), +\fBsystemd-sleep.conf\fR(5), \fBsystemd-soft-reboot.service\fR(8), +\fBsystemd-system.conf\fR(5), \fBsystemd-timedated.service\fR(8), \fBsystemd.dnssd\fR(5), \fBsystemd.environment-generator\fR(7), @@ -22925,6 +22976,7 @@ $XDG_RUNTIME_DIR/user\-tmpfiles\&.d/*\&.conf \fBsystemd.preset\fR(5), \fBsystemd.service\fR(5), \fBsystemd.unit\fR(5), +\fBtimesyncd.conf\fR(5), \fBtmpfiles.d\fR(5), \fBudev\fR(7) .RE @@ -23195,7 +23247,7 @@ $XDG_RUNTIME_DIR/user\-tmpfiles\&.d/*\&.conf \fBsystemd\fR(1) .RE .PP -/run/systemd/propagate +/run/systemd/propagate/ .RS 4 \fBsystemd.exec\fR(5) .RE @@ -29376,11 +29428,26 @@ Properties exposed in the D\-Bus interface\&. \fBorg.freedesktop.systemd1\fR(5) .RE .PP +\fIEffectiveMemoryHigh\fR +.RS 4 +\fBorg.freedesktop.systemd1\fR(5) +.RE +.PP +\fIEffectiveMemoryMax\fR +.RS 4 +\fBorg.freedesktop.systemd1\fR(5) +.RE +.PP \fIEffectiveMemoryNodes\fR .RS 4 \fBorg.freedesktop.systemd1\fR(5) .RE .PP +\fIEffectiveTasksMax\fR +.RS 4 +\fBorg.freedesktop.systemd1\fR(5) +.RE +.PP \fIEnableWallMessages\fR .RS 4 \fBorg.freedesktop.login1\fR(5) @@ -32587,4 +32654,4 @@ Signals emitted in the D\-Bus interface\&. .RE .SH "COLOPHON" .PP -This index contains 5817 entries in 24 sections, referring to 385 individual manual pages\&. +This index contains 5827 entries in 24 sections, referring to 385 individual manual pages\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/systemd.net-naming-scheme.7 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/systemd.net-naming-scheme.7 index 1f291731..028c3638 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/systemd.net-naming-scheme.7 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man7/systemd.net-naming-scheme.7 @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Note that while the concept of network interface naming schemes is primarily rel systemd\-udevd\&.service, the \fBsystemd-nspawn\fR(1) container manager also takes it into account when naming network interfaces, see below\&. -.SH "NAMING" +.SH "POLICIES" .PP All names start with a two\-character prefix that signifies the interface type\&. .sp diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/addpart.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/addpart.8 deleted file mode 100644 index e389db67..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/addpart.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: addpart -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "ADDPART" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -addpart \- tell the kernel about the existence of a partition -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBaddpart\fP \fIdevice partition start length\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBaddpart\fP tells the Linux kernel about the existence of the specified partition. The command is a simple wrapper around the "add partition" ioctl. -.sp -This command doesn\(cqt manipulate partitions on a block device. -.SH "PARAMETERS" -.sp -\fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -The disk device. -.RE -.sp -\fIpartition\fP -.RS 4 -The partition number. -.RE -.sp -\fIstart\fP -.RS 4 -The beginning of the partition (in 512\-byte sectors). -.RE -.sp -\fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -The length of the partition (in 512\-byte sectors). -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBdelpart\fP(8), -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBaddpart\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/agetty.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/agetty.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 220d01ee..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/agetty.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,593 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: agetty -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "AGETTY" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -agetty \- alternative Linux getty -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBagetty\fP [options] \fIport\fP [\fIbaud_rate\fP...] [\fIterm\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBagetty\fP opens a tty port, prompts for a login name and invokes the /bin/login command. It is normally invoked by \fBinit\fP(8). -.sp -\fBagetty\fP has several \fInon\-standard\fP features that are useful for hardwired and for dial\-in lines: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Adapts the tty settings to parity bits and to erase, kill, end\-of\-line and uppercase characters when it reads a login name. The program can handle 7\-bit characters with even, odd, none or space parity, and 8\-bit characters with no parity. The following special characters are recognized: Control\-U (kill); DEL and backspace (erase); carriage return and line feed (end of line). See also the \fB\-\-erase\-chars\fP and \fB\-\-kill\-chars\fP options. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally deduces the baud rate from the CONNECT messages produced by Hayes(tm)\-compatible modems. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally does not hang up when it is given an already opened line (useful for call\-back applications). -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally does not display the contents of the \fI/etc/issue\fP file. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally displays an alternative issue files or directories instead of \fI/etc/issue\fP or \fI/etc/issue.d\fP. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally does not ask for a login name. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally invokes a non\-standard login program instead of \fI/bin/login\fP. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally turns on hardware flow control. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Optionally forces the line to be local with no need for carrier detect. -.RE -.sp -This program does not use the \fI/etc/gettydefs\fP (System V) or \fI/etc/gettytab\fP (SunOS 4) files. -.SH "ARGUMENTS" -.sp -\fIport\fP -.RS 4 -A path name relative to the \fI/dev\fP directory. If a "\-" is specified, \fBagetty\fP assumes that its standard input is already connected to a tty port and that a connection to a remote user has already been established. -.sp -Under System V, a "\-" \fIport\fP argument should be preceded by a "\-\-". -.RE -.sp -\fIbaud_rate\fP,... -.RS 4 -A comma\-separated list of one or more baud rates. Each time \fBagetty\fP receives a BREAK character it advances through the list, which is treated as if it were circular. -.sp -Baud rates should be specified in descending order, so that the null character (Ctrl\-@) can also be used for baud\-rate switching. -.sp -This argument is optional and unnecessary for \fBvirtual terminals\fP. -.sp -The default for \fBserial terminals\fP is keep the current baud rate (see \fB\-\-keep\-baud\fP) and if unsuccessful then default to \(aq9600\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fIterm\fP -.RS 4 -The value to be used for the \fBTERM\fP environment variable. This overrides whatever \fBinit\fP(1) may have set, and is inherited by login and the shell. -.sp -The default is \(aqvt100\(aq, or \(aqlinux\(aq for Linux on a virtual terminal, or \(aqhurd\(aq for GNU Hurd on a virtual terminal. -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-8\fP, \fB\-\-8bits\fP -.RS 4 -Assume that the tty is 8\-bit clean, hence disable parity detection. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-autologin\fP \fIusername\fP -.RS 4 -Automatically log in the specified user without asking for a username or password. Using this option causes an \fB\-f\fP \fIusername\fP option and argument to be added to the \fB/bin/login\fP command line. See \fB\-\-login\-options\fP, which can be used to modify this option\(cqs behavior. -.sp -Note that \fB\-\-autologin\fP may affect the way in which \fBgetty\fP initializes the serial line, because on auto\-login \fBagetty\fP does not read from the line and it has no opportunity optimize the line setting. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-noreset\fP -.RS 4 -Do not reset terminal cflags (control modes). See \fBtermios\fP(3) for more details. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-E\fP, \fB\-\-remote\fP -.RS 4 -Typically the \fBlogin\fP(1) command is given a remote hostname when called by something such as \fBtelnetd\fP(8). This option allows \fBagetty\fP to pass what it is using for a hostname to \fBlogin\fP(1) for use in \fButmp\fP(5). See \fB\-\-host\fP, \fBlogin\fP(1), and \fButmp\fP(5). -.sp -If the \fB\-\-host\fP \fIfakehost\fP option is given, then an \fB\-h\fP \fIfakehost\fP option and argument are added to the \fI/bin/login\fP command line. -.sp -If the \fB\-\-nohostname\fP option is given, then an \fB\-H\fP option is added to the \fB/bin/login\fP command line. -.sp -See \fB\-\-login\-options\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-issue\-file\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies a ":" delimited list of files and directories to be displayed instead of \fI/etc/issue\fP (or other). All specified files and directories are displayed, missing or empty files are silently ignored. If the specified path is a directory then display all files with .issue file extension in version\-sort order from the directory. This allows custom messages to be displayed on different terminals. The \fB\-\-noissue\fP option will override this option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-show\-issue\fP -.RS 4 -Display the current issue file (or other) on the current terminal and exit. Use this option to review the current setting, it is not designed for any other purpose. Note that output may use some default or incomplete information as proper output depends on terminal and agetty command line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h, \-\-flow\-control\fP -.RS 4 -Enable hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control. It is left up to the application to disable software (XON/XOFF) flow protocol where appropriate. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-H\fP, \fB\-\-host\fP \fIfakehost\fP -.RS 4 -Write the specified \fIfakehost\fP into the utmp file. Normally, no login host is given, since \fBagetty\fP is used for local hardwired connections and consoles. However, this option can be useful for identifying terminal concentrators and the like. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-noissue\fP -.RS 4 -Do not display the contents of \fI/etc/issue\fP (or other) before writing the login prompt. Terminals or communications hardware may become confused when receiving lots of text at the wrong baud rate; dial\-up scripts may fail if the login prompt is preceded by too much text. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-init\-string\fP \fIinitstring\fP -.RS 4 -Set an initial string to be sent to the tty or modem before sending anything else. This may be used to initialize a modem. Non\-printable characters may be sent by writing their octal code preceded by a backslash (\(rs). For example, to send a linefeed character (ASCII 10, octal 012), write \(rs12. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-noclear\fP -.RS 4 -Do not clear the screen before prompting for the login name. By default the screen is cleared. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-login\-program\fP \fIlogin_program\fP -.RS 4 -Invoke the specified \fIlogin_program\fP instead of /bin/login. This allows the use of a non\-standard login program. Such a program could, for example, ask for a dial\-up password or use a different password file. See \fB\-\-login\-options\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-local\-line\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Control the CLOCAL line flag. The optional \fImode\fP argument is \(aqauto\(aq, \(aqalways\(aq or \(aqnever\(aq. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, then the default is \(aqalways\(aq. If the \fB\-\-local\-line\fP option is not given at all, then the default is \(aqauto\(aq. -.sp -\fIalways\fP -.RS 4 -Forces the line to be a local line with no need for carrier detect. This can be useful when you have a locally attached terminal where the serial line does not set the carrier\-detect signal. -.RE -.sp -\fInever\fP -.RS 4 -Explicitly clears the CLOCAL flag from the line setting and the carrier\-detect signal is expected on the line. -.RE -.sp -\fIauto\fP -.RS 4 -The \fBagetty\fP default. Does not modify the CLOCAL setting and follows the setting enabled by the kernel. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-extract\-baud\fP -.RS 4 -Try to extract the baud rate from the CONNECT status message produced by Hayes(tm)\-compatible modems. These status messages are of the form: "<junk><speed><junk>". \fBagetty\fP assumes that the modem emits its status message at the same speed as specified with (the first) \fIbaud_rate\fP value on the command line. -.sp -Since the \fB\-\-extract\-baud\fP feature may fail on heavily\-loaded systems, you still should enable BREAK processing by enumerating all expected baud rates on the command line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-list\-speeds\fP -.RS 4 -Display supported baud rates. These are determined at compilation time. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-skip\-login\fP -.RS 4 -Do not prompt the user for a login name. This can be used in connection with the \fB\-\-login\-program\fP option to invoke a non\-standard login process such as a BBS system. Note that with the \fB\-\-skip\-login\fP option, \fBagetty\fP gets no input from the user who logs in and therefore will not be able to figure out parity, character size, and newline processing of the connection. It defaults to space parity, 7 bit characters, and ASCII CR (13) end\-of\-line character. Beware that the program that \fBagetty\fP starts (usually /bin/login) is run as root. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-nonewline\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a newline before writing out \fI/etc/issue\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-login\-options\fP \fIlogin_options\fP -.RS 4 -Options and arguments that are passed to \fBlogin\fP(1). Where \(rsu is replaced by the login name. For example: -.sp -\fB\-\-login\-options \(aq\-h darkstar \(em \(rsu\(aq\fP -.sp -See \fB\-\-autologin\fP, \fB\-\-login\-program\fP and \fB\-\-remote\fP. -.sp -Please read the SECURITY NOTICE below before using this option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-login\-pause\fP -.RS 4 -Wait for any key before dropping to the login prompt. Can be combined with \fB\-\-autologin\fP to save memory by lazily spawning shells. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-chroot\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Change root to the specified directory. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-hangup\fP -.RS 4 -Call \fBvhangup\fP(2) to do a virtual hangup of the specified terminal. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-keep\-baud\fP -.RS 4 -Try to keep the existing baud rate. The baud rates from the command line are used when \fBagetty\fP receives a BREAK character. If another baud rates specified then the original baud rate is also saved to the end of the wanted baud rates list. This can be used to return to the original baud rate after unexpected BREAKs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-timeout\fP \fItimeout\fP -.RS 4 -Terminate if no user name could be read within \fItimeout\fP seconds. Use of this option with hardwired terminal lines is not recommended. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-detect\-case\fP -.RS 4 -Turn on support for detecting an uppercase\-only terminal. This setting will detect a login name containing only capitals as indicating an uppercase\-only terminal and turn on some upper\-to\-lower case conversions. Note that this has no support for any Unicode characters. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wait\-cr\fP -.RS 4 -Wait for the user or the modem to send a carriage\-return or a linefeed character before sending the \fI/etc/issue\fP file (or others) and the login prompt. This is useful with the \fB\-\-init\-string\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-nohints\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print hints about Num, Caps and Scroll Locks. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-nohostname\fP -.RS 4 -By default the hostname will be printed. With this option enabled, no hostname at all will be shown. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-long\-hostname\fP -.RS 4 -By default the hostname is only printed until the first dot. With this option enabled, the fully qualified hostname by \fBgethostname\fP(3P) or (if not found) by \fBgetaddrinfo\fP(3) is shown. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-erase\-chars\fP \fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -This option specifies additional characters that should be interpreted as a backspace ("ignore the previous character") when the user types the login name. The default additional \(aqerase\(aq has been \(aq#\(aq, but since util\-linux 2.23 no additional erase characters are enabled by default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-kill\-chars\fP \fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -This option specifies additional characters that should be interpreted as a kill ("ignore all previous characters") when the user types the login name. The default additional \(aqkill\(aq has been \(aq@\(aq, but since util\-linux 2.23 no additional kill characters are enabled by default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-chdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Change directory before the login. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-delay\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Sleep seconds before open tty. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-nice\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Run login with this priority. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-reload\fP -.RS 4 -Ask all running agetty instances to reload and update their displayed prompts, if the user has not yet commenced logging in. After doing so the command will exit. This feature might be unsupported on systems without Linux \fBinotify\fP(7). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -This section shows examples for the process field of an entry in the \fI/etc/inittab\fP file. You\(cqll have to prepend appropriate values for the other fields. See \fBinittab\fP(5) for more details. -.sp -For a hardwired line or a console tty: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/sbin/agetty 9600 ttyS1\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -For a directly connected terminal without proper carrier\-detect wiring (try this if your terminal just sleeps instead of giving you a password: prompt): -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/sbin/agetty \-\-local\-line 9600 ttyS1 vt100\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -For an old\-style dial\-in line with a 9600/2400/1200 baud modem: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/sbin/agetty \-\-extract\-baud \-\-timeout 60 ttyS1 9600,2400,1200\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -For a Hayes modem with a fixed 115200 bps interface to the machine (the example init string turns off modem echo and result codes, makes modem/computer DCD track modem/modem DCD, makes a DTR drop cause a disconnection, and turns on auto\-answer after 1 ring): -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/sbin/agetty \-\-wait\-cr \-\-init\-string \(aqATE0Q1&D2&C1S0=1\(rs015\(aq 115200 ttyS1\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.SH "SECURITY NOTICE" -.sp -If you use the \fB\-\-login\-program\fP and \fB\-\-login\-options\fP options, be aware that a malicious user may try to enter lognames with embedded options, which then get passed to the used login program. Agetty does check for a leading "\-" and makes sure the logname gets passed as one parameter (so embedded spaces will not create yet another parameter), but depending on how the login binary parses the command line that might not be sufficient. Check that the used login program cannot be abused this way. -.sp -Some programs use "\-\-" to indicate that the rest of the command line should not be interpreted as options. Use this feature if available by passing "\-\-" before the username gets passed by \(rsu. -.SH "ISSUE FILES" -.sp -The default issue file is \fI/etc/issue\fP. If the file exists, then \fBagetty\fP also checks for \fI/etc/issue.d\fP directory. The directory is optional extension to the default issue file and content of the directory is printed after \fI/etc/issue\fP content. If the \fI/etc/issue\fP does not exist, then the directory is ignored. All files \fBwith .issue extension\fP from the directory are printed in version\-sort order. The directory can be used to maintain 3rd\-party messages independently on the primary system \fI/etc/issue\fP file. -.sp -Since version 2.35 additional locations for issue file and directory are supported. If the default \fI/etc/issue\fP does not exist, then \fBagetty\fP checks for \fI/run/issue\fP and \fI/run/issue.d\fP, thereafter for \fI/usr/lib/issue\fP and \fI/usr/lib/issue.d\fP. The directory \fI/etc\fP is expected for host specific configuration, \fI/run\fP is expected for generated stuff and \fI/usr/lib\fP for static distribution maintained configuration. -.sp -The default path maybe overridden by \fB\-\-issue\-file\fP option. In this case specified path has to be file or directory and all the default issue file and directory locations are ignored. -.sp -The issue file feature can be completely disabled by \fB\-\-noissue\fP option. -.sp -It is possible to review the current issue file by \fBagetty \-\-show\-issue\fP on the current terminal. -.sp -The issue files may contain certain escape codes to display the system name, date, time et cetera. All escape codes consist of a backslash (\(rs) immediately followed by one of the characters listed below. -.sp -4 or 4{\fIinterface\fP} -.RS 4 -Insert the IPv4 address of the specified network interface (for example: \(rs4{eth0}). If the \fIinterface\fP argument is not specified, then select the first fully configured (UP, non\-LOCALBACK, RUNNING) interface. If not any configured interface is found, fall back to the IP address of the machine\(cqs hostname. -.RE -.sp -6 or 6{\fIinterface\fP} -.RS 4 -The same as \(rs4 but for IPv6. -.RE -.sp -b -.RS 4 -Insert the baudrate of the current line. -.RE -.sp -d -.RS 4 -Insert the current date. -.RE -.sp -e or e{\fIname\fP} -.RS 4 -Translate the human\-readable \fIname\fP to an escape sequence and insert it (for example: \(rse{red}Alert text.\(rse{reset}). If the \fIname\fP argument is not specified, then insert \(rs033. The currently supported names are: black, blink, blue, bold, brown, cyan, darkgray, gray, green, halfbright, lightblue, lightcyan, lightgray, lightgreen, lightmagenta, lightred, magenta, red, reset, reverse, yellow and white. All unknown names are silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -s -.RS 4 -Insert the system name (the name of the operating system). Same as \(aquname \-s\(aq. See also the \(rsS escape code. -.RE -.sp -S or S{VARIABLE} -.RS 4 -Insert the VARIABLE data from \fI/etc/os\-release\fP. If this file does not exist then fall back to \fI/usr/lib/os\-release\fP. If the VARIABLE argument is not specified, then use PRETTY_NAME from the file or the system name (see \(rss). This escape code can be used to keep \fI/etc/issue\fP distribution and release independent. Note that \(rsS{ANSI_COLOR} is converted to the real terminal escape sequence. -.RE -.sp -l -.RS 4 -Insert the name of the current tty line. -.RE -.sp -m -.RS 4 -Insert the architecture identifier of the machine. Same as \fBuname \-m\fP. -.RE -.sp -n -.RS 4 -Insert the nodename of the machine, also known as the hostname. Same as \fBuname \-n\fP. -.RE -.sp -o -.RS 4 -Insert the NIS domainname of the machine. Same as \fBhostname \-d\fP. -.RE -.sp -O -.RS 4 -Insert the DNS domainname of the machine. -.RE -.sp -r -.RS 4 -Insert the release number of the OS. Same as \fBuname \-r\fP. -.RE -.sp -t -.RS 4 -Insert the current time. -.RE -.sp -u -.RS 4 -Insert the number of current users logged in. -.RE -.sp -U -.RS 4 -Insert the string "1 user" or "<n> users" where <n> is the number of current users logged in. -.RE -.sp -v -.RS 4 -Insert the version of the OS, that is, the build\-date and such. -.RE -.sp -An example. On my system, the following \fI/etc/issue\fP file: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -This is \(rsn.\(rso (\(rss \(rsm \(rsr) \(rst -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -displays as: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -This is thingol.orcan.dk (Linux i386 1.1.9) 18:29:30 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/var/run/utmp\fP -.RS 4 -the system status file. -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/issue\fP -.RS 4 -printed before the login prompt. -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/os\-release /usr/lib/os\-release\fP -.RS 4 -operating system identification data. -.RE -.sp -\fI/dev/console\fP -.RS 4 -problem reports (if \fBsyslog\fP(3) is not used). -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/inittab\fP -.RS 4 -\fBinit\fP(8) configuration file for SysV\-style init daemon. -.RE -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -The baud\-rate detection feature (the \fB\-\-extract\-baud\fP option) requires that \fBagetty\fP be scheduled soon enough after completion of a dial\-in call (within 30 ms with modems that talk at 2400 baud). For robustness, always use the \fB\-\-extract\-baud\fP option in combination with a multiple baud rate command\-line argument, so that BREAK processing is enabled. -.sp -The text in the \fI/etc/issue\fP file (or other) and the login prompt are always output with 7\-bit characters and space parity. -.sp -The baud\-rate detection feature (the \fB\-\-extract\-baud\fP option) requires that the modem emits its status message \fIafter\fP raising the DCD line. -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -.sp -Depending on how the program was configured, all diagnostics are written to the console device or reported via the \fBsyslog\fP(3) facility. Error messages are produced if the \fIport\fP argument does not specify a terminal device; if there is no utmp entry for the current process (System V only); and so on. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "werner\(atsuse.de" "Werner Fink" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.sp -The original \fBagetty\fP for serial terminals was written by \c -.MTO "wietse\(atwzv.win.tue.nl" "W.Z. Venema" "" -and ported to Linux by -.MTO "poe\(atdaimi.aau.dk" "Peter Orbaek" "." -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBagetty\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkdiscard.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkdiscard.8 deleted file mode 100644 index a8048510..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkdiscard.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,105 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: blkdiscard -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "BLKDISCARD" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -blkdiscard \- discard sectors on a device -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBblkdiscard\fP [options] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] [\fB\-l\fP \fIlength\fP] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBblkdiscard\fP is used to discard device sectors. This is useful for solid\-state drivers (SSDs) and thinly\-provisioned storage. Unlike \fBfstrim\fP(8), this command is used directly on the block device. -.sp -By default, \fBblkdiscard\fP will discard all blocks on the device. Options may be used to modify this behavior based on range or size, as explained below. -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP argument is the pathname of the block device. -.sp -\fBWARNING: All data in the discarded region on the device will be lost!\fP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIoffset\fP and \fIlength\fP arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Disable all checking. Since v2.36 the block device is open in exclusive mode (O_EXCL) by default to avoid collision with mounted filesystem or another kernel subsystem. The \fB\-\-force\fP option disables the exclusive access mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Byte offset into the device from which to start discarding. The provided value must be aligned to the device sector size. The default value is zero. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-length\fP \fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -The number of bytes to discard (counting from the starting point). The provided value must be aligned to the device sector size. If the specified value extends past the end of the device, \fBblkdiscard\fP will stop at the device size boundary. The default value extends to the end of the device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-step\fP \fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -The number of bytes to discard within one iteration. The default is to discard all by one ioctl call. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-secure\fP -.RS 4 -Perform a secure discard. A secure discard is the same as a regular discard except that all copies of the discarded blocks that were possibly created by garbage collection must also be erased. This requires support from the device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-zeroout\fP -.RS 4 -Zero\-fill rather than discard. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Display the aligned values of \fIoffset\fP and \fIlength\fP. If the \fB\-\-step\fP option is specified, it prints the discard progress every second. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "lczerner\(atredhat.com" "Lukas Czerner" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfstrim\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBblkdiscard\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkid.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkid.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c42992a2..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkid.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,270 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: blkid -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "BLKID" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -blkid \- locate/print block device attributes -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBblkid\fP \fB\-\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP | \fB\-\-uuid\fP \fIuuid\fP -.sp -\fBblkid\fP [\fB\-\-no\-encoding\fP \fB\-\-garbage\-collect\fP \fB\-\-list\-one\fP \fB\-\-cache\-file\fP \fIfile\fP] [\fB\-\-output\fP \fIformat\fP] [\fB\-\-match\-tag\fP \fItag\fP] [\fB\-\-match\-token\fP \fINAME=value\fP] [\fIdevice\fP...] -.sp -\fBblkid\fP \fB\-\-probe\fP [\fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP] [\fB\-\-output\fP \fIformat\fP] [\fB\-\-size\fP \fIsize\fP] [\fB\-\-match\-tag\fP \fItag\fP] [\fB\-\-match\-types\fP \fIlist\fP] [\fB\-\-usages\fP \fIlist\fP] [\fB\-\-no\-part\-details\fP] \fIdevice\fP... -.sp -\fBblkid\fP \fB\-\-info\fP [\fB\-\-output format\fP] [\fB\-\-match\-tag\fP \fItag\fP] \fIdevice\fP... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBblkid\fP program is the command\-line interface to working with the \fBlibblkid\fP(3) library. It can determine the type of content (e.g., filesystem or swap) that a block device holds, and also the attributes (tokens, NAME=value pairs) from the content metadata (e.g., LABEL or UUID fields). -.sp -\fBIt is recommended to use\fP \fBlsblk\fP(8) \fBcommand to get information about block devices, or lsblk \-\-fs to get an overview of filesystems, or\fP \fBfindmnt\fP(8) \fBto search in already mounted filesystems.\fP -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBlsblk\fP(8) provides more information, better control on output formatting, easy to use in scripts and it does not require root permissions to get actual information. \fBblkid\fP reads information directly from devices and for non\-root users it returns cached unverified information. \fBblkid\fP is mostly designed for system services and to test \fBlibblkid\fP(3) functionality. -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -When \fIdevice\fP is specified, tokens from only this device are displayed. It is possible to specify multiple \fIdevice\fP arguments on the command line. If none is given, all partitions or unpartitioned devices which appear in \fI/proc/partitions\fP are shown, if they are recognized. -.sp -\fBblkid\fP has two main forms of operation: either searching for a device with a specific NAME=value pair, or displaying NAME=value pairs for one or more specified devices. -.sp -For security reasons \fBblkid\fP silently ignores all devices where the probing result is ambivalent (multiple colliding filesystems are detected). The low\-level probing mode (\fB\-p\fP) provides more information and extra exit status in this case. It\(cqs recommended to use \fBwipefs\fP(8) to get a detailed overview and to erase obsolete stuff (magic strings) from the device. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIsize\fP and \fIoffset\fP arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes like KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB"), or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-cache\-file\fP \fIcachefile\fP -.RS 4 -Read from \fIcachefile\fP instead of reading from the default cache file (see the CONFIGURATION FILE section for more details). If you want to start with a clean cache (i.e., don\(cqt report devices previously scanned but not necessarily available at this time), specify \fI/dev/null\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-no\-encoding\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt encode non\-printing characters. The non\-printing characters are encoded by ^ and M\- notation by default. Note that the \fB\-\-output udev\fP output format uses a different encoding which cannot be disabled. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-no\-part\-details\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt print information (PART_ENTRY_* tags) from partition table in low\-level probing mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-garbage\-collect\fP -.RS 4 -Perform a garbage collection pass on the blkid cache to remove devices which no longer exist. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display a usage message and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-H\fP, \fB\-\-hint\fP \fIsetting\fP -.RS 4 -Set probing hint. The hints are optional way how to force probing functions to -check for example another location. The currently supported is -"session_offset=\fInumber\fP" to set session offset on multi\-session UDF. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-info\fP -.RS 4 -Display information about I/O Limits (aka I/O topology). The \(aqexport\(aq output format is automatically enabled. This option can be used together with the \fB\-\-probe\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-k\fP, \fB\-\-list\-filesystems\fP -.RS 4 -List all known filesystems and RAIDs and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\-one\fP -.RS 4 -Look up only one device that matches the search parameter specified with the \fB\-\-match\-token\fP option. If there are multiple devices that match the specified search parameter, then the device with the highest priority is returned, and/or the first device found at a given priority (but see below note about udev). Device types in order of decreasing priority are: Device Mapper, EVMS, LVM, MD, and finally regular block devices. If this option is not specified, \fBblkid\fP will print all of the devices that match the search parameter. -.sp -This option forces \fBblkid\fP to use udev when used for LABEL or UUID tokens in \fB\-\-match\-token\fP. The goal is to provide output consistent with other utils (like \fBmount\fP(8), etc.) on systems where the same tag is used for multiple devices. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Look up the device that uses this filesystem \fIlabel\fP; this is equal to \fB\-\-list\-one \-\-output device \-\-match\-token LABEL=\fP\fIlabel\fP. This lookup method is able to reliably use /dev/disk/by\-label udev symlinks (dependent on a setting in \fI/etc/blkid.conf\fP). Avoid using the symlinks directly; it is not reliable to use the symlinks without verification. The \fB\-\-label\fP option works on systems with and without udev. -.sp -Unfortunately, the original \fBblkid\fP(8) from e2fsprogs uses the \fB\-L\fP option as a synonym for \fB\-o list\fP. For better portability, use \fB\-l \-o device \-t LABEL=\fP\fIlabel\fP and \fB\-o list\fP in your scripts rather than the \fB\-L\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-match\-types\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Restrict the probing functions to the specified (comma\-separated) \fIlist\fP of superblock types (names). The list items may be prefixed with "no" to specify the types which should be ignored. For example: -.sp -\fBblkid \-\-probe \-\-match\-types vfat,ext3,ext4 /dev/sda1\fP -.sp -probes for vfat, ext3 and ext4 filesystems, and -.sp -\fBblkid \-\-probe \-\-match\-types nominix /dev/sda1\fP -.sp -probes for all supported formats except minix filesystems. This option is only useful together with \fB\-\-probe\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIformat\fP -.RS 4 -Use the specified output format. Note that the order of variables and devices is not fixed. See also option \fB\-s\fP. The \fIformat\fP parameter may be: -.sp -\fBfull\fP -.RS 4 -print all tags (the default) -.RE -.sp -\fBvalue\fP -.RS 4 -print the value of the tags -.RE -.sp -\fBlist\fP -.RS 4 -print the devices in a user\-friendly format; this output format is unsupported for low\-level probing (\fB\-\-probe\fP or \fB\-\-info\fP). -.sp -This output format is \fBDEPRECATED\fP in favour of the \fBlsblk\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fBdevice\fP -.RS 4 -print the device name only; this output format is always enabled for the \fB\-\-label\fP and \fB\-\-uuid\fP options -.RE -.sp -\fBudev\fP -.RS 4 -print key="value" pairs for easy import into the udev environment; the keys are prefixed by ID_FS_ or ID_PART_ prefixes. The value may be modified to be safe for udev environment; allowed is plain ASCII, hex\-escaping and valid UTF\-8, everything else (including whitespaces) is replaced with \(aq_\(aq. The keys with \fI_ENC\fP postfix use hex\-escaping for unsafe chars. -.sp -The udev output returns the ID_FS_AMBIVALENT tag if more superblocks are detected, and ID_PART_ENTRY_* tags are always returned for all partitions including empty partitions. -.sp -This output format is \fBDEPRECATED\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBexport\fP -.RS 4 -print key=value pairs for easy import into the environment; this output format is automatically enabled when I/O Limits (\fB\-\-info\fP option) are requested. -.sp -The non\-printing characters are encoded by ^ and M\- notation and all potentially unsafe characters are escaped. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Probe at the given \fIoffset\fP (only useful with \fB\-\-probe\fP). This option can be used together with the \fB\-\-info\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-probe\fP -.RS 4 -Switch to low\-level superblock probing mode (bypassing the cache). -.sp -Note that low\-level probing also returns information about partition table type (PTTYPE tag) and partitions (PART_ENTRY_* tags). The tag names produced by low\-level probing are based on names used internally by libblkid and it may be different than when executed without \fB\-\-probe\fP (for example PART_ENTRY_UUID= vs PARTUUID=). See also \fB\-\-no\-part\-details\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-match\-tag\fP \fItag\fP -.RS 4 -For each (specified) device, show only the tags that match \fItag\fP. It is possible to specify multiple \fB\-\-match\-tag\fP options. If no tag is specified, then all tokens are shown for all (specified) devices. In order to just refresh the cache without showing any tokens, use \fB\-\-match\-tag none\fP with no other options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Override the size of device/file (only useful with \fB\-\-probe\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-match\-token\fP \fINAME=value\fP -.RS 4 -Search for block devices with tokens named \fINAME\fP that have the value \fIvalue\fP, and display any devices which are found. Common values for \fINAME\fP include \fBTYPE\fP, \fBLABEL\fP, and \fBUUID\fP. If there are no devices specified on the command line, all block devices will be searched; otherwise only the specified devices are searched. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-usages\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Restrict the probing functions to the specified (comma\-separated) \fIlist\fP of "usage" types. Supported usage types are: filesystem, raid, crypto and other. The list items may be prefixed with "no" to specify the usage types which should be ignored. For example: -.sp -\fBblkid \-\-probe \-\-usages filesystem,other /dev/sda1\fP -.sp -probes for all filesystem and other (e.g., swap) formats, and -.sp -\fBblkid \-\-probe \-\-usages noraid /dev/sda1\fP -.sp -probes for all supported formats except RAIDs. This option is only useful together with \fB\-\-probe\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uuid\fP \fIuuid\fP -.RS 4 -Look up the device that uses this filesystem \fIuuid\fP. For more details see the \fB\-\-label\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version number and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -If the specified device or device addressed by specified token (option \fB\-\-match\-token\fP) was found and it\(cqs possible to gather any information about the device, an exit status 0 is returned. Note the option \fB\-\-match\-tag\fP filters output tags, but it does not affect exit status. -.sp -If the specified token was not found, or no (specified) devices could be identified, or it is impossible to gather any information about the device identifiers or device content an exit status of 2 is returned. -.sp -For usage or other errors, an exit status of 4 is returned. -.sp -If an ambivalent probing result was detected by low\-level probing mode (\fB\-p\fP), an exit status of 8 is returned. -.SH "CONFIGURATION FILE" -.sp -The standard location of the \fI/etc/blkid.conf\fP config file can be overridden by the environment variable BLKID_CONF. The following options control the libblkid library: -.sp -\fISEND_UEVENT=<yes|not>\fP -.RS 4 -Sends uevent when \fI/dev/disk/by\-{label,uuid,partuuid,partlabel}/\fP symlink does not match with LABEL, UUID, PARTUUID or PARTLABEL on the device. Default is "yes". -.RE -.sp -\fICACHE_FILE=<path>\fP -.RS 4 -Overrides the standard location of the cache file. This setting can be overridden by the environment variable \fBBLKID_FILE\fP. Default is \fI/run/blkid/blkid.tab\fP, or \fI/etc/blkid.tab\fP on systems without a \fI/run\fP directory. -.RE -.sp -\fIEVALUATE=<methods>\fP -.RS 4 -Defines LABEL and UUID evaluation method(s). Currently, the libblkid library supports the "udev" and "scan" methods. More than one method may be specified in a comma\-separated list. Default is "udev,scan". The "udev" method uses udev \fI/dev/disk/by\-*\fP symlinks and the "scan" method scans all block devices from the \fI/proc/partitions\fP file. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -Setting \fILIBBLKID_DEBUG=all\fP enables debug output. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBblkid\fP was written by Andreas Dilger for libblkid and improved by Theodore Ts\(cqo and Karel Zak. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlibblkid\fP(3), -\fBfindfs\fP(8), -\fBlsblk\fP(8), -\fBwipefs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBblkid\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkmapd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkmapd.8 index 914b80f2..4b3d3f04 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkmapd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkmapd.8 @@ -43,9 +43,24 @@ Performs device discovery only then exits. Runs .B blkmapd in the foreground and sends output to stderr (as opposed to syslogd) +.SH CONFIGURATION FILE +The +.B blkmapd +daemon recognizes the following value from the +.B [general] +section of the +.I /etc/nfs.conf +configuration file: +.TP +.B pipefs-directory +Tells +.B blkmapd +where to look for the rpc_pipefs filesystem. The default value is +.IR /var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs . .SH SEE ALSO .BR nfs (5), -.BR dmsetup (8) +.BR dmsetup (8), +.BR nfs.conf (5) .sp RFC 5661 for the NFS version 4.1 specification. .br diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkzone.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkzone.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 7bc0e56a..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blkzone.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,250 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: blkzone -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "BLKZONE" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -blkzone \- run zone command on a device -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBblkzone\fP \fIcommand\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBblkzone\fP is used to run zone command on device that support the Zoned Block Commands (ZBC) or Zoned\-device ATA Commands (ZAC). The zones to operate on can be specified using the offset, count and length options. -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP argument is the pathname of the block device. -.SH "COMMANDS" -.SS "report" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone report\fP is used to report device zone information. -.sp -By default, the command will report all zones from the start of the block device. Options may be used to modify this behavior, changing the starting zone or the size of the report, as explained below. -.sp -Report output: -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -start -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone start sector -T} -T{ -.sp -len -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone length in number of sectors -T} -T{ -.sp -cap -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone capacity in number of sectors -T} -T{ -.sp -wptr -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone write pointer position -T} -T{ -.sp -reset -T}:T{ -.sp -Reset write pointer recommended -T} -T{ -.sp -non\-seq -T}:T{ -.sp -Non\-sequential write resources active -T} -T{ -.sp -cond -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone condition -T} -T{ -.sp -type -T}:T{ -.sp -Zone type -T} -.TE -.sp -.sp -Zone conditions: -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -cl -T}:T{ -.sp -Closed -T} -T{ -.sp -nw -T}:T{ -.sp -Not write pointer -T} -T{ -.sp -em -T}:T{ -.sp -Empty -T} -T{ -.sp -fu -T}:T{ -.sp -Full -T} -T{ -.sp -oe -T}:T{ -.sp -Explicitly opened -T} -T{ -.sp -oi -T}:T{ -.sp -Implicitly opened -T} -T{ -.sp -ol -T}:T{ -.sp -Offline -T} -T{ -.sp -ro -T}:T{ -.sp -Read only -T} -T{ -.sp -x? -T}:T{ -.sp -Reserved conditions (should not be reported) -T} -.TE -.sp -.SS "capacity" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone capacity\fP is used to report device capacity information. -.sp -By default, the command will report the sum, in number of sectors, of all zone capacities on the device. Options may be used to modify this behavior, changing the starting zone or the size of the report, as explained below. -.SS "reset" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone reset\fP is used to reset one or more zones. Unlike \fBsg_reset_wp\fP(8), this command operates from the block layer and can reset a range of zones. -.SS "open" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone open\fP is used to explicitly open one or more zones. Unlike \fBsg_zone\fP(8), open action, this command operates from the block layer and can open a range of zones. -.SS "close" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone close\fP is used to close one or more zones. Unlike \fBsg_zone\fP(8), close action, this command operates from the block layer and can close a range of zones. -.SS "finish" -.sp -The command \fBblkzone finish\fP is used to finish (transition to full condition) one or more zones. Unlike \fBsg_zone\fP(8), finish action, this command operates from the block layer and can finish a range of zones. -.sp -By default, the reset, open, close and finish commands will operate from the zone at device sector 0 and operate on all zones. Options may be used to modify this behavior as explained below. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIoffset\fP and \fIlength\fP option arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. Additionally, the 0x prefix can be used to specify \fIoffset\fP and \fIlength\fP in hex. -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIsector\fP -.RS 4 -The starting zone specified as a sector offset. The provided offset in sector units (512 bytes) should match the start of a zone. The default value is zero. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-length\fP \fIsectors\fP -.RS 4 -The maximum number of sectors the command should operate on. The default value is the number of sectors remaining after \fIoffset\fP. This option cannot be used together with the option \fB\-\-count\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-count\fP \fIcount\fP -.RS 4 -The maximum number of zones the command should operate on. The default value is the number of zones starting from \fIoffset\fP. This option cannot be used together with the option \fB\-\-length\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Enforce commands to change zone status on block devices used by the system. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Display the number of zones returned in the report or the range of sectors reset. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "shaun\(attancheff.com" "Shaun Tancheff" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBsg_rep_zones\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBblkzone\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blockdev.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blockdev.8 deleted file mode 100644 index bbaf1959..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/blockdev.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,186 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: blockdev -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "BLOCKDEV" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -blockdev \- call block device ioctls from the command line -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBblockdev\fP [\fB\-q\fP] [\fB\-v\fP] \fIcommand\fP [\fIcommand\fP...] \fIdevice\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.sp -\fBblockdev\fP \fB\-\-report\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.sp -\fBblockdev\fP \fB\-h\fP|\fB\-V\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The utility \fBblockdev\fP allows one to call block device ioctls from the command line. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-q\fP -.RS 4 -Be quiet. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP -.RS 4 -Be verbose. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-report\fP -.RS 4 -Print a report for the specified device. It is possible to give multiple devices. If none is given, all devices which appear in \fI/proc/partitions\fP are shown. Note that the partition StartSec is in 512\-byte sectors. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Print version and exit. -.RE -.SH "COMMANDS" -.sp -It is possible to give multiple devices and multiple commands. -.sp -\fB\-\-flushbufs\fP -.RS 4 -Flush buffers. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getalignoff\fP -.RS 4 -Get alignment offset. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getbsz\fP -.RS 4 -Print the blocksize in bytes. This size does not describe device topology. It\(cqs the size used internally by the kernel and it may be modified (for example) by filesystem driver on mount. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getdiscardzeroes\fP -.RS 4 -Get discard zeroes support status. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getfra\fP -.RS 4 -Get filesystem readahead in 512\-byte sectors. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getiomin\fP -.RS 4 -Get minimum I/O size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getioopt\fP -.RS 4 -Get optimal I/O size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getmaxsect\fP -.RS 4 -Get max sectors per request. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getpbsz\fP -.RS 4 -Get physical block (sector) size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getra\fP -.RS 4 -Print readahead (in 512\-byte sectors). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getro\fP -.RS 4 -Get read\-only. Print 1 if the device is read\-only, 0 otherwise. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getsize64\fP -.RS 4 -Print device size in bytes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getsize\fP -.RS 4 -Print device size (32\-bit!) in sectors. Deprecated in favor of the \fB\-\-getsz\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getss\fP -.RS 4 -Print logical sector size in bytes \- usually 512. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getsz\fP -.RS 4 -Get size in 512\-byte sectors. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-rereadpt\fP -.RS 4 -Reread partition table -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setbsz\fP \fIbytes\fP -.RS 4 -Set blocksize. Note that the block size is specific to the current file descriptor opening the block device, so the change of block size only persists for as long as \fBblockdev\fP has the device open, and is lost once \fBblockdev\fP exits. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setfra\fP \fIsectors\fP -.RS 4 -Set filesystem readahead (same as \fB\-\-setra\fP on 2.6 kernels). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setra\fP \fIsectors\fP -.RS 4 -Set readahead (in 512\-byte sectors). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setro\fP -.RS 4 -Set read\-only. The currently active access to the device may not be affected by the change. For example, a filesystem already mounted in read\-write mode will not be affected. The change applies after remount. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-setrw\fP -.RS 4 -Set read\-write. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBblockdev\fP was written by Andries E. Brouwer and rewritten by Karel Zak. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBblockdev\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/cfdisk.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/cfdisk.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 4e7fe603..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/cfdisk.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,217 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: cfdisk -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CFDISK" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -cfdisk \- display or manipulate a disk partition table -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBcfdisk\fP [options] [\fIdevice\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBcfdisk\fP is a curses\-based program for partitioning any block device. The default device is \fI/dev/sda\fP. -.sp -Note that \fBcfdisk\fP provides basic partitioning functionality with a user\-friendly interface. If you need advanced features, use \fBfdisk\fP(8) instead. -.sp -All disk label changes will remain in memory only, and the disk will be unmodified until you decide to write your changes. Be careful before using the write command. -.sp -Since version 2.25 \fBcfdisk\fP supports MBR (DOS), GPT, SUN and SGI disk labels, but no longer provides any functionality for CHS (Cylinder\-Head\-Sector) addressing. CHS has never been important for Linux, and this addressing concept does not make any sense for new devices. -.sp -Since version 2.25 \fBcfdisk\fP also does not provide a \(aqprint\(aq command any more. This functionality is provided by the utilities \fBpartx\fP(8) and \fBlsblk\fP(8) in a very comfortable and rich way. -.sp -If you want to remove an old partition table from a device, use \fBwipefs\fP(8). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-color\fP[\fB=\fP\fIwhen\fP] -.RS 4 -Colorize the output. The optional argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. If the \fIwhen\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBauto\fP. The colors can be disabled, for the current built\-in default see \fB\-\-help\fP output. See also the COLORS section. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-read\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Forced open in read\-only mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-zero\fP -.RS 4 -Start with an in\-memory zeroed partition table. This option does not zero the partition table on the disk; rather, it simply starts the program without reading the existing partition table. This option allows you to create a new partition table from scratch or from an \fBsfdisk\fP(8)\-compatible script. -.RE -.SH "COMMANDS" -.sp -The commands for \fBcfdisk\fP can be entered by pressing the corresponding key (pressing \fIEnter\fP after the command is not necessary). Here is a list of the available commands: -.sp -\fBb\fP -.RS 4 -Toggle the bootable flag of the current partition. This allows you to select which primary partition is bootable on the drive. This command may not be available for all partition label types. -.RE -.sp -\fBd\fP -.RS 4 -Delete the current partition. This will convert the current partition into free space and merge it with any free space immediately surrounding the current partition. A partition already marked as free space or marked as unusable cannot be deleted. -.RE -.sp -\fBh\fP -.RS 4 -Show the help screen. -.RE -.sp -\fBn\fP -.RS 4 -Create a new partition from free space. \fBcfdisk\fP then prompts you for the size of the partition you want to create. The default size is equal to the entire available free space at the current position. -.sp -The size may be followed by a multiplicative suffix: KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB"). -.RE -.sp -\fBq\fP -.RS 4 -Quit the program. This will exit the program without writing any data to the disk. -.RE -.sp -\fBr\fP -.RS 4 -Reduce or enlarge the current partition. \fBcfdisk\fP then prompts you for the new size of the partition. The default size is the current size. A partition marked as free space or marked as unusable cannot be resized. -.sp -\fBNote that reducing the size of a partition might destroy data on that partition.\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBs\fP -.RS 4 -Sort the partitions in ascending start\-sector order. When deleting and adding partitions, it is likely that the numbering of the partitions will no longer match their order on the disk. This command restores that match. -.RE -.sp -\fBt\fP -.RS 4 -Change the partition type. By default, new partitions are created as \fILinux\fP partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fBu\fP -.RS 4 -Dump the current in\-memory partition table to an sfdisk\-compatible script file. -.sp -The script files are compatible between \fBcfdisk\fP, \fBfdisk\fP(8) \fBsfdisk\fP(8) and other libfdisk applications. For more details see \fBsfdisk\fP(8). -.sp -It is also possible to load an sfdisk\-script into \fBcfdisk\fP if there is no partition table on the device or when you start \fBcfdisk\fP with the \fB\-\-zero\fP command\-line option. -.RE -.sp -\fBW\fP -.RS 4 -Write the partition table to disk (you must enter an uppercase W). Since this might destroy data on the disk, you must either confirm or deny the write by entering `yes\(aq or `no\(aq. If you enter `yes\(aq, \fBcfdisk\fP will write the partition table to disk and then tell the kernel to re\-read the partition table from the disk. -.sp -The re\-reading of the partition table does not always work. In such a case you need to inform the kernel about any new partitions by using \fBpartprobe\fP(8) or \fBpartx\fP(8), or by rebooting the system. -.RE -.sp -\fBx\fP -.RS 4 -Toggle extra information about a partition. -.RE -.sp -\fIUp Arrow\fP, \fIDown Arrow\fP -.RS 4 -Move the cursor to the previous or next partition. If there are more partitions than can be displayed on a screen, you can display the next (previous) set of partitions by moving down (up) at the last (first) partition displayed on the screen. -.RE -.sp -\fILeft Arrow\fP, \fIRight Arrow\fP -.RS 4 -Select the preceding or the next menu item. Hitting \fIEnter\fP will execute the currently selected item. -.RE -.sp -All commands can be entered with either uppercase or lowercase letters (except for \fBW\fPrite). When in a submenu or at a prompt, you can hit the \fIEsc\fP key to return to the main menu. -.SH "COLORS" -.sp -Implicit coloring can be disabled by creating the empty file \fI/etc/terminal\-colors.d/cfdisk.disable\fP. -.sp -See \fBterminal\-colors.d\fP(5) for more details about colorization configuration. -.sp -\fBcfdisk\fP does not support color customization with a color\-scheme file. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -\fBCFDISK_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables cfdisk debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBFDISK_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libfdisk debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBBLKID_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libsmartcols debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG_PADDING\fP=on -.RS 4 -use visible padding characters. Requires enabled \fBLIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBLOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.sp -The current \fBcfdisk\fP implementation is based on the original \fBcfdisk\fP from \c -.MTO "martin\(atcs.unc.edu" "Kevin E. Martin" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8), -\fBsfdisk\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBcfdisk\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chcpu.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chcpu.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c74d998e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chcpu.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,129 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: chcpu -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CHCPU" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -chcpu \- configure CPUs -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP \fB\-c\fP|\fB\-d\fP|\fB\-e\fP|\fB\-g\fP \fIcpu\-list\fP -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP \fB\-p\fP \fImode\fP -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP \fB\-r\fP|\fB\-h\fP|\fB\-V\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP can modify the state of CPUs. It can enable or disable CPUs, scan for new CPUs, change the CPU dispatching \fImode\fP of the underlying hypervisor, and request CPUs from the hypervisor (configure) or return CPUs to the hypervisor (deconfigure). -.sp -Some options have a \fIcpu\-list\fP argument. Use this argument to specify a comma\-separated list of CPUs. The list can contain individual CPU addresses or ranges of addresses. For example, \fB0,5,7,9\-11\fP makes the command applicable to the CPUs with the addresses 0, 5, 7, 9, 10, and 11. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-configure\fP \fIcpu\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Configure the specified CPUs. Configuring a CPU means that the hypervisor takes a CPU from the CPU pool and assigns it to the virtual hardware on which your kernel runs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-disable\fP \fIcpu\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the specified CPUs. Disabling a CPU means that the kernel sets it offline. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-enable\fP \fIcpu\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Enable the specified CPUs. Enabling a CPU means that the kernel sets it online. A CPU must be configured, see \fB\-c\fP, before it can be enabled. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-deconfigure\fP \fIcpu\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Deconfigure the specified CPUs. Deconfiguring a CPU means that the hypervisor removes the CPU from the virtual hardware on which the Linux instance runs and returns it to the CPU pool. A CPU must be offline, see \fB\-d\fP, before it can be deconfigured. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-dispatch\fP \fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Set the CPU dispatching \fImode\fP (polarization). This option has an effect only if your hardware architecture and hypervisor support CPU polarization. Available \fImodes\fP are: -.sp -\fBhorizontal\fP -.RS 4 -The workload is spread across all available CPUs. -.RE -.sp -\fBvertical\fP -.RS 4 -The workload is concentrated on few CPUs. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-rescan\fP -.RS 4 -Trigger a rescan of CPUs. After a rescan, the Linux kernel recognizes the new CPUs. Use this option on systems that do not automatically detect newly attached CPUs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBchcpu\fP has the following exit status values: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -failure -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -partial success -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "heiko.carstens\(atde.ibm.com" "Heiko Carstens" "" -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.sp -Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlscpu\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBchcpu\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chmem.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chmem.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 0a1274a5..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/chmem.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,173 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: chmem -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CHMEM" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -chmem \- configure memory -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBchmem\fP [\fB\-h] [\fP\-V*] [\fB\-v\fP] [\fB\-e\fP|\fB\-d\fP] [\fISIZE\fP|\fIRANGE\fP \fB\-b\fP \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP] [\fB\-z\fP \fIZONE\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The chmem command sets a particular size or range of memory online or offline. -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Specify \fISIZE\fP as <size>[m|M|g|G]. With m or M, <size> specifies the memory size in MiB (1024 x 1024 bytes). With g or G, <size> specifies the memory size in GiB (1024 x 1024 x 1024 bytes). The default unit is MiB. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Specify \fIRANGE\fP in the form 0x<start>\-0x<end> as shown in the output of the \fBlsmem\fP(1) command. <start> is the hexadecimal address of the first byte and <end> is the hexadecimal address of the last byte in the memory range. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Specify \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP in the form <first>\-<last> or <block> as shown in the output of the \fBlsmem\fP(1) command. <first> is the number of the first memory block and <last> is the number of the last memory block in the memory range. Alternatively a single block can be specified. \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP requires the \fB\-\-blocks\fP option. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Specify \fIZONE\fP as the name of a memory zone, as shown in the output of the \fBlsmem \-o +ZONES\fP command. The output shows one or more valid memory zones for each memory range. If multiple zones are shown, then the memory range currently belongs to the first zone. By default, \fBchmem\fP will set memory online to the zone Movable, if this is among the valid zones. This default can be changed by specifying the \fB\-\-zone\fP option with another valid zone. For memory ballooning, it is recommended to select the zone Movable for memory online and offline, if possible. Memory in this zone is much more likely to be able to be offlined again, but it cannot be used for arbitrary kernel allocations, only for migratable pages (e.g., anonymous and page cache pages). Use the \fB\-\-help\fP option to see all available zones. -.RE -.sp -\fISIZE\fP and \fIRANGE\fP must be aligned to the Linux memory block size, as shown in the output of the \fBlsmem\fP(1) command. -.sp -Setting memory online can fail for various reasons. On virtualized systems it can fail if the hypervisor does not have enough memory left, for example because memory was overcommitted. Setting memory offline can fail if Linux cannot free the memory. If only part of the requested memory can be set online or offline, a message tells you how much memory was set online or offline instead of the requested amount. -.sp -When setting memory online \fBchmem\fP starts with the lowest memory block numbers. When setting memory offline \fBchmem\fP starts with the highest memory block numbers. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-blocks\fP -.RS 4 -Use a \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP parameter instead of \fIRANGE\fP or \fISIZE\fP for the \fB\-\-enable\fP and \fB\-\-disable\fP options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-disable\fP -.RS 4 -Set the specified \fIRANGE\fP, \fISIZE\fP, or \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP of memory offline. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-enable\fP -.RS 4 -Set the specified \fIRANGE\fP, \fISIZE\fP, or \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP of memory online. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-zone\fP -.RS 4 -Select the memory \fIZONE\fP where to set the specified \fIRANGE\fP, \fISIZE\fP, or \fIBLOCKRANGE\fP of memory online or offline. By default, memory will be set online to the zone Movable, if possible. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Print a short help text, then exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. Causes \fBchmem\fP to print debugging messages about it\(cqs progress. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Print the version number, then exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBchmem\fP has the following exit status values: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -failure -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -partial success -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -\fBchmem \-\-enable 1024\fP -.RS 4 -This command requests 1024 MiB of memory to be set online. -.RE -.sp -\fBchmem \-e 2g\fP -.RS 4 -This command requests 2 GiB of memory to be set online. -.RE -.sp -\fBchmem \-\-disable 0x00000000e4000000\-0x00000000f3ffffff\fP -.RS 4 -This command requests the memory range starting with 0x00000000e4000000 and ending with 0x00000000f3ffffff to be set offline. -.RE -.sp -\fBchmem \-b \-d 10\fP -.RS 4 -This command requests the memory block number 10 to be set offline. -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlsmem\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBchmem\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ctrlaltdel.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ctrlaltdel.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 3dd7b3e7..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ctrlaltdel.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: ctrlaltdel -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "CTRLALTDEL" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -ctrlaltdel \- set the function of the Ctrl\-Alt\-Del combination -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBctrlaltdel\fP \fBhard\fP|\fBsoft\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Based on examination of the \fIlinux/kernel/reboot.c\fP code, it is clear that there are two supported functions that the <Ctrl\-Alt\-Del> sequence can perform. -.sp -\fBhard\fP -.RS 4 -Immediately reboot the computer without calling \fBsync\fP(2) and without any other preparation. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fBsoft\fP -.RS 4 -Make the kernel send the \fBSIGINT\fP (interrupt) signal to the \fBinit\fP process (this is always the process with PID 1). If this option is used, the \fBinit\fP(8) program must support this feature. Since there are now several \fBinit\fP(8) programs in the Linux community, please consult the documentation for the version that you are currently using. -.RE -.sp -When the command is run without any argument, it will display the current setting. -.sp -The function of \fBctrlaltdel\fP is usually set in the \fI/etc/rc.local\fP file. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/rc.local\fP -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "poe\(atdaimi.aau.dk" "Peter Orbaek" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBinit\fP(8), -\fBsystemd\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBctrlaltdel\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/delpart.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/delpart.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c397b226..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/delpart.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: delpart -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "DELPART" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -delpart \- tell the kernel to forget about a partition -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBdelpart\fP \fIdevice partition\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBdelpart\fP asks the Linux kernel to forget about the specified \fIpartition\fP (a number) on the specified \fIdevice\fP. The command is a simple wrapper around the "del partition" ioctl. -.sp -This command doesn\(cqt manipulate partitions on a block device. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBaddpart\fP(8), -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBdelpart\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/exportfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/exportfs.8 index 45b6d834..6d417a70 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/exportfs.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/exportfs.8 @@ -148,6 +148,31 @@ options. .TP .B -s Display the current export list suitable for /etc/exports. + +.SH CONFIGURATION FILE +The +.B [exportfs] +section of the +.I /etc/nfs.conf +configuration file can contain a +.B debug +value, which can be one or more from the list +.BR general , +.BR call , +.BR auth , +.BR parse , +.BR all . +When a list is given, the members should be comma-separated. + +.B exportfs +will also recognize the +.B state-directory-path +value from both the +.B [mountd] +section and the +.B [exportd] +section + .SH DISCUSSION .SS Exporting Directories The first synopsis shows how to invoke @@ -304,6 +329,7 @@ table of clients accessing server's exports .BR exports (5), .BR nfs.conf (5), .BR rpc.mountd (8), +.BR exportd (8), .BR netgroup (5) .SH AUTHORS Olaf Kirch <okir@monad.swb.de> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdformat.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdformat.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c367fc66..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdformat.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fdformat -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FDFORMAT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fdformat \- low\-level format a floppy disk -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfdformat\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfdformat\fP does a low\-level format on a floppy disk. \fIdevice\fP is usually one of the following (for floppy devices the major = 2, and the minor is shown for informational purposes only): -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -/dev/fd0d360 (minor = 4) -/dev/fd0h1200 (minor = 8) -/dev/fd0D360 (minor = 12) -/dev/fd0H360 (minor = 12) -/dev/fd0D720 (minor = 16) -/dev/fd0H720 (minor = 16) -/dev/fd0h360 (minor = 20) -/dev/fd0h720 (minor = 24) -/dev/fd0H1440 (minor = 28) -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -/dev/fd1d360 (minor = 5) -/dev/fd1h1200 (minor = 9) -/dev/fd1D360 (minor = 13) -/dev/fd1H360 (minor = 13) -/dev/fd1D720 (minor = 17) -/dev/fd1H720 (minor = 17) -/dev/fd1h360 (minor = 21) -/dev/fd1h720 (minor = 25) -/dev/fd1H1440 (minor = 29) -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The generic floppy devices, \fI/dev/fd0\fP and \fI/dev/fd1\fP, will fail to work with \fBfdformat\fP when a non\-standard format is being used, or if the format has not been autodetected earlier. In this case, use \fBsetfdprm\fP(8) to load the disk parameters. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-from\fP \fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Start at the track \fIN\fP (default is 0). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-to\fP \fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Stop at the track \fIN\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-repair\fP \fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Try to repair tracks failed during the verification (max \fIN\fP retries). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-verify\fP -.RS 4 -Skip the verification that is normally performed after the formatting. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -This utility does not handle USB floppy disk drives. Use \fBufiformat\fP(8) instead. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "almesber\(atnessie.cs.id.ethz.ch" "Werner Almesberger" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfd\fP(4), -\fBemkfs\fP(8), -\fBmkfs\fP(8), -\fBsetfdprm\fP(8), -\fBufiformat\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfdformat\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdisk.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdisk.8 deleted file mode 100644 index ab1c5241..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fdisk.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,294 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fdisk -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FDISK" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fdisk \- manipulate disk partition table -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP \fB\-l\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP is a dialog\-driven program for creation and manipulation of partition tables. It understands GPT, MBR, Sun, SGI and BSD partition tables. -.sp -Block devices can be divided into one or more logical disks called \fIpartitions\fP. This division is recorded in the \fIpartition table\fP, usually found in sector 0 of the disk. (In the BSD world one talks about `disk slices\(aq and a `disklabel\(aq.) -.sp -All partitioning is driven by device I/O limits (the topology) by default. \fBfdisk\fP is able to optimize the disk layout for a 4K\-sector size and use an alignment offset on modern devices for MBR and GPT. It is always a good idea to follow \fBfdisk\fP\(aqs defaults as the default values (e.g., first and last partition sectors) and partition sizes specified by the +/\-<size>{M,G,...} notation are always aligned according to the device properties. -.sp -CHS (Cylinder\-Head\-Sector) addressing is deprecated and not used by default. Please, do not follow old articles and recommendations with \fBfdisk \-S <n> \-H <n>\fP advices for SSD or 4K\-sector devices. -.sp -Note that \fBpartx\fP(8) provides a rich interface for scripts to print disk layouts, \fBfdisk\fP is mostly designed for humans. Backward compatibility in the output of \fBfdisk\fP is not guaranteed. The input (the commands) should always be backward compatible. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-sector\-size\fP \fIsectorsize\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the sector size of the disk. Valid values are 512, 1024, 2048, and 4096. (Recent kernels know the sector size. Use this option only on old kernels or to override the kernel\(cqs ideas.) Since util\-linux\-2.17, \fBfdisk\fP differentiates between logical and physical sector size. This option changes both sector sizes to \fIsectorsize\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP, \fB\-\-protect\-boot\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt erase the beginning of the first disk sector when creating a new disk label. This feature is supported for GPT and MBR. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-compatibility\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Specify the compatibility mode, \(aqdos\(aq or \(aqnondos\(aq. The default is non\-DOS mode. For backward compatibility, it is possible to use the option without the \fImode\fP argument \(em then the default is used. Note that the optional \fImode\fP argument cannot be separated from the \fB\-c\fP option by a space, the correct form is for example \fB\-c\fP=\fIdos\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display a help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-color\fP[=\fIwhen\fP] -.RS 4 -Colorize the output. The optional argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. If the \fIwhen\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBauto\fP. The colors can be disabled; for the current built\-in default see the \fB\-\-help\fP output. See also the \fBCOLORS\fP section. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -List the partition tables for the specified devices and then exit. -.sp -If no devices are given, the devices mentioned in \fI/proc/partitions\fP (if this file exists) are used. Devices are always listed in the order in which they are specified on the command\-line, or by the kernel listed in \fI/proc/partitions\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-list\-details\fP -.RS 4 -Like \fB\-\-list\fP, but provides more details. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noauto\-pt\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt automatically create a default partition table on empty device. The partition table has to be explicitly created by user (by command like \(aqo\(aq, \(aqg\(aq, etc.). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP (e.g., \fB\-o +UUID\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-getsz\fP -.RS 4 -Print the size in 512\-byte sectors of each given block device. This option is DEPRECATED in favour of \fBblockdev\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-type\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Enable support only for disklabels of the specified \fItype\fP, and disable support for all other types. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-units\fP[=\fIunit\fP] -.RS 4 -When listing partition tables, show sizes in \(aqsectors\(aq or in \(aqcylinders\(aq. The default is to show sizes in sectors. For backward compatibility, it is possible to use the option without the \fIunit\fP argument \(em then the default is used. Note that the optional \fIunit\fP argument cannot be separated from the \fB\-u\fP option by a space, the correct form is for example \(aq*\-u=*\fIcylinders\fP\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-cylinders\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the number of cylinders of the disk. I have no idea why anybody would want to do so. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-H\fP, \fB\-\-heads\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the number of heads of the disk. (Not the physical number, of course, but the number used for partition tables.) Reasonable values are 255 and 16. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-sectors\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the number of sectors per track of the disk. (Not the physical number, of course, but the number used for partition tables.) A reasonable value is 63. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wipe\fP \fIwhen\fP -.RS 4 -Wipe filesystem, RAID and partition\-table signatures from the device, in order to avoid possible collisions. The argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. When this option is not given, the default is \fBauto\fP, in which case signatures are wiped only when in interactive mode. In all cases detected signatures are reported by warning messages before a new partition table is created. See also \fBwipefs\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-W\fP, \fB\-\-wipe\-partitions\fP \fIwhen\fP -.RS 4 -Wipe filesystem, RAID and partition\-table signatures from a newly created partitions, in order to avoid possible collisions. The argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. When this option is not given, the default is \fBauto\fP, in which case signatures are wiped only when in interactive mode and after confirmation by user. In all cases detected signatures are reported by warning messages before a new partition is created. See also \fBwipefs\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "DEVICES" -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP is usually \fI/dev/sda\fP, \fI/dev/sdb\fP or so. A device name refers to the entire disk. Old systems without libata (a library used inside the Linux kernel to support ATA host controllers and devices) make a difference between IDE and SCSI disks. In such cases the device name will be \fI/dev/hd*\fP (IDE) or \fI/dev/sd*\fP (SCSI). -.sp -The \fIpartition\fP is a device name followed by a partition number. For example, \fI/dev/sda1\fP is the first partition on the first hard disk in the system. See also Linux kernel documentation (the \fIDocumentation/admin\-guide/devices.txt\fP file). -.SH "SIZES" -.sp -The "last sector" dialog accepts partition size specified by number of sectors or by +/\-<size>{K,B,M,G,...} notation. -.sp -If the size is prefixed by \(aq+\(aq then it is interpreted as relative to the partition first sector. If the size is prefixed by \(aq\-\(aq then it is interpreted as relative to the high limit (last available sector for the partition). -.sp -In the case the size is specified in bytes than the number may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB=1024, MiB=1024*1024, and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB. The "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB". -.sp -The relative sizes are always aligned according to device I/O limits. The +/\-<size>{K,B,M,G,...} notation is recommended. -.sp -For backward compatibility fdisk also accepts the suffixes KB=1000, MB=1000*1000, and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. These 10^N suffixes are deprecated. -.SH "SCRIPT FILES" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP allows reading (by \(aqI\(aq command) \fBsfdisk\fP(8) compatible script files. The script is applied to in\-memory partition table, and then it is possible to modify the partition table before you write it to the device. -.sp -And vice\-versa it is possible to write the current in\-memory disk layout to the script file by command \(aqO\(aq. -.sp -The script files are compatible between \fBcfdisk\fP(8), \fBsfdisk\fP(8), \fBfdisk\fP and other libfdisk applications. For more details see \fBsfdisk\fP(8). -.SH "DISK LABELS" -.sp -\fBGPT (GUID Partition Table)\fP -.RS 4 -GPT is modern standard for the layout of the partition table. GPT uses 64\-bit logical block addresses, checksums, UUIDs and names for partitions and an unlimited number of partitions (although the number of partitions is usually restricted to 128 in many partitioning tools). -.sp -Note that the first sector is still reserved for a \fBprotective MBR\fP in the GPT specification. It prevents MBR\-only partitioning tools from mis\-recognizing and overwriting GPT disks. -.sp -GPT is always a better choice than MBR, especially on modern hardware with a UEFI boot loader. -.RE -.sp -\fBDOS\-type (MBR)\fP -.RS 4 -A DOS\-type partition table can describe an unlimited number of partitions. In sector 0 there is room for the description of 4 partitions (called `primary\(aq). One of these may be an extended partition; this is a box holding logical partitions, with descriptors found in a linked list of sectors, each preceding the corresponding logical partitions. The four primary partitions, present or not, get numbers 1\-4. Logical partitions are numbered starting from 5. -.sp -In a DOS\-type partition table the starting offset and the size of each partition is stored in two ways: as an absolute number of sectors (given in 32 bits), and as a \fBCylinders/Heads/Sectors\fP triple (given in 10+8+6 bits). The former is OK \(em with 512\-byte sectors this will work up to 2 TB. The latter has two problems. First, these C/H/S fields can be filled only when the number of heads and the number of sectors per track are known. And second, even if we know what these numbers should be, the 24 bits that are available do not suffice. DOS uses C/H/S only, Windows uses both, Linux never uses C/H/S. The \fBC/H/S addressing is deprecated\fP and may be unsupported in some later \fBfdisk\fP version. -.sp -\fBPlease, read the DOS\-mode section if you want DOS\-compatible partitions.\fP \fBfdisk\fP does not care about cylinder boundaries by default. -.RE -.sp -\fBBSD/Sun\-type\fP -.RS 4 -A BSD/Sun disklabel can describe 8 partitions, the third of which should be a `whole disk\(aq partition. Do not start a partition that actually uses its first sector (like a swap partition) at cylinder 0, since that will destroy the disklabel. Note that a \fBBSD label\fP is usually nested within a DOS partition. -.RE -.sp -\fBIRIX/SGI\-type\fP -.RS 4 -An IRIX/SGI disklabel can describe 16 partitions, the eleventh of which should be an entire `volume\(aq partition, while the ninth should be labeled `volume header\(aq. The volume header will also cover the partition table, i.e., it starts at block zero and extends by default over five cylinders. The remaining space in the volume header may be used by header directory entries. No partitions may overlap with the volume header. Also do not change its type or make some filesystem on it, since you will lose the partition table. Use this type of label only when working with Linux on IRIX/SGI machines or IRIX/SGI disks under Linux. -.sp -A sync() and an ioctl(BLKRRPART) (rereading the partition table from disk) are performed before exiting when the partition table has been updated. -.RE -.SH "DOS MODE AND DOS 6.X WARNING" -.sp -\fBNote that all this is deprecated. You don\(cqt have to care about things like\fP \fBgeometry and cylinders on modern operating systems. If you really want\fP \fBDOS\-compatible partitioning then you have to enable DOS mode and cylinder\fP \fBunits by using the \(aq\-c=dos \-u=cylinders\(aq fdisk command\-line options.\fP -.sp -The DOS 6.x FORMAT command looks for some information in the first sector of the data area of the partition, and treats this information as more reliable than the information in the partition table. DOS FORMAT expects DOS FDISK to clear the first 512 bytes of the data area of a partition whenever a size change occurs. DOS FORMAT will look at this extra information even if the /U flag is given \(em we consider this a bug in DOS FORMAT and DOS FDISK. -.sp -The bottom line is that if you use \fBfdisk\fP or \fBcfdisk\fP to change the size of a DOS partition table entry, then you must also use \fBdd\fP(1) to \fBzero the first 512 bytes\fP of that partition before using DOS FORMAT to format the partition. For example, if you were using \fBfdisk\fP to make a DOS partition table entry for \fI/dev/sda1\fP, then (after exiting \fBfdisk\fP and rebooting Linux so that the partition table information is valid) you would use the command \fBdd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/sda1 bs=512 count=1\fP to zero the first 512 bytes of the partition. -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP usually obtains the disk geometry automatically. This is not necessarily the physical disk geometry (indeed, modern disks do not really have anything like a physical geometry, certainly not something that can be described in the simplistic Cylinders/Heads/Sectors form), but it is the disk geometry that MS\-DOS uses for the partition table. -.sp -Usually all goes well by default, and there are no problems if Linux is the only system on the disk. However, if the disk has to be shared with other operating systems, it is often a good idea to let an \fBfdisk\fP from another operating system make at least one partition. When Linux boots it looks at the partition table, and tries to deduce what (fake) geometry is required for good cooperation with other systems. -.sp -Whenever a partition table is printed out in DOS mode, a consistency check is performed on the partition table entries. This check verifies that the physical and logical start and end points are identical, and that each partition starts and ends on a cylinder boundary (except for the first partition). -.sp -Some versions of MS\-DOS create a first partition which does not begin on a cylinder boundary, but on sector 2 of the first cylinder. Partitions beginning in cylinder 1 cannot begin on a cylinder boundary, but this is unlikely to cause difficulty unless you have OS/2 on your machine. -.sp -For best results, you should always use an OS\-specific partition table program. For example, you should make DOS partitions with the DOS FDISK program and Linux partitions with the Linux \fBfdisk\fP or Linux \fBcfdisk\fP(8) programs. -.SH "COLORS" -.sp -Implicit coloring can be disabled by an empty file \fI/etc/terminal\-colors.d/fdisk.disable\fP. -.sp -See \fBterminal\-colors.d\fP(5) for more details about colorization configuration. The logical color names supported by \fBfdisk\fP are: -.sp -\fBheader\fP -.RS 4 -The header of the output tables. -.RE -.sp -\fBhelp\-title\fP -.RS 4 -The help section titles. -.RE -.sp -\fBwarn\fP -.RS 4 -The warning messages. -.RE -.sp -\fBwelcome\fP -.RS 4 -The welcome message. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -\fBFDISK_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables fdisk debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBFDISK_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libfdisk debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBBLKID_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG\fP=all -.RS 4 -enables libsmartcols debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG_PADDING\fP=on -.RS 4 -use visible padding characters. -.RE -.sp -\fBLOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "," -.MTO "dave\(atgnu.org" "Davidlohr Bueso" "" -.sp -The original version was written by Andries E. Brouwer, A. V. Le Blanc and others. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBcfdisk\fP(8), -\fBmkfs\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8), -\fBsfdisk\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfdisk\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findfs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 7751c208..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findfs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,113 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: findfs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FINDFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -findfs \- find a filesystem by label or UUID -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfindfs\fP \fBNAME\fP=\fIvalue\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfindfs\fP will search the block devices in the system looking for a filesystem or partition with specified tag. The currently supported tags are: -.sp -\fBLABEL\fP=\fI<label>\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies filesystem label. -.RE -.sp -\fBUUID\fP=\fI<uuid>\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies filesystem UUID. -.RE -.sp -\fBPARTUUID\fP=\fI<uuid>\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies partition UUID. This partition identifier is supported for example for GUID Partition Table (GPT) partition tables. -.RE -.sp -\fBPARTLABEL\fP=\fI<label>\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies partition label (name). The partition labels are supported for example for GUID Partition Table (GPT) or MAC partition tables. -.RE -.sp -If the filesystem or partition is found, the device name will be printed on stdout. -.sp -The complete overview about filesystems and partitions you can get for example by -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBlsblk \-\-fs\fP -.sp -\fBpartx \-\-show <disk>\fP -.sp -\fBblkid\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -label or uuid cannot be found -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -usage error, wrong number of arguments or unknown option -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBfindfs\fP was originally written by \c -.MTO "tytso\(atmit.edu" "Theodore Ts\(cqo" "" -and re\-written for the util\-linux package by -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBblkid\fP(8), -\fBlsblk\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfindfs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findmnt.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findmnt.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 4444e3e8..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/findmnt.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,361 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: findmnt -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FINDMNT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -findmnt \- find a filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfindmnt\fP [options] -.sp -\fBfindmnt\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP|\fImountpoint\fP -.sp -\fBfindmnt\fP [options] [\fB\-\-source\fP] \fIdevice\fP [\fB\-\-target\fP \fIpath\fP|\fB\-\-mountpoint\fP \fImountpoint\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfindmnt\fP will list all mounted filesystems or search for a filesystem. The \fBfindmnt\fP command is able to search in \fI/etc/fstab\fP, \fI/etc/mtab\fP or \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP. If \fIdevice\fP or \fImountpoint\fP is not given, all filesystems are shown. -.sp -The device may be specified by device name, major:minor numbers, filesystem label or UUID, or partition label or UUID. Note that \fBfindmnt\fP follows \fBmount\fP(8) behavior where a device name may be interpreted as a mountpoint (and vice versa) if the \fB\-\-target\fP, \fB\-\-mountpoint\fP or \fB\-\-source\fP options are not specified. -.sp -The command\-line option \fB\-\-target\fP accepts any file or directory and then \fBfindmnt\fP displays the filesystem for the given path. -.sp -The command prints all mounted filesystems in the tree\-like format by default. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-A\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Disable all built\-in filters and print all filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-ascii\fP -.RS 4 -Use ascii characters for tree formatting. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the SIZE, USED and AVAIL columns in bytes rather than in a human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-nocanonicalize\fP -.RS 4 -Do not canonicalize paths at all. This option affects the comparing of paths and the evaluation of tags (LABEL, UUID, etc.). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-canonicalize\fP -.RS 4 -Canonicalize all printed paths. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-df\fP -.RS 4 -Imitate the output of \fBdf\fP(1). This option is equivalent to \fB\-o SOURCE,FSTYPE,SIZE,USED,AVAIL,USE%,TARGET\fP but excludes all pseudo filesystems. Use \fB\-\-all\fP to print all filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-direction\fP \fIword\fP -.RS 4 -The search direction, either \fBforward\fP or \fBbackward\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-evaluate\fP -.RS 4 -Convert all tags (LABEL, UUID, PARTUUID or PARTLABEL) to the corresponding device names. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-tab\-file\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Search in an alternative file. If used with \fB\-\-fstab\fP, \fB\-\-mtab\fP or \fB\-\-kernel\fP, then it overrides the default paths. If specified more than once, then tree\-like output is disabled (see the \fB\-\-list\fP option). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-first\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Print the first matching filesystem only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-invert\fP -.RS 4 -Invert the sense of matching. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-k\fP, \fB\-\-kernel\fP -.RS 4 -Search in \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP. The output is in the tree\-like format. This is the default. The output contains only mount options maintained by kernel (see also \fB\-\-mtab)\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Use the list output format. This output format is automatically enabled if the output is restricted by the \fB\-t\fP, \fB\-O\fP, \fB\-S\fP or \fB\-T\fP option and the option \fB\-\-submounts\fP is not used or if more that one source file (the option \fB\-F\fP) is specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-mountpoint\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Explicitly define the mountpoint file or directory. See also \fB\-\-target\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-mtab\fP -.RS 4 -Search in \fI/etc/mtab\fP. The output is in the list format by default (see \fB\-\-tree\fP). The output may include user space mount options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-task\fP \fItid\fP -.RS 4 -Use alternative namespace \fI/proc/<tid>/mountinfo\fP rather than the default \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP. If the option is specified more than once, then tree\-like output is disabled (see the \fB\-\-list\fP option). See also the \fBunshare\fP(1) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-options\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the set of printed filesystems. More than one option may be specified in a comma\-separated list. The \fB\-t\fP and \fB\-O\fP options are cumulative in effect. It is different from \fB\-t\fP in that each option is matched exactly; a leading \fIno\fP at the beginning does not have global meaning. The "no" can used for individual items in the list. The "no" prefix interpretation can be disabled by "+" prefix. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Define output columns. See the \fB\-\-help\fP output to get a list of the currently supported columns. The \fBTARGET\fP column contains tree formatting if the \fB\-\-list\fP or \fB\-\-raw\fP options are not specified. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP (e.g., \fBfindmnt \-o +PROPAGATION\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output almost all available columns. The columns that require \fB\-\-poll\fP are not included. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in the form of key="value" pairs. All potentially unsafe value characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). The key (variable name) will be modified to contain only characters allowed for a shell variable identifiers, for example, FS_OPTIONS and USE_PCT instead of FS\-OPTIONS and USE%. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-poll\fP[\fI=list\fP] -.RS 4 -Monitor changes in the \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP file. Supported actions are: mount, umount, remount and move. More than one action may be specified in a comma\-separated list. All actions are monitored by default. -.sp -The time for which \fB\-\-poll\fP will block can be restricted with the \fB\-\-timeout\fP or \fB\-\-first\-only\fP options. -.sp -The standard columns always use the new version of the information from the mountinfo file, except the umount action which is based on the original information cached by \fBfindmnt\fP. The poll mode allows using extra columns: -.sp -\fBACTION\fP -.RS 4 -mount, umount, move or remount action name; this column is enabled by default -.RE -.sp -\fBOLD\-TARGET\fP -.RS 4 -available for umount and move actions -.RE -.sp -\fBOLD\-OPTIONS\fP -.RS 4 -available for umount and remount actions -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-pseudo\fP -.RS 4 -Print only pseudo filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-shadow\fP -.RS 4 -Print only filesystems over\-mounted by another filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-submounts\fP -.RS 4 -Print recursively all submounts for the selected filesystems. The restrictions defined by options \fB\-t\fP, \fB\-O\fP, \fB\-S\fP, \fB\-T\fP and \fB\-\-direction\fP are not applied to submounts. All submounts are always printed in tree\-like order. The option enables the tree\-like output format by default. This option has no effect for \fB\-\-mtab\fP or \fB\-\-fstab\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use raw output format. All potentially unsafe characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-real\fP -.RS 4 -Print only real filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-source\fP \fIspec\fP -.RS 4 -Explicitly define the mount source. Supported specifications are \fIdevice\fP, \fImaj\fP\fB:\fP\fImin\fP, \fBLABEL=\fP\fIlabel\fP, \fBUUID=\fP\fIuuid\fP, \fBPARTLABEL=\fP\fIlabel\fP and \fBPARTUUID=\fP\fIuuid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-fstab\fP -.RS 4 -Search in \fI/etc/fstab\fP. The output is in the list format (see \fB\-\-list\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-target\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Define the mount target. If \fIpath\fP is not a mountpoint file or directory, then \fBfindmnt\fP checks the \fIpath\fP elements in reverse order to get the mountpoint (this feature is supported only when searching in kernel files and unsupported for \fB\-\-fstab\fP). It\(cqs recommended to use the option \fB\-\-mountpoint\fP when checks of \fIpath\fP elements are unwanted and \fIpath\fP is a strictly specified mountpoint. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-types\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the set of printed filesystems. More than one type may be specified in a comma\-separated list. The list of filesystem types can be prefixed with \fBno\fP to specify the filesystem types on which no action should be taken. For more details see \fBmount\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-tree\fP -.RS 4 -Enable tree\-like output if possible. The options is silently ignored for tables where is missing child\-parent relation (e.g., fstab). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-shadowed\fP -.RS 4 -Print only filesystems over\-mounted by another filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uniq\fP -.RS 4 -Ignore filesystems with duplicate mount targets, thus effectively skipping over\-mounted mount points. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-notruncate\fP -.RS 4 -Do not truncate text in columns. The default is to not truncate the \fBTARGET\fP, \fBSOURCE\fP, \fBUUID\fP, \fBLABEL\fP, \fBPARTUUID\fP, \fBPARTLABEL\fP columns. This option disables text truncation also in all other columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-nofsroot\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a [/dir] in the SOURCE column for bind mounts or btrfs subvolumes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-timeout\fP \fImilliseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Specify an upper limit on the time for which \fB\-\-poll\fP will block, in milliseconds. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-verify\fP -.RS 4 -Check mount table content. The default is to verify \fI/etc/fstab\fP parsability and usability. It\(cqs possible to use this option also with \fB\-\-tab\-file\fP. It\(cqs possible to specify source (device) or target (mountpoint) to filter mount table. The option \fB\-\-verbose\fP forces findmnt to print more details. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Force findmnt to print more information (\fB\-\-verify\fP only for now). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-vfs\-all\fP -.RS 4 -When used with \fBVFS\-OPTIONS\fP column, print all VFS (fs\-independent) flags. This option is designed for auditing purposes to list also default VFS kernel mount options which are normally not listed. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBMOUNT_FSTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the fstab file -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_MTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the mtab file -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libmount debug output -.RE -.sp -LIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libsmartcols debug output -.RE -.sp -LIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG_PADDING=on -.RS 4 -use visible padding characters. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-fstab \-t nfs\fP -.RS 4 -Prints all NFS filesystems defined in \fI/etc/fstab\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-fstab /mnt/foo\fP -.RS 4 -Prints all \fI/etc/fstab\fP filesystems where the mountpoint directory is \fI/mnt/foo\fP. It also prints bind mounts where \fI/mnt/foo\fP is a source. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-fstab \-\-target /mnt/foo\fP -.RS 4 -Prints all \fI/etc/fstab\fP filesystems where the mountpoint directory is \fI/mnt/foo\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-fstab \-\-evaluate\fP -.RS 4 -Prints all \fI/etc/fstab\fP filesystems and converts LABEL= and UUID= tags to the real device names. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-n \-\-raw \-\-evaluate \-\-output=target LABEL=/boot\fP -.RS 4 -Prints only the mountpoint where the filesystem with label "/boot" is mounted. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-poll \-\-mountpoint /mnt/foo\fP -.RS 4 -Monitors mount, unmount, remount and move on \fI/mnt/foo\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-poll=umount \-\-first\-only \-\-mountpoint /mnt/foo\fP -.RS 4 -Waits for \fI/mnt/foo\fP unmount. -.RE -.sp -\fBfindmnt \-\-poll=remount \-t ext3 \-O ro\fP -.RS 4 -Monitors remounts to read\-only mode on all ext3 filesystems. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfstab\fP(5), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfindmnt\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.8 deleted file mode 100644 index a136f2cb..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,250 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fsck -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSCK" "8" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fsck \- check and repair a Linux filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfsck\fP [\fB\-lsAVRTMNP\fP] [\fB\-r\fP [\fIfd\fP]] [\fB\-C\fP [\fIfd\fP]] [\fB\-t\fP \fIfstype\fP] [\fIfilesystem\fP...] [\fB\-\-\fP] [\fIfs\-specific\-options\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfsck\fP is used to check and optionally repair one or more Linux filesystems. \fIfilesystem\fP can be a device name (e.g., \fI/dev/hdc1\fP, \fI/dev/sdb2\fP), a mount point (e.g., \fI/\fP, \fI/usr\fP, \fI/home\fP), or an filesystem label or UUID specifier (e.g., UUID=8868abf6\-88c5\-4a83\-98b8\-bfc24057f7bd or LABEL=root). Normally, the \fBfsck\fP program will try to handle filesystems on different physical disk drives in parallel to reduce the total amount of time needed to check all of them. -.sp -If no filesystems are specified on the command line, and the \fB\-A\fP option is not specified, \fBfsck\fP will default to checking filesystems in \fI/etc/fstab\fP serially. This is equivalent to the \fB\-As\fP options. -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBfsck\fP is the sum of the following conditions: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -No errors -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem errors corrected -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -System should be rebooted -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem errors left uncorrected -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -Operational error -.RE -.sp -\fB16\fP -.RS 4 -Usage or syntax error -.RE -.sp -\fB32\fP -.RS 4 -Checking canceled by user request -.RE -.sp -\fB128\fP -.RS 4 -Shared\-library error -.RE -.sp -The exit status returned when multiple filesystems are checked is the bit\-wise OR of the exit statuses for each filesystem that is checked. -.sp -In actuality, \fBfsck\fP is simply a front\-end for the various filesystem checkers (\fBfsck\fP.\fIfstype\fP) available under Linux. The filesystem\-specific checker is searched for in the \fBPATH\fP environment variable. If the \fBPATH\fP is undefined then fallback to \fI/sbin\fP. -.sp -Please see the filesystem\-specific checker manual pages for further details. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-l\fP -.RS 4 -Create an exclusive \fBflock\fP(2) lock file (\fI/run/fsck/<diskname>.lock\fP) for whole\-disk device. This option can be used with one device only (this means that \fB\-A\fP and \fB\-l\fP are mutually exclusive). This option is recommended when more \fBfsck\fP instances are executed in the same time. The option is ignored when used for multiple devices or for non\-rotating disks. \fBfsck\fP does not lock underlying devices when executed to check stacked devices (e.g. MD or DM) \- this feature is not implemented yet. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP [\fIfd\fP] -.RS 4 -Report certain statistics for each fsck when it completes. These statistics include the exit status, the maximum run set size (in kilobytes), the elapsed all\-clock time and the user and system CPU time used by the fsck run. For example: -.sp -\fB/dev/sda1: status 0, rss 92828, real 4.002804, user 2.677592, sys 0.86186\fP -.sp -GUI front\-ends may specify a file descriptor \fIfd\fP, in which case the progress bar information will be sent to that file descriptor in a machine parsable format. For example: -.sp -\fB/dev/sda1 0 92828 4.002804 2.677592 0.86186\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP -.RS 4 -Serialize \fBfsck\fP operations. This is a good idea if you are checking multiple filesystems and the checkers are in an interactive mode. (Note: \fBe2fsck\fP(8) runs in an interactive mode by default. To make \fBe2fsck\fP(8) run in a non\-interactive mode, you must either specify the \fB\-p\fP or \fB\-a\fP option, if you wish for errors to be corrected automatically, or the \fB\-n\fP option if you do not.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP \fIfslist\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the type(s) of filesystem to be checked. When the \fB\-A\fP flag is specified, only filesystems that match \fIfslist\fP are checked. The \fIfslist\fP parameter is a comma\-separated list of filesystems and options specifiers. All of the filesystems in this comma\-separated list may be prefixed by a negation operator \(aq\fBno\fP\(aq or \(aq\fB!\fP\(aq, which requests that only those filesystems not listed in \fIfslist\fP will be checked. If none of the filesystems in \fIfslist\fP is prefixed by a negation operator, then only those listed filesystems will be checked. -.sp -Options specifiers may be included in the comma\-separated \fIfslist\fP. They must have the format \fBopts=\fP\fIfs\-option\fP. If an options specifier is present, then only filesystems which contain \fIfs\-option\fP in their mount options field of \fI/etc/fstab\fP will be checked. If the options specifier is prefixed by a negation operator, then only those filesystems that do not have \fIfs\-option\fP in their mount options field of \fI/etc/fstab\fP will be checked. -.sp -For example, if \fBopts=ro\fP appears in \fIfslist\fP, then only filesystems listed in \fI/etc/fstab\fP with the \fBro\fP option will be checked. -.sp -For compatibility with Mandrake distributions whose boot scripts depend upon an unauthorized UI change to the \fBfsck\fP program, if a filesystem type of \fBloop\fP is found in \fIfslist\fP, it is treated as if \fBopts=loop\fP were specified as an argument to the \fB\-t\fP option. -.sp -Normally, the filesystem type is deduced by searching for \fIfilesys\fP in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file and using the corresponding entry. If the type cannot be deduced, and there is only a single filesystem given as an argument to the \fB\-t\fP option, \fBfsck\fP will use the specified filesystem type. If this type is not available, then the default filesystem type (currently ext2) is used. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-A\fP -.RS 4 -Walk through the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file and try to check all filesystems in one run. This option is typically used from the \fI/etc/rc\fP system initialization file, instead of multiple commands for checking a single filesystem. -.sp -The root filesystem will be checked first unless the \fB\-P\fP option is specified (see below). After that, filesystems will be checked in the order specified by the \fIfs_passno\fP (the sixth) field in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. Filesystems with a \fIfs_passno\fP value of 0 are skipped and are not checked at all. Filesystems with a \fIfs_passno\fP value of greater than zero will be checked in order, with filesystems with the lowest \fIfs_passno\fP number being checked first. If there are multiple filesystems with the same pass number, \fBfsck\fP will attempt to check them in parallel, although it will avoid running multiple filesystem checks on the same physical disk. -.sp -\fBfsck\fP does not check stacked devices (RAIDs, dm\-crypt, ...) in parallel with any other device. See below for \fBFSCK_FORCE_ALL_PARALLEL\fP setting. The \fI/sys\fP filesystem is used to determine dependencies between devices. -.sp -Hence, a very common configuration in \fI/etc/fstab\fP files is to set the root filesystem to have a \fIfs_passno\fP value of 1 and to set all other filesystems to have a \fIfs_passno\fP value of 2. This will allow \fBfsck\fP to automatically run filesystem checkers in parallel if it is advantageous to do so. System administrators might choose not to use this configuration if they need to avoid multiple filesystem checks running in parallel for some reason \- for example, if the machine in question is short on memory so that excessive paging is a concern. -.sp -\fBfsck\fP normally does not check whether the device actually exists before calling a filesystem specific checker. Therefore non\-existing devices may cause the system to enter filesystem repair mode during boot if the filesystem specific checker returns a fatal error. The \fI/etc/fstab\fP mount option \fBnofail\fP may be used to have \fBfsck\fP skip non\-existing devices. \fBfsck\fP also skips non\-existing devices that have the special filesystem type \fBauto\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP [\fIfd\fP] -.RS 4 -Display completion/progress bars for those filesystem checkers (currently only for ext[234]) which support them. \fBfsck\fP will manage the filesystem checkers so that only one of them will display a progress bar at a time. GUI front\-ends may specify a file descriptor \fIfd\fP, in which case the progress bar information will be sent to that file descriptor. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP -.RS 4 -Do not check mounted filesystems and return an exit status of 0 for mounted filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt execute, just show what would be done. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP -.RS 4 -When the \fB\-A\fP flag is set, check the root filesystem in parallel with the other filesystems. This is not the safest thing in the world to do, since if the root filesystem is in doubt things like the \fBe2fsck\fP(8) executable might be corrupted! This option is mainly provided for those sysadmins who don\(cqt want to repartition the root filesystem to be small and compact (which is really the right solution). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP -.RS 4 -When checking all filesystems with the \fB\-A\fP flag, skip the root filesystem. (This is useful in case the root filesystem has already been mounted read\-write.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt show the title on startup. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP -.RS 4 -Produce verbose output, including all filesystem\-specific commands that are executed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-?\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILESYSTEM SPECIFIC OPTIONS" -.sp -\fBOptions which are not understood by fsck are passed to the filesystem\-specific checker!\fP -.sp -These options \fBmust\fP not take arguments, as there is no way for \fBfsck\fP to be able to properly guess which options take arguments and which don\(cqt. -.sp -Options and arguments which follow the \fB\-\-\fP are treated as filesystem\-specific options to be passed to the filesystem\-specific checker. -.sp -Please note that \fBfsck\fP is not designed to pass arbitrarily complicated options to filesystem\-specific checkers. If you\(cqre doing something complicated, please just execute the filesystem\-specific checker directly. If you pass \fBfsck\fP some horribly complicated options and arguments, and it doesn\(cqt do what you expect, \fBdon\(cqt bother reporting it as a bug.\fP You\(cqre almost certainly doing something that you shouldn\(cqt be doing with \fBfsck\fP. Options to different filesystem\-specific fsck\(cqs are not standardized. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -The \fBfsck\fP program\(cqs behavior is affected by the following environment variables: -.sp -\fBFSCK_FORCE_ALL_PARALLEL\fP -.RS 4 -If this environment variable is set, \fBfsck\fP will attempt to check all of the specified filesystems in parallel, regardless of whether the filesystems appear to be on the same device. (This is useful for RAID systems or high\-end storage systems such as those sold by companies such as IBM or EMC.) Note that the \fIfs_passno\fP value is still used. -.RE -.sp -\fBFSCK_MAX_INST\fP -.RS 4 -This environment variable will limit the maximum number of filesystem checkers that can be running at one time. This allows configurations which have a large number of disks to avoid \fBfsck\fP starting too many filesystem checkers at once, which might overload CPU and memory resources available on the system. If this value is zero, then an unlimited number of processes can be spawned. This is currently the default, but future versions of \fBfsck\fP may attempt to automatically determine how many filesystem checks can be run based on gathering accounting data from the operating system. -.RE -.sp -\fBPATH\fP -.RS 4 -The \fBPATH\fP environment variable is used to find filesystem checkers. -.RE -.sp -\fBFSTAB_FILE\fP -.RS 4 -This environment variable allows the system administrator to override the standard location of the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. It is also useful for developers who are testing \fBfsck\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBBLKID_DEBUG=all\fP -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.sp -\fBLIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all\fP -.RS 4 -enables libmount debug output. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/fstab\fP -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "tytso\(atmit.edu>" "Theodore Ts\(cqo" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfstab\fP(5), -\fBmkfs\fP(8), -\fBfsck.ext2\fP(8) or \fBfsck.ext3\fP(8) or \fBe2fsck\fP(8), -\fBfsck.cramfs\fP(8), -\fBfsck.jfs\fP(8), -\fBfsck.nfs\fP(8), -\fBfsck.minix\fP(8), -\fBfsck.msdos\fP(8), -\fBfsck.vfat\fP(8), -\fBfsck.xfs\fP(8), -\fBreiserfsck\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfsck\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.cramfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.cramfs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index b99968ae..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.cramfs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,106 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fsck.cramfs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSCK.CRAMFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fsck.cramfs \- fsck compressed ROM file system -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfsck.cramfs\fP [options] \fIfile\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfsck.cramfs\fP is used to check the cramfs file system. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Enable verbose messaging. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-blocksize\fP \fIblocksize\fP -.RS 4 -Use this blocksize, defaults to page size. Must be equal to what was set at creation time. Only used for \fB\-\-extract\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-extract\fP[=\fIdirectory\fP] -.RS 4 -Test to uncompress the whole file system. Optionally extract contents of the \fIfile\fP to \fIdirectory\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP -.RS 4 -This option is silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-y\fP -.RS 4 -This option is silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -file system was left uncorrected -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -operation error, such as unable to allocate memory -.RE -.sp -\fB16\fP -.RS 4 -usage information was printed -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmount\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.cramfs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfsck.cramfs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.minix.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.minix.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 13f5d74f..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsck.minix.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,199 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fsck.minix -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSCK.MINIX" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fsck.minix \- check consistency of Minix filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfsck.minix\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfsck.minix\fP performs a consistency check for the Linux MINIX filesystem. -.sp -The program assumes the filesystem is quiescent. \fBfsck.minix\fP should not be used on a mounted device unless you can be sure nobody is writing to it. Remember that the kernel can write to device when it searches for files. -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP name will usually have the following form: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -/dev/hda[1\-63] -T}:T{ -.sp -IDE disk 1 -T} -T{ -.sp -/dev/hdb[1\-63] -T}:T{ -.sp -IDE disk 2 -T} -T{ -.sp -/dev/sda[1\-15] -T}:T{ -.sp -SCSI disk 1 -T} -T{ -.sp -/dev/sdb[1\-15] -T}:T{ -.sp -SCSI disk 2 -T} -.TE -.sp -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -If the filesystem was changed, i.e., repaired, then \fBfsck.minix\fP will print "FILE SYSTEM HAS CHANGED" and will \fBsync\fP(2) three times before exiting. There is \fIno\fP need to reboot after check. -.SH "WARNING" -.sp -\fBfsck.minix\fP should \fBnot\fP be used on a mounted filesystem. Using \fBfsck.minix\fP on a mounted filesystem is very dangerous, due to the possibility that deleted files are still in use, and can seriously damage a perfectly good filesystem! If you absolutely have to run \fBfsck.minix\fP on a mounted filesystem, such as the root filesystem, make sure nothing is writing to the disk, and that no files are "zombies" waiting for deletion. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -List all filenames. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-repair\fP -.RS 4 -Perform interactive repairs. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-auto\fP -.RS 4 -Perform automatic repairs. This option implies \fB\-\-repair\fP and serves to answer all of the questions asked with the default. Note that this can be extremely dangerous in the case of extensive filesystem damage. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Be verbose. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-super\fP -.RS 4 -Output super\-block information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-uncleared\fP -.RS 4 -Activate MINIX\-like "mode not cleared" warnings. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Force a filesystem check even if the filesystem was marked as valid. Marking is done by the kernel when the filesystem is unmounted. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -.sp -There are numerous diagnostic messages. The ones mentioned here are the most commonly seen in normal usage. -.sp -If the device does not exist, \fBfsck.minix\fP will print "unable to read super block". If the device exists, but is not a MINIX filesystem, \fBfsck.minix\fP will print "bad magic number in super\-block". -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBfsck.minix\fP is the sum of the following: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -No errors -.RE -.sp -\fB3\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem errors corrected, system should be rebooted if filesystem was mounted -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem errors left uncorrected -.RE -.sp -\fB7\fP -.RS 4 -Combination of exit statuses 3 and 4 -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -Operational error -.RE -.sp -\fB16\fP -.RS 4 -Usage or syntax error -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "torvalds\(atcs.helsinki.fi" "Linus Torvalds" "." -Exit status values by -.MTO "faith\(atcs.unc.edu" "Rik Faith" "" -Added support for filesystem valid flag: -.MTO "greg%wind.uucp\(atplains.nodak.edu" "Dr. Wettstein" "." -Check to prevent fsck of mounted filesystem added by -.MTO "quinlan\(atyggdrasil.com" "Daniel Quinlan" "." -Minix v2 fs support by -.MTO "schwab\(atissan.informatik.uni\-dortmund.de" "Andreas Schwab" "," -updated by -.MTO "janl\(atmath.uio.no" "Nicolai Langfeldt" "." -Portability patch by -.MTO "rmk\(atecs.soton.ac.uk" "Russell King" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfsck\fP(8), -\fBfsck.ext2\fP(8), -\fBmkfs\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.ext2\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.minix\fP(8), -\fBreboot\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfsck.minix\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsfreeze.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsfreeze.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 5647deaf..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fsfreeze.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fsfreeze -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSFREEZE" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fsfreeze \- suspend access to a filesystem (Ext3/4, ReiserFS, JFS, XFS) -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfsfreeze\fP \fB\-\-freeze\fP|\fB\-\-unfreeze\fP \fImountpoint\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfsfreeze\fP suspends or resumes access to a filesystem. -.sp -\fBfsfreeze\fP halts any new access to the filesystem and creates a stable image on disk. \fBfsfreeze\fP is intended to be used with hardware RAID devices that support the creation of snapshots. -.sp -\fBfsfreeze\fP is unnecessary for \fBdevice\-mapper\fP devices. The device\-mapper (and LVM) automatically freezes a filesystem on the device when a snapshot creation is requested. For more details see the \fBdmsetup\fP(8) man page. -.sp -The \fImountpoint\fP argument is the pathname of the directory where the filesystem is mounted. The filesystem must be mounted to be frozen (see \fBmount\fP(8)). -.sp -Note that access\-time updates are also suspended if the filesystem is mounted with the traditional atime behavior (mount option \fBstrictatime\fP, for more details see \fBmount\fP(8)). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-freeze\fP -.RS 4 -This option requests the specified a filesystem to be frozen from new modifications. When this is selected, all ongoing transactions in the filesystem are allowed to complete, new write system calls are halted, other calls which modify the filesystem are halted, and all dirty data, metadata, and log information are written to disk. Any process attempting to write to the frozen filesystem will block waiting for the filesystem to be unfrozen. -.sp -Note that even after freezing, the on\-disk filesystem can contain information on files that are still in the process of unlinking. These files will not be unlinked until the filesystem is unfrozen or a clean mount of the snapshot is complete. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-unfreeze\fP -.RS 4 -This option is used to un\-freeze the filesystem and allow operations to continue. Any filesystem modifications that were blocked by the freeze are unblocked and allowed to complete. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILESYSTEM SUPPORT" -.sp -This command will work only if filesystem supports has support for freezing. List of these filesystems include (2016\-12\-18) \fBbtrfs\fP, \fBext2/3/4\fP, \fBf2fs\fP, \fBjfs\fP, \fBnilfs2\fP, \fBreiserfs\fP, and \fBxfs\fP. Previous list may be incomplete, as more filesystems get support. If in doubt easiest way to know if a filesystem has support is create a small loopback mount and test freezing it. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -This man page is based on \fBxfs_freeze\fP(8). -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Written by Hajime Taira. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfsfreeze\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fstrim.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fstrim.8 deleted file mode 100644 index f67e3691..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/fstrim.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,144 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: fstrim -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "FSTRIM" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -fstrim \- discard unused blocks on a mounted filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBfstrim\fP [\fB\-Aa\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] [\fB\-l\fP \fIlength\fP] [\fB\-m\fP \fIminimum\-size\fP] [\fB\-v\fP \fImountpoint\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBfstrim\fP is used on a mounted filesystem to discard (or "trim") blocks which are not in use by the filesystem. This is useful for solid\-state drives (SSDs) and thinly\-provisioned storage. -.sp -By default, \fBfstrim\fP will discard all unused blocks in the filesystem. Options may be used to modify this behavior based on range or size, as explained below. -.sp -The \fImountpoint\fP argument is the pathname of the directory where the filesystem is mounted. -.sp -Running \fBfstrim\fP frequently, or even using \fBmount \-o discard\fP, might negatively affect the lifetime of poor\-quality SSD devices. For most desktop and server systems a sufficient trimming frequency is once a week. Note that not all devices support a queued trim, so each trim command incurs a performance penalty on whatever else might be trying to use the disk at the time. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIoffset\fP, \fIlength\fP, and \fIminimum\-size\fP arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.sp -\fB\-A, \-\-fstab\fP -.RS 4 -Trim all mounted filesystems mentioned in \fI/etc/fstab\fP on devices that support the discard operation. The root filesystem is determined from kernel command line if missing in the file. The other supplied options, like \fB\-\-offset\fP, \fB\-\-length\fP and \fB\-\-minimum\fP, are applied to all these devices. Errors from filesystems that do not support the discard operation, read\-only devices and read\-only filesystems are silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a, \-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Trim all mounted filesystems on devices that support the discard operation. The other supplied options, like \fB\-\-offset\fP, \fB\-\-length\fP and \fB\-\-minimum\fP, are applied to all these devices. Errors from filesystems that do not support the discard operation, read\-only devices and read\-only filesystems are silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n, \-\-dry\-run\fP -.RS 4 -This option does everything apart from actually call \fBFITRIM\fP ioctl. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o, \-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Byte offset in the filesystem from which to begin searching for free blocks to discard. The default value is zero, starting at the beginning of the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l, \-\-length\fP \fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -The number of bytes (after the starting point) to search for free blocks to discard. If the specified value extends past the end of the filesystem, \fBfstrim\fP will stop at the filesystem size boundary. The default value extends to the end of the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I, \-\-listed\-in\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies a colon\-separated list of files in fstab or kernel mountinfo format. All missing or empty files are silently ignored. The evaluation of the \fIlist\fP stops after first non\-empty file. For example: -.sp -\fB\-\-listed\-in /etc/fstab:/proc/self/mountinfo\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m, \-\-minimum\fP \fIminimum\-size\fP -.RS 4 -Minimum contiguous free range to discard, in bytes. (This value is internally rounded up to a multiple of the filesystem block size.) Free ranges smaller than this will be ignored and fstrim will adjust the minimum if it\(cqs smaller than the device\(cqs minimum, and report that (fstrim_range.minlen) back to userspace. By increasing this value, the fstrim operation will complete more quickly for filesystems with badly fragmented freespace, although not all blocks will be discarded. The default value is zero, discarding every free block. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v, \-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose execution. With this option \fBfstrim\fP will output the number of bytes passed from the filesystem down the block stack to the device for potential discard. This number is a maximum discard amount from the storage device\(cqs perspective, because \fIFITRIM\fP ioctl called repeated will keep sending the same sectors for discard repeatedly. -.sp -\fBfstrim\fP will report the same potential discard bytes each time, but only sectors which had been written to between the discards would actually be discarded by the storage device. Further, the kernel block layer reserves the right to adjust the discard ranges to fit raid stripe geometry, non\-trim capable devices in a LVM setup, etc. These reductions would not be reflected in fstrim_range.len (the \fB\-\-length\fP option). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-quiet\-unsupported\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress error messages if trim operation (ioctl) is unsupported. This option is meant to be used in systemd service file or in cron scripts to hide warnings that are result of known problems, such as NTFS driver reporting \fIBad file descriptor\fP when device is mounted read\-only, or lack of file system support for ioctl FITRIM call. This option also cleans exit status when unsupported filesystem specified on fstrim command line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -0 -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -1 -.RS 4 -failure -.RE -.sp -32 -.RS 4 -all failed -.RE -.sp -64 -.RS 4 -some filesystem discards have succeeded, some failed -.RE -.sp -The command \fBfstrim \-\-all\fP returns 0 (all succeeded), 32 (all failed) or 64 (some failed, some succeeded). -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "lczerner\(atredhat.com" "Lukas Czerner" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBblkdiscard\fP(8), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBfstrim\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-bios-setup.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-bios-setup.8 index 5f2bc8a3..3e0cbccd 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-bios-setup.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-bios-setup.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-BIOS-SETUP "8" "January 2024" "grub-bios-setup (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-BIOS-SETUP "8" "March 2024" "grub-bios-setup (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-bios-setup \- set up a device to boot using GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-install.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-install.8 index 982b42ab..3751ea28 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-install.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-install.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-INSTALL "8" "January 2024" "grub-install (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-INSTALL "8" "March 2024" "grub-install (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-install \- install GRUB to a device .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-macbless.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-macbless.8 index 55500a02..4479a16d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-macbless.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-macbless.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MACBLESS "8" "January 2024" "grub-macbless (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-MACBLESS "8" "March 2024" "grub-macbless (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-macbless \- bless a mac file/directory .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-mkconfig.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-mkconfig.8 index a5f5dcfa..be87e329 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-mkconfig.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-mkconfig.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-MKCONFIG "8" "January 2024" "grub-mkconfig (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-MKCONFIG "8" "March 2024" "grub-mkconfig (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-mkconfig \- generate a GRUB configuration file .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-ofpathname.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-ofpathname.8 index 06ec60f5..ccb7c0e9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-ofpathname.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-ofpathname.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-OFPATHNAME "8" "January 2024" "grub-ofpathname 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-OFPATHNAME "8" "March 2024" "grub-ofpathname 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-ofpathname \- find OpenBOOT path for a device .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-probe.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-probe.8 index e31afc65..bc7680b3 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-probe.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-probe.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-PROBE "8" "January 2024" "grub-probe (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-PROBE "8" "March 2024" "grub-probe (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-probe \- probe device information for GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-reboot.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-reboot.8 index 2cdb2fbd..44f4e9f3 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-reboot.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-reboot.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-REBOOT "8" "January 2024" "grub-reboot (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-REBOOT "8" "March 2024" "grub-reboot (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-reboot \- set the default boot entry for GRUB, for the next boot only .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-set-default.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-set-default.8 index c99167a3..3dc9cc2d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-set-default.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-set-default.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-SET-DEFAULT "8" "January 2024" "grub-set-default (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-SET-DEFAULT "8" "March 2024" "grub-set-default (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-set-default \- set the saved default boot entry for GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-sparc64-setup.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-sparc64-setup.8 index 96a6d237..678356a7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-sparc64-setup.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/grub2-sparc64-setup.8 @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ .\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.47.5. -.TH GRUB-SPARC64-SETUP "8" "January 2024" "grub-sparc64-setup (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" +.TH GRUB-SPARC64-SETUP "8" "March 2024" "grub-sparc64-setup (GRUB2) 2.12" "System Administration Utilities" .SH NAME grub-sparc64-setup \- set up a device to boot using GRUB .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/gssd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/gssd.8 index 87eef024..2a5384d3 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/gssd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/gssd.8 @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ rpc.gssd \- RPCSEC_GSS daemon .SH SYNOPSIS .B rpc.gssd -.RB [ \-DfMnlvr ] +.RB [ \-DfMnlvrHC ] .RB [ \-k .IR keytab ] .RB [ \-p @@ -17,6 +17,10 @@ rpc.gssd \- RPCSEC_GSS daemon .IR ccachedir ] .RB [ \-t .IR timeout ] +.RB [ \-T +.IR timeout ] +.RB [ \-U +.IR timeout ] .RB [ \-R .IR realm ] .SH INTRODUCTION @@ -45,22 +49,20 @@ is known as a .BR kerberos (1) for more on principals). .P -For certain operations, a credential is required -which represents no user, -is otherwise unprivileged, -and is always available. -This is referred to as a +Certain operations require a credential that +represents no particular user +or +represents the host itself. +This kind of credential is called a .IR "machine credential" . .P -Machine credentials are typically established using a -.IR "service principal" , -whose encrypted password, called its -.IR key , -is stored in a file, called a -.IR keytab , -to avoid requiring a user prompt. -A machine credential effectively does not expire because the system -can renew it as needed without user intervention. +A host establishes its machine credential using a +.I "service principal" +whose encrypted password is stored in a local file known as a +.IR keytab . +A machine credential remains effective +without user intervention +as long as the host can renew it. .P Once obtained, credentials are typically stored in local temporary files with well-known pathnames. @@ -93,30 +95,12 @@ See the description of the .B -d option for details. .SS Machine Credentials -A user credential is established by a user and -is then shared with the kernel and -.BR rpc.gssd . -A machine credential is established by -.B rpc.gssd -for the kernel when there is no user. -Therefore -.B rpc.gssd -must already have the materials on hand to establish this credential -without requiring user intervention. -.P .B rpc.gssd -searches the local system's keytab for a principal and key to use -to establish the machine credential. -By default, -.B rpc.gssd -assumes the file -.I /etc/krb5.keytab -contains principals and keys that can be used to obtain machine credentials. -.P -.B rpc.gssd -searches in the following order for a principal to use. -The first matching credential is used. -For the search, <hostname> and <REALM> are replaced with the local +searches the default keytab, +.IR /etc/krb5.keytab , +in the following order for a principal and password to use +when establishing the machine credential. +For the search, rpc.gssd replaces <hostname> and <REALM> with the local system's hostname and Kerberos realm. .sp <HOSTNAME>$@<REALM> @@ -133,15 +117,20 @@ system's hostname and Kerberos realm. .br host/<anyname>@<REALM> .sp -The <anyname> entries match on the service name and realm, but ignore the hostname. -These can be used if a principal matching the local host's name is not found. +rpc.gssd selects one of the <anyname> entries if it does not find +a service principal matching the local hostname, +e.g. if DHCP assigns the local hostname dynamically. +The <anyname> facility enables the use of the same keytab on multiple systems. +However, using the same service principal to establish a machine credential +on multiple hosts can create unwanted security exposures +and is therefore not recommended. .P -Note that the first principal in the search order is a user principal +Note that <HOSTNAME>$@<REALM> is a user principal that enables Kerberized NFS when the local system is joined to an Active Directory domain using Samba. -A password for this principal must be provided in the local system's keytab. +The keytab provides the password for this principal. .P -You can specify another keytab by using the +You can specify a different keytab by using the .B -k option if .I /etc/krb5.keytab @@ -290,13 +279,35 @@ seconds, which allows changing Kerberos tickets and identities frequently. The default is no explicit timeout, which means the kernel context will live the lifetime of the Kerberos service ticket used in its creation. .TP -.B -T timeout +.BI "-T " timeout Timeout, in seconds, to create an RPC connection with a server while establishing an authenticated gss context for a user. The default timeout is set to 5 seconds. If you get messages like "WARNING: can't create tcp rpc_clnt to server %servername% for user with uid %uid%: RPC: Remote system error - Connection timed out", you should consider an increase of this timeout. +.TP +.BI "-U " timeout +Timeout, in seconds, for upcall threads. Threads executing longer than +.I timeout +seconds will cause an error message to be logged. The default +.I timeout +is 30 seconds. The minimum is 5 seconds. The maximum is 600 seconds. +.TP +.B -C +In addition to logging an error message for threads that have timed out, +the thread will be canceled and an error of -ETIMEDOUT will be reported +to the kernel. +.TP +.B -H +Avoids setting $HOME to "/". This allows rpc.gssd to read per user k5identity +files versus trying to read /.k5identity for each user. + +If +.B \-H +is not set, rpc.gssd will use the first match found in +/var/kerberos/krb5/user/$EUID/client.keytab and will not use a principal based on +host and/or service parameters listed in $HOME/.k5identity. .SH CONFIGURATION FILE Many of the options that can be set on the command line can also be controlled through values set in the @@ -305,6 +316,14 @@ section of the .I /etc/nfs.conf configuration file. Values recognized include: .TP +.B verbosity +Value which is equivalent to the number of +.BR -v . +.TP +.B rpc-verbosity +Value which is equivalent to the number of +.BR -r . +.TP .B use-memcache A Boolean flag equivalent to .BR -M . @@ -329,15 +348,11 @@ Equivalent to .TP .B context-timeout Equivalent to -.BR -T . -.TP -.B rpc-timeout -Equivalent to .BR -t . .TP -.B pipefs-directory +.B rpc-timeout Equivalent to -.BR -p . +.BR -T . .TP .B keytab-file Equivalent to @@ -350,6 +365,32 @@ Equivalent to .B preferred-realm Equivalent to .BR -R . +.TP +.B upcall-timeout +Equivalent to +.BR -U . +.TP +.B cancel-timed-out-upcalls +Setting to +.B true +is equivalent to providing the +.B -C +flag. +.TP +.B set-home +Setting to +.B false +is equivalent to providing the +.B -H +flag. +.P +In addtion, the following value is recognized from the +.B [general] +section: +.TP +.B pipefs-directory +Equivalent to +.BR -p . .SH SEE ALSO .BR rpc.svcgssd (8), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/hwclock.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/hwclock.8 deleted file mode 100644 index ba59b326..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/hwclock.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,589 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: hwclock -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "HWCLOCK" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -hwclock \- time clocks utility -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP [\fIfunction\fP] [\fIoption\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP is an administration tool for the time clocks. It can: display the Hardware Clock time; set the Hardware Clock to a specified time; set the Hardware Clock from the System Clock; set the System Clock from the Hardware Clock; compensate for Hardware Clock drift; correct the System Clock timescale; set the kernel\(cqs timezone, NTP timescale, and epoch (Alpha only); and predict future Hardware Clock values based on its drift rate. -.sp -Since v2.26 important changes were made to the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function and the \fB\-\-directisa\fP option, and a new option \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP was added. See their respective descriptions below. -.SH "FUNCTIONS" -.sp -The following functions are mutually exclusive, only one can be given at a time. If none is given, the default is \fB\-\-show\fP. -.sp -\fB\-a, \-\-adjust\fP -.RS 4 -Add or subtract time from the Hardware Clock to account for systematic drift since the last time the clock was set or adjusted. See the discussion below, under \fBThe Adjust Function\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-getepoch\fP; \fB\-\-setepoch\fP -.RS 4 -These functions are for Alpha machines only, and are only available through the Linux kernel RTC driver. -.sp -They are used to read and set the kernel\(cqs Hardware Clock epoch value. Epoch is the number of years into AD to which a zero year value in the Hardware Clock refers. For example, if the machine\(cqs BIOS sets the year counter in the Hardware Clock to contain the number of full years since 1952, then the kernel\(cqs Hardware Clock epoch value must be 1952. -.sp -The \fB\-\-setepoch\fP function requires using the \fB\-\-epoch\fP option to specify the year. For example: -.sp -\fBhwclock \-\-setepoch \-\-epoch=1952\fP -.sp -The RTC driver attempts to guess the correct epoch value, so setting it may not be required. -.sp -This epoch value is used whenever \fBhwclock\fP reads or sets the Hardware Clock on an Alpha machine. For ISA machines the kernel uses the fixed Hardware Clock epoch of 1900. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-predict\fP -.RS 4 -Predict what the Hardware Clock will read in the future based upon the time given by the \fB\-\-date\fP option and the information in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. This is useful, for example, to account for drift when setting a Hardware Clock wakeup (aka alarm). See \fBrtcwake\fP(8). -.sp -Do not use this function if the Hardware Clock is being modified by anything other than the current operating system\(cqs \fBhwclock\fP command, such as \(aq11 minute mode\(aq or from dual\-booting another OS. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-show\fP; \fB\-\-get\fP -.RS 4 -Read the Hardware Clock and print its time to standard output in the \fBISO 8601\fP format. The time shown is always in local time, even if you keep your Hardware Clock in UTC. See the \fB\-\-localtime\fP option. -.sp -Showing the Hardware Clock time is the default when no function is specified. -.sp -The \fB\-\-get\fP function also applies drift correction to the time read, based upon the information in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. Do not use this function if the Hardware Clock is being modified by anything other than the current operating system\(cqs \fBhwclock\fP command, such as \(aq11 minute mode\(aq or from dual\-booting another OS. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-hctosys\fP -.RS 4 -Set the System Clock from the Hardware Clock. The time read from the Hardware Clock is compensated to account for systematic drift before using it to set the System Clock. See the discussion below, under \fBThe Adjust Function\fP. -.sp -The System Clock must be kept in the UTC timescale for date\-time applications to work correctly in conjunction with the timezone configured for the system. If the Hardware Clock is kept in local time then the time read from it must be shifted to the UTC timescale before using it to set the System Clock. The \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function does this based upon the information in the \fI/etc/adjtime\fP file or the command line arguments \fB\-\-localtime\fP and \fB\-\-utc\fP. Note: no daylight saving adjustment is made. See the discussion below, under \fBLOCAL vs UTC\fP. -.sp -The kernel also keeps a timezone value, the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function sets it to the timezone configured for the system. The system timezone is configured by the TZ environment variable or the \fI/etc/localtime\fP file, as \fBtzset\fP(3) would interpret them. The obsolete \fItz_dsttime\fP field of the kernel\(cqs timezone value is set to zero. (For details on what this field used to mean, see \fBsettimeofday\fP(2).) -.sp -When used in a startup script, making the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function the first caller of \fBsettimeofday\fP(2) from boot, it will set the NTP \(aq11 minute mode\(aq timescale via the \fIpersistent_clock_is_local\fP kernel variable. If the Hardware Clock\(cqs timescale configuration is changed then a reboot is required to inform the kernel. See the discussion below, under \fBAutomatic Hardware Clock Synchronization by the Kernel\fP. -.sp -This is a good function to use in one of the system startup scripts before the file systems are mounted read/write. -.sp -This function should never be used on a running system. Jumping system time will cause problems, such as corrupted filesystem timestamps. Also, if something has changed the Hardware Clock, like NTP\(cqs \(aq11 minute mode\(aq, then \fB\-\-hctosys\fP will set the time incorrectly by including drift compensation. -.sp -Drift compensation can be inhibited by setting the drift factor in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP to zero. This setting will be persistent as long as the \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP option is not used with \fB\-\-systohc\fP at shutdown (or anywhere else). Another way to inhibit this is by using the \fB\-\-noadjfile\fP option when calling the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function. A third method is to delete the \fI/etc/adjtime\fP file. \fBHwclock\fP will then default to using the UTC timescale for the Hardware Clock. If the Hardware Clock is ticking local time it will need to be defined in the file. This can be done by calling \fBhwclock \-\-localtime \-\-adjust\fP; when the file is not present this command will not actually adjust the Clock, but it will create the file with local time configured, and a drift factor of zero. -.sp -A condition under which inhibiting \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs drift correction may be desired is when dual\-booting multiple operating systems. If while this instance of Linux is stopped, another OS changes the Hardware Clock\(cqs value, then when this instance is started again the drift correction applied will be incorrect. -.sp -For \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs drift correction to work properly it is imperative that nothing changes the Hardware Clock while its Linux instance is not running. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-set\fP -.RS 4 -Set the Hardware Clock to the time given by the \fB\-\-date\fP option, and update the timestamps in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. With the \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP option also (re)calculate the drift factor. Try it without the option if \fB\-\-set\fP fails. See \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP below. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-systz\fP -.RS 4 -This is an alternate to the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function that does not read the Hardware Clock nor set the System Clock; consequently there is not any drift correction. It is intended to be used in a startup script on systems with kernels above version 2.6 where you know the System Clock has been set from the Hardware Clock by the kernel during boot. -.sp -It does the following things that are detailed above in the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP function: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Corrects the System Clock timescale to UTC as needed. Only instead of accomplishing this by setting the System Clock, \fBhwclock\fP simply informs the kernel and it handles the change. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Sets the kernel\(cqs NTP \(aq11 minute mode\(aq timescale. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Sets the kernel\(cqs timezone. -.RE -.RE -.sp -The first two are only available on the first call of \fBsettimeofday\fP(2) after boot. Consequently this option only makes sense when used in a startup script. If the Hardware Clocks timescale configuration is changed then a reboot would be required to inform the kernel. -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-systohc\fP -.RS 4 -Set the Hardware Clock from the System Clock, and update the timestamps in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. With the \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP option also (re)calculate the drift factor. Try it without the option if \fB\-\-systohc\fP fails. See \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP below. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-\-adjfile=\fP\fIfilename\fP -.RS 4 -Override the default \fI/etc/adjtime\fP file path. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-date=\fP\fIdate_string\fP -.RS 4 -This option must be used with the \fB\-\-set\fP or \fB\-\-predict\fP functions, otherwise it is ignored. -.sp -\fBhwclock \-\-set \-\-date=\(aq16:45\(aq\fP -.sp -\fBhwclock \-\-predict \-\-date=\(aq2525\-08\-14 07:11:05\(aq\fP -.sp -The argument must be in local time, even if you keep your Hardware Clock in UTC. See the \fB\-\-localtime\fP option. Therefore, the argument should not include any timezone information. It also should not be a relative time like "+5 minutes", because \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs precision depends upon correlation between the argument\(cqs value and when the enter key is pressed. Fractional seconds are silently dropped. This option is capable of understanding many time and date formats, but the previous parameters should be observed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-delay=\fP\fIseconds\fP -.RS 4 -This option can be used to overwrite the internally used delay when setting the clock time. The default is 0.5 (500ms) for rtc_cmos, for another RTC types the delay is 0. If RTC type is impossible to determine (from sysfs) then it defaults also to 0.5 to be backwardly compatible. -.sp -The 500ms default is based on commonly used MC146818A\-compatible (x86) hardware clock. This Hardware Clock can only be set to any integer time plus one half second. The integer time is required because there is no interface to set or get a fractional second. The additional half second delay is because the Hardware Clock updates to the following second precisely 500 ms after setting the new time. Unfortunately, this behavior is hardware specific and in same cases another delay is required. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-debug\fP -.RS 4 -Use \fB\-\-verbose\fP. The \fB\-\-debug\fP option has been deprecated and may be repurposed or removed in a future release. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-directisa\fP -.RS 4 -This option is meaningful for ISA compatible machines in the x86 and x86_64 family. For other machines, it has no effect. This option tells \fBhwclock\fP to use explicit I/O instructions to access the Hardware Clock. Without this option, \fBhwclock\fP will use the rtc device file, which it assumes to be driven by the Linux RTC device driver. As of v2.26 it will no longer automatically use directisa when the rtc driver is unavailable; this was causing an unsafe condition that could allow two processes to access the Hardware Clock at the same time. Direct hardware access from userspace should only be used for testing, troubleshooting, and as a last resort when all other methods fail. See the \fB\-\-rtc\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-epoch=\fP\fIyear\fP -.RS 4 -This option is required when using the \fB\-\-setepoch\fP function. The minimum \fIyear\fP value is 1900. The maximum is system dependent (\fBULONG_MAX \- 1\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-rtc=\fP\fIfilename\fP -.RS 4 -Override \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs default rtc device file name. Otherwise it will use the first one found in this order: \fI/dev/rtc0\fP, \fI/dev/rtc\fP, \fI/dev/misc/rtc\fP. For \fBIA\-64:\fP \fI/dev/efirtc\fP \fI/dev/misc/efirtc\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-localtime\fP; \fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-utc\fP -.RS 4 -Indicate which timescale the Hardware Clock is set to. -.sp -The Hardware Clock may be configured to use either the UTC or the local timescale, but nothing in the clock itself says which alternative is being used. The \fB\-\-localtime\fP or \fB\-\-utc\fP options give this information to the \fBhwclock\fP command. If you specify the wrong one (or specify neither and take a wrong default), both setting and reading the Hardware Clock will be incorrect. -.sp -If you specify neither \fB\-\-utc\fP nor \fB\-\-localtime\fP then the one last given with a set function (\fB\-\-set\fP, \fB\-\-systohc\fP, or \fB\-\-adjust\fP), as recorded in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP, will be used. If the adjtime file doesn\(cqt exist, the default is UTC. -.sp -Note: daylight saving time changes may be inconsistent when the Hardware Clock is kept in local time. See the discussion below, under \fBLOCAL vs UTC\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-noadjfile\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the facilities provided by \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. \fBhwclock\fP will not read nor write to that file with this option. Either \fB\-\-utc\fP or \fB\-\-localtime\fP must be specified when using this option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-test\fP -.RS 4 -Do not actually change anything on the system, that is, the Clocks or \fI/etc/adjtime\fP (\fB\-\-verbose\fP is implicit with this option). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-update\-drift\fP -.RS 4 -Update the Hardware Clock\(cqs drift factor in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. It can only be used with \fB\-\-set\fP or \fB\-\-systohc\fP. -.sp -A minimum four hour period between settings is required. This is to avoid invalid calculations. The longer the period, the more precise the resulting drift factor will be. -.sp -This option was added in v2.26, because it is typical for systems to call \fBhwclock \-\-systohc\fP at shutdown; with the old behavior this would automatically (re)calculate the drift factor which caused several problems: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -When using NTP with an \(aq11 minute mode\(aq kernel the drift factor would be clobbered to near zero. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -It would not allow the use of \(aqcold\(aq drift correction. With most configurations using \(aqcold\(aq drift will yield favorable results. Cold, means when the machine is turned off which can have a significant impact on the drift factor. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -(Re)calculating drift factor on every shutdown delivers suboptimal results. For example, if ephemeral conditions cause the machine to be abnormally hot the drift factor calculation would be out of range. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Significantly increased system shutdown times (as of v2.31 when not using \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP the RTC is not read). -.RE -.RE -.sp -Having \fBhwclock\fP calculate the drift factor is a good starting point, but for optimal results it will likely need to be adjusted by directly editing the \fI/etc/adjtime\fP file. For most configurations once a machine\(cqs optimal drift factor is crafted it should not need to be changed. Therefore, the old behavior to automatically (re)calculate drift was changed and now requires this option to be used. See the discussion below, under \fBThe Adjust Function\fP. -.sp -This option requires reading the Hardware Clock before setting it. If it cannot be read, then this option will cause the set functions to fail. This can happen, for example, if the Hardware Clock is corrupted by a power failure. In that case, the clock must first be set without this option. Despite it not working, the resulting drift correction factor would be invalid anyway. -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Display more details about what \fBhwclock\fP is doing internally. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.SS "Clocks in a Linux System" -.sp -There are two types of date\-time clocks: -.sp -\fBThe Hardware Clock:\fP This clock is an independent hardware device, with its own power domain (battery, capacitor, etc), that operates when the machine is powered off, or even unplugged. -.sp -On an ISA compatible system, this clock is specified as part of the ISA standard. A control program can read or set this clock only to a whole second, but it can also detect the edges of the 1 second clock ticks, so the clock actually has virtually infinite precision. -.sp -This clock is commonly called the hardware clock, the real time clock, the RTC, the BIOS clock, and the CMOS clock. Hardware Clock, in its capitalized form, was coined for use by \fBhwclock\fP. The Linux kernel also refers to it as the persistent clock. -.sp -Some non\-ISA systems have a few real time clocks with only one of them having its own power domain. A very low power external I2C or SPI clock chip might be used with a backup battery as the hardware clock to initialize a more functional integrated real\-time clock which is used for most other purposes. -.sp -\fBThe System Clock:\fP This clock is part of the Linux kernel and is driven by a timer interrupt. (On an ISA machine, the timer interrupt is part of the ISA standard.) It has meaning only while Linux is running on the machine. The System Time is the number of seconds since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970 UTC (or more succinctly, the number of seconds since 1969 UTC). The System Time is not an integer, though. It has virtually infinite precision. -.sp -The System Time is the time that matters. The Hardware Clock\(cqs basic purpose is to keep time when Linux is not running so that the System Clock can be initialized from it at boot. Note that in DOS, for which ISA was designed, the Hardware Clock is the only real time clock. -.sp -It is important that the System Time not have any discontinuities such as would happen if you used the \fBdate\fP(1) program to set it while the system is running. You can, however, do whatever you want to the Hardware Clock while the system is running, and the next time Linux starts up, it will do so with the adjusted time from the Hardware Clock. Note: currently this is not possible on most systems because \fBhwclock \-\-systohc\fP is called at shutdown. -.sp -The Linux kernel\(cqs timezone is set by \fBhwclock\fP. But don\(cqt be misled \(em almost nobody cares what timezone the kernel thinks it is in. Instead, programs that care about the timezone (perhaps because they want to display a local time for you) almost always use a more traditional method of determining the timezone: They use the \fBTZ\fP environment variable or the \fI/etc/localtime\fP file, as explained in the man page for \fBtzset\fP(3). However, some programs and fringe parts of the Linux kernel such as filesystems use the kernel\(cqs timezone value. An example is the vfat filesystem. If the kernel timezone value is wrong, the vfat filesystem will report and set the wrong timestamps on files. Another example is the kernel\(cqs NTP \(aq11 minute mode\(aq. If the kernel\(cqs timezone value and/or the \fIpersistent_clock_is_local\fP variable are wrong, then the Hardware Clock will be set incorrectly by \(aq11 minute mode\(aq. See the discussion below, under \fBAutomatic Hardware Clock Synchronization by the Kernel\fP. -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP sets the kernel\(cqs timezone to the value indicated by \fBTZ\fP or \fI/etc/localtime\fP with the \fB\-\-hctosys\fP or \fB\-\-systz\fP functions. -.sp -The kernel\(cqs timezone value actually consists of two parts: 1) a field tz_minuteswest indicating how many minutes local time (not adjusted for DST) lags behind UTC, and 2) a field tz_dsttime indicating the type of Daylight Savings Time (DST) convention that is in effect in the locality at the present time. This second field is not used under Linux and is always zero. See also \fBsettimeofday\fP(2). -.SS "Hardware Clock Access Methods" -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP uses many different ways to get and set Hardware Clock values. The most normal way is to do I/O to the rtc device special file, which is presumed to be driven by the rtc device driver. Also, Linux systems using the rtc framework with udev, are capable of supporting multiple Hardware Clocks. This may bring about the need to override the default rtc device by specifying one with the \fB\-\-rtc\fP option. -.sp -However, this method is not always available as older systems do not have an rtc driver. On these systems, the method of accessing the Hardware Clock depends on the system hardware. -.sp -On an ISA compatible system, \fBhwclock\fP can directly access the "CMOS memory" registers that constitute the clock, by doing I/O to Ports 0x70 and 0x71. It does this with actual I/O instructions and consequently can only do it if running with superuser effective userid. This method may be used by specifying the \fB\-\-directisa\fP option. -.sp -This is a really poor method of accessing the clock, for all the reasons that userspace programs are generally not supposed to do direct I/O and disable interrupts. \fBhwclock\fP provides it for testing, troubleshooting, and because it may be the only method available on ISA systems which do not have a working rtc device driver. -.SS "The Adjust Function" -.sp -The Hardware Clock is usually not very accurate. However, much of its inaccuracy is completely predictable \- it gains or loses the same amount of time every day. This is called systematic drift. \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs \fB\-\-adjust\fP function lets you apply systematic drift corrections to the Hardware Clock. -.sp -It works like this: \fBhwclock\fP keeps a file, \fI/etc/adjtime\fP, that keeps some historical information. This is called the adjtime file. -.sp -Suppose you start with no adjtime file. You issue a \fBhwclock \-\-set\fP command to set the Hardware Clock to the true current time. \fBhwclock\fP creates the adjtime file and records in it the current time as the last time the clock was calibrated. Five days later, the clock has gained 10 seconds, so you issue a \fBhwclock \-\-set \-\-update\-drift\fP command to set it back 10 seconds. \fBhwclock\fP updates the adjtime file to show the current time as the last time the clock was calibrated, and records 2 seconds per day as the systematic drift rate. 24 hours go by, and then you issue a \fBhwclock \-\-adjust\fP command. \fBhwclock\fP consults the adjtime file and sees that the clock gains 2 seconds per day when left alone and that it has been left alone for exactly one day. So it subtracts 2 seconds from the Hardware Clock. It then records the current time as the last time the clock was adjusted. Another 24 hours go by and you issue another \fBhwclock \-\-adjust\fP. \fBhwclock\fP does the same thing: subtracts 2 seconds and updates the adjtime file with the current time as the last time the clock was adjusted. -.sp -When you use the \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP option with \fB\-\-set\fP or \fB\-\-systohc\fP, the systematic drift rate is (re)calculated by comparing the fully drift corrected current Hardware Clock time with the new set time, from that it derives the 24 hour drift rate based on the last calibrated timestamp from the adjtime file. This updated drift factor is then saved in \fI/etc/adjtime\fP. -.sp -A small amount of error creeps in when the Hardware Clock is set, so \fB\-\-adjust\fP refrains from making any adjustment that is less than 1 second. Later on, when you request an adjustment again, the accumulated drift will be more than 1 second and \fB\-\-adjust\fP will make the adjustment including any fractional amount. -.sp -\fBhwclock \-\-hctosys\fP also uses the adjtime file data to compensate the value read from the Hardware Clock before using it to set the System Clock. It does not share the 1 second limitation of \fB\-\-adjust\fP, and will correct sub\-second drift values immediately. It does not change the Hardware Clock time nor the adjtime file. This may eliminate the need to use \fB\-\-adjust\fP, unless something else on the system needs the Hardware Clock to be compensated. -.SS "The Adjtime File" -.sp -While named for its historical purpose of controlling adjustments only, it actually contains other information used by \fBhwclock\fP from one invocation to the next. -.sp -The format of the adjtime file is, in ASCII: -.sp -Line 1: Three numbers, separated by blanks: 1) the systematic drift rate in seconds per day, floating point decimal; 2) the resulting number of seconds since 1969 UTC of most recent adjustment or calibration, decimal integer; 3) zero (for compatibility with \fBclock\fP(8)) as a floating point decimal. -.sp -Line 2: One number: the resulting number of seconds since 1969 UTC of most recent calibration. Zero if there has been no calibration yet or it is known that any previous calibration is moot (for example, because the Hardware Clock has been found, since that calibration, not to contain a valid time). This is a decimal integer. -.sp -Line 3: "UTC" or "LOCAL". Tells whether the Hardware Clock is set to Coordinated Universal Time or local time. You can always override this value with options on the \fBhwclock\fP command line. -.sp -You can use an adjtime file that was previously used with the \fBclock\fP(8) program with \fBhwclock\fP. -.SS "Automatic Hardware Clock Synchronization by the Kernel" -.sp -You should be aware of another way that the Hardware Clock is kept synchronized in some systems. The Linux kernel has a mode wherein it copies the System Time to the Hardware Clock every 11 minutes. This mode is a compile time option, so not all kernels will have this capability. This is a good mode to use when you are using something sophisticated like NTP to keep your System Clock synchronized. (NTP is a way to keep your System Time synchronized either to a time server somewhere on the network or to a radio clock hooked up to your system. See RFC 1305.) -.sp -If the kernel is compiled with the \(aq11 minute mode\(aq option it will be active when the kernel\(cqs clock discipline is in a synchronized state. When in this state, bit 6 (the bit that is set in the mask 0x0040) of the kernel\(cqs \fItime_status\fP variable is unset. This value is output as the \(aqstatus\(aq line of the \fBadjtimex \-\-print\fP or \fBntptime\fP commands. -.sp -It takes an outside influence, like the NTP daemon to put the kernel\(cqs clock discipline into a synchronized state, and therefore turn on \(aq11 minute mode\(aq. It can be turned off by running anything that sets the System Clock the old fashioned way, including \fBhwclock \-\-hctosys\fP. However, if the NTP daemon is still running, it will turn \(aq11 minute mode\(aq back on again the next time it synchronizes the System Clock. -.sp -If your system runs with \(aq11 minute mode\(aq on, it may need to use either \fB\-\-hctosys\fP or \fB\-\-systz\fP in a startup script, especially if the Hardware Clock is configured to use the local timescale. Unless the kernel is informed of what timescale the Hardware Clock is using, it may clobber it with the wrong one. The kernel uses UTC by default. -.sp -The first userspace command to set the System Clock informs the kernel what timescale the Hardware Clock is using. This happens via the \fIpersistent_clock_is_local\fP kernel variable. If \fB\-\-hctosys\fP or \fB\-\-systz\fP is the first, it will set this variable according to the adjtime file or the appropriate command\-line argument. Note that when using this capability and the Hardware Clock timescale configuration is changed, then a reboot is required to notify the kernel. -.sp -\fBhwclock \-\-adjust\fP should not be used with NTP \(aq11 minute mode\(aq. -.SS "ISA Hardware Clock Century value" -.sp -There is some sort of standard that defines CMOS memory Byte 50 on an ISA machine as an indicator of what century it is. \fBhwclock\fP does not use or set that byte because there are some machines that don\(cqt define the byte that way, and it really isn\(cqt necessary anyway, since the year\-of\-century does a good job of implying which century it is. -.sp -If you have a bona fide use for a CMOS century byte, contact the \fBhwclock\fP maintainer; an option may be appropriate. -.sp -Note that this section is only relevant when you are using the "direct ISA" method of accessing the Hardware Clock. ACPI provides a standard way to access century values, when they are supported by the hardware. -.SH "DATE\-TIME CONFIGURATION" -.SS "Keeping Time without External Synchronization" -.sp -This discussion is based on the following conditions: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Nothing is running that alters the date\-time clocks, such as NTP daemon or a cron job." -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -The system timezone is configured for the correct local time. See below, under \fBPOSIX vs \(aqRIGHT\(aq\fP. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Early during startup the following are called, in this order: \fBadjtimex \-\-tick\fP \fIvalue\fP \fB\-\-frequency\fP \fIvalue\fP \fBhwclock \-\-hctosys\fP -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -During shutdown the following is called: \fBhwclock \-\-systohc\fP -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Systems without \fBadjtimex\fP may use \fBntptime\fP. -.RE -.RE -.sp -Whether maintaining precision time with NTP daemon or not, it makes sense to configure the system to keep reasonably good date\-time on its own. -.sp -The first step in making that happen is having a clear understanding of the big picture. There are two completely separate hardware devices running at their own speed and drifting away from the \(aqcorrect\(aq time at their own rates. The methods and software for drift correction are different for each of them. However, most systems are configured to exchange values between these two clocks at startup and shutdown. Now the individual device\(cqs time keeping errors are transferred back and forth between each other. Attempt to configure drift correction for only one of them, and the other\(cqs drift will be overlaid upon it. -.sp -This problem can be avoided when configuring drift correction for the System Clock by simply not shutting down the machine. This, plus the fact that all of \fBhwclock\fP\(aqs precision (including calculating drift factors) depends upon the System Clock\(cqs rate being correct, means that configuration of the System Clock should be done first. -.sp -The System Clock drift is corrected with the \fBadjtimex\fP(8) command\(cqs \fB\-\-tick\fP and \fB\-\-frequency\fP options. These two work together: tick is the coarse adjustment and frequency is the fine adjustment. (For systems that do not have an \fBadjtimex\fP package, \fBntptime \-f\fP \fIppm\fP may be used instead.) -.sp -Some Linux distributions attempt to automatically calculate the System Clock drift with \fBadjtimex\fP\(aqs compare operation. Trying to correct one drifting clock by using another drifting clock as a reference is akin to a dog trying to catch its own tail. Success may happen eventually, but great effort and frustration will likely precede it. This automation may yield an improvement over no configuration, but expecting optimum results would be in error. A better choice for manual configuration would be \fBadjtimex\fP\(aqs \fB\-\-log\fP options. -.sp -It may be more effective to simply track the System Clock drift with \fBsntp\fP, or \fBdate \-Ins\fP and a precision timepiece, and then calculate the correction manually. -.sp -After setting the tick and frequency values, continue to test and refine the adjustments until the System Clock keeps good time. See \fBadjtimex\fP(2) for more information and the example demonstrating manual drift calculations. -.sp -Once the System Clock is ticking smoothly, move on to the Hardware Clock. -.sp -As a rule, cold drift will work best for most use cases. This should be true even for 24/7 machines whose normal downtime consists of a reboot. In that case the drift factor value makes little difference. But on the rare occasion that the machine is shut down for an extended period, then cold drift should yield better results. -.sp -\fBSteps to calculate cold drift:\fP -.sp -1 -.RS 4 -\fBEnsure that NTP daemon will not be launched at startup.\fP -.RE -.sp -2 -.RS 4 -The \fISystem Clock\fP time must be correct at shutdown! -.RE -.sp -3 -.RS 4 -Shut down the system. -.RE -.sp -4 -.RS 4 -Let an extended period pass without changing the Hardware Clock. -.RE -.sp -5 -.RS 4 -Start the system. -.RE -.sp -6 -.RS 4 -Immediately use \fBhwclock\fP to set the correct time, adding the \fB\-\-update\-drift\fP option. -.RE -.sp -Note: if step 6 uses \fB\-\-systohc\fP, then the System Clock must be set correctly (step 6a) just before doing so. -.sp -Having \fBhwclock\fP calculate the drift factor is a good starting point, but for optimal results it will likely need to be adjusted by directly editing the \fI/etc/adjtime\fP file. Continue to test and refine the drift factor until the Hardware Clock is corrected properly at startup. To check this, first make sure that the System Time is correct before shutdown and then use \fBsntp\fP, or \fBdate \-Ins\fP and a precision timepiece, immediately after startup. -.SS "LOCAL vs UTC" -.sp -Keeping the Hardware Clock in a local timescale causes inconsistent daylight saving time results: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -If Linux is running during a daylight saving time change, the time written to the Hardware Clock will be adjusted for the change. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -If Linux is NOT running during a daylight saving time change, the time read from the Hardware Clock will NOT be adjusted for the change. -.RE -.sp -The Hardware Clock on an ISA compatible system keeps only a date and time, it has no concept of timezone nor daylight saving. Therefore, when \fBhwclock\fP is told that it is in local time, it assumes it is in the \(aqcorrect\(aq local time and makes no adjustments to the time read from it. -.sp -Linux handles daylight saving time changes transparently only when the Hardware Clock is kept in the UTC timescale. Doing so is made easy for system administrators as \fBhwclock\fP uses local time for its output and as the argument to the \fB\-\-date\fP option. -.sp -POSIX systems, like Linux, are designed to have the System Clock operate in the UTC timescale. The Hardware Clock\(cqs purpose is to initialize the System Clock, so also keeping it in UTC makes sense. -.sp -Linux does, however, attempt to accommodate the Hardware Clock being in the local timescale. This is primarily for dual\-booting with older versions of MS Windows. From Windows 7 on, the RealTimeIsUniversal registry key is supposed to be working properly so that its Hardware Clock can be kept in UTC. -.SS "POSIX vs \(aqRIGHT\(aq" -.sp -A discussion on date\-time configuration would be incomplete without addressing timezones, this is mostly well covered by \fBtzset\fP(3). One area that seems to have no documentation is the \(aqright\(aq directory of the Time Zone Database, sometimes called tz or zoneinfo. -.sp -There are two separate databases in the zoneinfo system, posix and \(aqright\(aq. \(aqRight\(aq (now named zoneinfo\-leaps) includes leap seconds and posix does not. To use the \(aqright\(aq database the System Clock must be set to (UTC + leap seconds), which is equivalent to (TAI \- 10). This allows calculating the exact number of seconds between two dates that cross a leap second epoch. The System Clock is then converted to the correct civil time, including UTC, by using the \(aqright\(aq timezone files which subtract the leap seconds. Note: this configuration is considered experimental and is known to have issues. -.sp -To configure a system to use a particular database all of the files located in its directory must be copied to the root of \fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\fP. Files are never used directly from the posix or \(aqright\(aq subdirectories, e.g., TZ=\(aq\fIright/Europe/Dublin\fP\(aq. This habit was becoming so common that the upstream zoneinfo project restructured the system\(cqs file tree by moving the posix and \(aqright\(aq subdirectories out of the zoneinfo directory and into sibling directories: -.sp -\fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\fP, \fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\-posix\fP, \fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\-leaps\fP -.sp -Unfortunately, some Linux distributions are changing it back to the old tree structure in their packages. So the problem of system administrators reaching into the \(aqright\(aq subdirectory persists. This causes the system timezone to be configured to include leap seconds while the zoneinfo database is still configured to exclude them. Then when an application such as a World Clock needs the South_Pole timezone file; or an email MTA, or \fBhwclock\fP needs the UTC timezone file; they fetch it from the root of \fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\fP , because that is what they are supposed to do. Those files exclude leap seconds, but the System Clock now includes them, causing an incorrect time conversion. -.sp -Attempting to mix and match files from these separate databases will not work, because they each require the System Clock to use a different timescale. The zoneinfo database must be configured to use either posix or \(aqright\(aq, as described above, or by assigning a database path to the \fITZDIR\fP environment variable. -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -One of the following exit values will be returned: -.sp -\fBEXIT_SUCCESS\fP (\(aq0\(aq on POSIX systems) -.RS 4 -Successful program execution. -.RE -.sp -\fBEXIT_FAILURE\fP (\(aq1\(aq on POSIX systems) -.RS 4 -The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -\fBTZ\fP -.RS 4 -If this variable is set its value takes precedence over the system configured timezone. -.RE -.sp -\fBTZDIR\fP -.RS 4 -If this variable is set its value takes precedence over the system configured timezone database directory path. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/adjtime\fP -.RS 4 -The configuration and state file for hwclock. -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/localtime\fP -.RS 4 -The system timezone file. -.RE -.sp -\fI/usr/share/zoneinfo/\fP -.RS 4 -The system timezone database directory. -.RE -.sp -Device files \fBhwclock\fP may try for Hardware Clock access: \fI/dev/rtc0\fP \fI/dev/rtc\fP \fI/dev/misc/rtc\fP \fI/dev/efirtc\fP \fI/dev/misc/efirtc\fP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBdate\fP(1), -\fBadjtimex\fP(8), -\fBgettimeofday\fP(2), -\fBsettimeofday\fP(2), -\fBcrontab\fP(1p), -\fBtzset\fP(3) -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -Written by \c -.MTO "bryanh\(atgiraffe\-data.com" "Bryan Henderson" "," -September 1996, based on work done on the \fBclock\fP(8) program by Charles Hedrick, Rob Hooft, and Harald Koenig. See the source code for complete history and credits. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBhwclock\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/idmapd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/idmapd.8 index d4ab8944..8215d259 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/idmapd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/idmapd.8 @@ -24,13 +24,13 @@ the NFSv4 kernel client and server, to which it communicates via upcalls, by translating user and group IDs to names, and vice versa. .Pp The system derives the -.I user +.Em user part of the string by performing a password or group lookup. The lookup mechanism is configured in .Pa /etc/idmapd.conf .Pp By default, the -.I domain +.Em domain part of the string is the system's DNS domain name. It can also be specified in .Pa /etc/idmapd.conf @@ -73,11 +73,28 @@ The default value is \&"/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs\&". .It Fl c Ar path Use configuration file .Ar path . +This option is deprecated. .It Fl C Client-only: perform no idmapping for any NFS server, even if one is detected. .It Fl S Server-only: perform no idmapping for any NFS client, even if one is detected. .El +.Sh CONFIGURATION FILES +.Nm +recognizes the following value from the +.Sy [general] +section of the +.Pa /etc/nfs.conf +configuration file: +.Bl -tag -width Ds_imagedir +.It Sy pipefs-directory +Equivalent to +.Sy -p . +.El +.Pp +All other settings related to id mapping are found in the +.Pa /etc/idmapd.conf +configuration file. .Sh EXAMPLES .Cm rpc.idmapd -f -vvv .Pp @@ -94,9 +111,11 @@ messages to console, and with a verbosity level of 3. .\" This next request is for sections 1, 6, 7 & 8 only. .\" .Sh ENVIRONMENT .Sh FILES -.Pa /etc/idmapd.conf +.Pa /etc/idmapd.conf , +.Pa /etc/nfs.conf .Sh SEE ALSO .Xr idmapd.conf 5 , +.Xr nfs.conf 5 , .Xr nfsidmap 8 .\".Sh SEE ALSO .\".Xr nylon.conf 4 diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/isosize.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/isosize.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 4b80cd62..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/isosize.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: isosize -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "ISOSIZE" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -isosize \- output the length of an iso9660 filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBisosize\fP [options] \fIiso9660_image_file\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -This command outputs the length of an iso9660 filesystem that is contained in the specified file. This file may be a normal file or a block device (e.g. \fI/dev/hdd\fP or \fI/dev/sr0\fP). In the absence of any options (and errors), it will output the size of the iso9660 filesystem in bytes. This can now be a large number (>> 4 GB). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-sectors\fP -.RS 4 -Show the block count and block size in human\-readable form. The output uses the term "sectors" for "blocks". -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-divisor\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Only has an effect when \fB\-x\fP is not given. The value shown (if no errors) is the iso9660 file size in bytes divided by \fInumber\fP. So if \fInumber\fP is the block size then the shown value will be the block count. -.sp -The size of the file (or block device) holding an iso9660 filesystem can be marginally larger than the actual size of the iso9660 filesystem. One reason for this is that cd writers are allowed to add "run out" sectors at the end of an iso9660 image. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -generic failure, such as invalid usage -.RE -.sp -\fB32\fP -.RS 4 -all failed -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -some failed -.RE -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBisosize\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ldattach.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ldattach.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 0fbbcae1..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/ldattach.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,198 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: ldattach -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LDATTACH" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -ldattach \- attach a line discipline to a serial line -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBldattach\fP [\fB\-1278denoVh\fP] [\fB\-i\fP \fIiflag\fP] [\fB\-s\fP \fIspeed\fP] \fIldisc device\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBldattach\fP daemon opens the specified \fIdevice\fP file (which should refer to a serial device) and attaches the line discipline \fIldisc\fP to it for processing of the sent and/or received data. It then goes into the background keeping the device open so that the line discipline stays loaded. -.sp -The line discipline \fIldisc\fP may be specified either by name or by number. -.sp -In order to detach the line discipline, \fBkill\fP(1) the \fBldattach\fP process. -.sp -With no arguments, \fBldattach\fP prints usage information. -.SH "LINE DISCIPLINES" -.sp -Depending on the kernel release, the following line disciplines are supported: -.sp -\fBTTY\fP(\fB0\fP) -.RS 4 -The default line discipline, providing transparent operation (raw mode) as well as the habitual terminal line editing capabilities (cooked mode). -.RE -.sp -\fBSLIP\fP(\fB1\fP) -.RS 4 -Serial Line IP (SLIP) protocol processor for transmitting TCP/IP packets over serial lines. -.RE -.sp -\fBMOUSE\fP(\fB2\fP) -.RS 4 -Device driver for RS232 connected pointing devices (serial mice). -.RE -.sp -\fBPPP\fP(\fB3\fP) -.RS 4 -Point to Point Protocol (PPP) processor for transmitting network packets over serial lines. -.RE -.sp -\fBSTRIP\fP(\fB4\fP); \fBAX25\fP(\fB5\fP); \fBX25\fP(\fB6\fP) -.RS 4 -Line driver for transmitting X.25 packets over asynchronous serial lines. -.RE -.sp -\fB6PACK\fP(\fB7\fP); \fBR3964\fP(\fB9\fP) -.RS 4 -Driver for Simatic R3964 module. -.RE -.sp -\fBIRDA\fP(\fB11\fP) -.RS 4 -Linux IrDa (infrared data transmission) driver \- see \c -.URL "http://irda.sourceforge.net/" "" "" -.RE -.sp -\fBHDLC\fP(\fB13\fP) -.RS 4 -Synchronous HDLC driver. -.RE -.sp -\fBSYNC_PPP\fP(\fB14\fP) -.RS 4 -Synchronous PPP driver. -.RE -.sp -\fBHCI\fP(\fB15\fP) -.RS 4 -Bluetooth HCI UART driver. -.RE -.sp -\fBGIGASET_M101\fP(\fB16\fP) -.RS 4 -Driver for Siemens Gigaset M101 serial DECT adapter. -.RE -.sp -\fBPPS\fP(\fB18\fP) -.RS 4 -Driver for serial line Pulse Per Second (PPS) source. -.RE -.sp -\fBGSM0710\fP(\fB21\fP) -.RS 4 -Driver for GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol modem (CMUX). -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-1\fP, \fB\-\-onestopbit\fP -.RS 4 -Set the number of stop bits of the serial line to one. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-2\fP, \fB\-\-twostopbits\fP -.RS 4 -Set the number of stop bits of the serial line to two. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-7\fP, \fB\-\-sevenbits\fP -.RS 4 -Set the character size of the serial line to 7 bits. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-8\fP, \fB\-\-eightbits\fP -.RS 4 -Set the character size of the serial line to 8 bits. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-debug\fP -.RS 4 -Keep \fBldattach\fP in the foreground so that it can be interrupted or debugged, and to print verbose messages about its progress to standard error output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-evenparity\fP -.RS 4 -Set the parity of the serial line to even. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-iflag\fP \fIvalue\fP... -.RS 4 -Set the specified bits in the c_iflag word of the serial line. The given \fIvalue\fP may be a number or a symbolic name. If \fIvalue\fP is prefixed by a minus sign, the specified bits are cleared instead. Several comma\-separated values may be given in order to set and clear multiple bits. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noparity\fP -.RS 4 -Set the parity of the serial line to none. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-oddparity\fP -.RS 4 -Set the parity of the serial line to odd. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-speed\fP \fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the speed (the baud rate) of the serial line to the specified \fIvalue\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-intro\-command\fP \fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -Define an intro command that is sent through the serial line before the invocation of ldattach. E.g. in conjunction with line discipline GSM0710, the command \(aqAT+CMUX=0\(rsr\(aq is commonly suitable to switch the modem into the CMUX mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pause\fP \fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Sleep for \fIvalue\fP seconds before the invocation of ldattach. Default is one second. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "tilman\(atimap.cc" "Tilman Schmidt" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBinputattach\fP(1), -\fBttys\fP(4) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBldattach\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/losetup.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/losetup.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c75f3aac..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/losetup.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,240 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: losetup -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LOSETUP" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -losetup \- set up and control loop devices -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -Get info: -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP [\fIloopdev\fP] -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP \fB\-l\fP [\fB\-a\fP] -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP \fB\-j\fP \fIfile\fP [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] -.sp -Detach a loop device: -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP \fB\-d\fP \fIloopdev\fP ... -.sp -Detach all associated loop devices: -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP \fB\-D\fP -.sp -Set up a loop device: -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] [\fB\-\-sizelimit\fP \fIsize\fP] [\fB\-\-sector\-size\fP \fIsize\fP] [\fB\-Pr\fP] [\fB\-\-show\fP] \fB\-f\fP \fIloopdev file\fP -.sp -Resize a loop device: -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP \fB\-c\fP \fIloopdev\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP is used to associate loop devices with regular files or block devices, to detach loop devices, and to query the status of a loop device. If only the \fIloopdev\fP argument is given, the status of the corresponding loop device is shown. If no option is given, all loop devices are shown. -.sp -Note that the old output format (i.e., \fBlosetup \-a\fP) with comma\-delimited strings is deprecated in favour of the \fB\-\-list\fP output format. -.sp -It\(cqs possible to create more independent loop devices for the same backing file. \fBThis setup may be dangerous, can cause data loss, corruption and overwrites.\fP Use \fB\-\-nooverlap\fP with \fB\-\-find\fP during setup to avoid this problem. -.sp -The loop device setup is not an atomic operation when used with \fB\-\-find\fP, and \fBlosetup\fP does not protect this operation by any lock. The number of attempts is internally restricted to a maximum of 16. It is recommended to use for example flock1 to avoid a collision in heavily parallel use cases. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -The \fIsize\fP and \fIoffset\fP arguments may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Show the status of all loop devices. Note that not all information is accessible for non\-root users. See also \fB\-\-list\fP. The old output format (as printed without \fB\-\-list)\fP is deprecated. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-detach\fP \fIloopdev\fP... -.RS 4 -Detach the file or device associated with the specified loop device(s). Note that since Linux v3.7 kernel uses "lazy device destruction". The detach operation does not return \fBEBUSY\fP error anymore if device is actively used by system, but it is marked by autoclear flag and destroyed later. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-detach\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Detach all associated loop devices. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-find\fP [\fIfile\fP] -.RS 4 -Find the first unused loop device. If a \fIfile\fP argument is present, use the found device as loop device. Otherwise, just print its name. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-show\fP -.RS 4 -Display the name of the assigned loop device if the \fB\-f\fP option and a \fIfile\fP argument are present. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-nooverlap\fP -.RS 4 -Check for conflicts between loop devices to avoid situation when the same backing file is shared between more loop devices. If the file is already used by another device then re\-use the device rather than a new one. The option makes sense only with \fB\-\-find\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-j\fP, \fB\-\-associated\fP \fIfile\fP [\fB\-o\fP \fIoffset\fP] -.RS 4 -Show the status of all loop devices associated with the given \fIfile\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -The data start is moved \fIoffset\fP bytes into the specified file or device. The \fIoffset\fP may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes; see above. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-sizelimit\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -The data end is set to no more than \fIsize\fP bytes after the data start. The \fIsize\fP may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes; see above. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-sector\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Set the logical sector size of the loop device in bytes (since Linux 4.14). The option may be used when create a new loop device as well as stand\-alone command to modify sector size of the already existing loop device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-set\-capacity\fP \fIloopdev\fP -.RS 4 -Force the loop driver to reread the size of the file associated with the specified loop device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-partscan\fP -.RS 4 -Force the kernel to scan the partition table on a newly created loop device. Note that the partition table parsing depends on sector sizes. The default is sector size is 512 bytes, otherwise you need to use the option \fB\-\-sector\-size\fP together with \fB\-\-partscan\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-read\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Set up a read\-only loop device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-direct\-io\fP[\fB=on\fP|\fBoff\fP] -.RS 4 -Enable or disable direct I/O for the backing file. The optional argument can be either \fBon\fP or \fBoff\fP. If the argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBoff\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -If a loop device or the \fB\-a\fP option is specified, print the default columns for either the specified loop device or all loop devices; the default is to print info about all devices. See also \fB\-\-output\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP, and \fB\-\-json\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIcolumn\fP[,\fIcolumn\fP]... -.RS 4 -Specify the columns that are to be printed for the \fB\-\-list\fP output. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt print headings for \fB\-\-list\fP output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw \fB\-\-list\fP output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON format for \fB\-\-list\fP output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENCRYPTION" -.sp -\fBCryptoloop is no longer supported in favor of dm\-crypt.\fP For more details see \fBcryptsetup\fP(8). -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBlosetup\fP returns 0 on success, nonzero on failure. When \fBlosetup\fP displays the status of a loop device, it returns 1 if the device is not configured and 2 if an error occurred which prevented determining the status of the device. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Since version 2.37 \fBlosetup\fP uses \fBLOOP_CONFIGURE\fP ioctl to setup a new loop device by one ioctl call. The old versions use \fBLOOP_SET_FD\fP and \fBLOOP_SET_STATUS64\fP ioctls to do the same. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LOOPDEV_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables debug output. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/dev/loop[0..N]\fP -.RS 4 -loop block devices -.RE -.sp -\fI/dev/loop\-control\fP -.RS 4 -loop control device -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -The following commands can be used as an example of using the loop device. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -# dd if=/dev/zero of=~/file.img bs=1024k count=10 -# losetup \-\-find \-\-show ~/file.img -/dev/loop0 -# mkfs \-t ext2 /dev/loop0 -# mount /dev/loop0 /mnt -\&... -# umount /dev/loop0 -# losetup \-\-detach /dev/loop0 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "," -based on the original version from -.MTO "tytso\(atathena.mit.edu" "Theodore Ts\(cqo" "." -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlosetup\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsblk.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsblk.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 9b51a995..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsblk.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,266 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lsblk -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSBLK" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lsblk \- list block devices -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlsblk\fP [options] [\fIdevice\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlsblk\fP lists information about all available or the specified block devices. The \fBlsblk\fP command reads the \fBsysfs\fP filesystem and \fBudev db\fP to gather information. If the udev db is not available or \fBlsblk\fP is compiled without udev support, then it tries to read LABELs, UUIDs and filesystem types from the block device. In this case root permissions are necessary. -.sp -The command prints all block devices (except RAM disks) in a tree\-like format by default. Use \fBlsblk \-\-help\fP to get a list of all available columns. -.sp -The default output, as well as the default output from options like \fB\-\-fs\fP and \fB\-\-topology\fP, is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using \fB\-\-output\fP \fIcolumns\-list\fP and \fB\-\-list\fP in environments where a stable output is required. -.sp -Note that \fBlsblk\fP might be executed in time when \fBudev\fP does not have all information about recently added or modified devices yet. In this case it is recommended to use \fBudevadm settle\fP before \fBlsblk\fP to synchronize with udev. -.sp -The relationship between block devices and filesystems is not always one\-to\-one. The filesystem may use more block devices, or the same filesystem may be accessible by more paths. This is the reason why \fBlsblk\fP provides MOUNTPOINT and MOUNTPOINTS (pl.) columns. The column MOUNTPOINT displays only one mount point (usually the last mounted instance of the filesystem), and the column MOUNTPOINTS displays by multi\-line cell all mount points associated with the device. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Also list empty devices and RAM disk devices. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the SIZE column in bytes rather than in a human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-discard\fP -.RS 4 -Print information about the discarding capabilities (TRIM, UNMAP) for each device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-nodeps\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print holder devices or slaves. For example, \fBlsblk \-\-nodeps /dev/sda\fP prints information about the sda device only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-E\fP, \fB\-\-dedup\fP \fIcolumn\fP -.RS 4 -Use \fIcolumn\fP as a de\-duplication key to de\-duplicate output tree. If the key is not available for the device, or the device is a partition and parental whole\-disk device provides the same key than the device is always printed. -.sp -The usual use case is to de\-duplicate output on system multi\-path devices, for example by \fB\-E WWN\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-exclude\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Exclude the devices specified by the comma\-separated \fIlist\fP of major device numbers. Note that RAM disks (major=1) are excluded by default if \fB\-\-all\fP is not specified. The filter is applied to the top\-level devices only. This may be confusing for \fB\-\-list\fP output format where hierarchy of the devices is not obvious. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-fs\fP -.RS 4 -Output info about filesystems. This option is equivalent to \fB\-o NAME,FSTYPE,FSVER,LABEL,UUID,FSAVAIL,FSUSE%,MOUNTPOINTS\fP. The authoritative information about filesystems and raids is provided by the \fBblkid\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-include\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Include devices specified by the comma\-separated \fIlist\fP of major device numbers. The filter is applied to the top\-level devices only. This may be confusing for \fB\-\-list\fP output format where hierarchy of the devices is not obvious. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-ascii\fP -.RS 4 -Use ASCII characters for tree formatting. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. It\(cqs strongly recommended to use \fB\-\-output\fP and also \fB\-\-tree\fP if necessary. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in the form of a list. The output does not provide information about relationships between devices and since version 2.34 every device is printed only once if \fB\-\-pairs\fP or \fB\-\-raw\fP not specified (the parsable outputs are maintained in backwardly compatible way). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-merge\fP -.RS 4 -Group parents of sub\-trees to provide more readable output for RAIDs and Multi\-path devices. The tree\-like output is required. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-perms\fP -.RS 4 -Output info about device owner, group and mode. This option is equivalent to \fB\-o NAME,SIZE,OWNER,GROUP,MODE\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. The columns may affect tree\-like output. The default is to use tree for the column \(aqNAME\(aq (see also \fB\-\-tree\fP). -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP (e.g., \fBlsblk \-o +UUID\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in the form of key="value" pairs. The output lines are still ordered by dependencies. All potentially unsafe value characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>). The key (variable name) will be modified to contain only characters allowed for a shell variable identifiers, for example, MIN_IO and FSUSE_PCT instead of MIN\-IO and FSUSE%. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-paths\fP -.RS 4 -Print full device paths. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Produce output in raw format. The output lines are still ordered by dependencies. All potentially unsafe characters are hex\-escaped (\(rsx<code>) in the NAME, KNAME, LABEL, PARTLABEL and MOUNTPOINT columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-scsi\fP -.RS 4 -Output info about SCSI devices only. All partitions, slaves and holder devices are ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-inverse\fP -.RS 4 -Print dependencies in inverse order. If the \fB\-\-list\fP output is requested then the lines are still ordered by dependencies. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-tree\fP[\fB=\fP\fIcolumn\fP] -.RS 4 -Force tree\-like output format. If \fIcolumn\fP is specified, then a tree is printed in the column. The default is NAME column. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-topology\fP -.RS 4 -Output info about block\-device topology. This option is equivalent to -.sp -\fB\-o NAME,ALIGNMENT,MIN\-IO,OPT\-IO,PHY\-SEC,LOG\-SEC,ROTA,SCHED,RQ\-SIZE,RA,WSAME\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-width\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies output width as a number of characters. The default is the number of the terminal columns, and if not executed on a terminal, then output width is not restricted at all by default. This option also forces \fBlsblk\fP to assume that terminal control characters and unsafe characters are not allowed. The expected use\-case is for example when \fBlsblk\fP is used by the \fBwatch\fP(1) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-sort\fP \fIcolumn\fP -.RS 4 -Sort output lines by \fIcolumn\fP. This option enables \fB\-\-list\fP output format by default. It is possible to use the option \fB\-\-tree\fP to force tree\-like output and than the tree branches are sorted by the \fIcolumn\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-zoned\fP -.RS 4 -Print the zone model for each device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-sysroot\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Gather data for a Linux instance other than the instance from which the \fBlsblk\fP command is issued. The specified directory is the system root of the Linux instance to be inspected. The real device nodes in the target directory can be replaced by text files with udev attributes. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -0 -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -1 -.RS 4 -failure -.RE -.sp -32 -.RS 4 -none of specified devices found -.RE -.sp -64 -.RS 4 -some specified devices found, some not found -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LSBLK_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlsblk\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibblkid\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibmount\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibsmartcols\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG_PADDING=on -.RS 4 -use visible padding characters. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -For partitions, some information (e.g., queue attributes) is inherited from the parent device. -.sp -The \fBlsblk\fP command needs to be able to look up each block device by major:minor numbers, which is done by using \fI/sys/dev/block\fP. This sysfs block directory appeared in kernel 2.6.27 (October 2008). In case of problems with a new enough kernel, check that CONFIG_SYSFS was enabled at the time of the kernel build. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "mbroz\(atredhat.com" "Milan Broz" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBls\fP(1), -\fBblkid\fP(8), -\fBfindmnt\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlsblk\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lslocks.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lslocks.8 deleted file mode 100644 index a42c8363..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lslocks.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,169 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lslocks -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSLOCKS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lslocks \- list local system locks -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlslocks\fP [options] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlslocks\fP lists information about all the currently held file locks in a Linux system. -.sp -Note that lslocks also lists OFD (Open File Description) locks, these locks are not associated with any process (PID is \-1). OFD locks are associated with the open file description on which they are acquired. This lock type is available since Linux 3.15, see \fBfcntl\fP(2) for more details. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the SIZE column in bytes rather than in a human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-noinaccessible\fP -.RS 4 -Ignore lock files which are inaccessible for the current user. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP (e.g., \fBlslocks \-o +BLOCKER\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pid\fP \fIpid\fP -.RS 4 -Display only the locks held by the process with this \fIpid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-notruncate\fP -.RS 4 -Do not truncate text in columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "OUTPUT" -.sp -COMMAND -.RS 4 -The command name of the process holding the lock. -.RE -.sp -PID -.RS 4 -The process ID of the process which holds the lock or \-1 for OFDLCK. -.RE -.sp -TYPE -.RS 4 -The type of lock; can be FLOCK (created with \fBflock\fP(2)), POSIX (created with \fBfcntl\fP(2) and \fBlockf\fP(3)) or OFDLCK (created with \fBfcntl\fP(2)). -.RE -.sp -SIZE -.RS 4 -Size of the locked file. -.RE -.sp -MODE -.RS 4 -The lock\(cqs access permissions (read, write). If the process is blocked and waiting for the lock, then the mode is postfixed with an \(aq*\(aq (asterisk). -.RE -.sp -M -.RS 4 -Whether the lock is mandatory; 0 means no (meaning the lock is only advisory), 1 means yes. (See \fBfcntl\fP(2).) -.RE -.sp -START -.RS 4 -Relative byte offset of the lock. -.RE -.sp -END -.RS 4 -Ending offset of the lock. -.RE -.sp -PATH -.RS 4 -Full path of the lock. If none is found, or there are no permissions to read the path, it will fall back to the device\(cqs mountpoint and "..." is appended to the path. The path might be truncated; use \fB\-\-notruncate\fP to get the full path. -.RE -.sp -BLOCKER -.RS 4 -The PID of the process which blocks the lock. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The \fBlslocks\fP command is meant to replace the \fBlslk\fP(8) command, originally written by \c -.MTO "abe\(atpurdue.edu" "Victor A. Abell" "" -and unmaintained since 2001. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "dave\(atgnu.org" "Davidlohr Bueso" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBflock\fP(1), -\fBfcntl\fP(2), -\fBlockf\fP(3) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlslocks\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsns.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsns.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 9a2875cf..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/lsns.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,124 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: lsns -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "LSNS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -lsns \- list namespaces -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBlsns\fP [options] \fInamespace\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBlsns\fP lists information about all the currently accessible namespaces or about the given \fInamespace\fP. The \fInamespace\fP identifier is an inode number. -.sp -The default output is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using the \fB\-\-output\fP option together with a columns list in environments where a stable output is required. -.sp -The \fBNSFS\fP column, printed when \fBnet\fP is specified for the \fB\-\-type\fP option, is special; it uses multi\-line cells. Use the option \fB\-\-nowrap\fP to switch to ","\-separated single\-line representation. -.sp -Note that \fBlsns\fP reads information directly from the \fI/proc\fP filesystem and for non\-root users it may return incomplete information. The current \fI/proc\fP filesystem may be unshared and affected by a PID namespace (see \fBunshare \-\-mount\-proc\fP for more details). \fBlsns\fP is not able to see persistent namespaces without processes where the namespace instance is held by a bind mount to /proc/\fIpid\fP/ns/\fItype\fP. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -Use list output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fB+\fP\fIlist\fP (e.g., \fBlsns \-o +PATH\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-task\fP \fIPID\fP -.RS 4 -Display only the namespaces held by the process with this \fIPID\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-type\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Display the specified \fItype\fP of namespaces only. The supported types are \fBmnt\fP, \fBnet\fP, \fBipc\fP, \fBuser\fP, \fBpid\fP, \fButs\fP, \fBcgroup\fP and \fBtime\fP. This option may be given more than once. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-notruncate\fP -.RS 4 -Do not truncate text in columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-W\fP, \fB\-\-nowrap\fP -.RS 4 -Do not use multi\-line text in columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBnsenter\fP(1), -\fBunshare\fP(1), -\fBclone\fP(2), -\fBnamespaces\fP(7), -\fBioctl_ns(2)\fP -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBlsns\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index c73300c6..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mkfs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MKFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mkfs \- build a Linux filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmkfs\fP [options] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP] [\fIfs\-options\fP] \fIdevice\fP [\fIsize\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBThis mkfs frontend is deprecated in favour of filesystem specific mkfs.<type> utils.\fP -.sp -\fBmkfs\fP is used to build a Linux filesystem on a device, usually a hard disk partition. The \fIdevice\fP argument is either the device name (e.g., \fI/dev/hda1\fP, \fI/dev/sdb2\fP), or a regular file that shall contain the filesystem. The \fIsize\fP argument is the number of blocks to be used for the filesystem. -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBmkfs\fP is 0 on success and 1 on failure. -.sp -In actuality, \fBmkfs\fP is simply a front\-end for the various filesystem builders (\fBmkfs.\fP\fIfstype\fP) available under Linux. The filesystem\-specific builder is searched for via your \fBPATH\fP environment setting only. Please see the filesystem\-specific builder manual pages for further details. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-type\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the \fItype\fP of filesystem to be built. If not specified, the default filesystem type (currently ext2) is used. -.RE -.sp -\fIfs\-options\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem\-specific options to be passed to the real filesystem builder. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Produce verbose output, including all filesystem\-specific commands that are executed. Specifying this option more than once inhibits execution of any filesystem\-specific commands. This is really only useful for testing. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. (Option \fB\-V\fP will display version information only when it is the only parameter, otherwise it will work as \fB\-\-verbose\fP.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -All generic options must precede and not be combined with filesystem\-specific options. Some filesystem\-specific programs do not automatically detect the device size and require the \fIsize\fP parameter to be specified. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "david\(atods.com" "David Engel" "," -.MTO "waltje\(atuwalt.nl.mugnet.org" "Fred N. van Kempen" "," -.MTO "sommel\(atsci.kun.nl" "Ron Sommeling" "." -.sp -The manual page was shamelessly adapted from Remy Card\(cqs version for the ext2 filesystem. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfs\fP(5), -\fBbadblocks\fP(8), -\fBfsck\fP(8), -\fBmkdosfs\fP(8), -\fBmke2fs\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.bfs\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.ext2\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.ext3\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.ext4\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.minix\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.msdos\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.vfat\fP(8), -\fBmkfs.xfs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmkfs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.bfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.bfs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index b95d359f..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.bfs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mkfs.bfs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MKFS.BFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mkfs.bfs \- make an SCO bfs filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmkfs.bfs\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP [\fIblock\-count\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBmkfs.bfs\fP creates an SCO bfs filesystem on a block device (usually a disk partition or a file accessed via the loop device). -.sp -The \fIblock\-count\fP parameter is the desired size of the filesystem, in blocks. If nothing is specified, the entire partition will be used. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-inodes\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the desired \fInumber\fP of inodes (at most 512). If nothing is specified, some default number in the range 48\-512 is picked depending on the size of the partition. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-vname\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the volume \fIlabel\fP. I have no idea if/where this is used. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-fname\fP \fIname\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the filesystem \fIname\fP. I have no idea if/where this is used. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Explain what is being done. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP -.RS 4 -This option is silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP -.RS 4 -This option is silently ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. Option \fB\-V\fP only works as \fB\-\-version\fP when it is the only option. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBmkfs.bfs\fP is 0 when all went well, and 1 when something went wrong. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmkfs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmkfs.bfs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.cramfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.cramfs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index da550c2d..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.cramfs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,132 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mkfs.cramfs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MKFS.CRAMFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mkfs.cramfs \- make compressed ROM file system -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmkfs.cramfs\fP [options] \fIdirectory file\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Files on cramfs file systems are zlib\-compressed one page at a time to allow random read access. The metadata is not compressed, but is expressed in a terse representation that is more space\-efficient than conventional file systems. -.sp -The file system is intentionally read\-only to simplify its design; random write access for compressed files is difficult to implement. cramfs ships with a utility (\fBmkcramfs\fP(8)) to pack files into new cramfs images. -.sp -File sizes are limited to less than 16 MB. -.sp -Maximum file system size is a little under 272 MB. (The last file on the file system must begin before the 256 MB block, but can extend past it.) -.SH "ARGUMENTS" -.sp -The \fIdirectory\fP is simply the root of the directory tree that we want to generate a compressed filesystem out of. -.sp -The \fIfile\fP will contain the cram file system, which later can be mounted. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-v\fP -.RS 4 -Enable verbose messaging. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-E\fP -.RS 4 -Treat all warnings as errors, which are reflected as command exit status. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP \fIblocksize\fP -.RS 4 -Use defined block size, which has to be divisible by page size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP \fIedition\fP -.RS 4 -Use defined file system edition number in superblock. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP \fIbig, little, host\fP -.RS 4 -Use defined endianness. Value defaults to \fIhost\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Insert a \fIfile\fP to cramfs file system. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP \fIname\fP -.RS 4 -Set name of the cramfs file system. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP -.RS 4 -Pad by 512 bytes for boot code. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP -.RS 4 -This option is ignored. Originally the \fB\-s\fP turned on directory entry sorting. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-z\fP -.RS 4 -Make explicit holes. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -operation error, such as unable to allocate memory -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfsck.cramfs\fP(8), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmkfs.cramfs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.minix.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.minix.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 8faafa4a..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkfs.minix.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,142 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mkfs.minix -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MKFS.MINIX" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mkfs.minix \- make a Minix filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmkfs.minix\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP [\fIsize\-in\-blocks\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBmkfs.minix\fP creates a Linux MINIX filesystem on a device (usually a disk partition). -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP is usually of the following form: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -/dev/hda[1\-8] (IDE disk 1) -/dev/hdb[1\-8] (IDE disk 2) -/dev/sda[1\-8] (SCSI disk 1) -/dev/sdb[1\-8] (SCSI disk 2) -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The device may be a block device or an image file of one, but this is not enforced. Expect not much fun on a character device :\-). -.sp -The \fIsize\-in\-blocks\fP parameter is the desired size of the file system, in blocks. It is present only for backwards compatibility. If omitted the size will be determined automatically. Only block counts strictly greater than 10 and strictly less than 65536 are allowed. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-check\fP -.RS 4 -Check the device for bad blocks before creating the filesystem. If any are found, the count is printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-namelength\fP \fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the maximum length of filenames. Currently, the only allowable values are 14 and 30 for file system versions 1 and 2. Version 3 allows only value 60. The default is 30. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-inodes\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the number of inodes for the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-badblocks\fP \fIfilename\fP -.RS 4 -Read the list of bad blocks from \fIfilename\fP. The file has one bad\-block number per line. The count of bad blocks read is printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-1\fP -.RS 4 -Make a Minix version 1 filesystem. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-2\fP, \fB\-v\fP -.RS 4 -Make a Minix version 2 filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-3\fP -.RS 4 -Make a Minix version 3 filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. The long option cannot be combined with other options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBmkfs.minix\fP is one of the following: -.sp -0 -.RS 4 -No errors -.RE -.sp -8 -.RS 4 -Operational error -.RE -.sp -16 -.RS 4 -Usage or syntax error -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfsck\fP(8), -\fBmkfs\fP(8), -\fBreboot\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmkfs.minix\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkswap.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkswap.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 816fe6d9..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mkswap.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,151 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mkswap -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MKSWAP" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mkswap \- set up a Linux swap area -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmkswap\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP [\fIsize\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBmkswap\fP sets up a Linux swap area on a device or in a file. -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP argument will usually be a disk partition (something like \fI/dev/sdb7\fP) but can also be a file. The Linux kernel does not look at partition IDs, but many installation scripts will assume that partitions of hex type 82 (LINUX_SWAP) are meant to be swap partitions. (\fBWarning: Solaris also uses this type. Be careful not to kill your Solaris partitions.\fP) -.sp -The \fIsize\fP parameter is superfluous but retained for backwards compatibility. (It specifies the desired size of the swap area in 1024\-byte blocks. \fBmkswap\fP will use the entire partition or file if it is omitted. Specifying it is unwise \- a typo may destroy your disk.) -.sp -After creating the swap area, you need the \fBswapon\fP command to start using it. Usually swap areas are listed in \fI/etc/fstab\fP so that they can be taken into use at boot time by a \fBswapon \-a\fP command in some boot script. -.SH "WARNING" -.sp -The swap header does not touch the first block. A boot loader or disk label can be there, but it is not a recommended setup. The recommended setup is to use a separate partition for a Linux swap area. -.sp -\fBmkswap\fP, like many others mkfs\-like utils, \fBerases the first partition block to make any previous filesystem invisible.\fP -.sp -However, \fBmkswap\fP refuses to erase the first block on a device with a disk label (SUN, BSD, ...). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-check\fP -.RS 4 -Check the device (if it is a block device) for bad blocks before creating the swap area. If any bad blocks are found, the count is printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Go ahead even if the command is stupid. This allows the creation of a swap area larger than the file or partition it resides on. -.sp -Also, without this option, \fBmkswap\fP will refuse to erase the first block on a device with a partition table. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a \fIlabel\fP for the device, to allow \fBswapon\fP by label. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-pagesize\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the page \fIsize\fP (in bytes) to use. This option is usually unnecessary; \fBmkswap\fP reads the size from the kernel. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uuid\fP \fIUUID\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the \fIUUID\fP to use. The default is to generate a UUID. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-swapversion 1\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the swap\-space version. (This option is currently pointless, as the old \fB\-v 0\fP option has become obsolete and now only \fB\-v 1\fP is supported. The kernel has not supported v0 swap\-space format since 2.5.22 (June 2002). The new version v1 is supported since 2.1.117 (August 1998).) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose execution. With this option \fBmkswap\fP will output more details about detected problems during swap area set up. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.sp -LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -The maximum useful size of a swap area depends on the architecture and the kernel version. -.sp -The maximum number of the pages that is possible to address by swap area header is 4294967295 (32\-bit unsigned int). The remaining space on the swap device is ignored. -.sp -Presently, Linux allows 32 swap areas. The areas in use can be seen in the file \fI/proc/swaps\fP. -.sp -\fBmkswap\fP refuses areas smaller than 10 pages. -.sp -If you don\(cqt know the page size that your machine uses, you may be able to look it up with \fBcat /proc/cpuinfo\fP (or you may not \- the contents of this file depend on architecture and kernel version). -.sp -To set up a swap file, it is necessary to create that file before initializing it with \fBmkswap\fP, e.g. using a command like -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -# dd if=/dev/zero of=swapfile bs=1MiB count=$((8*1024)) -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -to create 8GiB swapfile. -.sp -Please read notes from \fBswapon\fP(8) about \fBthe swap file use restrictions\fP (holes, preallocation and copy\-on\-write issues). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBswapon\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmkswap\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 7ea8535b..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2425 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: mount -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "MOUNT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -mount \- mount a filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBmount\fP [\fB\-h\fP|\fB\-V\fP] -.sp -\fBmount\fP [\fB\-l\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fIfstype\fP] -.sp -\fBmount\fP \fB\-a\fP [\fB\-fFnrsvw\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fIfstype\fP] [\fB\-O\fP \fIoptlist\fP] -.sp -\fBmount\fP [\fB\-fnrsvw\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoptions\fP] \fIdevice\fP|\fImountpoint\fP -.sp -\fBmount\fP [\fB\-fnrsvw\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fIfstype\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoptions\fP] \fIdevice mountpoint\fP -.sp -\fBmount\fP \fB\-\-bind\fP|\fB\-\-rbind\fP|\fB\-\-move\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP -.sp -\fBmount\fP \fB\-\-make\fP\-[\fBshared\fP|\fBslave\fP|\fBprivate\fP|\fBunbindable\fP|\fBrshared\fP|\fBrslave\fP|\fBrprivate\fP|\fBrunbindable\fP] \fImountpoint\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -All files accessible in a Unix system are arranged in one big tree, the file hierarchy, rooted at \fI/\fP. These files can be spread out over several devices. The \fBmount\fP command serves to attach the filesystem found on some device to the big file tree. Conversely, the \fBumount\fP(8) command will detach it again. The filesystem is used to control how data is stored on the device or provided in a virtual way by network or other services. -.sp -The standard form of the \fBmount\fP command is: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-t\fP \fItype device dir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This tells the kernel to attach the filesystem found on \fIdevice\fP (which is of type \fItype\fP) at the directory \fIdir\fP. The option \fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP is optional. The \fBmount\fP command is usually able to detect a filesystem. The root permissions are necessary to mount a filesystem by default. See section "Non\-superuser mounts" below for more details. The previous contents (if any) and owner and mode of \fIdir\fP become invisible, and as long as this filesystem remains mounted, the pathname \fIdir\fP refers to the root of the filesystem on \fIdevice\fP. -.sp -If only the directory or the device is given, for example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /dir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -then \fBmount\fP looks for a mountpoint (and if not found then for a device) in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. It\(cqs possible to use the \fB\-\-target\fP or \fB\-\-source\fP options to avoid ambiguous interpretation of the given argument. For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-target /mountpoint\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The same filesystem may be mounted more than once, and in some cases (e.g., network filesystems) the same filesystem may be mounted on the same mountpoint multiple times. The \fBmount\fP command does not implement any policy to control this behavior. All behavior is controlled by the kernel and it is usually specific to the filesystem driver. The exception is \fB\-\-all\fP, in this case already mounted filesystems are ignored (see \fB\-\-all\fP below for more details). -.SS "Listing the mounts" -.sp -The listing mode is maintained for backward compatibility only. -.sp -For more robust and customizable output use \fBfindmnt\fP(8), \fBespecially in your scripts\fP. Note that control characters in the mountpoint name are replaced with \(aq?\(aq. -.sp -The following command lists all mounted filesystems (of type \fItype\fP): -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount\fP [\fB\-l\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP] -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The option \fB\-l\fP adds labels to this listing. See below. -.SS "Indicating the device and filesystem" -.sp -Most devices are indicated by a filename (of a block special device), like \fI/dev/sda1\fP, but there are other possibilities. For example, in the case of an NFS mount, \fIdevice\fP may look like \fIknuth.cwi.nl:/dir\fP. -.sp -The device names of disk partitions are unstable; hardware reconfiguration, and adding or removing a device can cause changes in names. This is the reason why it\(cqs strongly recommended to use filesystem or partition identifiers like UUID or LABEL. Currently supported identifiers (tags): -.sp -LABEL=\fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Human readable filesystem identifier. See also \fB\-L\fP. -.RE -.sp -UUID=\fIuuid\fP -.RS 4 -Filesystem universally unique identifier. The format of the UUID is usually a series of hex digits separated by hyphens. See also \fB\-U\fP. -.sp -Note that \fBmount\fP uses UUIDs as strings. The UUIDs from the command line or from \fBfstab\fP(5) are not converted to internal binary representation. The string representation of the UUID should be based on lower case characters. -.RE -.sp -PARTLABEL=\fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Human readable partition identifier. This identifier is independent on filesystem and does not change by mkfs or mkswap operations It\(cqs supported for example for GUID Partition Tables (GPT). -.RE -.sp -PARTUUID=\fIuuid\fP -.RS 4 -Partition universally unique identifier. This identifier is independent on filesystem and does not change by mkfs or mkswap operations It\(cqs supported for example for GUID Partition Tables (GPT). -.RE -.sp -ID=\fIid\fP -.RS 4 -Hardware block device ID as generated by udevd. This identifier is usually based on WWN (unique storage identifier) and assigned by the hardware manufacturer. See \fBls /dev/disk/by\-id\fP for more details, this directory and running udevd is required. This identifier is not recommended for generic use as the identifier is not strictly defined and it depends on udev, udev rules and hardware. -.RE -.sp -The command \fBlsblk \-\-fs\fP provides an overview of filesystems, LABELs and UUIDs on available block devices. The command \fBblkid \-p <device>\fP provides details about a filesystem on the specified device. -.sp -Don\(cqt forget that there is no guarantee that UUIDs and labels are really unique, especially if you move, share or copy the device. Use \fBlsblk \-o +UUID,PARTUUID\fP to verify that the UUIDs are really unique in your system. -.sp -The recommended setup is to use tags (e.g. \fBUUID\fP=\fIuuid\fP) rather than \fI/dev/disk/by\-{label,uuid,id,partuuid,partlabel}\fP udev symlinks in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. Tags are more readable, robust and portable. The \fBmount\fP(8) command internally uses udev symlinks, so the use of symlinks in \fI/etc/fstab\fP has no advantage over tags. For more details see \fBlibblkid\fP(3). -.sp -The \fIproc\fP filesystem is not associated with a special device, and when mounting it, an arbitrary keyword \- for example, \fIproc\fP \- can be used instead of a device specification. (The customary choice \fInone\fP is less fortunate: the error message \(aqnone already mounted\(aq from \fBmount\fP can be confusing.) -.SS "The files /etc/fstab, /etc/mtab and /proc/mounts" -.sp -The file \fI/etc/fstab\fP (see \fBfstab\fP(5)), may contain lines describing what devices are usually mounted where, using which options. The default location of the \fBfstab\fP(5) file can be overridden with the \fB\-\-fstab\fP \fIpath\fP command\-line option (see below for more details). -.sp -The command -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-a\fP [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP] [\fB\-O\fP \fIoptlist\fP] -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -(usually given in a bootscript) causes all filesystems mentioned in \fIfstab\fP (of the proper type and/or having or not having the proper options) to be mounted as indicated, except for those whose line contains the \fBnoauto\fP keyword. Adding the \fB\-F\fP option will make \fBmount\fP fork, so that the filesystems are mounted in parallel. -.sp -When mounting a filesystem mentioned in \fIfstab\fP or \fImtab\fP, it suffices to specify on the command line only the device, or only the mount point. -.sp -The programs \fBmount\fP and \fBumount\fP(8) traditionally maintained a list of currently mounted filesystems in the file \fI/etc/mtab\fP. The support for regular classic \fI/etc/mtab\fP is completely disabled at compile time by default, because on current Linux systems it is better to make \fI/etc/mtab\fP a symlink to \fI/proc/mounts\fP instead. The regular \fImtab\fP file maintained in userspace cannot reliably work with namespaces, containers and other advanced Linux features. If the regular \fImtab\fP support is enabled, then it\(cqs possible to use the file as well as the symlink. -.sp -If no arguments are given to \fBmount\fP, the list of mounted filesystems is printed. -.sp -If you want to override mount options from \fI/etc/fstab\fP, you have to use the \fB\-o\fP option: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount\fP \fIdevice\fP*\fB*\fP|\fIdir\fP \fB\-o\fP \fIoptions\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -and then the mount options from the command line will be appended to the list of options from \fI/etc/fstab\fP. This default behaviour can be changed using the \fB\-\-options\-mode\fP command\-line option. The usual behavior is that the last option wins if there are conflicting ones. -.sp -The \fBmount\fP program does not read the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file if both \fIdevice\fP (or LABEL, UUID, ID, PARTUUID or PARTLABEL) and \fIdir\fP are specified. For example, to mount device \fBfoo\fP at \fB/dir\fP: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /dev/foo /dir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This default behaviour can be changed by using the \fB\-\-options\-source\-force\fP command\-line option to always read configuration from \fIfstab\fP. For non\-root users \fBmount\fP always reads the \fIfstab\fP configuration. -.SS "Non\-superuser mounts" -.sp -Normally, only the superuser can mount filesystems. However, when \fIfstab\fP contains the \fBuser\fP option on a line, anybody can mount the corresponding filesystem. -.sp -Thus, given a line -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/dev/cdrom /cd iso9660 ro,user,noauto,unhide\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -any user can mount the iso9660 filesystem found on an inserted CDROM using the command: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /cd\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Note that \fBmount\fP is very strict about non\-root users and all paths specified on command line are verified before \fIfstab\fP is parsed or a helper program is executed. It\(cqs strongly recommended to use a valid mountpoint to specify filesystem, otherwise \fBmount\fP may fail. For example it\(cqs a bad idea to use NFS or CIFS source on command line. -.sp -Since util\-linux 2.35, \fBmount\fP does not exit when user permissions are inadequate according to libmount\(cqs internal security rules. Instead, it drops suid permissions and continues as regular non\-root user. This behavior supports use\-cases where root permissions are not necessary (e.g., fuse filesystems, user namespaces, etc). -.sp -For more details, see \fBfstab\fP(5). Only the user that mounted a filesystem can unmount it again. If any user should be able to unmount it, then use \fBusers\fP instead of \fBuser\fP in the \fIfstab\fP line. The \fBowner\fP option is similar to the \fBuser\fP option, with the restriction that the user must be the owner of the special file. This may be useful e.g. for \fI/dev/fd\fP if a login script makes the console user owner of this device. The \fBgroup\fP option is similar, with the restriction that the user must be a member of the group of the special file. -.SS Blacklisted file systems -In the Linux kernel, file system types are implemented as kernel -modules. While many of these file systems are well maintained, -some of the older and less frequently used ones are not. This -poses a security risk, because maliciously crafted file system -images might open security holes when mounted either automatically -or by an inadvertent user. The -.B mount -command prints "unsupported file system type 'somefs'" in this case, -because it can't distinguish between a really unsupported file system -(kernel module non-existent) and a blacklisted file system. - -Users who need the blacklisted file systems and therefore want -to override the blacklisting can either load the blacklisted module -directly: -.RS - -.br -.BI "modprobe -v" " somefs" -.br - -.RE -or override the blacklist configuration by editing files under the -.I /etc/modprobe.d -directory. - -.SS "Bind mount operation" -.sp -Remount part of the file hierarchy somewhere else. The call is: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-bind\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -or by using this \fIfstab\fP entry: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fB/\fP\fIolddir\fP \fB/\fP\fInewdir\fP \fBnone bind\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -After this call the same contents are accessible in two places. -.sp -It is important to understand that "bind" does not create any second\-class or special node in the kernel VFS. The "bind" is just another operation to attach a filesystem. There is nowhere stored information that the filesystem has been attached by a "bind" operation. The \fIolddir\fP and \fInewdir\fP are independent and the \fIolddir\fP may be unmounted. -.sp -One can also remount a single file (on a single file). It\(cqs also possible to use a bind mount to create a mountpoint from a regular directory, for example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-bind foo foo\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The bind mount call attaches only (part of) a single filesystem, not possible submounts. The entire file hierarchy including submounts can be attached a second place by using: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-rbind\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Note that the filesystem mount options maintained by the kernel will remain the same as those on the original mount point. The userspace mount options (e.g., _netdev) will not be copied by \fBmount\fP and it\(cqs necessary to explicitly specify the options on the \fBmount\fP command line. -.sp -Since util\-linux 2.27 \fBmount\fP permits changing the mount options by passing the relevant options along with \fB\-\-bind\fP. For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-o bind,ro foo foo\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This feature is not supported by the Linux kernel; it is implemented in userspace by an additional \fBmount\fP(2) remounting system call. This solution is not atomic. -.sp -The alternative (classic) way to create a read\-only bind mount is to use the remount operation, for example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-bind\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP \fBmount \-o remount,bind,ro\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Note that a read\-only bind will create a read\-only mountpoint (VFS entry), but the original filesystem superblock will still be writable, meaning that the \fIolddir\fP will be writable, but the \fInewdir\fP will be read\-only. -.sp -It\(cqs also possible to change nosuid, nodev, noexec, noatime, nodiratime and relatime VFS entry flags via a "remount,bind" operation. The other flags (for example filesystem\-specific flags) are silently ignored. It\(cqs impossible to change mount options recursively (for example with \fB\-o rbind,ro\fP). -.sp -Since util\-linux 2.31, \fBmount\fP ignores the \fBbind\fP flag from \fI/etc/fstab\fP on a \fBremount\fP operation (if "\-o remount" is specified on command line). This is necessary to fully control mount options on remount by command line. In previous versions the bind flag has been always applied and it was impossible to re\-define mount options without interaction with the bind semantic. This \fBmount\fP behavior does not affect situations when "remount,bind" is specified in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. -.SS "The move operation" -.sp -Move a \fBmounted tree\fP to another place (atomically). The call is: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount \-\-move\fP \fIolddir newdir\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This will cause the contents which previously appeared under \fIolddir\fP to now be accessible under \fInewdir\fP. The physical location of the files is not changed. Note that \fIolddir\fP has to be a mountpoint. -.sp -Note also that moving a mount residing under a shared mount is invalid and unsupported. Use \fBfindmnt \-o TARGET,PROPAGATION\fP to see the current propagation flags. -.SS "Shared subtree operations" -.sp -Since Linux 2.6.15 it is possible to mark a mount and its submounts as shared, private, slave or unbindable. A shared mount provides the ability to create mirrors of that mount such that mounts and unmounts within any of the mirrors propagate to the other mirror. A slave mount receives propagation from its master, but not vice versa. A private mount carries no propagation abilities. An unbindable mount is a private mount which cannot be cloned through a bind operation. The detailed semantics are documented in \fIDocumentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt\fP file in the kernel source tree; see also \fBmount_namespaces\fP(7). -.sp -Supported operations are: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount \-\-make\-shared mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-slave mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-private mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-unbindable mountpoint -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -The following commands allow one to recursively change the type of all the mounts under a given mountpoint. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount \-\-make\-rshared mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-rslave mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-rprivate mountpoint -mount \-\-make\-runbindable mountpoint -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -\fBmount\fP(8) \fBdoes not read\fP \fBfstab\fP(5) when a \fB\-\-make\-\fP* operation is requested. All necessary information has to be specified on the command line. -.sp -Note that the Linux kernel does not allow changing multiple propagation flags with a single \fBmount\fP(2) system call, and the flags cannot be mixed with other mount options and operations. -.sp -Since util\-linux 2.23 the \fBmount\fP command can be used to do more propagation (topology) changes by one \fBmount\fP(8) call and do it also together with other mount operations. The propagation flags are applied by additional \fBmount\fP(2) system calls when the preceding mount operations were successful. Note that this use case is not atomic. It is possible to specify the propagation flags in \fBfstab\fP(5) as mount options (\fBprivate\fP, \fBslave\fP, \fBshared\fP, \fBunbindable\fP, \fBrprivate\fP, \fBrslave\fP, \fBrshared\fP, \fBrunbindable\fP). -.sp -For example: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount \-\-make\-private \-\-make\-unbindable /dev/sda1 /foo -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -is the same as: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount /dev/sda1 /foo -mount \-\-make\-private /foo -mount \-\-make\-unbindable /foo -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "COMMAND\-LINE OPTIONS" -.sp -The full set of mount options used by an invocation of \fBmount\fP is determined by first extracting the mount options for the filesystem from the \fIfstab\fP table, then applying any options specified by the \fB\-o\fP argument, and finally applying a \fB\-r\fP or \fB\-w\fP option, when present. -.sp -The \fBmount\fP command does not pass all command\-line options to the \fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fIsuffix\fP mount helpers. The interface between \fBmount\fP and the mount helpers is described below in the section \fBEXTERNAL HELPERS\fP. -.sp -Command\-line options available for the \fBmount\fP command are: -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Mount all filesystems (of the given types) mentioned in \fIfstab\fP (except for those whose line contains the \fBnoauto\fP keyword). The filesystems are mounted following their order in \fIfstab\fP. The \fBmount\fP command compares filesystem source, target (and fs root for bind mount or btrfs) to detect already mounted filesystems. The kernel table with already mounted filesystems is cached during \fBmount \-\-all\fP. This means that all duplicated \fIfstab\fP entries will be mounted. -.sp -The option \fB\-\-all\fP is possible to use for remount operation too. In this case all filters (\fB\-t\fP and \fB\-O\fP) are applied to the table of already mounted filesystems. -.sp -Since version 2.35 is possible to use the command line option \fB\-o\fP to alter mount options from \fIfstab\fP (see also \fB\-\-options\-mode\fP). -.sp -Note that it is a bad practice to use \fBmount \-a\fP for \fIfstab\fP checking. The recommended solution is \fBfindmnt \-\-verify\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP, \fB\-\-bind\fP -.RS 4 -Remount a subtree somewhere else (so that its contents are available in both places). See above, under \fBBind mounts\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-no\-canonicalize\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt canonicalize paths. The \fBmount\fP command canonicalizes all paths (from the command line or \fIfstab\fP) by default. This option can be used together with the \fB\-f\fP flag for already canonicalized absolute paths. The option is designed for mount helpers which call \fBmount \-i\fP. It is strongly recommended to not use this command\-line option for normal mount operations. -.sp -Note that \fBmount\fP does not pass this option to the \fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fItype\fP helpers. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-fork\fP -.RS 4 -(Used in conjunction with \fB\-a\fP.) Fork off a new incarnation of \fBmount\fP for each device. This will do the mounts on different devices or different NFS servers in parallel. This has the advantage that it is faster; also NFS timeouts proceed in parallel. A disadvantage is that the order of the mount operations is undefined. Thus, you cannot use this option if you want to mount both \fI/usr\fP and \fI/usr/spool\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f, \-\-fake\fP -.RS 4 -Causes everything to be done except for the actual system call; if it\(cqs not obvious, this "fakes" mounting the filesystem. This option is useful in conjunction with the \fB\-v\fP flag to determine what the \fBmount\fP command is trying to do. It can also be used to add entries for devices that were mounted earlier with the \fB\-n\fP option. The \fB\-f\fP option checks for an existing record in \fI/etc/mtab\fP and fails when the record already exists (with a regular non\-fake mount, this check is done by the kernel). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i, \-\-internal\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt call the \fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fIfilesystem\fP helper even if it exists. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the partition that has the specified \fIlabel\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-show\-labels\fP -.RS 4 -Add the labels in the mount output. \fBmount\fP must have permission to read the disk device (e.g. be set\-user\-ID root) for this to work. One can set such a label for ext2, ext3 or ext4 using the \fBe2label\fP(8) utility, or for XFS using \fBxfs_admin\fP(8), or for reiserfs using \fBreiserfstune\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-move\fP -.RS 4 -Move a subtree to some other place. See above, the subsection \fBThe move operation\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-mtab\fP -.RS 4 -Mount without writing in \fI/etc/mtab\fP. This is necessary for example when \fI/etc\fP is on a read\-only filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-namespace\fP \fIns\fP -.RS 4 -Perform the mount operation in the mount namespace specified by \fIns\fP. \fIns\fP is either PID of process running in that namespace or special file representing that namespace. -.sp -\fBmount\fP switches to the mount namespace when it reads \fI/etc/fstab\fP, writes \fI/etc/mtab: (or writes to _/run/mount\fP) and calls the \fBmount\fP(2) system call, otherwise it runs in the original mount namespace. This means that the target namespace does not have to contain any libraries or other requirements necessary to execute the \fBmount\fP(2) call. -.sp -See \fBmount_namespaces\fP(7) for more information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-test\-opts\fP \fIopts\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the set of filesystems to which the \fB\-a\fP option applies. In this regard it is like the \fB\-t\fP option except that \fB\-O\fP is useless without \fB\-a\fP. For example, the command -.sp -\fBmount \-a \-O no_netdev\fP -.sp -mounts all filesystems except those which have the option \fInetdev\fP specified in the options field in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. -.sp -It is different from \fB\-t\fP in that each option is matched exactly; a leading \fBno\fP at the beginning of one option does not negate the rest. -.sp -The \fB\-t\fP and \fB\-O\fP options are cumulative in effect; that is, the command -.sp -\fBmount \-a \-t ext2 \-O _netdev\fP -.sp -mounts all ext2 filesystems with the _netdev option, not all filesystems that are either ext2 or have the _netdev option specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-options\fP \fIopts\fP -.RS 4 -Use the specified mount options. The \fIopts\fP argument is a comma\-separated list. For example: -.sp -\fBmount LABEL=mydisk \-o noatime,nodev,nosuid\fP -.sp -For more details, see the \fBFILESYSTEM\-INDEPENDENT MOUNT OPTIONS\fP and \fBFILESYSTEM\-SPECIFIC MOUNT OPTIONS\fP sections. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-options\-mode\fP \fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Controls how to combine options from \fIfstab\fP/\fImtab\fP with options from the command line. \fImode\fP can be one of \fBignore\fP, \fBappend\fP, \fBprepend\fP or \fBreplace\fP. For example, \fBappend\fP means that options from \fIfstab\fP are appended to options from the command line. The default value is \fBprepend\fP \(em it means command line options are evaluated after \fIfstab\fP options. Note that the last option wins if there are conflicting ones. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-options\-source\fP \fIsource\fP -.RS 4 -Source of default options. \fIsource\fP is a comma\-separated list of \fBfstab\fP, \fBmtab\fP and \fBdisable\fP. \fBdisable\fP disables \fBfstab\fP and \fBmtab\fP and disables \fB\-\-options\-source\-force\fP. The default value is \fBfstab,mtab\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-options\-source\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Use options from \fIfstab\fP/\fImtab\fP even if both \fIdevice\fP and \fIdir\fP are specified. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-rbind\fP -.RS 4 -Remount a subtree and all possible submounts somewhere else (so that its contents are available in both places). See above, the subsection \fBBind mounts\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-read\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the filesystem read\-only. A synonym is \fB\-o ro\fP. -.sp -Note that, depending on the filesystem type, state and kernel behavior, the system may still write to the device. For example, ext3 and ext4 will replay the journal if the filesystem is dirty. To prevent this kind of write access, you may want to mount an ext3 or ext4 filesystem with the \fBro,noload\fP mount options or set the block device itself to read\-only mode, see the \fBblockdev\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP -.RS 4 -Tolerate sloppy mount options rather than failing. This will ignore mount options not supported by a filesystem type. Not all filesystems support this option. Currently it\(cqs supported by the \fBmount.nfs\fP mount helper only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-source\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -If only one argument for the \fBmount\fP command is given, then the argument might be interpreted as the target (mountpoint) or source (device). This option allows you to explicitly define that the argument is the mount source. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-target\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -If only one argument for the mount command is given, then the argument might be interpreted as the target (mountpoint) or source (device). This option allows you to explicitly define that the argument is the mount target. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-target\-prefix\fP \fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Prepend the specified directory to all mount targets. This option can be used to follow \fIfstab\fP, but mount operations are done in another place, for example: -.sp -\fBmount \-\-all \-\-target\-prefix /chroot \-o X\-mount.mkdir\fP -.sp -mounts all from system \fIfstab\fP to \fI/chroot\fP, all missing mountpoint are created (due to X\-mount.mkdir). See also \fB\-\-fstab\fP to use an alternative \fIfstab\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-fstab\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies an alternative \fIfstab\fP file. If \fIpath\fP is a directory, then the files in the directory are sorted by \fBstrverscmp\fP(3); files that start with "." or without an \fI.fstab\fP extension are ignored. The option can be specified more than once. This option is mostly designed for initramfs or chroot scripts where additional configuration is specified beyond standard system configuration. -.sp -Note that \fBmount\fP does not pass the option \fB\-\-fstab\fP to the \fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fItype\fP helpers, meaning that the alternative \fIfstab\fP files will be invisible for the helpers. This is no problem for normal mounts, but user (non\-root) mounts always require \fIfstab\fP to verify the user\(cqs rights. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-types\fP \fIfstype\fP -.RS 4 -The argument following the \fB\-t\fP is used to indicate the filesystem type. The filesystem types which are currently supported depend on the running kernel. See \fI/proc/filesystems\fP and \fI/lib/modules/$(uname \-r)/kernel/fs\fP for a complete list of the filesystems. The most common are ext2, ext3, ext4, xfs, btrfs, vfat, sysfs, proc, nfs and cifs. -.sp -The programs \fBmount\fP and \fBumount\fP(8) support filesystem subtypes. The subtype is defined by a \(aq.subtype\(aq suffix. For example \(aqfuse.sshfs\(aq. It\(cqs recommended to use subtype notation rather than add any prefix to the mount source (for example \(aqsshfs#example.com\(aq is deprecated). -.sp -If no \fB\-t\fP option is given, or if the \fBauto\fP type is specified, \fBmount\fP will try to guess the desired type. \fBmount\fP uses the \fBlibblkid\fP(3) library for guessing the filesystem type; if that does not turn up anything that looks familiar, \fBmount\fP will try to read the file \fI/etc/filesystems\fP, or, if that does not exist, \fI/proc/filesystems\fP. All of the filesystem types listed there will be tried, except for those that are labeled "nodev" (e.g. \fIdevpts\fP, \fIproc\fP and \fInfs\fP). If \fI/etc/filesystems\fP ends in a line with a single *, mount will read \fI/proc/filesystems\fP afterwards. While trying, all filesystem types will be mounted with the mount option \fBsilent\fP. -.sp -The \fBauto\fP type may be useful for user\-mounted floppies. Creating a file \fI/etc/filesystems\fP can be useful to change the probe order (e.g., to try vfat before msdos or ext3 before ext2) or if you use a kernel module autoloader. -.sp -More than one type may be specified in a comma\-separated list, for the \fB\-t\fP option as well as in an \fI/etc/fstab\fP entry. The list of filesystem types for the \fB\-t\fP option can be prefixed with \fBno\fP to specify the filesystem types on which no action should be taken. The prefix \fBno\fP has no effect when specified in an \fI/etc/fstab\fP entry. -.sp -The prefix \fBno\fP can be meaningful with the \fB\-a\fP option. For example, the command -.sp -\fBmount \-a \-t nomsdos,smbfs\fP -.sp -mounts all filesystems except those of type \fImsdos\fP and \fIsmbfs\fP. -.sp -For most types all the \fBmount\fP program has to do is issue a simple \fBmount\fP(2) system call, and no detailed knowledge of the filesystem type is required. For a few types however (like nfs, nfs4, cifs, smbfs, ncpfs) an ad hoc code is necessary. The nfs, nfs4, cifs, smbfs, and ncpfs filesystems have a separate mount program. In order to make it possible to treat all types in a uniform way, \fBmount\fP will execute the program \fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fItype\fP (if that exists) when called with type \fItype\fP. Since different versions of the \fBsmbmount\fP program have different calling conventions, \fB/sbin/mount.smbfs\fP may have to be a shell script that sets up the desired call. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uuid\fP \fIuuid\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the partition that has the specified \fIuuid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-rw\fP, \fB\-\-read\-write\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the filesystem read/write. Read\-write is the kernel default and the \fBmount\fP default is to try read\-only if the previous mount syscall with read\-write flags on write\-protected devices of filesystems failed. -.sp -A synonym is \fB\-o rw\fP. -.sp -Note that specifying \fB\-w\fP on the command line forces \fBmount\fP to never try read\-only mount on write\-protected devices or already mounted read\-only filesystems. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILESYSTEM\-INDEPENDENT MOUNT OPTIONS" -.sp -Some of these options are only useful when they appear in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP file. -.sp -Some of these options could be enabled or disabled by default in the system kernel. To check the current setting see the options in \fI/proc/mounts\fP. Note that filesystems also have per\-filesystem specific default mount options (see for example \fBtune2fs \-l\fP output for ext_N_ filesystems). -.sp -The following options apply to any filesystem that is being mounted (but not every filesystem actually honors them \- e.g., the \fBsync\fP option today has an effect only for ext2, ext3, ext4, fat, vfat, ufs and xfs): -.sp -\fBasync\fP -.RS 4 -All I/O to the filesystem should be done asynchronously. (See also the \fBsync\fP option.) -.RE -.sp -\fBatime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not use the \fBnoatime\fP feature, so the inode access time is controlled by kernel defaults. See also the descriptions of the \fBrelatime\fP and \fBstrictatime\fP mount options. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoatime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not update inode access times on this filesystem (e.g. for faster access on the news spool to speed up news servers). This works for all inode types (directories too), so it implies \fBnodiratime\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBauto\fP -.RS 4 -Can be mounted with the \fB\-a\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoauto\fP -.RS 4 -Can only be mounted explicitly (i.e., the \fB\-a\fP option will not cause the filesystem to be mounted). -.RE -.sp -\fBcontext=\fP\fIcontext\fP, \fBfscontext=\fP\fIcontext\fP, \fBdefcontext=\fP\fIcontext\fP, and \fBrootcontext=\fP\fIcontext\fP -.RS 4 -The \fBcontext=\fP option is useful when mounting filesystems that do not support extended attributes, such as a floppy or hard disk formatted with VFAT, or systems that are not normally running under SELinux, such as an ext3 or ext4 formatted disk from a non\-SELinux workstation. You can also use \fBcontext=\fP on filesystems you do not trust, such as a floppy. It also helps in compatibility with xattr\-supporting filesystems on earlier 2.4.<x> kernel versions. Even where xattrs are supported, you can save time not having to label every file by assigning the entire disk one security context. -.sp -A commonly used option for removable media is \fBcontext="system_u:object_r:removable_t\fP. -.sp -The \fBfscontext=\fP option works for all filesystems, regardless of their xattr support. The fscontext option sets the overarching filesystem label to a specific security context. This filesystem label is separate from the individual labels on the files. It represents the entire filesystem for certain kinds of permission checks, such as during mount or file creation. Individual file labels are still obtained from the xattrs on the files themselves. The context option actually sets the aggregate context that fscontext provides, in addition to supplying the same label for individual files. -.sp -You can set the default security context for unlabeled files using \fBdefcontext=\fP option. This overrides the value set for unlabeled files in the policy and requires a filesystem that supports xattr labeling. -.sp -The \fBrootcontext=\fP option allows you to explicitly label the root inode of a FS being mounted before that FS or inode becomes visible to userspace. This was found to be useful for things like stateless Linux. -.sp -Note that the kernel rejects any remount request that includes the context option, \fBeven\fP when unchanged from the current context. -.sp -\fBWarning: the\fP \fIcontext\fP \fBvalue might contain commas\fP, in which case the value has to be properly quoted, otherwise \fBmount\fP will interpret the comma as a separator between mount options. Don\(cqt forget that the shell strips off quotes and thus \fBdouble quoting is required\fP. For example: -.RE -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -mount \-t tmpfs none /mnt \-o \(rs -\(aqcontext="system_u:object_r:tmp_t:s0:c127,c456",noexec\(aq -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -For more details, see \fBselinux\fP(8). -.sp -\fBdefaults\fP -.RS 4 -Use the default options: \fBrw\fP, \fBsuid\fP, \fBdev\fP, \fBexec\fP, \fBauto\fP, \fBnouser\fP, and \fBasync\fP. -.sp -Note that the real set of all default mount options depends on the kernel and filesystem type. See the beginning of this section for more details. -.RE -.sp -\fBdev\fP -.RS 4 -Interpret character or block special devices on the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBnodev\fP -.RS 4 -Do not interpret character or block special devices on the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBdiratime\fP -.RS 4 -Update directory inode access times on this filesystem. This is the default. (This option is ignored when \fBnoatime\fP is set.) -.RE -.sp -\fBnodiratime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not update directory inode access times on this filesystem. (This option is implied when \fBnoatime\fP is set.) -.RE -.sp -\fBdirsync\fP -.RS 4 -All directory updates within the filesystem should be done synchronously. This affects the following system calls: \fBcreat\fP(2), \fBlink\fP(2), \fBunlink\fP(2), \fBsymlink\fP(2), \fBmkdir\fP(2), \fBrmdir\fP(2), \fBmknod\fP(2) and \fBrename\fP(2). -.RE -.sp -\fBexec\fP -.RS 4 -Permit execution of binaries. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoexec\fP -.RS 4 -Do not permit direct execution of any binaries on the mounted filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBgroup\fP -.RS 4 -Allow an ordinary user to mount the filesystem if one of that user\(cqs groups matches the group of the device. This option implies the options \fBnosuid\fP and \fBnodev\fP (unless overridden by subsequent options, as in the option line \fBgroup,dev,suid\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fBiversion\fP -.RS 4 -Every time the inode is modified, the i_version field will be incremented. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoiversion\fP -.RS 4 -Do not increment the i_version inode field. -.RE -.sp -\fBmand\fP -.RS 4 -Allow mandatory locks on this filesystem. See \fBfcntl\fP(2). -.RE -.sp -\fBnomand\fP -.RS 4 -Do not allow mandatory locks on this filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fB_netdev\fP -.RS 4 -The filesystem resides on a device that requires network access (used to prevent the system from attempting to mount these filesystems until the network has been enabled on the system). -.RE -.sp -\fBnofail\fP -.RS 4 -Do not report errors for this device if it does not exist. -.RE -.sp -\fBrelatime\fP -.RS 4 -Update inode access times relative to modify or change time. Access time is only updated if the previous access time was earlier than the current modify or change time. (Similar to \fBnoatime\fP, but it doesn\(cqt break \fBmutt\fP(1) or other applications that need to know if a file has been read since the last time it was modified.) -.sp -Since Linux 2.6.30, the kernel defaults to the behavior provided by this option (unless \fBnoatime\fP was specified), and the \fBstrictatime\fP option is required to obtain traditional semantics. In addition, since Linux 2.6.30, the file\(cqs last access time is always updated if it is more than 1 day old. -.RE -.sp -\fBnorelatime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not use the \fBrelatime\fP feature. See also the \fBstrictatime\fP mount option. -.RE -.sp -\fBstrictatime\fP -.RS 4 -Allows to explicitly request full atime updates. This makes it possible for the kernel to default to \fBrelatime\fP or \fBnoatime\fP but still allow userspace to override it. For more details about the default system mount options see \fI/proc/mounts\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBnostrictatime\fP -.RS 4 -Use the kernel\(cqs default behavior for inode access time updates. -.RE -.sp -\fBlazytime\fP -.RS 4 -Only update times (atime, mtime, ctime) on the in\-memory version of the file inode. -.sp -This mount option significantly reduces writes to the inode table for workloads that perform frequent random writes to preallocated files. -.sp -The on\-disk timestamps are updated only when: -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -the inode needs to be updated for some change unrelated to file timestamps -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -the application employs \fBfsync\fP(2), \fBsyncfs\fP(2), or \fBsync\fP(2) -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -an undeleted inode is evicted from memory -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -more than 24 hours have passed since the inode was written to disk. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fBnolazytime\fP -.RS 4 -Do not use the lazytime feature. -.RE -.sp -\fBsuid\fP -.RS 4 -Honor set\-user\-ID and set\-group\-ID bits or file capabilities when executing programs from this filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBnosuid\fP -.RS 4 -Do not honor set\-user\-ID and set\-group\-ID bits or file capabilities when executing programs from this filesystem. In addition, SELinux domain transitions require permission nosuid_transition, which in turn needs also policy capability nnp_nosuid_transition. -.RE -.sp -\fBsilent\fP -.RS 4 -Turn on the silent flag. -.RE -.sp -\fBloud\fP -.RS 4 -Turn off the silent flag. -.RE -.sp -\fBowner\fP -.RS 4 -Allow an ordinary user to mount the filesystem if that user is the owner of the device. This option implies the options \fBnosuid\fP and \fBnodev\fP (unless overridden by subsequent options, as in the option line \fBowner,dev,suid\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fBremount\fP -.RS 4 -Attempt to remount an already\-mounted filesystem. This is commonly used to change the mount flags for a filesystem, especially to make a readonly filesystem writable. It does not change device or mount point. -.sp -The remount operation together with the \fBbind\fP flag has special semantics. See above, the subsection \fBBind mounts\fP. -.sp -The remount functionality follows the standard way the \fBmount\fP command works with options from \fIfstab\fP. This means that \fBmount\fP does not read \fIfstab\fP (or \fImtab\fP) only when both \fIdevice\fP and \fIdir\fP are specified. -.sp -\fBmount \-o remount,rw /dev/foo /dir\fP -.sp -After this call all old mount options are replaced and arbitrary stuff from \fIfstab\fP (or \fImtab\fP) is ignored, except the loop= option which is internally generated and maintained by the mount command. -.sp -\fBmount \-o remount,rw /dir\fP -.sp -After this call, mount reads \fIfstab\fP and merges these options with the options from the command line (\fB\-o\fP). If no mountpoint is found in \fIfstab\fP, then a remount with unspecified source is allowed. -.sp -\fBmount\fP allows the use of \fB\-\-all\fP to remount all already mounted filesystems which match a specified filter (\fB\-O\fP and \fB\-t\fP). For example: -.sp -\fBmount \-\-all \-o remount,ro \-t vfat\fP -.sp -remounts all already mounted vfat filesystems in read\-only mode. Each of the filesystems is remounted by \fBmount \-o remount,ro /dir\fP semantic. This means the \fBmount\fP command reads \fIfstab\fP or \fImtab\fP and merges these options with the options from the command line. -.RE -.sp -\fBro\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the filesystem read\-only. -.RE -.sp -\fBrw\fP -.RS 4 -Mount the filesystem read\-write. -.RE -.sp -\fBsync\fP -.RS 4 -All I/O to the filesystem should be done synchronously. In the case of media with a limited number of write cycles (e.g. some flash drives), \fBsync\fP may cause life\-cycle shortening. -.RE -.sp -\fBuser\fP -.RS 4 -Allow an ordinary user to mount the filesystem. The name of the mounting user is written to the \fImtab\fP file (or to the private libmount file in \fI/run/mount\fP on systems without a regular \fImtab\fP) so that this same user can unmount the filesystem again. This option implies the options \fBnoexec\fP, \fBnosuid\fP, and \fBnodev\fP (unless overridden by subsequent options, as in the option line \fBuser,exec,dev,suid\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fBnouser\fP -.RS 4 -Forbid an ordinary user to mount the filesystem. This is the default; it does not imply any other options. -.RE -.sp -\fBusers\fP -.RS 4 -Allow any user to mount and to unmount the filesystem, even when some other ordinary user mounted it. This option implies the options \fBnoexec\fP, \fBnosuid\fP, and \fBnodev\fP (unless overridden by subsequent options, as in the option line \fBusers,exec,dev,suid\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fBX\-\fP* -.RS 4 -All options prefixed with "X\-" are interpreted as comments or as userspace application\-specific options. These options are not stored in user space (e.g., \fImtab\fP file), nor sent to the mount.\fItype\fP helpers nor to the \fBmount\fP(2) system call. The suggested format is \fBX\-\fP\fIappname\fP.\fIoption\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBx\-\fP* -.RS 4 -The same as \fBX\-\fP* options, but stored permanently in user space. This means the options are also available for \fBumount\fP(8) or other operations. Note that maintaining mount options in user space is tricky, because it\(cqs necessary use libmount\-based tools and there is no guarantee that the options will be always available (for example after a move mount operation or in unshared namespace). -.sp -Note that before util\-linux v2.30 the x\-* options have not been maintained by libmount and stored in user space (functionality was the same as for X\-* now), but due to the growing number of use\-cases (in initrd, systemd etc.) the functionality has been extended to keep existing \fIfstab\fP configurations usable without a change. -.RE -.sp -\fBX\-mount.mkdir\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Allow to make a target directory (mountpoint) if it does not exit yet. The optional argument \fImode\fP specifies the filesystem access mode used for \fBmkdir\fP(2) in octal notation. The default mode is 0755. This functionality is supported only for root users or when mount executed without suid permissions. The option is also supported as x\-mount.mkdir, this notation is deprecated since v2.30. -.RE -.sp -\fBnosymfollow\fP -.RS 4 -Do not follow symlinks when resolving paths. Symlinks can still be created, and \fBreadlink\fP(1), \fBreadlink\fP(2), \fBrealpath\fP(1), and \fBrealpath\fP(3) all still work properly. -.RE -.SH "FILESYSTEM\-SPECIFIC MOUNT OPTIONS" -.sp -This section lists options that are specific to particular filesystems. Where possible, you should first consult filesystem\-specific manual pages for details. Some of those pages are listed in the following table. -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -\fBFilesystem(s)\fP -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBManual page\fP -T} -T{ -.sp -btrfs -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBbtrfs\fP(5) -T} -T{ -.sp -cifs -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBmount.cifs\fP(8) -T} -T{ -.sp -ext2, ext3, ext4 -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBext4\fP(5) -T} -T{ -.sp -fuse -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBfuse\fP(8) -T} -T{ -.sp -nfs -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBnfs\fP(5) -T} -T{ -.sp -tmpfs -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBtmpfs\fP(5) -T} -T{ -.sp -xfs -T}:T{ -.sp -\fBxfs\fP(5) -T} -.TE -.sp -.sp -Note that some of the pages listed above might be available only after you install the respective userland tools. -.sp -The following options apply only to certain filesystems. We sort them by filesystem. All options follow the \fB\-o\fP flag. -.sp -What options are supported depends a bit on the running kernel. Further information may be available in filesystem\-specific files in the kernel source subdirectory \fIDocumentation/filesystems\fP. -.SS "Mount options for adfs" -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of the files in the filesystem (default: uid=gid=0). -.RE -.sp -\fBownmask=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBothmask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the permission mask for ADFS \(aqowner\(aq permissions and \(aqother\(aq permissions, respectively (default: 0700 and 0077, respectively). See also \fI/usr/src/linux/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.rst\fP. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for affs" -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of the root of the filesystem (default: uid=gid=0, but with option \fBuid\fP or \fBgid\fP without specified value, the UID and GID of the current process are taken). -.RE -.sp -\fBsetuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBsetgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of all files. -.RE -.sp -\fBmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the mode of all files to \fIvalue\fP & 0777 disregarding the original permissions. Add search permission to directories that have read permission. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBprotect\fP -.RS 4 -Do not allow any changes to the protection bits on the filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBusemp\fP -.RS 4 -Set UID and GID of the root of the filesystem to the UID and GID of the mount point upon the first sync or umount, and then clear this option. Strange... -.RE -.sp -\fBverbose\fP -.RS 4 -Print an informational message for each successful mount. -.RE -.sp -\fBprefix=\fP\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -Prefix used before volume name, when following a link. -.RE -.sp -\fBvolume=\fP\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -Prefix (of length at most 30) used before \(aq/\(aq when following a symbolic link. -.RE -.sp -\fBreserved=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -(Default: 2.) Number of unused blocks at the start of the device. -.RE -.sp -\fBroot=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Give explicitly the location of the root block. -.RE -.sp -\fBbs=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Give blocksize. Allowed values are 512, 1024, 2048, 4096. -.RE -.sp -\fBgrpquota\fP|\fBnoquota\fP|\fBquota\fP|\fBusrquota\fP -.RS 4 -These options are accepted but ignored. (However, quota utilities may react to such strings in \fI/etc/fstab\fP.) -.RE -.SS "Mount options for debugfs" -.sp -The debugfs filesystem is a pseudo filesystem, traditionally mounted on \fI/sys/kernel/debug\fP. As of kernel version 3.4, debugfs has the following options: -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIn\fP\fB, gid=\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of the mountpoint. -.RE -.sp -\fBmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Sets the mode of the mountpoint. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for devpts" -.sp -The devpts filesystem is a pseudo filesystem, traditionally mounted on \fI/dev/pts\fP. In order to acquire a pseudo terminal, a process opens \fI/dev/ptmx\fP; the number of the pseudo terminal is then made available to the process and the pseudo terminal slave can be accessed as \fI/dev/pts/\fP<number>. -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -This sets the owner or the group of newly created pseudo terminals to the specified values. When nothing is specified, they will be set to the UID and GID of the creating process. For example, if there is a tty group with GID 5, then \fBgid=5\fP will cause newly created pseudo terminals to belong to the tty group. -.RE -.sp -\fBmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the mode of newly created pseudo terminals to the specified value. The default is 0600. A value of \fBmode=620\fP and \fBgid=5\fP makes "mesg y" the default on newly created pseudo terminals. -.RE -.sp -\fBnewinstance\fP -.RS 4 -Create a private instance of the devpts filesystem, such that indices of pseudo terminals allocated in this new instance are independent of indices created in other instances of devpts. -.sp -All mounts of devpts without this \fBnewinstance\fP option share the same set of pseudo terminal indices (i.e., legacy mode). Each mount of devpts with the \fBnewinstance\fP option has a private set of pseudo terminal indices. -.sp -This option is mainly used to support containers in the Linux kernel. It is implemented in Linux kernel versions starting with 2.6.29. Further, this mount option is valid only if \fBCONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES\fP is enabled in the kernel configuration. -.sp -To use this option effectively, \fI/dev/ptmx\fP must be a symbolic link to \fIpts/ptmx\fP. See \fIDocumentation/filesystems/devpts.txt\fP in the Linux kernel source tree for details. -.RE -.sp -\fBptmxmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the mode for the new \fIptmx\fP device node in the devpts filesystem. -.sp -With the support for multiple instances of devpts (see \fBnewinstance\fP option above), each instance has a private \fIptmx\fP node in the root of the devpts filesystem (typically \fI/dev/pts/ptmx\fP). -.sp -For compatibility with older versions of the kernel, the default mode of the new \fIptmx\fP node is 0000. \fBptmxmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP specifies a more useful mode for the \fIptmx\fP node and is highly recommended when the \fBnewinstance\fP option is specified. -.sp -This option is only implemented in Linux kernel versions starting with 2.6.29. Further, this option is valid only if \fBCONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES\fP is enabled in the kernel configuration. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for fat" -.sp -(Note: \fIfat\fP is not a separate filesystem, but a common part of the \fImsdos\fP, \fIumsdos\fP and \fIvfat\fP filesystems.) -.sp -\fBblocksize=\fP{\fB512\fP|\fB1024\fP|\fB2048\fP} -.RS 4 -Set blocksize (default 512). This option is obsolete. -.RE -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of all files. (Default: the UID and GID of the current process.) -.RE -.sp -\fBumask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the umask (the bitmask of the permissions that are \fBnot\fP present). The default is the umask of the current process. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBdmask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the umask applied to directories only. The default is the umask of the current process. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBfmask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the umask applied to regular files only. The default is the umask of the current process. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBallow_utime=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -This option controls the permission check of mtime/atime. -.sp -\fB20\fP -.RS 4 -If current process is in group of file\(cqs group ID, you can change timestamp. -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -Other users can change timestamp. -.RE -.RE -.sp -The default is set from \(aqdmask\(aq option. (If the directory is writable, \fButime\fP(2) is also allowed. I.e. ~dmask & 022) -.sp -Normally \fButime\fP(2) checks that the current process is owner of the file, or that it has the \fBCAP_FOWNER\fP capability. But FAT filesystems don\(cqt have UID/GID on disk, so the normal check is too inflexible. With this option you can relax it. -.sp -\fBcheck=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Three different levels of pickiness can be chosen: -.sp -\fBr\fP[\fBelaxed\fP] -.RS 4 -Upper and lower case are accepted and equivalent, long name parts are truncated (e.g. \fIverylongname.foobar\fP becomes \fIverylong.foo\fP), leading and embedded spaces are accepted in each name part (name and extension). -.RE -.sp -\fBn\fP[\fBormal\fP] -.RS 4 -Like "relaxed", but many special characters (*, ?, <, spaces, etc.) are rejected. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fBs\fP[\fBtrict\fP] -.RS 4 -Like "normal", but names that contain long parts or special characters that are sometimes used on Linux but are not accepted by MS\-DOS (+, =, etc.) are rejected. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fBcodepage=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Sets the codepage for converting to shortname characters on FAT and VFAT filesystems. By default, codepage 437 is used. -.RE -.sp -\fBconv=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -This option is obsolete and may fail or be ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBcvf_format=\fP\fImodule\fP -.RS 4 -Forces the driver to use the CVF (Compressed Volume File) module cvf__module_ instead of auto\-detection. If the kernel supports kmod, the cvf_format=xxx option also controls on\-demand CVF module loading. This option is obsolete. -.RE -.sp -\fBcvf_option=\fP\fIoption\fP -.RS 4 -Option passed to the CVF module. This option is obsolete. -.RE -.sp -\fBdebug\fP -.RS 4 -Turn on the \fIdebug\fP flag. A version string and a list of filesystem parameters will be printed (these data are also printed if the parameters appear to be inconsistent). -.RE -.sp -\fBdiscard\fP -.RS 4 -If set, causes discard/TRIM commands to be issued to the block device when blocks are freed. This is useful for SSD devices and sparse/thinly\-provisioned LUNs. -.RE -.sp -\fBdos1xfloppy\fP -.RS 4 -If set, use a fallback default BIOS Parameter Block configuration, determined by backing device size. These static parameters match defaults assumed by DOS 1.x for 160 kiB, 180 kiB, 320 kiB, and 360 kiB floppies and floppy images. -.RE -.sp -\fBerrors=\fP{\fBpanic\fP|\fBcontinue\fP|\fBremount\-ro\fP} -.RS 4 -Specify FAT behavior on critical errors: panic, continue without doing anything, or remount the partition in read\-only mode (default behavior). -.RE -.sp -\fBfat=\fP{\fB12\fP|\fB16\fP|\fB32\fP} -.RS 4 -Specify a 12, 16 or 32 bit fat. This overrides the automatic FAT type detection routine. Use with caution! -.RE -.sp -\fBiocharset=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Character set to use for converting between 8 bit characters and 16 bit Unicode characters. The default is iso8859\-1. Long filenames are stored on disk in Unicode format. -.RE -.sp -\fBnfs=\fP{\fBstale_rw\fP|\fBnostale_ro\fP} -.RS 4 -Enable this only if you want to export the FAT filesystem over NFS. -.sp -\fBstale_rw\fP: This option maintains an index (cache) of directory inodes which is used by the nfs\-related code to improve look\-ups. Full file operations (read/write) over NFS are supported but with cache eviction at NFS server, this could result in spurious \fBESTALE\fP errors. -.sp -\fBnostale_ro\fP: This option bases the inode number and file handle on the on\-disk location of a file in the FAT directory entry. This ensures that \fBESTALE\fP will not be returned after a file is evicted from the inode cache. However, it means that operations such as rename, create and unlink could cause file handles that previously pointed at one file to point at a different file, potentially causing data corruption. For this reason, this option also mounts the filesystem readonly. -.sp -To maintain backward compatibility, \fB\-o nfs\fP is also accepted, defaulting to \fBstale_rw\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBtz=UTC\fP -.RS 4 -This option disables the conversion of timestamps between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC (which Linux uses internally). This is particularly useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras) that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of local time. -.RE -.sp -\fBtime_offset=\fP\fIminutes\fP -.RS 4 -Set offset for conversion of timestamps from local time used by FAT to UTC. I.e., \fIminutes\fP will be subtracted from each timestamp to convert it to UTC used internally by Linux. This is useful when the time zone set in the kernel via \fBsettimeofday\fP(2) is not the time zone used by the filesystem. Note that this option still does not provide correct time stamps in all cases in presence of DST \- time stamps in a different DST setting will be off by one hour. -.RE -.sp -\fBquiet\fP -.RS 4 -Turn on the \fIquiet\fP flag. Attempts to chown or chmod files do not return errors, although they fail. Use with caution! -.RE -.sp -\fBrodir\fP -.RS 4 -FAT has the \fBATTR_RO\fP (read\-only) attribute. On Windows, the \fBATTR_RO\fP of the directory will just be ignored, and is used only by applications as a flag (e.g. it\(cqs set for the customized folder). -.sp -If you want to use \fBATTR_RO\fP as read\-only flag even for the directory, set this option. -.RE -.sp -\fBshowexec\fP -.RS 4 -If set, the execute permission bits of the file will be allowed only if the extension part of the name is .EXE, .COM, or .BAT. Not set by default. -.RE -.sp -\fBsys_immutable\fP -.RS 4 -If set, \fBATTR_SYS\fP attribute on FAT is handled as \fBIMMUTABLE\fP flag on Linux. Not set by default. -.RE -.sp -\fBflush\fP -.RS 4 -If set, the filesystem will try to flush to disk more early than normal. Not set by default. -.RE -.sp -\fBusefree\fP -.RS 4 -Use the "free clusters" value stored on \fBFSINFO\fP. It\(cqll be used to determine number of free clusters without scanning disk. But it\(cqs not used by default, because recent Windows don\(cqt update it correctly in some case. If you are sure the "free clusters" on \fBFSINFO\fP is correct, by this option you can avoid scanning disk. -.RE -.sp -\fBdots\fP, \fBnodots\fP, \fBdotsOK=\fP[\fByes\fP|\fBno\fP] -.RS 4 -Various misguided attempts to force Unix or DOS conventions onto a FAT filesystem. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for hfs" -.sp -\fBcreator=\fP\fIcccc\fP\fB, type=\fP\fIcccc\fP -.RS 4 -Set the creator/type values as shown by the MacOS finder used for creating new files. Default values: \(aq????\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIn\fP\fB, gid=\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of all files. (Default: the UID and GID of the current process.) -.RE -.sp -\fBdir_umask=\fP\fIn\fP\fB, file_umask=\fP\fIn\fP\fB, umask=\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -Set the umask used for all directories, all regular files, or all files and directories. Defaults to the umask of the current process. -.RE -.sp -\fBsession=\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -Select the CDROM session to mount. Defaults to leaving that decision to the CDROM driver. This option will fail with anything but a CDROM as underlying device. -.RE -.sp -\fBpart=\fP\fIn\fP -.RS 4 -Select partition number n from the device. Only makes sense for CDROMs. Defaults to not parsing the partition table at all. -.RE -.sp -\fBquiet\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt complain about invalid mount options. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for hpfs" -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group of all files. (Default: the UID and GID of the current process.) -.RE -.sp -\fBumask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the umask (the bitmask of the permissions that are \fBnot\fP present). The default is the umask of the current process. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBcase=\fP{\fBlower\fP|\fBasis\fP} -.RS 4 -Convert all files names to lower case, or leave them. (Default: \fBcase=lower\fP.) -.RE -.sp -\fBconv=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -This option is obsolete and may fail or being ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBnocheck\fP -.RS 4 -Do not abort mounting when certain consistency checks fail. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for iso9660" -.sp -ISO 9660 is a standard describing a filesystem structure to be used on CD\-ROMs. (This filesystem type is also seen on some DVDs. See also the \fIudf\fP filesystem.) -.sp -Normal \fIiso9660\fP filenames appear in an 8.3 format (i.e., DOS\-like restrictions on filename length), and in addition all characters are in upper case. Also there is no field for file ownership, protection, number of links, provision for block/character devices, etc. -.sp -Rock Ridge is an extension to iso9660 that provides all of these UNIX\-like features. Basically there are extensions to each directory record that supply all of the additional information, and when Rock Ridge is in use, the filesystem is indistinguishable from a normal UNIX filesystem (except that it is read\-only, of course). -.sp -\fBnorock\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the use of Rock Ridge extensions, even if available. Cf. \fBmap\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBnojoliet\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the use of Microsoft Joliet extensions, even if available. Cf. \fBmap\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBcheck=\fP{\fBr\fP[\fBelaxed\fP]|\fBs\fP[\fBtrict\fP]} -.RS 4 -With \fBcheck=relaxed\fP, a filename is first converted to lower case before doing the lookup. This is probably only meaningful together with \fBnorock\fP and \fBmap=normal\fP. (Default: \fBcheck=strict\fP.) -.RE -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Give all files in the filesystem the indicated user or group id, possibly overriding the information found in the Rock Ridge extensions. (Default: \fBuid=0,gid=0\fP.) -.RE -.sp -\fBmap=\fP{\fBn\fP[\fBormal\fP]|\fBo\fP[\fBff\fP]|\fBa\fP[\fBcorn\fP]} -.RS 4 -For non\-Rock Ridge volumes, normal name translation maps upper to lower case ASCII, drops a trailing \(aq;1\(aq, and converts \(aq;\(aq to \(aq.\(aq. With \fBmap=off\fP no name translation is done. See \fBnorock\fP. (Default: \fBmap=normal\fP.) \fBmap=acorn\fP is like \fBmap=normal\fP but also apply Acorn extensions if present. -.RE -.sp -\fBmode=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -For non\-Rock Ridge volumes, give all files the indicated mode. (Default: read and execute permission for everybody.) Octal mode values require a leading 0. -.RE -.sp -\fBunhide\fP -.RS 4 -Also show hidden and associated files. (If the ordinary files and the associated or hidden files have the same filenames, this may make the ordinary files inaccessible.) -.RE -.sp -\fBblock=\fP{\fB512\fP|\fB1024\fP|\fB2048\fP} -.RS 4 -Set the block size to the indicated value. (Default: \fBblock=1024\fP.) -.RE -.sp -\fBconv=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -This option is obsolete and may fail or being ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBcruft\fP -.RS 4 -If the high byte of the file length contains other garbage, set this mount option to ignore the high order bits of the file length. This implies that a file cannot be larger than 16 MB. -.RE -.sp -\fBsession=\fP\fIx\fP -.RS 4 -Select number of session on a multisession CD. -.RE -.sp -\fBsbsector=\fP\fIxxx\fP -.RS 4 -Session begins from sector xxx. -.RE -.sp -The following options are the same as for vfat and specifying them only makes sense when using discs encoded using Microsoft\(cqs Joliet extensions. -.sp -\fBiocharset=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Character set to use for converting 16 bit Unicode characters on CD to 8 bit characters. The default is iso8859\-1. -.RE -.sp -\fButf8\fP -.RS 4 -Convert 16 bit Unicode characters on CD to UTF\-8. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for jfs" -.sp -\fBiocharset=\fP\fIname\fP -.RS 4 -Character set to use for converting from Unicode to ASCII. The default is to do no conversion. Use \fBiocharset=utf8\fP for UTF8 translations. This requires \fBCONFIG_NLS_UTF8\fP to be set in the kernel \fI.config\fP file. -.RE -.sp -\fBresize=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Resize the volume to \fIvalue\fP blocks. JFS only supports growing a volume, not shrinking it. This option is only valid during a remount, when the volume is mounted read\-write. The \fBresize\fP keyword with no value will grow the volume to the full size of the partition. -.RE -.sp -\fBnointegrity\fP -.RS 4 -Do not write to the journal. The primary use of this option is to allow for higher performance when restoring a volume from backup media. The integrity of the volume is not guaranteed if the system abnormally ends. -.RE -.sp -\fBintegrity\fP -.RS 4 -Default. Commit metadata changes to the journal. Use this option to remount a volume where the \fBnointegrity\fP option was previously specified in order to restore normal behavior. -.RE -.sp -\fBerrors=\fP{\fBcontinue\fP|\fBremount\-ro\fP|\fBpanic\fP} -.RS 4 -Define the behavior when an error is encountered. (Either ignore errors and just mark the filesystem erroneous and continue, or remount the filesystem read\-only, or panic and halt the system.) -.RE -.sp -\fBnoquota\fP|\fBquota\fP|\fBusrquota\fP|\fBgrpquota\fP -.RS 4 -These options are accepted but ignored. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for msdos" -.sp -See mount options for fat. If the \fImsdos\fP filesystem detects an inconsistency, it reports an error and sets the file system read\-only. The filesystem can be made writable again by remounting it. -.SS "Mount options for ncpfs" -.sp -Just like \fInfs\fP, the \fIncpfs\fP implementation expects a binary argument (a \fIstruct ncp_mount_data\fP) to the mount system call. This argument is constructed by \fBncpmount\fP(8) and the current version of \fBmount\fP (2.12) does not know anything about ncpfs. -.SS "Mount options for ntfs" -.sp -\fBiocharset=\fP\fIname\fP -.RS 4 -Character set to use when returning file names. Unlike VFAT, NTFS suppresses names that contain nonconvertible characters. Deprecated. -.RE -.sp -\fBnls=\fP\fIname\fP -.RS 4 -New name for the option earlier called \fIiocharset\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fButf8\fP -.RS 4 -Use UTF\-8 for converting file names. -.RE -.sp -\fBuni_xlate=\fP{\fB0\fP|\fB1\fP|\fB2\fP} -.RS 4 -For 0 (or \(aqno\(aq or \(aqfalse\(aq), do not use escape sequences for unknown Unicode characters. For 1 (or \(aqyes\(aq or \(aqtrue\(aq) or 2, use vfat\-style 4\-byte escape sequences starting with ":". Here 2 gives a little\-endian encoding and 1 a byteswapped bigendian encoding. -.RE -.sp -\fBposix=[0|1]\fP -.RS 4 -If enabled (posix=1), the filesystem distinguishes between upper and lower case. The 8.3 alias names are presented as hard links instead of being suppressed. This option is obsolete. -.RE -.sp -\fBuid=\fP\fIvalue\fP, \fBgid=\fP\fIvalue\fP and \fBumask=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set the file permission on the filesystem. The umask value is given in octal. By default, the files are owned by root and not readable by somebody else. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for overlay" -.sp -Since Linux 3.18 the overlay pseudo filesystem implements a union mount for other filesystems. -.sp -An overlay filesystem combines two filesystems \- an \fBupper\fP filesystem and a \fBlower\fP filesystem. When a name exists in both filesystems, the object in the upper filesystem is visible while the object in the lower filesystem is either hidden or, in the case of directories, merged with the upper object. -.sp -The lower filesystem can be any filesystem supported by Linux and does not need to be writable. The lower filesystem can even be another overlayfs. The upper filesystem will normally be writable and if it is it must support the creation of trusted.* extended attributes, and must provide a valid d_type in readdir responses, so NFS is not suitable. -.sp -A read\-only overlay of two read\-only filesystems may use any filesystem type. The options \fBlowerdir\fP and \fBupperdir\fP are combined into a merged directory by using: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount \-t overlay overlay \(rs - \-olowerdir=/lower,upperdir=/upper,workdir=/work /merged -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -\fBlowerdir=\fP\fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -Any filesystem, does not need to be on a writable filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBupperdir=\fP\fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -The upperdir is normally on a writable filesystem. -.RE -.sp -\fBworkdir=\fP\fIdirectory\fP -.RS 4 -The workdir needs to be an empty directory on the same filesystem as upperdir. -.RE -.sp -\fBuserxattr\fP -.RS 4 -Use the "\fBuser.overlay.\fP" xattr namespace instead of "\fBtrusted.overlay.\fP". This is useful for unprivileged mounting of overlayfs. -.RE -.sp -\fBredirect_dir=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP|\fBfollow\fP|\fBnofollow\fP} -.RS 4 -If the \fIredirect_dir\fP feature is enabled, then the directory will be copied up (but not the contents). Then the "{\fBtrusted\fP|\fBuser\fP}.overlay.redirect" extended attribute is set to the path of the original location from the root of the overlay. Finally the directory is moved to the new location. -.sp -\fBon\fP -.RS 4 -Redirects are enabled. -.RE -.sp -\fBoff\fP -.RS 4 -Redirects are not created and only followed if "redirect_always_follow" feature is enabled in the kernel/module config. -.RE -.sp -\fBfollow\fP -.RS 4 -Redirects are not created, but followed. -.RE -.sp -\fBnofollow\fP -.RS 4 -Redirects are not created and not followed (equivalent to "redirect_dir=off" if "redirect_always_follow" feature is not enabled). -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fBindex=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP} -.RS 4 -Inode index. If this feature is disabled and a file with multiple hard links is copied up, then this will "break" the link. Changes will not be propagated to other names referring to the same inode. -.RE -.sp -\fBuuid=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP} -.RS 4 -Can be used to replace UUID of the underlying filesystem in file handles with null, and effectively disable UUID checks. This can be useful in case the underlying disk is copied and the UUID of this copy is changed. This is only applicable if all lower/upper/work directories are on the same filesystem, otherwise it will fallback to normal behaviour. -.RE -.sp -\fBnfs_export=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP} -.RS 4 -When the underlying filesystems supports NFS export and the "nfs_export" -feature is enabled, an overlay filesystem may be exported to NFS. -.sp -With the “nfs_export” feature, on copy_up of any lower object, an index entry -is created under the index directory. The index entry name is the hexadecimal -representation of the copy up origin file handle. For a non\-directory object, -the index entry is a hard link to the upper inode. For a directory object, the -index entry has an extended attribute "{\fBtrusted\fP|\fBuser\fP}.overlay.upper" -with an encoded file handle of the upper directory inode. -.sp -When encoding a file handle from an overlay filesystem object, the following rules apply -.RS 4 -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For a non\-upper object, encode a lower file handle from lower inode -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For an indexed object, encode a lower file handle from copy_up origin -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For a pure\-upper object and for an existing non\-indexed upper object, encode an upper file handle from upper inode -.RE -.RE -.sp -The encoded overlay file handle includes -.RS 4 -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Header including path type information (e.g. lower/upper) -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -UUID of the underlying filesystem -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Underlying filesystem encoding of underlying inode -.RE -.RE -.sp -This encoding format is identical to the encoding format file handles that are stored in extended attribute "{\fBtrusted\fP|\fBuser\fP}.overlay.origin". When decoding an overlay file handle, the following steps are followed -.RS 4 -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Find underlying layer by UUID and path type information. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -Decode the underlying filesystem file handle to underlying dentry. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For a lower file handle, lookup the handle in index directory by name. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -If a whiteout is found in index, return ESTALE. This represents an overlay object that was deleted after its file handle was encoded. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For a non\-directory, instantiate a disconnected overlay dentry from the decoded underlying dentry, the path type and index inode, if found. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -.ie n \{\ -\h'-04'\(bu\h'+03'\c -.\} -.el \{\ -. sp -1 -. IP \(bu 2.3 -.\} -For a directory, use the connected underlying decoded dentry, path type and index, to lookup a connected overlay dentry. -.RE -.RE -.sp -Decoding a non\-directory file handle may return a disconnected dentry. copy_up -of that disconnected dentry will create an upper index entry with no upper -alias. -.sp -When overlay filesystem has multiple lower layers, a middle layer directory may -have a "redirect" to lower directory. Because middle layer "redirects" are not -indexed, a lower file handle that was encoded from the "redirect" origin -directory, cannot be used to find the middle or upper layer directory. -Similarly, a lower file handle that was encoded from a descendant of the -"redirect" origin directory, cannot be used to reconstruct a connected overlay -path. To mitigate the cases of directories that cannot be decoded from a lower -file handle, these directories are copied up on encode and encoded as an upper -file handle. On an overlay filesystem with no upper layer this mitigation -cannot be used NFS export in this setup requires turning off redirect follow -(e.g. "\fIredirect_dir=nofollow\fP"). -.sp -The overlay filesystem does not support non\-directory connectable file handles, so exporting with the \fIsubtree_check\fP exportfs configuration will cause failures to lookup files over NFS. -.sp -When the NFS export feature is enabled, all directory index entries are verified on mount time to check that upper file handles are not stale. This verification may cause significant overhead in some cases. -.sp -Note: the mount options \fIindex=off,nfs_export=on\fP are conflicting for a -read\-write mount and will result in an error. -.RE -.sp -\fBxinfo=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP|\fBauto\fP} -.RS 4 -The "xino" feature composes a unique object identifier from the real object st_ino and an underlying fsid index. The "xino" feature uses the high inode number bits for fsid, because the underlying filesystems rarely use the high inode number bits. In case the underlying inode number does overflow into the high xino bits, overlay filesystem will fall back to the non xino behavior for that inode. -.sp -For a detailed description of the effect of this option please refer to \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/filesystems/overlayfs.html?highlight=overlayfs" "" "" -.RE -.sp -\fBmetacopy=\fP{\fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP} -.RS 4 -When metadata only copy up feature is enabled, overlayfs will only copy up metadata (as opposed to whole file), when a metadata specific operation like chown/chmod is performed. Full file will be copied up later when file is opened for WRITE operation. -.sp -In other words, this is delayed data copy up operation and data is copied up when there is a need to actually modify data. -.RE -.sp -\fBvolatile\fP -.RS 4 -Volatile mounts are not guaranteed to survive a crash. It is strongly recommended that volatile mounts are only used if data written to the overlay can be recreated without significant effort. -.sp -The advantage of mounting with the "volatile" option is that all forms of sync calls to the upper filesystem are omitted. -.sp -In order to avoid a giving a false sense of safety, the syncfs (and fsync) semantics of volatile mounts are slightly different than that of the rest of VFS. If any writeback error occurs on the upperdir’s filesystem after a volatile mount takes place, all sync functions will return an error. Once this condition is reached, the filesystem will not recover, and every subsequent sync call will return an error, even if the upperdir has not experience a new error since the last sync call. -.sp -When overlay is mounted with "volatile" option, the directory "$workdir/work/incompat/volatile" is created. During next mount, overlay checks for this directory and refuses to mount if present. This is a strong indicator that user should throw away upper and work directories and create fresh one. In very limited cases where the user knows that the system has not crashed and contents of upperdir are intact, The "volatile" directory can be removed. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for reiserfs" -.sp -Reiserfs is a journaling filesystem. -.sp -\fBconv\fP -.RS 4 -Instructs version 3.6 reiserfs software to mount a version 3.5 filesystem, using the 3.6 format for newly created objects. This filesystem will no longer be compatible with reiserfs 3.5 tools. -.RE -.sp -\fBhash=\fP{\fBrupasov\fP|\fBtea\fP|\fBr5\fP|\fBdetect\fP} -.RS 4 -Choose which hash function reiserfs will use to find files within directories. -.sp -\fBrupasov\fP -.RS 4 -A hash invented by Yury Yu. Rupasov. It is fast and preserves locality, mapping lexicographically close file names to close hash values. This option should not be used, as it causes a high probability of hash collisions. -.RE -.sp -\fBtea\fP -.RS 4 -A Davis\-Meyer function implemented by Jeremy Fitzhardinge. It uses hash permuting bits in the name. It gets high randomness and, therefore, low probability of hash collisions at some CPU cost. This may be used if \fBEHASHCOLLISION\fP errors are experienced with the r5 hash. -.RE -.sp -\fBr5\fP -.RS 4 -A modified version of the rupasov hash. It is used by default and is the best choice unless the filesystem has huge directories and unusual file\-name patterns. -.RE -.sp -\fBdetect\fP -.RS 4 -Instructs \fBmount\fP to detect which hash function is in use by examining the filesystem being mounted, and to write this information into the reiserfs superblock. This is only useful on the first mount of an old format filesystem. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fBhashed_relocation\fP -.RS 4 -Tunes the block allocator. This may provide performance improvements in some situations. -.RE -.sp -\fBno_unhashed_relocation\fP -.RS 4 -Tunes the block allocator. This may provide performance improvements in some situations. -.RE -.sp -\fBnoborder\fP -.RS 4 -Disable the border allocator algorithm invented by Yury Yu. Rupasov. This may provide performance improvements in some situations. -.RE -.sp -\fBnolog\fP -.RS 4 -Disable journaling. This will provide slight performance improvements in some situations at the cost of losing reiserfs\(cqs fast recovery from crashes. Even with this option turned on, reiserfs still performs all journaling operations, save for actual writes into its journaling area. Implementation of \fInolog\fP is a work in progress. -.RE -.sp -\fBnotail\fP -.RS 4 -By default, reiserfs stores small files and \(aqfile tails\(aq directly into its tree. This confuses some utilities such as \fBlilo\fP(8). This option is used to disable packing of files into the tree. -.RE -.sp -\fBreplayonly\fP -.RS 4 -Replay the transactions which are in the journal, but do not actually mount the filesystem. Mainly used by \fIreiserfsck\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBresize=\fP\fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -A remount option which permits online expansion of reiserfs partitions. Instructs reiserfs to assume that the device has \fInumber\fP blocks. This option is designed for use with devices which are under logical volume management (LVM). There is a special \fIresizer\fP utility which can be obtained from \fI\c -.URL "ftp://ftp.namesys.com/pub/reiserfsprogs" "" "\fP." -.RE -.sp -\fBuser_xattr\fP -.RS 4 -Enable Extended User Attributes. See the \fBattr\fP(1) manual page. -.RE -.sp -\fBacl\fP -.RS 4 -Enable POSIX Access Control Lists. See the \fBacl\fP(5) manual page. -.RE -.sp -\fBbarrier=none\fP / \fBbarrier=flush\fP -.RS 4 -This disables / enables the use of write barriers in the journaling code. \fBbarrier=none\fP disables, \fBbarrier=flush\fP enables (default). This also requires an IO stack which can support barriers, and if reiserfs gets an error on a barrier write, it will disable barriers again with a warning. Write barriers enforce proper on\-disk ordering of journal commits, making volatile disk write caches safe to use, at some performance penalty. If your disks are battery\-backed in one way or another, disabling barriers may safely improve performance. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for ubifs" -.sp -UBIFS is a flash filesystem which works on top of UBI volumes. Note that \fBatime\fP is not supported and is always turned off. -.sp -The device name may be specified as -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBubiX_Y\fP -.RS 4 -UBI device number \fBX\fP, volume number \fBY\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBubiY\fP -.RS 4 -UBI device number \fB0\fP, volume number \fBY\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBubiX:NAME\fP -.RS 4 -UBI device number \fBX\fP, volume with name \fBNAME\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBubi:NAME\fP -.RS 4 -UBI device number \fB0\fP, volume with name \fBNAME\fP -.RE -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Alternative \fB!\fP separator may be used instead of \fB:\fP. -.sp -The following mount options are available: -.sp -\fBbulk_read\fP -.RS 4 -Enable bulk\-read. VFS read\-ahead is disabled because it slows down the filesystem. Bulk\-Read is an internal optimization. Some flashes may read faster if the data are read at one go, rather than at several read requests. For example, OneNAND can do "read\-while\-load" if it reads more than one NAND page. -.RE -.sp -\fBno_bulk_read\fP -.RS 4 -Do not bulk\-read. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fBchk_data_crc\fP -.RS 4 -Check data CRC\-32 checksums. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fBno_chk_data_crc\fP -.RS 4 -Do not check data CRC\-32 checksums. With this option, the filesystem does not check CRC\-32 checksum for data, but it does check it for the internal indexing information. This option only affects reading, not writing. CRC\-32 is always calculated when writing the data. -.RE -.sp -\fBcompr=\fP{\fBnone\fP|\fBlzo\fP|\fBzlib\fP} -.RS 4 -Select the default compressor which is used when new files are written. It is still possible to read compressed files if mounted with the \fBnone\fP option. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for udf" -.sp -UDF is the "Universal Disk Format" filesystem defined by OSTA, the Optical Storage Technology Association, and is often used for DVD\-ROM, frequently in the form of a hybrid UDF/ISO\-9660 filesystem. It is, however, perfectly usable by itself on disk drives, flash drives and other block devices. See also \fIiso9660\fP. -.sp -\fBuid=\fP -.RS 4 -Make all files in the filesystem belong to the given user. uid=forget can be specified independently of (or usually in addition to) uid=<user> and results in UDF not storing uids to the media. In fact the recorded uid is the 32\-bit overflow uid \-1 as defined by the UDF standard. The value is given as either <user> which is a valid user name or the corresponding decimal user id, or the special string "forget". -.RE -.sp -\fBgid=\fP -.RS 4 -Make all files in the filesystem belong to the given group. gid=forget can be specified independently of (or usually in addition to) gid=<group> and results in UDF not storing gids to the media. In fact the recorded gid is the 32\-bit overflow gid \-1 as defined by the UDF standard. The value is given as either <group> which is a valid group name or the corresponding decimal group id, or the special string "forget". -.RE -.sp -\fBumask=\fP -.RS 4 -Mask out the given permissions from all inodes read from the filesystem. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBmode=\fP -.RS 4 -If \fBmode=\fP is set the permissions of all non\-directory inodes read from the filesystem will be set to the given mode. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBdmode=\fP -.RS 4 -If \fBdmode=\fP is set the permissions of all directory inodes read from the filesystem will be set to the given dmode. The value is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBbs=\fP -.RS 4 -Set the block size. Default value prior to kernel version 2.6.30 was 2048. Since 2.6.30 and prior to 4.11 it was logical device block size with fallback to 2048. Since 4.11 it is logical block size with fallback to any valid block size between logical device block size and 4096. -.sp -For other details see the \fBmkudffs\fP(8) 2.0+ manpage, sections \fBCOMPATIBILITY\fP and \fBBLOCK SIZE\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBunhide\fP -.RS 4 -Show otherwise hidden files. -.RE -.sp -\fBundelete\fP -.RS 4 -Show deleted files in lists. -.RE -.sp -\fBadinicb\fP -.RS 4 -Embed data in the inode. (default) -.RE -.sp -\fBnoadinicb\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt embed data in the inode. -.RE -.sp -\fBshortad\fP -.RS 4 -Use short UDF address descriptors. -.RE -.sp -\fBlongad\fP -.RS 4 -Use long UDF address descriptors. (default) -.RE -.sp -\fBnostrict\fP -.RS 4 -Unset strict conformance. -.RE -.sp -\fBiocharset=\fP -.RS 4 -Set the NLS character set. This requires kernel compiled with \fBCONFIG_UDF_NLS\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fButf8\fP -.RS 4 -Set the UTF\-8 character set. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for debugging and disaster recovery" -.sp -\fBnovrs\fP -.RS 4 -Ignore the Volume Recognition Sequence and attempt to mount anyway. -.RE -.sp -\fBsession=\fP -.RS 4 -Select the session number for multi\-session recorded optical media. (default= last session) -.RE -.sp -\fBanchor=\fP -.RS 4 -Override standard anchor location. (default= 256) -.RE -.sp -\fBlastblock=\fP -.RS 4 -Set the last block of the filesystem. -.RE -.SS "Unused historical mount options that may be encountered and should be removed" -.sp -\fBuid=ignore\fP -.RS 4 -Ignored, use uid=<user> instead. -.RE -.sp -\fBgid=ignore\fP -.RS 4 -Ignored, use gid=<group> instead. -.RE -.sp -\fBvolume=\fP -.RS 4 -Unimplemented and ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBpartition=\fP -.RS 4 -Unimplemented and ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBfileset=\fP -.RS 4 -Unimplemented and ignored. -.RE -.sp -\fBrootdir=\fP -.RS 4 -Unimplemented and ignored. -.RE -.SS "Mount options for ufs" -.sp -\fBufstype=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -UFS is a filesystem widely used in different operating systems. The problem are differences among implementations. Features of some implementations are undocumented, so its hard to recognize the type of ufs automatically. That\(cqs why the user must specify the type of ufs by mount option. Possible values are: -.sp -\fBold\fP -.RS 4 -Old format of ufs, this is the default, read only. (Don\(cqt forget to give the \fB\-r\fP option.) -.RE -.sp -\fB44bsd\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by a BSD\-like system (NetBSD, FreeBSD, OpenBSD). -.RE -.sp -\fBufs2\fP -.RS 4 -Used in FreeBSD 5.x supported as read\-write. -.RE -.sp -\fB5xbsd\fP -.RS 4 -Synonym for ufs2. -.RE -.sp -\fBsun\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by SunOS or Solaris on Sparc. -.RE -.sp -\fBsunx86\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by Solaris on x86. -.RE -.sp -\fBhp\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by HP\-UX, read\-only. -.RE -.sp -\fBnextstep\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by NeXTStep (on NeXT station) (currently read only). -.RE -.sp -\fBnextstep\-cd\fP -.RS 4 -For NextStep CDROMs (block_size == 2048), read\-only. -.RE -.sp -\fBopenstep\fP -.RS 4 -For filesystems created by OpenStep (currently read only). The same filesystem type is also used by Mac OS X. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fBonerror=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Set behavior on error: -.sp -\fBpanic\fP -.RS 4 -If an error is encountered, cause a kernel panic. -.RE -.sp -[\fBlock\fP|\fBumount\fP|\fBrepair\fP] -.RS 4 -These mount options don\(cqt do anything at present; when an error is encountered only a console message is printed. -.RE -.RE -.SS "Mount options for umsdos" -.sp -See mount options for msdos. The \fBdotsOK\fP option is explicitly killed by \fIumsdos\fP. -.SS "Mount options for vfat" -.sp -First of all, the mount options for \fIfat\fP are recognized. The \fBdotsOK\fP option is explicitly killed by \fIvfat\fP. Furthermore, there are -.sp -\fBuni_xlate\fP -.RS 4 -Translate unhandled Unicode characters to special escaped sequences. This lets you backup and restore filenames that are created with any Unicode characters. Without this option, a \(aq?\(aq is used when no translation is possible. The escape character is \(aq:\(aq because it is otherwise invalid on the vfat filesystem. The escape sequence that gets used, where u is the Unicode character, is: \(aq:\(aq, (u & 0x3f), ((u>>6) & 0x3f), (u>>12). -.RE -.sp -\fBposix\fP -.RS 4 -Allow two files with names that only differ in case. This option is obsolete. -.RE -.sp -\fBnonumtail\fP -.RS 4 -First try to make a short name without sequence number, before trying \fIname~num.ext\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fButf8\fP -.RS 4 -UTF8 is the filesystem safe 8\-bit encoding of Unicode that is used by the console. It can be enabled for the filesystem with this option or disabled with utf8=0, utf8=no or utf8=false. If \fIuni_xlate\fP gets set, UTF8 gets disabled. -.RE -.sp -\fBshortname=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Defines the behavior for creation and display of filenames which fit into 8.3 characters. If a long name for a file exists, it will always be the preferred one for display. There are four \fImode\fPs: -.sp -\fBlower\fP -.RS 4 -Force the short name to lower case upon display; store a long name when the short name is not all upper case. -.RE -.sp -\fBwin95\fP -.RS 4 -Force the short name to upper case upon display; store a long name when the short name is not all upper case. -.RE -.sp -\fBwinnt\fP -.RS 4 -Display the short name as is; store a long name when the short name is not all lower case or all upper case. -.RE -.sp -\fBmixed\fP -.RS 4 -Display the short name as is; store a long name when the short name is not all upper case. This mode is the default since Linux 2.6.32. -.RE -.RE -.SS "Mount options for usbfs" -.sp -\fBdevuid=\fP\fIuid\fP and \fBdevgid=\fP\fIgid\fP and \fBdevmode=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group and mode of the device files in the usbfs filesystem (default: uid=gid=0, mode=0644). The mode is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBbusuid=\fP\fIuid\fP and \fBbusgid=\fP\fIgid\fP and \fBbusmode=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group and mode of the bus directories in the usbfs filesystem (default: uid=gid=0, mode=0555). The mode is given in octal. -.RE -.sp -\fBlistuid=\fP\fIuid\fP and \fBlistgid=\fP\fIgid\fP and \fBlistmode=\fP\fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Set the owner and group and mode of the file \fIdevices\fP (default: uid=gid=0, mode=0444). The mode is given in octal. -.RE -.SH "DM\-VERITY SUPPORT (EXPERIMENTAL)" -.sp -The device\-mapper verity target provides read\-only transparent integrity checking of block devices using kernel crypto API. The \fBmount\fP command can open the dm\-verity device and do the integrity verification before on the device filesystem is mounted. Requires libcryptsetup with in libmount (optionally via \fBdlopen\fP(3)). If libcryptsetup supports extracting the root hash of an already mounted device, existing devices will be automatically reused in case of a match. Mount options for dm\-verity: -.sp -\fBverity.hashdevice=\fP\fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Path to the hash tree device associated with the source volume to pass to dm\-verity. -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.roothash=\fP\fIhex\fP -.RS 4 -Hex\-encoded hash of the root of \fIverity.hashdevice\fP. Mutually exclusive with \fIverity.roothashfile.\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.roothashfile=\fP\fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Path to file containing the hex\-encoded hash of the root of \fIverity.hashdevice.\fP Mutually exclusive with \fIverity.roothash.\fP -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.hashoffset=\fP\fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -If the hash tree device is embedded in the source volume, \fIoffset\fP (default: 0) is used by dm\-verity to get to the tree. -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.fecdevice=\fP\fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Path to the Forward Error Correction (FEC) device associated with the source volume to pass to dm\-verity. Optional. Requires kernel built with \fBCONFIG_DM_VERITY_FEC\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.fecoffset=\fP\fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -If the FEC device is embedded in the source volume, \fIoffset\fP (default: 0) is used by dm\-verity to get to the FEC area. Optional. -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.fecroots=\fP\fIvalue\fP -.RS 4 -Parity bytes for FEC (default: 2). Optional. -.RE -.sp -\fBverity.roothashsig=\fP\fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Path to \fBpkcs7\fP(1ssl) signature of root hash hex string. Requires crypt_activate_by_signed_key() from cryptsetup and kernel built with \fBCONFIG_DM_VERITY_VERIFY_ROOTHASH_SIG\fP. For device reuse, signatures have to be either used by all mounts of a device or by none. Optional. -.RE -.sp -Supported since util\-linux v2.35. -.sp -For example commands: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mksquashfs /etc /tmp/etc.squashfs -dd if=/dev/zero of=/tmp/etc.hash bs=1M count=10 -veritysetup format /tmp/etc.squashfs /tmp/etc.hash -openssl smime \-sign \-in <hash> \-nocerts \-inkey private.key \(rs -\-signer private.crt \-noattr \-binary \-outform der \-out /tmp/etc.roothash.p7s -mount \-o verity.hashdevice=/tmp/etc.hash,verity.roothash=<hash>,\(rs -verity.roothashsig=/tmp/etc.roothash.p7s /tmp/etc.squashfs /mnt -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -create squashfs image from \fI/etc\fP directory, verity hash device and mount verified filesystem image to \fI/mnt\fP. The kernel will verify that the root hash is signed by a key from the kernel keyring if roothashsig is used. -.SH "LOOP\-DEVICE SUPPORT" -.sp -One further possible type is a mount via the loop device. For example, the command -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /tmp/disk.img /mnt \-t vfat \-o loop=/dev/loop3\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -will set up the loop device \fI/dev/loop3\fP to correspond to the file \fI/tmp/disk.img\fP, and then mount this device on \fI/mnt\fP. -.sp -If no explicit loop device is mentioned (but just an option \(aq\fB\-o loop\fP\(aq is given), then \fBmount\fP will try to find some unused loop device and use that, for example -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /tmp/disk.img /mnt \-o loop\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The \fBmount\fP command \fBautomatically\fP creates a loop device from a regular file if a filesystem type is not specified or the filesystem is known for libblkid, for example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBmount /tmp/disk.img /mnt\fP -.sp -\fBmount \-t ext4 /tmp/disk.img /mnt\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This type of mount knows about three options, namely \fBloop\fP, \fBoffset\fP and \fBsizelimit\fP, that are really options to \fBlosetup\fP(8). (These options can be used in addition to those specific to the filesystem type.) -.sp -Since Linux 2.6.25 auto\-destruction of loop devices is supported, meaning that any loop device allocated by \fBmount\fP will be freed by \fBumount\fP independently of \fI/etc/mtab\fP. -.sp -You can also free a loop device by hand, using \fBlosetup \-d\fP or \fBumount \-d\fP. -.sp -Since util\-linux v2.29, \fBmount\fP re\-uses the loop device rather than initializing a new device if the same backing file is already used for some loop device with the same offset and sizelimit. This is necessary to avoid a filesystem corruption. -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBmount\fP has the following exit status values (the bits can be ORed): -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB1\fP -.RS 4 -incorrect invocation or permissions -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -system error (out of memory, cannot fork, no more loop devices) -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -internal \fBmount\fP bug -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -user interrupt -.RE -.sp -\fB16\fP -.RS 4 -problems writing or locking \fI/etc/mtab\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB32\fP -.RS 4 -mount failure -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -some mount succeeded -.sp -The command \fBmount \-a\fP returns 0 (all succeeded), 32 (all failed), or 64 (some failed, some succeeded). -.RE -.SH "EXTERNAL HELPERS" -.sp -The syntax of external mount helpers is: -.sp -\fB/sbin/mount.\fP\fIsuffix\fP \fIspec dir\fP [\fB\-sfnv\fP] [\fB\-N\fP \fInamespace\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoptions\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP\fB.\fP\fIsubtype\fP] -.sp -where the \fIsuffix\fP is the filesystem type and the \fB\-sfnvoN\fP options have the same meaning as the normal mount options. The \fB\-t\fP option is used for filesystems with subtypes support (for example \fB/sbin/mount.fuse \-t fuse.sshfs\fP). -.sp -The command \fBmount\fP does not pass the mount options \fBunbindable\fP, \fBrunbindable\fP, \fBprivate\fP, \fBrprivate\fP, \fBslave\fP, \fBrslave\fP, \fBshared\fP, \fBrshared\fP, \fBauto\fP, \fBnoauto\fP, \fBcomment\fP, \fBx\-\fP*, \fBloop\fP, \fBoffset\fP and \fBsizelimit\fP to the mount.<suffix> helpers. All other options are used in a comma\-separated list as an argument to the \fB\-o\fP option. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBMOUNT_FSTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the \fIfstab\fP file (ignored for suid) -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_MTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the \fImtab\fP file (ignored for suid) -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libmount debug output -.RE -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output -.RE -.sp -LOOPDEV_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables loop device setup debug output -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -See also "\fBThe files /etc/fstab, /etc/mtab and /proc/mounts\fP" section above. -.sp -\fI/etc/fstab\fP -.RS 4 -filesystem table -.RE -.sp -\fI/run/mount\fP -.RS 4 -libmount private runtime directory -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/mtab\fP -.RS 4 -table of mounted filesystems or symlink to \fI/proc/mounts\fP -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/mtab~\fP -.RS 4 -lock file (unused on systems with \fImtab\fP symlink) -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/mtab.tmp\fP -.RS 4 -temporary file (unused on systems with \fImtab\fP symlink) -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/filesystems\fP -.RS 4 -a list of filesystem types to try -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -A \fBmount\fP command existed in Version 5 AT&T UNIX. -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -It is possible for a corrupted filesystem to cause a crash. -.sp -Some Linux filesystems don\(cqt support \fB\-o sync\fP and \fB\-o dirsync\fP (the ext2, ext3, ext4, fat and vfat filesystems \fIdo\fP support synchronous updates (a la BSD) when mounted with the \fBsync\fP option). -.sp -The \fB\-o remount\fP may not be able to change mount parameters (all \fIext2fs\fP\-specific parameters, except \fBsb\fP, are changeable with a remount, for example, but you can\(cqt change \fBgid\fP or \fBumask\fP for the \fIfatfs\fP). -.sp -It is possible that the files \fI/etc/mtab\fP and \fI/proc/mounts\fP don\(cqt match on systems with a regular \fImtab\fP file. The first file is based only on the \fBmount\fP command options, but the content of the second file also depends on the kernel and others settings (e.g. on a remote NFS server \(em in certain cases the \fBmount\fP command may report unreliable information about an NFS mount point and the \fI/proc/mount\fP file usually contains more reliable information.) This is another reason to replace the \fImtab\fP file with a symlink to the \fI/proc/mounts\fP file. -.sp -Checking files on NFS filesystems referenced by file descriptors (i.e. the \fBfcntl\fP and \fBioctl\fP families of functions) may lead to inconsistent results due to the lack of a consistency check in the kernel even if the \fBnoac\fP mount option is used. -.sp -The \fBloop\fP option with the \fBoffset\fP or \fBsizelimit\fP options used may fail when using older kernels if the \fBmount\fP command can\(cqt confirm that the size of the block device has been configured as requested. This situation can be worked around by using the \fBlosetup\fP(8) command manually before calling \fBmount\fP with the configured loop device. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBmount\fP(2), -\fBumount\fP(2), -\fBfilesystems\fP(5), -\fBfstab\fP(5), -\fBnfs\fP(5), -\fBxfs\fP(5), -\fBmount_namespaces\fP(7), -\fBxattr\fP(7), -\fBe2label\fP(8), -\fBfindmnt\fP(8), -\fBlosetup\fP(8), -\fBlsblk\fP(8), -\fBmke2fs\fP(8), -\fBmountd\fP(8), -\fBnfsd\fP(8), -\fBswapon\fP(8), -\fBtune2fs\fP(8), -\fBumount\fP(8), -\fBxfs_admin\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBmount\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "." diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.nfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.nfs.8 index 0409c96f..a78a3b0d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.nfs.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mount.nfs.8 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ can mount all NFS file system versions. Under earlier Linux kernel versions, .BR mount.nfs4 must be used for mounting NFSv4 file systems while .BR mount.nfs -must be used for NFSv3 and v2. +must be used for NFSv3. .SH OPTIONS .TP diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountd.8 index 21daa15b..a206a3e2 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountd.8 @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ clients and provides details of access permissions. The NFS server .RI ( nfsd ) maintains a cache of authentication and authorization information which -is used to identify the source of each requent, and then what access +is used to identify the source of each request, and then what access permissions that source has to any local filesystem. When required information is not found in the cache, the server sends a request to .B mountd @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Instead, mount the nfsd filesystem on .IR /proc/fs/nfsd . .TP .BI "\-s," "" " \-\-state\-directory\-path " directory -Specify a directory in which to place statd state information. +Specify a directory in which to place state information (etab and rmtab). If this option is not specified the default of .I /var/lib/nfs is used. @@ -286,10 +286,9 @@ The values recognized in the section include .BR TCP , .BR UDP , -.BR vers2 , .BR vers3 ", and" .B vers4 -which each have same same meaning as given by +which each have the same meaning as given by .BR rpc.nfsd (8). .SH TCP_WRAPPERS SUPPORT diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountstats.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountstats.8 index a55130bb..d5595fc7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountstats.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/mountstats.8 @@ -19,6 +19,8 @@ mountstats \- Displays various NFS client per-mount statistics .RB [ \-r | \-\-rpc ] | .RB [ \-R | \-\-raw ] +| +.RB [ \-x | \-\-xprt ] ] .RI [ mountpoint ] ... .P @@ -33,7 +35,7 @@ mountstats \- Displays various NFS client per-mount statistics .RI [ count ] .RI [ mountpoint ] ... .P -.B mounstats nfsstat +.B mountstats nfsstat .RB [ \-h | \-\-help ] .RB [ \-v | \-\-version ] .RB [ \-f | \-\-file @@ -110,6 +112,9 @@ Display only the raw statistics. This is intended for use with the and .BR \-S | \-\-since options. +.TP +.B \-x, \-\-xprt +Display only the transport statistics .SS Options specific to the iostat sub-command .IP "\fIinterval\fP" Specifies the amount of time in seconds between each report. The first report contains statistics for the time since each file system was mounted. Each subsequent report contains statistics collected during the interval since the previous report. This may not be used with the diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsconf.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsconf.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d44e86fb --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsconf.8 @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +.\" +.\" nfsconf(8) +.\" +.TH nfsconf 8 "2 May 2018" +.SH NAME +nfsconf \- Query various NFS configuration settings +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B nfsconf \-\-dump +.RB [ \-v | \-\-verbose ] +.RB [ \-f | \-\-file +.IR infile.conf ] +.RI [ outfile ] +.P +.B nfsconf \-\-entry +.RB [ \-\-arg +.IR subsection] +.IR section +.IR tag +.P +.B nfsconf \-\-get +.RB [ \-v | \-\-verbose ] +.RB [ \-f | \-\-file +.IR infile.conf ] +.RB [ \-a | \-\-arg +.IR subsection ] +.IR section +.IR tag +.P +.B nfsconf \-\-isset +.RB [ \-v | \-\-verbose ] +.RB [ \-f | \-\-file +.IR infile.conf ] +.RB [ \-a | \-\-arg +.IR subsection ] +.IR section +.IR tag +.P +.B nfsconf \-\-set +.RB [ \-v | \-\-verbose ] +.RB [ \-m | \-\-modified +.IR "Modified by text" ] +.RB [ \-f | \-\-file +.IR infile.conf ] +.RB [ \-a | \-\-arg +.IR subsection ] +.IR section +.IR tag +.IR value +.P +.B nfsconf \-\-unset +.RB [ \-v | \-\-verbose ] +.RB [ \-f | \-\-file +.IR infile.conf ] +.RB [ \-a | \-\-arg +.IR subsection ] +.IR section +.IR tag +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.B nfsconf +command can be used to test for and retrieve configuration settings +from a range of nfs-utils configuration files. +.SS Modes +The following modes are available: +.IP "\fB\-d, \-\-dump\fP" +Output an alphabetically sorted dump of the current configuration in conf file format. Accepts an optional filename in which to write the output. +.IP "\fB\-e, \-\-entry\fP" +retrieve the config entry rather than its current expanded value +.IP "\fB\-i, \-\-isset\fP" +Test if a specific tag has a value set. +.IP "\fB\-g, \-\-get\fP" +Output the current value of the specified tag. +.IP "\fB\-s, \-\-set\fP" +Update or Add a tag and value to the config file in a specified section, creating the tag, section, and file if necessary. If the section is defined as '#' then a comment is appended to the file. If a comment is set with a tag name then any exiting tagged comment with a matching name is replaced. +.IP "\fB\-u, \-\-unset\fP" +Remove the specified tag and its value from the config file. +.SH OPTIONS +.SS Options valid in all modes +.TP +.B \-v, \-\-verbose +Increase verbosity and print debugging information. +.TP +.B \-f, \-\-file \fIinfile\fR +Select a different config file to operate upon, default is +.I /etc/nfs.conf +.SS Options only valid in \fB\-\-entry\fR and \fB\-\-get\fR and \fB\-\-isset\fR modes. +.TP +.B \-a, \-\-arg \fIsubsection\fR +Select a specific sub-section +.SS Options only valid in \fB\-\-set\fR mode. +.B \-m, \-\-modified \fI"Modified by nfsconf"\fR +Set the text on the Modified date comment in the file. Set to empty to remove. +.SH EXIT STATUS +.SS \fB\-\-isset\fR mode +In this mode the command will return success (0) if the selected tag has a value, any other exit code indicates the value is not set, or some other error has occurred. +.SS all other modes +Success is indicated by an exit status of zero, any other status indicates an error. Error messages are output on stderr, and increasing verbosity will give more detailed explanations if any are available. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.B nfsconf -v --dump --file /tmp/testconf.conf sorted.conf +Check a new config file for syntax errors and output a sorted version for ease of comparison with existing settings. +.TP +.B if ! nfsconf --isset gssd preferred-realm ; then echo 'No preferred realm configured for gss'; fi +The tool allows for easy testing of configuration values from shell scripts, here we test if a specific value has been set. +.TP +.B nfsconf --file /etc/nfsmount.conf --get --arg /home MountPoint background +Show default value for \fIbackground\fR option for NFS mounts of the \fI/home\fR path. +.TP +.B nfsconf --file /etc/nfs.conf --set nfsd debug 1 +Enable debugging in nfsd +.SH FILES +.TP +.B /etc/nfs.conf +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR nfsd (8), +.BR exportfs (8), +.BR idmapd (8), +.BR statd (8) +.SH AUTHOR +Justin Mitchell <jumitche@redhat.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsd.8 index 020092dc..6f4fc1df 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsd.8 @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ This option can be used to request that .B rpc.nfsd does not offer certain versions of NFS. The current version of .B rpc.nfsd -can support major NFS versions 2,3,4 and the minor versions 4.1 and 4.2. +can support major NFS versions 3,4 and the minor versions 4.0, 4.1 and 4.2. .TP .B \-s " or " \-\-syslog By default, @@ -75,22 +75,24 @@ logs error messages (and debug messages, if enabled) to stderr. This option make log these messages to syslog instead. Note that errors encountered during option processing will still be logged to stderr regardless of this option. .TP +.B \-t " or " \-\-tcp +Instruct the kernel nfs server to open and listen on a TCP socket. This is the default. +.TP .B \-T " or " \-\-no-tcp -Disable -.B rpc.nfsd -from accepting TCP connections from clients. +Instruct the kernel nfs server not to open and listen on a TCP socket. +.TP +.B \-u " or " \-\-udp +Instruct the kernel nfs server to open and listen on a UDP socket. .TP .B \-U " or " \-\-no-udp -Disable -.B rpc.nfsd -from accepting UDP connections from clients. +Instruct the kernel nfs server not to open and listen on a UDP socket. This is the default. .TP .B \-V " or " \-\-nfs-version vers This option can be used to request that .B rpc.nfsd offer certain versions of NFS. The current version of .B rpc.nfsd -can support major NFS versions 2,3,4 and the minor versions 4.1 and 4.2. +can support major NFS versions 3,4 and the minor versions 4.0, 4.1 and 4.2. .TP .B \-L " or " \-\-lease-time seconds Set the lease-time used for NFSv4. This corresponds to how often @@ -153,7 +155,11 @@ The lease time for NFSv4, in seconds. Set the port for TCP/UDP to bind to. .TP .B rdma -Set RDMA port. Use "rdma=nfsrdma" to enable standard port. +Enable RDMA port (with "on" or "yes" etc) on the standard port +("nfsrdma", port 20049). +.TP +.B rdma-port +Set an alternate RDMA port. .TP .B UDP Enable (with "on" or "yes" etc) or disable ("off", "no") UDP support. @@ -161,12 +167,12 @@ Enable (with "on" or "yes" etc) or disable ("off", "no") UDP support. .B TCP Enable or disable TCP support. .TP -.B vers2 -.TP .B vers3 .TP .B vers4 -Enable or disable a major NFS version. 3 and 4 are normally enabled +Enable or disable +.B all +NFSv4 versions. All versions are normally enabled by default. .TP .B vers4.1 diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdcld.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdcld.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..861f1c49 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdcld.8 @@ -0,0 +1,221 @@ +.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.22 (Pod::Simple 3.13) +.\" +.\" Standard preamble: +.\" ======================================================================== +.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) +.if t .sp .5v +.if n .sp +.. +.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text +.ft CW +.nf +.ne \\$1 +.. +.de Ve \" End verbatim text +.ft R +.fi +.. +.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will +.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left +.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will +.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and +.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, +.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. +.tr \(*W- +.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' +.ie n \{\ +. ds -- \(*W- +. ds PI pi +. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch +. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch +. ds L" "" +. ds R" "" +. ds C` "" +. ds C' "" +'br\} +.el\{\ +. ds -- \|\(em\| +. ds PI \(*p +. ds L" `` +. ds R" '' +'br\} +.\" +.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. +.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq +.el .ds Aq ' +.\" +.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for +.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index +.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the +.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. +.ie \nF \{\ +. de IX +. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" +.. +. nr % 0 +. rr F +.\} +.el \{\ +. de IX +.. +.\} +.\" +.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). +.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. +. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff +.if n \{\ +. ds #H 0 +. ds #V .8m +. ds #F .3m +. ds #[ \f1 +. ds #] \fP +.\} +.if t \{\ +. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) +. ds #V .6m +. ds #F 0 +. ds #[ \& +. ds #] \& +.\} +. \" simple accents for nroff and troff +.if n \{\ +. ds ' \& +. ds ` \& +. ds ^ \& +. ds , \& +. ds ~ ~ +. ds / +.\} +.if t \{\ +. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" +. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' +. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' +. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' +. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' +. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' +.\} +. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents +.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' +.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' +.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] +.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' +.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' +.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] +.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] +.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e +.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E +. \" corrections for vroff +.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' +.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' +. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) +.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ +\{\ +. ds : e +. ds 8 ss +. ds o a +. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga +. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy +. ds th \o'bp' +. ds Th \o'LP' +. ds ae ae +. ds Ae AE +.\} +.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C +.\" ======================================================================== +.\" +.IX Title "NFSDCLD 8" +.TH NFSDCLD 8 "2011-12-21" "" "" +.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes +.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. +.if n .ad l +.nh +.SH "NAME" +nfsdcld \- NFSv4 Client Tracking Daemon +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" +nfsdcld [\-d] [\-F] [\-p path] [\-s stable storage dir] +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" +nfsdcld is the NFSv4 client tracking daemon. It is not necessary to run +this daemon on machines that are not acting as NFSv4 servers. +.PP +When a network partition is combined with a server reboot, there are +edge conditions that can cause the server to grant lock reclaims when +other clients have taken conflicting locks in the interim. A more detailed +explanation of this issue is described in \s-1RFC\s0 3530, section 8.6.3. +.PP +In order to prevent these problems, the server must track a small amount +of per-client information on stable storage. This daemon provides the +userspace piece of that functionality. +.SH "OPTIONS" +.IX Header "OPTIONS" +.IP "\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-debug\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-d, --debug" +Enable debug level logging. +.IP "\fB\-F\fR, \fB\-\-foreground\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-F, --foreground" +Runs the daemon in the foreground and prints all output to stderr +.IP "\fB\-p\fR \fIpath\fR, \fB\-\-pipefsdir\fR=\fIpath\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-p path, --pipefsdir=path" +Location of the rpc_pipefs filesystem. The default value is +\&\fI/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs\fR. +.IP "\fB\-s\fR \fIstorage_dir\fR, \fB\-\-storagedir\fR=\fIstorage_dir\fR" 4 +.IX Item "-s storagedir, --storagedir=storage_dir" +Directory where stable storage information should be kept. The default +value is \fI/var/lib/nfs/nfsdcld\fR. +.SH "CONFIGURATION FILE" +.IX Header "CONFIGURATION FILE" +The following values are recognized in the \fB[nfsdcld]\fR section +of the \fI/etc/nfs.conf\fR configuration file: +.IP "\fBstoragedir\fR" 4 +.IX Item "storagedir" +Equivalent to \fB\-s\fR/\fB\-\-storagedir\fR. +.IP "\fBdebug\fR" 4 +.IX Item "debug" +Setting "debug = 1" is equivalent to \fB\-d\fR/\fB\-\-debug\fR. +.LP +In addition, the following value is recognized from the \fB[general]\fR section: +.IP "\fBpipefs\-directory\fR" 4 +.IX Item "pipefs-directory" +Equivalent to \fB\-p\fR/\fB\-\-pipefsdir\fR. +.SH "NOTES" +.IX Header "NOTES" +The Linux kernel NFSv4 server has historically tracked this information +on stable storage by manipulating information on the filesystem +directly, in the directory to which \fI/proc/fs/nfsd/nfsv4recoverydir\fR +points. +.PP +This changed with the original introduction of \fBnfsdcld\fR upcall in kernel version 3.4, +which was later deprecated in favor of the \fBnfsdcltrack\fR(8) usermodehelper +program, support for which was added in kernel version 3.8. However, since the +usermodehelper upcall does not work in containers, support for a new version of +the \fBnfsdcld\fR upcall was added in kernel version 5.2. +.PP +This daemon requires a kernel that supports the \fBnfsdcld\fR upcall. On older kernels, if +the legacy client name tracking code was in use, then the kernel would not create the +pipe that \fBnfsdcld\fR uses to talk to the kernel. On newer kernels, nfsd attempts to +initialize client tracking in the following order: First, the \fBnfsdcld\fR upcall. Second, +the \fBnfsdcltrack\fR usermodehelper upcall. Finally, the legacy client tracking. +.PP +This daemon should be run as root, as the pipe that it uses to communicate +with the kernel is only accessable by root. The daemon however does drop all +superuser capabilities after starting. Because of this, the \fIstoragedir\fR +should be owned by root, and be readable and writable by owner. +.PP +The daemon now supports different upcall versions to allow the kernel to pass additional +data to be stored in the on-disk database. The kernel will query the supported upcall +version from \fBnfsdcld\fR during client tracking initialization. A restart of \fBnfsd\fR is +not necessary after upgrading \fBnfsdcld\fR, however \fBnfsd\fR will not use a later upcall +version until restart. A restart of \fBnfsd is necessary\fR after downgrading \fBnfsdcld\fR, +to ensure that \fBnfsd\fR does not use an upcall version that \fBnfsdcld\fR does not support. +Additionally, a downgrade of \fBnfsdcld\fR requires the schema of the on-disk database to +be downgraded as well. That can be accomplished using the \fBnfsdclddb\fR(8) utility. +.SH FILES +.TP +.B /var/lib/nfs/nfsdcld/main.sqlite +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR nfsdcltrack "(8), " nfsdclddb (8) +.SH "AUTHORS" +.IX Header "AUTHORS" +The nfsdcld daemon was developed by Jeff Layton <jlayton@redhat.com> +with modifications from Scott Mayhew <smayhew@redhat.com>. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclddb.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclddb.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ec7b187 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclddb.8 @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +.\" +.\" nfsdclddb(8) +.\" +.TH nfsdclddb 8 "07 Aug 2019" +.SH NAME +nfsdclddb \- Tool for manipulating the nfsdcld sqlite database +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B nfsdclddb +.RB [ \-h | \-\-help ] +.P +.B nfsdclddb +.RB [ \-p | \-\-path +.IR dbpath ] +.B fix-table-names +.RB [ \-h | \-\-help ] +.P +.B nfsdclddb +.RB [ \-p | \-\-path +.IR dbpath ] +.B downgrade-schema +.RB [ \-h | \-\-help ] +.RB [ \-v | \-\-version +.IR to-version ] +.P +.B nfsdclddb +.RB [ \-p | \-\-path +.IR dbpath ] +.B print +.RB [ \-h | \-\-help ] +.RB [ \-s | \-\-summary ] +.P + +.SH DESCRIPTION +.RB "The " nfsdclddb " command is provided to perform some manipulation of the nfsdcld sqlite database schema and to print the contents of the database." +.SS Sub-commands +Valid +.B nfsdclddb +subcommands are: +.IP "\fBfix-table-names\fP" +.RB "A previous version of " nfsdcld "(8) contained a bug that corrupted the reboot epoch table names. This sub-command will fix those table names." +.IP "\fBdowngrade-schema\fP" +Downgrade the database schema. Currently the schema can only to downgraded from version 4 to version 3. +.IP "\fBprint\fP" +Display the contents of the database. Prints the schema version and the values of the current and recovery epochs. If the +.BR \-s | \-\-summary +option is not given, also prints the clients in the reboot epoch tables. +.SH OPTIONS +.SS Options valid for all sub-commands +.TP +.B \-h, \-\-help +Show the help message and exit +.TP +\fB\-p \fIdbpath\fR, \fB\-\-path \fIdbpath\fR +Open the sqlite database located at +.I dbpath +instead of +.IR /var/lib/nfs/nfsdcld/main.sqlite ". " +This is mainly for testing purposes. +.SS Options specific to the downgrade-schema sub-command +.TP +\fB\-v \fIto-version\fR, \fB\-\-version \fIto-version\fR +The schema version to downgrade to. Currently the schema can only be downgraded to version 3. +.SS Options specific to the print sub-command +.TP +.B \-s, \-\-summary +Do not list the clients in the reboot epoch tables in the output. +.SH NOTES +The +.B nfsdclddb +command will not allow the +.B fix-table-names +or +.B downgrade-schema +subcommands to be used if +.BR nfsdcld (8) +is running. +.SH FILES +.TP +.B /var/lib/nfs/nfsdcld/main.sqlite +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR nfsdcld (8) +.SH AUTHOR +Scott Mayhew <smayhew@redhat.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclnts.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclnts.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7efbd70 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsdclnts.8 @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ +.\" +.\" nfsdclnts(8) +.\" +.TH "NFSDCLTS" "8" "2020-05-09" "nfsdclnts" "nfsdclnts" +.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq +.el .ds Aq ' +.ss \n[.ss] 0 +.nh +.ad l +.de URL +\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 +.. +.als MTO URL +.if \n[.g] \{\ +. mso www.tmac +. am URL +. ad l +. . +. am MTO +. ad l +. . +. LINKSTYLE blue R < > +.\} +.SH "NAME" +nfsdclnts \- print various nfs client information for knfsd server. +.SH "SYNOPSIS" +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts\fP [\fI\-h\fP] [\fI\-t type\fP] [\fI\-\-clientinfo\fP] [\fI\-\-hostname\fP] [\fI\-q\fP] +.SH "DESCRIPTION" +.sp +The nfsdclnts(8) command parses the content present in /proc/fs/nfsd/clients/ directories. nfsdclnts(8) displays files which are open, locked, delegated by the nfs\-client. It also prints useful client information such as hostname, clientID, NFS version mounted by the nfs\-client. +.SH "OPTIONS" +.sp +\fB\-t, \-\-type\fP=TYPE +.RS 4 +Specify the type of file to be displayed. Takes only one TYPE at a time. +.sp +\fIopen\fP, \fIlock\fP, \fIdeleg\fP, \fIlayout\fP, or \fIall\fP +.sp +open: displays the open files by nfs\-client(s). +.sp +lock: displays the files locked by nfs\-client(s). +.sp +layout: displays the files for which layout is given. +.sp +deleg: displays delegated files information and delegation type. +.sp +all: prints all the above type. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-\-clientinfo\fP +.RS 4 +displays various nfs\-client info fields such as version of nfs mounted at nfs\-client and clientID. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-\-hostname\fP +.RS 4 +Print hostname of nfs\-client instead of ip-address. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-q, \-\-quiet\fP +.RS 4 +Hide the header information. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-v, \-\-verbose\fP +.RS 4 +Verbose operation, show debug messages. +.RE +.sp +\fB\-f, \-\-file\fP +.RS 4 +Instead of processing all client directories under /proc/fs/nfsd/clients, one can provide a specific +states file to process. One should make sure that info file resides in the same directory as states file. +If the info file is not valid or present the fields would be marked as "N/A". +.RE +.sp +\fB\-h, \-\-help\fP +.RS 4 +Print help explaining the command line options. +.SH "EXAMPLES" +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-type open\fP +.RS 4 +List all files with open type only. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +Inode number | Type | Access | Deny | ip address | Filename +33823232 | open | r\- | \-\- | [::1]:757 | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-type deleg\fP +.RS 4 +List all files with deleg type only. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +Inode number | Type | Access | ip address | Filename +33823232 | deleg | r | [::1]:757 | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-hostname\fP +.RS 4 +Print hostname instead of ip\-address. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +Inode number | Type | Access | Deny | Hostname | Filename +33823232 | open | r\- | \-\- | nfs\-server | testfile +33823232 | deleg | r | | nfs\-server | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-clientinfo\fP +.RS 4 +Print client information. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +Inode number | Type | Access | Deny | ip address | Client ID | vers | Filename +33823232 | open | r\- | \-\- | [::1]:757 | 0xc79a009f5eb65e84 | 4.2 | testfile +33823232 | deleg | r | | [::1]:757 | 0xc79a009f5eb65e84 | 4.2 | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-file /proc/fs/nfsd/clients/3/states -t open\fP +.RS 4 +Process specific states file. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +Inode number | Type | Access | Deny | ip address | Client ID | vers | Filename +33823232 | open | r\- | \-\- | [::1]:757 | 0xc79a009f5eb65e84 | 4.2 | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.sp +\fBnfsdclnts \-\-quiet \-\-hostname\fP +.RS 4 +Hide the header information. +.RE +.sp +.if n .RS 4 +.nf +33823232 | open | r\- | \-\- | nfs\-server | testfile +33823232 | deleg | r | | nfs\-server | testfile +.fi +.if n .RE +.SH "FILES" +.sp +\fB/proc/fs/nfsd/clients/\fP +.sp +Displays basic information about each NFSv4 client. +.sp +\fB/proc/fs/nfsd/clients/#/info\fP +.sp +Displays information about all the opens held by the given client, including open modes, device numbers, inode numbers, and open owners. +.sp +\fB/proc/fs/nfsd/clients/#/states\fP +.SH "NOTES" +.sp +/proc/fs/nfsd/clients/ support was initially introduced in 5.3 kernel and is only implemented for mount points using NFSv4. +.SH "BUGS" +Please report any BUGs to \c +.MTO "linux\-nfs\(atvger.kernel.org" "" "" +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR nfsd (8), +.BR exportfs (8), +.BR idmapd (8), +.BR statd (8) +.SH "AUTHORS" +Achilles Gaikwad <agaikwad@redhat.com> and +Kenneth D'souza <kdsouza@redhat.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsidmap.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsidmap.8 index 2af16f31..1911c41b 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsidmap.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsidmap.8 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ .\"@(#)nfsidmap(8) - The NFS idmapper upcall program .\" .\" Copyright (C) 2010 Bryan Schumaker <bjschuma@netapp.com> -.TH nfsidmap 5 "1 October 2010" +.TH nfsidmap 8 "1 October 2010" .SH NAME nfsidmap \- The NFS idmapper upcall program .SH SYNOPSIS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsiostat.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsiostat.8 index b477a9a0..940c0431 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsiostat.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsiostat.8 @@ -90,6 +90,21 @@ This is the duration from the time that NFS client does the RPC request to its k .RE .RE .RE +.RS 8 +- \fBavg queue (ms)\fR +.RS +This is the duration from the time the NFS client created the RPC request task to the time the request is transmitted. +.RE +.RE +.RE +.RS 8 +- \fBerrors\fR +.RS +This is the number of operations that completed with an error status (status < 0). This count is only available on kernels with RPC iostats version 1.1 or above. +.RS +.RE +.RE +.RE .TP Note that if an interval is used as argument to \fBnfsiostat\fR, then the diffrence from previous interval will be displayed, otherwise the results will be from the time that the share was mounted. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsref.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsref.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..12615497 --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nfsref.8 @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ +.\"@(#)nfsref.8" +.\" +.\" @file utils/nfsref/nfsref.man +.\" @brief man page for nfsref command +.\" + +.\" +.\" Copyright 2011, 2018 Oracle. All rights reserved. +.\" +.\" This file is part of nfs-utils. +.\" +.\" nfs-utils is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2.0 as +.\" published by the Free Software Foundation. +.\" +.\" nfs-utils is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +.\" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +.\" GNU General Public License version 2.0 for more details. +.\" +.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +.\" version 2.0 along with nfs-utils. If not, see: +.\" +.\" http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.txt +.\" +.TH NFSREF 8 "9 Jan 2018" +.SH NAME +nfsref \- manage NFS referrals +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B nfsref +.RB [ \-?d ] +.RB [ \-t +.IB type ] +.B add +.I pathname server export +.RI [ " server" +.IR export " ... ]" +.P +.B nfsref +.RB [ \-?d ] +.RB [ \-t +.IB type ] +.B remove +.I pathname +.P +.B nfsref +.RB [ \-?d ] +.RB [ \-t +.IB type ] +.B lookup +.I pathname +.SH INTRODUCTION +NFS version 4 introduces the concept of +.I file system referrals +to NFS. +A file system referral is like a symbolic link on a file server +to another file system share, possibly on another file server. +On an NFS client, a referral behaves like an automounted directory. +The client, under the server's direction, mounts a new NFS export +automatically when an application first accesses that directory. +.P +Referrals are typically used to construct a single file name space +across multiple file servers. +Because file servers control the shape of the name space, +no client configuration is required, +and all clients see the same referral information. +.P +The Linux NFS server supports NFS version 4 referrals. +Administrators can specify the +.B refer= +export option in +.I /etc/exports +to configure a list of exports from which the client can choose. +See +.BR exports (5) +for details. +.P +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.BR nfsref (8) +command is a simple way to get started managing junction metadata. +Other administrative commands provide richer access to junction information. +.SS Subcommands +Valid +.BR nfsref (8) +subcommands are: +.IP "\fBadd\fP" +Adds junction information to the directory named by +.IR pathname . +The named directory must already exist, +and must not already contain junction information. +Regular directory contents are obscured to NFS clients by this operation. +.IP +A list of one or more file server and export path pairs +is also specified on the command line. +When creating an NFS basic junction, this list is +stored in an extended attribute of the directory. +.IP +If junction creation is successful, the +.BR nfsref (8) +command flushes the kernel's export cache +to remove previously cached junction information. +.IP "\fBremove\fP" +Removes junction information from the directory named by +.IR pathname . +The named directory must exist, +and must contain junction information. +Regular directory contents are made visible to NFS clients again by this operation. +.IP +If junction deletion is successful, the +.BR nfsref (8) +command flushes the kernel's export cache +to remove previously cached junction information. +.IP "\fBlookup\fP" +Displays junction information stored in the directory named by +.IR pathname . +The named directory must exist, +and must contain junction information. +.IP +When looking up an NFS basic junction, the junction information +in the directory is listed on +.IR stdout . +.SS Command line options +.IP "\fB\-d, \-\-debug" +Enables debugging messages during operation. +.IP "\fB\-t, \-\-type=\fIjunction-type\fP" +Specifies the junction type for the operation. Valid values for +.I junction-type +are +.B nfs-basic +or +.BR nfs-fedfs . +.IP +For the +.B add +subcommand, the default value if this option is not specified is +.BR nfs-basic . +For the +.B remove +and +.B lookup +subcommands, the +.B \-\-type +option is not required. The +.BR nfsref (8) +command operates on whatever junction contents are available. +.SH EXAMPLES +Suppose you have two file servers, +.I top.example.net +and +.IR home.example.net . +You want all your clients to mount +.I top.example.net:/ +and then see the files under +.I home.example.net:/ +automatically in +.IR top:/home . +.P +On +.IR top.example.net , +you might issue this command as root: +.RS +.sp +# mkdir /home +.br +# nfsref --type=nfs-basic add /home home.example.net / +.br +Created junction /home. +.sp +.RE +.SH FILES +.TP +.I /etc/exports +NFS server export table +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR exports (5) +.sp +RFC 5661 for a description of NFS version 4 referrals +.SH "AUTHOR" +Chuck Lever <chuck.lever@oracle.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nmbd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nmbd.8 index 6d8537de..118e5908 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nmbd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nmbd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: nmbd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "NMBD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "NMBD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ The debug log level of nmbd may be raised or lowered using (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2\&.2)\&. This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "SEE ALSO" .PP \fBinetd\fR(8), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nologin.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nologin.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 97c378c7..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/nologin.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: nologin -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "NOLOGIN" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -nologin \- politely refuse a login -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBnologin\fP [\fB\-V\fP] [\fB\-h\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBnologin\fP displays a message that an account is not available and exits non\-zero. It is intended as a replacement shell field to deny login access to an account. -.sp -If the file \fI/etc/nologin.txt\fP exists, \fBnologin\fP displays its contents to the user instead of the default message. -.sp -The exit status returned by \fBnologin\fP is always 1. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-command\fP \fIcommand\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-init\-file\fP -.sp -\fB\-i\fP \fB\-\-interactive\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-init\-file\fP \fIfile\fP -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-interactive\fP -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-login\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-noprofile\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-norc\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-posix\fP -.sp -\fB\-\-rcfile\fP \fIfile\fP -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-restricted\fP -.sp -These shell command\-line options are ignored to avoid \fBnologin\fP error. -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -\fBnologin\fP is a per\-account way to disable login (usually used for system accounts like http or ftp). \fBnologin\fP uses \fI/etc/nologin.txt\fP as an optional source for a non\-default message, the login access is always refused independently of the file. -.sp -\fBpam_nologin\fP(8) PAM module usually prevents all non\-root users from logging into the system. \fBpam_nologin\fP(8) functionality is controlled by \fI/var/run/nologin\fP or the \fI/etc/nologin\fP file. -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBnologin\fP command appeared in 4.4BSD. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBlogin\fP(1), -\fBpasswd\fP(5), -\fBpam_nologin\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBnologin\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pam_systemd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pam_systemd.8 index 41c74edb..f5836b9e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pam_systemd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pam_systemd.8 @@ -353,8 +353,7 @@ account sufficient pam_unix\&.so account required pam_permit\&.so \-password sufficient pam_systemd_home\&.so -password sufficient pam_unix\&.so sha512 shadow try_first_pass use_authtok - +password sufficient pam_unix\&.so sha512 shadow try_first_pass password required pam_deny\&.so \-session optional pam_keyinit\&.so revoke diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/partx.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/partx.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 6e7ac4db..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/partx.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,222 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: partx -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "PARTX" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -partx \- tell the kernel about the presence and numbering of on\-disk partitions -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBpartx\fP [\fB\-a\fP|\fB\-d\fP|\fB\-P\fP|\fB\-r\fP|\fB\-s\fP|\fB\-u\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP] [\fB\-n\fP \fIM\fP:_N_] [\-] \fIdisk\fP -.sp -\fBpartx\fP [\fB\-a\fP|\fB\-d\fP|\fB\-P\fP|\fB\-r\fP|\fB\-s\fP|\fB\-u\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP] \fIpartition\fP [\fIdisk\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Given a device or disk\-image, \fBpartx\fP tries to parse the partition table and list its contents. It can also tell the kernel to add or remove partitions from its bookkeeping. -.sp -The \fIdisk\fP argument is optional when a \fIpartition\fP argument is provided. To force scanning a partition as if it were a whole disk (for example to list nested subpartitions), use the argument "\-" (hyphen\-minus). For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -partx \-\-show \- /dev/sda3 -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This will see sda3 as a whole\-disk rather than as a partition. -.sp -\fBpartx is not an fdisk program\fP \- adding and removing partitions does not change the disk, it just tells the kernel about the presence and numbering of on\-disk partitions. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-add\fP -.RS 4 -Add the specified partitions, or read the disk and add all partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Print the SIZE column in bytes rather than in human\-readable format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-delete\fP -.RS 4 -Delete the specified partitions or all partitions. It is not error to remove non\-existing partitions, so this option is possible to use together with large \fB\-\-nr\fP ranges without care about the current partitions set on the device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line with \fB\-\-show\fP or \fB\-\-raw\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -List the partitions. Note that all numbers are in 512\-byte sectors. This output format is DEPRECATED in favour of \fB\-\-show\fP. Do not use it in newly written scripts. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-nr\fP \fIM\fP\fB:\fP\fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the range of partitions. For backward compatibility also the format \fIM\fP\fB\-\fP\fIN\fP is supported. The range may contain negative numbers, for example \fB\-\-nr \-1:\-1\fP means the last partition, and \fB\-\-nr \-2:\-1\fP means the last two partitions. Supported range specifications are: -.sp -\fIM\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies just one partition (e.g. \fB\-\-nr 3\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fIM\fP\fB:\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the lower limit only (e.g. \fB\-\-nr 2:\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB:\fP\fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the upper limit only (e.g. \fB\-\-nr :4\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fIM\fP\fB:\fP\fIN\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies the lower and upper limits (e.g. \fB\-\-nr 2:4\fP). -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Define the output columns to use for \fB\-\-show\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP and \fB\-\-raw\fP output. If no output arrangement is specified, then a default set is used. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get \fIlist\fP of all supported columns. This option cannot be combined with the \fB\-\-add\fP, \fB\-\-delete\fP, \fB\-\-update\fP or \fB\-\-list\fP options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-P\fP, \fB\-\-pairs\fP -.RS 4 -List the partitions using the KEY="value" format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -List the partitions using the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-show\fP -.RS 4 -List the partitions. The output columns can be selected and rearranged with the \fB\-\-output\fP option. All numbers (except SIZE) are in 512\-byte sectors. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-type\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the partition table type. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-list\-types\fP -.RS 4 -List supported partition types and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-update\fP -.RS 4 -Update the specified partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-sector\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Overwrite default sector size. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -partx \-\-show /dev/sdb3, partx \-\-show \-\-nr 3 /dev/sdb, partx \-\-show /dev/sdb3 /dev/sdb -.RS 4 -All three commands list partition 3 of /dev/sdb. -.RE -.sp -partx \-\-show \- /dev/sdb3 -.RS 4 -Lists all subpartitions on \fI/dev/sdb3\fP (the device is used as whole\-disk). -.RE -.sp -partx \-o START \-g \-\-nr 5 /dev/sdb -.RS 4 -Prints the start sector of partition 5 on \fI/dev/sdb\fP without header. -.RE -.sp -partx \-o SECTORS,SIZE /dev/sda5 /dev/sda -.RS 4 -Lists the length in sectors and human\-readable size of partition 5 on \fI/dev/sda\fP. -.RE -.sp -partx \-\-add \-\-nr 3:5 /dev/sdd -.RS 4 -Adds all available partitions from 3 to 5 (inclusive) on \fI/dev/sdd\fP. -.RE -.sp -partx \-d \-\-nr :\-1 /dev/sdd -.RS 4 -Removes the last partition on \fI/dev/sdd\fP. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "dave\(atgnu.org" "Davidlohr Bueso" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.sp -The original version was written by \c -.MTO "aeb\(atcwi.nl" "Andries E. Brouwer" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBaddpart\fP(8), -\fBdelpart\fP(8), -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBpartx\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pivot_root.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pivot_root.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 40459573..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/pivot_root.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,112 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: pivot_root -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "PIVOT_ROOT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -pivot_root \- change the root filesystem -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBpivot_root\fP \fInew_root\fP \fIput_old\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBpivot_root\fP moves the root file system of the current process to the directory \fIput_old\fP and makes \fInew_root\fP the new root file system. Since \fBpivot_root\fP(8) simply calls \fBpivot_root\fP(2), we refer to the man page of the latter for further details. -.sp -Note that, depending on the implementation of \fBpivot_root\fP, root and current working directory of the caller may or may not change. The following is a sequence for invoking \fBpivot_root\fP that works in either case, assuming that \fBpivot_root\fP and \fBchroot\fP are in the current \fBPATH\fP: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -cd new_root -pivot_root . put_old -exec chroot . command -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Note that \fBchroot\fP must be available under the old root and under the new root, because \fBpivot_root\fP may or may not have implicitly changed the root directory of the shell. -.sp -Note that \fBexec chroot\fP changes the running executable, which is necessary if the old root directory should be unmounted afterwards. Also note that standard input, output, and error may still point to a device on the old root file system, keeping it busy. They can easily be changed when invoking \fBchroot\fP (see below; note the absence of leading slashes to make it work whether \fBpivot_root\fP has changed the shell\(cqs root or not). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -Change the root file system to \fI/dev/hda1\fP from an interactive shell: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount /dev/hda1 /new\-root -cd /new\-root -pivot_root . old\-root -exec chroot . sh <dev/console >dev/console 2>&1 -umount /old\-root -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Mount the new root file system over NFS from 10.0.0.1:/my_root and run \fBinit\fP: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -ifconfig lo 127.0.0.1 up # for portmap -# configure Ethernet or such -portmap # for lockd (implicitly started by mount) -mount \-o ro 10.0.0.1:/my_root /mnt -killall portmap # portmap keeps old root busy -cd /mnt -pivot_root . old_root -exec chroot . sh \-c \(aqumount /old_root; exec /sbin/init\(aq \(rs - <dev/console >dev/console 2>&1 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBchroot\fP(1), -\fBpivot_root\fP(2), -\fBmount\fP(8), -\fBswitch_root\fP(8), -\fBumount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBpivot_root\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/readprofile.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/readprofile.8 deleted file mode 100644 index d82b9a15..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/readprofile.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,190 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: readprofile -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "READPROFILE" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -readprofile \- read kernel profiling information -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBreadprofile\fP [options] -.SH "VERSION" -.sp -This manpage documents version 2.0 of the program. -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBreadprofile\fP command uses the \fI/proc/profile\fP information to print ascii data on standard output. The output is organized in three columns: the first is the number of clock ticks, the second is the name of the C function in the kernel where those many ticks occurred, and the third is the normalized `load\(aq of the procedure, calculated as a ratio between the number of ticks and the length of the procedure. The output is filled with blanks to ease readability. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Print all symbols in the mapfile. By default the procedures with reported ticks are not printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-histbin\fP -.RS 4 -Print individual histogram\-bin counts. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-info\fP -.RS 4 -Info. This makes \fBreadprofile\fP only print the profiling step used by the kernel. The profiling step is the resolution of the profiling buffer, and is chosen during kernel configuration (through \fBmake config\fP), or in the kernel\(cqs command line. If the \fB\-t\fP (terse) switch is used together with \fB\-i\fP only the decimal number is printed. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-mapfile\fP \fImapfile\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a mapfile, which by default is \fI/usr/src/linux/System.map\fP. You should specify the map file on cmdline if your current kernel isn\(cqt the last one you compiled, or if you keep System.map elsewhere. If the name of the map file ends with \fI.gz\fP it is decompressed on the fly. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-M\fP, \fB\-\-multiplier\fP \fImultiplier\fP -.RS 4 -On some architectures it is possible to alter the frequency at which the kernel delivers profiling interrupts to each CPU. This option allows you to set the frequency, as a multiplier of the system clock frequency, HZ. Linux 2.6.16 dropped multiplier support for most systems. This option also resets the profiling buffer, and requires superuser privileges. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-profile\fP \fIpro\-file\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a different profiling buffer, which by default is \fI/proc/profile\fP. Using a different pro\-file is useful if you want to `freeze\(aq the kernel profiling at some time and read it later. The \fI/proc/profile\fP file can be copied using \fBcat\fP(1) or \fBcp\fP(1). There is no more support for compressed profile buffers, like in \fBreadprofile\-1.1\fP, because the program needs to know the size of the buffer in advance. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-reset\fP -.RS 4 -Reset the profiling buffer. This can only be invoked by root, because \fI/proc/profile\fP is readable by everybody but writable only by the superuser. However, you can make \fBreadprofile\fP set\-user\-ID 0, in order to reset the buffer without gaining privileges. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s, \-\-counters\fP -.RS 4 -Print individual counters within functions. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose. The output is organized in four columns and filled with blanks. The first column is the RAM address of a kernel function, the second is the name of the function, the third is the number of clock ticks and the last is the normalized load. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/proc/profile\fP -.RS 4 -A binary snapshot of the profiling buffer. -.RE -.sp -\fI/usr/src/linux/System.map\fP -.RS 4 -The symbol table for the kernel. -.RE -.sp -\fI/usr/src/linux/*\fP -.RS 4 -The program being profiled :\-) -.RE -.SH "BUGS" -.sp -\fBreadprofile\fP only works with a 1.3.x or newer kernel, because \fI/proc/profile\fP changed in the step from 1.2 to 1.3. -.sp -This program only works with ELF kernels. The change for a.out kernels is trivial, and left as an exercise to the a.out user. -.sp -To enable profiling, the kernel must be rebooted, because no profiling module is available, and it wouldn\(cqt be easy to build. To enable profiling, you can specify \fBprofile\fP=\fI2\fP (or another number) on the kernel commandline. The number you specify is the two\-exponent used as profiling step. -.sp -Profiling is disabled when interrupts are inhibited. This means that many profiling ticks happen when interrupts are re\-enabled. Watch out for misleading information. -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -Browse the profiling buffer ordering by clock ticks: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - readprofile | sort \-nr | less -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Print the 20 most loaded procedures: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - readprofile | sort \-nr +2 | head \-20 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Print only filesystem profile: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - readprofile | grep _ext2 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Look at all the kernel information, with ram addresses: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - readprofile \-av | less -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Browse a \(aqfrozen\(aq profile buffer for a non current kernel: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - readprofile \-p ~/profile.freeze \-m /zImage.map.gz -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.sp -Request profiling at 2kHz per CPU, and reset the profiling buffer: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - sudo readprofile \-M 20 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBreadprofile\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/resizepart.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/resizepart.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 6d272cd9..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/resizepart.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: resizepart -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "RESIZEPART" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -resizepart \- tell the kernel about the new size of a partition -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBresizepart\fP \fIdevice partition length\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBresizepart\fP tells the Linux kernel about the new size of the specified partition. The command is a simple wrapper around the "resize partition" ioctl. -.sp -This command doesn\(cqt manipulate partitions on a block device. -.SH "PARAMETERS" -.sp -\fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -The disk device. -.RE -.sp -\fIpartition\fP -.RS 4 -The partition number. -.RE -.sp -\fIlength\fP -.RS 4 -The new length of the partition (in 512\-byte sectors). -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBaddpart\fP(8), -\fBdelpart\fP(8), -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBresizepart\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rfkill.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rfkill.8 deleted file mode 100644 index eeeb2994..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rfkill.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: rfkill -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "RFKILL" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -rfkill \- tool for enabling and disabling wireless devices -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBrfkill\fP [options] [\fIcommand\fP] [\fIID\fP|\fItype\fP ...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBrfkill\fP lists, enabling and disabling wireless devices. -.sp -The command "list" output format is deprecated and maintained for backward compatibility only. The new output format is the default when no command is specified or when the option \fB\-\-output\fP is used. -.sp -The default output is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using the \fB\-\-output\fP option together with a columns list in environments where a stable output is required. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "COMMANDS" -.sp -\fBhelp\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fBevent\fP -.RS 4 -Listen for rfkill events and display them on stdout. -.RE -.sp -\fBlist\fP [\fIid\fP|\fItype\fP ...] -.RS 4 -List the current state of all available devices. The command output format is deprecated, see the section DESCRIPTION. It is a good idea to check with \fBlist\fP command \fIid\fP or \fItype\fP scope is appropriate before setting \fBblock\fP or \fBunblock\fP. Special \fIall\fP type string will match everything. Use of multiple \fIID\fP or \fItype\fP arguments is supported. -.RE -.sp -\fBblock id\fP|\fBtype\fP [...] -.RS 4 -Disable the corresponding device. -.RE -.sp -\fBunblock id\fP|\fBtype\fP [...] -.RS 4 -Enable the corresponding device. If the device is hard\-blocked, for example via a hardware switch, it will remain unavailable though it is now soft\-unblocked. -.RE -.sp -\fBtoggle id\fP|\fBtype\fP [...] -.RS 4 -Enable or disable the corresponding device. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - rfkill \-\-output ID,TYPE - rfkill block all - rfkill unblock wlan - rfkill block bluetooth uwb wimax wwan gps fm nfc -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBrfkill\fP was originally written by \c -.MTO "johannes\(atsipsolutions.net" "Johannes Berg" "" -and -.MTO "marcel\(atholtmann.org" "Marcel Holtmann" "." -The code has been later modified by -.MTO "kerolasa\(atiki.fi" "Sami Kerola" "" -and -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -for the util\-linux project. -.sp -This manual page was written by \c -.MTO "linux\(atyoumustbejoking.demon.co.uk" "Darren Salt" "" -for the Debian project (and may be used by others). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBpowertop\fP(8), -\fBsystemd\-rfkill\fP(8), -.URL "https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git/tree/Documentation/driver\-api/rfkill.rst" "Linux kernel documentation" "" -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBrfkill\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rpcctl.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rpcctl.8 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b87ba0df --- /dev/null +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rpcctl.8 @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +.\" +.\" rpcctl(8) +.\" +.TH rpcctl 8 "15 Feb 2022" +.SH NAME +rpcctl \- Displays SunRPC connection information +.SH SYNOPSIS +.nf +.BR rpcctl " [ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] { \fBclient \fR| \fBswitch \fR| \fBxprt \fR}" +.P +.BR "rpcctl client" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] { \fBshow \fR}" +.BR "rpcctl client show " "\fR[ \fB\-h \f| \fB\-\-help \fR] [ \fIXPRT \fR]" +.P +.BR "rpcctl switch" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] { \fBset \fR| \fBshow \fR}" +.BR "rpcctl switch set" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] \fISWITCH \fBdstaddr \fINEWADDR" +.BR "rpcctl switch show" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] [ \fISWITCH \fR]" +.P +.BR "rpcctl xprt" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] { \fBremove \fR| \fBset \fR| \fBshow \fR}" +.BR "rpcctl xprt remove" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] \fIXPRT" +.BR "rpcctl xprt set" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] \fIXPRT \fR{ \fBdstaddr \fINEWADDR \fR| \fBoffline \fR| \fBonline \fR}" +.BR "rpcctl xprt show" " \fR[ \fB\-h \fR| \fB\-\-help \fR] [ \fIXPRT \fR]" +.fi +.SH DESCRIPTION +.RB "The " rpcctl " command displays information collected in the SunRPC sysfs files about the system's SunRPC objects. +.P +.SS rpcctl client \fR- \fBCommands operating on RPC clients +.IP "\fBshow \fR[ \fICLIENT \fR] \fB(default)" +Show detailed information about the RPC clients on this system. +If \fICLIENT \fRwas provided, then only show information about a single RPC client. +.P +.SS rpcctl switch \fR- \fBCommands operating on groups of transports +.IP "\fBset \fISWITCH \fBdstaddr \fINEWADDR" +Change the destination address of all transports in the \fISWITCH \fRto \fINEWADDR\fR. +\fINEWADDR \fRcan be an IP address, DNS name, or anything else resolvable by \fBgethostbyname\fR(3). +.IP "\fBshow \fR[ \fISWITCH \fR] \fB(default)" +Show detailed information about groups of transports on this system. +If \fISWITCH \fRwas provided, then only show information about a single transport group. +.P +.SS rpcctl xprt \fR- \fBCommands operating on individual transports +.IP "\fBremove \fIXPRT" +Removes the specified \fIXPRT \fRfrom the system. +Note that "main" transports cannot be removed. +.P +.IP "\fBset \fIXPRT \fBdstaddr \fINEWADDR" +Change the destination address of the specified \fIXPRT \fR to \fINEWADDR\fR. +\fINEWADDR \fRcan be an IP address, DNS name, or anything else resolvable by \fBgethostbyname\fR(3). +.P +.IP "\fBset \fIXPRT \fBoffline" +Sets the specified \fIXPRT\fR's state to offline. +.P +.IP "\fBset \fIXPRT \fBonline" +Sets the specified \fIXPRT\fR's state to online. +.IP "\fBshow \fR[ \fIXPRT \fR] \fB(default)" +Show detailed information about this system's transports. +If \fIXPRT \fRwas provided, then only show information about a single transport. +.SH EXAMPLES +.IP "\fBrpcctl switch show switch-2" +Show details about the RPC switch named "switch-2". +.IP "\fBrpcctl xprt remove xprt-4" +Remove the xprt named "xprt-4" from the system. +.IP "\fBrpcctl xprt set xprt-3 dstaddr https://linux-nfs.org +Change the dstaddr of the xprt named "xprt-3" to point to linux-nfs.org +.SH DIRECTORY +.TP +.B /sys/kernel/sunrpc/ +.SH AUTHOR +Anna Schumaker <Anna.Schumaker@Netapp.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rtcwake.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rtcwake.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 1f0e284e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/rtcwake.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,256 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: rtcwake -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "RTCWAKE" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -rtcwake \- enter a system sleep state until specified wakeup time -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBrtcwake\fP [options] [\fB\-d\fP \fIdevice\fP] [\fB\-m\fP \fIstandby_mode\fP] {\fB\-s\fP \fIseconds\fP|\fB\-t\fP \fItime_t\fP} -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -This program is used to enter a system sleep state and to automatically wake from it at a specified time. -.sp -This uses cross\-platform Linux interfaces to enter a system sleep state, and leave it no later than a specified time. It uses any RTC framework driver that supports standard driver model wakeup flags. -.sp -This is normally used like the old \fBapmsleep\fP utility, to wake from a suspend state like ACPI S1 (standby) or S3 (suspend\-to\-RAM). Most platforms can implement those without analogues of BIOS, APM, or ACPI. -.sp -On some systems, this can also be used like \fBnvram\-wakeup\fP, waking from states like ACPI S4 (suspend to disk). Not all systems have persistent media that are appropriate for such suspend modes. -.sp -Note that alarm functionality depends on hardware; not every RTC is able to setup an alarm up to 24 hours in the future. -.sp -The suspend setup may be interrupted by active hardware; for example wireless USB input devices that continue to send events for some fraction of a second after the return key is pressed. \fBrtcwake\fP tries to avoid this problem and it waits to terminal to settle down before entering a system sleep. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-A\fP, \fB\-\-adjfile\fP \fIfile\fP -.RS 4 -Specify an alternative path to the adjust file. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-auto\fP -.RS 4 -Read the clock mode (whether the hardware clock is set to UTC or local time) from the \fIadjtime\fP file, where \fBhwclock\fP(8) stores that information. This is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-date\fP \fItimestamp\fP -.RS 4 -Set the wakeup time to the value of the timestamp. Format of the timestamp can be any of the following: -.RE -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -YYYYMMDDhhmmss -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -T{ -.sp -YYYY\-MM\-DD hh:mm:ss -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -T{ -.sp -YYYY\-MM\-DD hh:mm -T}:T{ -.sp -(seconds will be set to 00) -T} -T{ -.sp -YYYY\-MM\-DD -T}:T{ -.sp -(time will be set to 00:00:00) -T} -T{ -.sp -hh:mm:ss -T}:T{ -.sp -(date will be set to today) -T} -T{ -.sp -hh:mm -T}:T{ -.sp -(date will be set to today, seconds to 00) -T} -T{ -.sp -tomorrow -T}:T{ -.sp -(time is set to 00:00:00) -T} -T{ -.sp -+5min -T}:T{ -.sp - -T} -.TE -.sp -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-device\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -Use the specified \fIdevice\fP instead of \fBrtc0\fP as realtime clock. This option is only relevant if your system has more than one RTC. You may specify \fBrtc1\fP, \fBrtc2\fP, ... here. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-local\fP -.RS 4 -Assume that the hardware clock is set to local time, regardless of the contents of the \fIadjtime\fP file. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-list\-modes\fP -.RS 4 -List available \fB\-\-mode\fP option arguments. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-mode\fP \fImode\fP -.RS 4 -Go into the given standby state. Valid values for \fImode\fP are: -.sp -\fBstandby\fP -.RS 4 -ACPI state S1. This state offers minimal, though real, power savings, while providing a very low\-latency transition back to a working system. This is the default mode. -.RE -.sp -\fBfreeze\fP -.RS 4 -The processes are frozen, all the devices are suspended and all the processors idled. This state is a general state that does not need any platform\-specific support, but it saves less power than Suspend\-to\-RAM, because the system is still in a running state. (Available since Linux 3.9.) -.RE -.sp -\fBmem\fP -.RS 4 -ACPI state S3 (Suspend\-to\-RAM). This state offers significant power savings as everything in the system is put into a low\-power state, except for memory, which is placed in self\-refresh mode to retain its contents. -.RE -.sp -\fBdisk\fP -.RS 4 -ACPI state S4 (Suspend\-to\-disk). This state offers the greatest power savings, and can be used even in the absence of low\-level platform support for power management. This state operates similarly to Suspend\-to\-RAM, but includes a final step of writing memory contents to disk. -.RE -.sp -\fBoff\fP -.RS 4 -ACPI state S5 (Poweroff). This is done by calling \(aq/sbin/shutdown\(aq. Not officially supported by ACPI, but it usually works. -.RE -.sp -\fBno\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt suspend, only set the RTC wakeup time. -.RE -.sp -\fBon\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt suspend, but read the RTC device until an alarm time appears. This mode is useful for debugging. -.RE -.sp -\fBdisable\fP -.RS 4 -Disable a previously set alarm. -.RE -.sp -\fBshow\fP -.RS 4 -Print alarm information in format: "alarm: off|on <time>". The time is in ctime() output format, e.g., "alarm: on Tue Nov 16 04:48:45 2010". -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-dry\-run\fP -.RS 4 -This option does everything apart from actually setting up the alarm, suspending the system, or waiting for the alarm. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-seconds\fP \fIseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Set the wakeup time to \fIseconds\fP in the future from now. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP \fItime_t\fP -.RS 4 -Set the wakeup time to the absolute time \fItime_t\fP. \fItime_t\fP is the time in seconds since 1970\-01\-01, 00:00 UTC. Use the \fBdate\fP(1) tool to convert between human\-readable time and \fItime_t\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-utc\fP -.RS 4 -Assume that the hardware clock is set to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated), regardless of the contents of the \fIadjtime\fP file. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Be verbose. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Some PC systems can\(cqt currently exit sleep states such as \fBmem\fP using only the kernel code accessed by this driver. They need help from userspace code to make the framebuffer work again. -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/adjtime\fP -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The program was posted several times on LKML and other lists before appearing in kernel commit message for Linux 2.6 in the GIT commit 87ac84f42a7a580d0dd72ae31d6a5eb4bfe04c6d. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -The program was written by \c -.MTO "dbrownell\(atusers.sourceforge.net" "David Brownell" "" -and improved by -.MTO "bwalle\(atsuse.de" "Bernhard Walle" "." -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.sp -This is free software. You may redistribute copies of it under the terms of the \c -.URL "http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html" "GNU General Public License" "." -There is NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBhwclock\fP(8), -\fBdate\fP(1) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBrtcwake\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-bgqd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-bgqd.8 index d749bba8..1aa8284e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-bgqd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-bgqd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: samba-bgqd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SAMBA\-BGQD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "SAMBA\-BGQD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 index 1a58a106..133e3b89 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/samba-dcerpcd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: samba-dcerpcd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SAMBA\-DCERPCD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "SAMBA\-DCERPCD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/setarch.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/setarch.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 49f0586e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/setarch.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: setarch -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SETARCH" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -setarch \- change reported architecture in new program environment and/or set personality flags -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBsetarch\fP [\fIarch\fP] [options] [\fIprogram\fP [\fIargument\fP...]] -.sp -\fBsetarch\fP \fB\-\-list\fP|\fB\-h\fP|\fB\-V\fP -.sp -\fBarch\fP [options] [\fIprogram\fP [\fIargument\fP...]] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBsetarch\fP modifies execution domains and process personality flags. -.sp -The execution domains currently only affects the output of \fBuname \-m\fP. For example, on an AMD64 system, running \fBsetarch i386\fP \fIprogram\fP will cause \fIprogram\fP to see i686 instead of \fIx86_64\fP as the machine type. It can also be used to set various personality options. The default \fIprogram\fP is \fB/bin/sh\fP. -.sp -Since version 2.33 the \fIarch\fP command line argument is optional and \fBsetarch\fP may be used to change personality flags (ADDR_LIMIT_*, SHORT_INODE, etc) without modification of the execution domain. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-\-list\fP -.RS 4 -List the architectures that \fBsetarch\fP knows about. Whether \fBsetarch\fP can actually set each of these architectures depends on the running kernel. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-uname\-2.6\fP -.RS 4 -Causes the \fIprogram\fP to see a kernel version number beginning with 2.6. Turns on \fBUNAME26\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Be verbose. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-3\fP, \fB\-\-3gb\fP -.RS 4 -Specifies \fIprogram\fP should use a maximum of 3GB of address space. Supported on x86. Turns on \fBADDR_LIMIT_3GB\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-4gb\fP -.RS 4 -This option has no effect. It is retained for backward compatibility only, and may be removed in future releases. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-B\fP, \fB\-\-32bit\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the address space to 32 bits to emulate hardware. Supported on ARM and Alpha. Turns on \fBADDR_LIMIT_32BIT\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-fdpic\-funcptrs\fP -.RS 4 -Treat user\-space function pointers to signal handlers as pointers to address descriptors. This option has no effect on architectures that do not support \fBFDPIC\fP ELF binaries. In kernel v4.14 support is limited to ARM, Blackfin, Fujitsu FR\-V, and SuperH CPU architectures. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-short\-inode\fP -.RS 4 -Obsolete bug emulation flag. Turns on \fBSHORT_INODE\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-addr\-compat\-layout\fP -.RS 4 -Provide legacy virtual address space layout. Use when the \fIprogram\fP binary does not have \fBPT_GNU_STACK\fP ELF header. Turns on \fBADDR_COMPAT_LAYOUT\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-addr\-no\-randomize\fP -.RS 4 -Disables randomization of the virtual address space. Turns on \fBADDR_NO_RANDOMIZE\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-S\fP, \fB\-\-whole\-seconds\fP -.RS 4 -Obsolete bug emulation flag. Turns on \fBWHOLE_SECONDS\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-sticky\-timeouts\fP -.RS 4 -This makes \fBselect\fP(2), \fBpselect\fP(2), and \fBppoll\fP(2) system calls preserve the timeout value instead of modifying it to reflect the amount of time not slept when interrupted by a signal handler. Use when \fIprogram\fP depends on this behavior. For more details see the timeout description in \fBselect\fP(2) manual page. Turns on \fBSTICKY_TIMEOUTS\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-X\fP, \fB\-\-read\-implies\-exec\fP -.RS 4 -If this is set then \fBmmap\fP(3p) \fBPROT_READ\fP will also add the \fBPROT_EXEC\fP bit \- as expected by legacy x86 binaries. Notice that the ELF loader will automatically set this bit when it encounters a legacy binary. Turns on \fBREAD_IMPLIES_EXEC\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-Z\fP, \fB\-\-mmap\-page\-zero\fP -.RS 4 -SVr4 bug emulation that will set \fBmmap\fP(3p) page zero as read\-only. Use when \fIprogram\fP depends on this behavior, and the source code is not available to be fixed. Turns on \fBMMAP_PAGE_ZERO\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -setarch \-\-addr\-no\-randomize mytestprog -setarch ppc32 rpmbuild \-\-target=ppc \-\-rebuild foo.src.rpm -setarch ppc32 \-v \-vL3 rpmbuild \-\-target=ppc \-\-rebuild bar.src.rpm -setarch ppc32 \-\-32bit rpmbuild \-\-target=ppc \-\-rebuild foo.src.rpm -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "sopwith\(atredhat.com" "Elliot Lee" "," -.MTO "jnovy\(atredhat.com" "Jindrich Novy" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBpersonality\fP(2), -\fBselect\fP(2) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBsetarch\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sfdisk.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sfdisk.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 964589b9..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sfdisk.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,602 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: sfdisk -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SFDISK" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -sfdisk \- display or manipulate a disk partition table -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP [\fB\-N\fP \fIpartition\-number\fP] -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP [options] \fIcommand\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP is a script\-oriented tool for partitioning any block device. It runs in interactive mode if executed on a terminal (stdin refers to a terminal). -.sp -Since version 2.26 \fBsfdisk\fP supports MBR (DOS), GPT, SUN and SGI disk labels, but no longer provides any functionality for CHS (Cylinder\-Head\-Sector) addressing. CHS has never been important for Linux, and this addressing concept does not make any sense for new devices. -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP protects the first disk sector when create a new disk label. The option \fB\-\-wipe always\fP disables this protection. Note that \fBfdisk\fP(8) and \fBcfdisk\fP(8) completely erase this area by default. -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP (since version 2.26) \fBaligns the start and end of partitions\fP to block\-device I/O limits when relative sizes are specified, when the default values are used or when multiplicative suffixes (e.g., MiB) are used for sizes. It is possible that partition size will be optimized (reduced or enlarged) due to alignment if the start offset is specified exactly in sectors and partition size relative or by multiplicative suffixes. -.sp -The recommended way is not to specify start offsets at all and specify partition size in MiB, GiB (or so). In this case \fBsfdisk\fP aligns all partitions to block\-device I/O limits (or when I/O limits are too small then to megabyte boundary to keep disk layout portable). If this default behaviour is unwanted (usually for very small partitions) then specify offsets and sizes in sectors. In this case \fBsfdisk\fP entirely follows specified numbers without any optimization. -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP does not create the standard system partitions for SGI and SUN disk labels like \fBfdisk\fP(8) does. It is necessary to explicitly create all partitions including whole\-disk system partitions. -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP uses \fBBLKRRPART\fP (reread partition table) ioctl to make sure that the device is not used by system or other tools (see also \fB\-\-no\-reread\fP). It\(cqs possible that this feature or another \fBsfdisk\fP activity races with \fBudevd\fP. The recommended way how to avoid possible collisions is to use \fB\-\-lock\fP option. The exclusive lock will cause udevd to skip the event handling on the device. -.sp -The \fBsfdisk\fP prompt is only a hint for users and a displayed partition number does not mean that the same partition table entry will be created (if \fB\-N\fP not specified), especially for tables with gaps. -.SH "COMMANDS" -.sp -The commands are mutually exclusive. -.sp -[\fB\-N\fP \fIpartition\-number\fP] \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -The default \fBsfdisk\fP command is to read the specification for the desired partitioning of \fIdevice\fP from standard input, and then create a partition table according to the specification. See below for the description of the input format. If standard input is a terminal, then \fBsfdisk\fP starts an interactive session. -.sp -If the option \fB\-N\fP is specified, then the changes are applied to the partition addressed by \fIpartition\-number\fP. The unspecified fields of the partition are not modified. -.sp -Note that it\(cqs possible to address an unused partition with \fB\-N\fP. For example, an MBR always contains 4 partitions, but the number of used partitions may be smaller. In this case \fBsfdisk\fP follows the default values from the partition table and does not use built\-in defaults for the unused partition given with \fB\-N\fP. See also \fB\-\-append\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-A\fP, \fB\-\-activate\fP \fIdevice\fP [\fIpartition\-number\fP...] -.RS 4 -Switch on the bootable flag for the specified partitions and switch off the bootable flag on all unspecified partitions. The special placeholder \(aq\-\(aq may be used instead of the partition numbers to switch off the bootable flag on all partitions. -.sp -The activation command is supported for MBR and PMBR only. If a GPT label is detected, then \fBsfdisk\fP prints warning and automatically enters PMBR. -.sp -If no \fIpartition\-number\fP is specified, then list the partitions with an enabled flag. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-delete\fP \fIdevice\fP [\fIpartition\-number\fP...] -.RS 4 -Delete all or the specified partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-dump\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -Dump the partitions of a device in a format that is usable as input to \fBsfdisk\fP. See the section \fBBACKING UP THE PARTITION TABLE\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-show\-geometry\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.RS 4 -List the geometry of all or the specified devices. For backward compatibility the deprecated option \fB\-\-show\-pt\-geometry\fP have the same meaning as this one. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -Dump the partitions of a device in JSON format. Note that \fBsfdisk\fP is not able to use JSON as input format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.RS 4 -List the partitions of all or the specified devices. This command can be used together with \fB\-\-verify\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-list\-free\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.RS 4 -List the free unpartitioned areas on all or the specified devices. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-part\-attrs\fP \fIdevice partition\-number\fP [\fIattributes\fP] -.RS 4 -Change the GPT partition attribute bits. If \fIattributes\fP is not specified, then print the current partition settings. The \fIattributes\fP argument is a comma\- or space\-delimited list of bits numbers or bit names. For example, the string "RequiredPartition,50,51" sets three bits. The currently supported attribute bits are: -.sp -\fBBit 0 (RequiredPartition)\fP -.RS 4 -If this bit is set, the partition is required for the platform to function. The creator of the partition indicates that deletion or modification of the contents can result in loss of platform features or failure for the platform to boot or operate. The system cannot function normally if this partition is removed, and it should be considered part of the hardware of the system. -.RE -.sp -\fBBit 1 (NoBlockIOProtocol)\fP -.RS 4 -EFI firmware should ignore the content of the partition and not try to read from it. -.RE -.sp -\fBBit 2 (LegacyBIOSBootable)\fP -.RS 4 -The partition may be bootable by legacy BIOS firmware. -.RE -.sp -\fBBits 3\-47\fP -.RS 4 -Undefined and must be zero. Reserved for expansion by future versions of the UEFI specification. -.RE -.sp -\fBBits 48\-63\fP -.RS 4 -Reserved for GUID specific use. The use of these bits will vary depending on the partition type. For example Microsoft uses bit 60 to indicate read\-only, 61 for shadow copy of another partition, 62 for hidden partitions and 63 to disable automount. -.RE -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-part\-label\fP \fIdevice partition\-number\fP [\fIlabel\fP] -.RS 4 -Change the GPT partition name (label). If \fIlabel\fP is not specified, then print the current partition label. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-part\-type\fP \fIdevice partition\-number\fP [\fItype\fP] -.RS 4 -Change the partition type. If \fItype\fP is not specified, then print the current partition type. -.sp -The \fItype\fP argument is hexadecimal for MBR, GUID for GPT, type alias (e.g. "linux") or type shortcut (e.g. \(aqL\(aq). For backward compatibility the options \fB\-c\fP and \fB\-\-id\fP have the same meaning as this one. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-part\-uuid\fP \fIdevice partition\-number\fP [\fIuuid\fP] -.RS 4 -Change the GPT partition UUID. If \fIuuid\fP is not specified, then print the current partition UUID. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-disk\-id\fP \fIdevice\fP [\fIid\fP] -.RS 4 -Change the disk identifier. If \fIid\fP is not specified, then print the current identifier. The identifier is UUID for GPT or unsigned integer for MBR. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-reorder\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -Renumber the partitions, ordering them by their start offset. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-show\-size\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.RS 4 -List the sizes of all or the specified devices in units of 1024 byte size. This command is DEPRECATED in favour of \fBblockdev\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-list\-types\fP -.RS 4 -Print all supported types for the current disk label or the label specified by \fB\-\-label\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-verify\fP [\fIdevice\fP...] -.RS 4 -Test whether the partition table and partitions seem correct. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-relocate\fP \fIoper\fP \fIdevice\fP -.RS 4 -Relocate partition table header. This command is currently supported for GPT header only. The argument \fIoper\fP can be: -.sp -\fBgpt\-bak\-std\fP -.RS 4 -Move GPT backup header to the standard location at the end of the device. -.RE -.sp -\fBgpt\-bak\-mini\fP -.RS 4 -Move GPT backup header behind the last partition. Note that UEFI standard requires the backup header at the end of the device and partitioning tools can automatically relocate the header to follow the standard. -.RE -.RE -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-append\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt create a new partition table, but only append the specified partitions. -.sp -Note that unused partition maybe be re\-used in this case although it is not the last partition in the partition table. See also \fB\-N\fP to specify entry in the partition table. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-backup\fP -.RS 4 -Back up the current partition table sectors before starting the partitioning. The default backup file name is \fI~/sfdisk\-<device>\-<offset>.bak\fP; to use another name see option \fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-backup\-file\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-color\fP[\fB=\fP\fIwhen\fP] -.RS 4 -Colorize the output. The optional argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. If the \fIwhen\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fBauto\fP. The colors can be disabled; for the current built\-in default see the \fB\-\-help\fP output. See also the \fBCOLORS\fP section. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Disable all consistency checking. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-Linux\fP -.RS 4 -Deprecated and ignored option. Partitioning that is compatible with Linux (and other modern operating systems) is the default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-act\fP -.RS 4 -Do everything except writing to the device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-no\-reread\fP -.RS 4 -Do not check through the re\-read\-partition\-table ioctl whether the device is in use. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-no\-tell\-kernel\fP -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt tell the kernel about partition changes. This option is recommended together with \fB\-\-no\-reread\fP to modify a partition on used disk. The modified partition should not be used (e.g., mounted). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-backup\-file\fP \fIpath\fP -.RS 4 -Override the default backup file name. Note that the device name and offset are always appended to the file name. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-move\-data\fP[\fB=\fP\fIpath\fP] -.RS 4 -Move data after partition relocation, for example when moving the beginning of a partition to another place on the disk. The size of the partition has to remain the same, the new and old location may overlap. This option requires option \fB\-N\fP in order to be processed on one specific partition only. -.sp -The optional \fIpath\fP specifies log file name. The log file contains information about all read/write operations on the partition data. The word "@default" as a \fIpath\fP forces sfdisk to use \fI~/sfdisk\-<devname>.move\fP for the log. The log is optional since v2.35. -.sp -Note that this operation is risky and not atomic. \fBDon\(cqt forget to backup your data!\fP -.sp -See also \fB\-\-move\-use\-fsync\fP. -.sp -In the example below, the first command creates a 100MiB free area before the first partition and moves the data it contains (e.g., a filesystem), the next command creates a new partition from the free space (at offset 2048), and the last command reorders partitions to match disk order (the original sdc1 will become sdc2). -.sp -\fBecho \(aq+100M,\(aq | sfdisk \-\-move\-data /dev/sdc \-N 1\fP \fBecho \(aq2048,\(aq | sfdisk /dev/sdc \-\-append\fP \fBsfdisk /dev/sdc \-\-reorder\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-move\-use\-fsync\fP -.RS 4 -Use the \fBfsync\fP(2) system call after each write when moving data to a new location by \fB\-\-move\-data\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.sp -The default list of columns may be extended if \fIlist\fP is specified in the format \fI+list\fP (e.g., \fB\-o +UUID\fP). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress extra info messages. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-u\fP, \fB\-\-unit S\fP -.RS 4 -Deprecated option. Only the sector unit is supported. This option is not supported when using the \fB\-\-show\-size\fP command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-X\fP, \fB\-\-label\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the disk label type (e.g., \fBdos\fP, \fBgpt\fP, ...). If this option is not given, then \fBsfdisk\fP defaults to the existing label, but if there is no label on the device yet, then the type defaults to \fBdos\fP. The default or the current label may be overwritten by the "label: <name>" script header line. The option \fB\-\-label\fP does not force \fBsfdisk\fP to create empty disk label (see the \fBEMPTY DISK LABEL\fP section below). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-Y\fP, \fB\-\-label\-nested\fP \fItype\fP -.RS 4 -Force editing of a nested disk label. The primary disk label has to exist already. This option allows editing for example a hybrid/protective MBR on devices with GPT. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wipe\fP \fIwhen\fP -.RS 4 -Wipe filesystem, RAID and partition\-table signatures from the device, in order to avoid possible collisions. The argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. When this option is not given, the default is \fBauto\fP, in which case signatures are wiped only when in interactive mode; except the old partition\-table signatures which are always wiped before create a new partition\-table if the argument \fIwhen\fP is not \fBnever\fP. The \fBauto\fP mode also does not wipe the first sector (boot sector), it is necessary to use the \fBalways\fP mode to wipe this area. In all cases detected signatures are reported by warning messages before a new partition table is created. See also the \fBwipefs\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-W\fP, \fB\-\-wipe\-partitions\fP \fIwhen\fP -.RS 4 -Wipe filesystem, RAID and partition\-table signatures from a newly created partitions, in order to avoid possible collisions. The argument \fIwhen\fP can be \fBauto\fP, \fBnever\fP or \fBalways\fP. When this option is not given, the default is \fBauto\fP, in which case signatures are wiped only when in interactive mode and after confirmation by user. In all cases detected signatures are reported by warning messages after a new partition is created. See also \fBwipefs\fP(8) command. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "INPUT FORMATS" -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP supports two input formats and generic header lines. -.SS "Header lines" -.sp -The optional header lines specify generic information that apply to the partition table. The header\-line format is: -.sp -\fB<name>: <value>\fP -.sp -The currently recognized headers are: -.sp -\fBunit\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the partitioning unit. The only supported unit is \fBsectors\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the partition table type. For example \fBdos\fP or \fBgpt\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fBlabel\-id\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the partition table identifier. It should be a hexadecimal number (with a 0x prefix) for MBR and a UUID for GPT. -.RE -.sp -\fBfirst\-lba\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the first usable sector for GPT partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fBlast\-lba\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the last usable sector for GPT partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fBtable\-length\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the maximal number of GPT partitions. -.RE -.sp -\fBgrain\fP -.RS 4 -Specify minimal size in bytes used to calculate partitions alignment. The default is 1MiB and it\(cqs strongly recommended to use the default. Do not modify this variable if you\(cqre not sure. -.RE -.sp -\fBsector\-size\fP -.RS 4 -Specify sector size. This header is informative only and it is not used when sfdisk creates a new partition table, in this case the real device specific value is always used and sector size from the dump is ignored. -.RE -.sp -Note that it is only possible to use header lines before the first partition is specified in the input. -.SS "Unnamed\-fields format" -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fIstart size type bootable\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -where each line fills one partition descriptor. -.sp -Fields are separated by whitespace, comma or semicolon possibly followed by whitespace; initial and trailing whitespace is ignored. Numbers can be octal, decimal or hexadecimal; decimal is the default. When a field is absent, empty or specified as \(aq\-\(aq a default value is used. But when the \fB\-N\fP option (change a single partition) is given, the default for each field is its previous value. -.sp -The default value of \fIstart\fP is the first non\-assigned sector aligned according to device I/O limits. The default start offset for the first partition is 1 MiB. The offset may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes (KiB, MiB, GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB) then the number is interpreted as offset in bytes. -.sp -The default value of \fIsize\fP indicates "as much as possible"; i.e., until the next partition or end\-of\-device. A numerical argument is by default interpreted as a number of sectors, however if the size is followed by one of the multiplicative suffixes (KiB, MiB, GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB) then the number is interpreted as the size of the partition in bytes and it is then aligned according to the device I/O limits. A \(aq+\(aq can be used instead of a number to enlarge the partition as much as possible. Note \(aq+\(aq is equivalent to the default behaviour for a new partition; existing partitions will be resized as required. -.sp -The partition \fItype\fP is given in hex for MBR (DOS) where 0x prefix is optional; a GUID string for GPT; a shortcut or an alias. It\(cqs recommended to use two letters for MBR hex codes to avoid collision between deprecated shortcut \(aqE\(aq and \(aq0E\(aq MBR hex code. For backward compatibility \fBsfdisk\fP tries to interpret \fItype\fP as a shortcut as a first possibility in partitioning scripts although on other places (e.g. \fB\-\-part\-type\fP command) it tries shortcuts as the last possibility. -.sp -Since v2.36 libfdisk supports partition type aliases as extension to shortcuts. The alias is a simple human readable word (e.g. "linux"). -.sp -Since v2.37 libfdisk supports partition type names on input, ignoring the case of the characters and all non\-alphanumeric and non\-digit characters in the name (e.g. "Linux /usr x86" is the same as "linux usr\-x86"). -.sp -Supported shortcuts and aliases: -.sp -\fBL \- alias \(aqlinux\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -Linux; means 83 for MBR and 0FC63DAF\-8483\-4772\-8E79\-3D69D8477DE4 for GPT. -.RE -.sp -\fBS \- alias \(aqswap\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -swap area; means 82 for MBR and 0657FD6D\-A4AB\-43C4\-84E5\-0933C84B4F4F for GPT -.RE -.sp -\fBEx \- alias \(aqextended\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -MBR extended partition; means 05 for MBR. The original shortcut \(aqE\(aq is deprecated due to collision with 0x0E MBR partition type. -.RE -.sp -\fBH \- alias \(aqhome\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -home partition; means 933AC7E1\-2EB4\-4F13\-B844\-0E14E2AEF915 for GPT -.RE -.sp -\fBU \- alias \(aquefi\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -EFI System partition, means EF for MBR and C12A7328\-F81F\-11D2\-BA4B\-00A0C93EC93B for GPT -.RE -.sp -\fBR \- alias \(aqraid\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -Linux RAID; means FD for MBR and A19D880F\-05FC\-4D3B\-A006\-743F0F84911E for GPT -.RE -.sp -\fBV \- alias \(aqlvm\(aq\fP -.RS 4 -LVM; means 8E for MBR and E6D6D379\-F507\-44C2\-A23C\-238F2A3DF928 for GPT -.RE -.sp -The default \fItype\fP value is \fIlinux\fP. -.sp -The shortcut \(aqX\(aq for Linux extended partition (85) is deprecated in favour of \(aqEx\(aq. -.sp -\fIbootable\fP is specified as [\fB*\fP|\fB\-\fP], with as default not\-bootable. The value of this field is irrelevant for Linux \- when Linux runs it has been booted already \- but it might play a role for certain boot loaders and for other operating systems. -.SS "Named\-fields format" -.sp -This format is more readable, robust, extensible and allows specifying additional information (e.g., a UUID). It is recommended to use this format to keep your scripts more readable. -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -[\fIdevice\fP \fB:\fP] \fIname\fP[\fB=\fP\fIvalue\fP], ... -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The \fIdevice\fP field is optional. \fBsfdisk\fP extracts the partition number from the device name. It allows specifying the partitions in random order. This functionality is mostly used by \fB\-\-dump\fP. Don\(cqt use it if you are not sure. -.sp -The \fIvalue\fP can be between quotation marks (e.g., name="This is partition name"). The currently supported fields are: -.sp -\fBstart=\fP\fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -The first non\-assigned sector aligned according to device I/O limits. The default start offset for the first partition is 1 MiB. The offset may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes (KiB, MiB, GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB) then the number is interpreted as offset in bytes. -.RE -.sp -\fBsize=\fP\fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the partition size in sectors. The number may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes (KiB, MiB, GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB), then it\(cqs interpreted as size in bytes and the size is aligned according to device I/O limits. -.RE -.sp -\fBbootable\fP -.RS 4 -Mark the partition as bootable. -.RE -.sp -\fBattrs=\fP\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -Partition attributes, usually GPT partition attribute bits. See \fB\-\-part\-attrs\fP for more details about the GPT\-bits string format. -.RE -.sp -\fBuuid=\fP\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -GPT partition UUID. -.RE -.sp -\fBname=\fP\fIstring\fP -.RS 4 -GPT partition name. -.RE -.sp -\fBtype=\fP\fIcode\fP -.RS 4 -A hexadecimal number (without 0x) for an MBR partition, a GUID for a GPT partition, a shortcut as for unnamed\-fields format or a type name (e.g. type="Linux /usr (x86)"). See above the section about the unnamed\-fields format for more details. For backward compatibility the \fBId=\fP field has the same meaning. -.RE -.SH "EMPTY DISK LABEL" -.sp -\fBsfdisk\fP does not create partition table without partitions by default. The lines with partitions are expected in the script by default. The empty partition table has to be explicitly requested by "label: <name>" script header line without any partitions lines. For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBecho \(aqlabel: gpt\(aq | sfdisk /dev/sdb\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -creates empty GPT partition table. Note that the \fB\-\-append\fP disables this feature. -.SH "BACKING UP THE PARTITION TABLE" -.sp -It is recommended to save the layout of your devices. \fBsfdisk\fP supports two ways. -.sp -Use the \fB\-\-dump\fP option to save a description of the device layout to a text file. The dump format is suitable for later \fBsfdisk\fP input. For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBsfdisk \-\-dump /dev/sda > sda.dump\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -This can later be restored by: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBsfdisk /dev/sda < sda.dump\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -If you want to do a full (binary) backup of all sectors where the partition table is stored, then use the \fB\-\-backup\fP option. It writes the sectors to \fI~/sfdisk\-<device>\-<offset>.bak\fP files. The default name of the backup file can be changed with the \fB\-\-backup\-file\fP option. The backup files contain only raw data from the \fIdevice\fP. Note that the same concept of backup files is used by \fBwipefs\fP(8). For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBsfdisk \-\-backup /dev/sda\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -The GPT header can later be restored by: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -dd if=~/sfdisk\-sda\-0x00000200.bak of=/dev/sda \(rs -seek=$0x00000200 bs=1 conv=notrunc -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -Note that \fBsfdisk\fP since version 2.26 no longer provides the \fB\-I\fP option to restore sectors. \fBdd\fP(1) provides all necessary functionality. -.SH "COLORS" -.sp -Implicit coloring can be disabled by an empty file \fI/etc/terminal\-colors.d/sfdisk.disable\fP. -.sp -See \fBterminal\-colors.d\fP(5) for more details about colorization configuration. The logical color names supported by \fBsfdisk\fP are: -.sp -\fBheader\fP -.RS 4 -The header of the output tables. -.RE -.sp -\fBwarn\fP -.RS 4 -The warning messages. -.RE -.sp -\fBwelcome\fP -.RS 4 -The welcome message. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -SFDISK_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBsfdisk\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBFDISK_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libfdisk debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBSMARTCOLS_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libsmartcols debug output. -.RE -.sp -LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -Since version 2.26 \fBsfdisk\fP no longer provides the \fB\-R\fP or \fB\-\-re\-read\fP option to force the kernel to reread the partition table. Use \fBblockdev \-\-rereadpt\fP instead. -.sp -Since version 2.26 \fBsfdisk\fP does not provide the \fB\-\-DOS\fP, \fB\-\-IBM\fP, \fB\-\-DOS\-extended\fP, \fB\-\-unhide\fP, \fB\-\-show\-extended\fP, \fB\-\-cylinders\fP, \fB\-\-heads\fP, \fB\-\-sectors\fP, \fB\-\-inside\-outer\fP, \fB\-\-not\-inside\-outer\fP options. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.sp -The current \fBsfdisk\fP implementation is based on the original \fBsfdisk\fP from Andries E. Brouwer. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBfdisk\fP(8), -\fBcfdisk\fP(8), -\fBparted\fP(8), -\fBpartprobe\fP(8), -\fBpartx\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBsfdisk\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/showmount.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/showmount.8 index a2f510fb..35818e1b 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/showmount.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/showmount.8 @@ -56,5 +56,10 @@ Because .B showmount sorts and uniqs the output, it is impossible to determine from the output whether a client is mounting the same directory more than once. +.P +.B showmount +works by contacting the server's MNT service directly. NFSv4-only servers have +no need to advertise their exported root filehandles via this method, and may +not expose their MNT service to clients. .SH AUTHOR Rick Sladkey <jrs@world.std.com> diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sm-notify.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sm-notify.8 index bb7f6e0a..addf5d3c 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sm-notify.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sm-notify.8 @@ -190,7 +190,15 @@ by default. After starting, .B sm-notify attempts to set its effective UID and GID to the owner -and group of this directory. +and group of the subdirectory +.B sm +of this directory. After changing the effective ids, +.B sm-notify +only needs to access files in +.B sm +and +.B sm.bak +within the state-directory-path. .TP .BI -v " ipaddr " | " hostname Specifies the network address from which to send reboot notifications, @@ -241,6 +249,24 @@ These have the same effect as the command line options .B v respectively. +An additional value recognized in the +.B [sm-notify] +section is +.BR lift-grace . +By default, +.B sm-notify +will lift lockd's grace period early if it has no hosts to notify. +Some high availability configurations will run one +.B sm-notify +per floating IP address. In these configurations, lifting the +grace period early may prevent clients from reclaiming locks. +.RB "Setting " lift-grace " to " n +will prevent +.B sm-notify +from ending the grace period early. +.B lift-grace +has no corresponding command line option. + The value recognized in the .B [statd] section is diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/smbd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/smbd.8 index 651afd45..73ac6fc9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/smbd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/smbd.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: smbd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "SMBD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "SMBD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ parameter\&. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "DIAGNOSTICS" .PP Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged in a specified log file\&. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/statd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/statd.8 index 023f9965..7441ffde 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/statd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/statd.8 @@ -185,18 +185,16 @@ restarts without the option. .TP .BI "\-n, " "" "\-\-name " ipaddr " | " hostname -Specifies the bind address used for RPC listener sockets. +This string is only used by the +.B sm-notify +command as the source address from which to send reboot notification requests. +.IP The .I ipaddr form can be expressed as either an IPv4 or an IPv6 presentation address. If this option is not specified, .B rpc.statd uses a wildcard address as the transport bind address. -.IP -This string is also passed to the -.B sm-notify -command to be used as the source address from which -to send reboot notification requests. See .BR sm-notify (8) for details. @@ -259,7 +257,15 @@ by default. After starting, .B rpc.statd attempts to set its effective UID and GID to the owner -and group of this directory. +and group of the subdirectory +.B sm +of this directory. After changing the effective ids, +.B rpc.statd +only needs to access files in +.B sm +and +.B sm.bak +within the state-directory-path. .TP .BR -v ", " -V ", " --version Causes diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sulogin.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sulogin.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 50ca068d..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/sulogin.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: sulogin -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SULOGIN" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -sulogin \- single\-user login -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBsulogin\fP [options] [\fItty\fP] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBsulogin\fP is invoked by \fBinit\fP when the system goes into single\-user mode. -.sp -The user is prompted: -.sp -Give root password for system maintenance (or type Control\-D for normal startup): -.sp -If the root account is locked and \fB\-\-force\fP is specified, no password is required. -.sp -\fBsulogin\fP will be connected to the current terminal, or to the optional \fItty\fP device that can be specified on the command line (typically \fI/dev/console\fP). -.sp -When the user exits from the single\-user shell, or presses control\-D at the prompt, the system will continue to boot. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -If the default method of obtaining the root password from the system via \fBgetpwnam\fP(3) fails, then examine \fI/etc/passwd\fP and \fI/etc/shadow\fP to get the password. If these files are damaged or nonexistent, or when root account is locked by \(aq!\(aq or \(aq*\(aq at the begin of the password then \fBsulogin\fP will \fBstart a root shell without asking for a password\fP. -.sp -Only use the \fB\-e\fP option if you are sure the console is physically protected against unauthorized access. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-login\-shell\fP -.RS 4 -Specifying this option causes \fBsulogin\fP to start the shell process as a login shell. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-timeout\fP \fIseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the maximum amount of time to wait for user input. By default, \fBsulogin\fP will wait forever. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -\fBsulogin\fP looks for the environment variable \fBSUSHELL\fP or \fBsushell\fP to determine what shell to start. If the environment variable is not set, it will try to execute root\(cqs shell from \fI/etc/passwd\fP. If that fails, it will fall back to \fI/bin/sh\fP. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBsulogin\fP was written by Miquel van Smoorenburg for sysvinit and later ported to util\-linux by Dave Reisner and Karel Zak. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBsulogin\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/svcgssd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/svcgssd.8 index 15ef4c94..8771c035 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/svcgssd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/svcgssd.8 @@ -61,6 +61,19 @@ this is equivalent to the option. If set to any other value, that is used like the .B -p option. +.TP +.B verbosity +Value which is equivalent to the number of +.BR -v . +.TP +.B rpc-verbosity +Value which is equivalent to the number of +.BR -r . +.TP +.B idmap-verbosity +Value which is equivalent to the number of +.BR -i . + .SH SEE ALSO .BR rpc.gssd(8), diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swaplabel.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swaplabel.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 15255f39..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swaplabel.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: swaplabel -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SWAPLABEL" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -swaplabel \- print or change the label or UUID of a swap area -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBswaplabel\fP [\fB\-L\fP \fIlabel\fP] [\fB\-U\fP \fIUUID\fP] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBswaplabel\fP will display or change the label or UUID of a swap partition located on \fIdevice\fP (or regular file). -.sp -If the optional arguments \fB\-L\fP and \fB\-U\fP are not given, \fBswaplabel\fP will simply display the current swap\-area label and UUID of \fIdevice\fP. -.sp -If an optional argument is present, then \fBswaplabel\fP will change the appropriate value on \fIdevice\fP. These values can also be set during swap creation using \fBmkswap\fP(8). The \fBswaplabel\fP utility allows changing the label or UUID on an actively used swap device. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-label\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a new \fIlabel\fP for the device. Swap partition labels can be at most 16 characters long. If \fIlabel\fP is longer than 16 characters, \fBswaplabel\fP will truncate it and print a warning message. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-uuid\fP \fIUUID\fP -.RS 4 -Specify a new \fIUUID\fP for the device. The \fIUUID\fP must be in the standard 8\-4\-4\-4\-12 character format, such as is output by \fBuuidgen\fP(1). -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables libblkid debug output. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -\fBswaplabel\fP was written by \c -.MTO "jborden\(atbluehost.com" "Jason Borden" "" -and -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "." -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBuuidgen\fP(1), -\fBmkswap\fP(8), -\fBswapon\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBswaplabel\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swapon.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swapon.8 deleted file mode 100644 index d39fe5c0..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/swapon.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,252 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: swapon -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SWAPON" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -swapon, swapoff \- enable/disable devices and files for paging and swapping -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBswapon\fP [options] [\fIspecialfile\fP...] -.sp -\fBswapoff\fP [\fB\-va\fP] [\fIspecialfile\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBswapon\fP is used to specify devices on which paging and swapping are to take place. -.sp -The device or file used is given by the \fIspecialfile\fP parameter. It may be of the form \fB\-L\fP \fIlabel\fP or \fB\-U\fP \fIuuid\fP to indicate a device by label or uuid. -.sp -Calls to \fBswapon\fP normally occur in the system boot scripts making all swap devices available, so that the paging and swapping activity is interleaved across several devices and files. -.sp -\fBswapoff\fP disables swapping on the specified devices and files. When the \fB\-a\fP flag is given, swapping is disabled on all known swap devices and files (as found in \fI/proc/swaps\fP or \fI/etc/fstab\fP). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -All devices marked as "swap" in \fI/etc/fstab\fP are made available, except for those with the "noauto" option. Devices that are already being used as swap are silently skipped. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-discard\fP[\fB=\fP\fIpolicy\fP] -.RS 4 -Enable swap discards, if the swap backing device supports the discard or trim operation. This may improve performance on some Solid State Devices, but often it does not. The option allows one to select between two available swap discard policies: -.sp -\fB\-\-discard=once\fP -.RS 4 -to perform a single\-time discard operation for the whole swap area at swapon; or -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-discard=pages\fP -.RS 4 -to asynchronously discard freed swap pages before they are available for reuse. -.RE -.sp -If no policy is selected, the default behavior is to enable both discard types. The \fI/etc/fstab\fP mount options \fBdiscard\fP, \fBdiscard=once\fP, or \fBdiscard=pages\fP may also be used to enable discard flags. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-ifexists\fP -.RS 4 -Silently skip devices that do not exist. The \fI/etc/fstab\fP mount option \fBnofail\fP may also be used to skip non\-existing device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-fixpgsz\fP -.RS 4 -Reinitialize (exec mkswap) the swap space if its page size does not match that of the current running kernel. \fBmkswap\fP(8) initializes the whole device and does not check for bad blocks. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-L\fP \fIlabel\fP -.RS 4 -Use the partition that has the specified \fIlabel\fP. (For this, access to \fI/proc/partitions\fP is needed.) -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-options\fP \fIopts\fP -.RS 4 -Specify swap options by an fstab\-compatible comma\-separated string. For example: -.sp -\fBswapon \-o pri=1,discard=pages,nofail /dev/sda2\fP -.sp -The \fIopts\fP string is evaluated last and overrides all other command line options. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-priority\fP \fIpriority\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the priority of the swap device. \fIpriority\fP is a value between \-1 and 32767. Higher numbers indicate higher priority. See \fBswapon\fP(2) for a full description of swap priorities. Add \fBpri=\fP\fIvalue\fP to the option field of \fI/etc/fstab\fP for use with \fBswapon \-a\fP. When no priority is defined, it defaults to \-1. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-summary\fP -.RS 4 -Display swap usage summary by device. Equivalent to \fBcat /proc/swaps\fP. This output format is DEPRECATED in favour of \fB\-\-show\fP that provides better control on output data. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-show\fP[\fB=\fP\fIcolumn\fP...] -.RS 4 -Display a definable table of swap areas. See the \fB\-\-help\fP output for a list of available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print headings when displaying \fB\-\-show\fP output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Display \fB\-\-show\fP output without aligning table columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-bytes\fP -.RS 4 -Display swap size in bytes in \fB\-\-show\fP output instead of in user\-friendly units. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-U\fP \fIuuid\fP -.RS 4 -Use the partition that has the specified \fIuuid\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Be verbose. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBswapoff\fP has the following exit status values since v2.36: -.sp -\fB0\fP -.RS 4 -success -.RE -.sp -\fB2\fP -.RS 4 -system has insufficient memory to stop swapping (OOM) -.RE -.sp -\fB4\fP -.RS 4 -swapoff syscall failed for another reason -.RE -.sp -\fB8\fP -.RS 4 -non\-swapoff syscall system error (out of memory, ...) -.RE -.sp -\fB16\fP -.RS 4 -usage or syntax error -.RE -.sp -\fB32\fP -.RS 4 -all swapoff failed on \fB\-\-all\fP -.RE -.sp -\fB64\fP -.RS 4 -some swapoff succeeded on \fB\-\-all\fP -.RE -.sp -The command \fBswapoff \-\-all\fP returns 0 (all succeeded), 32 (all failed), or 64 (some failed, some succeeded). -.sp -+ -The old versions before v2.36 has no documented exit status, 0 means success in all versions. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibmount\fP debug output. -.RE -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibblkid\fP debug output. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/dev/sd??\fP -.RS 4 -standard paging devices -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/fstab\fP -.RS 4 -ascii filesystem description table -.RE -.SH "NOTES" -.SS "Files with holes" -.sp -The swap file implementation in the kernel expects to be able to write to the file directly, without the assistance of the filesystem. This is a problem on files with holes or on copy\-on\-write files on filesystems like Btrfs. -.sp -Commands like \fBcp\fP(1) or \fBtruncate\fP(1) create files with holes. These files will be rejected by \fBswapon\fP. -.sp -Preallocated files created by \fBfallocate\fP(1) may be interpreted as files with holes too depending of the filesystem. Preallocated swap files are supported on XFS since Linux 4.18. -.sp -The most portable solution to create a swap file is to use \fBdd\fP(1) and \fI/dev/zero\fP. -.SS "Btrfs" -.sp -Swap files on Btrfs are supported since Linux 5.0 on files with nocow attribute. See the \fBbtrfs\fP(5) manual page for more details. -.SS "NFS" -.sp -Swap over \fBNFS\fP may not work. -.SS "Suspend" -.sp -\fBswapon\fP automatically detects and rewrites a swap space signature with old software suspend data (e.g., S1SUSPEND, S2SUSPEND, ...). The problem is that if we don\(cqt do it, then we get data corruption the next time an attempt at unsuspending is made. -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -The \fBswapon\fP command appeared in 4.0BSD. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBswapoff\fP(2), -\fBswapon\fP(2), -\fBfstab\fP(5), -\fBinit\fP(8), -\fBfallocate\fP(1), -\fBmkswap\fP(8), -\fBmount\fP(8), -\fBrc\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBswapon\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/switch_root.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/switch_root.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 0611125e..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/switch_root.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: switch_root -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "SWITCH_ROOT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -switch_root \- switch to another filesystem as the root of the mount tree -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBswitch_root\fP [\fB\-hV\fP] -.sp -\fBswitch_root\fP \fInewroot init\fP [\fIarg\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBswitch_root\fP moves already mounted \fI/proc\fP, \fI/dev\fP, \fI/sys\fP and \fI/run\fP to \fInewroot\fP and makes \fInewroot\fP the new root filesystem and starts \fIinit\fP process. -.sp -\fBWARNING: switch_root removes recursively all files and directories on the current root filesystem.\fP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-h, \-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V, \-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBswitch_root\fP returns 0 on success and 1 on failure. -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -\fBswitch_root\fP will fail to function if \fInewroot\fP is not the root of a mount. If you want to switch root into a directory that does not meet this requirement then you can first use a bind\-mounting trick to turn any directory into a mount point: -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C -mount \-\-bind $DIR $DIR -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "pjones\(atredhat.com" "Peter Jones" "," -.MTO "katzj\(atredhat.com" "Jeremy Katz" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBchroot\fP(2), -\fBinit\fP(8), -\fBmkinitrd\fP(8), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBswitch_root\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-coredump.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-coredump.8 index bc90dc39..64484c0e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-coredump.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-coredump.8 @@ -226,6 +226,13 @@ When the crashed process was in container, those are the units names .PP \fICOREDUMP_CGROUP=\fR .RS 4 +The primary cgroup of the unit of the crashed process\&. +.sp +When the crashed process was in a container, this is the full path, as seen outside of the container\&. +.RE +.PP +\fICOREDUMP_PROC_CGROUP=\fR +.RS 4 Control group information in the format used in /proc/self/cgroup\&. On systems with the unified cgroup hierarchy, this is a single path prefixed with "0::", and multiple paths prefixed with controller numbers on legacy systems\&. @@ -233,9 +240,9 @@ Control group information in the format used in When the crashed process was in a container, this is the full path, as seen outside of the container\&. .RE .PP -\fICOREDUMP_OWNER_UID=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_USER_UNIT=\fR +\fICOREDUMP_OWNER_UID=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_USER_UNIT=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_SESSION=\fR .RS 4 -The numerical UID of the user owning the login session or systemd user unit of the crashed process, and the user manager unit\&. Both fields are only present for user processes\&. +The numerical UID of the user owning the login session or systemd user unit of the crashed process, the user manager unit, and the sesion identifier\&. All three fields are only present for user processes\&. .sp When the crashed process was in container, those are the values \fIoutside\fR, in the main system\&. @@ -294,25 +301,28 @@ symlink\&. When the crashed process is in a container, that path is relative to the root of the container\*(Aqs mount namespace\&. .RE .PP -\fICOREDUMP_COMM=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_STATUS=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_MAPS=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_LIMITS=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_MOUNTINFO=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_ENVIRON=\fR +\fICOREDUMP_CMDLINE=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_COMM=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_ENVIRON=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_AUXV=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_LIMITS=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_MAPS=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_MOUNTINFO=\fR, \fICOREDUMP_PROC_STATUS=\fR .RS 4 Fields that map the per\-process entries in the /proc/ filesystem: +/proc/\fIpid\fR/cmdline +(the command line of the crashed process), /proc/\fIpid\fR/comm (the command name associated with the process), -/proc/\fIpid\fR/exe -(the filename of the executed command), -/proc/\fIpid\fR/status -(various metadata about the process), -/proc/\fIpid\fR/maps -(memory regions visible to the process and their access permissions), +/proc/\fIpid\fR/environ +(the environment block of the crashed process), +/proc/\fIpid\fR/auxv +(the auxiliary vector of the crashed process, see +\fBgetauxval\fR(3)), /proc/\fIpid\fR/limits (the soft and hard resource limits), +/proc/\fIpid\fR/maps +(memory regions visible to the process and their access permissions), /proc/\fIpid\fR/mountinfo (mount points in the process\*(Aqs mount namespace), -/proc/\fIpid\fR/environ -(the environment block of the crashed process)\&. +/proc/\fIpid\fR/status +(various metadata about the process)\&. .sp See \fBproc\fR(5) diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-sysctl.service.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-sysctl.service.8 index 108c38c3..a4e353d9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-sysctl.service.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-sysctl.service.8 @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Print a short version string and exit\&. supports the service credentials logic as implemented by \fIImportCredential=\fR/\fILoadCredential=\fR/\fISetCredential=\fR (see -\fBsystemd.exec\fR(1) +\fBsystemd.exec\fR(5) for details)\&. The following credentials are used when passed in: .PP \fIsysctl\&.extra\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 index ffbc7615..84bc8086 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/systemd-tmpfiles.8 @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ systemd\-tmpfiles \-\-remove \-\-create supports the service credentials logic as implemented by \fIImportCredential=\fR/\fILoadCredential=\fR/\fISetCredential=\fR (see -\fBsystemd.exec\fR(1) +\fBsystemd.exec\fR(5) for details)\&. The following credentials are used when passed in: .PP \fItmpfiles\&.extra\fR diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/tunelp.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/tunelp.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 0fba0ed8..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/tunelp.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: tunelp -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-01-06 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "TUNELP" "8" "2022-01-06" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -tunelp \- set various parameters for the lp device -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBtunelp\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBtunelp\fP sets several parameters for the /dev/lp\fI?\fP devices, for better performance (or for any performance at all, if your printer won\(cqt work without it...) Without parameters, it tells whether the device is using interrupts, and if so, which one. With parameters, it sets the device characteristics accordingly. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-irq\fP \fIargument\fP -.RS 4 -specifies the IRQ to use for the parallel port in question. If this is set to something non\-zero, \fB\-t\fP and \fB\-c\fP have no effect. If your port does not use interrupts, this option will make printing stop. The command \fBtunelp \-i 0\fP restores non\-interrupt driven (polling) action, and your printer should work again. If your parallel port does support interrupts, interrupt\-driven printing should be somewhat faster and efficient, and will probably be desirable. -.sp -\fBNOTE\fP: This option will have no effect with kernel 2.1.131 or later since the irq is handled by the parport driver. You can change the parport irq for example via \fI/proc/parport/*/irq\fP. Read \fI/usr/src/linux/Documentation/admin\-guide/parport.rst\fP for more details on parport. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP \fImilliseconds\fP -.RS 4 -is the amount of time in jiffies that the driver waits if the printer doesn\(cqt take a character for the number of tries dictated by the \fB\-c\fP parameter. 10 is the default value. If you want fastest possible printing, and don\(cqt care about system load, you may set this to 0. If you don\(cqt care how fast your printer goes, or are printing text on a slow printer with a buffer, then 500 (5 seconds) should be fine, and will give you very low system load. This value generally should be lower for printing graphics than text, by a factor of approximately 10, for best performance. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-chars\fP \fIcharacters\fP -.RS 4 -is the number of times to try to output a character to the printer before sleeping for \fB\-t\fP \fITIME\fP. It is the number of times around a loop that tries to send a character to the printer. 120 appears to be a good value for most printers in polling mode. 1000 is the default, because there are some printers that become jerky otherwise, but you \fImust\fP set this to \(aq1\(aq to handle the maximal CPU efficiency if you are using interrupts. If you have a very fast printer, a value of 10 might make more sense even if in polling mode. If you have a \fIreally\fP old printer, you can increase this further. -.sp -Setting \fB\-t\fP \fITIME\fP to 0 is equivalent to setting \fB\-c\fP \fICHARS\fP to infinity. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wait\fP \fImilliseconds\fP -.RS 4 -is the number of usec we wait while playing with the strobe signal. While most printers appear to be able to deal with an extremely short strobe, some printers demand a longer one. Increasing this from the default 1 may make it possible to print with those printers. This may also make it possible to use longer cables. It\(cqs also possible to decrease this value to 0 if your printer is fast enough or your machine is slow enough. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-abort\fP \fI<on|off>\fP -.RS 4 -This is whether to abort on printer error \- the default is not to. If you are sitting at your computer, you probably want to be able to see an error and fix it, and have the printer go on printing. On the other hand, if you aren\(cqt, you might rather that your printer spooler find out that the printer isn\(cqt ready, quit trying, and send you mail about it. The choice is yours. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-check\-status\fP \fI<on|off>\fP -.RS 4 -This option is much like \fB\-a\fP. It makes any \fBopen\fP(2) of this device check to see that the device is on\-line and not reporting any out of paper or other errors. This is the correct setting for most versions of \fBlpd\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-careful\fP \fI<on|off>\fP -.RS 4 -This option adds extra ("careful") error checking. When this option is on, the printer driver will ensure that the printer is on\-line and not reporting any out of paper or other errors before sending data. This is particularly useful for printers that normally appear to accept data when turned off. -.sp -\fBNOTE\fP: This option is obsolete because it\(cqs the default in 2.1.131 kernel or later. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-status\fP -.RS 4 -This option returns the current printer status, both as a decimal number from 0..255, and as a list of active flags. When this option is specified, \fB\-q\fP off, turning off the display of the current IRQ, is implied. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-reset\fP -.RS 4 -This option resets the port. It requires a Linux kernel version of 1.1.80 or later. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-print\-irq\fP \fI<on|off>\fP -.RS 4 -This option sets printing the display of the current IRQ setting. -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/dev/lp?\fP, -\fI/proc/parport/*/*\fP -.SH "NOTES" -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-C\fP, and \fB\-s\fP all require a Linux kernel version of 1.1.76 or later. -.sp -\fB\-C\fP requires a Linux version prior to 2.1.131. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBtunelp\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/umount.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/umount.8 deleted file mode 100644 index bce55254..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/umount.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: umount -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "UMOUNT" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -umount \- unmount filesystems -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBumount\fP \fB\-a\fP [\fB\-dflnrv\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fIfstype\fP] [\fB\-O\fP \fIoption\fP...] -.sp -\fBumount\fP [\fB\-dflnrv\fP] {\fIdirectory\fP|\fIdevice\fP} -.sp -\fBumount\fP \fB\-h\fP|\fB\-V\fP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The \fBumount\fP command detaches the mentioned filesystem(s) from the file hierarchy. A filesystem is specified by giving the directory where it has been mounted. Giving the special device on which the filesystem lives may also work, but is obsolete, mainly because it will fail in case this device was mounted on more than one directory. -.sp -Note that a filesystem cannot be unmounted when it is \(aqbusy\(aq \- for example, when there are open files on it, or when some process has its working directory there, or when a swap file on it is in use. The offending process could even be \fBumount\fP itself \- it opens libc, and libc in its turn may open for example locale files. A lazy unmount avoids this problem, but it may introduce other issues. See \fB\-\-lazy\fP description below. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -All of the filesystems described in \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP (or in deprecated \fI/etc/mtab\fP) are unmounted, except the proc, devfs, devpts, sysfs, rpc_pipefs and nfsd filesystems. This list of the filesystems may be replaced by \fB\-\-types\fP umount option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-A\fP, \fB\-\-all\-targets\fP -.RS 4 -Unmount all mountpoints in the current mount namespace for the specified filesystem. The filesystem can be specified by one of the mountpoints or the device name (or UUID, etc.). When this option is used together with \fB\-\-recursive\fP, then all nested mounts within the filesystem are recursively unmounted. This option is only supported on systems where \fI/etc/mtab\fP is a symlink to \fI/proc/mounts\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-no\-canonicalize\fP -.RS 4 -Do not canonicalize paths. The paths canonicalization is based on \fBstat\fP(2) and \fBreadlink\fP(2) system calls. These system calls may hang in some cases (for example on NFS if server is not available). The option has to be used with canonical path to the mount point. -.sp -This option is silently ignored by \fBumount\fP for non\-root users. -.sp -For more details about this option see the \fBmount\fP(8) man page. Note that \fBumount\fP does not pass this option to the \fB/sbin/umount.\fP\fItype\fP helpers. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-detach\-loop\fP -.RS 4 -When the unmounted device was a loop device, also free this loop device. This option is unnecessary for devices initialized by \fBmount\fP(8), in this case "autoclear" functionality is enabled by default. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-fake\fP -.RS 4 -Causes everything to be done except for the actual system call or umount helper execution; this \(aqfakes\(aq unmounting the filesystem. It can be used to remove entries from the deprecated \fI/etc/mtab\fP that were unmounted earlier with the \fB\-n\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Force an unmount (in case of an unreachable NFS system). -.sp -Note that this option does not guarantee that umount command does not hang. It\(cqs strongly recommended to use absolute paths without symlinks to avoid unwanted readlink and stat system calls on unreachable NFS in \fBumount\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-internal\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Do not call the \fB/sbin/umount.\fP\fIfilesystem\fP helper even if it exists. By default such a helper program is called if it exists. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-lazy\fP -.RS 4 -Lazy unmount. Detach the filesystem from the file hierarchy now, and clean up all references to this filesystem as soon as it is not busy anymore. -.sp -A system reboot would be expected in near future if you\(cqre going to use this option for network filesystem or local filesystem with submounts. The recommended use\-case for \fBumount \-l\fP is to prevent hangs on shutdown due to an unreachable network share where a normal umount will hang due to a downed server or a network partition. Remounts of the share will not be possible. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-N\fP, \fB\-\-namespace\fP \fIns\fP -.RS 4 -Perform umount in the mount namespace specified by \fIns\fP. \fIns\fP is either PID of process running in that namespace or special file representing that namespace. -.sp -\fBumount\fP switches to the namespace when it reads \fI/etc/fstab\fP, writes \fI/etc/mtab\fP (or writes to \fI/run/mount\fP) and calls \fBumount\fP(2) system call, otherwise it runs in the original namespace. It means that the target mount namespace does not have to contain any libraries or other requirements necessary to execute \fBumount\fP(2) command. -.sp -See \fBmount_namespaces\fP(7) for more information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-mtab\fP -.RS 4 -Unmount without writing in \fI/etc/mtab\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-test\-opts\fP \fIoption\fP... -.RS 4 -Unmount only the filesystems that have the specified option set in \fI/etc/fstab\fP. More than one option may be specified in a comma\-separated list. Each option can be prefixed with \fBno\fP to indicate that no action should be taken for this option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress "not mounted" error messages. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-recursive\fP -.RS 4 -Recursively unmount each specified directory. Recursion for each directory will stop if any unmount operation in the chain fails for any reason. The relationship between mountpoints is determined by \fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP entries. The filesystem must be specified by mountpoint path; a recursive unmount by device name (or UUID) is unsupported. Since version 2.37 it umounts also all over\-mounted filesystems (more filesystems on the same mountpoint). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-read\-only\fP -.RS 4 -When an unmount fails, try to remount the filesystem read\-only. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-types\fP \fItype\fP... -.RS 4 -Indicate that the actions should only be taken on filesystems of the specified \fItype\fP. More than one type may be specified in a comma\-separated list. The list of filesystem types can be prefixed with \fBno\fP to indicate that no action should be taken for all of the mentioned types. Note that \fBumount\fP reads information about mounted filesystems from kernel (\fI/proc/mounts\fP) and filesystem names may be different than filesystem names used in the \fI/etc/fstab\fP (e.g., "nfs4" vs. "nfs"). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP -.RS 4 -Verbose mode. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "NON\-SUPERUSER UMOUNTS" -.sp -Normally, only the superuser can umount filesystems. However, when \fIfstab\fP contains the \fBuser\fP option on a line, anybody can umount the corresponding filesystem. For more details see \fBmount\fP(8) man page. -.sp -Since version 2.34 the \fBumount\fP command can be used to perform umount operation also for fuse filesystems if kernel mount table contains user\(cqs ID. In this case fstab \fBuser=\fP mount option is not required. -.sp -Since version 2.35 \fBumount\fP command does not exit when user permissions are inadequate by internal libmount security rules. It drops suid permissions and continue as regular non\-root user. This can be used to support use\-cases where root permissions are not necessary (e.g., fuse filesystems, user namespaces, etc). -.SH "LOOP DEVICE" -.sp -The \fBumount\fP command will automatically detach loop device previously initialized by \fBmount\fP(8) command independently of \fI/etc/mtab\fP. -.sp -In this case the device is initialized with "autoclear" flag (see \fBlosetup\fP(8) output for more details), otherwise it\(cqs necessary to use the option \fB\-\-detach\-loop\fP or call \fBlosetup \-d <device>\fP. The autoclear feature is supported since Linux 2.6.25. -.SH "EXTERNAL HELPERS" -.sp -The syntax of external unmount helpers is: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBumount.\fP\fIsuffix\fP {\fIdirectory\fP|\fIdevice\fP} [\fB\-flnrv\fP] [\fB\-N\fP \fInamespace\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP.\fIsubtype\fP] -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -where \fIsuffix\fP is the filesystem type (or the value from a \fBuhelper=\fP or \fBhelper=\fP marker in the mtab file). The \fB\-t\fP option can be used for filesystems that have subtype support. For example: -.RS 3 -.ll -.6i -.sp -\fBumount.fuse \-t fuse.sshfs\fP -.br -.RE -.ll -.sp -A \fBuhelper=\fP\fIsomething\fP marker (unprivileged helper) can appear in the \fI/etc/mtab\fP file when ordinary users need to be able to unmount a mountpoint that is not defined in \fI/etc/fstab\fP (for example for a device that was mounted by \fBudisks\fP(1)). -.sp -A \fBhelper=\fP\fItype\fP marker in the mtab file will redirect all unmount requests to the \fB/sbin/umount.\fP\fItype\fP helper independently of UID. -.sp -Note that \fI/etc/mtab\fP is currently deprecated and \fBhelper=\fP and other userspace mount options are maintained by libmount. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBMOUNT_FSTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the fstab file (ignored for suid) -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_MTAB=<path> -.RS 4 -overrides the default location of the mtab file (ignored for suid) -.RE -.sp -LIBMOUNT_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibmount\fP debug output -.RE -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/etc/mtab\fP -.RS 4 -table of mounted filesystems (deprecated and usually replaced by symlink to \fI/proc/mounts\fP) -.RE -.sp -\fI/etc/fstab\fP -.RS 4 -table of known filesystems -.RE -.sp -\fI/proc/self/mountinfo\fP -.RS 4 -table of mounted filesystems generated by kernel. -.RE -.SH "HISTORY" -.sp -A \fBumount\fP command appeared in Version 6 AT&T UNIX. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBumount\fP(2), -\fBlosetup\fP(8), -\fBmount_namespaces\fP(7), -\fBmount\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBumount\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/uuidd.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/uuidd.8 index 554f0416..0e209deb 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/uuidd.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/uuidd.8 @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ '\" t .\" Title: uuidd .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 +.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.20 +.\" Date: 2023-11-21 .\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 +.\" Source: util-linux 2.39.3 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "UUIDD" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" +.TH "UUIDD" "8" "2023-11-21" "util\-linux 2.39.3" "System Administration" .ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq .el .ds Aq ' .ss \n[.ss] 0 @@ -37,9 +37,18 @@ uuidd \- UUID generation daemon The \fBuuidd\fP daemon is used by the UUID library to generate universally unique identifiers (UUIDs), especially time\-based UUIDs, in a secure and guaranteed\-unique fashion, even in the face of large numbers of threads running on different CPUs trying to grab UUIDs. .SH "OPTIONS" .sp +\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-cont\-clock\fP[=\fItime\fP] +.RS 4 +Activate continuous clock handling for time based UUIDs. \fBuuidd\fP could use all possible clock values, beginning with the daemon\(cqs start time. The optional argument can be used to set a value for the max_clock_offset. This gurantees, that a clock value of a UUID will always be within the range of the max_clock_offset. +.sp +The option \*(Aq\-C\*(Aq or \*(Aq\-\-cont\-clock\*(Aq enables the feature with a default max_clock_offset of 2 hours. +.sp +The option \*(Aq\-C<NUM>[hd]\*(Aq or \*(Aq\-\-cont\-clock=<NUM>[hd]\*(Aq enables the feature with a max_clock_offset of NUM seconds. In case of an appended h or d, the NUM value is read in hours or days. The minimum value is 60 seconds, the maximum value is 365 days. +.RE +.sp \fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-debug\fP .RS 4 -Run uuidd in debugging mode. This prevents uuidd from running as a daemon. +Run \fBuuidd\fP in debugging mode. This prevents \fBuuidd\fP from running as a daemon. .RE .sp \fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-no\-fork\fP @@ -97,14 +106,14 @@ Make \fBuuidd\fP exit after \fInumber\fP seconds of inactivity. Test \fBuuidd\fP by trying to connect to a running uuidd daemon and request it to return a time\-based UUID. .RE .sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP .RS 4 -Output version information and exit. +Display help text and exit. .RE .sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP .RS 4 -Display help screen and exit. +Print version and exit. .RE .SH "EXAMPLE" .sp @@ -130,7 +139,7 @@ The \fBuuidd\fP daemon was written by \c .SH "REPORTING BUGS" .sp For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." +.URL "https://github.com/util\-linux/util\-linux/issues" "" "." .SH "AVAILABILITY" .sp The \fBuuidd\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 index 0f2f2044..bc3ca665 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_tdb.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_acl_tdb .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_ACL_TDB" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_ACL_TDB" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 index 721b7792..eb16a048 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_acl_xattr.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_acl_xattr .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_ACL_XATTR" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_ACL_XATTR" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 index f06a1691..b7a5e72a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_fork.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_aio_fork .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_AIO_FORK" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_AIO_FORK" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Straight forward use: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 index f80dfd26..e138d5cf 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_aio_pthread.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_aio_pthread .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_AIO_PTHREAD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_AIO_PTHREAD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ The default is \*(Aqno\*(Aq\&. .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_audit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_audit.8 index c025edf6..3acb0be0 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_AUDIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_AUDIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Log operations on all shares using the LOCAL1 facility and NOTICE priority: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 index 774bea1d..4d90b334 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_btrfs.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_btrfs .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_BTRFS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_BTRFS" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ to Windows Explorer as file / directory "previous versions"\&. .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cacheprime.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cacheprime.8 index a245df74..06403a6e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cacheprime.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cacheprime.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_cacheprime .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CACHEPRIME" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CACHEPRIME" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ cacheprime is not a substitute for a general\-purpose readahead mechanism\&. It is intended for use only in very specific environments where disk operations must be aligned and sized to known values (as much as that is possible)\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cap.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cap.8 index 46ae4f96..b2754ff7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cap.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_cap.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_cap .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CAP" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CAP" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ On a system using GNU libiconv, use CAP encoding to support users in the Shift_J .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_catia.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_catia.8 index c38d369f..9239379d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_catia.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_catia.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_catia .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CATIA" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CATIA" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_commit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_commit.8 index bd8fb4a0..d0e0553a 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_commit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_commit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_commit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_COMMIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_COMMIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ commit may reduce performance\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 index d547abae..1e65ffe7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_crossrename.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_crossrename .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_CROSSRENAME" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_CROSSRENAME" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ To add server\-side cross\-device renames inside of a share for all files sized .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 index fd84d109..ab832d2d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_default_quota.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_default_quota .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_DEFAULT_QUOTA" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_DEFAULT_QUOTA" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Store the default quota record in the quota record for the user with ID 65535 an .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 index 96d9d41d..10806510 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_dirsort.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_dirsort .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_DIRSORT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_DIRSORT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Sort directories for all shares: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 index df5577cc..01f4c8da 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_expand_msdfs.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_expand_msdfs .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_EXPAND_MSDFS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_EXPAND_MSDFS" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ With this module, the link target is not directly a server and share, but this m With this, clients from network 192\&.168\&.234/24 are redirected to host local\&.samba\&.org, clients from 192\&.168/16 are redirected to remote\&.samba\&.org and all other clients go to default\&.samba\&.org\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 index 0649823b..412c84d6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_extd_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_extd_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_EXTD_AUDIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_EXTD_AUDIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ is identical to This module is stackable\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 index c1fa4855..c99f2ae7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fake_perms.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_fake_perms .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FAKE_PERMS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FAKE_PERMS" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ This module is stackable\&. .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fileid.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fileid.8 index ef6fcd94..4a7de509 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fileid.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fileid.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_fileid .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FILEID" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FILEID" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ module in order avoid load on heavily contended (most likely read\-only) inodes\ .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fruit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fruit.8 index 1253f403..6f952818 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fruit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_fruit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_fruit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FRUIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FRUIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 index 5487c796..8d7e7da4 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_full_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_full_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_FULL_AUDIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_FULL_AUDIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Log file and directory open operations on the [records] share using the LOCAL7 f .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 index 53606b37..6dd88be9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_glusterfs_fuse.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_glusterfs_fuse .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_GLUSTERFS_FUSE" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_GLUSTERFS_FUSE" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ module\&. This module does currently have no further options\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 index 2ce002a9..d8361610 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_io_uring.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_io_uring .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_IO_URING" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_IO_URING" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ The default is \*(Aqno\*(Aq\&. \fBio_uring_setup\fR(2)\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 index 9801f814..a6909249 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_linux_xfs_sgid.8 @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ '\" t -.\" Title: vfs_syncops +.\" Title: vfs_linux_xfs_sgid .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SYNCOPS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_LINUX_XFS_SGID" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ if the parent directory had the SGID bit set\&. This module is stackable\&. .SH "EXAMPLES" .PP -Add syncops functionality for [share]: +Add linux_xfs_sgid functionality for [share]: .sp .if n \{\ .RS 4 @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Add syncops functionality for [share]: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 index 86141c4c..8ea6d189 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_media_harmony.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_media_harmony .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_MEDIA_HARMONY" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_MEDIA_HARMONY" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ vfs_media_harmony is designed to work with Avid editing applications that look in the Avid MediaFiles or OMFI MediaFiles directories for media\&. It is not designed to work as expected in all circumstances for general use\&. For example: It is possible to open a client\-specific file such as msmMMOB\&.mdb_192\&.168\&.1\&.10_userx even though it doesn\*(Aqt show up in a directory listing\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_offline.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_offline.8 index c6300816..621667d7 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_offline.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_offline.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_offline .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_OFFLINE" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_OFFLINE" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Mark all files in a share as offline: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_preopen.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_preopen.8 index 3f9cc524..258d0a4c 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_preopen.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_preopen.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_preopen .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_PREOPEN" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_PREOPEN" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ in the \*(Aq\m[blue]\fBlog level\fR\m[]\*(Aq section for special handling of the .RE .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readahead.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readahead.8 index 8e618850..606f2e6f 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readahead.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readahead.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_readahead .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_READAHEAD" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_READAHEAD" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ G .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readonly.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readonly.8 index 727c516d..34476fa5 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readonly.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_readonly.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_readonly .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_READONLY" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_READONLY" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Mark the [backup] share as read only during business hours: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_recycle.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_recycle.8 index bf49f483..76a11415 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_recycle.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_recycle.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_recycle .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_RECYCLE" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_RECYCLE" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ instead of deleting them: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 index 4448513c..5e4583a1 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_shadow_copy .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ vfs_shadow_copy is designed to be an end\-user tool only\&. It does not replace or enhance your backup and archival solutions and should in no way be considered as such\&. Additionally, if you need version control, implement a version control system\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 index 4b1adaa1..c6822cf9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shadow_copy2.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_shadow_copy2 .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY2" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SHADOW_COPY2" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ vfs_shadow_copy2 is designed to be an end\-user tool only\&. It does not replace or enhance your backup and archival solutions and should in no way be considered as such\&. Additionally, if you need version control, implement a version control system\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 index 3e7f4cba..f9d6e5c0 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_shell_snap.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_shell_snap .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SHELL_SNAP" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SHELL_SNAP" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Samba\*(Aqs FSRVP server must be configured in the [global] section: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_snapper.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_snapper.8 index a4a9e7fa..2a4a5ab6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_snapper.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_snapper.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_snapper .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SNAPPER" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SNAPPER" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Remote snapshot creation and deletion is only permitted by Samba for Active Dire The DiskShadow\&.exe FSRVP client initially authenticates as the Active Directory computer account\&. This account must therefore be granted the same permissions as the user account issuing the snapshot creation and deletion requests\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 index 4bba707a..b80910d9 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_depot.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_streams_depot .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_STREAMS_DEPOT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_STREAMS_DEPOT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 index cf963dc1..ec379498 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_streams_xattr.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_streams_xattr .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_STREAMS_XATTR" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_STREAMS_XATTR" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_syncops.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_syncops.8 index 84090390..46e30faa 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_syncops.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_syncops.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_syncops .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_SYNCOPS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_SYNCOPS" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Add syncops functionality for [share]: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 index dbc189cc..7fe22524 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_time_audit.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_time_audit .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_TIME_AUDIT" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_TIME_AUDIT" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ This would log VFS calls that take longer than 3 seconds: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 index 265756df..e68ed098 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_unityed_media.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_unityed_media .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_UNITYED_MEDIA" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_UNITYED_MEDIA" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Enable unityed_media for Mac and Windows clients: .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 index b54e5739..416b50b4 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_virusfilter.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_virusfilter .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools .\" Source: Samba 4.8 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_VIRUSFILTER" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.8" "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_VIRUSFILTER" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.8" "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 index fdf5a850..8e7fa553 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_widelinks.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_widelinks .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_WIDELINKS" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_WIDELINKS" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ This module is stackable\&. No examples listed\&. This module is implicitly loaded by smbd as needed\&. .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_worm.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_worm.8 index 39638652..02d2ef1d 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_worm.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_worm.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_worm .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_WORM" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_WORM" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Deny the write access to files and folders, which are older than five minutes (3 .\} .SH "VERSION" .PP -This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&.e4c431e307f150600\&.1\&.23SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. +This man page is part of version 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&.57620c4f7e150600\&.1\&.30SUSE\-oS15\&.0\-x86_64 of the Samba suite\&. .SH "AUTHOR" .PP The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 index b15d90b0..cc486ed6 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/vfs_xattr_tdb.8 @@ -2,12 +2,12 @@ .\" Title: vfs_xattr_tdb .\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] .\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets vsnapshot <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 10/23/2023 +.\" Date: 02/20/2024 .\" Manual: System Administration tools -.\" Source: Samba 4.19.2-git.328.e4c431e307f150600.1.23SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 +.\" Source: Samba 4.19.5-git.342.57620c4f7e150600.1.30SUSE-oS15.0-x86_64 .\" Language: English .\" -.TH "VFS_XATTR_TDB" "8" "10/23/2023" "Samba 4\&.19\&.2\-git\&.328\&." "System Administration tools" +.TH "VFS_XATTR_TDB" "8" "02/20/2024" "Samba 4\&.19\&.5\-git\&.342\&." "System Administration tools" .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- .\" * Define some portability stuff .\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wdctl.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wdctl.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 4131c558..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wdctl.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,114 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: wdctl -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "WDCTL" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -wdctl \- show hardware watchdog status -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBwdctl\fP [options] [\fIdevice\fP...] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -Show hardware watchdog status. The default device is \fI/dev/watchdog\fP. If more than one device is specified then the output is separated by one blank line. -.sp -If the device is already used or user has no permissions to read from the device, then \fBwdctl\fP reads data from sysfs. In this case information about supported features (flags) might be missing. -.sp -Note that the number of supported watchdog features is hardware specific. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-flags\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Print only the specified flags. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-noflags\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print information about flags. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-noident\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print watchdog identity information. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line for flags table. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Define the output columns to use in table of watchdog flags. If no output arrangement is specified, then a default set is used. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-oneline\fP -.RS 4 -Print all wanted information on one line in key="value" output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-settimeout\fP \fIseconds\fP -.RS 4 -Set the watchdog timeout in seconds. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-notimeouts\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print watchdog timeouts. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-flags\-only\fP -.RS 4 -Same as \fB\-I \-T\fP. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "," -.MTO "lennart\(atpoettering.net" "Lennart Poettering" "" -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBwdctl\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wipefs.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wipefs.8 deleted file mode 100644 index 8b479f15..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/wipefs.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,166 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: wipefs -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "WIPEFS" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -wipefs \- wipe a signature from a device -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBwipefs\fP [options] \fIdevice\fP... -.sp -\fBwipefs\fP [\fB\-\-backup\fP] \fB\-o\fP \fIoffset device\fP... -.sp -\fBwipefs\fP [\fB\-\-backup\fP] \fB\-a\fP \fIdevice\fP... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBwipefs\fP can erase filesystem, raid or partition\-table signatures (magic strings) from the specified \fIdevice\fP to make the signatures invisible for libblkid. \fBwipefs\fP does not erase the filesystem itself nor any other data from the device. -.sp -When used without any options, \fBwipefs\fP lists all visible filesystems and the offsets of their basic signatures. The default output is subject to change. So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts. Always explicitly define expected columns by using \fB\-\-output\fP \fIcolumns\-list\fP in environments where a stable output is required. -.sp -\fBwipefs\fP calls the BLKRRPART ioctl when it has erased a partition\-table signature to inform the kernel about the change. The ioctl is called as the last step and when all specified signatures from all specified devices are already erased. This feature can be used to wipe content on partitions devices as well as partition table on a disk device, for example by \fBwipefs \-a /dev/sdc1 /dev/sdc2 /dev/sdc\fP. -.sp -Note that some filesystems and some partition tables store more magic strings on the device (e.g., FAT, ZFS, GPT). The \fBwipefs\fP command (since v2.31) lists all the offset where a magic strings have been detected. -.sp -When option \fB\-a\fP is used, all magic strings that are visible for \fBlibblkid\fP(3) are erased. In this case the \fBwipefs\fP scans the device again after each modification (erase) until no magic string is found. -.sp -Note that by default \fBwipefs\fP does not erase nested partition tables on non\-whole disk devices. For this the option \fB\-\-force\fP is required. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Erase all available signatures. The set of erased signatures can be restricted with the \fB\-t\fP option. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-backup\fP -.RS 4 -Create a signature backup to the file \fI$HOME/wipefs\-<devname>\-<offset>.bak\fP. For more details see the \fBEXAMPLE\fP section. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP -.RS 4 -Force erasure, even if the filesystem is mounted. This is required in order to erase a partition\-table signature on a block device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-J\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP -.RS 4 -Use JSON output format. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-lock\fP[=\fImode\fP] -.RS 4 -Use exclusive BSD lock for device or file it operates. The optional argument \fImode\fP can be \fByes\fP, \fBno\fP (or 1 and 0) or \fBnonblock\fP. If the \fImode\fP argument is omitted, it defaults to \fB"yes"\fP. This option overwrites environment variable \fB$LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE\fP. The default is not to use any lock at all, but it\(cqs recommended to avoid collisions with udevd or other tools. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Specify which output columns to print. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-act\fP -.RS 4 -Causes everything to be done except for the \fBwrite\fP(2) call. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-offset\fP \fIoffset\fP -.RS 4 -Specify the location (in bytes) of the signature which should be erased from the device. The \fIoffset\fP number may include a "0x" prefix; then the number will be interpreted as a hex value. It is possible to specify multiple \fB\-o\fP options. -.sp -The \fIoffset\fP argument may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB"), or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-parsable\fP -.RS 4 -Print out in parsable instead of printable format. Encode all potentially unsafe characters of a string to the corresponding hex value prefixed by \(aq\(rsx\(aq. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP -.RS 4 -Suppress any messages after a successful signature wipe. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-types\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Limit the set of printed or erased signatures. More than one type may be specified in a comma\-separated list. The list or individual types can be prefixed with \(aqno\(aq to specify the types on which no action should be taken. For more details see \fBmount\fP(8). -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -LIBBLKID_DEBUG=all -.RS 4 -enables \fBlibblkid\fP(3) debug output. -.RE -.sp -LOCK_BLOCK_DEVICE=<mode> -.RS 4 -use exclusive BSD lock. The mode is "1" or "0". See \fB\-\-lock\fP for more details. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -\fBwipefs /dev/sda\fP* -.RS 4 -Prints information about sda and all partitions on sda. -.RE -.sp -\fBwipefs \-\-all \-\-backup /dev/sdb\fP -.RS 4 -Erases all signatures from the device \fI/dev/sdb\fP and creates a signature backup file \fI~/wipefs\-sdb\-<offset>.bak\fP for each signature. -.RE -.sp -\fBdd if=~/wipefs\-sdb\-0x00000438.bak of=/dev/sdb seek=$0x00000438 bs=1 conv=notrunc\fP -.RS 4 -Restores an ext2 signature from the backup file \fI~/wipefs\-sdb\-0x00000438.bak\fP. -.RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBblkid\fP(8), -\fBfindfs\fP(8) -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBwipefs\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_io.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_io.8 index ef7087b3..56abe000 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_io.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_io.8 @@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ Swaps extent forks between files. The current open file is the target. The donor file is specified by path. Note that file data is not copied (file content moves with the fork(s)). .TP -.BI "set_encpolicy [ \-c " mode " ] [ \-n " mode " ] [ \-f " flags " ] [ \-v " version " ] [ " keyspec " ]" +.BI "set_encpolicy [ \-c " mode " ] [ \-n " mode " ] [ \-f " flags " ] [ \-s " log2_dusize " ] [ \-v " version " ] [ " keyspec " ]" On filesystems that support encryption, assign an encryption policy to the current file. .I keyspec @@ -736,6 +736,9 @@ filenames encryption mode (e.g. AES-256-CTS) .BI \-f " flags" policy flags (numeric) .TP +.BI \-s " log2_dusize" +log2 of data unit size. Not supported by v1 policies. +.TP .BI \-v " version" policy version. Defaults to 1 or 2 depending on the length of .IR keyspec ; @@ -1340,6 +1343,9 @@ parameter specifies which type of metadata to repair. For AG metadata, one AG number must be specified. For file metadata, the repair is applied to the open file unless the inode number and generation number are specified. +The +.B -R +option can be specified to force rebuilding of a metadata structure. .TP .BI "label" " " "[ -c | -s " label " ] " On filesystems that support online label manipulation, get, set, or clear the diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_mdrestore.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_mdrestore.8 index 72f3b297..f60e7b56 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_mdrestore.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_mdrestore.8 @@ -5,12 +5,19 @@ xfs_mdrestore \- restores an XFS metadump image to a filesystem image .B xfs_mdrestore [ .B \-gi +] [ +.B \-l +.I logdev ] .I source .I target .br .B xfs_mdrestore .B \-i +[ +.B \-l +.I logdev +] .I source .br .B xfs_mdrestore \-V @@ -49,6 +56,11 @@ Shows metadump information on stdout. If no is specified, exits after displaying information. Older metadumps man not include any descriptive information. .TP +.BI \-l " logdev" +Metadump in v2 format can contain metadata dumped from an external log. +In such a scenario, the user has to provide a device to which the log device +contents from the metadump file are copied. +.TP .B \-V Prints the version number and exits. .SH DIAGNOSTICS diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_metadump.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_metadump.8 index c0e79d77..496b5926 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_metadump.8 +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/xfs_metadump.8 @@ -11,6 +11,9 @@ xfs_metadump \- copy XFS filesystem metadata to a file ] [ .B \-l .I logdev +] [ +.B \-v +.I version ] .I source .I target @@ -74,6 +77,12 @@ metadata such as filenames is not considered sensitive. If obfuscation is required on a metadump with a dirty log, please inform the recipient of the metadump image about this situation. .PP +The contents of an external log device can be dumped only when using the v2 +format. +Metadump in v2 format can be generated by passing the "-v 2" option. +Metadump in v2 format is generated by default if the filesystem has an +external log and the metadump version to use is not explicitly mentioned. +.PP .B xfs_metadump should not be used for any purposes other than for debugging and reporting filesystem problems. The most common usage scenario for this tool is when @@ -123,8 +132,11 @@ is stdout. .TP .BI \-l " logdev" For filesystems which use an external log, this specifies the device where the -external log resides. The external log is not copied, only internal logs are -copied. +external log resides. +If the v2 metadump format is selected, the contents of the external log will be +copied to the metadump. +The v2 metadump format will be selected automatically if this option is +specified. .TP .B \-m Set the maximum size of an allowed metadata extent. Extremely large metadata @@ -134,6 +146,11 @@ this value. The default size is 2097151 blocks. .B \-o Disables obfuscation of file names and extended attributes. .TP +.B \-v +The format of the metadump file to be produced. +Valid values are 1 and 2. +The default metadump format is 1. +.TP .B \-w Prints warnings of inconsistent metadata encountered to stderr. Bad metadata is still copied. diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/zramctl.8 b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/zramctl.8 deleted file mode 100644 index e0f1f57d..00000000 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/man8/zramctl.8 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,158 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: zramctl -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR(S)" section] -.\" Generator: Asciidoctor 2.0.15 -.\" Date: 2022-02-14 -.\" Manual: System Administration -.\" Source: util-linux 2.37.4 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "ZRAMCTL" "8" "2022-02-14" "util\-linux 2.37.4" "System Administration" -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.ss \n[.ss] 0 -.nh -.ad l -.de URL -\fI\\$2\fP <\\$1>\\$3 -.. -.als MTO URL -.if \n[.g] \{\ -. mso www.tmac -. am URL -. ad l -. . -. am MTO -. ad l -. . -. LINKSTYLE blue R < > -.\} -.SH "NAME" -zramctl \- set up and control zram devices -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -Get info: -.RS 4 -\fBzramctl\fP [options] -.RE -.sp -Reset zram: -.RS 4 -\fBzramctl\fP \fB\-r\fP \fIzramdev\fP... -.RE -.sp -Print name of first unused zram device: -.RS 4 -\fBzramctl\fP \fB\-f\fP -.RE -.sp -Set up a zram device: -.RS 4 -\fBzramctl\fP [\fB\-f\fP | \fIzramdev\fP] [\fB\-s\fP \fIsize\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fInumber\fP] [\fB\-a\fP \fIalgorithm\fP] -.RE -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -\fBzramctl\fP is used to quickly set up zram device parameters, to reset zram devices, and to query the status of used zram devices. -.sp -If no option is given, all non\-zero size zram devices are shown. -.sp -Note that \fIzramdev\fP node specified on command line has to already exist. The command \fBzramctl\fP creates a new \fI/dev/zram<N>\fP nodes only when \fB\-\-find\fP option specified. It\(cqs possible (and common) that after system boot \fI/dev/zram<N>\fP nodes are not created yet. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.sp -\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-algorithm lzo\fP|\fBlz4\fP|\fBlz4hc\fP|\fBdeflate\fP|\fB842\fP -.RS 4 -Set the compression algorithm to be used for compressing data in the zram device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-find\fP -.RS 4 -Find the first unused zram device. If a \fB\-\-size\fP argument is present, then initialize the device. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-noheadings\fP -.RS 4 -Do not print a header line in status output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-output\fP \fIlist\fP -.RS 4 -Define the status output columns to be used. If no output arrangement is specified, then a default set is used. Use \fB\-\-help\fP to get a list of all supported columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-output\-all\fP -.RS 4 -Output all available columns. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-\-raw\fP -.RS 4 -Use the raw format for status output. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-reset\fP -.RS 4 -Reset the options of the specified zram device(s). Zram device settings can be changed only after a reset. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-size\fP \fIsize\fP -.RS 4 -Create a zram device of the specified \fIsize\fP. Zram devices are aligned to memory pages; when the requested \fIsize\fP is not a multiple of the page size, it will be rounded up to the next multiple. When not otherwise specified, the unit of the \fIsize\fP parameter is bytes. -.sp -The \fIsize\fP argument may be followed by the multiplicative suffixes KiB (=1024), MiB (=1024*1024), and so on for GiB, TiB, PiB, EiB, ZiB and YiB (the "iB" is optional, e.g., "K" has the same meaning as "KiB") or the suffixes KB (=1000), MB (=1000*1000), and so on for GB, TB, PB, EB, ZB and YB. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-streams\fP \fInumber\fP -.RS 4 -Set the maximum number of compression streams that can be used for the device. The default is use all CPUs and one stream for kernels older than 4.6. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP -.RS 4 -Display version information and exit. -.RE -.sp -\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP -.RS 4 -Display help text and exit. -.RE -.SH "EXIT STATUS" -.sp -\fBzramctl\fP returns 0 on success, nonzero on failure. -.SH "FILES" -.sp -\fI/dev/zram[0..N]\fP -.RS 4 -zram block devices -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLE" -.sp -The following commands set up a zram device with a size of one gigabyte and use it as swap device. -.sp -.if n .RS 4 -.nf -.fam C - # zramctl \-\-find \-\-size 1024M - /dev/zram0 - # mkswap /dev/zram0 - # swapon /dev/zram0 - ... - # swapoff /dev/zram0 - # zramctl \-\-reset /dev/zram0 -.fam -.fi -.if n .RE -.SH "AUTHORS" -.sp -.MTO "nefelim4ag\(atgmail.com" "Timofey Titovets" "," -.MTO "kzak\(atredhat.com" "Karel Zak" "" -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -.URL "http://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git/tree/Documentation/admin\-guide/blockdev/zram.rst" "Linux kernel documentation" "" -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -.sp -For bug reports, use the issue tracker at \c -.URL "https://github.com/karelzak/util\-linux/issues" "" "." -.SH "AVAILABILITY" -.sp -The \fBzramctl\fP command is part of the util\-linux package which can be downloaded from \c -.URL "https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util\-linux/" "Linux Kernel Archive" "."
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/packages.bin.txt b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/packages.bin.txt index 78b5167c..eea1dd57 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/packages.bin.txt +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/packages.bin.txt @@ -44,8 +44,6 @@ joe kbd kmod less -libblkid-devel -libuuid-devel lilypond lz4 mingetty @@ -82,7 +80,7 @@ sed sendmail sharutils sysstat -systemd-254.9 +systemd-254.10 systemd-container systemd-coredump systemd-journal-remote @@ -93,8 +91,6 @@ tar texinfo tree usbutils -util-linux -util-linux-systemd uucp uuid-devel uuidd @@ -117,5 +113,4 @@ xset xsetroot xvidtune xwd -xz zstd diff --git a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/packages.noarch.txt b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/packages.noarch.txt index 23a6f959..601a3d7e 100644 --- a/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/packages.noarch.txt +++ b/upstream/opensuse-leap-15-6/packages.noarch.txt @@ -3,5 +3,4 @@ bash-doc coreutils-doc dnf-plugins-core man-pages -mkosi rpmlint |